Toshiba Multifunctional Digital Color Systems E Studio4500C 5500C Users Manual

: Toshiba Toshiba-Multifunctional-Digital-Color-Systems-E-Studio4500C-5500C-Users-Manual-127907 toshiba-multifunctional-digital-color-systems-e-studio4500c-5500c-users-manual-127907 toshiba pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 1120

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

SERVICE MANUAL

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS

e-STUDIO4500c/5500c

File No. SME060023C0
R060621C2200-TTEC
Ver03_2007-04

TRADEMARKS
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•

The official name of Windows 95 is Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System.
The official name of Windows 98 is Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System.
The official name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System.
The official name of Windows 2000 is Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating System.
The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT and the brand names and product names of other Microsoft products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and Mac are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. in the U.S. and other
countries.
PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
NOVELL, NetWare, and NDS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
Ricoh Corporation or other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks
of their respective companies.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission
of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION. No patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the
information contained herein.

1. CONVENTIONS
Conventions Used in this Manual
This manual uses several symbols.
Symbol










What it means
Refer to section number
See Core Tech Manual for
details
Screw
Connector
E-ring
Clip ring
Clamp

Sideways, LEF
(Long Edge Feed)

Lengthwise, SEF
(Short Edge Feed)

Cautions, Notes, etc.
The following headings provide special information:


WARNING
FAILURE TO OBEY WARNING INFORMATION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH.


CAUTION
Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries.
Important
• Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals,
loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine.
IMPORTANT
• ALWAYS OBEY THESE GUIDELINES TO AVOID SERIOUS PROBLEMS SUCH AS MISFEEDS,
DAMAGE TO ORIGINALS, LOSS OF VALUABLE DATA AND TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE
MACHINE. BOLD IS ADDED FOR EMPHASIS.

NOTE: This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the
machine.

-1-

Commonly Used Terms
In the SP tables, the finishers are referred to by number, and some devices that
appear in the SP tables are not supported overseas:
Finisher 1
Finisher 2
Z-Fold
QL
ITB
PTR
PCU
IDU
SBU
NIB
STC
TD
ADS
M/A
MUSIC
DFU
EM

3000/2000-Sheet Finisher B700/B701. The B700 supports corner stapling,
booklet stapling and booklet folding. The B701 supports corner stapling only.
3000-Sheet Finisher B706.
This refers to the Z-Folding unit. The copier does not support this peripheral
device at this time. Please ignore references to "Z-Fold" in the SP tables.
Quenching Lamp
Image Transfer Belt
Paper Transfer Roller
Photoconductor Unit
Image Discrimination Unit
Sensor Board Unit
Network Interface Board
Soft Toner Cartridge
Toner Density
Auto image Density Selection
Mass per Area
Mirror Unit Skew Interval Correction
Design or Factory Use (Denote: Do not change the value.)
Emergency Maintenance

-2-

2. GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
For your safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product.
Keep this manual handy for future reference.
Safety Information
Always obey the following safety precautions when using this product.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.


 WARNING
A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning
could result in death or serious injury.


CAUTION
A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution
could result in minor or moderate injury or damage to the machine or other
property.
Switches and Symbols
Where symbols are used on or near switches on machines for Europe and other
areas, the meaning of each symbol conforms with IEC60417.
ON
OFF
Push ON/Push OFF

STANDBY
SAFE-SYM.WMF

-3-

2.1 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE SERVICE ENGINEER
2.1.1 SERVICE ENGINEER
Maintenance shall be done only by trained service engineers who have completed
service training for the machine and all optional devices designed for use with the
machine.

2.1.2 REFERENCE MATERIAL FOR MAINTENANCE
Maintenance shall be done using the special tools and procedures prescribed for
maintenance of the machine described in the reference materials (service manuals,
technical bulletins, operating instructions, and safety guidelines for service
engineers).
In regard to other safety issues not described in this document, all service
engineers shall strictly obey procedures and recommendations described the “CE
Safety Guide”.
Use only consumable supplies and replacement parts designed for use of the
machine.

-4-

2.2 BEFORE INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE
2.2.1 SHIPPING AND MOVING THE MACHINE


CAUTION
1. Work carefully when lifting or moving the machine. If the machine is heavy,
two or more service engineers may be required to prevent injuries (muscle
strains, spinal injuries, etc.) or damage to the machine if it is dropped or
tipped over.
2. Personnel moving or working around the machine should always wear proper
clothing and footwear. Never wear loose fitting clothing or accessories
(neckties, loose sweaters, bracelets, etc. ) or casual footwear (slippers,
sandals, etc.) when lifting or moving the machine.
3. Always unplug the power cord from the power source before you move the
product. Before you move the product, arrange the power cord so it will not
fall under the product.
4. Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the doors, ARDF) when
transporting the copier.
5. The copier is quite heavy and weighs approximately 298 kg (655.6 lb.),
therefore pay full attention when handling it.
6. When transporting/installing the equipment, employ four persons.

2.2.2 POWER
Warning
1. Always disconnect the power plug before doing any maintenance procedure.
After switching off the machine, power is still supplied to the main machine
and other devices. To prevent electrical shock, switch the machine off, wait
for a few seconds, then unplug the machine from the power source.
2. Before you do any checks or adjustments after turning the machine off, work
carefully to avoid injury. After removing covers or opening the machine to do
checks or adjustments, never touch electrical components or moving parts
(gears, timing belts, etc.).
3. After turning the machine on with any cover removed, keep your hands away
from electrical components and moving parts. Never touch the cover of the
fusing unit, gears, timing belts, etc.
4. Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 120 V / 20 A for its power source.

-5-

2.2.3 INSTALLATION, DISASSEMBLY, AND ADJUSTMENTS


CAUTION
1. After installation, maintenance, or adjustment, always check the operation of
the machine to make sure that it is operating normally. This ensures that all
shipping materials, protective materials, wires and tags, metal brackets, etc.,
removed for installation, have been removed and that no tools remain inside
the machine. This also ensures that all release interlock switches have been
restored to normal operation.
2. Never use your fingers to check moving parts causing spurious noise. Never
use your fingers to lubricate moving parts while the machine is operating.
3. When the parts are disassembled, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly
unless otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful
not to install small parts such as screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers
in the wrong places.
4. Basically, the equipment should not be operated with any parts removed or
disassembled.
5. Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation when the
service is finished.
6. Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very
sharp edges underneath.

2.2.4 SPECIAL TOOLS


CAUTION
1. Use only standard tools approved for machine maintenance.
2. For special adjustments, use only the special tools and lubricants described
in the service manual. Using tools incorrectly, or using tools that could
damage parts, could damage the machine or cause injuries.

-6-

2.3 DURING MAINTENANCE
2.3.1 GENERAL


CAUTION
1. Before you begin a maintenance procedure:
• Switch the machine off.
• Disconnect the power plug from the power source.
• Allow the machine to cool for at least 10 minutes.
2. Avoid touching the components inside the machine that are labeled as hot
surfaces.
3. Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp,
heater and fuser unit areas around them.
4. Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer belt,
developer, high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp, inverter for the LCD
back-light and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components
should not be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors,
etc. on them even after the power is turned OFF.
5. Be very careful to treat the touch panel gently and never hit it. Breaking the
surface could cause malfunctions.

2.3.2 SAFETY DEVICES


 WARNING
1. Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always
replace safety devices immediately.
2. Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device.
Modification or removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a
fire and personal injury. Always test the operation of the machine to ensure
that it is operating normally and safely after removal and replacement of any
safety device.
3. For replacements use only the correct fuses or circuit breakers rated for use
with the machine. Using replacement devices not designed for use with the
machine could lead to a fire and personal injuries.
4. During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels such
as “CAUTION. HOT”, “CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE”, “CAUTION. LASER
BEAM”, etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and if they are properly
stuck to the equipment.

-7-

2.3.3 ORGANIC CLEANERS


CAUTION
1. During preventive maintenance, never use any organic cleaners (alcohol,
etc.) other than those described in the service manual.
2. Make sure the room is well ventilated before using any organic cleaner. Use
organic solvents in small amounts to avoid breathing the fumes and
becoming nauseous.
3. Switch the machine off, unplug it, and allow it to cool before doing preventive
maintenance. To avoid fire or explosion, never use an organic cleaner near
any part that generates heat.
4. Wash your hands thoroughly after cleaning parts with an organic cleaner to
contamination of food, drinks, etc. which could cause illness.
5. Clean the floor completely after accidental spillage of silicone oil or other
materials to prevent slippery surfaces that could cause accidents leading to
hand or leg injuries. Use “My Ace” Silicone Oil Remover (or dry rags) to soak
up spills. For more details, please refer to Technical Bulletin “Silicone Oil
Removal” (A024-50).

2.3.4 LITHIUM BATTERIES


WARNING
1. Always replace a lithium battery on a PCB with the same type of battery
prescribed for use on that board. Replacing a lithium battery with any type
other than the one prescribed for use on the board could lead to an explosion
or damage to the PCB.
2. Never discard used batteries by mixing them with other trash. Remove them
from the work site and dispose of them in accordance with local laws and
regulations regarding the disposal of such items.

2.3.5 OZONE FILTERS


CAUTION
1. Always replace ozone filters as soon as their service life expires (as
described in the service manual). An excessive amount of ozone can build up
around machines that use ozone filters if they are not replaced at the
prescribed time. Excessive ozone could cause personnel working around the
machine to feel unwell.
2. Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of
ozone.

-8-

2.3.6 POWER PLUG AND POWER CORD


WARNING
1. Before serving the machine (especially when responding to a service call),
always make sure that the power plug has been inserted completely into the
power source. A partially inserted plug could lead to heat generation (due to
a power surge caused by high resistance) and cause a fire or other problems.
2. Always check the power plug and make sure that it is free of dust and lint.
Clean it if necessary. A dirty plug can generate heat which could cause a fire.
3. Inspect the length of the power cord for cuts or other damage. Replace the
power cord if necessary. A frayed or otherwise damaged power cord can
cause a short circuit which could lead to a fire or personal injury from
electrical shock.
4. Check the length of the power cord between the machine and power supply.
Make sure the power cord is not coiled or wrapped around any object such
as a table leg. Coiling the power cord can cause excessive heat to build up
and could cause a fire.
5. Make sure that the area around the power source is free of obstacles so the
power cord can be removed quickly in case of an emergency.
6. Make sure that the power cord is grounded (earthed) at the power source
with the ground wire on the plug.
7. Connect the power cord directly into the power source. Never use an
extension cord.
8. When you disconnect the power plug from the power source, always pull on
the plug, not the cable.
9. The copier shall be installed near the socket outlet and shall be accessible.
10. Be sure to fix and plug in the power cord securely after the installation so that
no one trips over it.

-9-

2.4 AFTER INSTALLATION, SERVICING
2.4.1 DISPOSAL OF USED ITEMS


WARNING
Never incinerate used toner or toner cartridges. Toner or toner cartridges thrown
into a fire can ignite or explode and cause serious injury. At the work site always
carefully wrap used toner and toner cartridges with plastic bags to avoid spillage
before disposal or removal.


CAUTION
1. Always dispose of used items (developer, toner, toner cartridges, OPC
drums, packing materials, used batteries, IC-RAMs including lithium
batteries, etc.) follow the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of
such items.
2. To protect the environment, never dispose of this product or any kind of
waste from consumables at a household waste collection point. Dispose of
these items at one of our dealers or at an authorized collection site.
3. Return used selenium drums to the service center for handling in accordance
with company policy regarding the recycling or disposal of such items.
Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to
this manual.
Attention:
Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium
selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der LithiumBatterie) nach diesem Handbuch.

- 10 -

2.4.2 POINTS TO CONFIRM WITH OPERATORS
At the end of installation or a service call, instruct the user about use of the
machine. Emphasize the following points.
• Show operators how to remove jammed paper and troubleshoot other minor
problems by following the procedures described in the operating instructions.
• Point out the parts inside the machine that they should never touch or attempt to
remove.
• Confirm that operators know how to store and dispose of consumables.
• Make sure that all operators have access to an operating instruction manual for
the machine.
• Confirm that operators have read and understand all the safety instructions
described in the operating instructions.
• Demonstrate how to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling
the plug, not the cord) if any of the following events occur:
1) Something has spilled into the product.
2) Service or repair of the product is necessary.
3) The product cover has been damaged.
• Caution operators about removing paper fasteners around the machine. They
should never allow paper clips, staples, or any other small metallic objects to fall
into the machine.

- 11 -

2.5 SPECIAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR TONER
This section describes information for users in regard to the use of toner.

2.6 ACCIDENTAL PHYSICAL EXPOSURE

CAUTION
1. Work carefully when removing paper jams or replacing toner bottles or
cartridges to avoid spilling toner on clothing or the hands.
2. If toner is inhaled, immediately gargle with large amounts of cold water and
move to a well ventilated location. If there are signs of irritation or other
problems, seek medical attention.
3. If toner gets on the skin, wash immediately with soap and cold running water.
4. If toner gets into the eyes, flush the eyes with cold running water or eye
wash. If there are signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
5. If toner is swallowed, drink a large amount of cold water to dilute the ingested
toner. If there are signs of any problem, seek medical attention.
6. If toner spills on clothing, wash the affected area immediately with soap and
cold water. Never use hot water! Hot water can cause toner to set and
permanently stain fabric.

2.7 HANDLING AND STORING TONER

WARNING
Toner, used toner, and developer are extremely flammable. Never store toner,
developer, toner cartridges, or toner bottles (including empty toner bottles or
cartridges) in a location where they will be exposed to high temperature or an
open flame.


CAUTION
1. Always store toner and developer supplies such as toner and developer
packages, cartridges, and bottles (including used toner and empty bottles
and cartridges) out of the reach of children.
2. Always store fresh toner supplies or empty bottles or cartridges in a cool, dry
location that is not exposed to direct sunlight.

- 12 -

2.8 TONER DISPOSAL

WARNING
1. Never attempt to incinerate toner, used toner, or empty toner containers
(bottles or cartridges). Burning toner can explode and scatter, causing
serious burns.
2. Always wrap used toner and empty toner bottles and cartridges in plastic
bags to avoid spillage. Follow the local laws and regulations regarding the
disposal of such items.
3. Dispose of used toner and toner cartridges at one of our dealers or at an
authorized collection site. Always dispose of used toner cartridges and toner
bottles in accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the
disposal of such items.

- 13 -

2.8.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THIS MACHINE


IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES
PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are
supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS
1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.
2. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes
by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye
drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS
1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course on
those models.
2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can
explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical
one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Do not
recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in accordance
with local regulations.

- 14 -

SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL
1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly
when exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in
accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not
put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.

LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of
laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired
in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is
replaceable in the field by a qualified Service engineer. The laser chassis is not
repairable in the field. Service engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis
and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the
optical subsystem is required.


WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.


WARNING
WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the
procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can
seriously damage your eyes.
Caution Label:

- 15 -


WARNING
1. Avoid expose to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser
diode. Be sure not to expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert
reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver on the laser beam path.
Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting
service.
2. Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially
dangerous places such as laser beam exit of the laser optical unit.

- 16 -

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION ...........................................................................1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1
1.1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT .........................................................1-1
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................1-2
1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS...............................................1-3
1.1.4 DIMENSIONS ...................................................................................1-4
1.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-5
1.2 COPIER AND PERIPHERALS ..................................................................1-6
1.3 COPIER e-STUD4500c/5500c...................................................................1-7
1.3.1 ACCESSORIES ................................................................................1-7
1.3.2 INSTALLATION ................................................................................1-8
Tapes and packing material ..................................................................1-8
Shipping Retainer Removal ................................................................1-12
Developer Cartridge Installation..........................................................1-15
Reassemble the PCU..........................................................................1-20
Reattach the Face Plate......................................................................1-22
Remove the Retainers in the Drawer Unit...........................................1-23
Reinstall the Toner Hopper .................................................................1-26
STC (Soft Toner Cartridge) Installation ...............................................1-27
Make the Machine Level .....................................................................1-28
Attach the PCU Stand Rack................................................................1-29
Attach Decals......................................................................................1-30
Initializing Developer and Toner..........................................................1-31
Load the Paper Trays..........................................................................1-33
Make a Test Color Print ......................................................................1-33
ACC (Automatic Color Calibration) Adjustment...................................1-33
Counter Display Setting ......................................................................1-35
Print an SMC Report ...........................................................................1-35
Connect the Upper and Lower Tray Heaters.......................................1-36
1.3.3 BREAKER SWITCH TEST PROCEDURE......................................1-37
How to Test the Electrical Breaker Switch ..........................................1-37
To return the switch to the ON position: ..............................................1-38
1.4 COPY TRAY (B756) ................................................................................1-39
1.4.1 ACCESSORIES ..............................................................................1-39
1.4.2 INSTALLATION ..............................................................................1-40
1.5 A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331) ................................................1-43
1.5.1 ACCESSORIES ..............................................................................1-43
1.5.2 INSTALLATION ..............................................................................1-44
1.6 LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699)........................................................1-49
1.6.1 ACCESSORIES ..............................................................................1-49
LCT (B473) .........................................................................................1-49
LCT Adapter (B699) ............................................................................1-50

i

1.6.2 INSTALLATION ..............................................................................1-51
Removing Tape and Accessories........................................................1-51
LCT Adapter (B699) Installation..........................................................1-52
LCT Installation ...................................................................................1-53
LCT (B473): Paper size change from A4 to 8 1/2” x 11” (LT) .............1-56
1.7 8 1/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474) ............................................1-59
1.7.1 ACCESSORIES ..............................................................................1-59
1.7.2 INSTALLATION ..............................................................................1-60
LCT Connected to the Machine ..........................................................1-60
1.8 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)..........................................1-63
1.8.1 ACCESSORIES ..............................................................................1-63
1.8.2 INSTALLATION ..............................................................................1-64
Removing Tapes and Packing Materials.............................................1-65
Docking the Finisher to the Copier......................................................1-67
Attaching the Trays .............................................................................1-70
Leveling the Finisher ...........................................................................1-71
Support tray ........................................................................................1-72
Selecting the Staple Supply Name......................................................1-73
Enabling Booklet Binding (B700 Only) ................................................1-73
1.9 PUNCH UNIT (B702)...............................................................................1-74
1.9.1 ACCESSORIES ..............................................................................1-74
1.9.2 INSTALLATION ..............................................................................1-75
1.10 MAIL BOX (B762) ..................................................................................1-78
1.10.1 ACCESSORIES ............................................................................1-78
1.10.2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................1-79
1.11 3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698) ............1-82
1.11.1 ACCESSORIES ............................................................................1-82
3000-Sheet Finisher B706 Accessories ..............................................1-82
Finisher Adapter Kit B698 Accessories ...............................................1-83
1.11.2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................1-84
Shipping tape and retainers ................................................................1-84
Finisher Adapter Kit B698 Installation .................................................1-86
Finisher Installation .............................................................................1-90
Selecting the Staple Supply Name......................................................1-93
Stopper bracket (Co-packed with B695) Installation ...........................1-93
1.12 PUNCH UNIT B531 ...............................................................................1-95
1.12.1 ACCESSORIES ............................................................................1-95
1.12.2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................1-96
1.13 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703/B513) ...............................................1-100
1.13.1 ACCESSORIES ..........................................................................1-101
1.13.2 INSTALLATION ..........................................................................1-100

ii

1.14 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) .................................................1-103
1.14.1 ACCESSORIES ..........................................................................1-102
1.14.2 INSTALLATION ..........................................................................1-104
Removing Tapes and Packing Materials...........................................1-104
Preparing the Finisher (B700/B701/B706) ........................................1-105
Attaching the Extensions for the B706 ..............................................1-106
Attaching the Extensions for the B700/B701.....................................1-109
Attaching the Interposer Tray (B700/B701/B706) .............................1-110
Attaching the Corner Plates for the B706..........................................1-111
Docking Finisher/Interposer with the Machine (B700/B701/B706) ....1-113
1.15 MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS...........................................................1-115
1.15.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................1-115
1.15.2 ACCESSORY CARDS................................................................1-116
1.15.3 APPLICATIONS PROVIDED ON SD CARDS ............................1-117
1.15.4 HANDLING DIMMS AND SD CARDS ........................................1-118
DIMMs...............................................................................................1-118
SD cards ...........................................................................................1-118
1.15.5 MERGING APPLICATIONS ON ONE SD CARD........................1-119
Overview ...........................................................................................1-119
Merging Applications.........................................................................1-120
Undo Exec ........................................................................................1-121
Storing SD Application Cards on Site................................................1-122
1.15.6 PRINTER/SCANNER UNIT GM-2100 (N737) ............................1-123
Accessories.......................................................................................1-123
Installation.........................................................................................1-124
USB SP Settings ...............................................................................1-126
1.15.7 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE 3260 (B761) ..................................1-127
Accessory Check .............................................................................1-127
1.16.8 DATAOVERWRITESECURITY UNIT TYPE C (B735)................1-128
Accessory Check ..............................................................................1-128
Before You Begin… ..........................................................................1-128
Seal Check And Removal .................................................................1-129
Installation Procedure .......................................................................1-130
1.15.9 COPY CONNECTOR TYPE 3260 (B328) ..................................1-132
1.15.10 EFI PRINTER CONTROLLER (G815) .....................................1-134

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ...................................................2-1
2.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................2-1
2.2 PM COUNTER...........................................................................................2-2
2.2.1 DISPLAYING THE PM COUNTER ...................................................2-2
2.2.2 PM PARTS SCREEN DETAILS........................................................2-3
All PM Parts list: Main Menu .................................................................2-3
Number button submenu.......................................................................2-4
Parts list for PM yield indicator..............................................................2-5
2.3 PM TABLES...............................................................................................2-6
2.3.1 MAIN MACHINE ...............................................................................2-6
Copier PM Parts....................................................................................2-6
ARDF PM Parts...................................................................................2-10

iii

2.3.2 2000/3000-SHEET BOOKLET FINISHER B700/B701....................2-11
2.3.3 PUNCH B702..................................................................................2-11
2.3.4 3000-SHEET FINISHER B706........................................................2-11
2.3.5 PUNCH B531..................................................................................2-11
2.3.6 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704 ...............................................2-12
2.3.7 LCT B473........................................................................................2-12
2.4 LUBRICATION POINTS ..........................................................................2-13
2.4.1 COPIER ..........................................................................................2-13
OPC, ITB Replacement.......................................................................2-13
Fusing Unit..........................................................................................2-14

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................3-1
3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS ..............................................................................3-1
3.1.1 DRUM ...............................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 PCU .................................................................................................3-1
3.1.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT ...................................................................3-2
3.1.4 SCANNER UNIT ...............................................................................3-2
3.1.5 LASER UNIT.....................................................................................3-2
3.1.6 DEVELOPMENT...............................................................................3-3
3.1.7 CLEANING .......................................................................................3-4
3.1.8 FUSING UNIT ...................................................................................3-4
3.1.9 PAPER FEED ...................................................................................3-4
3.1.10 USED TONER (WASTE TONER)...................................................3-4
3.2 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES .....................................................3-5
3.2.1 ARDF ................................................................................................3-5
3.2.2 OPERATION PANEL, TOP COVERS...............................................3-6
3.2.3 LEFT COVERS .................................................................................3-7
3.2.4 FRONT DOOR..................................................................................3-8
3.2.5 RIGHT COVERS...............................................................................3-9
3.2.6 REAR COVERS..............................................................................3-10
3.2.7 TONER HOPPER, FACEPLATE, PCU...........................................3-11
Removing Toner Hopper, Face plate, PCU.........................................3-11
Reinstalling PCU, Face plate, Toner Hopper ......................................3-15
3.2.8 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT...............................................................3-18
3.2.9 DRAWER UNIT...............................................................................3-20
3.2.10 DUPLEX UNIT ..............................................................................3-22
3.2.11 OPENING AND LOCKING THE CONTROLLER BOX COVER....3-23
3.2.12 SD CARD STORAGE ...................................................................3-24
3.3 SCANNER UNIT......................................................................................3-25
3.3.1 EXPOSURE GLASS .......................................................................3-25
3.3.2 LENS BLOCK, PAPER SIZE SENSORS........................................3-26
3.3.3 EXPOSURE LAMP .........................................................................3-27
3.3.4 SCANNER MOTOR ........................................................................3-28
3.3.5 SCANNER HP SENSOR ................................................................3-29
3.3.6 SCANNER INTERFACE BOARD (SIOB) .......................................3-30
3.3.7 SCANNER WIRE ............................................................................3-31
Scanner Wire Removal .......................................................................3-31
Scanner Wire Reinstallation and Scanner Position Adjustment ..........3-32
3.4 LASER UNIT............................................................................................3-34
iv

3.4.1 CAUTION DECALS ........................................................................3-34
3.4.2 POLYGON MOTOR........................................................................3-35
3.4.3 LASER UNIT...................................................................................3-36
Adjustments After Laser Unit Replacement ........................................3-39
3.4.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR....................................3-40
3.5 PCU (POTO CONDUCTOR UNITS) .......................................................3-41
3.5.1 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT ......................................................3-41
3.5.2 DEVELOPMENT GEARS ...............................................................3-49
3.5.3 CHARGE ROLLER UNIT................................................................3-50
3.5.4 DRUM AND CLEANING BLADE.....................................................3-51
Removing the OPC Drum ...................................................................3-51
Removing the Cleaning Blade.............................................................3-52
3.5.5 PCU CLEANING UNIT....................................................................3-54
3.5.6 TD SENSOR...................................................................................3-56
3.5.7 AFTER REPLACING THE PCU COMPONENTS
AND DEVELOPER .........................................................................3-57
3.6 TONER SUPPLY UNIT ...........................................................................3-59
3.6.1 STC PORT CLEANING ..................................................................3-59
3.6.2 CONNECTOR BOARD (CNB) ........................................................3-60
3.6.3 TONER PUMP ................................................................................3-61
3.6.4 TONER END SENSOR...................................................................3-62
3.6.5 TONER HOPPER MOTOR.............................................................3-63
3.7 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT .......................................................................3-64
3.7.1 RELAY SENSOR.............................................................................3-64
3.7.2 DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION SENSOR,
REGISTRATION SENSOR..............................................................3-65
3.7.3 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT...............................................................3-66
3.7.4 PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER, DISCHARGE PLATE .....................3-68
3.7.5 LUBRICANT BAR ............................................................................3-69
3.7.6 CLEANING BLADE..........................................................................3-70
3.7.7 PTR CLEANING BRUSH ROLLER .................................................3-71
3.7.8 PAPER TRANSPORT BELT, SEPARATION POWER PACK ........3-72
3.7.9 REGISTRATION MOTOR ...............................................................3-73
3.7.10 DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION LED...............................................3-74
3.8 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT........................................................................3-75
3.8.1 ITB (Image Transfer Belt), BELT CLEANING UNIT ........................3-75
Disassembly and ITB Replacement ....................................................3-75
Reassembly of the Image ITB Unit and Belt Cleaning Unit .................3-77
Dusting the ITB with Lubricant Powder ...............................................3-79
3.8.2 ITB CLEANING BLADE, DUST COLLECTION UNIT .....................3-81
3.8.3 ITB CLEANING ROLLER, SCRAPER BLADE................................3-82
3.8.4 MUSIC AND ID SENSORS.............................................................3-83
3.8.5 IMAGE TRANSFER POWER PACK...............................................3-84
3.8.6 BELT POSITION SENSORS ..........................................................3-85
3.9 FUSING UNIT..........................................................................................3-86
3.9.1 FUSING BELT STRIPPERS ...........................................................3-86
3.9.2 FUSING UNIT .................................................................................3-87
3.9.3 FUSING EXIT SENSOR, ACCORDION JAM SENSOR .................3-88
3.9.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOSTATS, THERMISTOR ...............3-89
v

3.9.5 FUSING CLEANING UNIT..............................................................3-90
3.9.6 FUSING BELT THERMOSTATS ....................................................3-91
3.9.7 FUSING THERMISTORS, HEATING ROLLER
TEMPERATURE SENSOR..............................................................3-92
3.9.8 FUSING BELT LUBRICATION ROLLER, CLEANING ROLLER ....3-93
3.9.9 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING FELT ROLLER.........................3-94
3.9.10 HOT ROLLER, HEATING ROLLER FUSING LAMPS ..................3-96
3.9.11 PRESSURE ROLLER FUSING LAMP..........................................3-98
3.9.12 HEATING ROLLER, FUSING BELT, HOT ROLLER ....................3-99
3.9.13 PRESSURE ROLLER.................................................................3-102
3.9.14 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER ..............................................3-103
3.10 DUPLEX UNIT .....................................................................................3-104
3.10.1 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR ....................................................3-104
3.10.2 DUPLEX TRANSPORT MOTOR ................................................3-105
3.10.3 DUPLEX UNIT SENSORS..........................................................3-106
Duplex Entrance Sensor ...................................................................3-106
Transport Sensor 1, 2, Inverter Exit Sensor ......................................3-107
Transport Sensor 3 ...........................................................................3-109
3.10.4 DUPLEX JOGGER MOTOR .......................................................3-110
3.10.5 DUPLEX JOGGER BELT ...........................................................3-111
3.11 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) ...................................................................3-112
3.11.1 TANDEM TRAY ..........................................................................3-112
3.11.2 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT .................3-114
3.11.3 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT ...........................3-115
3.11.4 TANDEM RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT .....3-116
3.11.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT..........................3-117
3.11.6 TANDEM TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE....................................3-119
3.12 PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3)................................................................3-122
3.12.1 PICKUP, FEED, SEPARATION ROLLERS ................................3-122
3.12.2 FEED UNIT .................................................................................3-123
3.12.3 SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT................3-125
3.12.4 PAPER END, TRAY LIFT, PAPER FEED SENSORS ................3-126
3.12.5 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR ...........................................3-127
3.13 BYPASS UNIT .....................................................................................3-128
3.13.1 BYPASS PICK-UP, FEED, SEPARATION ROLLERS................3-128
3.13.2 BYPASS AUTO PAPER SIZE DETECTION SWITCHES ...........3-129
3.13.3 BYPASS UNIT ............................................................................3-130
3.13.4 BYPASS PAPER END SENSOR, FEED SENSOR ....................3-131
3.13.5 BYPASS FEED CLUTCH ...........................................................3-132
3.14 BOARDS..............................................................................................3-133
3.14.1 CONTROLLER UNIT ..................................................................3-133
3.14.2 CONTROLLER BOARD, 256 MB MEMORY, NVRAM ...............3-134
3.14.3 NVRAM REPLACEMENT ...........................................................3-135
Upload NVRAM Data -> SD Card .....................................................3-135
Replace NVRAM ...............................................................................3-135
Restore NVRAM Data to the New NVRAM .......................................3-135
3.14.4 CONTROLLER BOX COVER, BICU, IOB ..................................3-136
3.14.5 RDS BOARD, JUMPER..............................................................3-138
3.14.6 INTERFACE BOARD, MOTHER BOARD...................................3-139
vi

3.14.7 HVPS, PFC BOARD ...................................................................3-140
3.14.8 PSU ............................................................................................3-141
3.14.9 AC DRIVE BOARD .....................................................................3-142
3.14.10 TRANSFER MOTOR, DRIVE, DRIVE MOTOR BOARDS ........3-143
3.15 HDD UNIT............................................................................................3-144
Disposal of HDD Units ......................................................................3-145
Reinstallation ....................................................................................3-145
3.16 MOTORS .............................................................................................3-146
3.16.1 PCU MOTOR, DRUM MOTOR ...................................................3-146
3.16.2 PAPER TRANSFER MOTOR .....................................................3-148
3.16.3 IMAGE TRANSFER MOTOR......................................................3-149
3.16.4 WASTE TONER TRANSPORT MOTOR, WASTE TONER
DISTRIBUTION MOTOR ............................................................3-150
3.16.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR (TRAYS 1, 2, 3) .......................3-151
3.16.6 ITB DRIVE MOTOR ....................................................................3-152
3.17 AIR FILTERS .......................................................................................3-153
3.17.1 TONER HOPPER FILTER..........................................................3-153
3.17.2 OZONE FILTER, DUST FILTERS ..............................................3-154
3.17.3 SCANNER FILTER .....................................................................3-155
3.18 ARDF...................................................................................................3-156
3.18.1 ARDF COVERS ..........................................................................3-156
3.18.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT...............................................................3-157
3.18.3 FEED BELT, PICK-UP ROLLER.................................................3-158
3.18.4 BOTTOM PLATE POSITION SENSOR ......................................3-159
3.18.5 INTERVAL, ORIGINAL WIDTH, SKEW
CORRECTION SEPARATION SENSORS ................................3-160
3.18.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS.................................................3-161
3.18.7 COVER OPEN, ORIGINAL SET, BOTTOM PLATE,
PICK-UP ROLLER HP, UPPER INVERTER SENSORS ............3-162
3.18.8 ARDF POSITION SENSOR, APS START SENSOR ..................3-164
3.18.9 ORIGINAL REGISTRATION, EXIT SENSORS...........................3-165
3.18.10 ARDF SEPARATION ROLLER.................................................3-167
3.18.11 ARDF TRANSPORT BELT .......................................................3-168
Removing the ARDF Transport Belt Assembly .................................3-168
Removing the Belt.............................................................................3-169
Reinstalling the Belt ..........................................................................3-171
Reattaching the White Cover ............................................................3-172
3.18.12 ARDF CONTROL BOARD........................................................3-173
3.18.13 ARDF BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR.....................................3-174
3.18.14 ARDF FEED MOTOR, ARDF TRANSPORT MOTOR ..............3-175
3.18.15 ARDF PICK-UP ROLLER LIFT MOTOR...................................3-176
3.19 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................3-177
3.19.1 SCANNING .................................................................................3-177
Scanner sub-scan magnification .......................................................3-177
Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration ..........................3-177
Main scan dot position correction......................................................3-178

vii

3.19.2 ARDF ..........................................................................................3-179
ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration..............................3-179
3.19.3 REGISTRATION .........................................................................3-180
Image Area .......................................................................................3-180
Leading Edge....................................................................................3-180
Side to Side.......................................................................................3-180
Adjustment Standards.......................................................................3-180
Paper Registration Standard.............................................................3-180
Adjustment Procedure.......................................................................3-181
3.19.4 COLOR REGISTRATION ...........................................................3-182
Forced MUSIC Adjustment ...............................................................3-182
Adjustment of Line Speed for Thick Paper........................................3-182
Color Registration Test and Error Adjustment...................................3-182
3.19.5 SKEW ADJUSTMENT AFTER LASER UNIT REPLACEMENT..3-183
3.19.6 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION.............................................3-185
Copy Mode........................................................................................3-185
Printer Mode .....................................................................................3-189
Adjustment Reference For Gamma Correction .................................3-190
3.20 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION .......................................................3-191

4. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................4-1
4.1 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD ..........................................................................4-1
4.1.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................4-1
4.1.2 RECOVERY METHODS...................................................................4-1
4.1.3 DOWNLOAD ERROR CODES .........................................................4-2
4.1.4 IMPORTANT SP CODES .................................................................4-5
4.2 SPECIAL PROCEDURES .........................................................................4-6
4.2.1 SP2181 030 (ALIGNMENT RESULT) ERRORS...............................4-6
4.2.2 COLOR REGISTRATION ERROR ADJUSTMENT ........................4-10
Color Registration Error Correction .....................................................4-10
Color Skew Error Correction ...............................................................4-12
Overall Check .....................................................................................4-13
Color Registration at the Left and Right Folds of the Test Pattern ......4-13
4.2.3 SP3812 001 (DevSetup Execute) ERRORS...................................4-15
4.2.4 PROCESS CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING...............................4-16
Summary of Process Control SC Codes .............................................4-16
Process Control Self-Check: SP3821 .................................................4-17
4.2.5 COLOR ADJUSTMENT FOR CONNECTED COPIERS.................4-23
4.3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS................................................................4-25
4.3.1 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK..................................................4-25
4.3.2 SERIES SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS.........................................4-26

viii

4.3.3 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS............................................................4-27
SC codes Group 1: Scanning..............................................................4-28
SC codes Group 2: Exposure .............................................................4-30
SC codes Group 3: Image Development - 1 .......................................4-37
SC codes Group 4: Image Development - 2 .......................................4-42
SC codes Group 5: Paper Feed..........................................................4-47
SC codes Group 6: Device Communication........................................4-55
SC codes Group 7: Peripherals ..........................................................4-58
SC800: Overall System.......................................................................4-65
SC900: Miscellaneous ........................................................................4-71
4.3.4 ADDITIONAL SC CODES PRINTED IN SMC REPORTS ..............4-75
4.4 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS...............................................................4-76
4.4.1 TRAY PAPER SIZE SETTING........................................................4-76
SYMPTOM: ........................................................................................4-76
CAUSE: ..............................................................................................4-76
ACTION: ............................................................................................4-76
4.4.2 PAPER MISFEED (J098/099) ........................................................4-77
SYMPTOM: ........................................................................................4-77
CAUSE: ..............................................................................................4-77
ACTION: ............................................................................................4-78
How to Change the “Paper Thickness” and “Paper Type” Settings: ...4-79
How to Change the “Paper Type Detect” or
“Double Feed Detect” Settings: ..........................................................4-79
4.4.3 PAPER FEED SKEW......................................................................4-80
SYMPTOM: ........................................................................................4-80
CAUSE: ..............................................................................................4-80
SOLUTION: ........................................................................................4-80
HOW TO CHECK THE POSITION OF THE REAR REGISTRATION
PRESSURE SPRING: ........................................................................4-80
4.4.4 WHITE LINE IN SUB-SCAN DIRECTION ON SINGLE COLOR
SOLID IMAGE ................................................................................4-84
SYMPTOM: ........................................................................................4-84
CAUSE: ..............................................................................................4-84
ACTION: ............................................................................................4-84
4.4.5 DIRTY BLACK LINE IN SUB-SCAN DIRECTION OR DIRTY
BACKGROUND ............................................................................4-85
SYMPTOM: ........................................................................................4-85
CAUSE: ..............................................................................................4-85
ACTION: ............................................................................................4-85
APPENDIX: ........................................................................................4-89
4.4.6 EXPANDED SOFT TONER CARTRIDGE ......................................4-90
SYMPTOM: ........................................................................................4-90
CAUSE: ..............................................................................................4-90
ACTION: ............................................................................................4-90
4.4.7 SYTEM STOP CONTROL DUE TO THE TEMPERATURE
LIMITATION ..................................................................................4-91
OVERVIEW: .......................................................................................4-91
ACTION: ............................................................................................4-91

ix

4.4.8 LOW PAWER MODE TEMPERATURE ..........................................4-92
SYMPTOM: ........................................................................................4-92
CAUSE: ..............................................................................................4-92
ACTION: ............................................................................................4-92
4.4.9 POOR FUSING ON 100g/m2 PAPER .............................................4-94
SYMPTOM: ........................................................................................4-94
CAUSE: ..............................................................................................4-94
SOLUTION: ........................................................................................4-94
ACTION: ............................................................................................4-94
IMPORTANT: .....................................................................................4-94
Final Solution: Middle Thickness Paper Mode ...................................4-95
APPENDIX: ........................................................................................4-99
4.4.10 ABNORMAL SHIFT TRAY MOVEMENT OF SR842 (B706) WITH
EFI PRINTER CONTROLLER (E-7000) .......................................4-100
SYMPTOM: ......................................................................................4-100
CAUSE: ............................................................................................4-100
SOLUTION: ......................................................................................4-100
4.4.11 POOR FUSING ON 100G/M2 PAPER.........................................4-101
SYMPTOM:.......................................................................................4-101
CAUSE and SOLUTION: ..................................................................4-102
Fusing Anti-glossy Streak Kit (P/N B1329713):.................................4-103
4.4.12 COPIER FIRMWARE UPDATE NOTICE WHEN COLOR
CONTROLLER E-7000 IS INSTALLED.............................................4-105
REASON:..........................................................................................4-105
PROCEDURE: ..................................................................................4-105
4.4.13 POOR FUSING ON 100g/m2 PAPER ..........................................4-107
SYMPTOM:.......................................................................................4-107
CAUSE:.............................................................................................4-107
SOLUTION:.......................................................................................4-107
4.4.14 NIP WIDTH ADJUSTMENT .........................................................4-112
MEASURING THE NIP WIDTH:........................................................4-112
NIP WITH SPECIFICATIONS: ..........................................................4-113
ADJUSTING THE NIP WIDTH:.........................................................4-114

5. SERVICE TABLES ......................................................................5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-1
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION.....................................5-1
Service Mode Lock/Unlock....................................................................5-1
To Enter and Exit the Service Mode......................................................5-2
To Switch to the Copy Window for Test Printing ...................................5-2
Using the SP Mode ...............................................................................5-2
SP Mode Button Summary....................................................................5-4
SP Mode Print (SMC Print) ...................................................................5-5
5.2 RESETS ....................................................................................................5-6
5.2.1 MEMORY ALL CLEAR: SP5801.......................................................5-6

x

07/04

5.2.2 SOFTWARE AND SETTING RESET................................................5-8
Software Reset .....................................................................................5-8
Resetting the User Tool Settings ..........................................................5-8
Resetting Copy/Document Server Features Only .................................5-8
Resetting Scanner Features Only .........................................................5-8
5.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING......................................................................5-9
5.3.1 PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2109 002 .......................................5-9
Test Pattern Table.................................................................................5-9
5.3.2 IPU TEST PATTERNS: SP4417 .....................................................5-10
5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE..............................................................................5-11
5.4.1 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE .............................................5-11
Firmware Update Procedure ...............................................................5-12
Verifying the Firmware Update............................................................5-15
5.4.2 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA.....................................................5-17
5.4.3 UPLOADING AND DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA .....................5-18
Uploading NVRAM Data to an SD card...............................................5-18
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM..................................................5-19
5.5 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES...............................................................5-20
5.5.1 SERVICE TABLE KEY....................................................................5-20
5.5.2 COPIER SERVICE TABLES...........................................................5-22
Group 1000 .........................................................................................5-22
Group 2000 .........................................................................................5-33
Group 3000 .........................................................................................5-80
Group 4000 .........................................................................................5-96
Group 5000 .......................................................................................5-106
Group 6000 .......................................................................................5-132
Group 7000 .......................................................................................5-141
Group 8000 .......................................................................................5-151
Group 9000 .......................................................................................5-186
5.5.3 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE .........................................................5-188
Group 1 (Printer) ...............................................................................5-188
5.5.4 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE .......................................................5-190
Group 1 (Scanner) ............................................................................5-190
Group 2 (Scanner) ............................................................................5-190
5.6 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK ........................................................5-191
5.6.1 COPIER INPUT CHECK: SP5803 ................................................5-191
5.6.2 COPIER OUTPUT CHECK: SP5804 ............................................5-200
5.7 ARDF INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK ............................................................5-202
5.7.1 ADF INPUT CHECK: SP6007.......................................................5-202
5.7.2 ADF OUTPUT CHECK: SP6008...................................................5-203
5.8 FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK .............................5-204
5.8.1 INPUT CHECK: FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) SP6121 .....................5-204
5.8.2 OUTPUT CHECK FINISHER 1: (B700/B701) SP6123 .................5-205
5.9 FINISHER 2 (B706) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK ......................................5-206
5.9.1 INPUT CHECK FINISHER 2: (B706) SP6122 ..............................5-206
5.9.2 OUTPUT CHECK FINISHER 2 (B706) SP6125............................5-207
5.10 USING THE DEBUG LOG ...................................................................5-208
5.10.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG .........5-208
5.10.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD ...................5-211
xi

5.10.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY .........................................5-212
5.10.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES .......................................................5-213
SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key .............5-213
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log ..........................5-213
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log.....................5-213
5.11 USER TOOLS......................................................................................5-214
5.11.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................5-214
5.11.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS ..................................................................5-215
5.11.3 MAINTENANCE..........................................................................5-217
5.11.4 COPIER/DOCUMENT SERVER FEATURES.............................5-218
5.11.5 PRINTER FEATURES ................................................................5-221
5.11.6 SCANNER FEATURES ..............................................................5-223
5.11.7 INQUIRY.....................................................................................5-224
5.11.8 COUNTER ..................................................................................5-224

6. DETAILS......................................................................................6-1
6.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW .............................................................................6-1
6.1.1 MAIN MACHINE ...............................................................................6-1
6.1.2 PAPER PATH: COVER INTERPOSER TRAY..................................6-3
6.1.3 PAPER PATH: 9-BIN MAILBOX .......................................................6-4
6.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT................................................................................6-5
6.2 BOARDS....................................................................................................6-6
6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM ............................................................................6-6
6.2.2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS.......................................................6-7
6.2.3 CONTROLLER BOX VENTILATION ................................................6-9
6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW................................................................6-10
6.4 ARDF.......................................................................................................6-13
6.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-13
6.4.2 ARDF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ............................................6-14
Components View 1: Sensors.............................................................6-14
Components View 2: Motors, Sensors, Other .....................................6-15
ARDF Components View 3: Drive Motors ...........................................6-16
6.4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION ........................................................6-17
6.4.4 PICK-UP ROLLER ..........................................................................6-20
6.4.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT....................................................................6-21
6.4.6 ORIGINAL FEED AND SEPARATION............................................6-22
6.4.7 ORIGINAL FEED AND SKEW CORRECTION ...............................6-23
6.4.8 SLIP DETECTION ..........................................................................6-24
6.4.9 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT (ONE-SIDED) ........................................6-25
6.4.10 DUPLEX SCANNING....................................................................6-26
6.4.11 ARDF JAM DETECTION ..............................................................6-28
Jam Detection Sensor Layout .............................................................6-28
Jam Detection Table ...........................................................................6-29
6.5 SCANNER UNIT......................................................................................6-30
6.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-30
6.5.2 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION ........................................................6-31
Detection Timing .................................................................................6-33
6.5.3 SCANNER DRIVE ..........................................................................6-34
6.5.4 SCANNER UNIT FANS AND ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ...6-35
xii

6.5.5 DUST DETECTION ........................................................................6-36
Overview .............................................................................................6-36
What Happens if Dust is Detected? ....................................................6-37
How is the Dust Detected?..................................................................6-38
The Effects of SP Mode Settings on Dust Detection...........................6-39
6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................6-40
6.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-40
6.6.2 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT).......................................................6-41
SBU.....................................................................................................6-41
Operation Summary ............................................................................6-41
Storing Operation Settings ..................................................................6-41
SBU Test Mode...................................................................................6-41
6.6.3 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT).................................................6-42
6.7 LASER UNIT............................................................................................6-43
6.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-43
6.7.2 LD UNIT..........................................................................................6-44
Dual Beam Writing ..............................................................................6-44
LD Safety Switches .............................................................................6-44
6.7.3 OPTICAL PATHS............................................................................6-45
Optical Path ........................................................................................6-46
6.7.4 IMAGE POSITION CORRECTION (MUSIC) ..................................6-47
What does MUSIC do? .......................................................................6-47
When is MUSIC done?........................................................................6-47
Location of the MUSIC Sensors ..........................................................6-48
How is MUSIC Done? .........................................................................6-49
3rd Mirror Position Adjustment............................................................6-51
Exposure Unit Temperature Sensors ..................................................6-51
6.8 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU) ......................................................6-52
6.8.1 OVERVIEW OF TANDEM PCU UNITS ..........................................6-52
6.8.2 AROUND THE DRUM ....................................................................6-53
Drum Drive ..........................................................................................6-54
Drum Charge ......................................................................................6-55
Drum Cleaning ....................................................................................6-56
Drum Ventilation..................................................................................6-57
Ozone Ventilation................................................................................6-59
6.8.3 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...................................................................6-60
Overview .............................................................................................6-60
Development Unit Operation...............................................................6-61
Development, PCU Drive ....................................................................6-62
6.9 TONER SUPPLY .....................................................................................6-63
6.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-63
6.9.2 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM .....................................................6-65
6.9.3 TONER CARTRIDGE .....................................................................6-66
6.9.4 TONER END SENSORS ................................................................6-68
Toner near-end ...................................................................................6-68
Toner end............................................................................................6-69
Toner End Recovery ...........................................................................6-69
6.10 WASTE TONER COLLECTION.............................................................6-70
6.10.1 WASTE TONER PATH .................................................................6-70
xiii

6.10.2 WASTE TONER UNIT MOTORS..................................................6-72
6.10.3 WASTE TONER COLLECTION UNIT SENSORS ........................6-73
Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor...........................................................6-73
Waste Toner Bottle Near-Full Sensor .................................................6-74
Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor ..........................................................6-74
Waste Toner Bottle Lock Sensor ........................................................6-74
Waste Toner Bottle Transport Motor ...................................................6-74
6.11 PROCESS CONTROL...........................................................................6-75
6.11.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-75
6.11.2 COMPONENTS USED DURING PROCESS CONTROL .............6-76
Potential Sensor..................................................................................6-76
ID Sensors ..........................................................................................6-77
TD Sensor...........................................................................................6-79
Temperature/Humidity Sensors ..........................................................6-79
List of Process Control Acronyms .......................................................6-80
Important SP Codes Related to Process Control ................................6-81
6.11.3 POTENTIAL CONTROL ...............................................................6-82
When is Potential Control Done? ........................................................6-82
What is Done During Potential Control?..............................................6-83
6.11.4 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL........................................................6-87
Overview .............................................................................................6-87
Toner Supply Operation Flow .............................................................6-89
6.12 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER .....................................6-90
6.12.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-90
6.12.2 ITB DRIVE ....................................................................................6-93
6.12.3 ITB LIFT........................................................................................6-94
6.12.4 TRANSFER POWER PACK .........................................................6-96
6.12.5 PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION.....................................6-97
6.12.6 PTR CLEANING ...........................................................................6-98
6.12.7 ITB CLEANING .............................................................................6-99
6.12.8 ITB SPEED CONTROL...............................................................6-100
6.12.9 ITB VENTILATION......................................................................6-101
6.13 PAPER FEED ......................................................................................6-102
6.13.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-102
6.13.2 DRIVE.........................................................................................6-104
6.13.3 TRAY AND PAPER LIFT MECHANISM – TRAY 2,3 ..................6-105
Bottom Plate Lift................................................................................6-105
Lift Sensor.........................................................................................6-106
6.13.4 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM......................6-107
Feed and Separation at Standby: No Paper Present ........................6-107
Paper Feed and Separation ..............................................................6-108
Separation Roller Release Mechanism .............................................6-109
6.13.5 PAPER NEAR-END AND PAPER END – TRAYS 2 AND 3 .......6-110
6.13.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION .........................................................6-111
Tandem Tray (Tray 1) .......................................................................6-111
Universal Cassettes (Tray 2, 3).........................................................6-111
6.13.7 PAPER TRAY HEATERS ...........................................................6-113
6.13.8 TANDEM TRAY – TRAY 1..........................................................6-114
Overview ...........................................................................................6-114
xiv

Connecting the Left and Right Sides of the Tray...............................6-115
Paper Lift/Remaining Paper Detection ..............................................6-116
Fence Drive.......................................................................................6-118
Rear Fence Drive ..............................................................................6-119
Tray Side-to-side Positioning ............................................................6-120
6.13.9 TRAY POSITIONING MECHANISM – TRAYS 1 TO 3 ...............6-121
6.13.10 BYPASS TRAY .........................................................................6-122
Bypass Feed and Separation............................................................6-122
Bypass Tray Paper End Detection ....................................................6-123
Bypass Paper Size Detection............................................................6-124
6.13.11 PAPER REGISTRATION..........................................................6-126
Overview ...........................................................................................6-126
Paper Registration Drive ...................................................................6-127
Jam Removal at Paper Registration..................................................6-128
6.13.12 PAPER TYPE AND DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION...................6-129
6.14 FUSING, PAPER EXIT ........................................................................6-132
6.14.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-132
6.15 THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS......................................................6-134
6.15.1 FUSING UNIT DRIVE .................................................................6-135
6.15.2 LUBRICATION AND CLEANING ................................................6-136
Stripper Retraction ............................................................................6-137
6.15.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL........................................6-138
Basic Temperature Control ...............................................................6-138
Correction for Machine Internal Temperature ...................................6-140
Copy Speed Reduction (CPM Down Mode)......................................6-140
6.15.4 FUSING UNIT VENTILATION.....................................................6-141
6.16 DUPLEX UNIT .....................................................................................6-142
6.16.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-142
6.16.2 DUPLEX DRIVE..........................................................................6-143
6.16.3 INVERTER OPERATION............................................................6-144
Inverter Feed-in and Jogging ............................................................6-144
Inverter Feed-out...............................................................................6-145
6.16.4 DUPLEX TRAY FEED ................................................................6-146
6.16.5 DUPLEX INTERLEAVE FEED....................................................6-147
6.16.6 DUPLEX UNIT VENTILATION....................................................6-149
6.17 PAPER EXIT........................................................................................6-150
6.17.1 FACE UP EXIT MECHANISM.....................................................6-150
6.17.2 DE-CURL MECHANISM .............................................................6-151
6.17.3 PAPER EXIT COOLING .............................................................6-152
6.17.4 ENERGY SAVER MODES .........................................................6-153

A3/11”X17 PAPER SIZE TRAY
1. INSTRALLATION ................................................................. B331-1
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B331-2
2.1 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT................................... B331-2

xv

06/09

3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS................................................. B331-4
3.1 SECTIONAL DESCRIPTION ...........B331-4LCT (LARGE CAPACITY TRAY)

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B473-1
1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS.......................................................................... B473-1
1.2 PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS ......................................... B473-2
1.3 PICK-UP SOLENOID.......................................................................... B473-3
1.4 PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER COVER SWITCHES ....................... B473-4
1.5 TRAY MOTOR.................................................................................... B473-5
1.6 PAPER STACK SENSOR................................................................... B473-5
1.7 PAPER SIZE ADJUSTMENT.............................................................. B473-6

2. DETAILS............................................................................... B473-7
2.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................ B473-7
2.1.1 LCT MAIN COMPONENTS ....................................................... B473-7
2.1.2 LCT DRIVE LAYOUT................................................................. B473-9
2.2 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION .................................................. B473-10
2.2.1 STARTING PAPER FEED ....................................................... B473-10
2.2.2 FEED AND SEPARATION....................................................... B473-11
2.3 PAPER LIFT ..................................................................................... B473-12
2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION ......................................................... B473-14
2.5 PAPER END DETECTION ............................................................... B473-15

2000/3000-SHEET FINISHER
1. 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................ B700-1
1.1 BASIC PROCEDURES....................................................................... B700-1
1) 1.1.1 COVERS.................................................................................... B700-1
2) 1.1.2 UPPER TRAY, END FENCE ..................................................... B700-2
1.2 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, LIMIT SWITCH ................................ B700-4
1.3 POSITIONING ROLLER..................................................................... B700-5
1.4 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR ........................................................... B700-6
1.5 UPPER TRAY HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2 ............................................. B700-7
1.6 EXIT GUIDE PLATE, UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR ......................... B700-8
1.7 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR........................................................... B700-9
1.8 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR .................................................... B700-10
1.9 PRE-STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR.................................................. B700-11
1.10 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR............................................................ B700-12
1.11 FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY) ............................................ B700-13
1) 1.11.1 FOLDING HORIZONTAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT .................. B700-13
2) 1.11.2 FOLD VERTICAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT .............................. B700-16
1.12 CORNER STAPLER....................................................................... B700-17
1.13 FOLD UNIT..................................................................................... B700-18
1.14 FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR ................................................ B700-20
1.15 STACK PRESENT SENSOR.......................................................... B700-21

xvi

06/09

1.16 BOOKLET STAPLER, BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR ................... B700-22
1) 1.16.1 BOOKLET STAPLER............................................................. B700-22
2) 1.16.2 BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR .............................................. B700-23

1. 2. DETAILS........................................................................ B700-24
2.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ......................................................................... B700-24
2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ......................................................... B700-26
1) 2.2.1 UPPER AREA B700/B701 ....................................................... B700-26
2) 2.2.2 LOWER AREA B700/B701 ...................................................... B700-27
3) 2.2.3 PUNCH UNIT B702.................................................................. B700-28
4) 2.2.4 STACKER/STAPLER - B700/B701.......................................... B700-29
5) 2.2.5 B700 FOLD UNIT..................................................................... B700-30
6) 2.2.6 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ....................... B700-31
2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................... B700-36
2.4 JUNCTION GATES .......................................................................... B700-37
Proof Mode .................................................................................. B700-37
Shift Mode.................................................................................... B700-37
Staple Mode................................................................................. B700-37
2.5 PRE-STACKING............................................................................... B700-38
2.6 UPPER TRAY................................................................................... B700-40
2.7 LOWER TRAY (B700 ONLY)............................................................ B700-42
2.8 CORNER STAPLING ....................................................................... B700-44
1) 2.8.1 STACKING AND JOGGING..................................................... B700-44
2) 2.8.2 STAPLER MOVEMENT ........................................................... B700-46
3) 2.8.3 CORNER STAPLING............................................................... B700-48
2.9 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY)................................................ B700-49
1) 2.9.1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM..................................... B700-49
2) 2.9.2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING .................................... B700-50
Overview ...................................................................................... B700-50
Booklet Stapling and Folding Mechanisms .................................. B700-56
2.10 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT ................................................................. B700-59
1) 2.10.1 FEED OUT............................................................................. B700-59
2) 2.10.2 FEED OUT STACKING.......................................................... B700-61
2.11 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701)........................................... B700-62
1) 2.11.1 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION................................................ B700-62
2) 2.11.2 PUNCH MECHANISMS ......................................................... B700-65
Paper Position Detection.............................................................. B700-65
Punch Unit Movement.................................................................. B700-66
Punch Selection and Firing .......................................................... B700-67
1) 2.11.3 PUNCH HOPPER MECHANISM ........................................... B700-68
2.12 FINISHER JAM DETECTION .......................................................... B700-69

xvii

06/09

COVER INTERPOSER TRAY
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B704-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6

EXTERNAL COVERS......................................................................... B704-1
FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER ................................................. B704-2
FEED BELT ........................................................................................ B704-3
GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT ........................................................... B704-4
MAIN BOARD ..................................................................................... B704-5
MOTOR REPLACEMENT................................................................... B704-6
1.16.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR .......................................... B704-6
1.16.2 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR............................................... B704-6
1.16.3 FEED MOTOR, TRANSPORT MOTOR................................... B704-7

2. DETAILS............................................................................... B704-8
2.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................ B704-8
2.1.1 MAIN LAYOUT........................................................................... B704-8
2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT......................................................................... B704-9
2.1.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION ...................................................... B704-10
2.1.4 PAPER PATH .......................................................................... B704-13
2.2 PAPER FEED ................................................................................... B704-14
Power On ..................................................................................... B704-14
Paper Separation and Feed ......................................................... B704-14
Bottom Tray Lift............................................................................ B704-14
Paper Near-end............................................................................ B704-14
Paper End .................................................................................... B704-14

3000-SHEET FINISHER
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B706-1
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ............................................ B706-2
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B706-3
3.1 DOOR AND COVER REPLACEMENT............................................... B706-3
Front Door...................................................................................... B706-3
Left Inner Cover ............................................................................. B706-3
Inner Cover .................................................................................... B706-3
Side Table and Upper Tray ............................................................ B706-4
Left Covers..................................................................................... B706-5
Rear Cover and Top Cover ............................................................ B706-5
Shift Tray........................................................................................ B706-5
3.2 ROLLERS ........................................................................................... B706-6
3.2.1 SHIFT POSITIONING ROLLER................................................. B706-6
3.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER ............................................................ B706-7
3.2.3 ALIGNMENT BRUSH ROLLER .................................................. B706-8
3.3 STACK FEED-OUT BELT................................................................... B706-9
3.4 JOGGER FENCE ............................................................................. B706-10
xviii

06/09

3.5 SENSORS ........................................................................................ B706-11
3.5.1 STACK HEIGHT 1, 2 AND EXIT GUIDE OPEN SENSOR ...... B706-11
Stack Height Sensors 1 and 2...................................................... B706-11
Exit Guide Open Sensor .............................................................. B706-11
3.5.2 UPPER TRAY PAPER LIMIT AND EXIT SENSOR ................. B706-12
Upper Tray Paper Limit Sensor.................................................... B706-12
Upper Tray Exit Sensor................................................................ B706-12
3.5.3 SHIFT TRAY EXIT SENSOR.................................................... B706-13
3.5.4 ENTRANCE AND STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSORS .. B706-14
Entrance Sensor .......................................................................... B706-14
Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor...................................................... B706-14
3.5.5 PRE-STACK PAPER SENSOR ................................................ B706-15
3.5.6 STAPLE WASTE HOPPER SENSOR ...................................... B706-16
3.5.7 STAPLER ROTATION HP AND
STAPLER RETURN SENSORS .............................................. B706-17
3.6 STAPLER ......................................................................................... B706-18
3.7 SHIFT TRAY MOTOR ...................................................................... B706-19
3.7.1 STACKING ROLLER / ROLLER DRAG MOTORS,
RETURN HP SENSOR............................................................. B706-20
3.8 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT .................................................................. B706-23
3.8.1 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT COVER............................................. B706-23
3.8.2 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT .......................................................... B706-24
3.8.3 JOGGER TOP FENCE MOTOR.............................................. B706-25
3.8.4 JOGGER BOTTOM FENCE MOTOR ...................................... B706-26
3.9 PUNCH UNIT (B531)........................................................................ B706-27
3.9.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT ......................................... B706-27
Front to Rear Adjustment ............................................................. B706-27
Right to Left Adjustment............................................................... B706-27
3.10 JOGGER UNIT (B513) ................................................................... B706-28
3.10.1 JOGGER UNIT ...................................................................... B706-28
3.10.2 JOGGER UNIT PCB .............................................................. B706-29
3.10.3 JOGGER UNIT MOTOR ........................................................ B706-30

4. TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................ B706-31
5. SERVICE TABLES ............................................................. B706-32
5.1 DIP SWITCHES................................................................................ B706-32
5.2 TEST POINTS .................................................................................. B706-32
5.3 FUSES.............................................................................................. B706-32

6. DETAILS............................................................................. B706-33
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4

TRAY AND STAPLER JUNCTION GATE......................................... B706-33
PAPER PRE-STACKING.................................................................. B706-34
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING............................................ B706-35
STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT .......................................................... B706-36
Side-to-Side ................................................................................. B706-36
Rotation (1) .................................................................................. B706-37
Rotation (2) .................................................................................. B706-37
6.5 STAPLER ......................................................................................... B706-38
xix

06/09

6.6 FEED-OUT ....................................................................................... B706-40
6.7 PAPER EXIT STACKING ................................................................. B706-41
6.8 SHIFT TRAY..................................................................................... B706-42
6.8.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................. B706-42
Stand-by Mode............................................................................. B706-42
6.8.2 SHIFT TRAY UP/DOWN MOVEMENT ..................................... B706-43
Sort/Stack Mode (Shift Mode) ...................................................... B706-43
Staple Mode................................................................................. B706-43
6.8.3 SHIFT TRAY LOWER LIMIT DETECTION ............................... B706-44
6.9 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT ...................................... B706-45
6.10 STAPLING Z-FOLDED PAPER ...................................................... B706-46
6.11 JAM CONDITIONS ......................................................................... B706-47
6.12 PUNCH UNIT (B531)...................................................................... B706-48
6.12.1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE............................................................. B706-48
6.12.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION............................................. B706-49
6.13 JOGGER UNIT(B513) .................................................................... B706-50
6.13.1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT................................ B706-50
6.13.2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE .......................................................... B706-51

7. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION................................ B706-52
7.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................... B706-52
7.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION .................................. B706-53
7.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................... B706-56

9-BIN MAILBOX
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B762-1
1.1 COVERS AND TRAYS ....................................................................... B762-1
1.2 SENSORS .......................................................................................... B762-2
1.3 MAIN MOTOR AND CONTROL BOARD............................................ B762-3

2. DETAILS............................................................................... B762-4
2.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................ B762-4
2.1.1 MAIN COMPONENT LAYOUT .................................................. B762-4
2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT......................................................................... B762-5
2.1.3 PAPER PATH ............................................................................. B762-6
2.2 BASIC OPERATION........................................................................... B762-7
2.2.1 PAPER PATH ............................................................................ B762-7
2.3 OVERFLOW DETECTION.................................................................. B762-8
2.3.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................... B762-8
2.3.2 DETECTION TIMING................................................................. B762-9
2.4 PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING.......................................... B762-10
2.4.1 A4 SIDEWAYS (LEF) 
 1ST BIN TRAY .................................. B762-10
2.4.2 A4 SIDEWAYS (LEF) 
 2ND ~ 9TH BIN TRAY...................... B762-10

xx

06/09

SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... SPEC-1
1. MAINFRAME .......................................................................................SPEC-1
1.1 COPYING ....................................................................................SPEC-1
Paper Sizes...................................................................................SPEC-3
1.2 PRINTING....................................................................................SPEC-4
1.3 SCANNER ...................................................................................SPEC-5
2. ARDF ..................................................................................................SPEC-6
3. OPTIONAL PERIPHERALS.................................................................SPEC-7
3.1 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B473..................................................SPEC-7
3.2 8½ X 14" PAPER SIZE TRAY B474 ............................................SPEC-7
3.3 9-BIN MAILBOX B762 .................................................................SPEC-8
3.4 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704 ............................................SPEC-8
3.5 3000-SHEET FINISHER B706.....................................................SPEC-9
3.6 PUNCH UNIT B531 ...................................................................SPEC-10
3.7 3000-SHEET FINISHER B701...................................................SPEC-11
3.8 2000-SHEET FINISHER B700...................................................SPEC-13
3.9 PUNCH UNIT B702 ...................................................................SPEC-15
3.10 A3/11" X 17" TRAY B331.........................................................SPEC-16
3.11 COPY TRAY B756...................................................................SPEC-16
4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION ...........................................................SPEC-17
4.1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ..................................................SPEC-18
4.1.1 COPIER .........................................................................SPEC-18
4.1.2 ARDF.............................................................................SPEC-31

APPENDIX

xxi

August, 2006

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Installation

1. INSTALLATION
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range:

Recommended Temp.: 23°C (73.4°)
Allowed Temp.: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 90°F) *1

2. Humidity Range:

15% to 80% Rh

3. Ambient Illumination:

Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight or
strong light.)

4. Ventilation:

Air must be replaced a minimum of 3 times per hour

5. Ambient Dust:
Less than 0.10 mg/m3
*1 If the machine is installed in a location where the ambient temperature is more
that 30oC (86oF):
• Do not run full color copying longer than 2 hours.
• Never turn the main power switch off immediately after a long copy job. Leave
the machine on so the fans can expel the hot air from the machine and cool the
electronic components.
Temperature and Humidity for Operation
% Rh

90
80

Allowed Range

27C (80.6F) 80% Rh
25C (77F) 70% Rh

70
60

32C (89.6F) 54% Rh

50

Office

40
30
15C (59F) 30% Rh

20
10

10C (50F) 15% R h

0
10

20

Recommended Temp., Humidity: 23°C (73.4°F) 50% Rh

1-1

30

o

C
B132I900.WMF

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

August, 2006

6. If the installation area has air-conditioners or heaters, put the machine in a
location that agrees with these conditions:
a) Where there are no sudden temperature changes from low to high, or
high to low.
b) Where it will not be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner in
the summer.
c) Where it will not be directly exposed to reflected heat from a heater in the
winter
7. Do not put the machine where it will be exposed to gases that can cause
corrosion.
8. Put the copier on a strong and level surface. The front and rear of the machine
must be less than ±5 mm (0.2") away from level.
9. Do not put the machine where there could be strong vibrations.
10. Do not connect the machine to the same power source as other electrical
devices.
11. The machine can make an electromagnetic field, and this can cause
interference with radio or television reception.

1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL
1. Front to rear:

Less than ±5 mm (0.2") away from level

2. Right to left:

Less than ±5 mm (0.2") away from level

The machine legs can be turned to adjust them up or down, to make the machine
level. Put a carpenter’s level on the exposure glass.

1-2

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS
Put the copier near the power source. Minimum clearance must be as shown below.
The same amount of clearance is necessary when optional peripheral devices are
installed.

0 mm Rear

160 mm (6.3")
Left

110 mm (4.3") Right

750 mm (29.5") Front

B132I111.WMF

1-3

Installation

August, 2006

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

August, 2006

1.1.4 DIMENSIONS
480 mm (18.9")

480 mm (18.9")

1,198 mm (43.2")
1,230 mm (48.4")
1,014 mm (39.9")

90 mm (3.5")
657 mm (25.9")

750 mm (29.5")

354 mm (13.9")
B132I112.WMF

850 mm (33.5")

613 mm (24.1")

458 mm (18")

B132I113.WMF

1-4

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS


WARNING!
1. Make sure that the wall outlet is near the main machine and that you can
get access to it easily. Make sure the plug is tightly connected to the
outlet.
2. Do not connect more than one electrical device to the same power
outlet.
3. Be sure to ground the machine.
4. Do not put objects on the power cord.
Input voltage level

North America 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 20 A

Permissible voltage fluctuation

±10%


CAUTION
Do not turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or
flashing. To prevent damage to the hard disk or memory, push the
operation switch to turn the power off, then do nothing until the power LED
goes off, and then turn the main power switch off.
There are two power switches on the machine:
• Main Power Switch.
This is located on the front left corner of the machine and has a plastic cover.
This switch must always be on unless a technician does work on the machine.
• Operation switch.
This is located on the right side of the operation panel. This is the switch that the
customer uses to turn the machine on and off.

1-5

Installation

August, 2006

COPIER AND PERIPHERALS

August, 2006

1.2 COPIER AND PERIPHERALS
11
10

15
2

9

13

8

5
7

14

12

6

4

1
17

3
16
B132I116.WMF

This is a list of the peripheral devices that can be installed with the copier.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
-

Model
B132
B200
B756
B473
B699
B474
B706
B698
B531
B513
B704
B762
B701
B702
B700
B703
B331
B499
B328
B735
B761
B737
G815

Name
e-STUDIO4500c
e-STUDIO5500c
Copy Tray Type 2075
LCT RT43
LCT Adapter Type B
81/2" x 14"/B4 Paper Size Tray Type 1075
3000-Sheet Finisher SR842
Finisher Adapter Type B
Punch Unit Type 1075
Output Jogger Unit Type 1075
Cover Interposer Tray Type 3260
Mailbox CS391
3000-Sheet Finisher SR970
Punch Unit Type 3260
2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher SR4000
Output Jogger Unit Type 3260
A3 /11"x17" Paper Size Tray Type 2105
Tab Sheet Holder Type 3260
Copy Connector Type 3260
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type C
PostScript3 Unit Type 3260
Printer/Scanner Unit GM-2100
EFI Printer Controller E-7000

1-6

Comments
Main machine (Copier)
Attached to main machine
Large capacity tray
Required for LCT
LCT Option
No saddle-stitching (100-sheet stapling)
Replacement motor for B706
For B706 only
For B706 only.
For B700, B701, B706
For B700, B701 only
No saddle-stitching, Tray x1, 50-sheet stapling
For B700, B701
Saddle-stitching, Trays x2, 50-sheet stapling
For B700, B701
For Tandem Tray (Tray 1)

August, 2006

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

Installation

1.3 COPIER e-STUDIO4500c/5500c
1.3.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
Description

Q’ty

1. Instructions Pocket.............................................................. 1
2. Exposure glass cloth holder................................................ 1
3. Exposure glass cloth........................................................... 1
4. Leveling Shoes .................................................................. 4
5. PCU stand .......................................................................... 1
6. PCU Caps Set (Not Used)*1................................................ 1
7. Lock Plate: Development Roller (attached #5).................... 1
8. Development Roller Gear (attached with #5) ...................... 1
9. Lock Plate: Drum Shaft (attached with #5).......................... 1
10. PCU Stand Holder ............................................................ 1
11. Decal: Paper Loading ....................................................... 1
12. Decal: Paper Size ............................................................. 1
1

*

Attach the PCU caps to the PCU toner ports before you return PCUs to the factory. They are not
used during installation or servicing.

1

2

3

5

4

6

7

12

10

11

B132I001.WMF

9

1-7

8

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

August, 2006

1.3.2 INSTALLATION
Note

Tapes and packing material
[B]

[H]
[C]
[A]

B132I910A.MWF

[G]
[D]

B132I703.WMF

[E]

[F]

B132I004.WMF


WARNING!
Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord
before you do these procedures.
Note
Be sure to place slanted support [G] made of cardboard with its hard side
[H] up when unloading the copier from the pallet using it.
Remove all tapes and packing material from the main machine:
[A]: ARDF, right side
[B]: Packing block inside ARDF
[C]: Accessories bag. Remove other accessory bags from Tray 2, Tray 3.
[D]: ARDF, left side
[E]: ARDF connector cord. Remove tape and connect the cord
[F]: Power cord
1-8

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

Installation

August, 2006

[A]

[B]
B132I002.WMF

[A]: Under ARDF
[B]: Operation panel film

1-9

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

August, 2006

[C]
[B]

[A]

[D]

B132I005.WMF

1. Open the front door and, and remove the transfer belt release lever [A] (1 tape).
We will install this in the correct location later.
Important
• DO NOT TOUCH [B], [C], OR [D] AT THIS TIME. THESE ITEMS ARE REMOVED AFTER YOU
REMOVE THE FACE PLATE.
• TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ITB, NEVER TURN DOWN LEVER [D] TO PULL OUT THE DRAWER
UNIT UNTIL AFTER YOU HAVE REMOVED THE ROD WITH THE RED TAG AND WIRE [B]. THE
•

DRAWER MUST REMAIN INSIDE THE MACHINE UNTIL AFTER THE DEVELOPER IS INSTALLED IN
THE DEVELOPER CARTRIDGES OF THE PCUS.
THE ROD IS REMOVED AFTER THE FACE PLATE IS REMOVED TO INSTALL THE DEVELOPER
CARTRIDGES. (
PG.1-12)

1-10

August, 2006

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

Installation

[A]

[B]

B132I102.WMF

2. From Tray 1 remove:
[A]: Block, tape
[B]: Retainer, tag, wire (
 x1)
3. Remove all retainers and accessories from Trays 2, Tray 3.

1-11

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

August, 2006

Shipping Retainer Removal

[A]

[B]

B132I006A.WMF

[C]
1. Prepare an open space on the floor for the hopper.
2. Remove the screws of the toner hopper cover [A] ( x 3).
3. Put your hands under the left and right corners of the toner hopper, and slowly
pull it out on its rails until it stops.
4. Push the lock [B] then pull down the support leg [C].
5. Make sure that the support leg is down and locked.


CAUTION
Always make sure that the support leg is down and locked before
you remove the hopper.
6. Hold the toner hopper using the handles at the top left and right sides. Then lift
the toner hopper off its rails and set it on the floor.


CAUTION
The hopper is heavy! Lift it carefully. Make sure that it disengages
fully from the rails on the left and right, and then set it on the floor.
7. Push the hopper rails into the machine.
NOTE: Push in the rails until approximately an inch is out of the machine. If
you push the rails in fully, you must use a pair of needle-nose (radio)
pliers to pull them out again.

1-12

August, 2006

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

Installation

[B]

[C]

[A]
B132I715.WMF

[D]

B132I902.WMFF

8. Remove the tag, and rod [A] ( x 1).
9. Disconnect the fan connector [B].
10. Remove the face plate [C] ( x 5).
11. Put the PCU stand [D] on a flat, clean surface.
12. Use a clean cloth to remove dust from the surface of the stand.

1-13

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

August, 2006

[D]

[F]

[A]
[E]

[B]

[C]

B132I723.WMF

Important:
• DO NOT TRY TO PULL OUT THE DRAWER UNIT UNTIL AFTER YOU REMOVE THE FOLLOWING
RETAINERS.

13. Remove the tape [A].
14. Pull on the reinforced part [B] on tag [C] to remove the stabilizing rod [D].
NOTE: If you do not pull on the reinforced part [B], you will tear the tag or pull
the wire off.
15. Remove the bracket [E], red tag, and wire ( x1).
NOTE: Do not remove bracket [F].

1-14

August, 2006

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

Installation

Developer Cartridge Installation

[A]

B132I903.WMF

[B]

R

F
[C]
B132R214.WMF

Important
• The OPC drum is exposed on the bottom of the PCU.
• Do not put your hand under the PCU when you hold the PCU.
• Always use the PCU stand. Do not put the PCU on other surfaces.
1. Push down the tab [A] above the Yellow PCU.
2. Hold the Yellow PCU [B] by its sides, and pull it out of the machine.
3. Set the PCU on the PCU stand [C]. (In the diagram, F is ‘front’, R is ‘rear’.)
4. Put a piece of clean paper on top of the PCU to protect the drum from light.

1-15

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

August, 2006

[D]

[B]
[A]

[E]
[C]
B132R210.WMF

5. On the front end of the PCU, remove the shaft cap [A] and lock plate [B] ( x 3).
Important: After you remove the shaft cap, make sure that you do not turn the
shaft [C] of the development roller.
6. On the rear end of the PCU, remove the lock plate [D] ( x 4).
7. Remove the development unit [E] from the PCU.

1-16

August, 2006

[C]

[F]
Installation

[B]

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

[B]
[D]

[A]
[E]

B132I105.WMF

[G]

B132I105A.WMF

8. Place the development unit [A] on a clean sheet of A3/DLT paper [B].
9. Remove the screws from the dummy cartridge [B] ( x 2).
10. With a fingernail, release the tabs on the left [C] and right [D].
Important: The development unit is top-heavy and falls easily. Hold it on the
left side.
11. While holding the unit steady with one hand on the left [E], remove the dummy
cartridge [F] from the development unit.
12. Shake the new yellow developer cartridge [G] from side to side about 6 times.

1-17

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

August, 2006

[C]

[A]

[B]
[D]
[F]
B132I106.WMF

[E]

[G]
B132I106A.WMF

13. Thread the film seal [A] through hole [B].
14. Slide the developer cartridge down [C] on the left so the holes and tabs [D] are
aligned.
15. Press in on the middle of the developer cartridge [E] to lock the tabs inside [F].
16. Press down on the right end of the developer cartridge until the tabs [G] on the
right lock.

1-18

August, 2006

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

Installation

[D]
[C]

[A]

[B]

B132I106B.WMF

[F]
[E]

B132I106C.WMF

17. Check the following to points to be sure that the developer cartridge is set
properly.
• Tabs [A] and [B] should be locked.
• The developer cartridge edge [C] should be flat and not bulging or floating
away from the side of the development unit
• Pull gently on the developer cartridge at [D] to make sure that it does not part
from the development unit.
18. Fasten the cartridge [E] ( x2).
IMPORTANT: DO NOT REMOVE THE FILM SEAL [F] ON THE DEVELOPER CARTRIDGE AT THIS
TIME.

1-19

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

August, 2006

[A]

[C]

[B]

B132R222.WMF

Reassemble the PCU
1. Attach the shaft cap [A].
If you cannot attach the cap, then check the end of the development roller shaft
[B]. The flat side of the shaft must point up and must be level.
Important
• When you turn the shaft:
a) Use your fingers to turn the front and rear ends of the development roller
shaft until the end of the shaft is as shown [C].
b) Make sure that you hold the shaft and not the sleeve (the sleeve does not
turn).
c) To prevent damage to the shaft, do not hold the end of the shaft with
pliers.
2. Reattach the development unit to the PCU.
Important!
• HANDLE THE DEVELOPMENT UNIT CAREFULLY WHEN YOU REATTACH IT TO THE PCU TO
AVOID DAMAGING THE DRUM INSIDE THE PCU.

1-20

August, 2006

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

[A]

Installation

[C]

B132I114.WMF

[B]

3. Hold the PCU [A] in front of the slot where you
removed it.
4. Engage the rails [B] with the slots in the sides of
the PCU.
5. Slowly push the PCU into the slot. Make sure
the tab [C] above the PCU is locked.
NOTE: If the PCU does not go in smoothly,
make sure the rails [B] and grooves are
engaged correctly.

B132I905.WMF

6. To release the developer into the PCU,
pull out the film seal [D].
NOTE: Put your other hand on the
PCU [E] to keep it stable it while you
pull on the film seal.

[D]

7. Repeat Steps Page 1-15 to 1-21 for the
other PCUs (Cyan, Magenta, Black).
[E]
B132I101.WMF

1-21

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

August, 2006

Reattach the Face Plate
[B]

[A]

2

4

5

1

3

B132I716.WMF

1. Attach the face plate [A] with the screws in the sequence shown by the
numbers above ( x 5).
Important:
• Do not tighten these screws too much.
• Make sure the fan connector [B] is not pinched behind the face plate.
2. Connect the fan again [B] (
 x 1).

1-22

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

Installation

August, 2006

Remove the Retainers in the Drawer Unit
[C]

[E]
[F]

[D]
[A]

[B]

B132I709.WMF

1. Turn the lever [A] counter-clockwise, and pull the drawer unit [B] out of the
machine until it stops.
2. Remove the instruction sheets [C] and [D].
3. Remove the bracket and tag [E] at the rear.
4. Remove the bracket and tag [F] at the front.
Important
• A sheet of paper protects the ITB if you accidentally pull the drawer out
without first removing the rod. Do not push the drawer into the machine.
Follow the procedure on the instruction sheet to remove the rod and paper.

1-23

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

August, 2006

[C]

[A]

[B]
5. Raise lever D2 [A].
6. Turn knob D1 [B] in the direction shown by the arrow.
7. Remove protective sheet [C].
8. Lower lever D2 [A].
9. Push the drawer into the machine until it stops.
10. Rotate handle B2 up and to the right until it stops.

1-24

B132I722.WMF

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

Installation

August, 2006

[A]

B132I707.WMF

11. Locate the transfer belt release lever [A]. It was removed earlier with the
shipping tape.
12. Attach the transfer belt release lever.
13. Turn it to the vertical position and make sure that it locks.
Important:
• The transfer belt release lever must be turned up and locked in position
before you install the toner hopper.
• IF YOU FORGET TO ATTACH THE TRANSFER BELT RELEASE LEVER [A], THIS WILL
CAUSE AN ID SENSOR ERROR (SC410 TO SC413).

1-25

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

Reinstall the Toner Hopper

August, 2006

[C]

[A]

[D]








[B]

[E]

[G]
[F]



B132I006.WMF

[H]

1. Make sure that the transfer belt release lever [A] is up and locked before you
attach the hopper.
2. Pull the toner hopper left rail [B] and right rail [C] until they are fully extended.
NOTE: If the rails were pushed in fully, it could be necessary to use a pair of
needle-nose pliers to pull them out of the machine.
3. Set the toner hopper [D] on the rails.
Important: Make sure the steel tabs [E] of the hopper are put fully into the left
rail hole and the right rail hole [F].
4. Push the lock [G] and push the support leg [H].
Important: Make sure that the support leg is up and locked before you push
the toner hopper into the machine.
5. Put your hands at the bottom of the toner hopper at  and  and then push
the hopper into the machine against the face plate.
Important: To prevent damage to the hopper, do not push the top of the toner
hopper when you do this step.
6. Make sure that the hopper is flat against the face plate on the right side.
NOTE: If the toner hopper [D] is not flat against the face plate on the right side,
pull it out a short distance and make sure that the transfer belt release
lever is turned up fully.
7. Attach the toner hopper ( x 3). Attach the screws in this sequence: 


1-26

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

Installation

August, 2006

STC (Soft Toner Cartridge) Installation
Important:
• Make sure that you install each STC in the correct bin.
• The label on the toner cartridge must face the front of the machine.
• From left to right, the bins are for Yellow→ Cyan→ Magenta→ Black.
• The name of the color for each bin is on the decals that are attached to the bin
release levers.

[C]

1
2

[A]

[D]
[B]

B132I107.WMF

B132I108.WMF

1. Push down the lock lever  on the top edge of the Yellow bin (the bin at the far
left) to release it. Then pull the bin  in the direction of the front to open it.
Important: To prevent damage to the bin door, do not try to pull a bin directly
out. Push down on its top edge first to release it, then pull it to open it.
2. Remove the Yellow STC (Soft Toner Cartridge) from its box.
3. Shake the STC [A] up and down about 10 times. Do not squeeze or knead the
toner cartridge (this will make clumps in the toner).
NOTE: The bottom of the cartridge [C] must face down.
4. Set the Yellow STC in the bin [B].
NOTE: Make sure that the color ID label [C] and ID chip terminals [D] are
facing toward you.
5. Push the Yellow STC bin to close and lock it.
6. Do Steps 1 to 6 for the other three STCs (Cyan, Magenta, Black)
Important: Make sure that the color of each STC agrees with the label on the
bin door before you install it.

1-27

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

August, 2006

Make the Machine Level

[B]

B132I717.WMF

[A]
1. Attach the leveling shoes [A] to the machine.
2. Place a level on the exposure glass.
3. Use a wrench to lift or lower the nuts [B] on the leveling shoes until the machine
is less than 5 mm from level (measure it from front to rear and from left to right).

1-28

August, 2006

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

Installation

Attach the PCU Stand Rack

[D]
[E]
[B]

[C]

[A]

B132I718.WMF

1. Hold the PCU stand rack [A] with its open end pointed as shown, and put it
below the machine.
2. Attach the rack to the bottom of the machine with the magnets on the rack.
3. Make sure that the following accessories are attached to the bottom of the PCU
stand [B]. Then they will be available for the next servicing:
[C] Lock plate (short): Necessary for drum motor replacement
[D] Lock plate (long): Necessary for developer replacement to lock the front
side of the development roller.
[E] Development roller gear: Necessary for developer replacement to turn the
development gears.
4. Put the PCU stand in the rack below the copier.

1-29

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

August, 2006

Attach Decals
1. Attach the paper-installation decals to
the trays. These tell you how to add
new paper.
• Front set decal: Attach this decal to
the LCT if it is installed. ‘Front set’
means that the paper should be face
up in the tray.
• Back set decal: Attach these decals
to the trays of the copier. ‘Back set’
means that the paper should be face
down in the tray.

Front Set

Back Set

B132I910.BMP

B132I911.BMP

2. Attach exposure-glass-cleaning decal [A] at the
front edge of the ARDF exposure glass.

[A]
B132I912.BMP

[B]
3. Attach the original-caution decal [B], and the
silicone cloth holder [C].

[D]

4. Put the silicone cloth [D] in the holder.

[C]
B132I913.BMP

1-30

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

Initializing Developer and Toner

Installation

August, 2006

[A]

1. At the left rear corner of the machine, make
sure that the manual breaker switch [A] is
UP.
Important: When the breaker switch is UP,
the copier is ready to be turned on. The "|"
mark can be seen.

B132I719.WMF

Important: Before you turn the copier on,
make sure that the ARDF [B] is connected
to the copier at the left rear corner.
2. Connect the power cord of the copier to a
power outlet.

B132I720.WMF

[B]
3. Open the front door [C].
Very Important!:
• TURN ON THE MACHINE WITH THE FRONT

•
•
•

DOOR OPEN TO PREVENT THE MACHINE
FROM PERFORMING THE INITIAL PROCESS
CONTROL SELF-CHECK.
IF THE FRONT DOOR IS NOT OPEN, THE
DRUMS WILL TURN WITH NO TONER IN THE
PCUS.
IF THE POWER IS TURNED ON WITH THE
FRONT COVER CLOSED, DEVELOPER
REPLACEMENT WILL BE REQUIRED.
IF THE DRUMS TURN WITH NO TONER IN THE
PCUS, THIS CAN CAUSE THE CLEANING
BLADES TO CATCH ON A DRY DRUM AND
DAMAGE THE DRUM SURFACES.

[C]
Open the Door Before Power ON!

4. With the front door open, turn on the main power switch.

1-31

B132I721.WMF

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

August, 2006

5. Close the front door after "Open Cover" appears on the display.
6. Enter the SP mode and do SP3811 001.
7. Press [Execute]. Approximately 4 minutes is necessary for this operation.
SP3811 001 does these tasks:
• Makes sure that all the seals are removed from each developer cartridge and
that there is developer in each PCU.
• Turns toner supply on, and sends toner to the sub hopper of each PCU.
• Sends toner to the PCU to give the drum a layer of toner. If this is not done,
the cleaning blades will bend and scratch the drums.
• Initializes the TD sensor.
• Starts the process control self-check to set the target for development
gamma, and adjusts toner density.
Very Important!:
ONLY INITIALIZE THE TD SENSOR ONE TIME. DO NOT DO IT MORE THAN ONE TIME.
Only initialize the TD sensor at the following times:
• At installation, exactly as explained in the installation procedure.

• NEVER DO TD SENSOR INITIALIZATION SP3801 001~006 AFTER SP3811-001.
• SP3811-001 DOES NOT ONLY INITIALIZE THE DEVELOPER. IT ALSO INITIALIZES THE TD SENSOR. IF
YOU DO SP3801 AFTER SP3811, TD SENSOR INITIALIZATION WILL BE DONE TWICE. THIS CAN
CAUSE A FATAL ERROR IN TONER SUPPLY CONTROL.

• After you replace developer (only initialize the TD sensor for the color that you
replaced)
• As instructed in specific troubleshooting procedures.
If you do not obey the above instructions, you will get toner scattering inside the
machine.
8. When the message tells you that the initialization is completed, press [Close].
9. Do SP3812 001 to make sure that SP3811 001 was done correctly.
This operation panel shows "1111". A "1" shows that each PCU was initialized
correctly.
NOTE: If "1111" is not shown, see section 4.2.3 in, "4. Troubleshooting".
Important: From left to right, the 1s show the status of the PCUs in this
sequence: KMCY.
10. Do SP2111 001 to force correct color toner position alignment (MUSIC). This
operation requires about 65 seconds to finish.
11. Do SP2181 030 to make sure that SP2111 001 was done correctly.
The operation panel shows "1". This shows that the position of each color
toner is aligned correctly.
NOTE: If "1" is not shown, see "4.4.2 Color Registration Error Adjustment".

1-32

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

Load the Paper Trays
For each paper cassette tray:
1. Move the side fence and bottom fence to the correct positions for the paper.
2. Add paper to the trays.
3. Attach the paper size decals to the front of the paper cassette trays and the
tandem tray.
NOTE: It is not necessary to input the paper size setting for trays 2 and 3. This
is detected automatically.

Make a Test Color Print
1. Make sure that A3 or DLT paper is put in one of the trays.
NOTE: Use the same type of paper that the customer normally uses for color
outputs.
2. Put a "Color test chart C-4" on the exposure glass.
3. Select full color mode and print one copy of the chart. You will use this in the
ACC procedure, if ACC is necessary.
4. Check the results of the copy with the customer.
• If the quality of the color is satisfactory, ACC adjustment is not necessary.
• If the quality of the color is not satisfactory, do the ACC adjustment described
below.

ACC (Automatic Color Calibration) Adjustment
Automatic color calibration is done at the factory with the procedure given below.
Do this procedure only if the color quality is not satisfactory for the customer.
1. Press [User Tools] ().
2. To print a color pattern, select Maintenance> Auto Color Calibration
3. Press "Start".
Machine will start self-check before
printing test pattern
Press [Start Printing].
4. Press "Start Printing".
Now self-checking.
Test pattern will be printed.
Please wait.
The machine does process control, then it prints a test pattern.
Place Test Pattern on the exposure glass correctly.
Then press [Start Scanning]

1-33

Installation

August, 2006

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

August, 2006

5. Remove the Color test chart C-4 from the exposure glass (this was put on the
exposure glass during the previous procedure ‘Make a Test Color Print’).
6. Place the color test pattern face-down (this is the test pattern that you made in
step 4). The arrow and notation (“Face down and align the arrow with the rear
left corner of the exposure glass.”) must be at the rear left corner.
7. Press [Start Scanning] on the display. The machine scans the pattern one time.
Scanning…
Please wait.
If you see this error:
Scanning failed.
Place test pattern on the exposure glass correctly.
Then press [Start Scanning].
Make sure that the arrow on the test pattern is in the upper left corner of the
exposure glass.
8. Remove the pattern from the exposure glass and replace it with the Color test
chart C-4.
9. Press "Exit" three times to return to the Copy mode screen.
10. Make a full-color copy of the test chart.
11. Compare the results of the 1st copy (made in step 3 of “Make a Test Color
Print”) and the 2nd copy (made in step 10 above):
If the results of the 2nd copy are better than the results of the 1st copy, you are
finished.
-orIf the results of the 2nd copy are worse than the results of the 1st copy:
• Press the [User Tools] key
• Press Maintenance> Auto Color Calibration> Previous Setting.
12. Remove the color chart from the exposure glass.
13. If the customer is not satisfied with the 1st copy or the 2nd copy, you must do
the printer gamma adjustment (see section 3.19.6).

1-34

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

Counter Display Setting
The default setting for the counter is "0" (development). Do the SP setting below to
set the counter for copy/print (paper count).
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Do SP5045 001 (Counter Display Setting).
3. Select the counter to use:
0

Development counter (Default)

1

Page counter

Important!
• THIS SETTING CAN BE DONE ONLY ONCE. AFTER IT IS SET TO "1", THE COUNTER
SETTING CANNOT BE CHANGED. IF THE WRONG SETTING IS SELECTED BY MISTAKE,
CONTACT YOUR TECHNICAL SUPERVISOR.

Print an SMC Report
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Do SP5990 001 to print a full SMC report. Keep it in a safe location, with the
factory setting sheet.

1-35

Installation

August, 2006

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

August, 2006

Connect the Upper and Lower Tray Heaters
[B]

[C]

[A]
B132I009.WMF

The machine comes from the factory with the tray heaters disconnected.
NOTE: Heater connection is optional, but the heaters must be connected if the
location has high humidity. Speak with the customer before you connect
the tray heaters.
1. Remove the left lower cover [A] ( x 5).
2. Attach the connectors HT5 [B] and HT6 [C] ( x 1, 
 x 2)

1-36

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

Installation

August, 2006

1.3.3 BREAKER SWITCH TEST PROCEDURE
How to Test the Electrical Breaker Switch
The following is the procedure for testing the electrical breaker switch.
NOTE:
• The breaker switch is located at the left rear corner of the machine.
• When the switch is in the ON position, you can see the "|" mark on the lower
part of the switch.

1. Connect the power plug. Then, push the test button [A] with the tip of a pen. If
the switch [B] is functioning normally, it will automatically move to the middle
position. You will see the "|" mark and the “o” mark.
[A]

1-37

[B]

COPIER E-STUDIO4500C/5500C

August, 2006

To return the switch to the ON position:
(Perform following 2 steps continuously)

1. Push down the switch to the lower (OFF) position [C]. (You will see the “o”
mark.)
2. Push up the switch to the upper (ON) position [D]. (You will see the "|" mark.)
[C]

1-38

[D]

August, 2006

COPY TRAY (B756)

Installation

1.4 COPY TRAY (B756)
1.4.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
Description

Q’ty

1. Copy Tray ........................................................................... 1
2. Actuator Arm and Bracket (not used).................................. 1
3. Tapping Screw (not used)................................................... 2
4. Large Cap ........................................................................... 1
5. Small Cap ........................................................................... 4
6. Tapping Screw (M4 x 8)...................................................... 1
7. Harness Clamp ................................................................... 1
8. Paper Height Sensor........................................................... 1
9. Actuator Arm Bracket.......................................................... 1
10. Sensor Bracket ................................................................. 1
11. Actuator Arm ..................................................................... 1
1

2
3

11
5
7
10

9

8

1-39

6

4
B756I001.WMF

COPY TRAY (B756)

August, 2006

1.4.2 INSTALLATION

[A]

B756I101.WMF

1. Remove the left upper cover [A] ( x 2).

1-40

August, 2006

COPY TRAY (B756)

[D]

[B]

[E]
[F]

[A]
B756I003.WMF

2. Attach the paper height sensor [A] and harness clamp [B] to the sensor bracket
[C].
3. Attach the sensor bracket and actuator arm bracket [D] to the copier ( x3).
4. Attach the sensor harness [E] (
 x1,  x4).
5. Attach the actuator arm [F] to the arms of the actuator arm bracket.

1-41

Installation

[C]

COPY TRAY (B756)

August, 2006

[A]

[C]
[D]





[B]



B756I002.WMF

6. Reattach the left upper cover [A] ( x2).
7. Attach the copy tray [B].
8. Attach the small caps [C] to the holes , , 
, .
9. Install the large cap [D] in the finisher power connection point.

1-42

A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331)

Installation

August, 2006

1.5 A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331)
The A3/11" x 17" Paper Size Tray is installed in tray 1 of the copier
e-STUDIO4500c/5500c.

1.5.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
Description

Qty

1. A3/DLT Tray.............................................................................. 1
2. Short Connector........................................................................ 1
3. Paper Size Decal ...................................................................... 1
3
2

1

B331I001.WMF

1-43

A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331)

August, 2006

1.5.2 INSTALLATION
[A]

[B]

B331I011.WMF


WARNING!
Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord
before you do the following procedure.

1. Remove the metal retainer [A] and packing material [B] ( x 1).
2. Check the position of the front and rear fences, and make sure that they are set
for DLT or A3.

1-44

A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331)

Installation

August, 2006

[B]

[A]

B331I707.WMF

[C]

B331I708.WMF

3. Open the front doors.
4. Pull out the tandem feed tray [A] fully.
5. Push the right tandem tray [B] into the machine.
6. Remove the left tandem tray [C] ( x 2 left,  x 3 right).

1-45

A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331)

August, 2006

[A]

[B]
B331I102.WMF

B331I709.WMF

7. From the left tandem tray, remove the front cover [A] ( x 2).
8. Pull out the right tandem tray [B], then remove it. ( x 2).

1-46

August, 2006

A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331)

Installation

[B]

[A]

[C]
B331I003.WMF

[D]

B331I004.WMF

[F]

[E]

9. Put the short connector [A] into the socket in the machine [B].
NOTE: Hold the connector as shown in the illustration.
10. Install the A3 / 11”x17” paper size tray [C] on the right rail [D], center rail [E],
and left rail [F]. Use the screws that you removed in Steps 6 and 8.
NOTE: You must use the short, silver screws on the left and right rails. If you
use one of the longer screws, it will stop the movement of the tray on
the rails.

1-47

A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331)

August, 2006

[A]

B331I105.WMF

11. Install the front cover [A] ( x 2) that was removed from the left tandem tray.
12. Use SP5959 001 to select the paper size for Tray 1 (A3 or 11” x 17”).
13. After you select the paper size, turn the machine off and on to change the
indicator on the operation panel.

1-48

August, 2006

LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699)

Installation

1.6 LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699)
1.6.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.

LCT (B473)
Description
Qty
1. Upper docking pins (grooved) ....................................................
2. Lower docking pin (not grooved, not for e-STUDIO4500c/5500c).
3. Flat-head shoulder screw - M4x6 ...............................................
4. Paper Set Decal .........................................................................

2
1
1
1

4

1
2

3

B473I101.WMF

1-49

LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699)

August, 2006

LCT Adapter (B699)
Description
Qty
1. Brackets .................................................................................
2. Supports.................................................................................
3. Machine Screws (M3x8) ........................................................
4. Machine Screws (M4x8) .......................................................

2
3
3
6

1
2

4
3

B699I101.WMF

1-50

August, 2006

LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699)

Installation

1.6.2 INSTALLATION
Removing Tape and Accessories

[A]

[C]

[A]
[B]
[D]
B473I001.WMF

B473I002.WMF


WARNING!
Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord
before you do this procedure.
1. Remove the filament tape [A].
2. Remove the decals [B].
3. Remove the tape under the lid [C].
4. Remove the docking pins [D] (attached to the rear with tape).
5. Remove the docking pins [E].

1-51

LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699)

August, 2006

LCT Adapter (B699) Installation
The LCT Adapter Kit B699 must be installed before you install the LCT.
[A]
[B]

[C]

[D]

[F]

B699I102.WMF

[E]
B699I103.WMF

1. Put the LCT [A] on its front side.
Important! : Do not put the LCT on its right side (the open side), or you will
bend the ground plate [B].
2. Remove the 3 casters [C] ( x 3 each).
3. Attach the 3 supports [D] ( x 1 each – M3x8 thin screws).
4. Set the LCT in a vertical position.
5. Remove the stay [E] ( x 4).
6. Attach the stay [E] at position [F] ( x 4).

1-52

LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699)

LCT Installation
[A]

[E]

[B]
[D]

[C]

[D]

B699I104.WMF

1. Remove the LCT installation cover [A] from the right side of the machine.
( x 2).
2. Remove the upper covers [B].
3. Remove the lower covers [C].
4. Attach the brackets [D] that are supplied with the LCT Adapter (B699) ( x 2
each – M4 x 8).
5. Attach the two grooved docking pins [E].
NOTE: The docking pin without a groove is not necessary for this installation.

1-53

Installation

August, 2006

LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699)

August, 2006

[A]
[E]

[D]

[C]

[B]

B699I115.WMF

6. Remove the connector cover [A].
7. Align the holes on the side of the LCT [B] with the docking pins [C] on the side
of the machine.
8. Slowly push the LCT onto the pins.
NOTE: The release button [D] is used to unlock the LCT.
9. Connect the plug [E] of the LCT power connector to the side of the machine.

1-54

LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699)

Installation

August, 2006

[A]

[B]

[C]

B699I107.WMF

10. Open the upper cover [A].
11. Remove the cover [B] ( x 2).
12. Attach screws [C] to the brackets on the side of the machine.
13. Attach the cover [B] with the screw that you removed in Step 11.
14. Turn the machine on.
15. Enter the SP mode.
16. Do SP5959 005.
NOTE: The side fences of the NA model are set for 81/2” x 11” paper. You
must select the paper size with this SP.
17. Input "0" for A4 LEF or "4" for 81/2" x 11" LEF.
18. Turn the machine off and on to enable the setting.

1-55

LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699)

August, 2006

LCT (B473): Paper size change from A4 to 81/2" x 11" (LT)
Important: Start the following procedure after the copier installation and LCT
installation are both completed. This is because to do the following procedure, the
copier main power must be turned ON.
1. Turn ON the copier main power.
2. Open the LCT top cover [A].

[A]

3. Hold down the LCT bottom plate function button [B] while covering the photo
sensor [C]. Do this until the bottom plate [D] reaches the bottom of the LCT.
[C]

[B]

[D]

1-56

LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699)

4. Move the side fence brackets [E] from the A4 position to the 81/2" x 11" (LT)
position (1 screw for each bracket).
NOTE: The various side fence positions are written on the bracket [F].
[F]

[E]

5. Remove the shaft [H] from the backside of the LCT top cover (1 snap ring [G]).
[H]
[G]

1-57

Installation

August, 2006

LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699)

August, 2006

6. Move the LCT end fence [I] from the A4 position to the 81/2" x 11" (LT) position.
7. Insert the shaft [H] (1 snap ring).
NOTE: NOTE: The various end fence positions are written on the LCT top
cover [J].
[J]
[I]

[H]

8. Close the LCT top cover [K].
[K]

9. Set Sp5959-005 to a value of 1 (for 81/2" x 11" (LT)).

1-58

81/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474)

Installation

August, 2006

1.7 81/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474)
The 81/2" x 14"/B4 (B474) is installed in the LCT (B473).

1.7.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
Description

Q’ty

1. Tapping screws - M4x8 .......................................................... 4
2. Tapping hex screws - M4x8 ................................................... 6
3. Harness clamp ....................................................................... 1
4. B4/LG frame........................................................................... 1
5. Front bracket.......................................................................... 1
6. Rear bracket .......................................................................... 1
7. Bottom plate extension .......................................................... 1
8. Cover ..................................................................................... 1

1-59

81/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474)

August, 2006

1.7.2 INSTALLATION
LCT Connected to the Machine

[A]

B474I001.WMF

[C]
[B]

[D]
B474I508.WMF


WARNING!
Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you
start this procedure.
1. If the LCT is connected to the copier:
• Open the cover and remove the paper.
• Close the cover.
• Turn the main power switch off.
• Disconnect the LCT from the copier.
2. Remove the LCT cover [A] ( x 1).
3. Remove the right cover [B] ( x 2).
4. Remove the right stay [C] and attach it below ( x 2).
5. Change the position of the lower limit sensor [D] ( x 1).
6. Attach the harness clamp (not shown) to the rear of the plate. Use this clamp to
hold the sensor connector wire.

1-60

August, 2006

81/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474)

Installation

7. Attach the front bracket [A] with the
beveled corner down ( x 2).
NOTE: If the brackets are not easy to
install, lift the bottom plate with your hand.
[B]

8. Attach the rear bracket [B] with the
beveled corner down ( x 2).
9. Attach the bottom plate extension [C] with
the hex screws ( x 4).
[A]

[C]
B474I502.WMF

10. Remove the casters from the bottom of
the B4/LG frame [D]
[D]

11. Align the positioning pin [E].
12. Attach the B4/LG frame [F] with the hex
screws ( x 2).

[E]

[F]
13. Move the front side fence [G] and rear
side fence [H] to the B4 or 81/2" position
and attach it ( x 1).

B474I553.WMF

[H]

[G]
B474I555.WMF

1-61

81/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474)

August, 2006

[A]

[B]

B474I506.WMF

14. Attach the cover [A] (81/2" x 14"/B4) ( x 1).
15. Attach the right cover [B] ( x 2).
16. Connect the LCT to the machine.
17. Turn the machine on.
18. Enter the SP mode.
19. Do SP5959 005.
20. Input “5” for B4 SEF or “6” for 81/2" x 14" SEF.

1-62

2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)

1.8 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)
1.8.1 ACCESSORIES
Description

Q’ty

1. Cushion (with double-sided tape)........................................... 1
2. Ground (earth) plate............................................................... 1
3. Tapping screws - M4 x14 ...................................................... 4
4. Tapping screws - M4 x 8 ....................................................... 2
5. Leveling Shoes ...................................................................... 3
6. Upper output tray ................................................................... 1
7. Lower output tray (B700 Only) ............................................... 1
8. Front joint bracket .................................................................. 1
9. Rear joint bracket................................................................... 1
10. Gasket Seal ........................................................................... 1
11. Support Tray .......................................................................... 1
12. Support Tray (Not used) ....................................................... 1
13. Accessory Pocket ................................................................. 1
1
2

9

3

4

5

6

8

10
7
11

12

13
B700I201.WMF

1-63

Installation

August, 2006

2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)

August, 2006

1.8.2 INSTALLATION
This section shows the installation instructions for two finishers:
• B700 2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher: This can do punching, shifting, stapling,
and saddle-stitching with staples. This booklet finisher can be used with the eSTUDIO4500c/5500c.
• B701 3000-Sheet Finisher: This can do punching, shifting, and stapling but with
no saddle-stitching unit. This finisher can be used with the eSTUDIO4500c/5500c.
NOTE:
• Differences in the installation procedures are shown as “B700” or “B701”.
• Be careful not to touch the sharp edge on the guide [A] indicated in the figure.
[A]

B700I209.MWF


WARNING!
Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord
before you do these procedures.

1-64

August, 2006

2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)

B700

Installation

Removing Tapes and Packing Materials
B701

B701I102.WMF

B700I102.WMF

1. Remove the machine from its box, and remove all the wrapping.
2. Remove all filament tape and packing material from the finisher.
B701

B700

B701I202.WMF
B700I202.WMF

3. Open the front door.
4. Remove all tapes and packing materials inside the finisher.

1-65

2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)

August, 2006

B700

B701

[A]

[A]

B701I204.WMF

B700I204.WMF

5. Pull the jogger unit [A] out of the finisher.
6. Remove the tapes and retainers.

1-66

August, 2006

2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)

Installation

Docking the Finisher to the Copier

[A]

[C]

B700I106.WMF

1. If you will not install the Cover Interposer B704:
[B]
• Remove the strip from the sponge cushion [A] and
attach it to the finisher, then go to Step 2.
Important! Do not put the sponge in a position that will
prevent air flow through the air duct [B] on the copier
after the finisher is connected to the copier.
• Use a short screwdriver to attach the grounding plate [C]
( x 2, M3 x 6).
If you will install the Cover Interposer B704:
B132R734.WMF
• Do not attach the sponge cushion to the finisher. It must be attached to the
cover interposer.
• Do not attach the grounding plate [C] to the finisher. It must be attached to
the cover interposer.
• Install the interposer on the finisher before you dock the finisher to the copier.
(1.15: do the complete procedure.) Then come back to the procedure for
the B700/B701 finisher, and continue from ‘Attaching the Trays’.

1-67

2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)

August, 2006

[A]

[B]
B700I105.WMF

2. Attach the rear joint bracket [A] ( x 2, M4 x 14).
3. Attach the front joint bracket [B] ( x 2, M4 x 14).

1-68

2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)

Installation

August, 2006

[F]
[E]
[C]

[D]

[B]
[A]

B700I107.WMF

4. Remove the screw [A] to release the lock lever [B] ( x 1).
5. Slowly push the finisher against the side of the machine until the brackets [D]
go into their slots. If you do this too quickly, you will bend and cause damage to
the paper-entrance guide plates [C].
6. Attach and tighten the screw removed in Step 5.
7. Connect finisher connector [E] to the main frame.
8. Attach the gasket seal [F] as shown.
Important! Check the duct  on the left side of the
machine. Make sure that the sponge does not block this
duct.



B132R734.WMF

1-69

2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)

August, 2006

Attaching the Trays
B700

B701
[B]

[B]
[A]

[A]

[C]

B701I208.WMF
B700I208.WMF

B700
1. Attach the upper output tray [A] ( x 1, M3 x 6).
NOTE: Make sure that the metal plate [B] is on the top of the tray.
2. Attach the lower output tray [C].

B701
1. Attach the upper output tray [A].
NOTE: Make sure that the metal plate [B] is on the top of the tray.

1-70

August, 2006

2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)

Installation

Leveling the Finisher

[C]

[B]

B701I109.WMF

[A]

1. Put the leveling shoes [A] (x 3) below the feet [B].
2. Use a wrench to adjust the height of the screws [C] to make the machine level.

1-71

2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)

August, 2006

Support Tray
[A]

B700I110.WMF

[B]

Take the following steps if the "Exit Tray Full" message displays even though the
exit tray is not full. (The message is caused by the trailing edges of excessively
curled paper activating the tray full sensor [A] before the tray is actually full.)
1. Remove the paper form the paper feed tray, turn it upside down, then print.
2. If Step 1 does not solve the problem, place the support tray [B] on the exit tray
as shown at figure.
NOTE: Accessory pocket: Attach this pocket to the rear cover of the finisher.
Keep the support trays inside this pocket when they are not being used.

1-72

2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)

Selecting the Staple Supply Name
Enter the SP mode and input this information.
5841

Supply Name Setting

013

Staple Std3

022

Staple Bind2

These names show when the user prints the Inquiry List
Push the Counter key, then push ‘Print Inquiry List’.
Push the Inquiry button on the initial User Tools screen.
Input the name of the staples that are used for standard
stapling (not booklet stapling). This setting should be
done for the B700 and B701.
Input the name of the staples that are used for booklet
stapling (saddle-stitching). This setting is necessary only
for the B700.

Enabling Booklet Binding (B700 Only)
To enable booklet binding (saddle-stitching) for the B700, you must select the
center stapling position.
1. Press the User Tools key.
2. Press “Copier/Document Server Features”.
3. Press the “Input/Output” tab.
4. Press the “Stapling Position” button and press the center (saddle-stitch)
stapling symbol.
5. Go out from the User Tools mode. Set the number of copies, press the center
stapling symbol on the operation panel, then start the print job.

1-73

Installation

August, 2006

PUNCH UNIT (B702)

August, 2006

1.9 PUNCH UNIT (B702)
The Punch Unit B702 is installed in the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher B700/B701.

1.9.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
Description

Qty

1. Punchout Waste Unit .......................................................... 1
2. Slide Drive Unit ................................................................... 1
3. Punch Waste Hopper.......................................................... 1
4. Screws (M3 x 6) .................................................................. 5
5. Side-to-Side Detection Unit................................................. 1
6. Punching Unit...................................................................... 1
1

2

6

3

5

4

B702I101.WMF


WARNING!
Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord
before you do this procedure.

1-74

PUNCH UNIT (B702)

1.9.2 INSTALLATION
[G]

[B]
[A]

[C]

[D]

[H]

B702I102.WMF

[D]

[E]

Rear

[F]

Front

B702I103.WMF

1. If the finisher is connected to the copier, disconnect the power connector [A]
and move the finisher away from the copier.
2. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x 2) and open the front door.
NOTE: At the bottom of the rear cover, make sure to disconnect the tabs that
attach the cover to the frame.
3. Remove the guide plate [C] ( x 2).
4. Remove the shipping retainer bracket [G] (screws [H]). Move the punching unit
[D] along its rails into the finisher. Make sure that the pin engages correctly at
the front and rear.
5. Connect and attach the punching unit [E] (
 x 2,  x 1).
• The cables [F] are coiled and attached to the PCB.
• Attach connectors to CN601 and CN602.

1-75

Installation

August, 2006

PUNCH UNIT (B702)

August, 2006





[A]
B702I104.WMF

[C]
3-pin connector

[B]
B702I105.WMF

6. Attach the slide drive unit [A] to the finisher and connect it to the punching unit
( x 2, 
 x 1). Push in the slide drive unit at  when you attach screw .
7. Make sure that the punching unit moves freely and is not blocked by the screws.
8. Put the side-to-side detection unit [B] in the machine. Make sure that the two
pins are engaged correctly at the front.
9. Make sure that the side-to-side detection unit moves smoothly on its rails. If it
does not, make sure that the rails are aligned with their grooves.
10. Attach the side-to-side detection unit and connect it at the rear ( x 2,  x 1,

 x 1).
11. Pull the short connector out of the connector [C] then connect the cable (
 x
1).
NOTE: This is the 3-pin connector.

1-76

PUNCH UNIT (B702)

Installation

August, 2006

[D]

[B]
4-pin Connector

[C]
B702I106.WMF

[A]
B702I107.WMF

12. At the front, use a pair of wire cutters to remove the part [A] of the cover.
13. Install the punchout waste unit [B] in the finisher.
NOTE: Make sure that the punchout waste unit moves smoothly on its rails. If it
does not, make sure that the rails are aligned with the grooves.
14. Remove the short connector from the connector [C].
NOTE: This is the 4-pin connector.
15. Connect the cable and attach the punchout waste transport unit
(
 x 1,  x 1,  x 1).
16. Set the punch waste hopper [D] in its holder.

1-77

MAILBOX (B762)

August 2006

1.10 MAILBOX (B762)
The Mailbox B762 is installed on the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher B700/B701.

1.10.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
Description

Qty

1. Trays ...................................................................................... 9
2. Guide plate............................................................................. 1
3. Decals (bin display)................................................................ 1
4. Tapping screws - M3x8 .......................................................... 6

1-78

August 2006

MAILBOX (B762)

Installation

1.10.2 INSTALLATION

[A]

[B]

B762I101.WMF


WARNING!
Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you
start this procedure.
1. Remove the filament tape [A].
Important: Move the mailbox carefully. It is easy to cause damage to the
corner leaf plate [B].

1-79

MAILBOX (B762)

August 2006

[A]
[B]

B762I102.WMF

2. If the Cover Interposer Tray B704 is installed on the B700/B701, remove it.
NOTE: The cover interposer tray and mail box cannot be installed on the
finisher at the same time.
3. Remove the top cover [A] of the finisher (
 x1).
4. Remove the bracket [B] (
 x1).

1-80

MAILBOX (B762)

Installation

August 2006

[A]

B762I103.WMF

[B]
[C]
[D]

B762I104.WMF

5. Attach the guide plate [A] to the top of the finisher (
 x2, M3x8).
6. Attach the mailbox [B] to the top of the finisher (
 x4, M3x8).
7. Attach the 9 trays [C] to the mailbox.
8. Give the decals [D] to the customer. The customer will write on these and
attach them at the correct location.

1-81

3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698)

August 2006

1.11 3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER
(B698)
1.11.1 ACCESSORIES
3000-Sheet Finisher B706 Accessories
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
Description
Q’ty
1. Table Extension ..................................................................... 1
2. Leveling Shoes ...................................................................... 4
3. Rear Joint Bracket ................................................................. 1
4. Front Joint Bracket................................................................. 1
5. Entrance Guide Plate............................................................. 1
6. Ground (Earth) Plate.............................................................. 1
7. Tray Holder (Not used for e-STUDIO4500c/5500c) ............... 1
8. Auxiliary Tray (Proof Tray) (Not used) ................................... 1
9. Auxiliary Tray (Shift Tray) (Not used)..................................... 1
10. Phillips Screws w/washer - M4 x 14....................................... 4
11. Tapping Screws - M4 x 8 ....................................................... 2
12. Tapping Screws - M3 x 6 ....................................................... 4
13. Tapping Screws - M3 x 8 ....................................................... 4
14. Shift Tray................................................................................ 1
15. Sponge Cushion .................................................................... 1
1

2

15
3
14
4

10
11

5

12
13

6
7

9
8

1-82

B706I201A.WMF

3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698)

Installation

August 2006

Finisher Adapter Kit B698 Accessories
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
Description

Qty

1. Upper Transport Motor Bracket.............................................. 1
2. Timing Belt ............................................................................. 1
3. Short Connector..................................................................... 1
4. Harness.................................................................................. 1
5. Gasket Seal ........................................................................... 1
6. EPROM.................................................................................. 1
7. Harness Clamps .................................................................... 2
8. Serial Number Decal.............................................................. 1
9. Stopper Bracket ..................................................................... 1
1
2
3

4

5

6
8

B698I101.WMF

7

9

1-83

3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698)

August 2006

1.11.2 INSTALLATION


WARNING!
Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you
do this procedure.

Shipping tape and retainers

B706I002.WMF

1. Remove the finisher from its box. Remove all tapes and packing materials.

1-84

3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698)

Installation

August 2006

[A]

B706I102.WMF

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]
B706I101.WMF

2. Open the front door [A] and remove tape and packing materials.
3. Pull the jogger unit [B] out of the finisher.
4. Remove brackets [C], [D], and [E] (
 x 2 each) with their red tags and wires,
and all tapes and packing materials.

1-85

3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698)

August 2006

Finisher Adapter B698 Installation

[C]
[A]

B698I102.WMF

[B]
1. Remove the finisher rear cover [A] (
 x2).
2. Connect the short connector [B] to CN137 on the finisher main board.
3. Remove the upper transport motor mount [C] ( x1, 
 x3, spring x1).

1-86

B698I103.WMF

3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698)

Installation

August 2006

[C]

[A]
[B]

[D]

B698I104.WMF

4. Remove the transport motor [A] from the original bracket [B] (
 x4).
5. Set the motor on the new bracket [C] supplied with the Finisher Adapter B698.
6. Attach the timing belt [D].
7. Use the same screws to attach the transport motor to the new bracket (
 x4).

1-87

3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698)

August 2006

[B]

[D]
[A]

[C]

[E]
B698I105.WMF

[F]
8. Remove the harness clamp [A].
9. Use wire cutters or radio pliers to remove harness clamp [B].
10. Attach the transport motor assembly [C]. (
 x3,  x2, spring x1).
• The harness [D] is supplied with the Finisher Adapter B698.
• Attach the screws but do not tighten. Pull the spring slightly to apply tension,
then tighten the screws.
11. Remove EPROM [E] and replace it with EPROM [F] that is supplied with the
Finisher Adapter B698.

1-88

3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698)

Installation

August 2006

[C]
[B]

[A]

B698I106.WMF

[D]
B698I107.WMF

12. Put the harness clamps [A] and [B] (supplied with the B698) in the holes ( x2).
Important: Be sure to put the harness clamps in the holes as shown.
13. Install the harnesses through the clamps and close the clamps.
14. Make sure that the harnesses do not touch the motor.
15. Attach the finisher rear cover.
16. Open the front door. Attach the serial number decal [C] below the finisherserial-number [D] decal that is attached to the front, bottom support of the
finisher frame.

1-89

3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698)

August 2006

Finisher Installation

[C]

[A]

[E]

[B]

B698I108.WMF

B706I004.WMF

[D]

1. Attach the rear joint bracket [A] (
 x 2) (M4 x 14).
2. Attach the front joint bracket [B] (
 x 2) (M4 x 14).
3. Remove the connector cover [C].
4. Attach the ground plate [E] (
 x 2) (M3 x 6).
Important: Set the grounding plate so there is no gap [D] between the ground
plate and the bottom frame of the finisher.

1-90

3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698)

Installation

August 2006

[B]

[C]

[A]

B706I005.WMF

[D]

B706I207.WMF

5. Install the table extension [A] (
 x 2) (M4 x 8).
6. Make sure that the edge of the table extension is aligned with the edge of the
finisher [B].
7. If you will not install the Cover Interposer Tray B704:
• Remove the strip from the sponge cushion [C], and attach it to the finisher.
• Attach the entrance guide plate [D] (
 x 2) (M3 x 6).
If you are going to install the Cover Interposer Tray B704:
• Do not attach the sponge cushion [C].
• Do not attach the entrance guide plate [D] to the finisher.
• Install the interposer tray before you dock the finisher to the copier. Then
come back to the procedure for the B706 finisher, and continue from
‘Selecting the Staple Supply Name’.

1-91

3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698)

August 2006

[B]

[H]
[E]

[D]

[C]
[A]
[G]
[G]

[F]

B706I006.WMF

[F]

8. Attach the shift tray [A] (
 x 4) (M3 x 8).
9. Open the front door [B] of the finisher.
10. Remove the screw [C] from the lock lever [D], then pull out the lock lever.
11. Align the finisher on the joint brackets [E] and push the finisher against the side
of the copier.
12. Make sure that the top edges of the finisher and the copier are parallel from
front to rear as shown below:

B706I534.WMF

13. Set the leveling shoes [F] (x4) below the feet [G].
14. Use a wrench to adjust the height of the feet [G] to make the machine level.
15. Push in the lock lever [D], attach it (
 x 1), then close the front door.
16. Connect the finisher cable [H] to the copier.

1-92

August 2006

3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698)

Enter the SP mode and input this information
5841

012

Supply Name Setting

Staple Std

These names show when the user prints the Inquiry List.
To print this list press User Tools> [Inquiry]> [Print Inquiry
List]> [Start].
Input the name of the staples that are used for corner
stapling. This setting should be done for the B706 with
B698.

Stopper Bracket (Co-packed with B698) Installation
The stopper bracket improves stapling quality when using curled paper.
Installation Procedure:
1. Open the finisher front cover and pull the jogger unit out of the finisher.
2. Remove the inner cover [A] (2 screws).

[A]
2 Screws

1-93

Installation

Selecting the Staple Supply Name

3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698)

August 2006

3. Peel the two-sided tape [B] off the stopper bracket [C].
4. Attach the stopper bracket to position [D].
See details below.

[C]
[D]

[E]

[B]

Important:
• Make sure the stopper bracket [C] is flat against the edge of bracket [G].
• Make sure the stopper bracket [C] covers the shaft [F].
NOTE: The stopper bracket [C] limits the movement of the paper pressure unit [E].
This is to prevent the paper pressure unit from pressing curled paper too
much. If curled paper is pressed too hard, the staple position will sometime
shift out of position,
[F]
[G]

[C]

1-94

August 2006

PUNCH UNIT B531

Installation

1.12 PUNCH UNIT B531
The Punch Unit B531 is installed in the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706.

1.12.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
Description

Qty

1. Punch unit.................................................................................
2. Punch Waste Hopper................................................................
3. Sensor Arm and Sensor............................................................
4. Spacer (2 mm) ..........................................................................
5. Spacer (1 mm) ..........................................................................
6. Spring .......................................................................................
7. Step Screw (large) (M4 x 10) ....................................................
8. Tapping Screw (M4 x 10)..........................................................
9. Step Screw (small) (M3 x 4)......................................................
10. Machine Screw, Washer (M4 x 6) .............................................
11. Knob .........................................................................................
1

2
3

4
11
10

9

8

7

6

1-95

5

B531I001.WMF

1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1

PUNCH UNIT B531

August 2006

1.12.2 INSTALLATION
[A]

[C]
[B]
[D]
[F]
B531I09.WMF

[E]
B531I002.WMF


WARNING!
Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you
start this procedure.
1. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
2. Open the front door and remove the rear cover (
 x 2).
3. Remove the punch unit from its packing materials. Remove the motor protector
plate [A] (
 x 4) and the cam lock plate [B] (
 x 1).
4. Remove the inner cover [C] (
 x 3).
5. Behind the inner cover at [D] and [E], push the lock tabs to the right to release
the inner cover from the frame.
6. Remove the plastic sections [F] from the cover.

1-96

PUNCH UNIT B531

Installation

August 2006

[A]

B531I003.WMF

[B]

[C]

B531I004.WMF

7. Remove the paper guide [A] (
 x 4).
8. Install the sensor arm and sensor [B] (
 x 1), small step screw (M3 x 4).
NOTE: Make sure that the sensor arm turns freely on the step screw.
9. Attach the spring [C].

1-97

PUNCH UNIT B531

August 2006

[B]
[E]

B531I006.WMF

[A]

[D]
[C]
B531I005.WMF

10. At the rear side of the finisher, put the punch unit [A] in the finisher.
11. At the front side, attach the punch unit [B] with the large step screw (
 x 1, M4
x 10).
12. At the rear, attach the 2 mm spacer [C] and attach the tapping screws [D] to the
punch unit (
 x 2, M4 x 10).
NOTE: At the hole immediately above the lock lever, use one of the screws
from the paper guide removed above to attach the remaining two
spacers to the frame. These two spacers are used to adjust the
horizontal position of the punch holes.
13. At the front side, attach the punch unit knob [E] (
 x 1, M4 x 6).

1-98

PUNCH UNIT B531

Installation

August 2006

[C]
[E]
[D]

[A] [F]
[B]

B531I007.WMF

B531I008.WMF

14. Connect the PCB harness connector [A] to CN129 of the finisher PCB and to
CN600 of the punch unit PCB.
15. Connect the HP Sensor-2 harness connector [B] to CN130 of the finisher PCB
and to HP Sensor-2.
16. Connect the end of the hopper-full-sensor cable that has one connector [C] to
the hopper full sensor on the arm ( x 1, clamp x 1). Then connect the other
two connectors to HP Sensor-1 [D] and CN620 [E] of the punch PCB.
NOTE: No special DIP switch settings are necessary for this punch unit. The
punch unit sends an identification signal to the machine. Then the
machine knows the type of punch unit that is installed.
17. Put the punch waste hopper [F] in the finisher.
18. Attach the inner cover and rear cover.
19. Close the front door and connect the finisher to the machine.

1-99

OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703/B513)

August 2006

1.13 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703/B513)
The Output Jogger Unit B703 is installed in the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher
B700/B701.
The Output Jogger Unit B513 is installed in the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706.

1.13.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
Description

Qty

1. Jogger Unit ................................................................................... 1
2. Tapping Screws - M3 x 6............................................................... 2

1

2

B703I101.WMF


WARNING!
Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord
before you do this procedure.

1-100

OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703/B513)

Installation

August 2006

1.13.2 INSTALLATION

[B]

[A]
B703I103.WMF

B703I102.WMF

1. Turn the main machine switch off.
2. Disconnect the finisher cable from the main frame.
3. Use the flat head of a screwdriver to remove the left upper cover [A].
4. Remove the cover plate [B] (
 x 2). Keep the screws.

1-101

OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703/B513)

August 2006

[B]
[C]

[A]

B703I104.WMF

5. While you hold the jogger unit with the connector [B] on the left, put the hooks
of the frame of the jogger unit [A] into the holes in the left and right side of the
finisher frame.
6. Fasten connector [B] to the socket ( x 1).
7. Attach the jogger unit to the finisher (
 x 2, M3 x 6).
8. Reattach the jogger unit cover [C] to the jogger unit (
 x 2).

1-102

COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)

Installation

August 2006

1.14 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)
1.14.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
Description
Q’ty
1. Front door extension (top)...................................................... 1
2. Rear cover extension (bottom)............................................... 1
3. Shoulder screws .................................................................... 3
4. Tapping screws – M4 x 8 ....................................................... 9
5. Tapping screws – M3 x 8 ....................................................... 2
6. Tapping screws – M3 x 6 ....................................................... 5
7. Adjuster plates (B706 Only) ................................................... 2
8. Hinge Bracket (B706 Only) .................................................... 1
9. Plate Extension (bottom)........................................................ 1
10. Gasket Seals ......................................................................... 2
11. Right Rear Cover Plate (B706 only)....................................... 1
12. Spacer ................................................................................... 1
13. Anti-Static Brush .................................................................... 1
14. Spacer (B706 only) ................................................................ 1
15. Spacer (Not used).................................................................. 2
16. Right front corner plate (for B706) only)................................. 1
17. Front door extension (bottom)
1

2
3

4

5

7

6

8

9
10
11

12

17

13
16

15

1-103

14

B704I101.WMF

COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)

August 2006

1.14.2 INSTALLATION
You can install the Cover Interposer Tray B704 on these finishers:
• 2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher B700
• 3000-Sheet Finisher B701
• 3000-Sheet Finisher B706

Removing Tapes and Packing Materials

[A]

[B]

B704I102.WMF


WARNING!
Make sure that the finisher is disconnected from the main machine, and
that the copier is turned off and the power cord is disconnected, before you
start this procedure.
1. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect it.


CAUTION
After disconnecting the finisher, for safety remove the front and rear
finisher connectors from the copier. Reattach them just before docking
the finisher to the copier.
2. Remove all tape and retainers from the cover interposer tray [A].
3. Remove the tape and packing material [B] from the ground connector.

1-104

COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)

Installation

August 2006

Preparing the Finisher (B700/B701/B706)
[A]
[B]

[C]

B704I103.WMF

1. Remove the cover [A] of the relay connector.
2. Loosen the screw of the bracket [B] (
 x 1) then remove the bracket.
3. Remove the guide plate [C]. (This guide plate will be attached to the cover
interposer; do not discard it.)
Important: If you are installing the cover interposer tray with a previously
installed finisher B700/B701/B706, remove the sponge strip from the finisher
and save it for re-attachment to the interposer tray.
4. If you will install the B700/B701, attach the extensions to the finisher without
modification. Go to "Attaching the Extensions for the B700/B701" on page 11093.
-orIf you will install the B706, modify the extensions and attach them to the
finisher. Go to "Attaching the Extensions for the B706" on page 1-106.

1-105

COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)

August 2006

Attaching the Extensions for the B706
Important!
• The procedures in this section are for installation of the cover interposer with the
B706 only.
• If you will install the cover interposer with the B700/B701, go to the next section.
Modify the Attachments for the B706
Front Door Extension (Top)

Rear Cover Extension (Bottom)

[D]
[A]
[E]
[G]
[C]
[B]

[F]

[H]

Bottom Plate Extension
B704I108.WMF

Front Door Extension:
1. Attach spacer [A] to the front door extension (top) (
 x 2).
2. Remove the lower hinge [B] and replace it with [C] (
 x 2).
Rear Cover Extension (Bottom):
3. Remove [D] and replace it with [E] (
 x 1).
4. Remove [F] and replace it with [G] (
 x 1).
Plate Extension (Bottom):
5. Remove bracket [H] and attach it to the end of the bottom plate extension
(
 x 2).

1-106

COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)

Installation

August 2006

Prepare the Cover Interposer for the B706

[C]

[A]

[B]

B706I900.WMF

1. Remove spacer [A] (
 x1).
2. Attach spacer [B] (
 x1).
3. Remove the screws from the connector case [C] (
 x2).
4. Push the connector case in the direction of the arrow until the second set of
holes are aligned with the holes below, then attach the screws.

1-107

COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)

August 2006

Attach the Extensions to the B706





[E]

[A]


[F]

[B]
[D]
[C]

B704I110.WMF

1. Attach the three shoulder screws [A] 
 (
 x 3).
2. If the finisher was previously installed, remove the ground plate [B] from the
finisher and keep the screws.
3. Attach the bottom plate [C] (
 x 2, M3 x 6).
4. Attach the ground plate to the bottom plate (
 x 2).
5. Attach the bottom front cover extension [D] (
 x 2, M4 x 8).
NOTE: Attach this cover first.
6. Attach the top front cover extension [E] (
 x 2, M4 x 8).
7. Set two screws into the holes provided for the rear cover extension [F] (
 x 2,
M3 x 6).
8. Set the keyholes of the rear cover extension over of the heads of the screws.
9. Press up on the bottom of the rear cover extension to close the gap at the top
of the cover, then tighten the screws.

1-108

COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)

Installation

August 2006

Attaching the Extensions for the B700/B701




[A]




[E]

[F]

[B]

[D]
[C]

B704I104.WMF

1. Attach the three shoulder screws [A] 
 (
 x 3).
2. If the finisher has been previously installed, remove the ground plate [B] from
the finisher and save the screws.
3. Attach the bottom plate [C] (
 x 2, M3 x 6) then attach the ground plate to the
bottom plate (
 x 2).
4. Attach the bottom front cover extension [D] (
 x 2, M4 x 8).
5. Attach the top front cover extension [E] (
 x 2, M4 x 8).
6. Attach the rear cover extension [F] (
 x 2, M3 x 6).

1-109

COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)

August 2006

Attaching the Interposer Tray (B700/B701/B706)
[B]

[A]

[C]

B704I105.WMF

1. Pick up the cover interposer tray, align the keyholes [A] with the shoulder
screws [B], then slide the cover interposer down onto the screws.
2. Secure the cover interposer with the screw [C] (
 x 1, M3 x 6).
3. If you are installing the cover interposer tray on the B700/B701, skip the next
section and go directly to “Docking Finisher and Interposer” on page 1-11307.
-orIf you will install the cover interposer tray on the B706, go to the next section,
install the corner plates on the B706, then go to “Docking Finisher and
Interposer” on page 1-11307.

1-110

COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)

Installation

August 2006

Attaching the Corner Plates for the B706
Important:
• The corner plates are installed on the B706 only.
Right Rear Corner Plate (B706 only)

NG

OK

[C]

[D]

[A]

[B]
B704I112.WMF

1. Temporarily attach the screws [A] (with about two turns) to the right end of the
finisher extension table [B] (
 x 2, tapping M4 x 8)
NOTE: The holes are not visible because they are covered with tape. Just
punch the screws through the holes.
2. Align the cutouts [C] of the right rear corner plate [D] with the screws and attach
the plate.
3. With a long screwdriver inserted through the cutouts in the right rear corner
plate [D], tighten the screws to fasten the right rear corner plate to the table
extension [B].

1-111

COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)

August 2006

[C]

[B]

[A]

B704I111.WMF

4. Temporarily attach the screw [A] (M4 x 8) with about two turns to fasten to the
panel at the right front corner.
NOTE: The hole is not invisible because it covered with tape. Just punch the
screw through the hole.
5. With the clamp [B] under the edge of the corner, align the cutout [C] in the right
front corner plate with the screw, then snap it into position.
6. With a long screwdriver insert into the plate cutout [C], and tighten the screw to
fasten the right front corner plate.

1-112

COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)

Docking Finisher and Interposer to the Machine (B700/B701/B706)

[C]

[A]

[B]
[D]
1. Attach the rear bracket [A] (
 x 2, M4 x14).
2. Attach the front bracket [B] (
 x 2, M4 x14).
3. Attach the gasket seals [C] and [D].

1-113

B704I121.WMF

Installation

August 2006

COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)

[B]

August 2006

[C]

[G]

[E]

[A]

[F]

[D]

B704I106.WMF

4. Attach the sponge strip [A] that is supplied with the finisher.
5. Attach the guide plate (removed from the finisher) to the cover interposer.
• Attach the front end [B] of the plate (
 x 1).
• Attach the rear end of the plate with the anti-static brush [C] (
 x 1).
Important: Use the two small tapping screws that are supplied, and not the
machine screws removed from the finisher guide plate.
6. Release the lock lever [D] (
 x 1).
7. Attach the pad [E]. (This pad is provided with the finisher.)
8. Slowly push the finisher against the side of the
machine until the brackets [F] go into the slots.


WARNING!
Move the finisher carefully, or you will bend the
entrance guide plates.
9. Attach the lock lever [D] (
 x 1).
10. Connect the connector [G] to the copier.
Important! Check the duct  on the left side of the
machine. Make sure that the sponge does not prevent air
flow through this duct.

1-114



B132I734.WMF

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

1.15 MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS
1.15.1 OVERVIEW
The machine controller box has five board slots and 3 SD cards. Make sure that
each board and SD card is put in the correct slot. For more, please see the decal
on the controller box.

NEXT
COPIER
KEY
CARD

A
I/F Card Slot

L-ADP

C

A File Format Converter

D

B Tandem
C External CTL

B

D Option

SD Card Slot 3: Service (Firmware Update)

E Ethernet & USB (Ver. 2.0)
SD Card Slot

E

3 Service
2 Option
1 System

A

File Format Converter

B

Tandem

C

External CTL

D

Option

E

Ethernet & USB (Ver. 2.0)

3

Service

2

Option

1

System

SD Card Slot 2: Options (Applications)
SD Card Slot 1: System
Do not remove!

SD Card Slot

B132I907.WMF

Board Slots
A
B
C
D
E

Not used
Copy Connector Type 3260 (B328)
EFI Printer Controller E-7000 (G815)
Not used
Not used

SD Card Slots
3
2
1

Version updates, moving applications to other SD Cards.
Applications (1 or several applications combined on 1 SD Card).
System Controller SD Card. Never remove!

Important!
• Only one SD Card slot (Slot 2) is available for applications. To install more than
one application, they must be copied on the same SD Card. (1.15.5)

1-115

Installation

August 2006

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

August 2006

1.15.2 ACCESSORY CARDS



	









B737I102.WMF

No.






	




Code
B328
EFI-V G815
-

Name
Not use
Copy Connector Type 3260
EFI Printer Controller (E-7000)
Not use
Not use
Not use
Not use
Printer/Scanner unit GM-2100

Slot
A
B
C
D
D
D
D
E

Page
1-132
1-134

1-123

Note: Items , , , 	, must be in the same slot. Because of this, only one of
these cards can be installed at the same time.

1-116

August 2006

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

Installation

1.15.3 APPLICATIONS PROVIDED ON SD CARDS

[A]

B132I909.WMF

These applications are available on SD cards [A]. You install them in Slot 2:
• Printer/Scanner Unit GM-2100
• PostScript3 Unit Type 3260 (B761)
• Data Overwrite Security Unit Type C (B735)
Slot 2 is the only slot available for these application SD cards.
If the customer must use more than one application, then the applications must be
put together on one SD card. (1.15.5)
Important
• Slot 1 (the lower slot) is for the system SD card only. The system SD card must
not be removed. The machine will show SC732 if a different SC card is put in
Slot 1.
• Slot 2 holds the application SD card. It also holds the target SD card when
applications are put together on one card.
• Slot 3 (the top slot) is used to update the machine firmware. It also holds the
source SD card when applications are put together on one card.

1-117

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

August 2006

1.15.4 HANDLING DIMMS AND SD CARDS


WARNING!
Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord
before you install a controller option.
Important!
• To prevent damage to the controller box, always do your work carefully. Do not
put your hand or a tool into the box when you remove the controller box or install
an option.
• To prevent damage to the circuits on the boards, always touch a metal surface to
remove static charge from your hands before you touch electronic components.
[A]

DIMMs

[B]

1. Hold the ROM DIMM. The edge connector
[A] must point toward the slot and the notch
[B] in the DIMM must be in the top right
corner.
2. Put the edge connector [C] in the slot at a
30-degree angle from the surface of the
board. If the angle is too low, the upper
contact could bend.
3. Carefully move the outer edge of the ROM
DIMM up and down slightly until it goes into
the connector. Then carefully push it down
level with the controller board.
Important: If the upper contact is pushed in
with force, and becomes bent, the
connection will be defective, and the
machine could stop.

[C]
G338I901.WMF

SD cards
To install and remove an SD Card:
SD cards are held in position by a small spring-lock mechanism.
1. To install an SD card, push it into the slot until it stops, then release it.
2. To remove an SD card, push the SD card in carefully to release it, and then
remove it from the slot.
Important: To prevent damage to the SD card or the slot lock, always push the
card in, to release it, before you try to remove it.

1-118

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

Installation

August 2006

1.15.5 MERGING APPLICATIONS ON ONE SD CARD
Overview
Only one SD card slot is available for SD
card applications.
The machine has three SD card slots. Slot
1 is used for the system card. Slot 2 is
used for application programs, and Slot 3
is used for servicing only.

NEXT
COPIER
KEY
CARD

A
I/F Card Slot

C

A File Format Converter

D

B Tandem
C External CTL

If the customer wants to use more than
one application SD card, the applications
must be put together on the same SD card.

L-ADP

B

D Option
E

Ethernet & USB (Ver. 2.0)

3

Service

2

Option

1

System

SD Card Slot

E
A

File Format Converter

B

Tandem

C

External CTL

D

Option

E

Ethernet & USB (Ver. 2.0)

3

Service

2

Option

1

System

SD Card Slot

B132I907.WMF

Important
• The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program
to the target SD card.
• Do not use an SD card if it was used with a computer before this time. Correct
operation is not guaranteed if this type of SD card is used.
• The SD card is the only evidence that the customer is licensed to use the
application program. The service engineer may occasionally need to check the
SD card and its data to solve problems. SD cards must be stored in the cover on
the door of the copier. (Pg.1-116)
• A licensing agreement prohibits copying of the PostScript SD card. However, you
can copy an application from another SD card to the PS SD card.
• If an SD card was used to combine applications on that card, that SD card
cannot be used for a different function.
• NEVER REMOVE THE SYSTEM SD CARD FROM SLOT 1.

1-119

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

August 2006

Merging Applications
Do this procedure to put more than one application on one SD card.
1. Turn off the copier.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover (
 x2).
3. Put the Source SD card in Slot 3 (top slot). This card contains the application
that you want to copy.
NOTE: The PS SD card cannot be the source card, because it cannot be
copied.
4. Put the Target SD card in Slot 2 (middle slot). The application on the card in
Slot 3 will be copied to this card.
5. Open the front door.
6. Turn the copier on.
7. Go into the SP mode and select SP5873 001.
8. Press "Execute".
9. Read the instructions on the display and press "Execute" to start copying.
10. When the display tells you copying is completed, touch "Exit".
11. Turn the copier off.
12. Remove the Source SD card from Slot 3. Keep the target SD card in Slot 2.
13. Turn the copier on.
14. Go into the User Tools mode and check that all the applications on the SD card
in Slot 2 are enabled:
User Tools> System Settings> Administrator Tools> Firmware Version> Next
(5/5)
15. Turn the copier off again, then:
• Attach the SD card slot cover.
• Attach the rear cover of the machine.
• Remove the cover from the front door, and store the SD card that was
copied. (Pg.1-1226)
Important!
• After an SD card is copied, it cannot be used. But it must be stored in the
front door, to serve as proof of purchase by the customer.
• The original card can also be used to perform an undo procedure (SP 5873
002). Before you put the card in the front cover, label it carefully so that you
can identify it easily if you need to do the undo procedure (see the next page).

1-120

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

Installation

August 2006

Undo Exec
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Put the SD card with the merged applications in SD Card Slot 2.
3. Put the original destination SD card (the one stored in the front door) into Slot 3.
NOTE: The SD card in Slot 3 must be the original SD card of the application
you want to move from Slot 2 to Slot 3. You cannot use any blank SD
card in Slot 3.
4. Turn the main switch on.
5. Go into the SP mode and do SP5873-002 (Undo Exec)
6. Follow the messages on the operation panel to complete the procedure.
7. Turn the main switch off.
8. Remove the SD cards from the slots.
9. Turn the main switch on.

1-121

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

August 2006

Storing SD Application Cards on Site
[C]

[B]

[A]
B132I728.WMF

1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the cover [A] on the door (
 x2).
3. Remove the block [B].
4. Store the SD cards [C] inside the cover.
5. Attach the cover to the machine.

1-122

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

Installation

August 2006

1.15.6 PRINTER/SCANNER UNIT GM-2100 (B737)
Accessories
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
Description

Qty

1. Scanner/Printer DIMM ........................................................... 1
2. NIB (Network Interface Board)............................................... 1
3. Printer/Scanner SD card......................................................... 1
4. Screws - M3x8....................................................................... 2
5. Ferrite Core ........................................................................... 1
6. Key Top Assembly................................................................. 1
7. Operating Instructions – Printer ............................................. 1
8. Installation Instructions .......................................................... 1
9. FCC Label ............................................................................ 1
10. Software CD-ROM................................................................. 3

1-123

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

August 2006

Installation


WARNING!
Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you
start this procedure.
NOTE: For the printer/scanner unit, the machine must have a minimum of 128 MB
of memory (more is recommended). Memory chips are not supplied with
this option.

[F]
[E]

[A]

[B]
B132I710.WMF

[C]
[D]

B737I107.WMF

1. Disconnect the ARDF cable [A] ( x1).
2. Remove the controller board [B] (
 x3).
3. Connect the Scanner/Printer DIMM (128 MB expansion memory) into RAM slot
CN501 on the controller board.
4. Attach the controller board (
 x3).
5. Remove the I/F Slot Cover E [C] (
 x2).
6. Install the NIB [D] (NIC/USB) in Slot E.
7. Remove the SD card slot cover [E] (
 x2)
8. Install the Printer/Scanner SD card [F] in SD Card Slot 2 (middle slot).
9. Attach the SD card slot cover (
 x2).

1-124

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

Installation

August 2006

10. Wind the Ethernet cable [A] around
the ferrite core [B] as shown.
150 mm (6 in.)

11. Make sure there is a minimum of 150
mm (6 in.) between the ferrite core
and the end of the cable.
12. Close the ferrite core.
13. Connect the RJ45 plug [C] on the
Ethernet cable to the NIB.

[A]
[C]
[B]
B737I900.WMF

[D]
14. Replace the old key top assembly [D]
with the new key tops [E].

[E]

15. Do the procedures in the operating
instructions to make the user settings
(for example, the IP address).

B737I115.WMF

16. Do the color calibration for the printer:
User Tools> Maintenance> Auto Color Calibration> Printer Function:
Do all three test patterns.

1-125

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

August 2006

USB SP Settings
The following SP commands are available. But, only one setting can be adjusted,
and this must only be done if the customer has USB data transmission errors.
NOTE: Do not change the settings marked “DFU”. These settings are for design
and factory use only.
To go into the SP mode:
1. Press ‘Clear Modes’ 
2. On the operation panel keypad, input 107.
3. Hold down [Clear/Stop] () for more than 3 seconds.
4. Press “Copy SP” on the touch-panel to open the SP command selection screen.
14APR 2002 03:25
SP Mode (Service)

SP2XXX

Feed
Drum

SP3XXX

Process

SP4XXX

Scanner
Mode
Periphs
Data Log

SP1XXX

SP5XXX
SP6XXX
SP7XXX
SP8XXX

Open All

Data Log2

Close All

Copy Window
Group

X-XXX-XXX

SP Direct

Exit

COPY: SP1-001-001

Page

Line

21

Line

Page

Group

Initial

0
Prev Page

Next Page

B064I999.WMF

5. Input 5844.
SP No.
5844 001

Name
Transfer Rate

5844 002
5844 003
5844 004

Vendor ID
Product ID
Dev. Release Num

Function
Adjusts the USB transfer rate. Do not change the setting
unless there is a data transfer error with the USB high
speed mode.
HS/FS: High speed/Full speed auto adjust
(480Mbps/12Mbps)
FS:
Full speed (12Mbps fixed)
Displays the vendor ID. DFU
Displays the product ID. DFU
Displays the development release version number. DFU

1-126

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

Installation

August 2006

1.15.7 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE 3260 (B761)
Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description

Q’ty

1. SD Card................................................................................. 1

[A]

[B]

B132I909.WMF

1. Remove the slot cover [A].
2. Put the PostScript3 SD card [B] in SD card slot 2 (middle slot).
Important
• Only one SD card slot is available for applications.
• If the customer wants to use one more application that must go in slot 2
(Printer/Scanner B737, for example), you must copy the contents of the
printer/scanner SD card to the PostScript3 SD card. (1.15.5)
• The scanner/printer application must be copied to the PostScript3 SD card,
because the PostScript3 SD card cannot be copied for copyright reasons.
• After you copy the printer/scanner SD card, store it behind the door.
(Pg.1-1226) The application SD cards are the property of the customer
and should remain at the site.

1-127

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

August 2006

1.15.8 DATAOVERWRITESECURITY UNIT TYPE C (B735)
Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description

Q’ty

2. SD Card................................................................................. 1

Before You Begin…
You must copy the DataOverwriteSecurity card to another application SD card. The
original SD card, with the DataOverwriteSecurity application only, cannot be used.
For example, you can copy the contents of the printer/scanner SD card to the Data
Overwrite Security Unit (B735) SD card. (1.15.5).
Also, the DataOverwriteSecurity card application can be copied to the
scanner/printer card.
After you copy the printer/scanner SD card or DataOverwriteSecurity card, store it
behind the door.
(Pg.1-1226). The application SD cards are the property of the customer and
should remain at the site.

1-128

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

Installation

August 2006

Seal Check And Removal

[A]
B692I901.WMF

B692I903.WMF

[B]


CAUTION
Before you start the installation, you must check the box seals to make
sure that they were not removed after the items were sealed in the box at
the factory.
1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box.
• Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner.
• The surfaces of the tapes must be blank. If you see “VOID” on the tapes, do
not install the components in the box.
2. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show “VOID”, remove them from the corners
of the box.
3. When you remove each seal, the “VOID” marks [B] can be seen. In this
condition, they cannot be attached to the box again.
4. Copy the DataOverwriteSecurity card to another application’s SD card (for
example, the printer/scanner or PostScript card).
5. After you copy the DOS card, store it behind the door. Use the combined
DataOverwriteSecurity / other application SD card for the next part of the
installation procedure.

1-129

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

August 2006

Installation Procedure


CAUTION
The machine should always be turned off and its power cord disconnected
before you do this procedure.

1. If the machine is on, turn off the main power switch.
2. Disconnect the network cable (if the
machine is connected to a network).
3. Remove the slot cover [A] (
 x 2).
4. Install the SD Card [B] into slot 2,
then attach the slot cover.
5. Connect the network cable (if the
machine is connected to a network).

[A]

6. Turn the main power switch on.

[B]

B132I909.WMF

1-130

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

7. Enter the SP mode and do SP5878.
8. Go out of the SP mode, turn the operation switch off, then turn the main power
switch off.
9. Turn the machine power on.
10. Enter the User Tools mode, and select System Settings> Administrator> Auto
Erase Memory Setting> On.
11. Go out of the User Tools mode.
[A]
[B]
09/09/2003
Origi.

14:13

Total

0

[C]

Copies

1

0
B692I904.WMF
B692I905.WMF

12. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed.
13. Make a Sample Copy.
14. Check the overwrite erase icon.
• The bottom of the icon becomes thicker [B].
• “Next Copy” is shown for a short interval below the icon.
• The icon goes back to its usual shape [C].
15. Remove the Document Server and Scanner key-tops, and replace them with
the blank key-tops that are supplied with the kit.

1-131

Installation

August 2006

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

August 2006

1.15.9 COPY CONNECTOR TYPE 3260 (B328)

[A]

[B]

B737I904.WMF

1. Turn the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following
procedure.
2. Remove the cover [A] of Slot B (
 x 2).
3. Install the Copy Connector Board B328 [B] in Slot B and attach it with the
screws.
4. Remove the rear upper cover. (See 3.3.6)

1-132

August 2006

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

[F]

Installation



[G]



[B]
[C]

[A]
[D]
[E]
B737I112A.WMF

5. Remove the controller box cover [C] (
 x3).
6. Connect the power repeater cable [B] to:
 CN594

 CN4
7. Reattach the controller box cover and rear upper cover.
8. Repeat Steps 1 to 7 to install the connection kit on the second machine.
9. Insert the end of the interface cable [C] to the connection PCB.
10. If additional cable is required, connect the cables [E] with repeater hubs [D].
11. On the operation panel of each machine, remove the second cover [F] from the
bottom ("Printer").
12. Install the appropriate key on each machine.
Attach the "Printer/Other Function" key [G] (or its equivalent symbol for EU) if
the printer/scanner option is installed.
-orAttach the "Other Function" key [G] (or its equivalent symbol for EU) if the
printer/scanner option is not installed.
13. Attach the other end of the connection cable to the connection PCB installed in
the other machine.

1-133

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

August 2006

1.15.10 EFI PRINTER CONTROLLER (G815)

[A]

[B]

B737I905.WMF

1. Turn the machine off.
2. Remove the cover [A] of Slot C (
 x 2).
3. Install the EFI Printer Controller (G815) board [B] in Slot C and attach it with
the screws.

1-134

August, 2006

OVERVIEW

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 OVERVIEW
The amounts mentioned (K=1,000) as the PM interval indicate the number of prints
or copies unless stated otherwise. These numbers are based on the PM counter.
Required Materials
Item
Optical Cloth
Alcohol
Exposure Glass Cleaner
Lubricant Powder

No.
A0129111
--A1939310
B1329700

Important
• The Lubricant Powder (B1329700) (composed of Zinc Stearate) is specially
designed for this machine (e-STUDIO4500c/5500c). If this lubricant powder is
not available, please use this machine’s yellow toner.
• Always use this lubricant powder to lubricate the drum and ITB during servicing.
• Never use the previous Setting Powder (54429101) in any service procedure for
the e-STUDIO4500c/5500c. The composition of this Setting Powder and the
Lubricant Powder is completely different.
• If you use Setting Powder (5442910) to service this machine, you will damage
the drum charge roller and cause problems with image quality.


WARNING
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing
any procedure in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes.
Important!
• DO THE FORCED MUSIC ADJUSTMENT WITH SP 2111 001 (
 3.19.4).

2-1

PM COUNTER

August, 2006

2.2 PM COUNTER
The PM Counter main menu and submenu allows you to review the PM counts for
both units and individual components.

2.2.1 DISPLAYING THE PM COUNTER
1. Press [Clear Modes] ()> "107"> [Clear/Stop] ().

B132P901.BMP

2. Press [PM Counter].







B132P902.BMP




All PM Parts List. Displays all PM items (all PM items, not only PM units). Lists all PM
items regardless of PM yield indicator settings. (Pg.2-4)



Parts list for PM yield indicator. Displays on the items with their PM yield indicator
settings set to "Yes". (Pg.2-4)



Clear all PM settings. Resets all PM counter settings to "0" at the same time. PM
items can be reset one by one with the [Clear] button. (Pg.2-4)



Counter list print out. Prints the PM counter on paper.

2-2

August, 2006

PM COUNTER

2.2.2 PM PARTS SCREEN DETAILS
All PM Parts list: Main Menu
The "All PM Parts list" displays all PM units and individual items. This list shows all
PM items, regardless of their "PM yield indicator settings". (Pg.2-4)

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

B132P903.BMP

[A]: Number buttons. Pressing a number button opens a submenu. (Pg.2-4)
[B]: Descriptions. The # mark denotes a "unit" (not individual item).
[C]: PM yield buttons. Function is the same as the "PM yield indicator settings"
button. (Pg.2-4).
[D]: Current PM counter value.
[E]: Target PM interval. This can be changed by pressing a number button [A].
[F]: PM counter clear button. Function is the same as the [Clear current counter]
button.

2-3

PM COUNTER

August, 2006

Number button submenu
Press any number button to open the submenu for a part. In the example below,
the number button [001] #K:PCU was pressed.

[A]
[B]
[D]

[C]

B132P904.BMP

[A]: Clear current counter. Press to reset the selected PM counter (in this
example 001 #K:PCU) to "0". You can also clear the settings by pressing the
[Clear] button on the right side of the PM Counter Main Menu ([F] on the
previous page).
[B]: Change target yield. Press the change the target PM yield. To change the
setting:
• Press [Change target yield]
• Enter the number for the new target with the 10-key pad.
• Press [#] on the operation panel.
[C]: PM yield indicator settings. [Yes] is the default. Press [No] to remove the
current item from the "Parts list for PM yield indicator".
• When set to "Yes", items marked with the # mark (# = a unit) will not have
their individual items displayed automatically in the "Parts list for PM yield
indicator list".
• When set to "No", items marked with the # mark (# = a unit) only the
individual components will appear in the list (the units will not appear).
[D]: PM counter history. This is a summary of the most recent counts
• Latest 1. The latest PM count since the unit (or part) was replaced.
• Latest 2. The previous PM count since the unit (or part) was replaced.
• Latest 3. The previous but one PM count since the unit (or part) was
replaced.

2-4

August, 2006

PM COUNTER

Parts list for PM yield indicator
This list shows the PM Parts Main Menu with only items set to "Yes" displayed.

[A]

B132P905.BMP

Note the following:
• The # mark denotes a unit.
• Items without the # (065 ITB) denote individual components.
• An asterisk  will appear in the Exceed column [A] to show items that that have
exceeded their target PM yields.

2-5

PM TABLES

August, 2006

2.3 PM TABLES
2.3.1 MAIN MACHINE
Symbol Key for PM Tables
I:
Inspect. Clean, replace, or lubricate as needed.
C:
Cleaning required.
R:
Replacement required.
L:
Lubrication required.

EM:

Silicone Grease 501 (52039502)
Grease Barrierta – S552R (A2579300)
Grease – KS660 – SHIN-ETSU (G0049668)
Heat Resisting Grease MT-78 (54479078)
Launa Oil 40 (54429103)
Emergency Maintenance

Copier PM Parts
150K
OPTICS
Reflector
1st Mirror
2nd Mirror
3rd Mirror
Scanner Rails
Exposure Glass
Toner Shield Glass
APS Sensor
ARDF Exposure Glass
Dust Filters

300K

600K

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

EM

Note
Optical cloth
Optical cloth
Optical cloth
Optical cloth
Alcohol then dry cloth
Exposure glass cleaner
Optical cloth
Dry cloth
Exposure glass cleaner
Blow brush

2-6

August, 2006

PM TABLES
150K

PCU
Charge Roller Unit
Drum Cleaning Blade
Lubricant Bar
Lubricant Brush

300K

PCU Joint

R
C
C

C
C

C
C

Blower brush.
Note: Never use a vacuum
cleaner around this sensor.

R
R
C

Development Roller Idle
Gear
Development Unit

Service Life: 1200K
Blower brush
Service Life: 600K
Blower brush (3.5.2)
Service Life: 3000K
Blower brush, dry cloth

R
C

150K
TONER SUPPLY
Toner Supply Unit

300K

600K

EM

C

150K
TRANSFER UNIT
ITB
ITB Internal Rollers
ITB Encoder Sensor
ID and MUSIC Sensors
ITB Cleaning Roller
ITB Cleaning Scraper Blade
ITB Cleaning Blade

300K

600K

EM

R
R
R
R
R

2-7

600K

Note

Dry cloth
Alcohol then dry cloth
Alcohol then dry cloth

C
C
R
R
R

300K

Note
Blower brush, dry cloth

R
C

150K
PTR UNIT
Paper Transfer Cleaning
Blade
PTR Cleaning Brush Roller
Paper Transfer Lubricant Bar
Paper Transfer Discharge
Plate
PTR (Paper Transfer Roller)

Note

PCU Cleaning Unit
(3.5.5)
PCU Cleaning Unit
(3.5.5)
PCU Cleaning Unit
(3.5.5)

R
R

Developer K
Developer Y, M, C
Development Roller Gear

EM

R
R
R

Toner Brush

Quenching LED
Potential Sensor

600K

EM

Note

PM TABLES

August, 2006

150K

300K

FUSING UNIT
Fusing Belt
Hot Roller
Pressure Roller
Hot Roller Cleaning Roller
Pressure Roller Cleaning Felt Roller
Fusing Belt Lubrication Roller
Heating Roller
Heating Roller Shaft Bearings
Hot Roller Shaft Bearings
Pressure Roller Shaft Bearings
Hot Roller Cleaning Roller Shaft
Bearings
Fusing Belt Strippers / Pressure Roller
Strippers
Thermistors

600K

Note

R
R
R
R
R
R
C, L

(3.9.9)

Service Life: 1200K
Service Life: 1200K

C, L
R
C, L

Service Life: 1200K

C, L

Dry Cloth

C

150K

300K

600K

OTHER
Circuit Breaker

EM

Note
Check the operation
one a year.

Dust Filters
Ozone Filters
Waste toner bottle

R
IR

150K
PAPER FEED (Copier)
Registration Rollers
Paper Dust Removal Unit
Registration Sensor
Vertical Transport Roller
Sensors
LCT Relay Sensor
Bypass Feed Sensor
Bypass Paper End Sensor
Double-Feed detection
Sensor
Double Feed Detection LED

EM

IR

300K

Service Life: 1200K
Empty and clean
every inspection.

IR

600K

EM

Note

C
C
C
C

Alcohol, dry cloth
Dry cloth
Blower brush
Blower brush

C
C
C
C

Blower brush
Blower brush
Blower brush
Blower brush

C

Blower brush

2-8

August, 2006

PM TABLES

150K

300K

PAPER FEED (Trays)
Feed Guide Plate
Grip Rollers (Drive & Idle)
Pick-up Rollers (Tray 1 to Tray 3)
Paper Feed Rollers (Tray 1 to Tray
3)
Separation Rollers (Tray 1 to Tray 3)

600K

EM

C
C

Grip Roller (Drive Roller)
Paper Feed Sensor
Vertical Feed Sensors
Paper-End Sensor

Dry cloth
Alcohol, dry cloth
Service Life: 1000K
Replace if jams,
double-feeds occur
with increasing
frequency.
Dry cloth
Blower brush
Blower brush
Blower brush

C
C
C
C

150K

300K

DUPLEX UNIT
Inverter Roller
Reverse Rollers (Drive & Idle)
Duplex Rollers
Transport Rollers (x4)
Duplex Entrance Anti-Static Brush
Inverter Junction Gate
Inverter Roller

600K

EM

C
C
C
C
C
C
C

150K

300K

PAPER EXIT
Heat Dissipation Roller
Exit Anti-Static Brush

C
C

Paper Exit Rollers (Upper, Lower)
Paper Exit Sensor
Transport Rollers

C
C
C

2-9

Note

Note
Blower brush
Alcohol, dry cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth

600K

EM

Note
Alcohol, dry cloth
Inspect, replace if
deformed.
Alcohol, dry cloth
Blower brush
Blower brush

PM TABLES

August, 2006

ARDF PM Parts
NOTE: The "K" number in the table below is the number of originals that have
been fed.
External Covers
Feed Belt
Pick-up Roller
Separation Roller
Original Length Sensors
Skew Correction Sensor
Interval Sensor
Registration Sensor
Paper Exit Sensor
Lower Inverter Sensor
Separation Sensor
Upper Inverter Sensor
White Cover
Transport Belt
Feed Drive Gears
Grip Roller
Transport Rollers
Scanner Rollers (Entrance/Exit)
Exit Rollers
Inverter Rollers (Lower, Exit,
Upper)
Idle Rollers

Every PM
Visit
I, C
C
C
C

Every
120K

EM

R
R
R

R
R
R

Note
Alcohol or water, dry
cloth

Blower brush

C

C

C
C
L

R

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

2-10

Alcohol or water, dry
cloth
G501 Grease
Alcohol or water, dry
cloth

August, 2006

PM TABLES

2.3.2 2000/3000-SHEET BOOKLET FINISHER B700/B701
300K

2400K

3000K

4000K

FINISHER
Covers
Drive Rollers
Idle Rollers
Anti-Static Brush
Sensors
Corner Stapler

R

Booklet Stapler

R

EM

Note

I,C
C
C
C
C

Alcohol or water, dry cloth
Damp cloth, dry cloth
Damp cloth, dry cloth
Dry cloth
Blower brush
Print an SMC report with
SP5990. Replace the unit if
the staple count is 500K.
Print an SMC report with
SP5990. Replace the unit if
the staple count is 200K.

2.3.3 PUNCH B702
PUNCH
Punch Waste Hopper
Punch Unit

300K
I

2400K
I

3000K
I

4000K
I

EM
I

Remove and empty
Replace after 1000k
punches.

2.3.4 3000-SHEET FINISHER B706
350K 700K

FINISHER
Driver rollers
Idle rollers
Discharge brush
Shaft Bearings
Sensors
Jogger fences
Staple waste hopper

1050K

I
I
I
I
I
I
C

I
I
I
I
I
I
C

I
I
I
I
I
I
C

300K
I

450K
I

600K
I

Note
Alcohol

Lubricate with silicone oil if noisy.
Blower brush.
Make sure that the screws are tight.
Empty staple waste.

2.3.5 PUNCH B531
PUNCH
Punch Waste Hopper

EM

2-11

Note
Remove and empty

PM TABLES

August, 2006

2.3.6 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704
60K 120K 180K EM
The PM interval is for the number of sheets that have been fed.
Feed Belt
R
R
R
Replace as a set.
Pick-up Roller
R
R
R
Separation Roller
R
R
R
Driver Rollers
Idle Rollers
Discharge Brush
Sensors

C
C
C
C

C
C
C
C

C
C
C
C

Note

Damp clean cloth.

Blower brush.

2.3.7 LCT B473
Paper feed roller
Pick-up roller
Separation roller
Transport guide plate
Grip roller

1000K
R
R
R

2000K
R
R
R

3000K
R
R
R

Inspect and clean every 350K.

2-12

Expected

Note

August, 2006

LUBRICATION POINTS

2.4 LUBRICATION POINTS
2.4.1 COPIER
OPC, ITB Replacement

[A]

[B]

B132R319.WMF
B023R960.WMF

Be sure to apply Lubricant Powder B1329700 when re-installing the drum [A] or
ITB [B].
For more, please refer to section "3. Replacement and Adjustment".

2-13

LUBRICATION POINTS

August, 2006

Fusing Unit
[B]

[A]

[G]

[H]

[I]
[C]

[G]

[I]
B132P906.WMF

[F]

[E]

[D]

B132P907.WMF

[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]

Part Name
Hot Roller Drive Gear
Exit Idle Gear
Upper Gear
Lower Gear
Bearing Race φ20 x φ32 x 7
Hot Roller Sleeve
Bearing Race φ25 x φ37 x 7
Hot Roller Sleeve
Bearing Race

Lubricant
Barrierta S552R

Comment
Brush all gear teeth

Barrierta S552R
Be sure to brush both ends.

2-14

August, 2006

GENERAL CAUTIONS

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS
Never switch off either power switch while any of the electrical components are
operating. Doing so might cause damage to units such as the transfer belt, drum,
and development unit when they are pulled out of or put back into the copier.

3.1.1 DRUM
An organic photoconductor (OPC) drums are more sensitive to light and ammonia
gas than a selenium drum. Follow the cautions below when handling an OPC drum.
1. When a PCU is removed from the machine, always place it on the PCU stand
provided with the machine.
2. Never expose a drum to direct sunlight.
3. Never expose a drum to direct light of more than 1,000 Lux for more than a
minute.
4. Never touch a drum surface with bare hands. If the drum surface is touched
with a finger or becomes dirty, wipe it with a dry cloth or clean it with wet cotton.
Wipe with a dry cloth after cleaning with wet cotton.
5. Never use alcohol to clean the drum (alcohol dissolves the drum surface).
6. Store drums in a cool, dry place away from heat.
7. Take care not to scratch the drum as the drum layer is thin and is easily
damaged.
8. Never expose a drum to corrosive gases such as ammonia gas.
9. Dispose of used drums in accordance with local regulations.

3.1.2 PCU
1. The PCU stand is stored in a rack attached to the bottom of the machine with
strong magnets.
2. Before pulling a PCU out of the machine, spread some clean paper to catch
spilt toner, remove the PCU stand from the bottom of the machine, clean it with
a clean cloth, and then set the PCU stand on the paper to hold the PCU as
soon as it is removed from the machine.
3. To prevent drum scratches, always set the PCU on the stand and leave it there
as long as it is out of the machine.
4. Remove only one PCU at a time for servicing. Only one PCU stand is provided
with the machine.

3-1

GENERAL CAUTIONS

August, 2006

3.1.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT
1. Never touch the transfer belt surface with bare hands.
2. Take care not to scratch the transfer belt, as the surface is easily damaged.
3. Before installing a new transfer belt, clean all the rollers and the inner part of
the transfer belt with a dry cloth to prevent the belt from slipping.

3.1.4 SCANNER UNIT
1. When installing a new exposure glass, make sure that the white paint mark is
at the rear left corner.
2. Clean the exposure glass with alcohol or glass cleaner to reduce the amount of
static electricity on the glass surface.
3. Use a cotton pad with water or a blower brush to clean the mirrors and lenses.
4. Never bend or crease the exposure lamp cables.
5. Never disassemble the lens unit. Doing so will throw the lens and the copy
image out of focus.
6. Never adjust any CCD positioning screw. Doing so will throw the CCD out of
position.

3.1.5 LASER UNIT
1. Never loosen the screws that secure the LD drive board to the laser diode
casing. Doing so would throw the LD unit out of adjustment.
2. Never adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit, as they are adjusted in the
factory.
3. Never open the optical housing unit. The polygon mirror and lenses are
sensitive to dust.
4. Never touch the glass surface of the polygon motor unit with bare hands.

3-2

August, 2006

GENERAL CAUTIONS

3.1.6 DEVELOPMENT
1. Avoid nicking or scratching the development roller.
2. Place a development unit on a sheet of paper after removing it from a PCU.
3. Always clean the drive gears after removing used developer.
4. Always dispose of used developer in accordance with local regulations.
5. Never load types of developer and toner into the development unit other than
specified for this model. Doing so will cause poor copy quality and toner
scattering.
6. Immediately after installing new developer during the machine installation
procedure, do SP3811 001.
7. Immediately after replacing the developer, see section 3.5.7 for the correct SPs
to do.
8. Never do SP 3801 or 3811 with used developer.
9. When using a vacuum cleaner to clean the development unit casing, always
ground the casing with your fingers to avoid damaging the toner density sensor
with static electricity.
10. After replacing the TD sensor:
• Replace the developer in the PCU where the TD sensor was replaced.
• Then do SP3801 001~006 only for the PCU where the TD sensor was
replaced.
Very Important:
ONLY INITIALIZE THE TD SENSOR ONE TIME. DO NOT DO IT MORE THAN ONE TIME.
Only initialize the TD sensor at the following times:
• At installation, exactly as explained in the installation procedure.
• After you replace developer (only initialize the TD sensor for the color that you
replaced)
• As instructed in specific troubleshooting procedures.
If you do not obey the above instructions, you will get toner scattering inside the
machine.

3-3

GENERAL CAUTIONS

August, 2006

3.1.7 CLEANING
1. When servicing cleaning components, avoid nicking the edges of the cleaning
blades.
2. Never handle a cleaning blade with bare hands.
3. Before disassembling a cleaning section, place a sheet of paper under it to
catch any toner falling.

3.1.8 FUSING UNIT
1. Never handle fusing lamps and rollers with bare hands.
2. Make sure that the fusing lamps are positioned correctly and do not touch the
inner surface of the rollers.

3.1.9 PAPER FEED
1. Do not touch the surfaces of the pick-up, feed, and separation rollers.
2. To avoid paper misfeeds, the side fences and end fence of the paper trays
must be positioned correctly to align with the actual paper size.

3.1.10 USED TONER (WASTE TONER)
1. We recommend checking the amount of used toner at every EM (Emergency
Maintenance).
2. Always dispose of used toner in accordance with local regulations.
3. Never throw toner into an open flame.

3-4

August, 2006

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

3.2 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES
3.2.1 ARDF

[A]

[B]
[C]

B132R101.WMF

1. Raise the ARDF [A] to the vertical position.
2. At the rear, left corner of the machine, disconnect the ARDF cable.
3. Remove the left screw [B] and right screw [C].
4. Slide the ARDF back until the heads of the screws are in the large end of the
keyholes, then lift the ARDF off the machine.


CAUTION
The ARDF is very heavy. Remove it carefully.

3-5

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

August, 2006

3.2.2 OPERATION PANEL, TOP COVERS

[B]
[C]

[A]

[D]
• Remove the ARDF (
 x1,  x2).
• Open the front door.
Remove:
[A]: Operation panel (
 x1,  x2)
[B]: Top rear cover ( x2)
[C]: Left top cover ( x1)
[D]: Right top cover ( x1)

3-6

B132R701.WMF

August, 2006

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

3.2.3 LEFT COVERS

[A]

[B]

B132R702.WMF

• If a finisher is installed, disconnect it. Then remove the front and rear finisher
joint brackets.
Remove:
[A]: Left upper cover ( x2)
[B]: Left lower cover ( x5)
Reinstallation
• Make sure all the cover tabs are inserted correctly before you fasten the screws.

3-7

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

August, 2006

3.2.4 FRONT DOOR

[A]

[B]

B132R703.WMF

1. Grip the front door [A] with one hand.
2. Press down the hinge bracket [B].
3. Lift the front door slightly to remove it.
Important: If you must replace the front door, make sure that you put the SD cards
from the storage location in the old front door into the storage location in the new
front door. (
 3.2.12)

3-8

August, 2006

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

3.2.5 RIGHT COVERS

[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]

B132R704.WMF

Remove:
• Disconnect and separate the LCT if it is installed.
[A]: LCT installation cover ( x2). This has been removed already if the LCT has
been installed.
[B]: Open the bypass tray.
[C]: Right upper cover ( x2). Pull the bottom of the cover down and toward you
as you remove it.
[D]: Right lower cover ( x5). Pull the bottom of the cover down and toward you as
you remove it.
Reinstallation
• Make sure all the cover tabs are inserted correctly before you fasten the screws.

3-9

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

August, 2006

3.2.6 REAR COVERS

[A]

[B]

[C]

B132R705.WMF

Remove:
[A]: ARDF connector (
 x1)
[B]: Rear upper cover ( x3)
[C]: Rear lower cover ( x2)
• Remove the bottom screws
• Do not remove the shoulder screws.

3-10

August, 2006

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

3.2.7 TONER HOPPER, FACE PLATE, PCU
Removing Toner Hopper, Face plate, PCU
[A]

[B]
[C]

B132I006A.WMF

Important: To avoid damaging the toner end sensor, make sure that the main
power switch is turned off and that the power cord is disconnected from the power
source before you remove the toner hopper.
To remove the toner hopper:
1. Prepare an open space on the floor for the toner hopper.
2. Remove the screws of the toner hopper [A] ( x3).
3. Place your hands under the left and right corners of the toner hopper and
slowly pull it out on its rails until it stops.
IMPORTANT: THE TONER HOPPER CAN EASILY SLIP OFF ITS RAILS.
4. Press the release [B] to drop the support leg [C].
5. Confirm that the support leg is down and locked.
IMPORTANT: ALWAYS MAKE SURE THAT THE SUPPORT LEG IS DOWN AND LOCKED
BEFORE YOU REMOVE THE TONER HOPPER.
6. Lift the toner hopper off its rails and set it on the floor.


CAUTION
The toner hopper is heavy! Lift it carefully, make sure that it
disengages completely from the rails on the left and right, and
then set it on the floor.
7. Push the toner hopper rails into the machine.

3-11

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

August, 2006

To remove the face plate

[B]

[A]

[C]

B132R201.WMF

[D]

B132I902.WMF

8. Rotate the transfer belt release lever [A] counter-clockwise until it stops.
9. Disconnect the fan connector [B].
10. Remove the face plate [C] ( x5).
11. Place the PCU stand [D] on a flat surface.
NOTE: The PCU stand is mounted on a rack attached to the bottom of the
copier with magnets.
12. Wipe the surface of the stand with a clean cloth to remove dust.

3-12

August, 2006

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

To remove a PCU

[A]

[B]
B132R202A.WMF

Important: To prevent damage to the drum potential sensor and its relay board,
always make sure that the machine is turned off and that the power cord is
disconnected from the power source before you remove a PCU.
13. While pressing down the release tab [A] above the PCU, pull the PCU [B] out of
the machine.

3-13

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

August, 2006

R

[A]

F
[B]

B132R214.WMF

IMPORTANT
• THE OPC DRUM IS EXPOSED ON THE BOTTOM OF THE PCU.
• NEVER PLACE YOUR HAND UNDER THE PCU.
• NEVER PLACE THE PCU ON ANY SURFACE OTHER THAN THE PCU STAND.
14. Set the PCU [A] on the PCU stand [B].
NOTE: In the diagram, F is the front, and R is the rear.

3-14

August, 2006

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

Reinstalling PCU, Face plate, Toner Hopper
To reinstall a PCU:

[B]

B132I114.WMF

[A]

1. Hold the PCU [A] in front of the slot where you removed it
2. Engage the rails [B] with the slots in the sides of the PCU.
3. Slowly push the PCU into the slot. Make sure the
release tab [C] above the PCU is locked.
NOTE: If the PCU does not go in smoothly,
make sure the rails [B] and grooves are
engaged correctly.
Important!
• If you have replaced a developer
cartridge in a PCU, be sure to remove
the film seals [D] of every replaced
developer cartridge after you reinstall it
in the machine.
• To release the developer into the PCU,
pull out the film seal [D].
NOTE: Put your other hand on the
PCU [E] to keep it stable it while you
pull on the film seal.

[B]

B132I905.WMF

[D]
[E]
B132I101.WMF

3-15

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

August, 2006

[A]

2

4

[C]

1

[B]

5

3

B132I115.WMF

To reinstall the face plate:
1. When you reattach the face plate [A], fasten the screws in the order shown by
the numbers above ( x5).
Important: Do not over tighten these screws.
2. Rotate the transfer belt release lever [B] clockwise to lock it.
3. Reconnect the fan connector [C] (
 x1).

3-16

August, 2006

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

[A]

[D]

[B]




[C]

[E]
[F]

B132R908.WMF

To reinstall the toner hopper:
1. Confirm that the transfer belt release lever [A] is up and locked before you
reattach the toner hopper.
2. Make sure the toner hopper rails are fully extended, then set the toner hopper
[B] on the rails.
3. Make sure the steel tabs of the toner hopper are inserted into the holes on the
left rail [C] and right rail [D].
4. Push up the release [E] and support leg [F].
Important: Make sure that the support leg is up and locked before you push
the toner hopper into the machine.
5. Place your hands at the bottom of the toner hopper at 
 and  and then push
the toner hopper into the machine against the face plate.
Important: To avoid damaging the toner hopper, never press in on the top of
the toner hopper.
6. Make sure that the toner hopper is flat against the face plate on the right side.
NOTE: If the toner hopper [B] is not flat against the face plate on the right side,
pull it out slightly and make sure that the transfer belt release lever is
rotated up completely and locked.
7. Fasten the toner hopper to the face plate ( x3).

3-17

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

August, 2006

3.2.8 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT

[B]

[C]

[A]

[D]

B132R201.WMF

1. Cover the floor or a table with paper to prepare a place to put the image
transfer unit.
2. Open the front door.
3. Remove the toner hopper then push the hopper rails into the machine.
(
3.2.7)
4. Rotate the transfer belt release lever [A] counter-clockwise until it stops.
5. Disconnect the fan connector [B].
6. Remove the face plate [C] (
 x1,  x5).
7. Rotate the lever B2 [D] on the drawer unit counter-clockwise to separate the
transfer roller from the ITB.

3-18

August, 2006

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

1

[A]

B132R309.WMF

8. Slowly and carefully pull the image transfer unit [A] out of the machine.
[C]
Important!
[B]
• Remove carefully. The image
transfer unit is heavy and not
attached to the rails with screws.
• To prevent toner scattering inside
and outside the unit, keep the unit [B]
flat when you remove it, lift it, carry it,
and put it down.
B132R309B.WMF
• Never stand the image transfer unit
[C] on its edge before you remove
the cleaning unit from the ITB (

3.8.1).
• Never place the image transfer unit
on a carpet where toner may scatter
or the unit will collect dust.
Reinstallation
• Re-insert the image transfer unit slowly and carefully to avoid snagging the belt
on the frame of the machine.
• Make sure that the image transfer unit does not snag on the toner cap of the
yellow PCU on the far left.

3-19

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

August, 2006

3.2.9 DRAWER UNIT

[B]
B132R900.WMF

[C]

[A]

[D]

To pull out the drawer unit:
B132R301.WMF

1. Remove the front door. (
3.2.4)
2. Rotate the lever [A] counter-clockwise until it stops.

3. Grip the lever and pull the unit [B] out of the machine until it stops.
To remove the drawer unit:
4. Disconnect from the left rail [C] ( x2).
5. Disconnect from the right rail [D] ( x2).
6. Lift the unit off the rails.


CAUTION
The drawer unit is very heavy (30 kg/66lb.). After removing it, push the rails
into the machine.

3-20

August, 2006

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

To re-install the drawer unit

[C]

[A]
[B]
B132R617.WMF

1. Remove the right upper cover and the left upper cover. (
3.2.3, 3.2.5,)
2. Open the front door.
3. Pull out the left rail and right rail.
4. Set the unit on the rails.


CAUTION
The drawer unit is very heavy (30 kg/66lb.). Make sure that hooks are
engaged with the holes on the rails.
5. Slowly push the unit into the machine until it stops.
6. Rotate the lever [A] clockwise to the vertical position.
7. Fasten the screws to the left rail [B] ( x2).
8. Fasten the screws to the right rail [C] ( x2).
Important! Make sure these screws are fastened and tight. This ensures that
the unit is positioned correctly.

3-21

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

August, 2006

3.2.10 DUPLEX UNIT

[B]

[C]

[A]

B132R501.WMF

1. Open the front door.
2. Pull the duplex unit [A] out until it stops.
3. Remove the clip ring [B] from the left, rear corner ( x1).
4. Remove the clip ring [C] from the right, rear corner ( x1).
5. Lift the duplex unit from the rails and place it on a flat, level surface.

3-22

August, 2006

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

3.2.11 OPENING AND LOCKING THE CONTROLLER BOX COVER
[B]

[D]

[C]





[A]



B132R715.WMF

CAUTION: 1) Before you start this procedure, turn off the main power
switch and disconnect the power cord.
2) To prevent personal injury and damage to the controller box,
when the controller box is open, it should always be locked as
described below.
1. Remove the rear covers (
3.2.6)
2. Remove controller box screws   .
3. Open the controller box [A] to the left until it stops.
Important! Obey the warning on the decal to avoid touching the fan blades
when you open and close the controller box.
4. Remove the left screw [B] of the plastic stopper arm [C].
5. Rotate the plastic stopper counter-clockwise until it is aligned with the hole
below and its tip [D] is touching the machine frame.
6. Reattach the screw removed in Step 4 to lock the arm in position.
Reinstallation
• Be sure to reattach the stopper arm at its original position before you close the
controller box.

3-23

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES

August, 2006

3.2.12 SD CARD STORAGE
[C]

[B]

B132R728.WMF

[A]
1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the cover [A] on the door ( x2).
3. Remove the block [B].
4. Store extra SD cards [C] inside the cover.
5. Reattach the cover to the machine
Important
• When you replace the door, confirm whether SD cards are stored here.
• Remove any SD cards and store them in the new door. These SD cards serve as
prove of purchase of MFP options by the customer.

3-24

August, 2006

SCANNER UNIT

3.3 SCANNER UNIT
3.3.1 EXPOSURE GLASS
[A]
[B]

[C]

B132R128.WMF

Remove:
[A]: Rear scale ( x3)
[B]: Left glass cover ( x3)
[C]: Exposure glass

3-25

SCANNER UNIT

August, 2006

3.3.2 LENS BLOCK, PAPER SIZE SENSORS
[A]

[B]

[D]
[C]

B132R130.WMF

B132R141.WMF

Before you remove the lens block, note the settings of SP4800 001 to 003 (ARDF
density adjustments for R, G, B).
SP4800 001
SP4800 002
SP4800 003

DF Density Adj: R
DF Density Adj: G
DF Density Adj: B

ARDF Density Adjustment - Red
ARDF Density Adjustment - Green
ARDF Density Adjustment - Blue

Remove:
• Exposure glass. (
3.3.1)
[A]: Lens cover ( x8)
[B]: Lens block ( x6, 
 x3)
Important: Remove the lens block carefully to avoid damaging the attached
PCB. Do not touch the paint-locked screws on the lens block.
[C]: Original width sensor (
 x1,  x1)
[D]: Original length sensors x2 (
 x1 each,  x1 each)
After replacing the lens block, do the following SP codes.
SP4008 001
SP4010 001
SP4011 001

Sub Scan Mag
Sub Scan Reg
Main Scan Reg

Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment
Sub Scan Registration Adjustment
Main Scan Registration Adjustment

After lens block replacement, do some copy samples with the ARDF. Check these
points:
• Do the copies have background?
• Is the copy output of the ARDF and platen mode different?
If these problems occur, change SP4800 001 to 003 to their previous settings, or
adjust these SPs until the background is acceptable.

3-26

August, 2006

SCANNER UNIT

3.3.3 EXPOSURE LAMP
[B]

[A]
B132R129.WMF

Remove:
• Exposure glass (
3.3.1)
• Operation panel (
3.2.2)
1. Slide the 1st scanner [A] to the cutout in the frame.
2. Remove the exposure lamp [B] ( x1, 
 x1,  x1)
Important:
• Never touch the surface of the exposure lamp with bare fingers.
• Work carefully to avoid damaging the relay plugs attached to the rear ends of the
lamp.

3-27

SCANNER UNIT

August, 2006

3.3.4 SCANNER MOTOR
[A]

[B]

[C]

[E]
B132R132A.WMF

[D]

Remove:
• Exposure glass (
3.3.1)
[A]: Lens cover ( x4)
[B]: Right lens cover ( x3)
[C]: Top right cover ( x1)
[D]: Bracket ( x5)
[E]: Scanner motor (Timing belt x1,  x1, 
 x1,  x3)

3-28

B132R133.WMF

August, 2006

SCANNER UNIT

3.3.5 SCANNER HP SENSOR
[E]
[A]

[B]
[D]

[C]

B132R134A.WMF

Remove:
• ARDF (
3.2.1)
• Exposure glass (
3.3.1)
• Top rear, left, right covers (
3.2.5)
[A]: Ground plate ( x1)
[B]: Left stay ( x3)
[C]: Right stay ( x5)
[D]: Rear stay ( x4)
[E]: Scanner HP sensor (
 x1)

3-29

SCANNER UNIT

August, 2006

3.3.6 SCANNER INTERFACE BOARD (SIOB)
[A]

B132R133A.WMF

Remove:
• ARDF (
3.2.1)
• Exposure glass (
3.3.1)
• Top, rear, left, right covers (
3.2.5)
• Right stay, rear stay (
3.3.5)
• Lens cover (
3.3.2)
[A]: Scanner interface board (
 x6,  x2)

3-30

August, 2006

SCANNER UNIT

3.3.7 SCANNER WIRE
Scanner Wire Removal

	





B132R137.WMF

1. Remove wire ground  ( x1)
2. Disconnect the head of wire  from tension bracket 1.
3. Remove spring .
4. Loosen the screw  of tension bracket 1.
5. Disconnect the end of wire at 	.
6. Remove lock bracket 
 of the 1st scanner ( x1).
7. Disconnect the wire from the pulley  ( x1).
8. Remove the wire from the scanner.

3-31

SCANNER UNIT

August, 2006

Scanner Wire Reinstallation and Scanner Position Adjustment
[D]

[A]

4
5

[B]

[C]

B132R136.WMF

1. Place the beads [A] on the middle of the wire on the pulley openings.
2. Wind the ball end of the wire [B] 4 times.
3. Wind the other end of the wire [C] 5 times.
4. Attach tape [D] across the pulley to temporarily hold the wires in place.

3-32

August, 2006

SCANNER UNIT

[D]
[B]

[C]

[E]
[A]
B132R138.WMF

5. Position the 1st scanner [A] so the holes are aligned and insert the positioning
pins [B] (x2).
6. Position the 2nd scanner [C] so its holes are aligned and insert the positioning
pins [D] (x2).
7. Attach the lock bracket [E] to fasten the wire to the 1st scanner.
8. Tighten the screw of tension bracket (
 Section 3.3.7).
9. Attach the pulley and tighten it lock screw (
 Section 3.3.7).
10. Remove the positioning pins (x4).
11. Remove the tape from the pulley.
12. Slowly push the scanner left and right to confirm that the wires are engaged
correctly. The 1st and 2nd scanners should move smoothly.

3-33

LASER UNIT

August, 2006

3.4 LASER UNIT

WARNING
• This laser unit employs two laser beams produced by a Class III LD with
a wavelength of 648 to 660 nm and intensity of 7 mW. Direct exposure to
the eyes could cause permanent blindness.
• Before any performing any replacement or adjustment of the laser unit,
press the main power switch to power the machine off then unplug the
machine from the power source. Allow the machine to cool for a few
minutes. The polygon motor continues to rotate for approximately one to
three minutes.
• Never power on the machine with any of these components removed: 1)
LD unit, 2) polygon motor cover, 3) synchronization detector.

3.4.1 CAUTION DECALS

CDRHLBL

B132R003.WMF

3-34

August, 2006

LASER UNIT

3.4.2 POLYGON MOTOR


WARNING
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing
any procedure in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes.
Important!
• An accidental static discharge could damage the laser diode board attached to
the lens block unit.
• Touch a metal surface to discharge any static electricity from your hands.
• The polygon motor rotates at extremely high speed and continues to rotate after
you switch the machine off. To avoid damaging the motor, never remove the
polygon motor within three minutes of switching off the main power and
disconnecting the power plug.
[C]
[A]

[B]

B132R131.WMF

Remove:
• Exposure glass (
 3.3.1)
• Lens block (
 3.3.2)
[A]: Top cover ( x2)
[B]: Middle cover ( x2)
[C]: Polygon motor ( x3, 
 x1,  x1)
Important!
• Do not attempt to remove the paint-lock screws on top of the lens block unit.
• Do not touch the glass covers of the laser ports on the sides of the polygon
motor [C]

3-35

LASER UNIT

August, 2006

3.4.3 LASER UNIT
[A]

[B]

[C]

B132R101.WMF

[E]

B132R701.WMF

[D]

Remove:
[A]: ARDF (
 x,1  x2)
[B]: Left top cover ( x1)
[C]: Rear top cover ( x2)
[D]: Right top cover ( x1)
[E]: Operation panel ( x2, 
 x1)

3-36

August, 2006

LASER UNIT

[C]

[A]

[B]

[D]
[E]

B132R001.WMF

[F]

Remove:
[A]: Right plate ( x4)
[B]: Left plate ( x4)
[C]: Ground wire ( x1)
[D]: Cross piece ( x4)
[E]: Detach the support rod from the
rubber clamps.
Next, do the following:
[F]: Raise the scanner unit. ( x 2)
[G]: Set the support rod at the base
 then under the front, right
corner  of the scanner unit.

2

[G]

1

B132R002.WMF


CAUTION
The scanner unit is very heavy. Never remove the support rod during
servicing.
Reinstallation
• Be sure to reconnect ground wire [C].

3-37

LASER UNIT

August, 2006

[A]








B132R003.WMF

Remove:
[A]: Laser unit ( x4, 
 x6)
NOTE: The laser unit includes four LD sub units. However, the LD sub units cannot
be replaced separately because factory adjustment is required.
Reinstallation
• Make sure that the four tapes , , ,  are set correctly in the holes.
• Be sure to reconnect the ground wire ([C] on the previous page).

3-38

August, 2006

LASER UNIT

Adjustments After Laser Unit Replacement
SP Adjustments

[A]

B132R904.WMF

1. SP codes are written on an A5 sheet provided with the laser unit. These SP
codes must be done after the laser unit is replaced.
• SP2154 001 (K)
• SP2154 002 (M)
• SP2154 003 (C)
• SP2154 004 (Y)
Only the settings shown with the first barcode [A] (2-Point Target) are
necessary. The other information on the sheet can be ignored.
NOTE: Enter the values printed on the A5 sheet. Do not enter the values
shown in the sample above.
2. Make a test copy (
3.19.4)
Color Registration Errors
• In addition to the SP adjustments printed on the seal attached to the LD unit, if
color registration errors occur immediately after you change the laser unit, an
additional adjustment is required.
• This additional adjustment is normally not required in the field. Do it only if you
see color registration errors in test prints.
• See “Color Registration Test and Error Adjustment” in section 3.19.4 for
instructions on how to do this adjustment.
Skew
• If skew occurs immediately after you change the laser unit, do the “Skew
Adjustment” in section 3.19.5.

3-39

LASER UNIT

August, 2006

3.4.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR
[A]

[B]

B132R004.WMF

Remove:
[A]: Laser unit (
3.4.3)
[B]: Laser synchronization detector ( x2, 
 x1)
NOTE: In the figure above, note the locations of the 8 laser synchronization
detectors (shown within the circles).

3-40

August, 2006

PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS)

3.5 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS)
3.5.1 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT

[D]

[B]

R

[C]

F
[A]

B132R220.WMF

[A]
B132R214.WMF

1. Spread some paper on a flat surface to hold developer that will be dumped
from the development unit.
2. Remove the toner hopper and face plate. (
3.2.7)
3. Remove the PCU stand [A] from bottom of the machine.
4. Remove the long special tool [B] and gear lock [C] from the bottom of the PCU
stand.
5. Put the PCU stand [A] on a flat surface.
6. Remove the PCU. (
3.2.7)
7. Position the front and rear of the PCU [D] so it matches the F (front) and R
(rear) markings on the stand, then place the PCU on the stand.
Important:
• The front-rear alignment aligns the shape of the stand with the contours of
the PCU bottom. This ensures that the exposed drum on the bottom of the
PCU is completely protected during servicing.

3-41

PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS)

August, 2006

[D]

[B]
[A]

[E]
[C]
B132R210.WMF

8. Remove the drum (
 3.5.4). Cover it with a sheet of A3/DLT paper to protect it
from light.
9. Vacuum inside the PCU.
NOTE: Do not vacuum around the brush roller (in the PCU cleaning unit) and
around the drum potential sensor.
10. On the front end of the PCU, remove the shaft cap [A] and lock plate [B] ( x 3).
Important:
• After you remove the shaft cap, never turn the shaft [C] of the development
roller.
11. On the rear end of the PCU, remove the lock plate [D] ( x 4).
NOTE: The long screws for the plates [A], [B], and [D] have washers.
12. Remove the development unit [E] from the PCU.

3-42

August, 2006

PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS)

[E]

[A]

[C]
[D]
[B]
B132I105.WMF

13. Place the development unit [A] on a clean sheet of A3/DLT paper [B].
14. With a fingernail release the tabs [C] on the left.
15. Hold the development unit steady with one hand [D] as you remove the old
cartridge [E] from the development unit.
Important:
• The development unit is top heavy, and it tips easily. Be sure to steady it with
one hand as you remove the old cartridge.
• Discard the old cartridge. Please obey the local laws and regulations
regarding the disposal of such items.
• The screws removed from the cartridge do not have washers. (Do not
confuse these screws for the plate screws that were removed in the previous
step.)

3-43

PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS)

August, 2006

[A]
[D]

[C]

[B]

B132R219.WMF

16. At the rear of the development unit, attach the lock gear [A] to the development
roller shaft.
17. At the front, attach the long special tool [B].
Important
• The D-shaped hole of the long special tool [B] must fit over the D-shaped
shaft tip [C].
18. If the hole of the special long tool and shaft are not aligned, rotate the Dshaped shaft tip [C] in the direction of the arrow [D] to position the shaft so the
special long tool can be attached.
Important
• Always rotate the shaft in the direction of the arrow [D]. To avoid damaging
the entrance seal, never rotate the lock gear in the opposite direction.

3-44

August, 2006

PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS)

[C]
[B]

[A]

B132R218.WMF

19. Place the development unit [A] inside
the disposal bag [B] provided.

[D]

20. Turn the development unit upsidedown, then rotate the lock gear [C] in
the direction of the arrow to dump the
developer/toner into the bag.
Important
• Rotate the lock gear in the direction
indicated by the arrow. To avoid
damaging the entrance seal, do not
rotate the lock gear in the opposite
direction.

B132I105A.WMF

21. After dumping as much developer as possible, vacuum the remaining
developer and toner.
Important: Be sure to vacuum completely, especially around the
development roller.
22. Remove the lock gear and long special long tool from the PCU.
23. Shake the new developer cartridge [D] from side to side about 6 times.

3-45

PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS)

August, 2006

[C]

[A]

[B]
[D]
B132I106.WMF

[F]

[E]

[G]
B132I106A.WMF

24. Thread the film seal [A] through hole [B].
25. Slide the developer cartridge down [C] on the left so the holes and tabs [D] are
aligned.
26. Press in on the middle of the developer cartridge [E] to lock the tabs inside [F].
27. Press down on the left end [D] and right end [G] to lock the tabs.

3-46

August, 2006

PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS)

[A]
[D]
[C]

[B]

B132I106B.WMF

[F]
[E]

B132I106C.WMF

28. Check the following to points to be sure that the developer cartridge is set
properly.
• Tabs [A] and [B] should be locked.
• The developer cartridge edge [C] should be flat and not bulging or floating
away from the side of the development unit
• Pull gently on the developer cartridge at [D] to make sure that it does not
part from the development unit.
29. Attach the cartridge [E] ( x2).
IMPORTANT: DO NOT REMOVE THE FILM SEAL [F] ON THE DEVELOPER CARTRIDGE AT THIS
TIME.

3-47

PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS)

August, 2006

30. Re-install the development unit in the PCU.
31. Reattach the small and large plate at the front and rear.
32. Push the PCU fully into the slot to reinstall it.
33. To release the developer in the PCU,
pull out the film seal [A].
NOTE: Place your other hand on the
PCU [B] to steady it while you pull on
the film seal.

[A]
[B]
B132I101.WMF

Reinstallation
Important! YOU MUST DO SOME SPS, OR A FATAL ERROR WILL OCCUR. (3.5.7)

3-48

August, 2006

PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS)

3.5.2 DEVELOPMENT GEARS
[C]

[A]

[D]

[B]

Remove:
• PCU (
3.2.7)
• Development unit (
3.5.1)
[A]: TD sensor connector ( x1; this is a tapping screw)
[B]: Development gear cover ( x1)
[C]: Development roller idle gear
[D]: Development roller gear (C-ring x1)

3-49

B132R225.WMF

PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS)

August, 2006

3.5.3 CHARGE ROLLER UNIT
Remove:
• PCU (
3.2.7)
[A]: Charge roller unit ( x2).
This unit contains the charge roller
and charge roller cleaning roller
[A]

B132R203.WMF

[B]: Weight
NOTE: The weight must be used
during the full service life of the
machine. Be sure to reinstall it.
[C]: Lubricant bar

[C]

[B]

B132R224.WMF

3-50

August, 2006

PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS)

3.5.4 DRUM AND CLEANING BLADE

[A]
[C]
[D]

[B]

B132R205.WMF

Removing the OPC Drum
Remove:
• PCU (
3.2.7)
• Charge roller unit (
3.5.3)
[A]: Rear bracket ( x1)
[B]: Front bracket ( x1)
[C]: Rotate the cleaning unit to the right 90 degrees.
[D]: OPC drum. Slide to the front to remove.
Important
• Set the removed OPC drum on a clean piece of paper and cover it to protect it
from light.
Reinstallation
• Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 (
 3.19.4).

3-51

PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS)

August, 2006

[A]

[B]

B132R206.WMF

Removing the Cleaning Blade
Remove:
• PCU (
3.2.7)
• Charge roller unit (
3.5.3)
• Drum (
3.5.4)
• Open the upper cover of the cleaning unit 90 degrees to the right.
[A]: Bracket
[B]: Cleaning blade ( x2)
Important
• After you replace the cleaning blade, always coat the drum with Lubricant
Powder B1329700. (For more, see the next page.) This must be done even if the
drum is not replaced.

3-52

August, 2006

PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS)

Reinstallation of the drum
To prevent scouring a new drum when the machine is
turned on, coat the new drum [A] with Lubricant
Powder (B1329700) before you install it.
Important

[A]

• THE LUBRICANT POWDER (B1329700) (COMPOSED OF
ZINC STEARATE) IS SPECIALLY DESIGNED FOR THIS
MACHINE (e-STUDIO4500C/5500C).
• NEVER USE SETTING POWDER (54429101) FOR THIS
MACHINE, OR YOU WILL DAMAGE THE DRUM CHARGE
ROLLER AND CAUSE PROBLEMS WITH IMAGE QUALITY.

• YOU MUST DO SOME SPS, OR A FATAL ERROR WILL
OCCUR. (3.5.7)

B023R960.WMF

Reinstallation
• Always reinstall the front end of the drum first.
• Never rotate the drum after reinstalling it.
• Always dust the drum before reinstallation after it was removed to replace or
service other parts in the PCU.
If the Lubricant Powder (B1329700) is not available…
If the lubricant powder is not available, coat the drum with this model’s Yellow toner.
Important
• NEVER USE THE YELLOW TONER OF ANOTHER MODEL.
• NEVER USE TONER TAKEN FROM THE YELLOW PCU TONER SUPPLY PORT, BECAUSE THIS
TONER HAS DEVELOPER MIXED WITH IT.

To dust the drum with yellow toner:
1. Spread a small amount of fresh yellow toner on a clean sheet of paper.
2. Locate a clean, dry piece of cloth.
3. Touch the yellow toner with the surface of the cloth.
4. Dust the surface of the drum with the cloth until the entire surface is covered.

3-53

PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS)

August, 2006

3.5.5 PCU CLEANING UNIT
[G]

[B]

[D]

[E]
1
2

[A]

B132R208.WMF

[C]

[F]

Remove:
• PCU (
3.2.7)
• Charge roller unit (
3.5.3)
• Drum (
3.5.4)
[A]: PCU joint
[B]: Rear bracket ( x1)
[C]: Long sleeve
[D]: Leaf spring
[E]: Short sleeve
[F]: Bracket and 2 gears ( x1)
[G]: Cleaning unit
• When you remove the cleaning unit, the mylar can catch on the PCU frame
and will scatter toner. To prevent this, rotate  then lift 
• The cleaning unit contains these PM parts: lubricant brush, toner brush.

3-54

August, 2006

PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS)

[A]

[B]

NG

B132R208C.WMF

[C]

OK

NG
B132R208B.WMF

Reinstallation
1. Install the new cleaning unit [A] in the PCU.
2. Check the positions of the seals at the rear and front:
• There must be no gap [B] between the edge of a seal and the edge of the
cleaning blade.
• There must be no overlap [C] at the edge of the seal and the edge of the
cleaning blade.
• Check that the cleaning blade does not catch on the edges of the seals as
shown in the drawing at "OK".

3-55

PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS)

August, 2006

3.5.6 TD SENSOR

[B]

[A]

B132R223.WMF

Remove:
• Open the front door.
• Remove the PCU from the machine. (
3.2.7)
[A]: Connector bracket ( x1)
[B]: TD sensor ( x2)
Reinstallation
After replacing the TD sensor:
• Replace the developer in the PCU where the TD sensor was replaced. (
3.5.1)
• Do SP3801 001 - 006 only for the PCU where the TD sensor was replaced.

3-56

August, 2006

PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS)

3.5.7 AFTER REPLACING THE PCU COMPONENTS AND
DEVELOPER
Do the following procedure after you replace the PCU, development, or any related
parts. Pay attention to the combination of replaced parts in the table below (require
procedures are different). Any SPs described in this table should be performed
according to the steps below.
1. Open the front door, then turn on the main power.
2. After the "Open Cover" message is shown on the display, close the front door.
3. Do the required SP.

No.
1
2
3
4

Combination of Replaced Parts
Drum
Drum
Drum Developer Cleaning Cleaning
Blade
Brush









5





6
7







8



9
10









Required SPs
After
Replacement
SP3820 002
(Manual Procon)
SP3810 001-005
(ClngInitSetExe)
-andSP3820 002
(Manual Procon)
SP3801 001-006
(Init TD Sensor)

SP3811 001-006
(Dev Setup Exe)

SP3801 001-006
(Init TD Sensor)





SP3811 001-006
(Dev Setup Exe)

3-57

Comments
Before reinstallation, cover the
drum completely with Lubricant
Powder.
Do NOT do these SPs which
initialize the TD sensor:
• SP3801 001 to 006
• SP3811 001 to 006
Before reinstallation, cover the
drum completely with Lubricant
Powder. Do these SPs to
initialize the TD sensor only for
the color(s) that were replaced.
Before reinstallation, cover the
drum completely with Lubricant
Powder.
Do these SPs to initialize the
developer only for the color(s)
that were replaced.
Do these SPs to initialize the TD
sensor only for the color(s) that
were replaced.
Do these SPs to initialize the
developer only for the color(s)
that were replaced.

PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS)

August, 2006

Important!
ONLY INITIALIZE THE TD SENSOR ONE TIME. DO NOT DO IT MORE THAN ONE TIME.
Only initialize the TD sensor at the following times:
• At installation, exactly as explained in the installation procedure.
• After you replace developer (only initialize the TD sensor for the color that you
replaced)
• As instructed in specific troubleshooting procedures.
• If you do not obey these instructions, you will get toner scattering inside the
machine.
Here is a summary of the important difference between SP3801 001-006 (Init TD
sensor) and SP3811 001-006 (Dev Setup Exe):
• SP3801 001-006 (Init TD sensor) only initializes the TD sensor.
• SP3811 001-006 (Dev Setup Exe) initializes the TD sensor and sends toner to
the sub hopper of each PCU. This covers the PCU drum with a layer of toner.
Covering the drum with toner prevents the cleaning blades from scratching or
bending the drums. SP3811 is necessary only when both the developer and
cleaning blade are replaced together. For the other procedures, if you send toner
to the PCU, that toner is wasted.

3-58

August, 2006

TONER SUPPLY UNIT

3.6 TONER SUPPLY UNIT
3.6.1 STC PORT CLEANING

[A]

[D]

[C]

[B]
B132R215.WMF

1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the STC holder front cover [A] ( x2)
3. Remove the STC bottom cover [B] (Pawls x2)
4. Wrap a clean cloth around the tip of a small screwdriver then scrape away any
toner that has collected inside the bottom holder front cover.
5. Use a clean cloth to clean the bottom of the holder front cover [C] and the
bottom of the holder [D].

3-59

TONER SUPPLY UNIT

August, 2006

3.6.2 CONNECTOR BOARD (CNB)

[B]

[A]

B132R216.WMF

Remove:
• Open the front door.
• Remove the toner hopper (
3.2.7)
[A]: Support bracket ( x2)
[B]: CNB (
 x8,  x1). Slide the PCB assembly to the right and remove it.

3-60

August, 2006

TONER SUPPLY UNIT

3.6.3 TONER PUMP

[A]
B132R217.WMF

Remove:
• Open the front door.
• Toner hopper (
3.2.7)
• Support bracket (
3.6.2)
• Connector Board (
3.6.2)
[A]: Toner pump assembly (
 x3,  x3, Bushing x1,  x1).
Pull the assembly straight down and remove it.

3-61

TONER SUPPLY UNIT

August, 2006

3.6.4 TONER END SENSOR

[A]

B132R213.WMF

Remove:
• Open the front door.
• Toner hopper (
3.2.7)
[A]: Toner end sensor (
 x1,  x2)

3-62

August, 2006

TONER SUPPLY UNIT

3.6.5 TONER HOPPER MOTOR

[B]

[A]

B132R211.WMF

Remove:
• Open the front door.
• Toner hopper (
3.2.7)
[A]: Motor cover ( x1)
[B]: Toner hopper motor ( x4, 
 x1)

3-63

PAPER TRANSFER UNIT

August, 2006

3.7 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT
3.7.1 RELAY SENSOR

[B]
[A]

B132R615.WMF

Pull out the drawer unit. (
3.2.9)
[A]: Sensor bracket ( x1)
[B]: Relay sensor (
 x1)
Reinstallation
• Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 (
 3.19.4).

3-64

August, 2006

PAPER TRANSFER UNIT

3.7.2 DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION SENSOR, REGISTRATION
SENSOR

[B]

[C]

[D]

[A]
B132R616.WMF

• Pull out the drawer unit. (
3.2.9)
• Open the guide plate [A].
Remove:
[B]: Sensor support plate ( x2)
[C]: Double-feed detection sensor (
 x1,  x1)
[D]: Registration sensor (
 x1)
Reinstallation
• Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 (
 3.19.4).

3-65

PAPER TRANSFER UNIT

August, 2006

3.7.3 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT
[A]

[C]

[B]

B132R302.WMF

[D]

B132R302A.WMF

• Pull out the drawer unit. (
3.2.9)
Remove:
[A]: Paper transport unit cover ( x2)
[B]: Timing belt, gear ( x1)
NOTE: Do not loosen or remove the paint-locked screws.
[C]: Press the release forward
[D]: Raise the handle to the vertical position.

3-66

August, 2006

PAPER TRANSFER UNIT

[C]

[D]

[A]
[F]

[B]

2
[E]

1
B132R303.WMF

Change the position of:
[A]: Spring
[B]: Spring
Remove:
[C]: Spring
[D]: Connector (
 x1) (use a pair of small pliers to remove the connector)
[E]: Bracket ( x2)
[F]: Paper transfer unit (PTR unit)
• The handle should be up.
• Raise the front .
• Pull the rear 
Reinstallation
• Be sure to set springs [A], [B], and [C] in their original positions before you reinstall the PTR unit.
• Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 (
 3.19.4).

3-67

PAPER TRANSFER UNIT

August, 2006

3.7.4 PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER, PAPER DISCHARGE PLATE

[A]
[B]

[C]

B132R304.WMF

Remove:
• Paper transfer unit (
3.7.3)
[A]: Paper discharge plate ( x2)
[B]: Paper transfer roller ( x2, Gear x1, Shaft bearings x2)
Reinstallation
• When you install the roller, the long end [C] is at the rear.
• Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 (
 3.19.4).

3-68

August, 2006

PAPER TRANSFER UNIT

3.7.5 LUBRICANT BAR
[A]

[B]

B132R305.WMF

Remove:
• Paper transfer unit (
3.7.3)
[A]: Entrance guide plate ( x2)
[B]: Lubrication bar ( x2)
Important! Work carefully to avoid scratching the paper transfer roller.
Reinstallation
• Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 (
 3.19.4).

3-69

PAPER TRANSFER UNIT

August, 2006

3.7.6 CLEANING BLADE

[A]

B132R306.WMF

Remove:
• Paper transfer unit (
3.7.3)
• Lubrication bar (
3.7.5)
[A]: Cleaning blade ( x2)
Reinstallation
• Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 (
 3.19.4).

3-70

August, 2006

PAPER TRANSFER UNIT

3.7.7 PTR CLEANING BRUSH ROLLER

[B]

[A]

[C]
B132R307.WMF

Remove:
• Paper transfer unit (
3.7.3)
• Transfer exit guide, paper transfer roller (
3.7.4)
[A]: Gear ( x1)
[B]: Brush roller cover ( x3)
[C]: PTR cleaning brush roller (Gear x1, Washer x1, Shaft bearing x1)
Reinstallation
• Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 (
 3.19.4).

3-71

PAPER TRANSFER UNIT

August, 2006

3.7.8 PAPER TRANSPORT BELT, SEPARATION POWER PACK
[C]
[A]

[D]

[E]
[B]

B132R308.WMF

B132R308A.WMF

• Pull out the drawer unit (
3.2.9)
Remove:
• Paper transport unit lever and cover (
3.7.3)
• Fusing unit (
3.9.2)
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:

Timing belt x1, Gear x1, Shaft bearing x1
Clip ring x1, Shaft bearing
Paper transport belt ( x2, 
 x2)
Cover
Separation power pack ( x6, 
 x2)

Reinstallation
• Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 (
 3.19.4).

3-72

August, 2006

PAPER TRANSFER UNIT

3.7.9 REGISTRATION MOTOR
[C]

[B]

[D]

[A]
B132R618.WMF

Remove:
• Drawer unit (
3.2.9)
[A]: Drawer unit connector bracket ( x1, 
 x3,  x2)
[B]: Gear cover ( x1)
[C]: Registration gear ( x1, Spring pin x1)
[D]: Registration motor assembly ( x3, 
 x1)
Reinstallation
• Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 (
 3.19.4).

3-73

PAPER TRANSFER UNIT

August, 2006

3.7.10 DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION LED

[A]

[B]

B132R619.WMF

[D]

[C]

Remove:
• Drawer unit (
3.2.9)
• Drawer unit connector bracket (
3.7.9)
• Registration motor assembly (
3.7.9)
• Sensor support plate (
3.7.2)
[A]: Upper stay ( x2,  x1, Gear x 1, Pin x1)
[B]: Lower stay ( x2, 
 x1)
[C]: Sensor bracket ( x2)
[D]: Double-feed detection LED ( x1, 
 x1)
Reinstallation
• Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 (
 3.19.4).

3-74

B132R620.WMF

August, 2006

IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT

3.8 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT
3.8.1 ITB (Image Transfer Belt), BELT CLEANING UNIT
[B]
[C]

[A]
[D]

B132R310.WMF

Disassembly and ITB Replacement
1. Put a clean sheet of paper on a flat surface.
2. Remove the image transfer unit from the machine (
3.2.8). Put the image
transfer unit on the sheet of paper.
NOTE: Keep the unit flat when you remove it, lift it, carry it, and put it down.
Otherwise, waste toner will spill out, and will spill inside the unit, and
this can cause copying problems.
3. Disconnect the image transfer belt unit connector and screw [A] ( x1, 
 1x)
4. Push the image transfer unit to the rear to disengage the front pins [B].
5. Pull the unit to the front to disengage the rear pin [C].
6. Lift the image transfer unit to separate it from the belt cleaning unit [D].

3-75

IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT

August, 2006

[D]
[B]

[A]

[C]

[E]
B132R314.WMF

Remove:
[A]: Encoder sensor bracket ( x1)
[B]: Set the image transfer unit on its front side up.
[C]: ID sensor / MUSIC sensor plate ( x2, 
 x1)
[D]: ITB
Important
• When you install the new ITB, the
edge of the belt with the encoder film
strip must be at [E]. The encoder
must be at the rear side.
• The encoder edge of the ITB is silver.
• Be sure to reattach the ID sensor /
MUSIC sensor plate [C] before you
reassemble the ITB ( x2, 
 x1).
• Make sure that the belt flange [F]
does not touch the roller edge.

[F]

B132R317A.WMF

3-76

August, 2006

IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT

Reassembly of the Image Transfer Unit and Belt Cleaning Unit
[B]

[A]
B132R315.WMF

[C]



1. Insert one sheet of A4/LT paper
[A] at the corner as shown.
NOTE: The paper protects the
corner seal [B] of the belt
cleaning unit.
2. Lower the belt unit [C] onto the
cleaning unit [D].
3. Push the belt unit  and belt
cleaning unit  together.



4. Connect the belt unit and belt
cleaning unit ( x1, 
 x1).

[D]

B132R316.WMF

3-77

IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT

NG

August, 2006

OK
[A]

B132R317.WMF

5. Pull out the paper [A] slowly.
6. Check the paper.
If the paper is unmarked, go to the next step.
-orIf the paper is creased or torn, separate the image transfer belt and cleaning
unit. Inspect the seal. If the seal is damaged, replace it.

3-78

August, 2006

IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT

Dusting the ITB with Lubricant Powder
1. Get a pack of Lubricant Powder B1329700.
Important!
• THE ITB MUST BE COATED WITH LUBRICANT POWDER (B1329700) BEFORE INSTALLING
A NEW ITB.
• THE LUBRICANT POWDER (B1329700) (COMPOSED OF ZINC STEARATE) IS SPECIALLY
DESIGNED FOR THIS MACHINE (e-STUDIO4500c/5500c).
• NEVER USE SETTING POWDER (54429101) FOR THIS MACHINE, OR YOU MAY DAMAGE
THE DRUM CHARGE ROLLER AND CAUSE PROBLEMS WITH IMAGE QUALITY.
• NEVER USE TONER TAKEN FROM THE TONER SUPPLY PORT OF THE YELLOW PCU
BECAUSE THIS TONER HAS DEVELOPER MIXED WITH IT.
• IF THE LUBRICANT POWDER (B1329700) IS NOT AVAILABLE, COAT THE ITB WITH THIS
MACHINE’S YELLOW TONER. DO NOT USE ANOTHER MODEL’S YELLOW TONER.

[C]
[B]
[A]
[F]

[E]
[D]

B132R318.WMF

2. While rotating the knob [A] in the direction indicated by the arrow [B], apply
Lubricant Powder (B1329700) at [C] with a soft dry cloth.
3. Rotate the ITB indicated by the arrow [B] through one full rotation. This allows
the lubricant powder to be spread completely on the ITB.
4. Turn the lever [D] to the ‘up’ position.
5. After the ITB is completely covered with powder, rotate the knob [E] in the
direction indicated by the arrow [F].

3-79

IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT

August, 2006

Important
• Be sure to apply powder until the ITB is
completely covered.

B132R319.WMF

• After covering the surface of the ITB with
lubricant power, be sure to rotate the ITB
through one full rotation in the opposite
direction. This allows the cleaning blade
edge [F] to be covered with sufficient
lubricant powder.

[F]

Reinstallation
• Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 (
 3.19.4).

3-80

B132R320.WMF

August, 2006

IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT

3.8.2 ITB CLEANING BLADE, DUST COLLECTION UNIT

[A]

B132R311.WMF

[C]

[D]
[B]
OK

NG

B132R312A.WMF

Remove:
• Image transfer unit (
3.2.8)
• Belt cleaning unit (
3.8.1)
[A]: ITB cleaning blade ( x2)
[B]: Dust collection unit ( x3)
Reinstallation
• After reinstallation of the dust collection unit, confirm that the seal [C] is covered
by the bracket [D].
• Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 (
 3.19.4).

3-81

IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT

August, 2006

3.8.3 ITB CLEANING ROLLER, SCRAPER BLADE
[A]

[C]

[B]

[D]

B132R313.WMF

Remove:
• Image transfer unit, ITB cleaning unit (
3.8.1)
• ITB cleaning blade, dust collection unit (
3.8.2)
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:

Rear bracket, coupling ( x1)
Front bracket ( x1, Gear x1)
ITB cleaning roller
ITB cleaning scraper blade ( x2)

Reinstallation
• Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 (
 3.19.4).

3-82

August, 2006

IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT

3.8.4 MUSIC AND ID SENSORS

[A]

[B]

B132R332.WMF

Remove the ID sensor/music sensor plate (
3.8.1)
[A]: Cover ( x2)
[B]: Music and ID sensors ( x4, 
 x1)
Reinstallation
• Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 (
 3.19.4).

3-83

IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT

August, 2006

3.8.5 IMAGE TRANSFER POWER PACK

[D]
[B]

[C]






1

2
2

B132R333.WMF

[A]
• Remove the ITB (
3.8.1)
[A]: Support bracket ( x1)
[B]: Small idle roller plate
[C]: Large idle roller plate
[D]: Image transfer power pack ( x6, 
 x6)
Reinstallation
• Connect the color coded connectors at
the correction positions.
 Red
 Blue
 Yellow
• When you reattach the support bracket
[A] rotate the screw [E] up as shown,
then tighten it.
[E]
Reinstallation
• Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 (
 3.19.4).

3-84

B132R334.WMF

August, 2006

IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT

3.8.6 BELT POSITION SENSORS

[A]

B132R335.WMF

• Remove the ITB (
3.8.1)
[A]: Belt position sensor assembly ( x3, 
 x2)
Reinstallation
• Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 (
 3.19.4).

3-85

FUSING UNIT

August, 2006

3.9 FUSING UNIT
3.9.1 FUSING BELT STRIPPERS

[B]

[C]

[A]

B132R403.WMF

[D]

B132R402.WMF

Pull out the drawer unit (
3.2.9)
[A]: Raise lever until it stops.
[B]: Fusing cleaning unit cover ( x2)
[C]: Fusing unit exit guide ( x2)
[D]: Hot roller stripper
• Press the sides in to disconnect the strippers and remove.

3-86

August, 2006

FUSING UNIT

3.9.2 FUSING UNIT
[D]
[C]
[A]

[B]

B132R401.WMF

1. Turn the copier OFF and disconnect the power cord at the power source.
2. Open the front door.
3. Pull out the drawer unit. (
3.2.9)
4. Allow the machine to cool for at least 10 minutes.
5. Loosen the fusing unit screw [A] ( x1)
6. Grip the fusing unit at [B] and [C] and lift the unit to remove it.
Important
• Do not touch the reference pin [D] when lifting the fusing unit.

3-87

FUSING UNIT

August, 2006

3.9.3 FUSING EXIT SENSOR, ACCORDION JAM SENSOR

[B]
[C]

B132R405.WMF

Remove:
• Fusing unit (
3.9.2)
[A]: Sensor bracket ( x2)
[B]: Fusing exit sensor (
 x1)
[C]: Accordion jam sensor (
 x1)

[A]

3-88

August, 2006

FUSING UNIT

3.9.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOSTATS, THERMISTOR

[B]

[A]

B132R407.WMF

[C]

Remove:
• Fusing unit (
3.9.2)
[A]: Lower entrance guide cover ( x2)
[B]: Pressure roller thermostats ( x4)
[C]: Pressure roller thermistor ( x1, 
 x1)

3-89

B132R410.WMF

FUSING UNIT

August, 2006

3.9.5 FUSING CLEANING UNIT

[A]
[B]

B132R408.WMF

Remove:
• Fusing unit (
3.9.2)
[A]: Fusing unit upper cover ( x3)
[B]: Fusing cleaning unit (Spring x1)

3-90

August, 2006

FUSING UNIT

3.9.6 FUSING BELT THERMOSTATS

[A]

[B]

B132R411.WMF

Remove:
• Fusing unit (
3.9.2)
• Fusing cleaning unit (
3.9.5)
[A]: Two left thermostats ( x4)
[B]: Two right thermostats ( x4)
NOTE: The thermostats, installed in line with one another, are of two types.
One is marked with a red mark, but their order of installation is not
important.

3-91

FUSING UNIT

August, 2006

3.9.7 FUSING THERMISTORS, HEATING ROLLER TEMPERATURE
SENSOR

[E]

[F]

[B]

[D]

[A]

[C]

B132R409.WMF

Remove:
• Fusing unit (
3.9.2)
• Fusing unit upper cover (
3.9.1)
• Fusing cleaning unit (
3.9.5)
[A]: Fusing unit belt cover ( x2)
[B]: Hot roller thermistor ( x1)
[C]: Heating roller thermistor ( x1)
[D]: Heating roller temperature sensor ( x2, Spring plates x2)
[E]: Wire ( x1)
[F]: Connector leads. Pull through the frame.

3-92

August, 2006

FUSING UNIT

3.9.8 FUSING BELT LUBRICATION ROLLER, CLEANING ROLLER

[C]

[A]
[B]

B132R404.WMF

Remove:
• Fusing unit (
3.9.2)
• Fusing cleaning unit (
3.9.5)
1. Remove the fusing belt lubrication roller [A] (Springs x 2, Bushing x2,  x2).
2. Remove the cleaning roller [B].
NOTE: Press on each end of the roller to release the springs [C].
Reinstallation
• When you install the fusing belt lubrication roller, the end with the serial number
must be toward the rear of the machine.

3-93

FUSING UNIT

August, 2006

3.9.9 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING FELT ROLLER

[A]

B132R406.WMF

[B]

[D]

[C]
[E]

Remove:
• Fusing unit (
3.9.2)
[A]: Exit sensor bracket ( x2, 
 x2)
[B]: Lower exit guide assembly ( x2)
[C]: Lower exit guide ( x2)
[D]: Pressure roller strippers ( x7)
[E]: Cleaning felt roller Assy

3-94

August, 2006

FUSING UNIT

[H]

[G]

[H]

[I]

[F]
[I]

Remove:
[E]: Cleaning felt roller Assy
[F]: Cleaning felt roller
[G]: Bracket
[H]: Springs
[I]: Bushings

3-95

[E]

FUSING UNIT

August, 2006

3.9.10 HOT ROLLER, HEATING ROLLER FUSING LAMPS

[B]

[C]

B132R413.WMF

[A]

Remove:
• Fusing unit (
3.9.2)
• Fusing unit upper cover (
3.9.1)
• Fusing cleaning unit (
3.9.5)
[A]: Bracket
[B]: Rear lamp bracket ( x2)
[C]: Front lamp brackets ( x1 each)

3-96

August, 2006

FUSING UNIT

[C]
[A]

[D]

[B]
B132R414.WMF

Important! Before disconnecting the lamps, mark the connectors to ensure that
you match their connection points correctly at reinstallation.
Disconnect at front and rear:
[A]: Heating roller fusing lamp connectors (
 x4)
[B]: Hot roller fusing lamp connectors (
 x2)
Remove:
[C]: Heating roller fusing lamps x2
[D]: Hot roller fusing lamp x1

3-97

FUSING UNIT

August, 2006

3.9.11 PRESSURE ROLLER FUSING LAMP

[B]

[A]
[C]

B132R412.WMF

Remove:
• Fusing unit (
3.9.2)
• Fusing unit upper cover (
3.9.1)
• Fusing cleaning unit (
3.9.5)
• Brackets (
3.9.10)
[A]: Pressure roller lamp front bracket ( x1)
[B]: Pressure roller lamp rear bracket ( x1)
[C]: Pressure roller fusing lamp (
 x2)

3-98

August, 2006

FUSING UNIT

3.9.12 HEATING ROLLER, FUSING BELT, HOT ROLLER

[A]

B132R415.WMF

Remove:
• Fusing unit (
3.9.2)
• Fusing unit upper cover (
3.9.1)
• Fusing cleaning unit (
3.9.5)
• Hot roller fusing lamp, heating roller fusing lamp (x3) (
3.9.10)
[A]: Release levers. Press down to release.

3-99

FUSING UNIT

[A]

August, 2006

[K]

[J]

[D]

[L]

[I]
[M]
[E]

[K]
[J]

[F]
[G]

[B]
[I]

[G]
[E]
[C]
[H]

[F]
B132R416.WMF

1. Remove screws [A], [B], [C] ( x3).
2. Rotate the frame [D] to the right.
3. At the front and rear of the heating roller, remove:
[E] Lock rings
[F] Bushings
[G] Bearings
4. Remove the heating roller [H]
5. At the front and rear of the hot roller, remove:
[I] Lock rings
[J] Shaft bearings
[K] Gears
6. Remove the fusing belt [L] and hot roller [M].

3-100

August, 2006

FUSING UNIT

[K]

[J]

[D]

[L]

[M]

[K]

[I]
[A]
[E]
[F]

[J]

[B]

[I]

[G]

[O]
[C]

[H]
[G] [F]

[E]

[N]

Assembling procedure:
• Attach the fusing belt [L] and hot roller [M].
• Attach the lock rings [I], shaft bearings [J] and gears [K] to the front and rear of
the heating roller.
NOTE: Make sure the bearing flange is on the outside.
• Attach the heating roller [H] (Length [N] > [O]).
• Attach the lock rings [E], bushings [F] and bearings [G] to the front and rear of
the heating roller.
NOTE: Make sure the bearing flange is on the outside.
• Rotate the flame [D] to the left.
• Tight the three screws [A], [B] and [C].

3-101

FUSING UNIT

August, 2006

3.9.13 PRESSURE ROLLER
[F]
[A]
[C]
[D]

[B]

[E]
[B]
B132R417.WMF

Remove:
• Fusing unit (
3.9.2)
• Fusing unit upper cover (
3.9.15)
• Fusing cleaning unit (
3.9.5)
• Pressure roller fusing lamp (x1) (
3.9.11)
[A]: Lower fusing entrance guide ( x2)
[B]: Front screw ( x2)
[C]: Rear screw ( x1)
[D]: Hot roller fusing lamp (
 x1), heating roller fusing lamps (
 x2)
[E]: Rotate the frame to the right, in the direction shown by the arrow.
[F]: Pressure roller.
NOTE: Lift pressure roller and remove without detaching shaft bearing and
gears.

3-102

August, 2006

FUSING UNIT

3.9.14 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER

[A]

B132R418.WMF

Remove:
• Fusing unit (
3.9.2)
• Lower exit guide assembly (
3.9.9)
[A]: Pressure roller strippers

3-103

DUPLEX UNIT

August, 2006

3.10 DUPLEX UNIT
3.10.1 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR

[A]

B132R500.WMF

[B]
• Pull out the duplex unit.
[A]: Duplex unit front cover (
 x3)
[B]: Duplex inverter motor (
 x3,  x1, Timing belt x1, Gear x1)

3-104

B132R504.WMF

August, 2006

DUPLEX UNIT

3.10.2 DUPLEX TRANSPORT MOTOR

[A]
B132R506.WMF

• Pull out the duplex unit.
• Release the lower guide plate with knob F.
Remove:
• Duplex unit front cover (
3.10.1)
[A]: Duplex transport motor (
 x3,  x1, Timing belt x 1)

3-105

DUPLEX UNIT

August, 2006

3.10.3 DUPLEX UNIT SENSORS
Duplex Entrance Sensor
[A]
[C]

[B]

B132R502.WMF

• Pull out the duplex unit.
Remove:
[A]: Bracket (
 x 2)
[B]: Release harness clamp
[C]: Duplex entrance sensor ( x 1)
Reinstallation
• Insert the anti-static brushes into the roller holes.

3-106

August, 2006

DUPLEX UNIT

Transport Sensor 1, 2, Inverter Exit Sensor

[A]

[B]
[D]

[C]
B132R503.WMF

Remove the duplex unit (
3.2.10)
[A]: Inverter unit (
 x1 front,  x1 rear,  x1)
[B]: Reverse trigger roller assembly (Rear:  x1, Shaft bushing x1) (Front:  x1,
Link gear x1, Spring x1, Shaft bushing x1)
[C]: Plate (
 x2)
[D]: Cross-stay (
 x 4)

3-107

DUPLEX UNIT

August, 2006

[F]
[A]

[B]

[C]

[F]

[D]

[E]

B132R507.WMF

[A]: Jogger fences (
 x 1 ea.)
[B]: Left transport cover (
 x 2)
• The front screw is a shoulder screw. Insert the screws in the correct holes
when re-attaching.
• To avoid breaking the tabs under the left edge of the table, pull the table to
the right to disengage the tabs and then remove.
[C]: Transport sensor 1 (x 1,  x 1)
[D]: Transport sensor 2 (x 1,  x 1)
[E]: Inverter exit sensor (
 x 1,  x 1,  x 1)
Reinstallation
• Make sure the end tabs [F] of the left transport cover are engaged correctly.

3-108

August, 2006

DUPLEX UNIT

Transport Sensor 3
[B]

[C]
[A]

[D]

B132R508.WMF

Remove:
[A]: Duplex unit front cover (
3.10.1)
[B]: Cross stay (
 x 1)
[C]: Right transport cover (
 x 2,  x 1)
NOTE: The front screw is a shoulder screw. Insert the screws in the correct
holes when re-attaching.
[D]: Transport sensor bracket (
 x 2)
[E]: Transport sensor 3 ( x 1)

3-109

DUPLEX UNIT

August, 2006

3.10.4 DUPLEX JOGGER MOTOR

[A]

B132R505.WMF

Remove:
[A]: Duplex unit front cover (
3.10.1)
[B]: Duplex jogger motor (
 x2,  x1)

3-110

August, 2006

DUPLEX UNIT

3.10.5 DUPLEX JOGGER BELT

[B]
[A]
B140R819.WMF

Remove:
• Remove the inverter unit (
3.10.3)
• Cross stay (
3.10.3)
• Reverse trigger roller assembly (
3.10.3)
• Jogger fences (
3.10.3)
• Left transport cover (
3.10.3)
• Duplex jogger motor (
3.10.4).
1. If you are replacing the belt, set both jogger fence brackets at the center of the
belt and tighten the screw [A].
2. If you are adjusting the belt, loosen the screw and slide the plastic piece [B] on
the belt to the left or right to adjust the position of the front fence, then tighten
the screw.

3-111

TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1)

August, 2006

3.11 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1)
3.11.1 TANDEM TRAY

[C]

[A]
[B]
B140R820.WMF

[D]

B140R821.WMF

1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the tandem tray drawer [A] completely to separate the left [B] and right
[C] sides of the tandem tray.
3. Remove the left tandem tray [D] (
 x 5).

3-112

August, 2006

TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1)

[A]

[B]

[B]
[D]

B140R822.WMF

[C]

[E]
B140R823.WMF

[A]: Right tandem tray (
 x 2).
NOTE: 1) When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the wheels [B]
ride on the slide rail [C].
2) When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the tandem tray
stopper [D] is set behind the stopper [E] on the frame.

3-113

TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1)

August, 2006

3.11.2 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[A]

B132R623.WMF

• Pull out the tandem feed tray.
[A]: Return sensor assembly ( x 1, 
 x1).

3-114

August, 2006

TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1)

3.11.3 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[A]

[D]
[C]

[B]
B140R825.WMF

• Pull out the tandem feed tray.
[A]: Rear bottom plate (
 x 1).
[B]: Back fence transport gear (
 x 1)
[C]: Move the back fence to the right.
[D]: Rear fence HP sensor ( x 1)

3-115

TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1)

August, 2006

3.11.4 TANDEM RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[B]

[A]

[C]

B140R826.WMF

[D]

[E]
B140R827.WMF

Remove the right tandem tray (
 3.11.1)
[A]: Inner cover (
 x 2)
[B]: Side fences (
 x 1 each)
[C]: Bottom plate (
 x 4)
[D]: Connector ( x 1)
[E]: Tandem right tray paper sensor (
 x 1)

3-116

August, 2006

TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1)

3.11.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Before replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire, remove the front bottom
plate lift wire. It is necessary to remove the shaft for replacing the rear
bottom plate lift wire.

[A]

[C]
B140R828.WMF

[F]
[E]
[D]

[B]

Remove the right tandem tray. (
 3.11.11)
[A]: Remove the inner cover (
 x 2) (
 3.11.14)
[B]: Wire stoppers
• Slightly lift the front bottom plate and unhook.
[C]: Wire covers ( x 1 each)
[D]: Bracket (
 x 1,  x 1, bushing x 1)
[E]: Gear
[F]: Bottom plate lift wire

3-117

B140R829.WMF

TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1)

August, 2006

[E]

[D]
[B]
[A]

[C]

B140R830.WMF

NOTE: When re-installing the bottom plate lift wire:
1) Set the positioning pin [A] in the hole [B], and set the projection [C] in
the hole [D].
2) Position the wire as shown [E].
3) Do not cross the wires.

3-118

August, 2006

TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1)

3.11.6 TANDEM TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE
At the factory, this tray is set up for A4 or LT LEF. Only A4 or LT LEF paper can be
used for tandem feed.

[B]

[D]
B140R832.WMF

[A]
[C]

B140R831.WMF

1. Open the front cover.
2. Completely pull out the tandem feed tray [A] to separate the right tandem tray
[B] from the left tandem tray.
Right Tray
3. Remove the inner cover [C] (
 x 2).
4. Re-position the side fences [D] (
 x 1 each).
A4: Outer slot position
LT: Inner slot position
5. Re-install the right tandem inner cover.

3-119

TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1)

August, 2006

[B]

[C]

[D]

[A]

B132R624.WMF

B140R834.WMF

Left Tray
6. Remove the tray cover [A] (
 x 2).
7. Remove the DC motor cover [B] (
 x 5).
8. Remove the rear side fence [C] and front side fence [D] (
 x 4 ea.)
9. Re-position the side fences (
 x 4 ea.).
A4: Outer slot position
LT: Inner slot position
10. Re-install the DC motor cover and the tray cover.

3-120

August, 2006

TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1)

[A]

A4

LT

[B]

B132R836.WMF

[C]

11. Re-position the return position sensor bracket [A] (
 x 1).
• For A4 set the screw in the left hole [B].
• For LT set the screw in the right hole [C].
12. Input the new paper size into SP5959 001.
Reinstallation
• Do the scanner and registration adjustments (see section 3.19.1, 3.19.3).

3-121

PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3)

August, 2006

3.12 PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3)
3.12.1 PICK-UP, FEED, SEPARATION ROLLERS

[A]

[C]

[B]

[D]

B132R601.WMF

[A]: Remove the tray.
[B]: Feed roller ( x 1)
[C]: Pick-up roller ( x 1)
[D]: Separation roller ( x 1)
Important
• The operation of the FRR mechanisms for the tandem tray (Tray 1), universal
trays (Tray 2, Tray 3), bypass tray, and ARDF are similar. However, the only
rollers that are interchangeable are the tandem and universal tray rollers (Trays 1,
2, 3).
• Do not touch the surface of new rollers during replacement.

3-122

August, 2006

PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3)

3.12.2 FEED UNIT

[C]

[A]

[B]

B132R602A.WMF

B132R603A.WMF

Remove:
• Front door (
3.2.4)
• If the LCT is connected, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine.
• LCT entrance guide cover and right lower cover
Pull out all three trays (do not remove).
[A]: Toner collection bottle
[B]: Vertical transport guide
[C]: Inner cover (
 x 2)
NOTE: When re-installing the vertical transport guide, remove the lower right cover
then insert from it.

3-123

PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3)

August, 2006

[B]

[A]

B132R625.WMF

B132R604.WMF

[A]: Guide plate (
 x 1)
• 1st feed unit only.
[B]: Feed unit (
 x 1,  x 3)
• Insert your hand from the right and pull the feed unit forward.
NOTE: To avoid hitting the unit on the sides of the machine, remove it
carefully and slowly.
Important: If the paper feed motor must be replaced, replace the feed unit.

3-124

August, 2006

PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3)

3.12.3 SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT
The position of the drive gear for the separation roller can be changed in order to
change the amount of pressure exerted by the separation roller. This adjustment
can be done:
• When feeding special paper, especially thick paper
• When the customer is experiencing feed problems

[A]

[B]

B132R605.WMF

1. Remove the feed unit (
3.12.2)
2. Loosen the hex screw [A].
3. The separation roller gear [B] is positioned at the groove before shipping.
To adjust for thick paper, move the separation roller gear to the left to
decrease the pressure.
-orTo correct misfeeds, move the separation roller gear to the right to increase
the pressure.

3-125

PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3)

August, 2006

3.12.4 PAPER END, TRAY LIFT, PAPER FEED SENSORS

[A]

[B]

[C]
[D]

Remove:
• Feed unit (
3.12.2)
[A]: Sensor bracket (
 x1)
[B]: Paper end sensor ( x1)
[C]: Tray lift sensor ( x1)
[D]: Sensor bracket (
 x1)
[E]: Paper feed sensor ( x1)

B132R606.WMF

[E]

3-126

August, 2006

PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3)

3.12.5 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR

[B]
[A]
[C]

B132R607.WMF

Remove:
• Feed unit (
3.12.2)
[A]: Bracket (
 x1)
[B]: Upper unit (
 x4)
[C]: Vertical transport sensor ( x1)

3-127

BYPASS UNIT

August, 2006

3.13 BYPASS UNIT
3.13.1 BYPASS PICK-UP, FEED, SEPARATION ROLLER

[B]
[A]
[C]
B132R601A.WMF

• Remove right covers (
3.2.5)
• Open the bypass tray
• Remove the bypass unit (
3.13.3)
• Remove the upper unit cover (
3.13.4)
Remove:
[A]: Pick-up roller ( x1)
[B]: Feed roller ( x1)
[C]: Separation roller ( x1)

3-128

August, 2006

BYPASS UNIT

3.13.2 BYPASS AUTO PAPER SIZE DETECTION SWITCHES

[B]

[C]
[A]
B132R610.WMF

[E]

• Remove right covers
(
3.2.5)
• Open the bypass tray
Disconnect:
[A]: Front hinge
[B]: Rear hinge
Remove:
[C]: Bypass tray ( x1)
[D]: Bypass table (
 x2,
Pawls x2)
[E]: Paper size detection
board (Pawl x1, 
 x1)

[D]

B132R611.WMF

3-129

BYPASS UNIT

August, 2006

3.13.3 BYPASS UNIT

[A]

B132R626.WMF

• Remove right covers (
3.2.5)
• Open the bypass tray
Remove:
[A]: Bypass unit (
 x4,  x2)

3-130

August, 2006

BYPASS UNIT

3.13.4 BYPASS PAPER END SENSOR, FEED SENSOR
[A]

[B]

[C]
Remove:
• Bypass unit (
3.13.3)
[A]: Unit upper cover (Release x1)
[B]: Bypass paper end sensor ( x1)
[C]: Feed sensor (
 x1,  x1)

3-131

B132R613.WMF

BYPASS UNIT

August, 2006

3.13.5 BYPASS FEED CLUTCH

[A]

[B]
[C]

B132R614.WMF

Remove:
• Bypass unit (
3.13.3)
[A]: Bypass feed clutch ( x1,  x1)
Reinstallation
• Make sure the arm [B] fits correctly into the notch bracket [C] of the clutch.

3-132

August, 2006

BOARDS

3.14 BOARDS
3.14.1 CONTROLLER UNIT

[A]
[B]

B132R710.WMF


CAUTION
Before you start this procedure, turn off the main power switch and
disconnect the power cord.
Remove
[A]: Disconnect the ARDF
[B]: Controller unit (
 x3)

3-133

BOARDS

August, 2006

3.14.2 CONTROLLER BOARD, 256 MB MEMORY, NVRAM

[A]
[B]

[C]






[D]
B132R712.WMF

B132R711.WMF

Important:
• If you are going to replace the NVRAM, follow the procedure on the next page
and refer to these illustrations as necessary.
• Do not remove the NVRAM until you have uploaded is contents. (For more, see
the procedures on the following page.)
• Always touch a metal surface to discharge any static on your hands before you
touch the controller board.
• Work carefully when removing the NVRAM to avoid damaging other components
on the controller board or short circuiting the pins of other chips.
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:

Options slot covers , ,  (
 x 2 each)
Controller board (
 x 2) (
3.14.1)
NVRAM (Pawls x2)
256 MB memory

Reinstallation
• If you replace the controller board, put the memory and NVRAM from the old
controller board onto the new controller board.

3-134

August, 2006

BOARDS

3.14.3 NVRAM REPLACEMENT
Upload NVRAM Data Æ SD Card
1. Do SP5990 001 to print the SMC report.
2. Turn the copier main power switch off.
3. Insert an SD card in Slot 3
4. Execute SP5824 to upload the data to the SD card.
5. Switch the machine off and disconnect the power cord.

Replace NVRAM
1. Remove the NVRAM (
3.14.2).
2. Install the new NVRAM.

Restore NVRAM Data to the New NVRAM
1. Turn the copier main power switch off.
2. Put the SD card with the NVRAM data into Slot 3.
3. Open the front door of the copier and keep it open.
4. Turn the copier main power switch on.
If the NVRAM is new, SC195 (Machine Serial Number Error) may appear. If
this occurs:
• Enter the SP mode and do SP5801 001 to reset the memory to the defaults
(All).
• Switch the machine off/on and start from Step 1.
Important! WHEN SC195 OCCURS, THE SERIAL NUMBER MUST BE INPUT. PLEASE
CONTACT YOUR TECHNICAL SUPERVISOR.
5. Execute SP5825 to download the data uploaded from the old NVRAM.
NOTE: If the machine returns SC195 (Machine Serial Number Error), ignore it.
6. Switch the machine off and remove the SD card from Slot 3.
7. Switch the machine on, then do SP5990 001 to print another SMC report.
8. Compare this new SMC report with the report you printed in Step 1. If any of the
SP settings are different, enter the SP settings of the first report.
9. Execute SP5907 and enter the brand and model name of the machine for
Windows Plug & Play capability.

3-135

BOARDS

August, 2006

3.14.4 CONTROLLER BOX COVER, BICU, IOB

1
2

[A]

B132R706.WMF

Remove:
• Rear covers (
3.2.6)
[A]: Controller box cover (
 x17)
[B]: IOB ( x20, 
 x9)
[C]: BICU ( x11, 
 x9)
[C]

[B]

B132R714.WMF

3-136

August, 2006

BOARDS

NOTE: When you replace the BICU, make sure that the DIP switches are set to
the correct positions.
• 120V machines: Make sure only DIP switch #1 is ON.
• 220/230/240V machines: Make sure only DIP switch #2 is ON.
Example: A 220/230/240V machine (only DIP SW #2 is ON, the others are OFF).

ON

OFF

3-137

BOARDS

August, 2006

3.14.5 RDS BOARD, JUMPER
[A]

[B]

B132R709.WMF

Remove:
• Controller unit (
3.14.1)
• Interface board (
3.14.6)
[A]: RDS board (
 x,  x)
[B]: Jumper

3-138

August, 2006

BOARDS

3.14.6 INTERFACE BOARD, MOTHER BOARD

[B]

[A]

B132R708.WMF

B132R713.WMF

1. Remove the controller unit. (
3.14.4)
2. Remove the RAPI EXT board [A] (
 x4)
3. Remove the HDD. (
3.15)
4. Remove the mother board [B] (
 x5,  x12)

3-139

BOARDS

August, 2006

3.14.7 HVPS, PFC BOARD

[A]

[C]

[B]

B132R720.WMF

• Remove the rear lower cover (
3.2.6)
Remove:
[A]: HVPS and PFC board assembly ( x22, 
 x10,  x23)
[B]: HVPS (
 x8)
[C]: PFC board (
 x6)

3-140

August, 2006

BOARDS

3.14.8 PSU

[A]

B132R722.WMF

• Remove the rear covers (
3.2.6)
Remove:
• HVPS, PFC board assembly (
3.14.7)
[A]: PSU ( x7, 
 x8)

3-141

BOARDS

August, 2006

3.14.9 AC DRIVE BOARD

[A]

B132R727.WMF

• Remove left lower cover. (
3.2.3)
[A]: AC drive board (
 x8,  x6)

3-142

August, 2006

BOARDS

3.14.10 TRANSFER MOTOR, DRIVE, DRIVE MOTOR BOARDS

[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

B132R716.WMF

• Remove rear covers (
3.2.6)
• Open and lock the controller box (
3.2.11)
[A]: Board assembly ( x5,  x21, 
 x2)
[B]: DRB (Drive Board)
[C]: TMB (Transfer Motor Board)
[D]: DMB (Drive Motor Board)

3-143

HDD UNIT

August, 2006

3.15 HDD UNIT

[A]

B132R707.WMF

Important
• The HDD unit contains four separate hard disks. However, the four disks are
always replaced together as a unit. Never attempt to replace a single disk.
Remove:
• Rear covers (
3.2.6)
• Controller box cover (
3.14.4)
[A]: HDD unit ( x8, 
 x4)
Important
• Mark the harness connectors before you disconnect them. They must be
reconnected at their connection points.
1. Reassemble the machine.
2. Enter the SP mode and do SP5832 001 to format the hard disks. Formatting on
the machine partitions the hard disks properly.
3. Do SP5853 001 to download the fixed stamps from the ROM to the HDD.
4. Switch the machine off and on to enable the fixed stamps for use.

3-144

August, 2006

HDD UNIT

Disposal of HDD Units
• Never remove an HDD unit from the work site without the consent of the client.
• If the customer has any concerns about the security of any information on the
HDD, the HDD must remain with the customer for disposal or safe keeping.
• The HDD may contain proprietary or classified (Confidential, Secret) information.
Specifically, the HDD contains document server documents and data stored in
temporary files created automatically during copy job sorting and jam recovery.
Such data is stored on the HDD in a special format so it cannot normally be read
but can be recovered with illegal methods.
Reinstallation
Explain to the customer that the following information stored on the HDD is lost
when the HDD is replaced:
• Document server documents
• Fixed stamps
• Document server Address book
The address book and document server documents (if needed) must be input
again.
If the customer is using the Data Overwrite Security unit, the Data Overwrite
Security function must be set up again. For more, see Section "1. Installation".

3-145

MOTORS

August, 2006

3.16 MOTORS
3.16.1 PCU MOTOR, DRUM MOTOR
[B]

[A]

B132I718A.WMF

1. Remove the rear covers. (
3.2.6)
2. Open and lock the controller box. (
3.2.11)
3. Remove the PCU stand [A] stored under the machine.
4. Remove the drum motor shaft tool [B] (shorter tool) from the bottom of the PCU
stand.

3-146

August, 2006

MOTORS

[A]

[D]

[E]
[C]
[B]
[F]

B132R724.WMF

5. Remove the PCU motor [A] ( x1, 
 x4).
6. Open the front door.
7. Remove the toner hopper. (
3.2.7)
Important: Make sure the toner hopper slide rails are pushed into the machine.
8. At the front of the machine, attach the short tool [B] to the shaft of the drum
motor to be removed.
9. Rotate the short tool in the direction of the embossed arrow [C] on the short
tool (counter-clockwise) until the holes are aligned.
NOTE: You must fasten the short tool.
10. Use the M3x9 screw to fasten the screws to lock the shaft [D].
11. Remove the drum motor screws [E] (
 x3)
12. Turn the drum-motor hub [F] counter-clockwise  and remove the drum motor
shaft.
13. Remove the drum motor  ( x1)
Reinstallation
1. Attach the short tool to the drum shaft and fasten it with the screw.
2. Attach the drum motor.
3. Rotate the drum motor clockwise until it stops.
4. Fasten the three screws to the drum motor.

3-147

MOTORS

August, 2006

3.16.2 PAPER TRANSFER MOTOR

[A]
B132R717.WMF

• Remove rear covers (
3.2.6)
• Open and lock controller box (
3.2.11)
[A]: Paper transfer motor ( x1, 
 x4)

3-148

August, 2006

MOTORS

3.16.3 IMAGE TRANSFER MOTOR

[A]
B132R718.WMF

• Remove rear covers (
3.2.6)
• Open and lock controller box (
3.2.11)
• Remove the image transfer board assembly (
3.14.10)
[A]: Image transfer motor (Spring x1,  x1, 
 x3, Timing belt x1, Gear x1)

3-149

MOTORS

August, 2006

3.16.4 WASTE TONER TRANSPORT MOTOR, WASTE TONER
DISTRIBUTION MOTOR

[A]

[C]

B132R721.WMF

[B]
• Remove rear covers (
3.2.6)
• Open and lock the controller box (
3.2.11)
• Remove the HVPS and PFC board assembly (
3.14.7)
[A]: Waste toner motor assembly (
 x4)
[B]: Waste toner transport motor ( x1, 
 x2)
[C]: Waste toner distribution motor (
 x2,  x1)

3-150

August, 2006

MOTORS

3.16.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR (TRAYS 1, 2, 3)

[A]

[B]

[C]
B132R723A.WMF

• Remove the rear covers (
3.2.6)
• Open the controller box and lock it (
3.2.11)
• Remove HVPS and PFC board assembly (
3.14.7)
• Remove PSU (
3.14.8)
Tray 1
[A]: Bracket (
 x1)
[B]: Bottom plate lift motor – Tray 1 (
 x3,  x1)
Trays 2, 3
• Remove HVPS and PFC board assembly (
3.14.7)
• Remove PSU (
3.14.8)
Remove:
[C]: Bottom plate lift motor – Tray 2, 3 ( x1, 
 x2)

3-151

MOTORS

August, 2006

3.16.6 ITB DRIVE MOTOR

[B]

[A]

B132R719A.WMF

B132R725.WMF

• Remove rear covers (
3.2.6)
• Open and lock the controller box (
3.2.11)
• Remove the Transfer board assembly (
3.14.10)
[A]: Support stay ( x21,  x1, 
 x4)
[B]: ITB drive motor (
 x3,  x1)

3-152

August, 2006

AIR FILTERS

3.17 AIR FILTERS
3.17.1 TONER HOPPER FILTER

[A]
B132R212.WMF

Remove:
• Toner hopper (
3.2.7)
• Motor cover (
3.6.5)
[A]: Toner hopper filter

3-153

AIR FILTERS

August, 2006

3.17.2 OZONE FILTER, DUST FILTERS
[A]

[D]

[B]

[C]
B132R729.WMF

Remove:
[A]: Cover (
 x1)
[B]: Inner cover
[C]: Dust filters x3
[D]: Ozone filter
Reinstallation
• Make sure you install the filters as shown. If you do not, you cannot reattach the
cover [B].

3-154

August, 2006

AIR FILTERS

3.17.3 SCANNER FILTER

[A]

[B]

B132R730.WMF

Remove:
[A]: Top left cover (
 x1)
[B]: Scanner filter

3-155

ARDF

August, 2006

3.18 ARDF
3.18.1 ARDF COVERS
[A]

[C]

[B]

B132R104.WMF

[A]: Open the feed cover.
[B]: Front cover (
 x 3, Tabs x4). Press down the tabs.
[C]: Rear cover (
 x 2, Tabs x2). Press down the tabs.

3-156

August, 2006

ARDF

3.18.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT
[C]
[B]
[A]

[D]

B132R105.WMF

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:

Open the feed cover.
Remove the snap fitting.
Pull toward you slightly to disconnect the rear end of the shaft
Disconnect the front end of the shaft.

3-157

ARDF

August, 2006

[B]

3.18.3 FEED BELT, PICK-UP ROLLER
Remove:
• Original Feed unit (
3.18.2)
[A]: E-ring
[B]: Cover
[C]: Slide bushings out

[A]

[D]

Reassembly
Make sure that the tab  on the front
guide plate is above the pick-up
roller unit [D].

[C]



B132R106.WMF

[E]: Feed belt holder
[F]: Feed belt
NOTE: Remove slowly. Do not let
the springs ,  fall.

[E]





[F]
B132R107.WMF

[G]: ARDF pick-up roller
[G]

B132R106A.WMF

3-158

August, 2006

ARDF

3.18.4 BOTTOM PLATE POSITION SENSOR

[B]

[C]

[A]
B132R117.WMF

Remove:
• Remove front cover (
3.18.1)
• Original feed unit (
3.18.2)
[A]: Pin screw x1
[B]: Raise the bottom plate
[C]: Bottom plate position sensor ( x1).

3-159

ARDF

August, 2006

3.18.5 INTERVAL, ORIGINAL WIDTH, SKEW CORRECTION,
SEPARATION SENSORS
[A]
[B]

[C]
B132R110.WMF

[D]

[E]
[F]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:

Open the feed cover.
Guide plate (
 x 3).
Width sensor bracket (
 x 2)
Original width sensors (x 5)
Interval sensor ( x 1)
Skew correction sensor ( x 1)
Separation sensor ( x 1)

[G]

B132R111.WMF

3-160

August, 2006

ARDF

3.18.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS

[A]

B132R109A.WMF

Remove:
• Front, rear covers (
3.18.1)
• Clip rings ( x2).

[C]



[A]: Remove the original tray
[B]: Lower cover (
 x4)
[C]: Original length sensors:
 B5 original length ( x1)
 A4 original length ( x1)
 LG original length ( x1)

[B]

3-161





B132R109B.WMF

ARDF

August, 2006

3.18.7 FEED COVER, ORIGINAL SET, BOTTOM PLATE, PICK-UP
ROLLER HP, UPPER INVERTER SENSORS

[A]

[B]

B132R116.WMF

Remove:
• Front, rear covers (
3.18.1)
[A]: Original tray ( x1,  x2, Bushings x2)
[B]: Lift tray ( x1, Pin screw x1)

3-162

August, 2006

ARDF

[D]

[C]

[E]

[B]

[A]

B132R118.WMF

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:

Original set sensor ( x1, 
 x1)
Upper inverter sensor (
 x1,  x1)
Feed cover sensor ( x1)
Pick-up roller HP sensor ( x1)
Bottom plate position sensor ( x1)

3-163

ARDF

August, 2006

3.18.8 ARDF POSITION SENSOR, APS START SENSOR

[A]

[B]
[C]

[D]
[A]: Raise the ARDF to the vertical position.
Remove:
[B]: APS bracket (
 x1)
[C]: ARDF position sensor ( x1,  x1)
[D]: APS start sensor ( x1,  x1)

3-164

B132R125.WMF

August, 2006

ARDF

3.18.9 ORIGINAL REGISTRATION, EXIT SENSORS
[B]

[A]

B132R112.WMF

• Remove the front and rear covers (
3.18.1)
• Remove the original feed unit (
3.18.2)
[A]: Rotate the inverter guide 180 degrees.
[B]: Original guide plate (
 x4).

3-165

ARDF

August, 2006

[A]

[B]

B132R113.WMF

[C]
[D]
Remove:
[A]: Bracket (
 x1)
[B]: Original registration sensor
( x1)
[C]: Bracket (
 x1)
[D]: Original exit sensor ( x1)

B132R115.WMF

3-166

August, 2006

ARDF

3.18.10 ARDF SEPARATION ROLLER

[A]
[C]
[B]

B132R108.WMF

• Open the feed cover
• Remove the original feed unit. (
3.18.2)
Remove:
[A]: Separation roller cover. Use the tip of a small flathead screwdriver.
[B]: Separation roller ( x 1)
[C]: Torque limiter

3-167

ARDF

August, 2006

3.18.11 ARDF TRANSPORT BELT
Removing the ARDF Transport Belt Assembly

[A]

[B]
[C]

[D]

B132R102.WMF

[E]

[F]
B132R126.WMF

1. Open the feed cover. (
3.18.1)
2. Remove the ARDF front cover. (
3.18.1)
3. Raise the ARDF [A] to the vertical position.
4. Pull off the white cover [B] (Velcro fasteners)
5. Release the stopper pin [C] of the transport guide [D].
6. Remove the transport belt assembly [E] (Pin screw 
 x1, Timing belt x1)
Reinstallation
• Attach the timing belt as shown then insert the pin screw [F] as shown.

3-168

August, 2006

ARDF

Removing the Belt

[B]

[D]
[A]

[E]

[C]

B132R127.WMF

1. Remove the front plastic cover [A] (
 x1)
2. Remove the rear plastic cover [B] (
 x1)
3. Loosen front lock screw [C]. Do not remove.
4. Loosen rear lock screw [D]. Do not remove. This releases the spring-loaded
tension on the belt.
5. Grip the roller in the center [E] then squeeze the belt to bring the rollers
together.
6. While squeezing the belt and rollers together in the center, tighten screws [C]
and [D]. This compresses the spring and releases tension on the belt.
Important
• To avoid stripping the threads of the screws, do not apply excessive torque to
these screws!
7. Release the belt and make sure that the belt is loose and that the rollers do not
move. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 if the rollers expand and tighten the belt.

3-169

ARDF

August, 2006

[A]
[B]

[E]

[C]

[F]

[D]

[G]
B132R139.WMF

8. Remove the Teflon sleeve [A].
9. Push the rear shaft bearing [B] out of its bracket.
10. Push the front shaft bearing [C] out of its bracket.
11. Push the front end of the shaft [D] over the top of the bracket.
12. Push the rear end of the shaft [E] over the top of the bracket.
13. Pull the shaft [F] out of the belt.
14. Pull the belt [G] toward the front to remove it.

[H]

15. Slide the new belt over the assembly.
16. Insert the shaft [F] into the new belt,
snap the shaft into its brackets, and
push in the shaft bearings.
17. Make sure that studs on the underside
of the belt [H] are aligned with the
grooves of the Teflon rollers on each
end of the shaft below.
ORGB536.BMP

3-170

August, 2006

ARDF

Reinstalling the Belt

[B]

1. Remove the ARDF front cover [A]
(
3.18.1)
2. Take out the special tool [B]. (
 x1)
NOTE: The special tool [B] is attached to
the front side plate. It is used to
adjust the tension on the belt on
both ends of the shaft.

[A]
B132R104A.WMF

FRONT

[D]

REAR





[E]


[C]
B132R140.WMF

3. Fit the special tool onto the FRONT.
4. Slowly loosen the front lock screw [C] until you see the tip of the shaft 
aligned with the hole , then tighten the screw.
Important
• To avoid stripping the threads of the screws, do not apply excessive torque.
5. Remove the special tool and fit it onto the REAR.
NOTE: If the Teflon sleeve has been reattached at [D], remove it. Do not
reattach the sleeve until after adjusting the belt tension. (The special
tool does not fit over the rear end with the Teflon sleeve attached.)
6. Slowly loosen the rear lock screw [E] until you see the tip of the shaft  aligned
with the hole  then tighten the screw.
7. Re-install the Teflon sleeve.
8. Re-install the front and rear plastic cover.
9. Reinstall the transport belt assembly in the ARDF.

3-171

ARDF

August, 2006

[B]

[A]

B132R103.WMF

Reattaching the White Cover
1. With its white side down, set the cover [A] on the exposure glass.
2. Make sure the upper left corner is aligned with the arrow at the corner of the
exposure glass.
3. Close the ARDF [B] on top of the cover.

3-172

August, 2006

ARDF

3.18.12 ARDF CONTROL BOARD

[A]

B132R124.WMF

Remove:
• ARDF Rear cover (
3.18.1)
[A]: ARDF control board ( x17, 
 x4)

3-173

ARDF

August, 2006

3.18.13 ARDF BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR

[A]

B132R121.WMF

• Open the feed cover.
Remove:
• ARDF rear cover (
3.18.1)
[A]: ARDF bottom plate lift motor ( x1, 
 x2, Timing belt x1)

3-174

August, 2006

ARDF

3.18.14 ARDF FEED MOTOR, ARDF TRANSPORT MOTOR

[A]

[C]
[B]
B132R123.WMF

[D]

[E]

• Open the feed cover
• Remove the ARDF rear cover (
3.18.1)
Important! The feed motor must be removed before the transport motor.
[A]: Screw (
 x1)
[B]: Feed motor bracket (
 x4,  x1, Timing belt x1, Spring x1)
[C]: Feed motor (
 x2)
[D]: Transport motor bracket (
 x2,  x1, Timing belt x1, Spring x1)
[E]: Transport motor (
 x2)
Reinstallation
• Reinstallation is easier if you first set the spring tension with the screws and then
fasten the motor bracket with screws.

3-175

ARDF

August, 2006

3.18.15 ARDF PICK-UP ROLLER LIFT MOTOR
[A]

B132R120.WMF

• Open the feed cover.
Remove:
• ARDF rear cover (
3.18.1)
[A]: Pick-up roller lift motor (
 x2,  x1, Timing belt x1)

3-176

August, 2006

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS

3.19 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS
3.19.1 SCANNING
Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing
registration, side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment. Use a C-4
test chart to perform the following adjustments.

Scanner sub-scan magnification
1. Place the test chart (C-4) on the exposure glass and
make a copy.
2. Check the magnification ratio.
3. Use SP4008 (Sub Scan Mag) to adjust if necessary.
Standard: ±1.0%.

A
B146R962.WMF

A: Sub-scan magnification

Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration

A

1. Place the test chart (C-4) on the exposure glass and
make a copy.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration.
3. Adjust with the following SP modes if necessary.
Standard: 0 ± 2mm.
Sub Scan Reg
Main Scan Reg

SP mode
SP4010 001
SP4011 001

B

B146R963.WMF

A: Leading Edge Registration
B: Side-to-side Registration

3-177

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS

August, 2006

Main scan dot position correction
Adjust the printer registration before adjusting the scanner.
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Open SP4010 and SP4011.
3. Make sure that each value is equal to the factory default.
4. Press [COPY Window] and copy the C-4 chart in the full-color photo mode.
NOTE: Be sure to copy in the photo mode. Color displacement cannot be
checked correctly in text mode.
5. Use a magnification scope to check the yellow and cyan vertical lines.
• If they exactly overwrite the black line at the edges of the copy, exit the SP
mode. No adjustment is necessary
• If the yellow and cyan lines significantly extend beyond the black lines, go
to the next step.
6. Press [SP Mode] to return to the SP mode.
7. Do SP4932. (Main Scan Dot Adj) Compare the current values against the table.
SP4932 001
SP4932 002
SP4932 003
SP4932 004

R:Left
R:Right
B:Left
B:Right

3-178

August, 2006

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS

3.19.2 ARDF
ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration

A

B
A: Leading edge registration
B: Side-to-side registration

B146R964.WMF

B146R965.WMF

Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.
1. Place the temporary test chart on the ARDF table and make a copy.
2. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP Code
SP6006 001
SP6006 003
SP6006 005
SP6006 006
SP6006 007

What It Does
ADF Main Reg Adj
ADF Sub Reg Adj
ADF Buck Adj:Front
ADF Buck Adj:Back
ADF TEdge EMargin

3-179

Adjustment Range
± 3.0 mm
± 29 steps
± 20 steps
± 20 steps
± 20 steps

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS

August, 2006

3.19.3 REGISTRATION
Image Area
The image area must be configured
correctly. Adjust the registration within
the adjustment standard range as
described below.

B

Feed direction
A

Image Area

C

A = B = C = 4.2 mm (1.6")

B146R966.WMF

Leading Edge
Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed.
Side to Side
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station. The side-to-side
registration for the LCT can be adjusted with SP1002 006.
Adjustment Standards
• Leading edge (sub-scan direction): 3 ± 0 mm
• Side to side (main-scan direction): 2 ± 0 mm
Paper Registration Standard
The registration in both main- and sub-scan directions may fluctuate within the
following tolerance.
1st side
• Sub-scan direction:
• Main-scan direction:
2nd side in duplex
• Sub-scan direction:
• Main-scan direction:

0 ± 1.5 mm
0 ± 2 mm
0 ± 3 mm
0 ± 4 mm

3-180

August, 2006

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS

Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter SP mode and open SP2109.
2. Print Pattern 10.
NOTE: Print several printing patterns and average the measured values of the
leading edge and side-to-side registration values.
3. Do the leading edge registration adjustment.
• Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1001.
• Select the adjustment conditions (paper type and process line speed).
• Input the value and press the [#] key.
• Check the leading edge adjustment by printing Pattern 10 with SP2109.
4. Do the side to side registration adjustment.
• Check the side-to-side registration and adjust it with SP1002.
• Select the adjustment conditions for the paper feed station.
• Input the value and press the [#] key.
• Check the side-to-side adjustment by printing Pattern 10 with SP2109.

3-181

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS

August, 2006

3.19.4 COLOR REGISTRATION
Forced MUSIC Adjustment
The line position adjustment optimizes the quality of color prints. You can do forced
MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001:
We recommend that you do the forced MUSIC adjustment at the customer location
immediately after installation, or after servicing or adjusting any parts or
components of the following units:
• Around the drum
• ITB unit (especially after belt replacement)
• Paper Transfer Roller
• Laser unit

Adjustment of Line Speed for Thick Paper
Adjust the line speed of the fusing unit (the speed of the K development motor)
when:
• Color shift corrected with the line position adjustment.
• Color registration shifts more at the trailing edge than at the leading edge.

Color Registration Test and Error Adjustment
Before you start this procedure, make sure that the exposure glass is clean. Also,
make sure that the ITB is installed correctly, especially at the edge.
1. Load A3/DLT paper and select full-color mode.
2. Start SP2109 002 and select pattern 1 (1-dot line), then press the “OK” button.
3. Press the “Copy Window” button. Then select A3/DLT paper, and press the
“Start” button to print the pattern.
NOTE: Make sure that “Full Color Mode” is selected before you press the Start
button.
4. Look at the printout. The horizontal and vertical lines must show no color (must
be black). In that condition, the K, C, M, and Y images are deposited exactly on
top of each other.
5. If there is color on the printout, there is a color registration error, and we must
correct the problem. To correct the problem, do the MUSIC process with
SP2111 001. This takes about 50 seconds.
6. Do step 2 again.
7. If there are color registration errors, then do the procedure described in Section
4 "4.2.2 Color Registration Error Adjustment".

3-182

August, 2006

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS

3.19.5 SKEW ADJUSTMENT AFTER LASER UNIT REPLACEMENT
To Print the Trim Pattern:
1. Do SP2109 002 (Test Pattern – Select Pattern) and select pattern 10.
2. Press the [Execute] on the display.
3. Press the [Copy Screen] on the display to switch to the normal copier screen.
4. Select the paper size and color then press the [Start] key to print the pattern.
5. Press the [SP Screen].
6. Do SP2109 002 and select pattern 0 and press the [Execute] button.
7. Check the test pattern to determine whether the image is perpendicular at the
corners.
If the image pattern is correct, no further adjustment is necessary.
-orIf the pattern is not correct (a skewed parallelogram), go to the next step.

3-183

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS

August, 2006
Boss-1

Boss-2





Laser Unit (Top View)

Rear

A
Left

Right

B

Front





Laser Unit (Front View)

Top
Left

Right

LE: Leading Edge
TE: Trailing Edge
LE

Bottom

LE

TE
LE

TE

TE
Correct Pattern

[1]

[2]
Paper feed direction

B132R902.WMF

To Adjust the Pattern Output:
1. Remove the exposure glass. (
3.3.1)
2. Remove the lens cover and lens block. (
3.3.2)
3. Loosen the screws of the laser unit , , , (
 x4).
4. Determine the direction of skew in the printed pattern.
5. Refer to the illustration, then shift the laser unit toward the rear (A) or toward
the front (B) to adjust the skew.
• If the skew resembles the left pattern [1], turn the laser unit slightly counterclockwise in the B direction.
• If the skew resembles the right pattern [2], turn the laser unit slightly
clockwise in the A direction.
• Boss-1, Boss-2 provides the reference points for correct alignment.
6. Reassemble the copier and print another trim pattern to confirm that the skew
has been corrected.

3-184

August, 2006

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS

3.19.6 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION
ACC adjustment done at installation is usually sufficient to adjust the color balance
for optimum performance. Printer gamma correction is required for fine adjustment
to meet a customer requirement.
The printer gamma curve created during ACC can be modified with SP modes. The
gamma data for highlight, middle, shadow areas, and ID max can be adjusted. The
adjustable range is from 0 to 30 (31 steps).

Copy Mode
KCMY Color Balance Adjustment
The adjustment uses only “Offset” values.
Important: Never change “Option” values (default value is 0).
Highlight (Low ID)
Middle (Middle ID)
Shadow (High ID)
ID max
Offset

Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Levels 3 through 7 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Levels 6 through 9 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Level 10 in the C4 chart 10-level scale (affects the entire image
density.)
The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID,
middle ID, high ID, and ID max, the greater the density.

There are four adjustable modes. You can get access to these with SP4918 009:
• Copy Photo mode
• Copy Text mode
• Copy Text (Single Color) mode
• Copy Photo (Single Color) mode

B146R967.WMF

3-185

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS

August, 2006

Adjustment Procedure
1. Copy the C-4 chart in mode that you want to adjust.
2. Enter the SP mode.
3. Press “Copy SP.”
4. Open SP4918 009.
5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard. (Refer
the tables below.)
Important
• Never change “Option” value (default value is 0).
• Always adjust the density in order: ID MaxÆ MiddleÆ ShadowÆ Highlight
- Photo Mode, Full Color Step
1

Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K, C, M, and Y)

2

Middle (Middle ID)
(K, C, M, and Y)

3

Shadow (High ID)
(K, C, M, and Y)

Level on the C-4 chart

Highlight (Low ID)
(K, C, M, and Y)
4

5

K Highlight (Low ID)
(C,M, and Y)


3-186

Adjustment Standard
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 6 matches
that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 8 matches
that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
dirty background is not visible on
the copy and the density of level
3 is slightly lighter that of level 3
on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
the color balance of black scale
levels 3 through 5 in the copy is
seen as gray (no C, M, or Y
should be visible). If the black
scale contains C, M, or Y, redo
step 1 to 4.

August, 2006

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS

- Photo Mode, Single Color Step
1

Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K)

2

Middle (Middle ID)
(K)

3

Shadow (High ID)
(K)

Level on the C-4 chart

Highlight (Low ID)
(K)
4

Adjustment Standard
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 6 matches
that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 8 matches
that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
dirty background is not visible on
the copy and the density of level
3 is slightly lighter that of level 3
on the C-4 chart.

- Text (Letter) Mode, Full Color Step
1

Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K, C, M, and Y)

2

Middle (Middle ID)
(K, C, M, and Y)

3

Shadow (High ID)
(K, C, M, and Y)

Level on the C-4 chart (K)

Highlight (Low ID)
(K, C, M, and Y)
4

3-187

Adjustment Standard
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 6 matches
that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 8 matches
that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
dirty background is not visible on
the copy and the density of level
3 is slightly lighter that of level 3
on the C-4 chart.

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS

August, 2006

- Text (Letter) Mode, Single Color Step
1

Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K)

2

Middle (Middle ID)
(K)

3

Shadow (High ID)
(K)

Level on the C-4 chart (K)

Highlight (Low ID)
(K)
4

Adjustment Standard
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 6 matches
that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 8 matches
that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
Adjust the offset value so that
dirty background is not visible on
the copy and the density of level
3 is slightly lighter that of level 3
on the C-4 chart.

After "Shadow" adjustment, if text in the test pattern does not print clearly:
• Check to determine whether the 5 line/mm pattern at each corner is printed
clearly.
• If it is not, adjust the offset value of ‘shadow’ again until the pattern prints clearly.

3-188

August, 2006

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS

Printer Mode
There are six adjustable modes. Select these modes with in the Printer SP mode
with SP1102 001:
• 1200 x 1200 photo mode
• 600 x 600 text mode
• 1800 x 600 text mode
• 600 x 600 photo mode
• 1800 x 600 photo mode
• 1200 x 1200 text mode
Highlight
Middle
Shadow
ID max

K
SP1104 001
SP1104 002
SP1104 003
SP1104 004

C
SP1104 021
SP1104 022
SP1104 023
SP1104 024

M
SP1104 041
SP1104 042
SP1104 043
SP1104 044

Y
SP1104 061
SP1104 062
SP1104 063
SP1104 064

Adjustment Procedure
1. Do the ACC adjustment for the printer mode.
2. Turn the main power off and on.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Touch “Printer SP”.
5. Select SP1102 001 and select the print mode that you want to adjust.
6. To review the image quality for these settings, do SP1103 001 to print out a
tone control test sheet.
7. Adjust the color density with SP1104 as shown below while comparing the tone
control test sheet with the C4 test chart.
Important: Always adjust the density in order: ID MaxÆ MiddleÆ ShadowÆ
Highlight
8. Save the adjusted settings with SP1105 001.

3-189

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS

August, 2006

Adjustment Reference For Gamma Correction
The following tables show the adjustment reference for gamma correction. The
tables show the level of the color scale on the C-4 test chart and on the tone
control test sheet printed in the printer SP mode. For example, for K at text mode,
grade 12 on the tone control test sheet should be the same as grade 7 on the C-4
chart.
Normally, it is not necessary to adjust the gamma data as shown in the table since
ACC adjusts the gamma curve automatically. The fine-tuning of color balance by
gamma data adjustment is necessary only when the results of ACC and Color
Calibration do not meet customer requirements.

K

C-4 test chart
600 x 600
Photo
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200
Test
sheet
600 x 600
Text
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200

1
-

2
1
1
1
1
1
1

3
3
3
3
3
3
3

4
5
5
4
5
5
5

5
6
6
6
6
6
6

6
9
8
8
9
9
9

7
10
10
10
10
10
11

8
11
11
12
11
12
12

9
16
16
15
16
16
15

10
16
16

C-4 test chart
600 x 600
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200
600 x 600
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200

1
-

2
1
1
1
1
1
1

3
3
3
3
3
3
3

4
5
5
4
4
5
4

5
6
6
5
5
6
5

6
9
8
8
8
9
9

7
10
10
10
10
10
10

8
12
11
11
11
11
11

9
13
12
12
12
12
12

10
14
13
13
13
14
13

600 x 600
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200
600 x 600
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200

1
-

2
1
1
1
1
1
1

3
4
4
4
4
4
4

4
6
6
6
6
6
6

5
8
8
7
7
8
7

6
11
11
10
10
11
10

7
12
12
12
12
13
12

8
14
15
14
14
14
13

9
16
16
16
16
16
16

10
-

600 x 600
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200

1
1
1
1

2
3
3
3

3
4
5
5

4
9
8
8

5
11
10
10

6
12
11
11

7
14
14
14

9
16
16
16

10
-

600 x 600

1

2

5

8

10

11

14

15

16

1800 x 600
1200 x 1200

1
1

3
2

6
4

9
7

10
9

12
10

14
13

8
15
15
15
14/
15
15
15

16
16

-

Photo
C

Test
sheet
Text

C-4 test chart
Photo
M

Test
sheet
Text

C-4 test chart
Photo
Y

Test
sheet
Text

3-190

August, 2006

TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION

3.20 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
After clearing memory, or if the touch screen detection function is not working
correctly, calibrate the touch screen.
Important
• Do not attempt to use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items
are for design use only.
• To avoid causing an error, do not touch the Reset key while doing this procedure.
1. Press [Clear] (, press 1993 press, and then press [Clear/Stop] () 5
times.

B140R892.WMF

2. Press “Touch Screen Adjust” (or press "1").

B140R893.WMF

3. Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the upper left mark
4. Press the lower right mark

.

after it appears.

5. Press a few spots on the touch screen to confirm that the marker (+) appears
exactly where the screen is touched. If the + mark does not appear where the
screen is touched, press [Cancel] and repeat from Step 2.
6. When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press [#] on the
operation panel).
7. Press [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the
settings.

3-191

April, 2007

PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
4.1.1 OVERVIEW
Here are some important points to keep in mind when downloading software:
• If an error interrupts download processing, the machine cannot operate normally
with the program software only partially downloaded.
• When download processing execution starts, “Downloading…” is displayed and
when downloading has completed successfully, the message is cleared.
• If the download is interrupted when the “Downloading …” message is displayed,
the machine does not attempt a re-try.
• The program that downloads firmware from an SD card is part of the GW
controller software. If downloading this software is interrupted, the program
stored in the machine may be corrupted. Because of this, it may not be possible
to restart the downloading program. (In addition, if the GW controller software
cannot be downloaded, other software on other SD cards cannot be
downloaded.) However, it may be possible to restart the program without
replacing the board by setting DIP SW 1 on the controller to ON, and re-starting.

4.1.2 RECOVERY METHODS
When an error occurs during downloading, an error code is displayed on the
operation panel.
• If the download procedure can be re-started, re-start the download procedure.
• If the download procedure cannot be downloaded for other than the GW
controller, replace the board where the downloaded program is stored.
• If the download procedure cannot be downloaded for the GW controller, set DIP
SW 1 to ON. Power the machine OFF and ON to start the downloading program.
After downloading has completed, set the DIP SW to OFF then power the
machine OFF and ON again.

4-1

PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

April, 2007

4.1.3 DOWNLOAD ERROR CODES
01

02

Display
Reboot after
SD card insert E01


Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
Download Error E02
Power OFF/ON

Details
Controller ROM update error 1
When the update break data is stored in
NVRAM, the break module information and
the decompression module capable of
writing do not match.
Controller ROM update error 2.
Error occurs during ROM update program
initialization.
Controller ROM update error 3
The ROM for the write operation does not
exist.

03

Download Error E03
Power OFF/ON

04

Download Error E04
Power OFF/ON

Controller ROM update error 4
GZIP data confirmation fails. (CRC value
check)

05

Download Error E05
Power OFF/ON

Controller ROM update error 5
Error occurs when writing to the device.

06

Download Error E06
Power OFF/ON

Controller ROM update error 6
CPU clock error.

19
20

21

Download Error E19
Power OFF/ON
Down Error E20
Power Off/On
Download Error E21
Power Off/On

Controller ROM update error 7
Schedule data is unclear.
System error 1 (+SC991)
The physical address cannot be mapped.
Software/hardware is defective
System error 2 (+SC991)
There is not sufficient memory to
download.

4-2

Recovery
• Use the correct card

• Cycle the machine
OFF/ON to rewrite
• Cycle the machine
OFF/ON
• Install the missing ROM
DIMM
• Cycle the machine
OFF/ON
• Set DIP SW 1 to ON
and retry
• Replace RAM DIMM
• Replace controller board
• Cycle the machine
OFF/ON
• Set DIP SW 1 to ON
and retry
• Replace RAM DIMM
• Replace controller board
• Turn the machine power
OFF/ON.
• Set controller DIPSW-1
to ON to force the
machine to write to
ROM.
• If you cannot force the
machine to write,
replace the controller
board.
• Software defective
• Cycle the machine
OFF/ON and re-try
• Replace controller board
• Cycle the machine
OFF/ON and re-try.
• Replace RAM
• Replace the controller
board

April, 2007

PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

Display
Download Error E22
Module ID
Card No xx/xx

Details
System error 3 (+SC991)
Data fails to decompress. Card
defective.

SC991

System error 4

23

Download Error E24
Power Off/On

System error 5
Card read/write error. Software or card
defective.

30

No Valid Data E30

31

Reboot After Card
Insert E31
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
Reboot After Card
Insert E32
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx

Download dysfunction 1
Print download is not possible. Cannot
download to HDD because HDD not
installed or defective.
Download dysfunction 2
Download continuity error with more
than one card. The second or later
card is not compatible.
Download dysfunction 3
Download interrupted because card is
not correct, or power failure interrupted
download.

22

32

33

No Valid Data E33

34

No Valid Data E34

35

No Valid Data E35

36

No Valid Data E36

37

No Valid Data E37

40

Download Error E40
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
Download Error E41
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx

41

Download dysfunction 4
Card version error. Attempted to
download program using a card with
the wrong version number.
Download dysfunction 5
Specification error. DOM card set in
EXP machine, or vice versa.
Download dysfunction 6
Wrong model. The inserted card is for
another model.
Download dysfunction 7
Module error. The program that you
are attempting to download does not
exist on the machine, or the contact
points at the card and the machine slot
are not connected.
Download dysfunction 8
Edit option card error. You attempted
to employ a used card.
Download result failure 1
Engine download failure.
Download result failure 2
Fax download failure.

4-3

Recovery
• Cycle the machine
OFF/ON and re-try.
• Replace card
• Replace controller
board
• Cycle the machine
OFF/ON and re-try
• Replace the controller
board
• Cycle the machine
OFF/ON and re-try
• Replace the card
• Replace the controller
board
• HDD defective
• HDD harness
disconnected,
defective
• Set the correct cards
in the correct order

• Use the correct card
• If power failure
caused the failure,
remove the card and
insert another.
• Use the correct card

• Use the correct card
• Use the correct card
• Use the correct card,
inserted correctly
• Install a ROM DIMM if
none is installed
• Use an unused card
• Cycle the machine
OFF/ON and re-try
• Cycle the machine
OFF/ON and re-try

PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

42

43

44

Display
Download Error E42
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
Download Error E43
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
Download Error E44
Module ID Card No.

50

No Valid Data E50

51

(no display)

52

(no display)

53

(no display)

April, 2007
Details
Download result failure 3
Operation panel or language download
failed. For this error, sometimes the
message may not be displayed.
Download result failure 4
Print download failed.

Recovery
• Cycle the machine
OFF/ON and re-try

Download result failure 5
The data targeted for the write
operation could not be accessed.

• Turn the machine
power OFF. Then,
install a new System
SD Card into SD card
slot-1.
• Use the correct SD
card.

Download invalid
The source data for the update could
not be authenticated.
Remote ROM update failure 1
The source data for the ROM update is
corrupted because the machine is
operating and an SC code has been
issued.
Remote ROM update failure 2
The source data received for the ROM
update is corrupted; it failed a SUM
check due to its abnormal length.
Download result failure 6
The previous download in progress
was cancelled.

4-4

• Cycle the machine
OFF/ON and re-try

• Turn the machine
power OFF/ON and
try again.

• Try again with the
correct data.

• Do the download
procedure again.

April, 2007

PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

4.1.4 IMPORTANT SP CODES
Here is a list of important SP codes that you may need during troubleshooting.
SP5802

Free Run Mode

SP5803

Input Check

SP5804

Output Check

SP5810

Cancel Fusing SC
Code

SP5990

SMC Printout

SP7401
SP7403

SC Codes
SC History

SP7801

ROM Ver

SP7832

Self-Diagnostic
Report Details

Execute this SP to force base engine to run in the
free run mode for testing.
Displays the signals received from sensors and
switches. Refer to the detailed tables in “4. Service
Tables”.
Switches electrical components one by one for
testing. Refer to the detailed tables in “4. Service
Tables”.
Use this to cancel a fusing unit SC code to return
the machine to normal operation after you repair the
machine.
Prints the SMC Report. Some SC codes (logged
SPs) are listed only in the SMC Report and do not
appear on the operation panel display.
Displays the total number of SCs logged.
Displays information about the 10 most recent
service calls (Code, Total, Date, and Details).
Displays the ROM version numbers of the main
machine and connected peripheral devices.
Push [#] to display a list of error codes. Nothing is
displayed if no errors have occurred.

NOTE: For more information about these and other SP codes, see “4. Service
Tables”.

4-5

SPECIAL PROCEDURES

April, 2007

4.2 SPECIAL PROCEDURES
4.2.1 SP2181 030 (ALIGNMENT RESULT) ERRORS
After SP2181 030 executes normally, you should see:
1
If you see any number other than a "1", this indicates an error.
Code
0
1
2

12

Error
None
None
Failure

Abnormal detection pattern

Problem

Large amount of skew.
Large amount of K skew.
Large amount of skew in every color.
Density too light.
ITB scratched.
ITB misaligned.
SP2153 023 set to 1 (OFF).
Image density too light.
Dirty, abnormal images.

4-6

Recovery
Default display.
No action required.
Print a trim pattern with SP2109 002 Pattern 10.

Print a coverage pattern with SP2109 002 Pattern 1.
Check the images.
Replace the ITB.
Reinstall ITB.
Set SP2153 023 to 0 (ON).
Output a coverage pattern with SP2109 002 Pattern
1. Check the images.
Output Pattern 1, 18, or 20 with SP2109 002 and
check the images.

April, 2007

Code
21-23

Error
Auto density out of range (over
or lower)

31-33

Amount of skew calculated in
the coverage pattern abnormal.

41-43

Intersecting lines of the grid
pattern.

SPECIAL PROCEDURES

Problem
Reinstall ITB.

Image density too light, uneven.

Output a coverage pattern with SP2109 002 Pattern
1. Check the images.
Check the ID sensor and its connection.

Connector loose.
Connector dirty.
Harness defective.
Other
ITB misaligned
SP2153 023 set to 1 (OFF).
Large amount of K skew.
Image density too light, uneven.
ITB misaligned
Image density too light.
Dirty, abnormal images.

51-53

60

The settings of sensor lights 1,
2, 3 are abnormal.

Communication err.

Recovery

ITB misaligned

ITB misaligned
SP2153 023 set to 1 (OFF).
The settings of sensor lights 1, 2, 3 are different from
the default setting, which is 2050.
Dirty, abnormal images.
Connector loose.
Connector dirty.
Harness defective.
Other
Communication err

Reinstall ITB.
Set SP2153 023 to 0 (ON).
Print a trim pattern with SP2109 002 Patten 10.
Output a coverage pattern with SP2109 002 Pattern
1. Check the images.
Reinstall ITB.
Output a coverage pattern with SP2109 002 Pattern
1. Check the images.
Output Pattern 1, 18, or 20 with SP2109 002 and
check the images.
Reinstall ITB.
Set SP2153 023 to 0 (ON).
Set SP2153 020~022 to 2050 (default) and check the
image.
Output Pattern 1, 18, or 20 with SP2109 002 and
check the images.
Check the ID sensor and its connection.

Turn off and turn on the main switch.

4-7

07/04

SPECIAL PROCEDURES
Code
61

Error
Time out of detecting MUSIC
pattern.

April, 2007
Problem
ITB misaligned
SP2153 023 set to 1 (OFF).

Recovery
Reinstall ITB.
Set SP2153 023 to 0 (ON).
The settings of sensor lights 1, 2, 3 are different from
the default setting, which is 2050. (These settings are
done with SP2153 020~022.)
Output Pattern 1, 18, or 20 with SP2109 002 and
check the images.
Check the ID sensor and its connection.

Dirty, abnormal images.
Connector loose.
Connector dirty.
Harness defective.
Other

4-8

07/04

April, 2007

SPECIAL PROCEDURES

Image Position Adjustment
A MUSIC error occurs when a large amount of skew occurs beyond the acceptable
range, or when the K sensor is out of position. Such errors can be corrected
manually to correct skew. However, these adjustments cannot correct problems
caused by physical damage to the ITB, filming, density degradation, or a dirty
sensor.
1. Load some A3/DLT paper in Tray 1. Make sure that the side and bottom fences
are set properly.
2. Do SP1002 001 (Side-to-Side Reg – Tray 1) and set it to "0".
3. Do SP2109 002 (Test Pattern) then select and print pattern 10: Trim Area.
4. Do SP2101 001 so the left and right margins are 1.5 mm. If the image is cut off
at the edge, use the 1-dot pattern.
5. If any color is separated from black more than 1 mm, do SP2101 002~004 to
bring each color closer to K.
Important
• Black skew can cause part of the image to shift off the paper.
• Normally, the settings of SP2102 001~004 should be reset to the values in the
SMC report or the values printed on the A5 sheet provided with a new laser unit.
• Normally, these values do not change unless the NVRAM becomes corrupted.
• Most machines can be adjusted with these values: K: -40, M:-20, C:-10, Y: -5.
Use these values if other information is not available.

4-9

SPECIAL PROCEDURES

April, 2007

4.2.2 COLOR REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
Color Registration Error Correction
1. Start SP 2109 002 and select pattern 1 (1-dot line), then push the “OK” button.
2. Push the “Copy Window” button. Then select A3/DLT paper, and push the
“Start” button to print the pattern.
NOTE: Make sure that “Full Color Mode” is selected before you push the Start
button.

Paper Feed Direction

B132R930.WMF

In the example above, the dotted lines are magenta, cyan, or yellow, and the
solid lines are black.
3. Lay the test pattern flat, and use a lupe to examine the grid patterns.

B132R942.WMF

4-10

April, 2007

SPECIAL PROCEDURES

4. Correct the errors in the vertical lines (this corrects errors in the main scan
direction). See the following table for how to do this.
NOTE: In the table, a dotted line indicates a colored line (C, M, or Y). For
example, the first row of the table shows you how to adjust the machine
if a colored line is to the right of the black line on the test pattern.
SP

Action

Decrease the value

2101 002 (M)
2101 003 (C)
2101 004 (Y)

Unit of adjustment: One dot (43.2 µm)
Increase the value

5. Correct the errors in the horizontal lines (this corrects errors in the sub scan
direction). See the following table for how to do this.
SP
2101 013 (M)
2101 014 (C)
2101 015 (Y)

Action
Increase the value

Unit of adjustment: One line (84.6 µm)

Decrease the value

6. Do steps 1 and 2 again.
7. If there are color registration errors, then do steps 1 through 6 again.

4-11

SPECIAL PROCEDURES

April, 2007

Color Skew Error Correction
1. Start SP 2109 002 and select pattern 1 (1-dot line), then push the “OK” button.
2. Push the “Copy Window” button. Then select A3/DLT paper, and push the
“Start” button to print the pattern.
NOTE: Make sure that “Full Color Mode” is selected before you push the Start
button.

Paper Feed Direction

B132R931.WMF

In the example above, the dotted lines are magenta, cyan, or yellow, and the
solid lines are black.
3. Correct the skew. See the following table for how to do this
Right

SP
2104 001 (M)
2104 002 (C)
2104 003 (Y)

Action
Increase the value
Decrease the value

4-12

April, 2007

SPECIAL PROCEDURES

Overall Check
1. After you do the color registration error and color skew corrections, do a forced
MUSIC again, with SP 2111 001.
2. Do SP 2109 002 and print pattern 1 (1-dot line) on A3/DLT paper again. Check
the skew and color registration. If they are still not acceptable, do the forced
MUSIC again.
3. Do SP 2181-030 to make sure that the forced MUSIC was done correctly. If the
result is ‘1’, then each color was aligned correctly.
If "1" is not shown, then please see section 4.2.1.

Color Registration at the Left and Right Folds of the Test Pattern
Do this procedure after you complete “Color Registration Error Correction” and
“Color Skew Error Correction”.
1. Do SP 2109 002 and print pattern 1 (1-dot line) on A3/DLT paper.
NOTE: Make sure that “Full Color Mode” is selected before you press the Start
button.
Leading Edge
Left

Right

[A]

[B]

B132R921.WMF

2. Fold the test pattern lengthways in half, then fold it in half again as shown
above.
3. Lay the test pattern flat, and use a lupe to examine the grid patterns at the first
crease [A] and third crease [B].

4-13

SPECIAL PROCEDURES

April, 2007

B132R942.WMF

When viewed through the lupe, the grid lines on the left and right side should
be perfectly aligned (Good) and not misaligned (No-Good).
4. If the lines are misaligned (No-Good), use the lupe to measure distance
between the black vertical lines and each of the colored vertical lines (C, M, Y).
Measure this on the left and right folds:
If there is a gap between the black lines and a colored line, measure it and
correct it with SPs as shown in the tables below.
Left

Right

Remarks

Gap on the left
is different from
the gap on the
right

Gaps are the
same or
different.

SP

2112 001 (M) Left Fold
2112 002 (M) Right Fold
2112 003 (C) Left Fold
2112 004 (C) Right Fold
2112 005 (Y) Left Fold
2112 006 (Y) Right Fold
Unit of adjustment: 50 µm

4-14

Action

To move a color toward
the left edge, decrease
the SP value.
To move a color toward
the right edge, increase
the SP value.

April, 2007

SPECIAL PROCEDURES

4.2.3 SP3812 001 (DevSetup Execute) ERRORS
After SP3812 001 executes normally, you should see four 1s:
1111
Reading from left to right, each "1" indicates the status of the PCUs: K, M, C, Y.
If you see any number other than a "1", this indicates an error.
SP3812 001 Error Codes
Code
2

Error
Execution
Interrupted

Problem
Door was opened, or
another color returned
an error. Execution halts
at the first error
encountered or if the
front door is opened
during execution.
The reading of Vt (TD
sensor output) is less
than 5 V.

3

Vt Abnormal

4

Did Not Execute

SP Default

8

Toner Supply
Abnormal

9

Vtcnt Abnormal

At the end of the toner
filling cycle, the toner
end sensor detected no
toner.
Vtref (control reference
voltage) could not be
adjusted to within 0.2 V
of Vt (TD sensor output).

4-15

Recovery
Check the preceding error codes. Never
open the front door during execution.

Check the operation panel for a developer
set error (SC336~SC339). Check the
PCUs and confirm that all the film seals
have been removed to release the
developer from the developer cartridge.
Displayed when you open this SP code.
No action is necessary.
Check the toner supply unit.

This is a TD sensor adjustment error
(SC372~sC375). Execute SP3801 again
for the PCU that returned the error. If this
does not recover operation, check the
following:
• Film seal not removed from a new
developer pack
• TD harness sensor disconnected, loose
or defective
• TD sensor defective
• Harness between TD sensor and
drawer disconnected, defective

SPECIAL PROCEDURES

April, 2007

4.2.4 PROCESS CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING
Summary of Process Control SC Codes
This is a list of SC codes that may occur during process control. For more, please
refer to the process control tables on the following pages.
Pre-Processing Check
SC316 to SC319

Vpp is not within the normal range (Vpp: the AC current applied to the
charge roller to compensate for changes in the ambient temperature and
humidity). Insufficient charge causes white spotting and too much charge
causes toner to film on the surface of the drum. Vpp must be > 2.8 kV.

SC400

ID sensor could not be calibrated. An abnormal ID sensor condition is
detected when before calibration begins, Vsg < 0.5V or after calibration, Vsg
cannot be adjusted to 4.0±0.2V.

SC418

Correct current could not be supplied to the ID sensor.

SC436 to SC439

A problem is detected with a potential sensor during calibration.

Potential Control
SC410 to SC413

The development gamma is out of range (not between 0.3 and 6.0) for a
color.

SC414 to SC417

Vk is out of range (not within ±150V) for a color. If the development potential
is less than Vk, toner is not applied to the drum.

SC420 to SC423

Vd cannot be adjusted to the target voltage for a drum.

SC424 to SC427

The potential sensor detects that Vpl is not ±10V of the target Vpl after
exposure of the ID sensor patterns.

SC432 to SC435

The residual voltage on a drum is greater than -200V.

TD Sensor Output Calibration
SC360 to SC367

An abnormal condition is detected when output of one of the TD sensors
fails to fall within the range of 0.5V to 4.5V.

Process Control Gamma Correction
SC410 to SC413

The development gamma for black, magenta, cyan, or yellow is not within
range (0.3 to 6.0).

SC414 to SC417

The development start voltage (Vk) for black, magenta, cyan, or yellow PCU
is not within range (±150V)

4-16

April, 2007

SPECIAL PROCEDURES

Process Control Self-Check: SP3821
After the process control self-check is executed manually with SP3820, you can
execute SP3821 to check the results of the self-check. The possible error codes are
listed in the "Displayed Code" column in the table below.
When you do SP3821, the normal display (no errors) will look like this:
10101010
Reading from left to right each "10" represents a color: K, M, C, Y.
If a problem occurs, the code will appear in the column for the color PCU where the
error has occurred. For example, If a Vdhome error (Code 15) (see folloeing table)
occurs in the M PCU, the display will look like this:
10151010
Or if an ID sensor error (Code 21) (see following table) occurs in the Y PCU:
10101021
NOTE: "99" displays while SP3821 executes.
Important: Noise and static electricity can damage the many sensors that are used
during the process control self-check. Because of this, always turn the machine OFF
before doing any procedure described below that requires disassembly.

4-17

SPECIAL PROCEDURES
General
Normal
Potential
Sensors

ID Sensors

Displayed
Code
10
15

April, 2007
Item

Major Cause

Action

Successful
VdHome Error
1

--V0 (SP3571) above –700V, or
VdHome (SP3572) above –700V.
• The window of the potential
sensor probe fouled with toner
• Potential sensor damaged

16

VdHome Error
2

V0 (SP3571) below –700V, or
VdHome (SP3772) below –500V.
• Potential sensor relay board
damaged
• Drum abnormal
• Charge roller damaged
• Drum motor not operating

17

VdHome
Calculation
Error
ID Sensor Vsg
Adjust Error

VdHome could not be calculated.
This is a software calculation error
(not a hardware problem).
Vsg_reg (SP3121) is out of range
(not within 4.0±0.2V).
• ID sensor fouled with dust,
toner
• ITB undulating or out of
position
LED PWM (SP3131) greater than
3000.
• ID sensor fouled with dust,
toner
• ID sensor deteriorated

--• Do SP2260 001 to check the function of the potential sensor.
• Do SP2261 to check the Vd, Voffset readings. For more, see
Section 6. Development has recovered if the Vd is -700V and offset
is -10V.
• Remove the PCU. Use a blower brush to clean the window of the
potential sensor probe, then check the sensor again with SP2601.
• If normal operation cannot be restored, replace the potential sensor
probe.
• Do SP2260 001 to check the function of the potential sensor.
• Do SP2261 to check the Vd reading. For more, see Section 6.11.
Development has recovered if the Vd is -700V.
• Remove the malfunctioning PCU with an functioning PCU, turn the
machine OFF then ON, then do the potential sensor check again.
• If the replaced PCU does not function normally, then the problem is
on the machine side, or the potential sensor relay board is
malfunctioning.
• If the replaced PCU functions normally, then there may be a
problem with the drum or the charge unit. Replace the PCU.
• Switch the machine OFF/ON then execute SP3820 001.

21

22

ID Sensor LED
Current Error

4-18

•
•
•
•

Remove the ITB unit.
Make sure the belt is mounted correctly.
Clean the windows of the ID sensors with alcohol and a clean cloth.
Be sure to wipe the sensor apertures with a wet cloth. A dry cloth
may generate static which can attract dust.

• Remove the ITB unit and check the ID sensors.
• Clean the windows of the ID sensors with alcohol and a clean cloth.
• Be sure to wipe the sensor apertures with a wet cloth. A dry cloth
may generate static which can attract dust.
• If the apertures are clean, then the LED of an ID sensor may have
deteriorated. Replace the ID sensor plate.

April, 2007
General

AC Charge

SPECIAL PROCEDURES
Displayed
Code
23

Item
ID Sensor
Output Error

31

AC Charge
Adjust Error 1

32

AC Charge
Adjust Error 2

Major Cause

Action

Vsg_reg (SP3121) less than 0.5V.
• ID sensor harness loose,
disconnected, damaged
• ID sensor damaged
Note: Vsg_reg refers to the
reading of the drum surface done
with the direct reflection sensors
in both the color and black ID
sensors.
Vpp could not be adjusted after
20 attempts.
• Bias path defective
• Charge gap abnormal (too
large)
• Charge roller dirty
• Drum coated with film

• Remove the ITB unit.
• Check the ID sensor harness connections and make sure that they
are tight.
• Check the harnesses for breaks.
• If the harnesses are undamaged and tightening the connections
does not solve the problem, replace the ID sensor plate.

Vpp greater than 2.80 kV.
• Bias path defective
• Charge gap abnormal
• Charge roller dirty, defective

• Make sure that the bias path and drum are grounded correctly.
• Check the drum and both ends of the charger roller for any foreign
matter.
• Check the gap between the charge roller and the drum to confirm
that it is not too large.
• If the grounds and gap is normal, clean the charger roller or replace
it.

4-19

• Make sure that the bias path and drum are grounded correctly.
• Check the drum and both ends of the charger roller for any foreign
matter.
• Check the gap between the charge roller and the drum to confirm
that it is not too large.
• If the grounds and gap is normal, clean the charger roller or replace
it.

SPECIAL PROCEDURES
General
ID Sensor
Pattern
Detection

Displayed
Code
55

April, 2007
Item

Development
Gamma Error
1

Major Cause

Action

Development gamma (SP3561)
2
greater than 6.0 (mg/cm /-kV).

4-20

• Switch the machine OFF and ON then do SP3820 002.
• Do SP3561 005 to 008 to confirm that development gamma is within
the target range (-0.15 to +0.25)
• If not within the target range, do the procedure again.
If the machine returns SC410 to SC413 and process control does not
end normally, do this procedure:
1. Change the settings for SP3301 001 to 004 from "1" (PID) to "0"
(Fixed).
2. Do SP2109 002 and select Pattern 12.
3. Change the settings of SP2109 005 to 008 from 63 to 0, except for
the color which showed a development gamma error.
4. Return to the copy window and do the test print at least 10
patterns.
5. Do SP3820 002.
• If the patterns are normal, do Steps 2 and 3.
• If the patterns are not normal, repeat Steps 2 to 5.
6. Do SP3301 001 to restore PID toner supply.

April, 2007
General

SPECIAL PROCEDURES
Displayed
Code
56

Item

Major Cause

Action

Development
Gamma Error
2

Development gamma (SP3561)
2
less than 0.3 (mg/cm /-kV)
• Toner supply abnormal
• Image transfer power pack
defective
• Toner shield glass dirty

57

Vk Error 1

58

Vk Error 2

59

Insufficient
Active Data

Vk (development start voltage)
greater than 150V.
Vk (development start voltage)
less than
–150V.
Not enough active data to
calculate development gamma
(only "0" or "1").

4-21

1. Do SP2109 002 and select Pattern 12.
2. Do SP2109 005 to 008 and change the settings of these SP codes
from 63 (default) to 0.
3. Return to the copy window and do the test print 1 pattern.
4. Check the pattern to determine whether the image density is
extremely light.
5. Turn the machine OFF.
6. Open the front door, remove the toner supply unit and check the
toner shield glass for dirt.
7. Remove the face plate, replace the malfunctioning PCU with a
functioning PCU, then turn the machine ON and repeat Steps 1 to 3
to print the coverage test pattern.
8. If normal operation cannot be recovered:
• Replace the image transfer power pack.
• Open the development unit to see if there is too much or too little
developer.
• If the developer supply is normal, remove the toner end sensor to
see if there is toner in the sub hopper.
• If the sub hopper is empty, the powder pump is defective.
Replace the toner supply unit.
• If the sub hopper is full, the toner end sensor is defective.
Replace the toner supply unit.
• If the level of developer is either too high or too low, replace the
developer.
• Replace the developer.
• Replace the developer.
• Do the "Action" procedure for "Displayed code #55" described
above.

SPECIAL PROCEDURES
General
Potential
Adjustment

Abnormal
End

Displayed
Code
61

April, 2007
Item

Major Cause

Action

LD Failure

A laser diode failed to fire and
write the ID sensor pattern.
• Toner shield glass dirty
• PCU set incorrectly
• Laser diode defective

62

Vr Error

63

Vd Adjust
Error

64

Vpl Adjust
Error

90

Potential
Adjust Error
Forced
Termination

Vr (residual voltage) greater than
–200V.
• Drum deteriorated
• Toner shield glass dirty
Vd could not be adjusted within
±10V.
• Charge roller dirty
• Drum defective
Vpl could not be adjusted within
±5V.
• Drum deteriorated due to
filming
• Charge roller dirty
SP3501 (potential control method)
is set to 1 (Fixed).
Door open, power OFF, or other
problem interfering with process
control self-check.

99

4-22

1. Copy the color test pattern to determine which color is abnormal.
2. Turn the machine OFF.
3. Open the front door, remove the toner supply unit and check the
toner shield glass for dirt.
4. Reassemble the machine, switch the machine ON, then do SP3820
001.
Notes
• The probes of the potential sensors of each PCU are located at
different positions. This failure can be caused by installing a
potential sensor at the incorrect position. However, you can
eliminate this as a cause if a new PCU is installed. (A guide ensures
prevents a PCU from being installed at the wrong location.)
• If the machine fails to return SC240 to SC243, you can eliminate a
defective LD as the cause of the problem.
• Open the front door, remove the toner supply unit, and check the
toner shield glass for dirt.
• Clean the glass then do SP3820 001.
• If this does not solve the problem, replace the drum.
• Replace the charge roller
• Replace the drum.
• Replace the charge roller
• Replace the drum.

• Do SP3501 001 and select "0" (Auto).
Make sure the machine is turned ON.
Make sure the front door is closed completely.

April, 2007

SPECIAL PROCEDURES

4.2.5 COLOR ADJUSTMENT FOR CONNECTED COPIERS
This procedure may be required for copiers after they are connected with the Copy
Connector (B328). Do this procedure only if you or the customer notices that the
color quality between the two copiers is different.
The scanner gamma curve and printer gamma curve are adjusted at the factory for
each machine. However, small differences between machines may arise due to
fluctuations in the tolerances of scanner or image processing components.
The following two adjustments calibrate these differences to within acceptable
standards.
1. Color Adjustment with Connection Kit Color Test Chart (P/N VSST9501)
This adjusts the scanner gamma curve of each machine [A], [B] connected with the
Copy Connector (B328). The scanner gamma curve is adjusted to equalize the
scanner input with the scanner output.
2. ACC (Auto Color Calibration)
This adjusts the printer gamma curves [E], [F] of each machine connected with the
Copy Connector (B328).
[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

[E]

[F]
B132D100.WMF

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:

Scanner gamma curve – Machine 1
Scanner gamma curve – Machine 2
HDD – Machine 1
HDD – Machine 2
Printer gamma curve – Machine 1
Printer gamma curve – Machine 2

4-23

SPECIAL PROCEDURES

April 2007

To adjust the main machine:
1. Place the test charge Connection Kit Color Test Chart (P/N VSST9501) on the
exposure glass, with the arrow mark on the chart aligned with the left rear
corner.
2. Do SP4954 001 (Read/Restore Std) and press [Execute].
After about 10 seconds, the "Completed" message appears.
Important: If "Completed" appears immediately after pressing [Execute], the
adjustment may have failed. Do the procedure again.
3. After doing SP4954 001, do the ACC procedure. For more, see Section "1.
Installation (Pg.1-33)"
To adjust the sub machine:
4. Do Steps 1 to 3 for the sub machine.
Compare the results
5. Set the two machines for full color, and do some sample color copies.
6. Compare the results from the two copiers. If the results are not good, do the
procedure again from step 1.

4-24

April, 2007

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4.3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4.3.1 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK
At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the service engineer
cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off.
This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the
permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the
Operator Tool and then set “Service Mode Lock” to OFF. After he or she logs
in:
Operator Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock
> OFF
• This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
• The Service engineer can do servicing on the machine and turn the
machine OFF and ON. It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in
again each time the machine is turned ON.
2. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP 5169
to “1”.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
• Change SP 5169 from “1” to “0”.
• Turn the machine OFF and ON. Tell the administrator that you completed
servicing the machine.
• The Administrator will then set the “Service Mode Lock” to ON.

4-25

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

April 2007

4.3.2 SERIES SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level
A

B

C

D

Definition
Fusing unit SCs displayed on the operation
panel. The machine is disabled. The operator
cannot reset the SC.
SCs that disable only the features that use the
defective item. These SCs are not shown to the
operator under normal conditions. They are
displayed on the operation panel only when the
defective feature is selected.
SCs that are not shown on the operation panel.
They are internally logged.
Turning the operation switch (or main power
switch) OFF then ON resets these SCs. These
SCs are displayed on the operation panel and
displayed again if the error reoccurs.

Reset Procedure
Enter SP mode, then turn the
main power switch OFF and
ON.
Turn the main power switch
OFF and ON.

Logging only
Turn the operation switch (or
main power switch) OFF and
ON, or the machine reboots
automatically. (See below.)

When a Level “D” SC code occurs
When a Level D SC occurs, a screen opens on the operation panel to tell the
operator:
• An error occurred
• The job in progress will be erased
• The machine will reboot automatically after approximately 30 seconds.
The operator can wait until the machine reboots automatically or press “Reset” on
the screen to reset the machine immediately and go back to the copy screen.
If the operator does not presses “Reset”
The next message tells the operator that the machine will reset automatically and
that the previous job was lost and must be started again. After reading the
message, the operator presses “Confirm” on the screen. The next screen shows
the number and title of the SC code, and stops until the operator turns the machine
OFF and ON.
If the operator presses “Reset”
If the operator presses "Reset" to bypass the 30-second interval for the machine to
reboot, the machine reboots immediately and the operation panel displays the copy
screen.
Important
• Do not try to use the operation panel during an automatic reboot.

4-26

April, 2007

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4.3.3 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS
Important
• If a problem concerns a circuit board, disconnect and reconnect the connectors
and then test the machine. Often a loose or disconnected harness is the cause
of the problem. Always do this before you decide to replace the PCB.
• If a motor lock error occurs, check the mechanical load before you decide to
replace the motor or sensors.
• When a Level “A” or “B” SC occurs while in an SP mode, the machine cannot
display the SC number. If this occurs, check the SC number after leaving the SP
mode.
• The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues a Level “D” SC
code. This is done for Level “D” SC codes only. (
4.3.2)


CAUTION
Never turn OFF the main power switch when the power LED is lit or
flashing. To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation
switch to switch the power OFF, wait for the power LED to go OFF, and
then switch the main power switch OFF.
NOTE: The main power LED (
) lights or flashes while the platen cover or
ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with the network
server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for
reading or writing data.

4-27

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

April 2007

SC codes Group 1: Scanning
SC101

SC120

SC121

SC141

SC142

D

D

D

D

D

Exposure lamp error
The white level peak did not
reach the prescribed threshold
when the white plate was
scanned.

Scanner home position error 1
The scanner home position
sensor did not detect the home
position (did not go OFF) after
the scanner moved forward 20
mm..

Scanner home position error 2
The scanner home position
sensor did not go ON after the
scanner moved forward 1 mm
and the feeler entered the HP
sensor.

Black level detection error
During AGC the value for black
level was not within ±2 of the
prescribed value. The copier can
reproduce monochrome, but not
color.

White level detection error
During AGC the value for white
level was not within ±7 of the
prescribed value.

4-28

•
•
•
•
•
•

Dirty optics
Exposure lamp defective
Exposure lamp does not turn ON
Lamp stabilizer defective
High voltage line leak
Power/signal harness defective

•
•
•
•

Scanner motor driver board defective
Scanner motor defective
Scanner HP sensor defective
Harness between scanner motor and
scanner I/O board disconnected or
broken.

• Scanner motor defective
• Scanner HP sensor disconnected,
defective

• SBU defective
• Harness defective

•
•
•
•
•

Exposure lamp defective
Harness disconnected, damaged
Dirty exposure glass, optics
Scanner motor, drive assembly defective
SBU board defective

April, 2007

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC144

D

SBU (Sensor Board Unit) communication error
When the machine is switched
• Dirty exposure glass or optics
ON, or when the machine
• SBU board defective
returns to full operation from the • SBU harness disconnected, defective
energy save mode, the machine
can not access the SBU register,
or the SBU register values are
abnormal.

SC161

D

IDU (Image Discrimination Unit) error
After the command is written into the DFID
self-diagnosis startup register, the correct
value is not stored in the register for the
prescribed length of time after power ON.
-orAfter the negate interruption of FGATE
occurs, IDU is not recognized within the
prescribed time during scanning.

SC180

SC195

D

D

Scanner fan lock
001 One of the fan motors next to the
exposure lamp did not switch ON
within 0.5 sec after the CPU issued
the ON signal.
002 The scanner fan motor next to the
SIOB did not switch ON within 0.5
sec. after the CPU issued the ON
signal.

Machine serial number error
The number registered for the machine
serial number does not match.

• IPU board defective
(defective connection
between ASIC and DFID,
defective LSYNC-signal)

• Fan defective
• Foreign object interfering
with operation of fan
• Motor harness loose,
disconnected, or broken
• SIOB defective
• SBU defective

• Confirm the correct serial
number of the machine in the
specifications
Important!
WHEN SC195 OCCURS, THE
SERIAL NUMBER MUST BE
INPUT. PLEASE CONTACT
YOUR TECHNICAL
SUPERVISOR.

.

4-29

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

April 2007

SC codes Group 2: Exposure
SC202

SC203

D

D

Polygon motor error 1: ON timeout
The polygon mirror motor does
not reach the targeted operating
speed:
• Within 10 seconds after
turning ON.
• Within 10 sec. after changing
speed

• Harness to polygon motor driver board
disconnected, defective
• Polygon motor defective
• Polygon motor driver board defective
• Polygon motor defective.

Polygon motor error 2: OFF timeout
The polygon mirror motor does
•
leave the READY status within
10 seconds after the polygon
•
motor switches OFF.
•
•

Harness to polygon motor driver board
disconnected, defective
Polygon motor defective
Polygon motor driver board defective
Polygon motor defective.

SC204

D

Polygon motor error 3: Polygon motor lock signal error
The polygon motor lock signal
• Harness to polygon motor driver board
goes HIGH (inactive) while the
disconnected, defective
laser diode is firing.
• Polygon motor defective
• Polygon motor driver board defective

SC205

D

Polygon motor error 4: Polygon motor lock signal unstable
When the polygon motor
• Harness to polygon motor driver board
switches ON, or after the speed
disconnected, defective
of the motor changes, the
• Polygon motor defective
polygon motor lock signal goes
• Polygon motor driver board defective
HIGH (inactive).

SC210
SC211
SC212
SC213

D
D
D
D

Laser beam detection error 1: K (Black)
Laser beam detection error 1: Y (Yellow)
Laser beam detection error 1: M (Magenta)
Laser beam detection error 1: C (Cyan)
The laser synchronization sensor
• Laser synchronization
failed to detect the beginning and end
detector sensor connection
of the laser beam flash for the
loose, not connected
designated color onto the polygon
• Laser synchronization
mirror while the mirror is rotating at
detector sensor defective
the prescribed number of revolutions.

4-30

April, 2007

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC220

D

Laser Synchronization Detector Error 1: K Leading Edge: LD0
While the polygon motor is
• Harness between the laser synchronizing
rotating normally, no
detector and I/F unit is disconnected,
synchronizing detection signal is
defective
output for LD0 black, or leading
• Laser synchronizing detector defective
edge, even after the laser diode
• Beam not reflected in photo detection
has been firing for 2 sec.
• GAVD (ASIC) on the BICU is defective
• LD driver board defective
• LDB defective
• BICU defective
• Check board connections, replace

SC221

D

Laser Synchronization Detector Error 2: K Leading Edge (Other than LD0)
While the polygon motor is
• Beam not reflected in photo detection
rotating normally, no
• GAVD (ASIC) (ASIC) on the BICU
synchronizing detection signal is
defective
output for black, leading edge for • LD driver defective
any LD other than LD0, even
• LDB defective
after the laser diode has been
• BICU defective
firing for 2 sec.
• Check board connections, replace

SC222

D

Laser Synchronization Detector Error 1: Y Leading Edge: LD0
While the polygon motor is
• Harness between the laser synchronizing
rotating normally, no
detector and I/F unit is disconnected,
synchronizing detection signal is
defective
output for LD0 yellow, leading
• Laser synchronizing detector defective
edge, even after the laser diode
• Beam not reflected in photo detection
has been firing for 2 sec.
• GAVD (ASIC) (ASIC) on the BICU
defective
• LD driver board defective
• LDB defective
• BICU defective
• Check board connections, replace

SC223

D

Laser Synchronization Detector Error 2: Y Leading Edge (Other than LD0)
While the polygon motor is
• Beam not reflected in photo detection
rotating normally, no
• GAVD (ASIC) (ASIC) on the BICU
synchronizing detection signal is
defective
output for yellow, leading
• LD driver defective
edgefor any LD other than LD0,
• LDB defective
even after the laser diode has
• BICU defective
been firing for 2 sec.
• Check board connections, replace

4-31

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

April 2007

SC224

D

Laser Synchronization Detector Error 1: M Leading Edge: LD0
While the polygon motor is
• Harness between the laser synchronizing
rotating normally, no
detector and I/F unit is disconnected,
synchronizing detection signal is
defective
output for LD0 magenta, leading • Laser synchronizing detector defective
edge, even after the laser diode
• Beam not reflected in photo detection
has been firing for 2 sec.
• GAVD (ASIC) on the BICU defective
• LD driver board defective
• LDB defective
• BICU defective
• Check board connections, replace

SC225

D

Laser Synchronization Detector Error 2: M Leading Edge (Other than LD0)
While the polygon motor is
• Beam not reflected in photo detection
rotating normally, no
• GAVD (ASIC) on the BICU defective
synchronizing detection signal is • LD driver defective
output for magenta, leading
• LDB defective
edge for any LD other than LD0, • BICU defective
even after the laser diode has
• Check board connections, replace
been firing for 2 sec.

SC226

D

Laser Synchronization Detector Error 1: C Leading Edge: LD0
While the polygon motor is
• Harness between the laser synchronizing
rotating normally, no
detector and I/F unit is disconnected,
synchronizing detection signal is
defective
output for LD0 cyan, leading
• Laser synchronizing detector defective
edge, even after the laser diode
• Beam not reflected in photo detection
has been firing for 2 sec.
• GAVD (ASIC) on the BICU defective
• LD driver board defective
• LDB defective
• BICU defective
• Check board connections, replace

SC227

D

Laser Synchronization Detector Error 2: C Leading Edge (Other than LD0)
While the polygon motor is
• Beam not reflected in photo detection
rotating normally, no
• GAVD (ASIC) on the BICU defective
synchronizing detection signal is • LD driver defective
output for cyan, leading edgefor
• LDB defective
any LD other than LD0, even
• BICU defective
after the laser diode has been
• Check board connections, replace
firing for 2 sec.

4-32

April, 2007

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC230

D

FGATE error 1: Feedback remains HIGH for K write
After the start of timing to create • GAVD (ASIC) on the BICU defective
the black image, the PFGATE
• PCI I/F on the IPU defective
register of the GAVD (ASIC)
• ASIC on the IOB defective
does not assert, even after 5
• Controller board disconnected, defective
sec. when:
• Harness between the BICU and LDB unit
• Images are created on the
disconnected, loose, or defective.
drum.
• Check board connections, replace
• MUSIC patterns are created
on the transfer belt.
The BICU received no feedback
(LOW signal) from the LD unit to
indicate that the lasers started
firing at the prescribed time to
create the patterns.

SC231

D

FGATE error 1: Feedback remains LOW for K write
After the start of timing to create • GAVD (ASIC) on the BICU defective
the black image, the PFGATE
• PCI I/F on the IPU defective
register of the GAVD (ASIC)
• ASIC on the IOB defective
does not assert, even after 5
• Check board connections, replace
sec. when:
• Images are created on the
drum.
• MUSIC patterns are created
on the transfer belt.
The BICU received a LOW
feedback signal, but the signal
remained LOW (indicating the
lasers were still operating), even
after creation of the next image
should have started.

SC232

D

FGATE error 1: Feedback remains HIGH for Y write
After the start of timing to create • GAVD (ASIC) on the BICU defective
the yellow image, the PFGATE
• PCI I/F on the IPU defective
register of the GAVD (ASIC)
• ASIC on the IOB defective
does not assert, even after 5
• Controller board disconnected, defective
sec. when:
• Harness between the BICU and LDB unit
• Images are created on the
disconnected, loose, or defective.
drum.
• Check board connections, replace
• MUSIC patterns are created
on the transfer belt.
The BICU received no feedback
(LOW signal) from the LD unit to
indicate that the lasers started
firing at the prescribed time to
create the patterns.

4-33

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

April 2007

SC233

D

FGATE error 1: Feedback remains LOW for Y write
After the start of timing to create • GAVD (ASIC) on the BICU defective
the yellow image, the PFGATE
• PCI I/F on the IPU defective
register of the GAVD (ASIC)
• ASIC on the IOB defective
does not assert, even after 5
• Check board connections, replace
sec. when:
• Images are created on the
drum.
• MUSIC patterns are created
on the transfer belt.
The BICU received a LOW
feedback signal, but the signal
remained LOW (indicating the
lasers were still operating), even
after creation of the next image
should have started.

SC234

D

FGATE error 1: Feedback remains HIGH for M write
After the start of timing to create • GAVD (ASIC) on the BICU defective
the magenta image, the
• PCI I/F on the IPU defective
PFGATE register of the GAVD
• ASIC on the IOB defective
(ASIC) does not assert, even
• Controller board disconnected, defective
after 5 sec. when:
• Harness between the BICU LDB unit
• Images are created on the
disconnected, loose, or defective.
drum.
• Check board connections, replace
• MUSIC patterns are created
on the transfer belt.
The BICU received no feedback
(LOW signal) from the LD unit to
indicate that the lasers started
firing at the prescribed time to
create the patterns.

SC235

D

FGATE error 1: Feedback remains LOW for M write
After the start of timing to create • GAVD (ASIC) on the BICU defective
the magenta image, the
• PCI I/F on the IPU defective
PFGATE register of the GAVD
• ASIC on the IOB defective
(ASIC) does not assert, even
• Check board connections, replace
after 5 sec. when:
• Images are created on the
drum.
• MUSIC patterns are created
on the transfer belt.
The BICU received a LOW
feedback signal, but the signal
remained LOW (indicating the
lasers were still operating), even
after creation of the next image
should have started.

4-34

April, 2007

SC236

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

D

SC237

SC240
SC241
SC242
SC243

FGATE error 1: Feedback remains HIGH for C write
After the start of timing to create • GAVD (ASIC) on the BICU defective
the cyan image, the PFGATE
• PCI I/F on the IPU defective
register of the GAVD (ASIC)
• ASIC on the IOB defective
does not assert, even after 5
• Controller board disconnected, defective
sec. when:
• Harness between the BICU and LDB unit
• Images are created on the
disconnected, loose, or defective.
drum.
• Check board connections, replace
• MUSIC patterns are created
on the transfer belt.
The BICU received no feedback
(LOW signal) from the LD unit to
indicate that the lasers started
firing at the prescribed time to
create the patterns.

FGATE error 1: Feedback remains LOW for C write
After the start of timing to create • GAVD (ASIC) on the BICU defective
the cyan image, the PFGATE
• PCI I/F on the IPU defective
register of the GAVD (ASIC)
• ASIC on the IOB defective
does not assert, even after 5
• Check board connections, replace
sec. when:
• Images are created on the
drum.
• MUSIC patterns are created
on the transfer belt.
The BICU received a LOW
feedback signal, but the signal
remained LOW (indicating the
lasers were still operating), even
after creation of the next image
should have started.

C
C
C
C

LD error 1: K
LD error 1: Y
LD error 1: M
LD error 1: C
An error is asserted at the LD
error terminal of the black,
yellow, magenta, or cyan LD
driver after initialization of the LD
because the power to the LD
was higher or lower than the
prescribed limit.

4-35

• LD defective due to wear, damage, short
circuit
• LDB harness disconnected, loose or
defective

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC268

SC269

C

C

April 2007

Optical unit sensor error
At power ON, one of the two
temperature sensors in the
optics unit detected a
temperature lower than 0°C for
more than 1 sec.
-orIt detected a temperature higher
than 100°C for more than 1 sec.

Exposure thermistor 2 error
At power on, exposure
thermistor 2 detected a
temperature lower than 0°C for
more than 1 sec.
-orIt detected a temperature higher
than 100°C for more than 1 sec.

• Thermistor disconnected (causes
extremely low temperature reading)
• Thermistor damaged and short circuited
(causes extremely high temperature
reading)
• BICU defective

• Thermistor disconnected (causes
extremely low temperature reading)
• Thermistor damaged and short circuited
(causes extremely high temperature
reading)
• BICU defective

SC270
SC271
SC272

C
C
C

Mirror motor upper/lower limit: Y (Yellow)
Mirror motor upper/lower limit: M (Magenta)
Mirror motor upper/lower limit: C (Cyan)
The pulse rate of the mirror
• 3rd mirror motor is defective.
motor reaches the upper or
• 3rd mirror motor connecter is not
lower limit.
connected correctly.
Note: SP2182 displays the
pulse rate for each motor.

SC285

D

MUSIC error
An error with the MUSIC occurs
four times since the last time the
main power was turned ON.

4-36

• ITB defective
• MUSIC sensors are dirty
• MUSIC sensors are defective

April, 2007

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC codes Group 3: Image Development - 1
SC300
SC301
SC302
SC303

D
D
D
D

AC charge output error 1: K
AC charge output error 2: M
AC charge output error 3: C
AC charge output error 4: Y
An interrupt checks the status of • High voltage power supply
the power pack every 2 ms. This • BICU defective
SC is issued if the BICU detects
• OPC unit defective
a short in the AC charge for
black, magenta, cyan, or yellow
(V = 0, for example) for 500 ms
(250 times).
1. Disconnect the high voltage cable from Terminal C of the multiple highvoltage supply board.
2. Attach a voltmeter to the terminal.
3. If there is no output from the terminal, replace the high voltage power
supply.
-orIf there is output from the terminal, test the resistance between the high
voltage cable and the ground. If resistance is nearly "0", check the highvoltage harness for defects and replace it if necessary.
4. Test the conductivity between the OPC unit and the ground. If there is no
conductivity between the OPC unit and ground, replace the OPC unit.
5. If there is no charge PWM signal, replace the harness and/or BICU.

SC312
SC313
SC314
SC315

D
D
D
D

Charge, development error 1: K
Charge, development error 2: M
Charge, development error 3: C
Charge, development error 4: Y
500 ms after the black, magenta, cyan, and
yellow drums start to rotate, the machine
starts to monitor the AC current feedback at
8 ms intervals. This is SC is issued if the
feedback for the charge unit of any color
drops below 0.5V for 400 ms (50
consecutive readings).

SC316
SC317
SC318
SC319

D
D
D
D

AC bias charge adjustment error 1: K
AC bias charge adjustment error 2: M
AC bias charge adjustment error 3: C
AC bias charge adjustment error 4: Y
An average value of 8 ms/cycle could
not be attained for Vpp (AC charge
bias) within 15 attempts.
-orThe output of the AC charge boosted
Vpp over 2.8 kV.

4-37

• Make sure that the settings
of SP2202 are at the
defaults.
• Defective charge roller
• Defective power pack

• Charge roller dirty
• Charge roller defective
• Bias terminal connection at
the PCU receptacle is dirty or
defective

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

April 2007

SC320
SC321
SC322
SC323

D
D
D
D

Development power pack error 1: K
Development power pack error 2: M
Development power pack error 3: C
Development power pack error 4: Y
An interrupt checks the status of • Development power pack defective
the each power pack every 2
• High voltage power supply defective
ms. This SC is issued if the
• High voltage power supply harness
BICU detects a short in the
defective
development DC charge for
• Development unit defective
black, magenta, cyan, or yellow
• IOB harness disconnected or defective
(or V = 0) for 500 ms (250
• IOB defective
times).
1. Disconnect the high voltage cable from Terminal B of the high-voltage
supply board.
2. Attach a voltmeter to the terminal.
3. If there is no output from the terminal, replace the high voltage power
supply.
-orIf there is output from the terminal, test the resistance between the high
voltage cable and the ground.
If resistance is "0" or nearly "0", check the high-voltage harness for defects
and replace it if necessary.
If replacing the harness does not solve the problem,
4. Test the resistance between the development unit terminal and the ground.
If there is no resistance (0Ω) between the development unit and the ground,
replace the development unit.
5. If there is no development PWM signal, replace the harness and/or IOB.

SC324
SC325
SC326
SC327

D
D
D
D

Development motor error 1: K
Development motor error 2: M
Development motor error 3: C
Development motor error 4: Y
The PLL lock signal remained
HIGH or LOW for longer than
the prescribed time for the
development motor of the
affected color.

4-38

• Development motor shaft locked, blocked
by and obstruction
• DRB (Drive Board) defective

April, 2007

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC336
SC337
SC338
SC339

D
D
D
D

Developer set error 1: K
Developer set error 2: M
Developer set error 3: C
Developer set error 4: Y
The value of Vcnt is set at the
• Film seal not removed from the black,
maximum or minimum setting
magenta, cyan, or yellow developer case
when the TD sensor is
initialized.
Open the front door.
Pull out the film seal from the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow developer case.
Be sure to do the correct SP for the affected color:
• SP3801 003 to initialize the TD sensor for black.
• SP3801 004 to initialize the TD sensor for magenta.
• SP3801 005 to initialize the TD sensor for cyan.
• SP3801 006 to initialize the TD sensor for yellow.

SC340
SC341
SC342
SC343

D
D
D
D

Toner cartridge set error 1: K
Toner cartridge set error 2: M
Toner cartridge set error 3: C
Toner cartridge set error 4: Y
The machine cannot read the ID • Black, magenta, cyan, or yellow toner
chip of the black, magenta,
cartridge set incorrectly
cyan, or yellow toner cartridge.
1. Open the front door.
2. Press down the release lever on the top edge of the toner bin to of the affect
toner cartridge to release it, then pull the bin out to open it.
3. Remove the toner cartridge and set it again.

SC348

D

Toner hopper motor error
2 sec. after the motor START signal is
output, a LOCK signal cannot be detected.

4-39

• Motor harness disconnected,
loose, or defective
• Powder pump overload
• Sub hopper overload
• Toner hopper motor
defective

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC360
SC361
SC362
SC363

D
D
D
D

April 2007

TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: K
TD sensor (Vt high) error 2: M
TD sensor (Vt high) error 3: C
TD sensor (Vt high) error 4: Y
The Vt value of the black,
magenta, cyan, or yellow TD
sensor exceeds 4.5V for two
counts.

• Black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD
sensor disconnected
• Harness between TD sensor and PCU
defective
• Defective TD sensor.

1. Turn the machine OFF and ON.
2. Check the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor connector and
harness between the TD sensor and PCU for damage.
3. Check the drawer connector.
4. Replace the TD sensor.
5. After replacing the black TD sensor:
• Do SP3801 003-006 to initialize the new black, magenta, cyan, or yellow
TD sensor.
• Execute SP3820 001 to do auto process control manually.

SC364
SC365
SC366
SC367

D
D
D
D

TD sensor (Vt low) error 1: K
TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: M
TD sensor (Vt low) error 3: C
TD sensor (Vt low) error 4: Y
The Vt value of the black,
magenta, cyan, or yellow TD
sensor is below 0.5V for 10
counts.

• TD sensor harness disconnected, loose,
defective
• A drawer connector (located on the rear
of a development unit) disconnected,
loose, defective
• TD sensor defective

1. Turn the machine OFF and ON.
2. Check the TD sensor connector and harness between the TD sensor and
PCU for damage. Replace it if necessary.
3. Check the drawer connector.
4. Replace the TD sensor.
5. After replacing the TD sensor:
• Do SP3801 003-006 to initialize the new black, magenta, cyan, or yellow
TD sensor.
• Execute SP3820 001 to do auto process control manually.

4-40

April, 2007

SC372
SC373
SC374
SC375

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

D
D
D
D

TD sensor adjustment error 1: K
TD sensor adjustment error 2: M
TD sensor adjustment error 3: C
TD sensor adjustment error 4: Y
During TD sensor initialization
with SP3801, the output value of
the black, magenta, cyan, or
yellow TD sensor is not within
the range of 3.2±0.2V

• Film seal not removed from a new
developer pack
• TD harness sensor disconnected, loose
or defective
• TD sensor defective
• Harness between TD sensor and drawer
disconnected, defective

1. Turn the machine OFF and ON.
2. Pull ouut the film seal from the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow PCU.
3. Do SP3812 001 to confirm that the developer was initialized correctly. The
display should show "1111" if developer initialized correctly.
4. Check the TD sensor connector.
5. Check the TD sensor connector and harness between the TD sensor and
PCU for damage. Replace it if necessary.
6. Check the drawer PCU connector.
7. Replace the TD sensor.
8. After replacing the TD sensor:
• Do SP3801 003-006 to initialize the new black, magenta, cyan, or yellow
TD sensor.
• Execute SP3820 001 to do auto process control manually.

SC396
SC397
SC398
SC399

D
D
D
D

Drum motor error 1: K
Drum motor error 2: M
Drum motor error 3: C
Drum motor error 4: Y
When the drum motor of the black,
magenta, cyan, or yellow PCU
starts, the machine cannot detect a
LOCK signal within 2 sec. The
motor is trying to rotate but there is
an excessive load on the drum
shaft. The motor has no traction
(due to a bent cleaning blade, for
example).

4-41

•
•
•
•
•
•

PCU drum dirty
PCU defective
Motor harness defective
DRB (Drive board) defective
Drum motor defective
Insufficient lubrication on a drum.
Open PCU and apply toner to the
drum surface

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

April 2007

SC codes Group 4: Image Development - 2
SC400

D

ID sensor error 1: Calibration
Before adjustment Vsg_reg<0.5 but
Vsg_reg could not be adjusted to the
target Vsg_reg = 4.0±0.2V during
process control.

• ID sensor harness disconnected,
loose, defective
• ID sensor dirty
• ID sensor defective
• ITB unit drawer connector dirty
Note: Vsg_reg is the voltage reading of the light reflected directly from the bare
surface of the ITB. The color ID sensor is provided with one additional receptor
to read diffuse light reflected from the colors of ID sensor patterns. The
additional receptor on the color sensor is not used to read the bare surface of
the belt. For more, see Section "6. Details".

SC410
SC411
SC412
SC413

D
D
D
D

ID sensor error 2: Development γ K
ID sensor error 3: Development γ M
ID sensor error 4: Development γ C
ID sensor error 5: Development γ Y
Development gamma for black, •
magenta, cyan, or yellow is not
within range (0.3 to 6.0).
Process control halts when this
SC is issued.
•
•
•
•
•

Toner density not normal: Refer to the
procedure for process control self-check
error codes 55 to 59 to 59, and 61
(section 4.2.4)
Potential sensor defective
Laser diode not firing
ITB separation for CMY abnormal
Transfer power pack defective
ID sensor defective

SC414
SC415
SC416
SC417

D
D
D
D

ID sensor error 6: Development start voltage K
ID sensor error 7: Development start voltage M
ID sensor error 8: Development start voltage C
ID sensor error 9: Development start voltage Y
The development start voltage • Toner density not normal: Refer to the
in the development of the
procedure for process control self-check
black, magenta, cyan, or
error codes 55 to 59, and 61 (section
yellow PCU is not within the
4.2.4)
correct range (±150V)
• Potential sensor defective
• LD not firing correctly
• ITB separation for CMY abnormal
• Transfer power pack defective
• ID sensor defective

SC418

C

LED error during Vsg adjustment
PWM value: Ifsg>2000
This means the current to the LED of the
ID sensor is abnormal.

4-42

• ID sensor dirty
• ID sensor defective

April, 2007

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC420
SC421
SC422
SC423

C
C
C
C

Potential sensor error 1: Vd Adjustment K
Potential sensor error 2: Vd Adjustment M
Potential sensor error 3: Vd Adjustment C
Potential sensor error 4: Vd Adjustment Y
The development potential of
• Toner density low
the drum before exposure (Vd)
cannot be adjusted to within
±10 V of the target voltage (900V).

SC424
SC425
SC426
SC427

C
C
C
C

Potential sensor error 5: Vl adjustment K
Potential sensor error 6: Vl adjustment M
Potential sensor error 7: Vl adjustment C
Potential sensor error 8: Vl adjustment Y
Vpl could not be adjusted to
• Toner density low
within ±10V of the target Vpl
after exposure of the ID sensor
patterns.

SC432
SC433
SC434
SC435

SC436
SC437
SC438
SC439

C
C
C
C

D
D
D
D

Potential sensor error 1: Vr K
Potential sensor error 2: Vr M
Potential sensor error 3: Vr C
Potential sensor error 4: Vr Y
Vr > 200V
The residual voltage (Vr), the amount
of voltage that remains on the surface
of the drum after the Quenching Lamp
fires is greater than 200V.

Potential sensor error 5: Vd K
Potential sensor error 6: Vd M
Potential sensor error 7: Vd C
Potential sensor error 8: Vd Y
The VdHome reading, the first step of
the process control self-check,
detected that the development
potential of the unexposed areas of
the drum are not within the prescribed
range (-500 to -700)

4-43

• Toner density low

•
•
•
•
•

Potential sensor dirty
Potential sensor defective
Charge roller defective
Charge power pack defective
OPC defective

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC440
SC441
SC442
SC443

D
D
D
D

April 2007

Image transfer power pack error 1: K
Image transfer power pack error 2: M
Image transfer power pack error 3: C
Image transfer power pack error 4: Y
An interrupt checks the status of
•
the power pack every 2 ms. This
SCis issued if the BICU detects a •
short in the power pack for K, M,
C, or Y 250 times within 500 ms. •

Transfer belt damaged, insulation
damaged
Insulation on high voltage cable
damaged
Another hot point inside the machine has
damaged insulation
• Insulation around high-voltage power
supply damaged
• IOB damaged

SC445

SC446

SC450

SC455

D

D

D

D

Image transfer motor error
The control board of the image
transfer motor generated signals
that indicate there is problem
with the image transfer motor.

ITB lift motor error
The state of the ITB lift sensor
does not change its state
(switching from OFF to ON or
vice versa), even after the ITB
lift motor starts rotating.

Transfer power pack output error
An interrupt checks the status of
the power pack every 2 ms. This
SC is issued if the BICU detects
a short in the power pack 250
times at 2nd transfer output
within 500 ms.

PTR motor error
The lock signal from the paper
transfer motor is not detected
within 1 sec. after the motor
switched ON.

4-44

•
•
•
•

Image transfer motor defective
ITB control board defective
ITB overloaded
Encoder strip on the front edge of the
belt damaged.

• ITB lift sensor dirty, disconnected,
defective
• ITB lift motor disconnected, defective

• Damaged insulation on the high-voltage
supply cable
• Damaged insulation around the highvoltage power supply.

• Motor disconnected
• PTR shaft locked, needs cleaning,
blocked by obstruction
• Drive shaft of the ITB locked and
overloaded, needs cleaning, or blocked
by obstruction
• DRB (motor drive board) disconnected,
defective

April, 2007

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC460

D

Separation power pack output error
An interrupt checks the status of • Damaged insulation on the high-voltage
the power pack every 2 ms. This
supply cable
SC is issued if the BICU detects
• Damaged insulation around the higha short in the power pack 250
voltage power supply.
times at D(AC) within 500 ms.
1. Replace the high-voltage supply cable.
2. Replace the high-voltage power supply unit.
3. Replace the IOB.

SC484

D

Waste toner bottle full
The toner full sensor goes HIGH
for more than 500 ms, indicating
that the waste toner bottle is full.

• Remove waste toner bottle, empty it

SC485

D

Waste toner transport motor error
The lock signal of the waste
• Waste toner transport motor defective
toner transport motor remains
HIGH for more than 600 ms.

SC487

D

Waste toner bottle set error
The set sensor of the waste
toner bottle remains LOW for
more than 500 ms. (The sensor
goes HIGH when the bottle is
installed correctly.)

SC488

SC490

D

C

• Install the waste toner bottle
• Remove waste toner bottle and reinstall
correctly

Waste toner transport lock
Waste toner cannot be transported to the
waste toner bottle.

Peltier Unit error
The Abnormal Condition signal
or the Peltier Unit is received 10
times.

4-45

• Blockage in the line to the
waste toner bottle

• Peltier Unit is defective

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC496

C

April 2007

MUSIC sensor error
The MUSIC sensor detected an
abnormal pattern on the ITB
because:
• A/D converter exceeded
upper or lower limit.
• The pattern used to calculate
the amount of skew is
abnormal.
• The reading of the pattern
exceeded the length of time
the LED projected light.
• LED light could not be
adjusted correctly.

• MUSIC sensor defective or disconnected
• MUSIC pattern abnormal; do a forced
process control (SP3821) and check the
result (section 4.2.4).

SC497

C

Temperature and humidity sensor error 1: PCU
The thermistor output of the
• Temperature and humidity sensor
temperature and humidity
harness disconnected, loose, defective
sensor above the black PCU
• Temperature and humidity sensor
was not within the prescribed
defective
range (0.5V to 4.2V)

SC498

C

Temperature and humidity sensor error 2
The thermistor output of the
• Temperature and humidity sensor
temperature and humidity
harness disconnected, loose, defective
sensor at below the waste toner
• Temperature and humidity sensor
bottle was not within the
defective
prescribed range (0.5V to 4.2V)

SC499

C

ITB Position Sensor error
Abnormal ITB Position Sensor
output.

4-46

•
•
•
•
•

ITB Position Sensor 1 or 2 is dirty.
ITB Position Sensor 1 or 2 is defective.
ITB encoder strip is dirty,
ITB encoder strip is damaged.
ITB movement error (e.g. the belt cannot
rotate correctly due to friction).
1. Connectors for ITB Position Sensor 1
or 2 are not connected correctly.

April, 2007

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC codes Group 5: Paper Feed
SC501

B

Tray 1 (tandem tray) feed error (Japan Only)
• The tray 1 lift sensor does not • Tray lift motor harness disconnected,
switch ON 10 s after the tray
loose, defective
lift motor switches ON and
• Paper or other obstacle trapped between
starts lifting the bottom plate.
tray and motor
• When the tray lowers, the tray • Tray lift sensor disconnected, damaged
lift sensor does not go off
• Lower limit sensor disconnected,
within 1.5 sec.
damaged
• Pick-up solenoid disconnected, blocked
• The lower limit sensor of the
by an obstacle
tandem tray does not detect
the lower limit within 10 sec.

SC502

B

Tray 2 (paper cassette) feed error (Japan Only)
• The lift sensor is not activated • Tray lift motor defective or disconnected
within 10 seconds after the
• Paper or other obstacle trapped between
tray lift motor starts lifting the
tray and motor
bottom plate.
• Pick-up solenoid disconnected or
• When the tray lowers, the tray
blocked by an obstacle
lift sensor does not go off
within 1.5 sec.
• The lower limit sensor of the
tandem tray does not detect
the lower limit within 10 sec.

SC503

B

Tray 1 feed error
• The lift sensor is not activated
within 10 seconds after the
tray lift motor starts lifting the
bottom plate.
• When the tray lowers, the tray
lift sensor does not go off
within 1.5 sec.

SC504

B

Tray 2 feed error
• The lift sensor is not activated
within 10 seconds after the
tray lift motor starts lifting the
bottom plate.
• When the tray lowers, the tray
lift sensor does not go off
within 1.5 sec.

4-47

• Tray lift motor defective or disconnected
• Paper or other obstacle trapped between
tray and motor
• Pick-up solenoid disconnected or
blocked by an obstacle

• Tray lift motor defective or disconnected
• Paper or other obstacle trapped between
tray and motor
• Pick-up solenoid disconnected or
blocked by an obstacle

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC505

SC506

SC510

C

B

B

April 2007

Tandem tray rear fence motor error
• The return sensor does not
•
switch ON within 10 sec. after
the rear fence motor switches •
ON.
• The HP sensor does not
•
switch ON 10 sec. after the
rear fence motor switches
•
ON.
• The HP sensor and return
•
sensor switch ON at the same
time.

Rear fence motor defective or poor
connection
Paper or other obstacle interfering with
operation of the sensors
Paper or other obstacle trapped between
tray and motor
Motor mechanical overload due to
obstruction
Return sensor or HP sensor defective or
dirty

Tandem tray back fence motor error
The back fence should be closed but the
fence was not detected in the closed position
within 500 ms.
-orThe back fence should be open but the
fence was not detected in the open within
500 ms.

LCT tray error
• When the bottom plate is
lifted, the upper limit sensor
does not come on for 30 sec.
• When the bottom plate is
lowered, the lower limit sensor
does not come on for 30 sec.
• After lift begins, the upper limit
sensor does not switch ON
before the pick-up solenoid
switches ON.
• The paper end sensor
switches ON during lift and
the upper limit sensor does
not switch ON for 2.5 s, and a
message prompts user to
reset paper.

4-48

• Paper loaded incorrectly
• Back fence motor harness
disconnected, loose,
defective
• Back fence motor defective
• Paper blocking sensors
• Paper stuck between tray
and motor
• Back fence close, back fence
open sensor harnesses
disconnected, loose, or
defective.
• Back fence close, back fence
open sensor defective
• Paper or other obstacle is
interfering with movement of
the fence

• Tray lift motor harness, disconnected,
loose, or defective
• Tray lift motor defective
• Lift sensor defective or disconnected
• Pick-up solenoid defective or
disconnected
• Paper end sensor defective

April, 2007

SC515

SC516

SC520

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

C

B

A

Duplex jogger motor error 1
When the jogger fence moves to
the home position, the jogger
fence HP sensor does not switch
on even after the duplex jogger
motor has moved the jogger
fence 153.5 mm.

Duplex jogger motor error 2
When the jogger fence moves
from the home position, the
jogger fence HP sensor does not
turn off even if the duplex jogger
motor has moved the jogger
fence 153.5 mm.

Fusing/Exit Motor error
The Fusing/Exit Motor LOCK
signal is not detected for a
duration of one second after the
motor START signal is sent.

• Rear fence motor defective or poor
connection
• Paper or other obstacle interfering with
operation of the sensors or motor
• Return sensor or HP sensor defective or
dirty

• Paper or other obstacle has jammed
mechanism
• HP sensor connector disconnected or
defective
• HP sensor defective

• Fusing/Exit Motor connecter is not
connected correctly.
• Fusing/Exit Motor torque is too high or
too low.
• Fusing/Exit Motor is defective.

SC530

D

Fan error 1: fusing cooling fan motor
The BICU does not receive the
• Fusing cooling fan disconnected,
lock signal 5 seconds after the
defective
fusing unit fan switches ON.
• BICU defective

SC531

D

Fan error 2: fusing cooling fan motor
The lock signal remained HIGH for 5 sec.
while the fan at the front of the fusing unit
near the heat dissipation fins was operating.

SC532

D

Fan error 3: PCB box fan
The lock signal remained HIGH for 5 sec.
while the fan that cools the printed circuit
boards was operating.

4-49

• Motor overload due to
obstacle interfering with
operation of the fan
• Fan harness loose,
disconnected, defective
• Fan defective

• Motor overload due to
obstacle interfering with
operation of the fan
• Fan harness loose,
disconnected, defective
• Fan defective

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
SC533

SC534

D

D

April 2007

Fan error 4: fusing exhaust fan
The lock signal remained HIGH for 5 sec.
while the fan that draws air out of the fusing
unit was operating.

Fan error 5: duplex exhaust fan
The lock signal remained HIGH for 5 sec.
while the fan that draws air out of the duplex
unit was operating.

• Motor overload due to
obstacle interfering with
operation of the fan
• Fan harness loose,
disconnected, defective
• Fan defective

• Motor overload due to
obstacle interfering with
operation of the fan
• Fan harness loose,
disconnected, defective
• Fan defective

SC535

C

Temperature/Humidity control abnormal
The output of the
• Peltier Cooling Fan Motor is defective.
temperature/humidity sensor
reaches the upper or lower limit,
even after the Peltier unit has
been ON for 3 hours.

SC541

A

Heating roller thermistor 1 error 1: Poor connection
The temperature measured by
• Heating roller thermistor harness
the heating roller thermistor
connection loose, disconnected,
does not reach 130°C after 10
defective
tries and 65 sec. have elapsed.
• Defective heating roller thermistor

SC542

A

Heating roller thermistor 1 error 2: No warmup
After the main switch is turned
• Thermistor is bent, installed incorrectly
ON or the cover is closed, the
• Defective heating roller thermistor
heating roller temperature does
• Heating roller fusing lamp broken
not reach the ready temperature
within 2 sec. after the heater
switches ON.
-orIf the roller was below 45°C, the
heating roller did not reach the
ready temperature 2 sec. after
reaching 45°C.
Note: Thermistor 2 stops
monitoring the temperature once
Thermistor 1 detects ready
temperature.
Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.

4-50

April, 2007

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC543

A

Heating roller thermistor 1 error 3: Software - High temperature
The thermistor detected a
• TRIAC short
temperature over 230°C.
• IOB defective
• BICU defective
• Fusing temperature out of control
Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.

SC544

A

Heating roller thermistor 1 error 4: Hardware - High temperature
The thermistor detected a
• TRIAC short
temperature over 260°C.
• IOB defective
• BICU defective
• Fusing temperature control is erratic
Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.

SC545

A

Heating roller thermistor 1 error 5: Lamp remains ON
After hot roller reaches warmup
• Thermistor damaged, or out of position
temperature, the fusing lamps
• Fusing lamp disconnected, broken
remained ON at full capacity for
25 sec. after reaching the
warmup temperature while the
hot roller was not rotating.
Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.

SC546

A

Heating roller thermistor 2 error 1: Thermistor disconnected
The temperature measured by
• Loose connection of the heating roller
the heating roller thermistor
thermistor
does not reach 0°C after 45 sec. • Defective heating roller thermistor
and remains over this
temperature for 10 readings.

SC547

A

Zero cross error
When the main switch is turned ON, the
• Electrical noise on the power
machine checks how many zero-cross
supply line
signals are generated within 500 ms. This
• Fusing relay damaged:
SC code is issued if the number of zeroreplace the PSU.
cross signals detected is either more than 66
or less than 45 for 10 readings.
Note: Zero cross signals, generated from an
ac power supply, are used to generate a
trigger pulses to control the applied power
accurately.
Normally, this SC is cancelled if you do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.

4-51

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

April 2007

SC548

A

Heating roller thermistor 2 error 2: Failed to reach warmup temperature
After the main switch is turned ON or
• Thermistor is bent, installed
the cover is closed, the heating roller
incorrectly
temperature does not reach the ready
• Defective heating roller thermistor
temperature within 2 sec. after the
• Heating roller fusing lamp broken
heater switches ON.
• Defective BICU
-orIf the roller was below 45°C, the
heating roller did not reach the ready
temperature 2 sec. after reaching
45°C.
Note: Thermistor 2 stops monitoring
the temperature once Thermistor 1
detects warmup temperature.
Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.

SC549

A

Heating roller thermistor 2 error 3: Software - High Temperature
The thermistor detected a
• TRIAC short
temperature over 250°C.
• IOB defective
• BICU defective
• Fusing temperature control is erratic
Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.

SC550

A

Heating roller thermistor 2 error 4: Hardware - High Temperature
The thermistor detected a
• TRIAC short
temperature over 260°C.
• IOB defective
• BICU defective
• Fusing temperature control is erratic
Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.

SC551

A

Pressure roller thermistor error 1
The temperature measured by the pressure
roller thermistor does not reach 0°C for 200
sec.

• Loose connection of the
pressure roller thermistor
• Defective pressure roller
thermistor
• Defective BICU

Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.

SC552

A

Pressure roller thermistor error 2
After the main switch is turned ON or the
cover is closed, the heating roller
temperature does not reach the ready
temperature within 2 sec. after the heater
switches ON.
-orIf the roller was below 45°C, the heating
roller did not reach the ready temperature 2
sec. after reaching 45°C.
Note: Thermistor 2 stops monitoring the
temperature once Thermistor 1 detects
ready temperature.

4-52

• Pressure roller thermistor
harness loose, disconnected,
defective
• Pressure roller thermistor
defective

April, 2007

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC553

A

Pressure roller thermistor error 3: Software - High temperature
The thermistor detected a
• TRIAC short
temperature over 220°C.
• IOB defective
• BICU defective
• Fusing temperature control is erratic
Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.

SC554

A

Pressure roller thermistor error 4: Hardware - High temperature
The thermistor detected a
• TRIAC short
temperature over 230°C.
• IOB defective
• BICU defective
• Fusing temperature control is erratic
Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.

SC555

A

Pressure roller thermistor error 5: Lamp remains ON
After hot roller reaches warmup
• Thermistor damaged, or out of position
temperature, the pressure roller
• Fusing lamp disconnected, broken
fusing lamp remains for 6 sec.
while the hot roller is not
rotating.
Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.

SC556

A

Heating roller thermistor 2 error 5: Lamp remains ON
After hot roller reaches warmup
• Thermistor damaged, or out of position
temperature, the pressure roller
• Fusing lamp disconnected, broken
fusing lamp remains for 6 sec.
while the hot roller is not rotating.

SC561

A

Hot roller thermistor error 1: Thermistor disconnected
The temperature measured by the hot roller
• Loose connection of the hot
thermistor does not reach the prescribed
roller thermistor
warm-up temperature within 100 sec.
• Defective hot roller
thermistor
• Defective BICU

SC562

A

Hot roller thermistor error 2: Failure to reach warmup temperature
After the main switch is turned ON or the
• Hot roller fusing lamp broken
cover is closed, the heating roller
• Defective hot roller
temperature does not reach the ready
thermistor
temperature within 2 sec. after the heater
• Defective BICU
switches ON.
-orIf the roller was below 45°C, the heating
roller did not reach the ready temperature 2
sec. after reaching 45°C.
Note: Thermistor 2 stops monitoring the
temperature once Thermistor 1 detects
ready temperature.
Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.

4-53

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

April 2007

SC563

A

Hot roller thermistor error 3: Software - High Temperature
The thermistor detected a
• TRIAC short
temperature over 250°C 10
• IOB defective
times within 1 sec.
• BICU defective
• Fusing temperature control is erratic
Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.

SC564

A

Hot roller thermistor error 4: Hardware - High Temperature
The thermistor detected a
• TRIAC short
temperature over 260°C.
• IOB defective
• BICU defective
• Fusing temperature control is erratic
Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.

SC565

A

Hot roller thermistor error 5: Lamp remains ON
After hot roller reaches warmup
• Thermistor damaged, or out of position
temperature, the hot roller fusing • Fusing lamp disconnected, broken
lamp remains for 6300 sec.
while the hot roller is not
rotating.
Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.

SC585

C

Double-feed sensor error
The output of the double-feed
sensor reaches the upper or
lower limit

4-54

• Double-feed sensor connector is not
connected correctly.
• Double-feed sensor is dirty with paper
dust.
• There is paper or foreign material
between the receptor and LED of the
double-feed sensor.

April, 2007

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC codes Group 6: Device Communication
SC620

D

ARDF communication error
A BREAK signal occurs after the
machine detects the ARDF, or a
communication timeout occurs.

• ARDF disconnected
• IPU board harness disconnected,
defective
• IPU board defective
• Spurious noise from the power supply
line
• ARDF control board defective

SC621

D

Mailbox-to-Finisher communication error
Communication between the
• Connection cable between mailbox and
mailbox and finisher is
finisher disconnected, defective
interrupted. An ACK/NCK signal
• Finisher main board defective
was not received within 100 ms
• BICU defective
after a data frame is sent and 3
• PSU defective
retries failed.

SC622

D

LCT communication error
Communication between the
copier and LCT is interrupted.
An ACK/NCK signal was not
received within 100 ms after a
data frame is sent and 3 retries
failed.

SC624

D

• Connection cable between the LCT and
copier is disconnected, defective
• LCT main board defective
• BICU defective
• PSU defective

Mailbox-to-copier communication error
Communication between the
• Mailbox cable disconnected, defective
mailbox and copier is
• Mailbox main board defective
interrupted. An ACK/NCK signal
• BICU defective
was not received within 100 ms
• PSU defective
after a data frame is sent and 3
retries failed.

4-55

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

April 2007

SC630

C

RSS communication error (Not use)
An error was detected in
• No action required
communication via RSS between
the machine and the RSS center.
Error occurred on a public line at
the RSS terminal.

SC632

B

Key/card counter device error 1 (Not use)
After 1 data frame is sent to the
• The serial line from the device to the
device, an ACK signal is not
copier is unstable, disconnected, or
received within 100 ms, and is not
defective.
received after 3 retries.

SC633

B

Key/card counter device error 2 (Not use)
During communication with the
• The serial line from the device to the
device, the BICU received a break
copier is unstable, disconnected, or
(Low) signal.
defective.

SC634

B

Key/card counter device error 3 (Not use)
After installation of the device, a
• Device control board defective
message alerts user to a backup
• Device control board backup battery
RAM error.
defective

SC635

B

Key/card counter device error 4 (Not use)
After installation of the device a
• Device control board defective
message alerts user to a battery
• Device control board backup battery
voltage abnormal error.
defective

SC670

D

Engine startup error
• Engine does not respond within
30 s after power ON.
• Engine down detected suddenly
during power ON and warmup.

SC672

D

GW controller startup error
• After power ON, the line between
the GW controller and the
operation panel did not open for
normal operation.
• After normal startup,
communication with the GW
controller stopped.

4-56

• BICU installation incorrect
• BICU defective
• Sudden communication reset occurred
between the BICU and the controller.

•
•
•
•

GW Controller stalled
GW Controller installed incorrectly
GW Controller board defective
Operation panel harness disconnected or
defective

April, 2007

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC680

D

BICU-MUSIC communication error
The main CPU fails to
• UART communication failure; replace the
communicate with the MUSIC
BICU
CPU within 5 sec. and three
attempts failed.

SC687

D

Memory address command error
The BICU does not receive a
memory address command from
the controller 120 seconds after
paper is in the position for
registration.

4-57

07/04

• BICU-Controller connection loose,
defective
• BICU defective
• Controller defective

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

April 2007

SC codes Group 7: Peripherals
SC701

SC705

SC720

SC721

D

D

D

B

Original pick-up operation error
Even though the pick-up motor is rotating
clock-wise, the pick-up roller home position
sensor cannot detect the position of the pickup roller.

ARDF bottom plate lift motor
• The bottom plate HP sensor
did not detect the home
position of the bottom plate
after the bottom plate lift
motor switches ON and
lowers the bottom plate.
• The bottom plate position
sensor does not detect the
position of the plate after the
lift motor switches ON and
raises the bottom plate.

• ARDF feed motor disconnected,
defective
• Bottom plate HP sensor disconnected,
defective
• ARDF main board defective

Finisher lower transport motor error
No encoder pulse signal is
•
detected for the transport motor
within the prescribed time.
•
The 1st failure issues an original
jam message, and the 2nd
•
failure issues this SC code.
•

Finisher jogger motor error
The jogger fences move out of
the home position but the HP
sensor output does not change
within the specified number of
pulses. The 1st failure issues an
original jam message, and the
2nd failure issues this SC code.

4-58

• Pick-up roller HP sensor
harness loose, disconnected,
defective
• Pick-up roller HP sensor
defective
• Pick-up motor harness loose,
disconnected, defective
• Pick-up motor defective
• ARDF control board
defective

Lower transport motor disconnected,
defective
Finisher connection to transport motor
loose, defective
Lower transport motor defective
Finisher main board defective

• Jogger HP sensor disconnected,
defective
• Jogger motor disconnected, defective
• Jogger motor overloaded due to
obstruction
• Finisher main board and jogger motor
connection loose, defective
• Finisher main board defective

April, 2007

SC723

SC724

SC725

SC726

SC727

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

B

D

D

B

B

Finisher feed-out motor
The stack feed-out belt HP
sensor does not activate within
the specified time after the stack
feed-out belt motor turns ON.
The 1st detection failure issues
a jam error, and the 2nd failure
issues this SC code.

• Stack feed-out HP sensor disconnected,
defective
• Feed-out motor disconnected, defective
• Finisher main board connection to feed
out motor disconnected, defective
• Motor overload due to obstruction

Finisher stapler hammer motor error
Stapling does not finish within
•
the prescribed time after the
staple hammer motor turns ON.
The 1st detection failure issues
•
a jam error, and the 2nd failure
issues this SC code.
•

Finisher exit guide plate motor error
After moving away from the
•
guide plate position sensor, the
exit guide is not detected at the
•
home position within the
prescribed time. The 1st
•
detection failure issues a jam
error, and the 2nd failure issues
this SC code.

Shift jogger motor 1 error
The sides fences do not retract
within the prescribed time after
the shift jogger motor switches
ON. The 1st detection failure
issues a jam error, and the 2nd
failure issues this SC code.

Shift jogger motor 2 error
The side fences do not retract
within the prescribed time after
the shift jogger motor switches
ON. The 1st detection failure
issues a jam error, and the 2nd
failure issues this SC code.

4-59

Stapler hammer motor overloaded due to
obstruction, jammed staple, number of
sheets exceeds limit for stapling
Stapler hammer motor disconnected,
defective
Staple hammer motor HP sensor
disconnected, defective

Guide plate motor disconnected,
defective
Guide plate motor overloaded due to
obstruction
Guide plate position sensor
disconnected, defective

• Shift jogger motor disconnected,
defective
• Shift jogger motor overloaded due to
obstruction
• Shift jogger HP sensor disconnected,
defective

• Motor harness disconnected, loose,
defective
• Motor defective
• Motor overload
• HP defective

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC728

SC730

B

B

April 2007

Shift jogger retraction motor error
The side fences do not retract within the
prescribed time after the retraction motor
switches ON. The 1st detection failure issues
a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this
SC code.

Finisher Tray 1 shift motor error
The shift roller HP sensor of the
upper tray does not activate
within the prescribed time after
the shift tray starts to move
toward or away from the home
position. The 1st detection
failure issues a jam error, and
the 2nd failure issues this SC
code.

• Motor harness disconnected,
loose, defective
• Motor defective
• Motor overload
• HP defective

• Shift tray HP sensor of the upper tray
disconnected, defective
• Shift tray motor of the upper tray is
disconnected, defective
• Shift tray motor of the upper tray
overloaded due to obstruction

SC740

B

Finisher corner stapler motor error
The stapler motor does not
• Staple jam
switch off within the prescribed
• Number of sheets in the stack exceeds
time after operating. The 1st
the limit for stapling
detection failure issues a jam
• Stapler motor disconnected, defective
error, and the 2nd failure issues
this SC code.

SC741

B

Finisher corner stapler rotation motor error
The stapler does not return to its • Stapler rotation motor disconnected,
home position within the
defective
specified time after stapling. The • Stapler rotation motor overloaded due to
1st detection failure issues a jam
obstruction
error, and the 2nd failure issues
• Stapler rotation HP sensor disconnected,
this SC code.
defective

SC742

B

Finisher stapler movement motor error
The stapler HP sensor is not
• Stapler movement motor disconnected,
activated within the specified
defective
time after the stapler motor
• Stapler movement motor overloaded due
turned ON. The 1st detection
to obstruction
failure issues a jam error, and
• Stapler HP sensor disconnected,
the 2nd failure issues this SC
defective
code.

4-60

April, 2007

SC743

SC744

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

B

B

Booklet stapler motor error 1
The front stapler unit saddlestitch motor does not start
operation within the specified
time. The 1st detection failure
issues a jam error, and the 2nd
failure issues this SC code.

Booklet stapler motor error 2
The rear stapler unit saddlestitch motor does not start
operation within the specified
time. The 1st detection failure
issues a jam error, and the 2nd
failure issues this SC code.

• Front motor disconnected, defective
• Front motor overloaded due to
obstruction

• Rear motor disconnected, defective
• Rear motor overloaded due to
obstruction

SC750

B

Finisher tray 1 (upper tray lift) motor error
The upper tray paper height
• Tray lift motor disconnected, defective
sensor does not change its
• Upper tray paper height sensor
status with the specified time
disconnected, defective
after the tray raises or lowers.
• Finisher main board connection to motor
The 1st detection failure issues
loose
a jam error, and the 2nd failure
• Finisher main board defective
issues this SC code.

SC751

B

Finisher tray 2 (lower tray lift) motor error
The lower tray paper height
• Tray lift motor disconnected, defective
sensor does not change its
• Upper tray paper height sensor
status with the specified time
disconnected, defective
after the tray raises or lowers.
• Finisher main board connection to motor
The 1st detection failure issues
loose
a jam error, and the 2nd failure
• Finisher main board defective
issues this SC code.

SC752

B

Finisher pressure plate motor error
Pressure plate motor operating
•
but the plate is not detected at
the home position within the
•
specified time. The 1st detection
failure issues a jam error, and
•
the 2nd failure issues this SC
code.

4-61

Pressure plate HP sensor disconnected,
defective
Pressure plate motor disconnected,
defective
Pressure plate motor overloaded due to
obstruction

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC753

SC760

SC761

SC762

SC763

SC764

B

D

B

B

April 2007

Return roller motor error
Occurs during the operation of the lower tray
pressure motor.

Finisher punch motor error
The punch HP sensor is not
activated within the specified
time after the punch motor
turned ON. The 1st detection
failure issues a jam error, and
the 2nd failure issues this SC
code.

Finisher folder plate motor error
The folder plate moves but is not
detected at the home position
within the specified time. The 1st
detection failure issues a jam
error, and the 2nd failure issues
this SC code.

• Punch HP sensor disconnected,
defective
• Punch motor disconnected, defective
• Punch motor overload due to obstruction

• Folder plate HP sensor disconnected,
defective
• Folder plate motor disconnected,
defective
• Folder plate motor overloaded due to
obstruction.

Finisher pressure plate motor error
Pressure plate motor operating
•
but the plate is not detected at
the home position within the
•
specified time. The 1st detection
failure issues a jam error, and
•
the 2nd failure issues this SC
code.

D

D

• Motor harness disconnected,
loose, defective
• Motor overloaded
• Home position sensor
harness disconnected, loose,
defective
• Home position defective

Pressure plate HP sensor disconnected,
defective
Pressure plate motor disconnected,
defective
Pressure plate motor overloaded due to
obstruction

Punch movement motor error
Occurs during operation of the punch
unit. The 1st detection failure issues a
jam error, and the 2nd failure issues
this SC code.

• Motor harness disconnected,
loose, defective
• Motor defective

Paper position sensor slide motor error
Occurs during operation of the punch
• Motor harness disconnected,
unit. The 1st detection failure issues a
loose, defective
jam error, and the 2nd failure issues
• Motor defective
this SC code.

4-62

April, 2007

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC765

B

SC766

B

SC767

B

Folding unit bottom fence lift motor
The 1st detection failure issues a jam
error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC
code.

• Motor harness disconnected,
loose, defective
• Motor defective

Clamp roller retraction motor error
The 1st detection failure issues a jam
error, and the 2nd failure issues this
SC code.

• Motor harness disconnected,
loose, defective
• Motor defective

Stack junction gate motor error
Occurs during operation of the punch
unit. The 1st detection failure issues a
jam error, and the 2nd failure issues
this SC code.

• Motor harness disconnected,
loose, defective
• Motor overload
• Motor defective

SC770

B

Cover interposer tray bottom plate motor error
• After the motor starts to raise
• Bottom plate position sensor,
the bottom plate, the bottom
disconnected, defective
plate position sensor does not • Bottom plate HP sensor disconnected,
detect the plate at the
defective
specified time (3 s).
• After the motor starts to lower
the bottom plate, the bottom
plate HP sensor does not
detect the bottom plate.

SC775

D

Cover interposer tray feed motor
• Motor harness disconnected, loose,
defective
• Motor overload
• Motor defective

SC780

B

Z-Fold feed motor error Japan Only
The feed motor does not attain
•
the prescribed speed within the
•
specified time.
•

4-63

Feed motor disconnected, defective
Feed motor overloaded due to
obstruction
Feed motor lock

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

April 2007

SC781

B

Z-Fold lower stopper motor Japan Only
The lower stopper motor does
• Lower stopper motor disconnected,
not attain the prescribed speed
defective
within the specified time.
• Lower stopper motor overloaded due to
obstruction
• Lower stopper HP sensor disconnected,
defective

SC782

B

Z-Fold upper stopper motor Japan Only
The upper stopper motor does
• Upper stopper motor disconnected,
not attain the prescribed speed
defective
within the specified time.
• Upper stopper motor overloaded due to
obstruction
• Upper stopper HP sensor disconnected,
defective

SC790

B

Finisher staple waste hopper full
The staple waste hopper is full
of cut staples.

4-64

• If the hopper is full, empty the hopper
• If the hopper is not full, the hopper full
sensor is disconnected, defective

April, 2007

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC800: Overall System
SC817

SC818

SC819

C

C

C

Boot loader error
The boot loader cannot read one of the
following: self-diagnostic module, kernel, or one
of the files of the root file system, or the check
of one of these items on the system SD card
failed.

Watchdog error
While the system program is
running, a bus hold or interrupt
program goes into an endless loop,
preventing any other programs from
executing.
Fatal kernel error
Due to a control error, a RAM
overflow occurred during system
processing. One of the following
messages was displayed on the
operation panel.
0x696e
init died
vm_pageout: Virtual
0x766d
Memory is full
4361
Cache Error
Other

• File or module on the system
SD card is corrupted
• File or module on the system
SD card is illegal
• Make sure that the system
SD card is the one designed
for the machine
• Replace system ROM on the
controller board

• System program defective; switch
OFF/ON, or change the controller
firmware if the problem cannot be solved
• Controller board defective
• Controller option malfunction

•
•
•
•

System program defective
Controller board defective
Optional board defective
Replace controller firmware

NOTE: For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC
report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the
operation panel.

4-65

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
SC821

C

April 2007

Self-diagnostic error 2: ASIC
The ASIC provides the central point for the control of bus arbitration for CPU
access, for option bus and SDRAM access, for SDRAM refresh, and for
management of the internal bus gate.
Error code 0xffff ffff is
0B00
• ASIC (controller board defective)
returned when the register
Write & Verify check is
executed on the ASIC
mounted on the controller
board. The ASIC controls
the ROM and buses for
other devices.
0B06
ASIC not detected
• ASIC (controller board defective)
• Poor connection between North Bridge
and PCI I/F: Replace controller board
Failed to initialize or could
0B10
• Replace controller board
not read connection bus.
Data in SHM register
incorrect.

NOTE: For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC
report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the
operation panel.
SC822

C

Self-diagnostic error 3: HDD
Check performed when HDD
3003
is installed:
• HDD device busy for over
31 s.
• After a diagnostic
command is set for Sthe
HDD, but the device
remains busy for over 6 s.
A diagnostic command is
issued to the HDD device but
the result is an erro
No response to the self3004
diagnostic command from the
ASIC to the HDDs
Mandolin does not respond,
3013
the HDD device remains
BUSY for more than 31 s, or
the BUSY signal does not
drop within 6 s after the
diagnostic command is
issued to the HDDs.
Error returned from HDD in
3014
response to the selfdiagnostic command,
Mandolin could not be located
due to a read/write error at
the HDD register.

4-66

• HDD defective
• HDD harness disconnected, defective
• Controller board defective

• HDD defective
• HDD defective
• HDD connector loose or defective
• Controller defective

• HDD defective

April, 2007

SC824

C

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

Self-diagnostic error 4: NVRAM
NVRAM device does not exist,
NVRAM device is damaged, NVRAM
socket damaged

•
•
•
•

NVRAM defective
Controller board defective
NVRAM backup battery exhausted
NVRAM socket damaged

SC826

C

Self-diagnostic error 6: NVRAM (option NVRAM)
The difference between the 1 • NVRAM defective
1501
s measured for RTC in the
• NVRAM installed incorrectly
NVRAM and the 1 s timeout
• Replace RTC backup battery
of the CPU is out of range, or
the NVRAM is not detected.
15FE Backup battery error. Battery
• Replace RTC backup battery
is exhausted or not within
rated specification.

SC828

C

Self-diagnostic error 7: ROM
• Measuring the CRC for the boot
monitor and operating system
program results in an error.
• A check of the CRC value for
ROMFS of the entire ROM area
results in an error.

• Software defective
• Controller board defective
• ROM defective

NOTE: For more details about this SC 833, SC834 error, execute SP5990 to print an
SMC report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on
the operation panel. The additional error codes (0F30, 0F31, etc. are listed in the
SMC report.
SC833
0F30
0F31

D

0F41

50B1

50B2

SC834
5101

D

Self-diagnostic error 8: Engine I/F ASIC
ASIC (Mandolin) for system control
•
could not be detected. After the PCI
configuration, the device ID for the
ASIC could not be checked.
The read/write check done for
•
resident RAM on the mother board
could not be done correctly.
Could not initialize or read the bus
•
connection.
•
Value of the SSCG register is
•
incorrect.
•

Replace the mother board

Replace the mother board

Check for loose connections at the
mother board.
Replace the mother board
Check for loose connections at the
mother board.
Replace the mother board

Self-diagnostic error 9: Optional Memory RAM DIMM
The write/verify check for the
• Controller defective
optional RAM chip on the engine
• Mother board defective
mother board gave an error.

4-67

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC850

SC851

SC853

SC854

SC855

SC856

SC857

SC860

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

April 2007

Net I/F error
• Duplicate IP addresses.
• Illegal IP address.
• Driver unstable and cannot be
used on the network.
IEEE 1394 I/F error (Not use)
Driver setting incorrect and cannot
be used by the 1394 I/F.

Wireless LAN Error 1 (Not use)
During machine start-up, the
machine can get access to the
board that holds the wireless LAN,
but not to the wireless LAN card
(802.11b or Bluetooth).
Wireless LAN Error 2 (Not use)
During machine operation, the
machine can get access to the
board that holds the wireless LAN,
but not to the wireless LAN card
(802.11b or Bluetooth).
Wireless LAN error 3 (Not use)
An error was detected on the
wireless LAN card (802.11b or
Bluetooth).

• IP address setting incorrect
• Ethernet board defective
• Controller board defective

• NIB (PHY), LINK module defective;
change the Interface Board
• Controller board defective

• Wireless LAN card missing (was
removed)

• Wireless LAN card missing (was
removed)

• Wireless LAN card defective
• Wireless LAN card connection incorrect

Wireless LAN error 4 (Not use)
An error was detected on the
wireless LAN card (802.11b or
Bluetooth).

• Wireless LAN card defective
• PCI connector (to the mother board)
loose

USB I/F Error (Not use)
The USB driver is not stable and
caused an error.

• Bad USB card connection
• Replace the controller board

HDD startup error at main power ON
• HDD is connected but a driver
• HDD is not formatted
error is detected.
• Label name input during formatting is
corrupted; format the hard disk again
• The driver does not respond with
the status of the HDD within 30
• HDD is defective
s.

4-68

April, 2007

SC861

SC863

SC864

SC865

SC866

SC867

D

D

D

D

B

D

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

HDD re-try failure
At power ON with the HDD
detected, power supply to the HDD
is interrupted, after the HDD is
awakened from the sleep mode, the
HDD is not ready within 30 s.
HDD data read failure
The data written to the HDD cannot
be read normally, due to bad
sectors generated during operation.

HDD data CRC error
During HDD operation, the HDD
cannot respond to an CRC error
query. Data transfer did not execute
normally while data was being
written to the HDD.
HDD access error
HDD responded to an error during
operation for a condition other than
those for SC863, 864.
SD card error 1: Confirmation
The machine detects an electronic
license error in the application on
the SD card in the controller slot
immediately after the machine is
turned ON.
The program on the SD card
contains electronic confirmation
license data. If the program does
not contain this license data, or if
the result of the check shows that
the license data in the program on
the SD card is incorrect, then the
checked program cannot execute
and this SC code is displayed.
SD card error 2: SD card removed
The SD card in the boot slot when
the machine was turned on was
removed while the machine was
ON.

4-69

• Harness between HDD and board
disconnected, defective
• HDD power connector disconnected
• HDD defective
• Controller board defective

• HDD defective
Note: If the bad sectors are generated at
the image partition, the bad sector
information is written to NVRAM, and the
next time the HDD is accessed, these bad
sectors will not be accessed for read/write
operation.

• HDD defective

• HDD defective.

• Program missing from the SD card
• Download the correct program for the
machine to the SD card

• Insert the SD card, then turn the machine
OFF and ON.

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC868

SC870

SC873

SC874

SC875

SC880

D

B

B

D

D

D

April 2007

SD card error 3: SD card access
An error occurred while an SD card
was used.

• SD card not inserted correctly
• SD card defective
• Controller board defective
Note: If you want to try to reformat the SD
card, use SD Formatter Ver 1.1.

Address book data error
Address book data on the hard
• Software defective. Turn the machine
disk was detected as abnormal
OFF/ON. If this is not the solution for the
when it was accessed from either
problem, then replace the controller
the operation panel or the
firmware.
network. The address book data
• HDD defective.
cannot be read from the HDD or
SD card where it is stored, or the
data read from the media is
defective.
More Details
• Do SP5846 050 (UCS (User info control service) Settings – Initialize all
Directory Info.) to reset all address book data.
• Reset the user information with SP5832 006 (HDD Formatting– User
Information).
• Replace the HDDs.
• Boot the machine from the SD card.
HDD mail send data error
An error was detected on the HDD
immediately after the machine was
turned ON, or power was turned
OFF while the machine used the
HDD.
Delete All error 1: HDD
A data error was detected for the
HDD/NVRAM after the Delete All
option was used.
Note: The source of this error is the
Data Overwrite Security Unit (B735)
running from an SD card.
Delete All error 2: Data area
An error occurred while the
machine deleted data from the
HDD.
Note: The source of this error is the
Data Overwrite Security Unit B660
running from an SD card.
File Format Converter (MLB) error
A request to get access to the MLB
was not answered within the
specified time.

4-70

• Do SP5832-007 (Format HDD – Mail TX
Data) to initialize the HDD.
• Replace the HDD

• Turn the main switch OFF/ON and try the
operation again.
• Install the Data Overwrite Security Unit
again. For more, see section “1.
Installation”.
• HDD defective

• Turn the main switch OFF/ON and try the
operation again.

• MLB defective, replace the MLB

April, 2007

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC900: Miscellaneous
SC900

D

SC910
SC911
SC912
SC913

B

SC914

SC919

SC920

SC921

Electrical total counter error
The total counter contains
something that is not a number.

B

D

B

B

•
•
•
•

NVRAM incorrect type
NVRAM defective
NVRAM data scrambled
Unexpected error from external source

External controller (E-7000) error 1
External controller (E-7000) error 2
External controller (E-7000) error 3
External controller (E-7000) error 4
The external controller (E-7000) sends
an error message.

• Turn the machine power
OFF/ON

External controller (E-7000) error 5
The external controller (E-7000) sends
an error message.

Turn the machine power
OFF/ON

External controller (E-7000) down
The EAC received an interrupt signal
from the FLUTE serial driver during
print jobs in progress and the
connection between the copier and
external controller (E-7000) was
broken.
Note: The EAC is the External Api
Converter.

Printer error 1
An internal application error was
detected and operation cannot
continue.

Printer error 2
When the application started, the
necessary font was not on the SD
card.

4-71

• Switch the machine OFF and ON.

• Software defective; turn the machine
OFF/ON, or change the controller
firmware
• Insufficient memory

• Font not on the SC card

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC925

B

April 2007

Net File function error
The NetFile file management on the
HDD cannot be used, or a NetFile
management file is corrupted and
operation cannot continue. The
HDDs are defective and they
cannot be debugged or partitioned,
so the Scan Router functions
(delivery of received faxes,
document capture, etc.), Web
services, and other network
functions cannot be used.
HDD status codes are displayed
below:

• Refer to the four procedures below
(Recovery from SC 925).

Here is a list of HDD status codes:
Display
(-1)
(-2)
(-3)
(-4)
(-5)
(-6)
(-7)
(-8)
(-9)
(-10)
(-11)
(-12)
(-13)

Meaning
HDD not connected
HDD not ready
No label
Partition type incorrect
Error returned during label read or check
Error returned during label read or check
“filesystem” repair failed
“filesystem” mount failed
Drive does not answer command
Internal kernel error
Size of drive is too small
Specified partition does not exist
Device file does not exist

4-72

April, 2007

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

Recovery from SC 925
Procedure 1
If the machine shows SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 ~ SC865) with SC 925, do
the recovery procedures for SC860 ~ SC865.
Procedure 2
If the machine does not show one of the five HDD errors (SC860 ~ SC865), turn
the machine power OFF and ON. If this is not the solution for the problem, then
initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD with SP5832-011 (HDD Formatting).
NetFiles: Jobs printed from the document server using a PC and DeskTopBinder
• Before you initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD, tell the customer that:
• Received faxes on the delivery server will be erased
• All captured documents will be erased
• DeskTopBinder job history will be erased
• Documents on the document server, and scanned documents, will not be
erased.
• The first time that the network gets access to the machine, the management
information must be configured again (this will use a lot of time).
Before you initialize the Netfile partition with SP5832-011, do these steps:
1. Go into the User Tools mode and do “Delivery Settings” to print all received fax
documents that are scheduled for delivery. Then erase them.
2. In the User Tools mode, do Document Management> Batch Delete Transfer
Documents.
3. Do SP5832-011, then turn the machine power OFF and ON.
Procedure 3
If “Procedure 2” is not the solution for the problem, do SP5832-001 (HDD
Formatting – All), then turn the machine power OFF and ON.
SP5832-001 erases all document and address book data on the hard disks. Ask
the customer before you do this SP code.
Procedure 4
If “Procedure 3” is not the solution for the problem, replace the HDD.

4-73

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC990

SC991

D

C

April 2007

Software error 2
The software performs an
unexpected function and the
program cannot continue.

*1

• Software defective, re-boot

Software error 3
The software performs an
unexpected function and the
program cannot continue. However,
unlike SC990, recovery processing
allows the program to continue.

*1

• Software defective, re-boot

*1

: In order to get more details about SC990 and SC991:
1) Execute SP7403 or print an SMC Report (SP5990) to read the history of the 10 most recent
logged errors.
2) If you press the zero key on the operation panel with the SP selection menu displayed, you
will see detailed information about the recently logged SC990 or SC991, including the
software file name, line number, and so on. 1) is the recommended method, because
another SC could write over the information for the previous SC.
SC992

SC997

SC998

C

B

D

Software error 4: Undefined
An error not controlled by the
system occurred (the error does not
come under any other SC code).

Cannot select application function
An application does not start after
the user pushed the correct key on
the operation panel.

Application cannot start
Register processing does not
operate for an application within 60
s after the machine power is turned
ON. No applications not start
correctly, and all end abnormally.

4-74

• Software defective
• Turn the machine power OFF and ON.
The machine cannot be used until this
error is cleared.

• Software bug
• A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the
application is not installed or not installed
correctly.

• Software bug
• A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the
application is not installed or not installed
correctly.

April, 2007

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4.3.4 ADDITIONAL SC CODES PRINTED IN SMC REPORTS
These codes are also used in the SMC report.
Codes that have the same number in this series are identified by an additional 4digit hexadecimal number.
SC No.
853 D

Symptom
IEEE802 11b card startup error
Not used.

854 D

IEEE802 11b card access error
Not used.
IEEE802 11b card error
Not used.
IEEE802 11b card connection board error
Not used.
Address book data error
The address book in the hard disk is
• Data corruption
accessed. → An error is detected in
• Defective hard disk
the address book data; address book • Defective software
data is not read; or data is not written
into the address book.

855 D
856 D
870 B

Possible Cause

NOTE: To recover from the error, do any of the following countermeasures:
Format the address book by using SP5-832-008 (all data in the address book–
including the user codes and counters–is initialized)
Initialize the user data by using SP5-832-006 and -007 (the user codes and
counters are recovered when the main switch is turned ON).
Replace the hard disk (the user codes and counters are recovered when the main
switch is turned ON).
920

925

992

993

D

D

C

D

Printer error
The printer program cannot be
continued.

• Defective hardware
• Data corruption
• Defective software

Net file error
The management file for net files is
corrupted; net files are not normally
read.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the
document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software
Other system SCs
The controller received an unknown
SC code from the engine.
Network error
The ASIC program of GW controller
cannot be continued.

4-75

• Defective hardware
• Data corruption
• Defective software

• Contact your product specialist.
• Defective GW controller

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

4.4 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS
4.4.1 TRAY PAPER SIZE SETTING
SYMPTOM:
The size of the paper in the tray does not match the paper size that is displayed on
the LCD. Sometimes, this causes a jam to occur.

CAUSE:
The operator did not set the side fence or end fence correctly.
Note: This can cause the machine to detect the wrong paper size when “Auto
Paper Size Detection” is ON.

ACTION:
Advise users to:
• Make sure to set the end fence [A] and side fences [B] correctly.
• Make sure to lock the side fence lock [C].

[A]

[C]

Side fence lock is unlocked.

[B]

Side fence lock is locked.

4-76

April, 2007

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

4.4.2 PAPER MISFEED (J098/J099)
SYMPTOM:
“Paper Misfeed (J098)" or "Paper Misfeed (J099)" is displayed on the operation
panel.

[A]
CAUSE:
• J098:
• The Paper Type Detect setting is ON, and
• The paper type or thickness setting does not match that of the first sheet
• J099:
• The Double Feed Detect setting is ON, and
• The paper type or thickness setting does not match that of the second or
later sheets

4-77

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

ACTION:
Advise end users to do the following.
1. If J098 or J099 occur, press the "Next" button [A] on the operation panel. Then,
follow the instructions that are displayed.

2. Do one of the following:
•

Make sure the type and thickness of the paper match the type and
thickness settings in the machine.

OR,
•

Turn OFF the Paper Type Detect and Double Feed Detect settings (see
next page).
Important: After you turn this setting OFF, if the type or thickness of the paper
does not match the settings in the machine, poor fusing can occur. No error
message will be displayed.

4-78

April, 2007

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

How to Change the “Paper Thickness” and “Paper Type” Settings:
1. Access: User Tools Æ System Settings Æ Tray Paper Settings (screen 2/4).
2. Press [B] to change the paper type and press [C] to change the paper thickness.

[C]

[B]

How to Change the "Paper Type Detect" or "Double Feed Detect" Setting:
1. Access: User Tools Æ System Settings Æ Tray Paper Settings (screen 4/4).
2. Press [D] to change the "Paper Type Detect" setting (ON/OFF).
3. Press [E] to change the "Double Feed Detect" setting (ON/OFF).

[D]

[E]

4-79

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

4.4.3 PAPER FEED SKEW
SYMPTOM:
Paper feed skew sometimes occurs (Printer and Copier).

CAUSE:
The registration roller bushing on rear side is damaged by some reason. One of the
reasons of damaging the bushing is that the tip of the rear registration pressure
spring is facing the wrong way. As a result, the spring touches the bushing when
the registration roller rotates, and damages the bushing.
NOTE: For the location of this bushing, see callout #25 on pg. 100 of the Parts
Catalog (“43. Transfer Entrance 2")

SOLUTION:
• Check the rear bushing of the registration roller.
• If the bushing is damaged, replace it with a new one.
• Check the position of the rear registration pressure spring (see procedure
below).
• If the spring is in the “NG position”, change the spring to the “OK” position.
NOTE: For the location of this spring, see callout #22 on pg. 100 of the Parts
Catalog.

HOW TO CHECK THE POSITION OF THE REAR REGISTRATION
PRESSURE SPRING:
1. Press down the hinge spring [B] and remove the front cover [A].

[A]

[B]

4-80

April, 2007

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

2. Pull out the lower drawer unit [C].
3. Remove the 3 clamps [D].

[C]

[D]

4. Remove 2 clamps [E] and disconnect the connector [F].

[F]

[E]

4-81

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

5. Remove the bracket [G] (1 screw).
[G]

6. Remove the harness cover [H] (1 screw).
[H]

4-82

April, 2007

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

7. Check the position of rear registration pressure spring [I]. If the spring is in the
NG position, change the spring to the OK position.

[J]
[I]

NG position
The area where the
spring loops meet [J] is
facing up

[J]
[I]

OK position
The area where the
spring loops meet [J] is
facing down

4-83

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

4.4.4 WHITE LINE IN SUB-SCAN DIRECTION ON SINGLE COLOR
SOLID IMAGE.
SYMPTOM:
A white line [A] appears along the paper feed direction in solid image areas that
use one toner color (C, M, Y or K).

[A]
Paper Feed Direction

CAUSE:
Dust or other foreign particles get into the development unit, and then get stuck
between the doctor blade and development sleeve.

ACTION:
• When the symptom occurs:
1. Remove the developer from the development unit(s) that shows the symptom.
2. Remove the extra toner and developer from the development unit(s) with a
vacuum cleaner.
3. Install the new developer.
• When you install the developer cartridge or replace the developer:
Make sure to put the developer cartridge on a clean surface.

4-84

April, 2007

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

4.4.5 DIRTY BLACK LINE IN CUB-SCAN DIRECTION OR DIRTY
BACKGROUND
SYMPTOM:
1. A dirty black line [A] shows in the sub-scan direction in single color (C, M, Y or
K).

[A]
Paper Feed Direction
<>

2. Dirty back ground in halftone image.

CAUSE:
Drum charge roller becomes dirty. This can be a common occurrence especially in
high copy volume machines, or, machines used under low temperature/low
humidity conditions (temperature 10 °C or 50 F/ humidity 15%).

ACTION:
Remove the drum charge roller from the PCU, and clean it according to the
procedure explained below.
1. Remove the PCU, whose color has the symptom. (See “APPENDIX” of this
section for details on how to print out the K, M, C or Y halftone test pattern).
NOTE: Make sure you put the removed PCU on the PCU stand when you do these
procedures. Also, make sure to place a sheet of paper on the PCU to not
let the OPC drum gets exposed to light.

4-85

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

2. Remove the charge roller unit [A] (2 screws). This unit contains the charge
roller and the charge roller cleaning roller.
[A]

3. Remove the drum charge roller with gear and bushing.
4. Remove the drum charge roller gear [B] and the bushing [C] at the same time
(See below figure).
Do not touch the black part of the drum
charge roller.
[B]

[C]
NOTE: Do not remove the bushing on the non-gear side.

4-86

April, 2007

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

5. Clean the drum charge roller.
1) Wipe the drum charge roller with a clean dry cloth.
2) Then, wipe the drum charge roller with a wet cloth.
NOTE: Use "water" to make the cloth wet. Do not use alcohol or any solvent.
3) Then, wipe the drum charge roller with a clean dry cloth again. Wait for the
drum charge roller to dry.
Water drop such as this
should not remain.

NG

6. Clean the charge roller cleaning roller [D] with vacuum cleaner if it is also dirty.
NOTE: Make sure you do not to touch the charge roller cleaning roller with the
vacuum cleaner nozzle [E].

NG

[E]

[D]

If the vacuum nozzle touches the
cleaning roller, this kind of damage
will occur.

4-87

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

7. Reinstall the drum charge roller onto the charge roller unit (1-bushing, 1-gear).
NOTE: Make sure bushing is inserted correctly inside the molding guide [F].
Also make sure the charging terminal [G] touches the charge roller end
correctly.
[F]




[G]

Bushing is not inserted correctly
inside the molding guide.

8. Reinstall the charge roller unit onto the PCU (2 screws).

4-88

April, 2007

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

APPENDIX:
How to print out the Black, Magenta, Cyan, or Yellow halftone test pattern to
confirm the symptom.

1. Enter SP 2109 2 (Test Pattern: Select Pattern).
2. Select "8: 2-Dot Independent" pattern, then press the "OK" button.
3. Under this condition, enter following SP according to the color you want to print
out.
SP 2109 5 (Density: K) default value = 63, variable range 0 to 63
SP 2109 6 (Density: M) default value = 63, variable range 0 to 63
SP 2109 7 (Density: C) default value = 63, variable range 0 to 63
SP 2109 8 (Density: Y) default value = 63, variable range 0 to 63
For example, if you want to print out Magenta half tone, change the settings as
shown below.
SP 2109 5 (Density: K) to 0
SP 2109 7 (Density: C) to 0
SP 2109 8 (Density: Y) to 0

4. Press "Copy Window" button.
5. Select the Full Color mode. (In ACS mode, you cannot print out the halftone
color image).
6. Select A3/DLT paper.
7. Press the "Start" button on the operation panel.

4-89

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

4.4.6 EXPANDED SOFT TONER CARTRIDGE
SYMPTOM:
The Soft Toner Cartridge (STC) expands and cannot be installed in the copier bins.

CAUSE:
When the STC is brought to an elevation of 1000m (3,280ft.) or higher, the
difference in air pressure makes the STC expand.

ACTION:
1. Wait 24 hours for the STC to return to its normal size naturally.
2. If the customer cannot wait 24 hours, advise them to use the STC Air Release
Kit (service parts: P/N B1329710).
NOTE: This is a customer-usable part. The instructions are inside the kit.

4-90

06/10

April, 2007

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

4.4.7 SYSTEM STOP CONTROL DUE TO THE TEMPERATURE
LIMITATION
OVERVIEW:
1. The “System Stop Control” feature stops the machine during a copy or print job,
and “Self-checking…” is displayed on the LCD.
Conditions:
• Engine firmware v1.15.0 (B1325402L) or newer
• The temperature/humidity sensor output is 41°C (105.8F) or higher.
Other notes:
• This feature keeps the temperature of the toner in the development unit
below 50°C (122F). If this toner is at 50C or higher, the toner starts to
clump. This can cause white lines in solid image areas, or a machine
failure from toner clumps in the toner supply tube and waste toner
transport coil.
• The temperature/humidity sensor is on the K-PCU.
2. The following factors make it easy for the temperature/humidity sensor output
to reach 41°C (105.8F) or higher:
• "The temperature of the installation environment is 30°C (86F) or higher"
AND "The machine prints for 2 hours non-stop in full-color mode".
3. If the user makes 100% black and white copies/prints ONLY, this feature can
be turned OFF in SP9405-001.

ACTION:
1. Please explain the following points to end users:
• The basic meaning of the System Stop Control feature.
• The machine will start up again after it cools down and the
temperature/humidity sensor output is 40°C (104F) or lower. This will take
about one hour.
• After the machine finishes a non-stop, full-color print job, do not turns off
the machine main power switch. Wait until the cooling fan turns off.
Note: If the user turns off the main power just after the job, the
temperature/humidity sensor output increases quickly. The next time the
main switch is turned on, System Stop Control will stop the machine.
2. If the user only makes 100% black and white copies/prints, this feature can be
turned OFF in SP9405-001.

4-91

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

4.4.8 LOW POWER MODE TEMPERATURE
SYMPTOM:
Fusing hot roller yield may decrease, or, the fusing hot roller could get damaged in
the worst case.

CAUSE:
Hot roller has been exposed to excessive heat by the fusing lamp inside the Hot
Roller.

ACTION:
• Never increase the Low Power Mode temperature setting (SP 1202 11) for the
fusing lamp inside the Hot Roller higher than default setting.
SP number
SP 1202 11

Description
Hot Roller
Energy Saver2
(Hot roller temperature
in Low Power Mode)

Value
Default: -50
Adjustable range: 0 to
-200

Function
The value set by this SP
determines the additional
value applied to the Hot
roller temperature in
Stand-by mode.

Default value (-50) means that the hot roller temperature in Low Power Mode is
"Hot Roller temperature in Stand-by mode minus 50 degrees". This setting is
correct.
Example: If you set -30, the hot roller temperature in Low Power Mode will be
"Hot Roller temperature in Stand-by mode minus 30 degrees". This setting is
not good for Hot Roller yield.
Example: If you set -80, the hot roller temperature in Low Power Mode will be
"Hot Roller temperature in Stand-by mode minus 80 degrees". This setting is
correct.
• Please instruct the end user that if the "Energy Saver Timer" is set longer than
its default (15minutes by User Tool) the fusing hot roller yield may decrease
according to the machine condition.
NOTE: End user can change the "Energy Saver Timer" with the following
procedure.
User Tools 
 System Settings 
 Timer Settings 
 Energy Saver Timer

4-92

April, 2007
Machine Status

Warming Up
Operation
Stand-by Mode

Panel-off Mode
Low Power Mode
Auto Off Mode

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS
Transition time setting in UP:
User Tools  System Settings
 Timer Settings
9 min (Fixed)
-

Hot Roller
Heater
ON/OFF
ON
OFF
ON

Panel-off Timer
Default: 60 sec. (10 to 999 sec)
Energy Saver Timer
Default: 15 min (1 to 240 min)
Auto Off time
Default: 90min (1 to 240 min)

ON

SP number for Hot
Roller Temperature

ON

SP 1105 2
MM: SP 1105 36
LL: SP 1105 37
HH: SP 1105 38
(Same with Stand-by
Mode)
SP 1202 11

OFF

-

Refer the diagram in the service manual "6.17.4 ENERGY SAVER MODE".

4-93

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

4.4.9 POOR FUSING ON 100g/m2 PAPER
SYMPTOM:
Part of the image peels off the paper.
Note: This symptom is most noticeable under these conditions:
z When solid images are printed onto 100 g/m2 (28lb. bond) paper in full
color mode
z

When using a PostScript3 unit type3260 (B761) or using EFI printer
controller (G815: E-7000)

CAUSE:
Not enough heat is supplied to the surface of the fusing roller.

SOLUTION:
Add the "Middle Thickness Paper Mode" by the following action.

ACTION:
Confirm the following Firmware version, and then follow the procedure described
from the next page.
Engine:

Ver.1.20.2_08 (B1325402Q) or newer

System/Copy: Ver.1.23 (B1325750M) or newer

IMPORTANT:
• Update both the Engine and System/Copy firmware at the same time.
• Never change the setting for Sp1105-036 (Hot Roller Wait Temp: Norm,
default = 145 deg). If you increase the value above 145°C, the hot roller
surface can be damaged (Refer: chapter 4.4.8).
• After you finish the procedure below, turn the machine main power
OFF/ON.

4-94

April, 2007

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

Final Solution: Middle Thickness Paper Mode
1. Power Supply Voltage Check when using before applying the final solution.
Check the Power Supply Voltage during the continuous printing. If the power
supply voltage is lower than 220V, change the heating roller lamp2 duty for FC
printing.
SP1108-008 (Htg Roll Lamp2 Norm: FC)
Change to 100 (default: 83)
SP1108-009 (Htg Roll Lamp2 Scan: FC)
Change to 83 (default: 66)

2. Toner Maximum Limitation
If the customer agrees to the toner maximum limitation change, reduce the
value as follows:
• For machines that use a PostScript3 unit type3260 (B761) printer driver:
Set SP1106-001 to a value of 200.
Printer SP
Number
1106-001

Description
Toner Limit:
Photo

Default
Settings
260

Final
Solution
200

NOTE
Toner maximum limitation
for Photo mode.

• For the EFI printer controller (G815: E-7000):
1) Open the "E-7000 PS Document Properties" dialog.
2) Click on the “Fiery Printing" tab, and then select the "Image Quality" option.
3) Change the "Toner Reduction" setting to ON.

4-95

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

3. Activate "Middle Thickness Paper Mode"
To activate the "Middle Thickness Paper Mode", change the following SP
settings as a set.
1) SP1107-006 (Mode Shift / Feed Norm Temp):
Change to 1 (default: 0)
NOTE: This is to turn ON the "Middle Thickness Paper Mode".
2) SP2307-006 (Set Ptype Link Special Paper):
Change to "0: Normal Paper", then press "OK" button. (Default: "3 Special
Paper 1").
NOTE: This is to change the paper transfer conditions to those for Normal
Paper.
3) SP1200-006 (1st CPM Down / CPM Norm / Hi: FC):
Change to 40 (default: 30)
NOTE: This is to change the paper feed interval condition for High & Normal
Temperature in FC mode.
4) SP1200-008 (1st CPM Down /CPM Low Temp: FC)
Change to 35 (default: 25)
NOTE: This is to change the paper feed interval condition for Low Temperature
in FC mode.
4. Select the "Special Paper" for the tray to which you need to apply "Middle
Thickness Paper Mode."
User Tools Æ System Settings Æ Tray Paper Settings Æ Paper Type: Tray XX (XX: tray
number): Special Paper (default: No display)

NOTE:
• This setting is kept even when the main power switch is turned OFF/ON
("Special" is displayed for the trays which have been set to this mode).
• It can be selected for each paper tray independently.
5. Select the Paper Thickness Setting to "Normal Paper" for the tray, on which you
need to apply "Middle Thickness Paper Mode."
User Tools Æ System Settings Æ Tray Paper Settings Æ Paper Thickness Setting
2

Then, select "Normal (72-126g/m )” for the tray.

4-96

April, 2007

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

6. Change the Fusing Temperature settings according to the type of "Middle
Thickness Paper Mode", which is most appropriate for the poor fusing symptom.
1) "Middle Thickness Paper Mode -1" (Default)
NOTE: This setting is effective both for poor fusing and the sponge image /
stripper streaks. You do NOT have to change any SP settings (Default
settings are OK).
• SP1105-013 (Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr / 1-S: Thk3: FC: NS: CPM)
Default: 180.
• SP1105-021 (Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr / 2-S: Thk3: FC: NS: CPM
Default: 180.
2) "Middle Thickness Paper Mode -2"
NOTE: This setting should be selected if the effectiveness of "Middle
Thickness Paper Mode-1" is not enough for the poor fusing. However,
with this setting, it is easier for stripper streaks to occur.
Change the following SP setting as a set.
• SP1105-013 (Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr / 1-S: Thk3: FC: NS: CPM)
Change to 185 (default: 180)
• SP1105-021 (Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr / 2-S: Thk3: FC: NS: CPM
Change to 185 (default: 180)
3) "Middle Thickness Paper Mode -3"
NOTE: This setting should be selected if the effectiveness of "Middle
Thickness Paper Mode-2" is still not enough for the poor fusing.
However, with this setting, it is easier for stripper streaks to occur.
Change the following SP setting as a set.
• SP1105-013 (Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr / 1-S: Thk3: FC: NS: CPM)
Change to 190 (default: 180)
• SP1105-021 (Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr / 2-S: Thk3: FC: NS: CPM)
Change to 190 (default: 180)
• SP1107-001 (Mode Shift Low Temp SW)
Change to 0 (default: 5)

4-97

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

NOTE: Please refer to the below table to select most appropriate type of Middle
Thickness Paper Mode.
Type

"Middle Thickness Paper
Mode -1" (Default)
"Middle Thickness Paper
Mode -2"
"Middle Thickness Paper
Mode -3"

Effectiveness level for poor
fusing.
Less than previous temporary
solution B or B+
Same as previous temporary
solution B or B+
Better than previous temporary
solution B or B+

Stripper Streaks level.
Better than previous
temporary solution B or B+
Same as previous temporary
solution B or B+
Less than previous temporary
solution B or B+

Side effects of various combinations of solutions
Side Effects

Previous Temporary Solution

Final Solution in this RTB

Solution A

Solution B

Solution B+

X

X

X

See above table

(None)

(None)

X

3. Paper curl with Normal
paper

X

X

X

4. System stop control
condition

X

X

X

X
X
(Only for the tray for
which Middle Thickness
Paper Mode is selected)
X
(Only for the tray for
which Middle Thickness
Paper Mode is selected)

5. 1st Print Time will be
longer

(None)

(None)

(None)

X
See NOTE 1

6. Paper Feeding Interval
Adjustment

(None)

(None)

(None)

X
See NOTE 2

1. Stripper streaks
2. Color reproduction

”X”: Indicates a side effect
NOTE1: 1st Print Time in Final solution: 7sec to 14.5 sec (maximum)
NOTE2: During this adjustment, the printing speed will reduce during the first 3-5 A3/DLT sheets.
1st 5 pages: 43.75cpm, after that 45cpm (in e-STUDIO4500c)
1st 5 pages: 51.25cpm, after that 55cpm (in e-STUDIO5500c)

4-98

April, 2007

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

APPENDIX:
Default settings of SP modes related to previous Temporary Solutions A, B and B+
SP
Number
1105-003
1105-006
1105-007
1105-008
1105-009
1105-014
1105-015
1105-016
1105-017
1105-029
1107-007
1107-008
1107-015

1108-008
1108-009
1108-017
9406-001

Description
Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr
Wait Temp: Norm
Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr
1-S: Norm: 1 Col
Htg Roll Sn1:Ctr
1-S:Norm:FC
Htg Roll Sn1:Ctr
1-S: Trace:1C
Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr
1-S: Trace: FC
Htg: Roll Sn1: Ctr
2-S: Norm: 1C
Htg: Roll Sn1: Ctr
2-S: Norm: FC
Htg: Roll Sn1: Ctr
2-S: Trace: 1C
Htg: Roll Sn1:Ctr
2-S: Trace: FC
PressRoll Sensor
Wait Temp: Norm
Mode Shift
Press Temp: Norm
Mode Shift
Press Time: Norm
To Cooling Mode
Trace Cool End
Htg Roll Lamp2
Norm: FC
Htg Roll Lamp2
Scan: Norm: FC
Htg Roll Lamp2
At Reload
Fan Op Temp

Default
Settings
177 deg
175 deg
175 deg
160 deg
160 deg
175 deg
175 deg
160 deg
160 deg
152 deg
5 deg
10 sec
5

83
66
27
0

NOTE
Heating Roller Temperature in Standby
mode.
Heating Roller Temperature for normal
paper simplex 1C.
Heating Roller Temperature for normal
paper simplex FC.
Heating Roller Temperature for thin paper
simplex 1C
Heating Roller Temperature for thin paper
simplex FC
Heating Roller Temperature for normal
paper duplex 1C
Heating Roller Temperature for normal
paper duplex FC
Heating Roller Temperature for thin paper
duplex 1C.
Heating Roller Temperature for thin paper
duplex FC.
Pressure Roller Temperature for Stand-by
mode.
Additional Temperature for heating roller at
the start of print job.
Additional Temperature applying time for
heating roller at the start of print job.
Copy/Print job starts when the heating
roller temperature reaches the setting
temperature plus this value.
Heating Roller Lamp2 duty for FC printing
Heating Roller Lamp2 duty for FC scanning
and printing.
Heating Roller Lamp2 duty during machine
warming up.
Cooling fan full rotation
0: default (32C)
1: 30C
2: 28C

4-99

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

4.4.10 ABNORMAL SHIFT TRAY MOVEMENT OF SR842 (B706)
WITH EFI PRINTER CONTROLLER (E-7000)
SYMPTOM:
The shift tray for the 3000-sheet finisher SR842 (B706) finisher does not move
correctly when all of the following conditions are met:
• The EFI printer controller E-7000 (G815) is used, and
• “Collate” is ON in the E-7000 printer driver, and
• Multiple sets are printed out, and one set = one sheet of paper

CAUSE:
Under the above conditions, the EFI printer controller E-7000 (G815) sends the
“shift” command to the shift tray for every sheet, and the shift tray is not able to
respond quickly enough.

SOLUTION:
Advise the user to turn the “Collate” setting OFF in the E-7000 printer driver if one
set = one sheet of paper. This is because the Collate function is not necessary
when one set = one sheet.

4-100

April, 2007

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

4.4.11 POOR FUSING ON 100g/m2 PAPER
SYMPTOM:
Streaks are visible on the glossy image printed with full coverage. Visible level of
streaks differs according to the lighting angle. The streaks can be classified
following 3 types.
1. Type A:
Streaks, whose width is equal to the fusing separation pawls (6 mm), in the
paper feeding direction corresponding to the fusing separation pawls position.
This symptom occurs especially on the solid image on the Thick paper.
2. Type B:
Very sharp lines (the width is less than 0.5 mm) in the paper feeding direction
corresponding in position to the fusing separation pawls. This is also visible
especially on the Thick paper.
3. Type C:
The streaks (the width is 1 through 2 mm) are in the same position as the edge
of the previous paper size used. Type C occurs when you make 500–1000 prints
with the same size/direction, and then change to a wider paper size.
Example: Make 1000 prints with A4 SEF, and then change to A4 LEF.

4-101

06/10

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

CAUSE and SOLUTION:
Use the table below to check if the reported symptom is Type A, Type B or Type C.
• The causes and solutions are different for Type A, Type B and Type C.
• After reading this table, if you do not know which type the reported
symptom is, contact your sales company for support.

Symptom
Type
Type A

Cause

Solution

Due to the small grooves on the
fusing belt created by the
separation pawls, which touch
during the rotation of fusing belt,
the glossiness of the fused solid
image differs at the position of
separation pawls.

"Fusing Anti-glossy Streak Kit
(P/No. B1329713)" is effective.
However, it takes a certain
amount of time to effect for
Type A. It depends on the type
of paper, the condition of fusing
belt when this kit is applied.
See next page.

Type B

The fusing belt is scratched by
Do both of the following:
some foreign objects, which are
1. Clean all of the separation
stuck between the separation
pawls to remove the foreign
pawls and paper. Very sharp scar
objects.
line(s) are made on the fusing
belt. This scar line made a visible 2. Replace the damaged
fusing belt with new one.
line on the fused solid image.

Type C

The paper dust from the edge of
small sized paper is stuck on the
fusing belt. The stuck paper dust
comes to be the bands on fusing
belt, which leads to the streaks
on the fused solid image.

4-102

06/10

"Fusing Anti-glossy Streak Kit
(P/No. B1329713)" is effective.
See next page.

April, 2007

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

Fusing Anti-glossy Streak Kit (P/N B1329713):
Detailed part information:
The kit consists of the following parts (see illustration “Parts Locations” on next
page):
Gear Hot Roller: 44Z

[A]

Gear Upper 52Z

[B]

Gear 49Z

[C]

Pressure Roller D50

[D]

Important Notes:
1. This kit is only effective for Type A and Type C explained above.
2. After you install this kit for Type A, it may take some time before the image
quality improves. If the customer does not wish to wait, replace the fusing belt.
3. After you install this kit, the line speed of the fusing belt is 6% faster than the
line speed of the pressure roller. (Default: Same speed). As a result, the yield of
the fusing belt changes from 600K to 300K.
4. After you install the kit, make a visible mark on the outside of the fusing unit.
Example: Write, “Fusing anti-glossy streaks kit installed” on the outside of the
fusing unit.
This is because the parts in this kit are not available as individual service parts.
They are different from the service parts listed in MB132001.
5. In the future, if any of the four parts above needs to be replaced, and there is a
mark on the fusing unit like the example above, make sure to install the whole
Fusing Anti-glossy streak kit. In such a case, do not use the parts in MB132001.

4-103

06/10

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

Parts Location ([A] and [B])
[A]

1

30

102
13

2

27

[B]

14

15

101

103

1

103
27

23

3

6

7

10

22

12

101

11
24
8

9

10

23

103

19
21

5

20

29

18

102

4

16
28

103

31

103

22
101

17

12

26

103
24
11

25
26

101

Parts Location ([C] and [D])
[D]
[C]

13

14

107

103

103

9

103
6

103

19 103

108
105
20
21

103
106

10

103
103

25

30

28

103
27

32

103
6 103

20
26

103
103
105

31
24 11
105

11

104
23

26

33

105

24

17
18

103

22

18

16

29
23

22

101

106

4-104

06/10

103

April, 2007

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

4.4.12 COPIER FIRMWARE UPDATE NOTICE WHEN COLOR
CONTROLLER E-7000 IS INSTALLED
Important Note for Firmware Update on e-STUDIO4500c/5500c Machines
Connected to an E-7000 Color Controller
Before you update the Copier Engine firmware with an SD card, make sure to turn
off the power switch on the Color Controller E-7000 (see Procedure below).

REASON:
If the power switch on the Color Controller E-7000 is on, the firmware update will
not start. This is because the e-STUDIO4500c/5500c cannot perform the update
while it receives the boot-up status information from the E-7000.

PROCEDURE:
Do the following when you update the Copier Engine firmware on eSTUDIO4500c/5500c machines connected to a Color Controller E-7000:

1. Press the operation switch until the “On” indicator turns off.

On Indicator

Operation Switch

Important:
Before you do Step 2, make sure that the green light of the “On” indicator turns off.
If you do Step 2 when the indicator is still on, this can damage the HDD memory
and cause a malfunction.

4-105

07/04

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

2. Turn off the e-STUDIO4500c/5500c main power switch.
NOTE: The Color Controller E-7000 will shut down automatically.

Main Power Switch

3. Wait for the E-7000 diagnostic LEDs to turn off.

Diagnostic LEDs
Switch

4. Turn off the main power switch of the Color Controller E-7000.

Main Power Switch

5. Put the firmware SD card into Slot 3 and turn on the e-STUDIO4500c/5500c
main power switch.
6. After the firmware update is finished, turn off the e-STUDIO4500c/5500c main
power switch and remove the SD card.
7. Turn on the e-STUDIO4500c/5500c main power switch.
8. Turn on the main power switch of the Color Controller E-7000.

4-106

07/04

April, 2007

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

4.4.13 POOR FUSING ON 100g/m2 PAPER

SYMPTOM:
Part of the image peels off the paper.
NOTE: This symptom is most noticeable under these conditions:
• When solid images are printed onto 100g/m2 (28lb.) paper in full color mode
• When using a Ricoh PostScript3 printer driver or using Fiery controller

CAUSE:
Not enough heat is supplied to the surface of the fusing roller.

SOLUTION:
Add the "Middle Thickness Paper Mode" by the following action.
Important:
• Never change the setting for Sp1105-036 (Hot Roller Wait Temp: Norm, default
= 145 deg).
• After you finish the procedure below, turn the machine main power OFF/ON.

Solution: Middle Thickness Paper Mode
1. Power Supply Voltage Check when using before applying the final solution.
Check the Power Supply Voltage during the continuous printing.
SP1108-008 (Htg Roll Lamp2 Norm: FC)
Change to 100 (default: 83)
SP1108-009 (Htg Roll Lamp2 Scan: FC)
Change to 83 (default: 66)

4-107

07/04

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

2. Toner Maximum Limitation
If the customer agrees to the toner maximum limitation change, reduce the value
as follows:
• For machines that use a Ricoh PS driver:
Set SP1106-001 to a value of 200.
Printer SP
Number
1106-001

Description
Toner Limit:
Photo

Default
Settings
260

Final Solution
200

NOTE
Toner maximum limitation
for Photo mode.

• For the Fiery E-7000 controller:
1. Open the "E-7000 PS Document Properties" dialog.
2. Click on the “Fiery Printing" tab, then select the "Image Quality" option.
3. Change the "Toner Reduction" setting to ON.

4-108

07/04

April, 2007

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

3. Activate "Middle Thickness Paper Mode"
To activate the "Middle Thickness Paper Mode", change the following SP settings
as a set.
1) SP1107-006 (Mode Shift / Feed Norm Temp):
Change to 1 (default: 0)
NOTE: This is to turn ON the "Middle Thickness Paper Mode".
2) SP2307-006 (Set Ptype Link Special Paper):
Change to "0: Normal Paper", then press "OK" button.
(default: "3 Special Paper 1").
NOTE: This is to change the paper transfer conditions to those for Normal
Paper.
3) SP1200-006 (1st CPM Down / CPM Norm / Hi: FC):
Change to 40 (default: 30)
NOTE: This is to change the paper feed interval condition for High & Normal
Temperature in FC mode.
4) SP1200-008 (1st CPM Down /CPM Low Temp: FC):
Change to 35 (default: 25)
NOTE: This is to change the paper feed interval condition for Low Temperature
in FC mode.
4. Select the "Special Paper" for the tray to which you need to apply "Middle
Thickness Paper Mode."
User Tools Æ System Settings Æ Tray Paper Settings Æ Paper Type: Tray XX
(XX: tray number): Special Paper (default: No display)
NOTE:
• This setting is kept even when the main power switch is turned OFF/ON
("Special" is displayed for the trays which have been set to this mode).
• It can be selected for each paper tray independently.

4-109

07/04

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

5. Select the Paper Thickness Setting to "Normal Paper" for the tray, on which you
need to apply "Middle Thickness Paper Mode."
User Tools Æ System Settings Æ Tray Paper Settings Æ Paper Thickness Setting
Then, select "Normal (72-126g/m2)” for the tray.

6. Change the Fusing Temperature settings according to the type of "Middle
Thickness Paper Mode", which is most appropriate for the poor fusing symptom.
1) "Middle Thickness Paper Mode -1" (Default)
NOTE: This setting is effective both for poor fusing and the sponge
image/separation pawl streaks. You do NOT have to change any SP
settings (Default settings are OK).
a) SP1105-013 (Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr / 1-S: Thk3: FC: NS: CPM)
Default:180.
b) SP1105-021 (Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr / 2-S: Thk3: FC: NS: CPM
Default: 180.
2) "Middle Thickness Paper Mode -2"
NOTE: NOTE: This setting should be selected if the effectiveness of "Middle
Thickness Paper Mode-1" is not enough for the poor fusing. However,
with this setting, it is easier for separation pawl streaks to occur.
Change the following SP setting as a set.
a) SP1105-013 (Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr / 1-S: Thk3: FC: NS: CPM)
Change to 185 (default: 180)
b) SP1105-021 (Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr / 2-S: Thk3: FC: NS: CPM
Change to 185 (default: 180)

4-110

07/04

April, 2007

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

3) "Middle Thickness Paper Mode -3"
NOTE: This setting should be selected if the effectiveness of "Middle
Thickness Paper Mode-2" is still not enough for the poor fusing.
However, with this setting, it is easier for separation pawl streaks to
occur.
Change the following SP setting as a set.
a) SP1105-013 (Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr / 1-S: Thk3: FC: NS: CPM)
Change to 190 (default: 180)
b) SP1105-021 (Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr / 2-S: Thk3: FC: NS: CPM)
Change to 190 (default: 180)
c) SP1105-021 (Htg Roll Sn1: Ctr / 2-S: Thk3: FC: NS: CPM
Change to 0 (default: 5)

4-111

07/04

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

4.4.14 NIP WIDTH ADJUSTMENT
This chapter shows you how to measure and adjust the nip width.

Important:
If a finisher is installed on the machine, remove it before you begin these
procedures.

MEASURING THE NIP WIDTH:
1. Load one OHP sheet (“3M PP2500 Transparency Film”) in the bypass tray.
2. Turn OFF “Paper Type Detect “ and “Double Feed Detect” for the bypass tray.
3. Make sure the following SP modes are set to their defaults.
Sp1111-002 (Stop Time)

Default: 60

Sp1111-003 (Stop Interval)

Default: 200

4. Do Sp1111-001 (Nip Width Mode – Execute).

4-112

07/04

April, 2007

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

5. Measure the nip width on the OHP sheet and make sure it is within
specification.
NOTE: Note: See Nip Width Specifications below.

[A]

[B]

OHP sheet

[E]

[F]
Center of OHP sheet

Feed
Direction

[C]

[D]

NIP WIDTH SPECIFICATIONS:
All of the following must be true.
1. ([E] + [F]) / 2 = 11.1 +/- 0.3mm
and
2. The difference between [A] and [C] is 0.5mm or smaller
and
3. The difference between [B] and [D] is 0.5mm or smaller

4-113

07/04

ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS

April 2007

ADJUSTING THE NIP WIDTH:
1. Remove the fusing unit from the copier and place it on the table.

[H]

[G]

2. Make sure the pressure levers ([I], [J]) are in the upper position as shown in
Photo A.
NOTE: If the levers are not in the upper position, pressure will not be applied
between the fusing belt and pressure roller.
Photo B: NG

Photo A: OK

[I]

[J]
[I]

[J]

3. Turn screws [G] and [H] to bring the nip width to within specification.
• To increase the nip width, turn the screws clockwise.
• To decrease the nip width, turn the screws counter-clockwise.
NOTE: One turn of the screw changes the nip width about 0.3mm.

Clockwise direction

[G]

4-114

07/04

[H]

Clockwise direction

April, 2007

SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes,
and adjust values.


CAUTION
Never turn OFF the main power switch when the power LED is lit or
flashing. To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation
switch to switch the power OFF, wait for the power LED to go OFF, and
then switch the main power switch OFF.

Service Mode Lock/Unlock
At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the service engineer
cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off.
This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the
permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User
Tool and then set “Service Mode Lock” to OFF. After he or she logs in:
[User Tools] > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock > OFF

•
•

This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
The service engineer can do servicing on the machine and turn the
machine OFF and ON. It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in
again each time the machine is turned ON.

2. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to
“1”.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
• Change SP5169 from “1” to “0”.
• Turn the machine OFF and ON.
• Tell the administrator that you completed servicing the machine.
• The administrator will then set the “Service Mode Lock” to ON.

5-1

SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

April, 2007

To Enter and Exit the Service Mode
1. Press the [Clear Modes] ()key.
2. On the operation panel keypad, press "107".
3. Hold down the Clear/Stop () key for more than 3 seconds.
The Copy SP or PM Counter items are displayed. If the printer/scanner unit
(GM-2100) is installed, the Printer SP and Scanner SP items are also displayed.
To enter normal Copy SP mode, press “Copy SP”.
4. When you are finished, press “Exit” to exit the SP mode, then press again to
return to the Copier Window.

To Switch to the Copy Window for Test Printing
1. In the SP mode display, press "Copy Window" to switch to the copy operation
screen when you need to select paper for a test print.
2. Use the copy window (copier mode) to select the appropriate settings (paper
size, etc.) for the test print.
3. Press the [Start] () key to execute the test print.
4. Press "SP Mode" (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat
from step 1.

Using the SP Mode
SP command numbers can be entered directly (if you know the number) or the
command can be selected from the menus.

Direct Entry
SP5831 an executable SP that initializes the User Tools settings, can be executed
immediately by just entering the numbers.
1. On the keypad press "5831".
2. Press [#] (Enter).
3. Press “Execute” on the touch panel.
If you know all seven digits of the SP code, enter the seven numbers and press
Execute.
If you do not know all the numbers, enter only the first four numbers of the sevendigits and press [#]. The display goes immediately to the first SP of that group.
Then you can use the buttons to browse to the desired selection.

5-2

April, 2007

SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

Button Selection Entry
1. Refer to the SP Mode Tables in this section to find the SP that you want to
adjust.
2. Press the Group number on the left side of the SP Mode window that contains
the SP that you want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to display the
SP number that you want to open, then press that number to expand the list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item
that you want to set, and press [#]. The small entry box on the right is activated
and displays the default or the current setting below.
5. To enter a setting
• Press [#] to enter a minus sign. Then use the keypad to enter the
appropriate number. The number you enter will write over the previous
setting.
• Press [#] to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, the
key press is ignored.)
• When you are prompted to complete the selection, press Yes.
6. If you need to perform a test print, press "Copy Window" to open the copy
window and select the settings for the test print. Press the [Start] () key twice,
then press "SP Mode" (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP
mode display.
7. When you are finished, press "Exit" twice to return to the copy window.

5-3

SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

April, 2007

SP Mode Button Summary
Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)
14APR 2002 03:25

SP Mode (Service)

Open All

Close All

Copy Window

SP1XXX

Group

SP2XXX

Page

X-XXX-XXX

SP Direct

Exit

COPY: SP1-001-001

SP3XXX
Line

SP4XXX
SP5XXX
SP6XXX

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

21

Line

Initial

Page

0

(10)

SP7XXX
Group

Prev Page

SP8XXX

Next Page

B140S907.WMF

(1):
(2):

Open All.
Opens all SP groups and sublevels.
Close All.
Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.

(3):

Copy Window.
Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. To return to the SP
mode screen, press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window.

(4):

SP Direct.
Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number, then press
[#]. (SP Direct must be highlighted before you can enter the number. Just press SP
Direct if it is not highlighted.)

(5):

Exit.
Press twice to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal
operation.

(6):

SPnxxx.
Press any group number to open a list of SP codes and titles for that group. For
example, to open the SP code list for SP1-nnn, press "SP1XXX". If an SP has sublevels,
it is marked with a right pointing triangle.

(7):

Group.
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next group.

(8):

Page.
Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).

(9):

Line.
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line.

(10): Prev Page or Next Page.
Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.

5-4

April, 2007

SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

SP Mode Print (SMC report print)
You can print an SMC Report to check the machine’s condition. The SMC Report is
a list of the SP commands and their settings.
5990

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
021
022
023

SP Mode Print (SMC Report Print)
In the SP mode, press ‘Copy Window’ to move to the copy screen, select the
paper size, then press Start. Select A4/LT (Sideways) or larger to make sure that
all the information is printed. Press ‘SP Window’ to go back to the SP mode,
select the necessary SP Print Mode, and press Execute.
All (Data List)
SP (Mode Data List)
User Program
Logging Data
Diagnostic Report
Non-Default (Prints only SPs that are set to values other than defaults.)
NIB Summary (Configuration, Systemlog, Nvramlog)
Capture Log
Copier User Program (Copy Management Report)
Scanner SP
Scanner User Program (Scanner Management Report)

5-5

RESETS

April, 2007

5.2 RESETS
5.2.1 MEMORY ALL CLEAR: SP5801
Before shipping, the SP mode data settings are printed in an SMC Report and
attached to the exposure glass of the machine for your reference. Store this report
in a safe place (next to the toner collection bottle, for example). It is a list of all the
SP initial settings. Refer to this list if you need to initialize one or more SPs. The
initial SP settings are also written in the SP mode tables at the end of this section.
As a rule, you should always print an SMC Report before initializing or adjusting
the SP settings. The SMC Report provides a concise list of all the SP commands
and their current settings. The report can be used for reference if the service
manual is not available.
Executing Memory All Clear resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their
default settings except the following:
SP8381
SP5811-002:
SP5907:

Electrical total counter value
Machine serial number
Plug & Play Brand Name and Production Name Setting

1. Execute SP5990 to print out all SMC Data Lists.
2. Open SP5801.
3. Press the number for the item that you want to initialize. The number you select
determines which application is initialized. For example, press 1 if you want to
initialize all modules.

5-6

April, 2007

RESETS

No.
What It Initializes
1 All Clear
2 Engine
3

SCS

4

IMH Memory

5

MCS

6
7
8

Copier application
Fax application
Printer application

9

Scanner application

10

Web Service/
Network application

11

NCS

14
15
16

Clear DCS Setting
Clear UCS Setting
MIRS Setting

17

CCS

Comments
Initializes items 2 to 15 below.
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy
process settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control
Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM
update information.
Initializes the image file system.
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored
documents.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
Initializes all copier application settings.
Not used.
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the printer
SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter. (Not used)
Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP
modes.
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and thumbnails,
and initializes the Job login ID.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a
PC and the DeskTopBinder software
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP
addresses also), the SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings,
WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
(NCS: Network Control Service)
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service)
settings.
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service)
settings.

4. Press "Execute", then follow the prompts on the display to complete the
procedure.
5. Make sure that you perform the following settings:
• Do the printer and scanner registration and magnification adjustments (

3-19-1 to 3-19-3)
• Do the touch screen calibration (
 3-20).
• Refer to the SMC data lists and re-enter any values which had been
changed from their factory settings.
• Execute SP3820-001 – Manual Process Control Self Check
6. Check the copy quality and the paper path, and do any necessary adjustments.

5-7

RESETS

April, 2007

5.2.2 SOFTWARE AND SETTING RESET
Software Reset
The software can be rebooted when the machine hangs up.
To do a software reset:
Turn the main power switch OFF and ON.
-orPress and hold down [•/] and [#] together for at least 10 seconds.
When the machine beeps once, release both buttons. After “Now loading. Please
wait” is displayed for a few seconds, the copy window will open. The machine is
ready for operation.

Resetting the User Tool Settings
The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults with this
procedure.
1. Make sure that the machine is in the copier standby mode.
2. Press the [User Tools] key.
3. Hold down the [#] key and press “System Setting” on the display.
4. A confirmation message will be displayed, then press “Yes”.

Resetting Copy/Document Server Features Only
The copy/document server settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults
with this procedure.
1. Make sure that the machine is in the copier standby mode.
2. Press the [User Tools] key.
3. Hold down the [#] key and press “Copy/Document Server Features” on the
display.
4. When the message appears, press “Yes”.

Resetting Scanner Features Only
The scanner settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults with this
procedure
1. Make sure that the machine is in the copier standby mode.
2. Press the [User Tools] key.
3. Hold down the [#] key and press “Scanner Features” key.
4. When the message appears, press “Yes”

5-8

April, 2007

TEST PATTERN PRINTING

5.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING
5.3.1 PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2109 002
Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are
used primarily for design testing. These test patterns do not use the IPU.
NOTE: Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely.
Otherwise, an SC may occur.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2109 002
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press [#].
3. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, press "Yes" to select the test
pattern for printing.
4. Press "Copy Window" to open the copy window, then select the settings for the
test print (paper size, etc.)
5. Press the [Start] () key twice (ignore the “Place Original” messages) to start
the test print.
6. After checking the test pattern, press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP
mode display.
7. Press "Exit" twice to exit the SP mode.

Test Pattern Table
These patterns can be selected with SP2109 002.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Off
1-Dot Line
1-Dot Slant Cross-Stripe
2-Dot Horizontal Line
2-Dot Vertical Line
1-Dot Horizontal Line
1-Dot Vertical Line
1-Dot Independent
2-Dot Independent
4-Dot Independent
Trim Area
Belt Pattern
100% Coverage
Vertical Cross-Stitch

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Horizontal Cross-Stitch
Crop Marks
Vertical Belt
Checkered Flag
1-Dot 20 mm Grid
1-Dot 20 mm Slant Grid
Horizontal Grayscale
Horizontal Grayscale-White Stripes

5-9

TEST PATTERN PRINTING

April, 2007

5.3.2 IPU TEST PATTERNS: SP4417
The IPU test patterns are primarily used for design purposes. However, they can
be used as follows:
• To confirm that the IPU is processing images correctly.
• To fine tune image processing
• To trace the causes of poor images. For example, if the IPU test patterns are
normal when the machine is producing poor quality images, then the problem
must be after the IPU if the flow of image processing.
1. Enter the SP mode, select SP4417.
2. Scroll then select the number of the test pattern that you want to print.
3. Press [#].
4. Press "Copy Window" to open the copy window, then select the settings for the
test print (paper size, etc.)
5. Press the [Start] () key to start the test print.
6. Press "SP Mode" (highlighted) to return to the SP mode display.
Here is a list of the text patterns you can select.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Scanned Image
Gradation Main Scan A
Gradation Main Scan B
Gradation Main Scan C
Gradation Main Scan D
Gradation Sub Scan (1)
Grid Pattern
Slant Grid Pattern
Gradation RGBCMYK
UCR Pattern
Color Patch 16 (1)
Color Patch 16 (2)
Color Patch 64

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Grid Pattern CMYK
Color Patch CMYK
Gray Pattern (1)
Gray Pattern (2)
Gray Pattern (3)
Shading Pattern
Thin Line Pattern
Scanned + Grid Pattern
Scanned +Gray Scale
Scanned + Color Patch
Scanned + Slant Grid C
Scanned + Grid D

5-10

April, 2007

FIRMWARE UPDATE

5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.4.1 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE
SD cards are used to update the software and to back up important data. Here is a
list of the firmware modules that can be updated or restored from an SD card:
• GW controller software
• BICU software
• LCDC (operation panel) software
• Network Sys (network) software
• Web Sys (Web Image Monitor)
• Document Server software
• NFA (Net File) software
• Printer application software
• Scanner application software
• DESS (encryption module) software
Important: Always obey these rules when handling and using SD cards:
• Never connect or remove an SD card with the machine powered ON.
• Never turn the power OFF while the machine is downloading data from an SD
card.
• The SD card is a precision item. Use it carefully. Do not keep the card in a
location where there is high temperature, high humidity, or light from the sun.
• Never bend an SD card, make scratches on it, or apply strong shock or vibration
to it.

5-11

FIRMWARE UPDATE

April, 2007

[A]

[B]

B132S801.WMF

Firmware Update Procedure
1. Disconnect these items if they are installed:
• Network cable
• Interface cable
NOTE: This prevents outside interference from data transfers to the machine
while the software is being uploaded.
2. Obtain the System SD card (P/N B1325730).
3. Turn the main switch OFF.
4. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] from the controller (
 x2).
5. Hold the SD card [B] (the surface with printing must be away from the front of
the machine), and insert the SD card in Slot 3 [B].
6. Open the front door of the copier.
7. Turn the main power switch ON. You see "Please Wait.
NOTE: Opening the front door during the firmware update prevents motor
rotation and the generation of any electrical noise.
The first screen appears after about 10 sec.

5-12

April, 2007

FIRMWARE UPDATE

PCcard -> ROM Page01
Engine

(1)

System

(2)

NA

ROM:
ROM:
ROM:
ROM:
ROM:
ROM:

00000000
0.01
60705254
12.16:16
B0705370
11.22

NEW:
NEW:
NEW:
NEW:
NEW:
NEW:

G0000000
0.08
60705254
12.16:16
B0705370
12.31

EU

Exit (0)

B132S901.WMF

Using the Screen:
• To select the item for upgrade, press the selection on the touch panel, or
press the corresponding key on the 10-key pad (1 to 5) of the operation
panel. The number in parentheses tells you which key to press. When you
make a selection, the [Verify(./)] and [Update(#)] buttons come on the
screen.
• If you press [Exit] (or the [0] key), you go back to the usual operation screen.
• Press the [Start] key on the operation panel to select and download all the
options shown on the screen.
• Press the [Clear] key on the operation panel if you want to cancel your
selections and make new ones.
While the Update Is in Progress…
• Remain with the machine. Do not leave it unattended.
• The [Start] key flashes RED during firmware update, and then lights GREEN
when the update is finished.
• Never switch the machine OFF while the [Start] key is flashing RED. If the
machine is switched OFF or accidentally unplugged before the update is
finished, do not remove the SD card. Just switch the machine on again. The
firmware update should restart automatically. If the firmware update does
not recover, order another System SD card (P/N B1325730).
• Never close the front door during firmware update.

5-13

FIRMWARE UPDATE

April, 2007

PCcard -> ROM

Loading
System
*****________

B132S903.WMF

8. Check the notations to the right.
• "ROM" tells you the module number and version of the currently installed
software.
• "NEW" tells you the module number and version of software on the SD card
in Slot 3.
9. Press the names of the items on the left that you want to update (Engine,
System, or Operation Panel). The items you select change to dark gray.
Recommended: If you intend to update all the modules, select "Engine" and
"System" for the first update. After this is completed, do the "Opeation Panel"
update. (The screen goes off during the operation panel update. If a problem
occurs, you will not be aware of it.)
10. Press "Update" or press [#] on the 10-key pad.
Here is what happens on the screen:
• The top bar tells you what the machine is doing ("Loading")
• The middle bar shows the name of the module that the machine is presently
updating. (The example above shows that the machine is updating the
“Printer” module.)
• The bottom bar is a progress bar. The ‘_’ marks in the progress bar are
replaced by ‘’ marks as uploading progresses.
• When the update is completed, you will see the message "Update done."
• Immediately below the message you will see the name of the SD card and
a notation for the number of cards ("1/1", "1/2")

5-14

April, 2007

FIRMWARE UPDATE

NOTE: During operation panel update the screen is blank and the progress bar
is not displayed. To monitor the progress of the operation panel update watch
the [Start] key. While opeation panel update is in progress, the [Start] key LED
flashes RED. The [Start] key lights GREEN when the operation panel update
has completed.
11. Turn the power OFF and ON.
12. Remove the SD card.
This completes the update procedure, but you should do the next procedure to
verify that the update was successful.

Verifying the Firmware Update
This “Verify” procedure is not necessary but is strongly recommended.
1. Open the front door of the copier.
2. With the System SD card in Slot 3, turn the main power switch ON. You see
"Please Wait" and then the door-open alert. The first screen appears after
about 10 sec.
3. Press "Firmware".
4. Select the items that you updated, and then press the [Verify] button.
5. If there are no errors the machine displays the "Verify done" message for each
updated item. Go to the next step.
-orIf you see “Verify Error” in the first bar on the screen, then you must do the
procedure again for the module shown in the bottom bar. For more details, see
"Errors During Firmware Update" below.
6. After the firmware is correctly updated, turn the main power switch OFF.
7. Push the System SD card in a small distance to release it, then pull it out of the
slot.
8. Turn the main power switch ON, and confirm that the machine operates
correctly.

5-15

FIRMWARE UPDATE

April, 2007

Errors During Firmware Update
If an error occurs during a download, an error message will be shown in the first
line. The error code consists of the letter “E” and a number (“E20”, for example).
Error Message Table
NO.

MEANING

20

Cannot map logical address

21
22

Cannot access memory
Cannot decompress
compressed data
Error occurred when ROM
update program started
SD card access error

23
24
30
31
32
33
34
35

No HDD available for stamp
data download
Data incorrect for continuous
download
Data incorrect after download
interrupted
Incorrect SD card version
Module mismatch - Correct
module is not on the SD card
Module mismatch – Module on
SD card is not for this machine

36

Cannot write module – Cause
other than E34, E35

40

Engine module download failed

42

Operation panel module
download failed
Stamp data module download
failed
Controller module download
failed
Electronic confirmation check
failed

43
44
50

SOLUTION

Make sure the SD card is installed correctly, or use a
different SD card.
HDD connection not correct, or replace hard disk.
The ROM data on the SD card is not correct, or data
is damaged.
Controller program defective. If the second attempt
fails, replace the controller board.
Make sure the SD card is installed correctly, or use a
different SD card.
HDD connection not correct or replace hard disks.
Install the SD card with the remaining data necessary
for the download, then re-start the procedure.
Do the recovery procedure for the module, then
repeat the installation procedure.
The ROM data on the SD card is not correct, or data
is damaged.
The data on the SD is not correct. Get the correct
data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install again.
SD update data is not correct. The data on the SD
card is for a different machine. Get the correct data
then install again.
SD update data is not correct. The data on the SD
card is for a different machine. Get the correct data
then install again.
Replace the data for the module on the SD card and
try again, or replace the BICU board.
Replace the data for the module on the SD card and
try again, or replace the LCDC.
Replace the data for the module on the SD card and
try again, or replace the hard disk.
Replace the data for the module on the SD card and
tray again, or replace the controller board.
SD update data is not correct. The data on the SD
card is for a different machine. Get the correct data
then install again.

5-16

April, 2007

FIRMWARE UPDATE

5.4.2 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA
You must download the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM onto the hard
disk after the HDD has been formatted or has been replaced and formatted. Then
these stamps can be used by the system. If this is not done, the user will not have
access to the fixed stamps (“Confidential”, “Secret”, etc.).
1. Go into the SP mode.
1. Select SP5853 then press “Execute”.
2. Obey the instructions on the screen to complete the procedure.
3. Switch the machine OFF and remove the SD card.

5-17

FIRMWARE UPDATE

April, 2007

5.4.3 UPLOADING AND DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA
Uploading NVRAM Data to an SD card
Always upload the NVRAM data to an SD card before you repolace the NVRAM.
1. Before you turn the machine OFF, do SP5990 001 (SMC Report Print). This
gives you a record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails and tells you the
serial number of the machine.
2. Turn the copier main power switch OFF.
3. Put the SD card into Slot 3, then turn the copier ON.
4. Do SP5824 001 then press the “Execute” key
When uploading is completed, a file is coped to the NVRAM folder on the SD
card. The file is saved to this path and filename:
NVRAM\.NV
Here is an example for Serial Number “B0700017”:
NVRAM\B0700017.NV
5. To prevent an error during the download, write the serial number of the
machine on the SD card.

5-18

April, 2007

FIRMWARE UPDATE

Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM
Do this procedure to take the data uploaded from the NVRAM and download it to
the new NVRAM.
• If the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the connection between
the controller and BICU is defective, the NVRAM data download will not
complete correctly.
• If the download does not complete correctly, do the download procedure again.
• If this does not complete correctly, input the NVRAM data manually from the
SMC report print that you made before you uploaded the NVRAM data.
1. Turn the copier main power switch OFF.
2. Put the SD card with the NVRAM data into Slot 3.
3. Open the front door of the copier and keep it open.
4. Turn the copier main power switch ON.
If the NVRAM is new, SC195 (Machine Serial Number Error) may appear. If
this occurs:
• Enter the SP mode and do SP5801 001 to set the memory to the defaults
(All).
• Switch the machine OFF/ON and start from Step 1.
Important! WHEN SC195 OCCURS, THE SERIAL NUMBER MUST BE INPUT. PLEASE
CONTACT YOUR TECHNICAL SUPERVISOR.
5. Do SP5825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the “Execute” key.
NOTE: The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial
number of the machine. If the serial numbers do not match, the
download will not complete correctly.
6. Turn the copier main power switch OFF and close the front door.
7. Remove the SD card from Slot 3.
Important: This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
• Total Count
• Copies per Original Count

5-19

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

April, 2007

5.5 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES
5.5.1 SERVICE TABLE KEY
Notation
[range/step]

DFU
Japan only
LEF
SEF

What it means
Example: [–9 to +9/0.1 mm]
The default setting can be adjusted in 0.1mm steps in the range ±9.
Note: The default setting for each SP mode is shown on the screen in
the “Initial” box immediately below the entry box.
Denotes “Design or Factory Use”. Do not change this value.
The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this value.
Long Edge Feed
Short Edge Feed

5-20

April, 2007

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Abbreviations for e-STUDIO4500c/5500c SP Service Tables
The SP titles are abbreviated so they can be used in smaller the 2-line displays of future printer
models. Refer to this list if you do not understand the meaning of an abbreviation.
Code
1/3S
1C
1Op

Meaning
One-third Speed
One Color
1 Operation (execution
cycle)
1-Side (Simplex)
2-Side (Duplex)
Absolute
Adjustment
Agitation
Amount
Black-and-White (2-Color)
Bottom Plate (Tray)
Cyan
Calibration
Change
Check
Charge
Circulation
Count
Coefficient
Color
Continuous Operation
Correction
Control
Density
Development
Developer
Display
Duplex
Erase Margin
Energy Save
Entrance

Code
HS
Htg
Htg Roll

Meaning
Half Speed
Htg
Heating Roller

Code
Recov
Reg
Reps

Meaning
Recovery
Registration
Repetitions

I/O
Init
Int
IntCnt
Inv
ITR
JG
K
L
LEdge
LL
Lvl
M
M
Meas
Mem
MH
ML
MM
Norm
NS
Opt.
Patt
PE
Pgs
Photo
PM
PolyM

Input/Output
Initial power ON
Interval
Interval Count
Inverter
Image Transfer
Junction Gate
Black, BK
Lengthways (SEF)
Leading Edge
Lowest (Low Low)
Level
Motor
Magenta
Measurement
Memory
Medium High
Medium Low
Medium (Medium Medium)
Normal Paper
Normal Speed
Optical
Pattern
Paper End
Pages
Pht
Pulse Modulation
Polygon Motor

Pos
Poten
PPr
Press
Prior

Position
Potential
Photo Paper
Pressure
Priority

Reverse
Roller
Rotation
seconds
Sideways (LEF)
Scanner Application
Separation
Sheets
Sensor
Special Paper 1
Saddle-Stitch
Standard
Staple
Start Temperature
Sub Hopper
Switch Timing
Synchronization
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tandem
Toner Control
Toner End
Toner End Sensor
Trailing Edge
Temperature
Temperature
Change
Thick (Paper)
Threshold
Timing
Toner Near End
Toner

Fin2
Fin3
Fwd
Gray
Haf

Environment
Error
Execute
Full Color
SR970 (B701) and
SR4000 (B700)
SR842 (B706)
- (Japan only)
Forward
Grayscale
Half Speed

Rev
Roll
Rot
s
S
SApli
Sep
Shts
Sn
Sp1
SS
Std
Stp
StrTemp
Sub
SWT
Syn
T1
T2
T3
T4
Tan
TC
TE
TE Sn
TEdge
Temp
Temp
Chg
Thk
Thresh
Tmg
TNE
Tnr

Prmr
ProCon
Pt
PT
PTR

Parameter
Process Control
Point
Paper Transfer
Paper Transfer Roller

Tnr M
Tra
TxtOCR
TxtPrt
Usd Tnr

Height
HH

Hgt
Highest (High High)

Ptype
Pwr

Paper Type
Power

Vert
Y

Toner Motor
Trace (thin) Paper
Text (OCR)
Text (Print)
Used (Waste)
Toners
Vertical
Yellow

1-S
2-S
Abs
Adj
Agi
Amt
B/W
BotPlt
C
Calib
Chg
Chk
Chrg
Cir.
Cnt
Coeff
Col
Cont
Cor
Ctrl
Den
Dev
Devr
Disp
Dupx
EMargin
EngSave
Ent
Env
Err
Exe
FC
Fin1

5-21

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

April, 2007

5.5.2 COPIER SERVICE TABLES
Group 1000
1001
001

Lead Edge Reg
Leading Edge Regisration Adjustment
Adjusts the printing leading edge registration using the trimming area pattern
(SP2109, Pattern No. 10).
[–9~+9/0.1mm]
Specification: 3±2mm

1002

Side-to-Side Reg
Side-to-Side Registration Adjustment
Adjusts printing side-to-side registration for each feed station, using the test
pattern (SP2109, Pattern No. 10).
These SP’s should be adjusted after replacing the laser synchronization detector or
the laser optical unit.
Tray 1
[–9~+9/0.1 mm]
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Japan Only
Bypass Tray
LCT
Dupx Tray

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
1003

001
002
003

Reg Buckle Adj
Registration Buckle Adjustment
Adjusts the registration motor timing. This timing determines the amount of paper
buckle at registration. (A higher setting causes more buckling.)
Trays & LCT
[–9~+9/1 mm]
Dupx Tray
[–9~+9/1 mm]
Bypass Tray
[–9~+9/1 mm]

1007

Bypass Size Disp
Bypass Paper Size Detection Display
Use this SP to display and confirm the size of the paper detected in the bypass tray
if paper is skewing during feeding.
[0~255/1 mm]

1008

Duplex Fence Adj
Duplex Side Fence Position Adjustment
Allows fine adjustment of the distance between the edges of the sheet and the
jogger fences when the fences come together to position the sheet in the duplex
unit.
[-3~+3/0.1 mm]

5-22

April, 2007

1009

001

002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Fine Adj Reg Spd
Fine Adjust Registration Line Speed
The SP allows fine adjustment fine adjustment of the registration roller speed to
adjust the line speed.
Reg. Roller
Registration Roller: Fine Adjust Speed
Allows fine adjustment of the registration roller line
speed.
[-3~+3/0.1%]
Motor Adj:Norm
Motor Speed Fine Adjustment (Normal)
Drum Motor:K
Drum Motor:M
Drum Motor:C
Drum Motor: K
PCU Motor:K
PCU Motor:M
PCU Motor:C
PCU Motor:Y
Image Transfer Motor
PTR Motor
Fusing Motor
Motor Adj:Half
Drum Motor:K
Drum Motor:M
Drum Motor:C
Drum Motor:Y
PCU Motor:K
PCU Motor:M
PCU Motor:C
PCU Motor:Y
Image Transfer Motor
PTR Motor
Fusing Motor
Motor Adj: 1/3

024

Fusing Exit Motor

025

Reg. Roller

"Normal" is normal speed for copying.
[-3 ~ +3/ 0.1%]

[-5 ~ +5/ 0.1%]
Motor Speed Fine Adjustment (Half-Speed)
"Half-Speed" is the half-speed mode.
[-3 ~ +3/ 0.1%]

Motor Speed Fine Adjustment (One-Third
Speed)
"One-Third Speed" is the one-third speed mode.
The one-third speed mode is used when OHP
goes through the fusing unit.
[-5 ~ +5/ 0.1%]
Registration Roller Speed
This SP allows fine adjustment of the registration
roller speed.
[-3 ~ +3/ 0.1%]

5-23

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

1105

Htg Roll Sn1:Ctr
Heating Roller

001

Prefeed Temp

002

Reload Temp

003

Wait Temp:Norm

004

Wait Temp:Low

005

Wait Temp:High

006

1-S Norm:1Col

007

1-S:Norm :FC

008

1-S:Trace:1C

009

1-S:Trace:FC

010

1-S:Thk1:1C:HS

011

1-S:Thk1:FC:HS

012

1-S:Thk3:1C:NS:CPM

013

1-S:Thk3:FC:NS:CPM

014

2-S:Norm:1C

015

2-S:Norm:FC

016

2-S:Trace:1C

017

2-S:Trace:FC

018

2-S:Thk1:1C:HS

019

2-S:Thk1:FC:HS

020

2-S:Thk3:1C:NS:CPM

021

2-S:Thk3:FC:NS:CPM

April, 2007

Heating Roller: Sensor 1 (Center)
Heating Roller
SP codes 001 to 027 control the temperature of the
heating roller.
Free-rotation start time.
[60~200/1 deg.]
At normal standby temperature.
[130~200/1 deg.]
At normal standby temperature.
[50~200/1 deg.]
At low standby temperature.
[50~200/1 deg.]
At high standby temperature.
[50~200/1 deg.]
During copying.
[130~20/1 deg.]
During copying.
[130~200/1 deg.]
During copying.
[130~200/1 deg.]
During copying.
[130~200/1 deg.]
During copying in half-speed mode.
[130~200/1 deg.]
During copying in half-speed mode.
[130~200/1 deg.]
During copying in normal speed mode on thick paper in
black-and-white.
[130~200/1 deg.]
During copying in normal speed mode on thick paper in
full color.
[130~200/1 deg.]
During normal speed copying.
[130~200/1 deg.]
During normal speed copying.
[130~200/1 deg.]
During normal speed copying (paper setting).
[130~200/1 deg.]
During normal speed coyping (paper setting).
[130~200/1 deg.]
During half-speed copying (paper setting).
[130~200/1 deg.]
During half-speed copying (paper setting)
[130~200/1 deg.]
During half-speed copying (paper setting)
[130~200/1 deg.]
During half-speed copying (paper setting)
[130~200/1 deg.]

5-24

April, 2007
022

Thk2:1C:HS

023

Thk2:FC:HS

024

Cont OHP:1C

025

Cont OHO:FC

026

OHP:1C:100mm/s

027

OHP:FC:100mm/s

028

PressRoll
Reload Temp

029

Wait Temp:Norm

030

Wait:Temp:Low

031

Wait:Temp:High

032

1-S Norm

033

2-S Norm

034

Cont OHP

035

SemiT OHP:100mm/s

036

HotRoll
Wait Temp: Norm

037

Wait Temp: Low

038

Wait Temp: High

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES
During half-speed copying (paper setting).
[130~200/1 deg.]
During half-speed copying (paper setting).
[130~200/1 deg.]
During half-speed copying (paper setting).
[130~200/1 deg.]
During half-speed copying (paper setting).
[130~200/1 deg.]
During 100 mm/s copying (paper setting).
[130~200/1 deg.]
During 100 mm/s copying (paper setting).
[130~200/1 deg.]
Pressure Roller
Until warmup (reload) ends.
[70~180/1 deg.]
At normal standby temperature.
[50~180/1 deg.]
At low standby temperature.
[50~180/1 deg.]
At hight standby temperature.
[50~180/1 deg.]
Target temperature.
[70~180/1 deg.]
Target temperature.
[70~180/1 deg.]
During continuous OHP copying.
[130~200/1 deg.]
Target temperature (paper setting).
[70~180/1 deg.]
Hot Roller
Normal standby temperature.
[50~170/1 deg.]
Low standby temperature.
[50~170/1 deg.]
High standby temperature.
[50~170/1 deg.]

5-25

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

1106

001
002
003
004
005
006

1107

April, 2007

Fusing Temp Disp
Fusing Lamp Control Method/Temperature Display
These SP codes control the temperature control of the hot roller and display the
temperatures of the hot roller, pressure roller, heating roller, and heating roller
lamps.
Temp Ctrl On/Off
Hot roller fusing lamp control switch
0: OFF, 1: PID
Phase Ctrl On/Off
Hot roller phase control
0:OFF 1:ON
Htg Roll Ctr Temp
Displays the temperature in centigrade of the fusing lamp
(center) in the heating roller. Range: 0 to 230
Htg Roll End Temp
Displays the temperature in centigrade of the fusing lamp
(ends) in the heating roller. Range: 0 to 230
Press Roll Temp
Displays the temperature in centigrade of the pressure
roller. Range: 0 to 230
Hot Roll Temp
Displays the temperature in centigrade of the hot roller.
Range: 0 to 230
Mode Shift Setting

Mode Shift Setting

001

Low Temp SW

002

High Temp SW

003
004

Pres Roll Reload
Idle Temp On/Off

005

Idle Time:Extend

006

Feed Norm Temp

007

Press Temp:Norm

008

Press Time:Norm

009

Fuse Exit M Cycles

010

Fuse Exit M Rot

The calculated value for the specified temperatures when
the readings of the environmental sensors are low.
[0~20/1 deg.]
The calculated value for the specified temperatures when
the readings of the environmental sensors are high.
[-20~0/1 deg.]
* This function in not used in this model.
The hot roller temperature that determines whether the
fusing unit rollers are rotated freely during warmup.
[80~200/1 deg.]
The length of time the fusing/exit motor remains on after
the fusing unit has reached the warmup temperature.
[0~10/1 min.]
Determines whether fusing exit motor remains before
feeding plain paper after warmup temperature for the
heating roller has been reached.
0: No 1: Yes
The temperature calculated for the specified temperature
when the fusing/exit motor starts to rotate when plain
paper starts to feed.
[0~20/1 deg.]
The time calculated to be added to the rotation time of the
fusing/exit motor at the start of plain paper feed, based on
the temperature specified temperature.
[0~60/1 deg.]
The cycles of the fusing/exit motor at standby.
[10~240/1 min. ]
The time the fusing exit motor rotates at standby.
[0~1/1 sec.]

5-26

April, 2007
011

Fuse Exit Temp

012

Add Rot Time

013

Stand Cool On/Off
Thk2 (0:Off 1:On)

014

To Cooling Mode
Thk2/OHP Cool End

015

Trace Cool End

016

Edge Cool On/Off
Start (0:No 1:Yes)

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES
The temperature used to calculate the temperature
specified for the hot roller at the end of fusing/exit motor
rotation when the warmup temperature has been reached.
[0~30/1 deg. ]
The amount of time added to the rotation time of the
fusing/exit motor after warmup temperture has been
reached, based on the temperature specified for the hot
roller at standby.
[0~90/10 sec.]
Standby Ventilation Cooling: On/Off
Switches ON/OFF standby for cooling after printing thick
paper.
0: Off 1: On
Standby Ventilation Cooling: Setting
Sets the temperature to end the cool down period after
printing with thick paper or OHP.
[0~40/1 deg. ]
Sets the temperature to end the cool down period after
printing with tracing (thin) paper.
[0~40/1 deg. ]
Standby Ventilation Cooling: On/Off High Edge Temp.
Switches ON/OFF standby for cooling for the ends of the
fusing rollers after printing on wide paper.
0: Off 1: On

5-27

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

1108

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017

April, 2007

Htg Roll Lamp 1
Heating Roller: Fusing Lamps
Controls the level of the power (percentage) supplied to the heating rollers (Watts)
when the machine is in the specified mode.
At Reload
During warmup after the machine is switched or returns from
and energy save mode.
Wait Time
While the machine is in the standby mode and ready for
operation.
Norm:1C
Normal operation for black-and-white copying and printing.
Norm:FC
Normal operation for full color copying and printing
Scan:Norm:1C
Black-and-white scanning.
Scan:Norm:FC
Full color scanning.
At ProCon Reload Reload temperature after completing the process control
cycle.
Heating Roller: Fusing Lamp 1
At Reload
[ 0~100 / 100 /0.1%]
Wait Time
Norm:1C
Norm:FC
Heating Roller: Fusing Lamp 2
Wait Time
[ 0~1000 /0.1%]
Norm:1C
[ 0~1000 / 1000 /0.1%]
Scan:Norm:1C
[ 0~100 /0.1%]
Norm:FC
Scan:Norm:FC
[ 0~1000 /0.1%]
Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp
At Reload
[ 0~100 / 100 /0.1%]
At ProCon Reload [ 0~100 /0.1%]
Wait Time
[ 0~100 / 100 /0.1%]
Norm:1C
Norm:FC
Hot Roller Fusing Lamp
At Reload
[ 0~100 / 100 /0.1%]
Wait Time
Heating Roller: Fusing Lamp 2
At Reload
[ 0~100 / 100 /0.1%]

5-28

April, 2007

1110

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
002

Paper Type Selet
Paper Type Select
These SP settings switch the ON/OFF the paper type type detection and doublefeed functions.
[0~1/1]
0: Enable
1: Disable
Two sensors, one mounted above and one below the paper at the registration
rollers, detect the opacity of the first sheet and compares this reading for every
subsequent sheet. If the reading is higher (thicker paper) or lower (thinner paper)
the sensor triggers an error.
Paper Type
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Japan Only
Bypass
LCT
Double-Feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Japan Only
Bypass
LCT

1111
001

Nip Width Mode
Execute

002

Stop Time

003

Stop Interval

1112

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Nip Width Measurement Setting Mode
Determines whether the nip at the hot roller and pressure
roller is calibrated. Press [Execute].
Determines the down time of the fusing/exit motor in the
fusing nip band calibration mode.
[1~100/1 sec.]
Determines the intervals between the down times of the
fusing/exit motor in the nip band calibration mode.
[0~2000/100 msec.]

Fuser Unit In/Out
Fusing Unit: In/Out – Start Fusing Unit
Determines whether the fusing unit operates during the copy cycle for image
creation and paper feed.
0:OFF, 1:ON

5-29

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

1200

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008

009
010
011
012

013

014

015

1201

001
002

April, 2007

1st CMP Down
This SP adjusts the temperature of the heating roller at the start of the CMP down
modes for black-and-white copying in normal/high temperature environments.
1st CPM Down
1st CMP Down (Heating Roller Temperature)
Normal temperature, high temperature environment
StrTemp:Low/Hi:1C
[–20~0/1 deg.]
StrTemp:Low/Hi:FC
Low temperature environment
StrTemp:Low:1C
[–20~0/1 deg.]
StrTemp:Low:FC
CPM Norm/Hi:1C
Normal, high temperature environment, A4 SEF
[10~60/5 cpm]
CPM Norm/Hi:FC
Normal, high temperature environment, A4 SEF
[10~60/5 cpm]
CPM Low Temp:1C
Low temperature environment, A4 SEF
[10~60/5 cpm]
CPM Low Temp:FC
Low temperature environment, A4 SEF
[10~60/5 cpm]
2nd CPM Down
2nd CPM Down
CPM Norm/Hi:1C
Normal, high temperature environment, A4 SEF
[10~60/5 cpm]
CPM Norm/Hi:FC
Normal, high temperature environment, A4 SEF
[10~60/5 cpm]
CPM Low:1C
Low temperature environment, A4 SEF
[10~60/5 cpm]
CPM Low:FC
Low temperature environment, A4 SEF
[10~60/5 cpm]
3rd CPM Down:Thk
3rd CPM Down: Thick Paper
CPM down settings (based on A4 SEF) for black and white.
1C:60/45/30cpm
[0~4/1]
0: 60 cpm 1: 50 cpm 2: 45 cpm 3: 30 cpm
CPM down settings (based on A4 SEF) for full color.
FC:45/25/15cpm
[0~4/1]
0: 60 cpm (This function is not use in this model.)
1: 50 cpm 2: 45 cpm 3: 30 cpm
(0:Yes 1:No)
Switches the CPM down feature ON/OFF
0:OFF 1:ON
HtgRoll L2:Hys
Heating Roller 2: Hysterisis On/Off
This SP adjusts the control temperature of the heating roller when Lamp 2 in the
heating roller is switched ON.
On
[-5.0~+5.0/0.5]
Note: Every “0.1” increment adjusts temperature “0.1 deg.”
Off
Switches OFF Lamp 2, no adjust allowed.

5-30

April, 2007

1202

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
1203
001

002

003

004

005

1901
001
002

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Set Fusing Temp
Set Fusing Temperature (for shift to low power mode)
This SP sets the time interval for the machine to remain idle to trigger lower power
mode 1.
Set Fusing Temp
EngSave Time 1
[0~60/1 min.]
EngSave Time 2
[0~90/5 min.]
EngSave Time 3
[0~24/0.5 hour]
Heating Roller
Energy Save 1
[-200~0/1 deg.]
Energy Save 2
[-200~0/1 deg.]
Energy Save 3
[-200~0/1 deg.]
Pressure Roller
Energy Save 1
[-200~0/1 deg.]
Energy Save 2
[-200~0/1 deg.]
Energy Save 3
[-200~0/1 deg.]
Hot Roller
Energy Save 1
[-200~0/1 deg.]
Energy Save 2
[-200~0/1 deg.]
Energy Save 3
[-200~0/1 deg.]
Fusing:I/O
Fusing Input/Output
This SP adjusts the operation of the fusing exit sensor.
FuseExitSn:On/Off
Display indicates whether the fusing exit sensor is ON or
OFF.
0: OFF 1:ON
FuseExitSn Timing
Displays the time interval from when the registration motor
goes OFF to when it restarts.
[0~5000/1 msec.]
FuseExitSn ON
Display indicates whether the fusing paper remains sensor is
ON or OFF.
[0~5000/1 msec.]
FuseExitSn Disp
Dsiplays whether the paper remains sensor is ON or OFF
from when the registration motor goes OFF until it restarts.
0: OFF 1:ON
FuseExit M ON
Switches forced rotation of the fusing/exit motor ON/OFF.
0: OFF 1:ON
CPM Down:Thk
CPM Down Mode: Thick Paper
This SP adjusts the CPM down time for thick paper and tab sheets.
CPM Down:Thk
Special CPM Down Setting: Thick Paper
[0~4/1] (This function in not used in this model.)
CPM Down:Tab
Special CPM Down Setting: Index Tabs
[0~4/1] (This function in not used in this model.)

5-31

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

1905

001

002

April, 2007

Bypass Thk
Bypass Tray: Thick Paper
This SP switches the thick paper mode ON and OFF for thick paper and index
sheet feed from the bypass tray.
0:No 1:Yes
Bypass Feed: Thick Paper Mode
Switches the thick paper mode ON/OFF for feed from the
bypass tray.
0:OFF 1:ON
0:No 1:Yes
Bypass Feed: Thick Paper Mode
Switches the thick paper mode ON/OFF for feed of index
sheets from the bypass tray.
0:OFF 1:ON

5-32

April, 2007

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Group 2000
2101

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
2102
001
005
006
007
008
2103
001
002
003
004
005
2104

001
002
003

Reg Col Interval
Color Interval Registration Adjustment
Use these SPs to correct problems with color registration. Color registration
problems can be detected by checking the results of 2901 002 Pattern 1. Before
doing these adjustments, try to solve the problem by doing SP2111. For more, see
Section "4. Troubleshooting".
Main Scan Dot:K
[-99~+99/1 dot]
Main Scan Dot:M
Main Scan Dot:C
Main Scan Dot:Y
MainScan Dot:K
[-31~+31/1 sub dot]
MainScan Dot:K-M
MainScan Dot:K-C
MainScan Dot:K-Y
MainScan Dot:K 0-1
[-63~+63/1 line]
MainScan Dot:M 0-1
MainScan Dot:C 0-1
MainScan Dot:Y 0-1
SubScan Line:K-M
[-63~+63/1 sub dot]
SubScan Line:K-C
SubScan Line:K-Y
SubScan M Adj:K-M
[-33~+33/ 1 step]
SubScan M Adj:K-C
SubScan M Adj:K-Y
Prt Mag Adj
Print Magnification Adjustment
No information is available at this time.
Main Scan Mag
[-100~+100/0.01%]
Mag Rate:K 0-1
[-63~+63/1 sub dot]
Mag Rate:M 0-1
Mag Rate:C 0-1
Mag Rate:Y 0-1
Prt Erase Margin
Print Erase Width Adjustment
Adjusts the white space at the leading edge.
Adj LEdge Margin
[-50~+50/0.1 mm]
Adj TEdge Margin
[-20+20/1 mm]
Adj Left Margin
Adj Right Margin
TEdge Margin:Tra
[0~20/0.1 mm]
Skew Adj
Skew Adjustment
Use these SP to correct skew in color registration. For more, see Section "4.2.2
Troubleshooting".
Skew Adj
K-M
[-75~+75/1 pulse]
Skew Adj
K-C
[-50~+50/1 pulse]
Test Pattern
K-Y
[-75~+75/1 pulse]

5-33

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES
2105
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
2106

2107
005
006
2108
001
002
003
004

April, 2007

LD Syn PM Adj
LD Pulse Modulation Synchronization Adjustment: DFU
No information is available at this time.
K0
[-117~127/]
M0
C0
Y0
K1
M1
C1
Y1
Poly Mtr OFF
Polygon Motor Off Setting
The polygon motor turns OFF if the machine receives no print job for the time
specified in this SP mode after the previous job was completed.
[0~180/1 sec]
Prt Param On/Off
Printer Parameter Settings: On/Off
No information is available at this time.
Shade Corr Flag
0: OFF 1: ON
Phase Ctrl Flage
0: OFF 1: ON
Col Prt Stop Specify Color to Stop Printing
This SP switches OFF printing of a color.
K
[0~1/1] 0:Off (Color prints), 1:On (Color does not print)
M
C
Y

5-34

April, 2007

2109

001

002

004
005
006
007
008
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Test Pattern
Write Test Pattern
Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are
used primarily for design testing. These test patterns do not use the IPU.
Image Add
Select "1" to have the patterns selected with
SP2109 002 print overlapped on one another.
[0~1/1] 0:Off, 1:On
Select Pattern
Allows you to select the pattern to print.
[0~21/1]
0
Off
14
Horizontal Cross-Stitch
1
1-Dot Line
15
Crop Marks
2
1-Dot Slant Cross-Stripe
16
Vertical Belt
3
2-Dot Horizontal Line
17
Checkered Flag
4
2-Dot Vertical Line
18
1-Dot 20 mm Grid
5
1-Dot Horizontal Line
19
1-Dot 20 mm Slant Grid
6
1-Dot Vertical Line
20
Horizontal Grayscale
7
1-Dot Independent
21
Horizontal Grayscale-White Stripes
8
2-Dot Independent
22
--- Not Used --9
4-Dot Independent
23
--- Not Used --10 Trim Area
24
--- Not Used --11 Belt Pattern
25
--- Not Used --12 100% Coverage
26
--- Not Used --13 Vertical Cross-Stitch
27
--- Not Used --Col Select:YCMK
[0~255/1] DFU
Density:K
[0~63/1]
Density:M
Density:C
Density:Y
Gray Density 1
[0~63/1]
Gray Density 2
Gray Density 3
Gray Density 4
Gray Density 5
Gray Density 6
Gray Density 7
Gray Density 8
Gray Density 9
Gray Density 10
Gray Density 11
Gray Density 12
Gray Density 13
Gray Density 14
Gray Density 15

5-35

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2110
001
2111

Force Tnr Cycle
Force Toner Supply Cycle
Forces 2-Point interval correction.
Force Tnr Pos
Force Toner Position Alignment
Executes the MUSIC feature. MUSIC is the "Mirror Unit for Skew and Interval
Correction". Three MUSIC sensors mounted above the ITB read three MUSIC
sensor patterns developed on the ITB. The sensors read the patterns and the
machine uses this feedback to adjust 1) the positions of the 3rd scanner mirrors to
correct skew (main scan), and 2) the speed of the drum motors to correct the
intervals (sub scan) between the patterns. If the vertical alignment of the patterns or
the intervals are not correct, this causes color offset. This adjustment is done for
each color (Y, M, C, K).
Normally, MUSIC executes automatically:
•
•
•
•
•

2112

April, 2007

When the machine is turned ON or returns from an energy save mode.
At the interval prescribed by SP2153 015 (Default: 8 min.)
After completion of the process control cycle.
When the machine receives a job after remaining idle for a long period.
After the fusing unit exceeds the prescribed temperature.
Mag Point Adj
Maginification Point Adjustment
Corrects the difference in magnification for each color in the left and right direction.
[-4~+4/1 (50µm)]

001
002
003
004
005
006

Do SP2109 002 and print Pattern 1 on A3/DLT size paper. Examine the pattern
with a scaled lupe. For every 50µm adjust the setting in the left or right direction. A
1 step correction corrects 50µm.
M Left
[-4~+4/1]
M Right
C Left
C Right
Y Left
Y Right

2150

001 - 010
011 - 020
021 - 029
031 - 040

Prt Area Pulse
Pulse Setting: Print Area Only DFU
These SPs fine adjust magnification in the main scan direction in increments
of 1/32 dots.
K Area 0 – Area 9
[-120~+120/32 sub dot]
M Area0 – Area 9
C Area0 – Area 9
Y Area0 – Area 9

5-36

April, 2007

2151

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018

Prt Area Coeff
Coefficient Setting: Print Area Only DFU
These SPs adjust the magnification coefficient for each color in these areas:
• Mid Area 0-3
• Small Area 1-3
• Small Area 5-8
K MidArea0
[1~99/0.01]
021 C MidArea0
[1~99/0.01]
K MidArea3
022 C MidArea3
K SmallArea1 [1~99/0.01]
023 C SmallArea1
[1~99/0.01]
K SmallArea2
024 C SmallArea2
K SmallArea3
025 C SmallArea3
K SmallArea6
026 C SmallArea6
K SmallArea7
027 C SmallArea7
K SmallArea8
028 C SmallArea8
M MidArea0
[1~99/0.01]
031 Y MidArea0
[1~99/0.01]
M MidArea3
032 Y MidArea3
M SmallArea1 [1~99/0.01]
033 Y SmallArea1
[1~99/0.01]
M SmallArea2
034 Y SmallArea2
M SmallArea3
035 Y SmallArea3
M SmallArea6
036 Y SmallArea6
M SmallArea7
037 Y SmallArea7
M SmallArea8
038 Y SmallArea8

2152

001 - 019
021 - 039
041 - 058
061 - 079
2153

001
002

003
004
005

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Shading Coeff Shading Correction Coefficient DFU
These SPs set the shading correction coefficient for Areas 01 to 19 for each
color. For a list of the ranges and default settings, print the SMC report with
SP5990.
K Area01 - Area19
M Area01 - Area19
C Area01 - Area19
Y Area01 - Area19

MUSIC Settings
MUSIC Condition Settings
These SPs determine how MUSIC executes.
In the settings below 0: Off, 1:On.
Auto Execute
Sets MUSIC to execute automatically.
[0~1/1]
During ProCon
Sets MUSIC to execute after completion of the process
control self-check.
[0~1/1]
Initialization
Sets MUSIC to execute after the machine is switched ON.
[0~1/1]
During Data In
Sets MUSIC to execute before image data output.
[0~1/1]
Writing
Sets MUSIC to execute during long print jobs.
[0~1/1]
Note: Use SP2153 010 to set the number of pages
between MUSIC executions (Default: 100 pages).

5-37

07/04

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES
007

PaperInt:2Pt Meas

008

JobInt:2Pt Meas

010

Interrupt Int

012

MUSIC:Temp Chg

013

MUSIC:2Pt TempChg

014

MUSIC Density Lvl

015

Door Open:Wait

016

Clear Main Slip

020

Sensor Light 1

021

Sensor Light 2

022

Sensor Light 3

023

AutoLight:PreAdj

025

AdjCoeff:FrontKf

026

AdjCoeff:CtrKc

027

AdjCoeff:RearKr

028

Min Patch Fine

029

Min Patch:Rough

April, 2007
Sets MUSIC to execute with 2-point measurement of
image page intervals.
[0~1/1]
Sets MUSIC to execute with 2-point measurements
immediately before image output.
[0~1/1]
Sets the page interval beween MUSIC executions during
long jobs print jobs.
[10~300/1 page]
Note: This SP is effective only when SP2153 005 is
switched ON.
Prescribes the exposure unit temperature change at which
MUSIC executes at the start of a job.
[1~300/0.1 deg]
Sets MUSIC to execute with 2-point measurement of the
room temperature change.
[1~300/0.1 deg]
Sets the density of the MUSIC test patterns. Note that the
default is set at the maximum setting.
[0~63/1]
Sets the time interval for MUSIC to execute after the front
door is opened and then closed to remove a paper jam or
perform some other task.
[2~99/1 min.]
Clears the skew correction amount for MUSIC in the main
scan direction.
[0~1/1]
Sets the light intensity of MUSIC sensor 1.
[0~65535/1]
Sets the light intensity of MUSIC sensor 2.
[0~65535/1]
Sets the light intensity of MUSIC sensor 3.
[0~65535/1]
Executes automatic adjustment of the light emitted from
the MUSIC sensors.
[0~1/1]
Sets the value of the coefficient of the front MUSIC
sensor.
[0~100/0.1]
Sets the value of the coefficient for the center MUSIC
sensor.
[0~100/0.1]
Sets the value of the coefficient of the center MUSIC
sensor.
[0~100/0.1]
Sets the minimum amount of patch shift for MUSIC fine
adjustment.
[0~100/0.1]
Sets the minimum amount of patch shift for MUSIC rough
adjustment.
[0~100/0.1]

5-38

April, 2007
030

CMY:LowMin.

031

CMY:MidMin.

032

Base MaxDiff

033

Patch Mini Gap

034

Light Target Adj

035

MY Light Max

036
037
038
039
040
041

Add Upper Limit
Add Lower Limit
LaserX:FrontXf
LaserX:CenterXc
LaserX: RearXr
LaserX: TempCoeff

2154

001
002
003
004
2155

001
002
003

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES
No information is available at this time.
[0~50/0.1V]
No information is available at this time.
[0~50/0.1V]
No information is available at this time.
[0~50/0.1V]
No information is available at this time.
[0~50/0.1V]
Sets the target value for the intensity of the MUSIC sensor
lights.
[0~50/0.1V]
Sets the maximum value for the intensity of the MUSIC
sensor lights.
[0~255/0.1V]
No information is available at this time.

2-Point Target
2-Point Interval Target Setting
These 2-point target settings done at the factory affect the characteristics of the
lenses. These target values must be entered when when the laser unit is replaced.
The correct settings are printed below the first barcode on one A5 sheet of paper
provided with the replacement laser unit.
K
[60700~63230/61984/1]
M
C
Y
2-Point Int Set
2-Point Interval Target Setting DFU
These SPs adjust the difference in the position of color registration for MUSIC in
the main scan direction, using K (black) as the reference point.
Do SP2109 002 and print Pattern 1 on A3/DLT size paper. Examine the pattern
with a scaled lupe. For every 43.2µm adjust the setting in the left or right direction.
A 1 step correction corrects 50µm.
M Main Scan [-5~+5/1 (43.2µm)
C Main Scan
Y Main Scan

5-39

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2180
001

002

2181

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
021
022
023
024
025
026

April, 2007

Lens Temp
Lens Temperature Monitor
These SPs display the measured temperatures of the optical lenses for each color.
M-K
Displays the measured temperature of the magenta and
black lenses (in the laser optics).
[0~999/0.1 deg]
Y-C
Displays the measured temperature of the yellow and
cyan lenses (in the laser optics).
[0~999/0.1 deg]
Alignment Result
Position Alignment Result
These SPs display the amount of shift correction for each color, the amount of
correction done at each sensor in both the main scan and sub scan direction.
[-2000~+2000/1]
M Skew Amt
The amount of skew correction for magenta.
M Main Skew 1
Amount of shift correction for magenta in the main scan
direction at sensor 1.
M Main Skew 2
Amount of shift correction for magenta in the main scan
direction at sensor 2.
M Main Skew 3
Amount of shift correction for magenta in the main scan
direction at sensor 3.
M Sub Skew 1
Amount of shift correction for magenta in the sub scan
direction at sensor 1.
M Sub Skew 2
Amount of shift correction for magenta in the sub scan
direction at sensor 2.
M Sub Skew 3
Amount of shift correction for magenta in the sub scan
direction at sensor 3.
C Skew Amt
The amount of skew correction for cyan.
C Main Skew 1
Amount of shift correction for cyan in the main scan
direction at sensor 1.
C Main Skew 2
Amount of shift correction for cyan in the main scan
direction at sensor 2.
C Main Skew 3
Amount of shift correction for cyan in the main scan
direction at sensor 3.
C Sub Skew 1
Amount of shift correction for cyan in the sub scan
direction at sensor 1.
C Sub Skew 2
Amount of shift correction for cyan in the sub scan
direction at sensor 2.
C Sub Skew 3
Amount of shift correction for cyan in the sub scan
direction at sensor 3.
Y Skew Amt
The amount of skew correction for yellow.
Y Main Skew 1
Amount of shift correction for yellow in the main scan
direction at sensor 1.
Y Main Skew 2
Amount of shift correction for yellow in the main scan
direction at sensor 2.
Y Main Skew 3
Amount of shift correction for yellow in the main scan
direction at sensor 3.
Y Sub Skew 1
Amount of shift correction for yellow in the sub scan
direction at sensor 1.
Y Sub Skew 2
Amount of shift correction for yellow in the sub scan
direction at sensor 2.

5-40

April, 2007
027

Y Sub Skew 3

030

MUSIC Result

2182
001
002
003
2183

001
002
003
004
2201

001
002
003
004
006
007
008
009
2202

001
002
003
004
006
007
008
009

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES
Amount of shift correction for yellow in the sub scan
direction at sensor 3.
Displays the result of MUSIC adjustment

Skew Corr Total
Skew Correction Total
These SPs display the total skew correction for magenta, cyan, and yellow.
M
[-50~+50/1 pulse]
C
[-33~+33/1 pulse]
Y
[-50~+50/1 pulse]
2-Point Measure
2-Point Interval Measurement Monitor
These SPs allow you to set the focal points for the execution of 2-point
measurement of each color.
Focus Value:K
[-100~+100/0.01%]
Focus Value:M
Focus Value:C
Focus Value:Y
Set DC Charge
Fixed DC Charge Setting
These SPs set the dc bias for the standard speed and low speed mode, but take
effect only when SP3501 001 is set to "1" (Fixed). The dc bias (an absolute value)
is set to +200, making the default values for each color –700. The dc bias is
normally adjusted by the process control self-check, but when automatic process
control is switched OFF (by setting SP3501 001 to "1"), these values are used for
the charge potential.
Std Speed:K
[-999 to –200/1V]
Std Speed:M
Std Speed: C
Std Speed: Y
Low Speed:K
Low Speed: M
Low Speed: C
Low Speed: Y
Set AC Charge
Fixed DC Charge Setting
These SPs set the AC bias for the standard speed mode and low speed mode,
but take effect only when SP3501 001 is set to "1" (Fixed). The default ac bias for
each color is 2.2 kV (220) The ac bias is normally adjusted by process control
self-check, but when automatic process control is switched OFF (by setting
SP3501 001 to "1"), these values are used for the charge potential.
Std Speed: K
[0~300/1 kV]
Std Speed: M
Std Speed: C
Std Speed: Y
Low Speed: K
Low Speed: M
Low Speed: C
Low Speed: Y

5-41

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2204

001
002
003
004
006
007
008
009
011
012
013
014
016
017
018
019
021
022
023
024
2211

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008

April, 2007

AC Charge Corr
AC Charge: Setting for Ambient Correction
These SPs adjust the target ac current for each operating environment (LL, ML,
etc.). The process control self-check adjusts the ac current to achieve the target
voltage. SP2901 003 (PCU) displays the most recent absolute temperature. If the
auto process control self-check fails to achieve the threshold value, then the target
selected with these SPs is used.
LL:Target:K
[100~350/1 mA]
LL:Target:M
LL:Target:C
LL:Target:Y
ML:Target:K
ML:Target:M
ML:Target:C
ML:Target:Y
MM:Target:K
MM:Target:M
MM:Target:C
MM:Target:Y
MH:Target:K
MH:Target:M
MH:Target:C
MH:Target:Y
HH:Target:K
HH:Target:M
HH:Target:C
HH:Target:Y
Set LD Power
LD Power: Fixed Setting
These SPs set the power levels of the laser diodes in the exposure unit for the
standard speed mode and low speed mode for each color, but take effect only
when SP3501 001 is set to "1" (Fixed). With the setting at "0" the LD output is
100%. This can be adjusted in the range –117 to +127 (44% to 160%). The "0"
setting is equivalent to 0.171 mW exposed on the surface of the drum. The LD
power level is normally adjusted during the process control self-check. These
values are used only when automatic process control is switched OFF (by setting
SP3501 001 to "1").
Std Speed:K
[-117~+127/1]
Std Speed:M
Std Speed:C
Std Speed:Y
Low Speed:K
[-117~+127/1]
Low Speed:M
Low Speed:C
Low Speed:Y

5-42

April, 2007

2212

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
2251

001
002
003
004
005
006

2252

001
002
003
004

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Set Dev DC
Development DC: Fixed Setting
These SPs set the development dc bias for the standard speed mode and low
speed mode for each color, but take effect only when SP3501 001 is set to "1"
(Fixed). The dc development bias (absolute value) is set to –200 V, and the default
for each color is set to –500 V. These values are used only when automatic
process control is switched OFF (by setting SP3501 001 to "1").
Std Speed:K
[-800~0/1 V]
Std Speed:M
Std Speed:C
Std Speed:Y
Low Speed:K
[-800~0/1 V]
Low Speed:M
Low Speed:C
Low Speed:Y
Force Tnr Supply
Forced Toner Supply: Manual Execution
Use SPs to increase manually the supply of toner to the sub hopper of the
development unit to determine if toner supply is abnormal or to recover normal
operation of a color toner supply when image density becomes light. After you
press "Execute" the toner supply switches ON for 0.1 sec. and then OFF for 0.45
sec. four times for the select color or colors.
Execute:K
Executes forced toner supply to the selected
development unit.
Execute:M
Execute:C
Execute:Y
Execute:Col
Executes forced toner supply to the Y, M, C development
units only.
Execute:All Col
Executes forced toner supply to all development units (Y,
M, C, K).
Set Tnr Supply
Forced Toner Supply: Setting
Use these SPs to adjust the number of rotations done by the toner supply clutch
when SP2251 001~006 is executed manually. The number of toner supply cluth
rotations can be adjusted for each color. A high setting increases the number of
rotations and increases the amount of toner supply to the development unit,
resulting in a darker image for the selected color.
Supply Times:K
[0~30/1]
Supply Times:M
Supply Times:C
Supply Times:Y

5-43

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2253

001
002
003
004
005
006

2260
001
002
003
004
005
2261
001
002
003
004
005
006

April, 2007

Manual Tnr Fill
Manually Fill Development Unit Sub Hoppers
Use SPs to increase manually the supply of toner to the sub hopper of the
development unit to determine if toner supply is abnormal or to recover normal
operation of a color toner supply when image density becomes light. After you
press "Execute" the toner supply cluth switches ON for 2 sec. and then OFF for 0.1
sec. to fill the sub hopper of the development unit. This ON/OFF sequence is
repeated up to 20 times or until the toner end sensor detects that toner is present
in the sub hopper.
Execute:K
Executes forced filling of the selected development unit.
Execute:M
Execute:C
Execute:Y
Execute:Col
Executes forced filling of the Y, M, C development units
only.
Execute:All Col
Executes forced filling of all development units (Y, M, C,
K).
Pot.Sn Check
Potential Sensor Check
This SP executes a check of all or one selected potential sensor.
All Colors
Select and press "Execute".
K
Display the results with SP2261 001 to 012
M
C
Y
Pot.Sn Chk Disp
Potential Sensor Check Results Display
Displays results of the potential sensor check executed with 2260.
Vd:K
007 Vr:C
Vd:M
008 Vr:Y
Vd:C
009 Voffset:K
Vd:Y
010 Voffset:M
Vr:K
011 Voffset:C
Vr:M
012 Voffset:Y

Notes for SP2261
Reading
Vd

Definition
Charge bias (Cdc). This is the output
of the potential sensor after –700V is
applied to the drum.
Range: -500 to –700 V

Vr

Residual voltage. This is the output of
the potential sensor after the LD fires
at full power.
Normal: -200 V

Voffset

This is the reading of the potential
sensor with no charge applied to the
drum.
Normal: 0±10V

5-44

Abnormal Reading
If the reading is out of range:
• Potential sensor damaged
• Charge unit malfunction
• Charge power pack malfunction
If above –200V:
• Drum deteriorated
• Toner shield glass dirty
• Potential sensor out of position
If reading is out of range:
• Potential sensor dirty
• Potential sensor out of position

April, 2007
2262
001
002
003
004
005
2263
001
002
003
004

2264
2265

001
002
003
004
2301

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

TD Sn Chk
TD (toner density) Sensor Check Execution
This SP executes a check of all or one selected TD sensor.
All Colors
Select and press "Execute".
K
Display the results with SP2663 001 to 004
M
C
Y
TD Sn Chk Disp Toner Density Sensor Check Execution Display
Displays results of 2262. Vt is the most recent output of the TD sensor.
Vt:K
Vt:M
Vt:C
Vt:Y

ID Sn Chk
ID Sensor Check Execution
This SP executes a check of the ID sensors.
ID Sn Chk Disp
Displays the most recent ID sensor Vsg and Voffset readings.
Notes:
• Vsg_reg is the reading of the direct sensors in the black and color ID sensors
that detect the reflectivity of the bare surface of ITB. If Vsg_reg is less than 3.8V,
the ID sensor may be dirty, damaged, or disconnected
• F (Front) refers to the color ID sensor.
• R (Rear) refers to the black ID sensor.
• If Voffset_reg is less greater than 0.15, the ID sensor should be replaced. (The
ID sensors are replaced as a unit.)
Vsg_reg F
Vsg_reg R
Voffset_reg F
Voffset_reg R
Apply Oil

Not Used

5-45

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2302

001
002
003
004

April, 2007

Temp/Humid Disp
Temperature/Humidity Display
This SP displays the current temperature and humidity. These readings are output
by the temperature humidity display located on the bottom of the machine below the
waste toner bottle.
Temp Disp
Room temperature (oC).
[0~100/1 deg.]
Rel Humidity Disp
Relative humidity (saturation point at current temperature).
[0~100/1 %rh.]
Abs Humidity Disp
Absolute humidity.
[0~1000/m2]
Current Env Disp
Displays the current environment control mode. The
control modes are divided into 5 levels: LL, ML, MM, MH,
HH. These levels are determined by thresholds
determined for the other readings of this SP and the
reading of the absolute humidity (SP2301 003).

2303

Force Temp Corr
Force Ambient Temperature Correction DFU
The temperature/humidity sensor reading is used to adjust settings during process
control when this SP is set to zero (the default). The value of the absolute humidity
reading displayed by SP2302 003, as well as the other readings of the conditions
around the machine displayed with SP2302, are used in the process control
calculations. If you press any key (1 to 5) below, the value you select is used and the
readings of the temperature/humidity sensor are ignored.
Note: After you press any key (1 to 5), the setting you select remains in effect only
while the machine is in the SP mode. Once you leave the SP mode, this SP is reset
to zero automatically.
0
Sensor Detect
1
LL
2
ML
3
MM
4
MH
5
HH

2304

Set Humid Thresh
Ambient HumidityThreshold Setting
Sets the threshold values for the absolute humidity of the current LL and ML settings
for the main machine in the present environment.
Abs Humid:Thresh1
[0~1000g/m3]
Abs Humid:Thresh2
[0~1000g/m3]
Abs Humid:Thresh3
[0~1000g/m3]
Abs Humid:Thresh4
[0~1000g/m3]

001
002
003
004
2306
001
002

Vd Link Corr
Vd Link Correction
No information is available at this time.
Set
[0~1/1] 0:Off, 1: On
Correction Coeff
[0.01~2.5/0.01]

5-46

April, 2007

2307

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
2308
001
002
003
004
2312

005

006
007
008
009
010
011
012

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Set Ptype Link
Paper Type Link Setting
For the copy mode selected, these SPs 1) switch the image transfer bias for each
color and 2) switch the paper transfer and separation bias
Norm
[0~5/1]
0: Normal Paper
Recycled Paper
1: Thick Paper
Special Paper
2: OHP
Color 1
3: Special Paper 1
Color 2
4: Special Paper 2
OHP
5: Special Paper 3
Thick
Letterhead
Tab Sheet
Labels
Preprinted
Prepunched
Bond
Custom 1
Custom 2
Custom 3
Set Psize Thresh
Set Paper Size Thresholds
Sets the correction values (Threshold 1, 2, 3, 4) for paper size.
Thresh 1
[0~25/1 mm]
Thresh 2
[0~25/1 mm]
Thresh 3
[0~25/1 mm]
Thresh 4
[0~25/1 mm]
Margin K Bias

Margin K Bias: Setting

Full Speed: 52 to 128 g/m² (normal paper)
Half Speed: 128 to 256 g/m² (thick paper)
Full Spd:ITB
Sets the value of image transfer bias for K in the areas of
the image where nothing is printed.
[0~500/0.1]
Full Spd:PTR
[-100 to –6/1 µA]
Full Spd:SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µA]
Full Spd:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 kV]]
Half Spd:ITB
[0~500/0.1 µA]
Half Spd:PTR
[-100~0/1 µA]
Half Spd:SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µA]
Half Spd:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 kV]]

5-47

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2313

2314

2315

011
012
013
014
016
017
018
020
021
022
023
025
026
027
2316

002
003
004
005
007
2381

006
011

April, 2007

Margin FC Bias
Margin FC Bias: Setting for K
This SP sets the image transfer bias for each in areas of the image where nothing
is printed in the full-color mode.
Set ProCon Bias
Process Control: Bias Setting for K
This SP sets the image transfer bias for each color during the process control selfcheck.
Set MUSIC Bias
MUSIC Bias Setting
This SP sets the image transfer bias for each color during MUSIC.
Note:
Full Speed: 52 to 128 g/m² (normal paper)
Half Speed: 128 to 256 g/m² (thick paper)
2313
2314
2315
Full Spd:ITB:K
[0~500/0.1µA]
[0~500/0.1µA]
[0~500/0.1µA]
Full Spd:ITB:M
[0~500/0.1µA]
[0~500/0.1µA]
[0~500/0.1µA]
Full Spd:ITB:C
[0~500/0.1µA]
[0~500/0.1µA]
[0~500/0.1µA]
Full Spd:ITB:Y
[0~500/0.1µA]
[0~500/0.1µA]
[0~500/0.1µA]
Full Spd:PTR
[-6~0/1µA]
[-6~0/1µA]
[-6~0/1µA]
Full Spd:SepDC
[0~100/0.1µA]
[0~100/0.1µA]
[0~100/0.1µA]
Full Spd:SepAC
[80~120/0.1µA]
[70~100/0.1µA]
[80~120/0.1µA]
Half Spd:ITB:K
[0~500/0.1µA]
[0~500/0.1µA]
[0~500/0.1µA]
Half Spd:ITB:M
[0~500/0.1µA]
[0~500/0.1µA]
[0~500/0.1µA]
Half Spd:ITB:C
[0~500/0.1µA]
[0~500/0.1µA]
[0~500/0.1µA]
Half Spd:ITB:Y
[0~500/0.1µA]
[0~500/0.1µA]
[0~500/0.1µA]
Half Spd:PTR
[-100~0/1µA]
[-100~0/1µA]
[-100~0/1µA]
Half Spd:SepDC
[0~100/0.1µA]
[0~100/0.1µA]
[0~100/0.1µA]
Half Spd:SepAC
[80~20/0.1kV]
[80~20/0.1kV]
[80~20/0.1kV]
Pwr On Jam Bias
Power On/Jam Recovery: Bias Setting
Sets the image development bias to be applied for each color after recovery from a
paper jam at power ON.
ITB:K
[0 to 50/0.1 µA]
ITB:M
ITB:C
ITB:Y
PTR
Ptype K:LL
Paper Type K: LL
This SP sets image transfer bias for LL (lowest) speed during black-and-white
copying in areas where black is used to develop the image.
Full Spd:ITB
[10~250/1%]
Half Spd:ITB
[10~250/1%]

5-48

April, 2007

2382

006
011
2383

006
011
2384

006
011
2385

006
011
2391

2392

2393

012
013
014
015
022
023
024
025

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Ptype K:ML
Paper Type K: ML
This SP sets image transfer bias for ML (Medium Low) speed during black-andwhite copying in areas where black is used to develop the image.
Full Spd:ITB
[10~250/1%]
Half Spd:ITB
[10~250/1%]
Ptype K:MM
Paper Type K: MM
This SP sets image transfer bias for MM (Medium) speed during black-and-white
copying in areas where black is used to develop the image.
Full Spd:ITB
[10~250/1%]
Half Spd:ITB
[10~250/1%]
Ptype K:MH
Paper Type K:MH
This SP sets image transfer bias for MH (Medium High) speed during black-andwhite copying in areas where black is used to develop the image.
Full Spd:ITB
[10~250/1%]
Half Spd:ITB
[10~250/1%]
Ptype K:HH
Paper Type K:HH
This SP sets image transfer bias for HH (Highest) speed during black-and-white
copying in areas where black is used to develop the image.
Full Spd:ITB
[10~250/1%]
Half Spd:ITB
[10~250/1%]
Ptype FC:LL
Paper Type FC:LL
This SP sets image transfer bias for LL (Lowest) speed during full-color copying in
areas where each color is used to develop the image.
Ptype FC:ML
Paper Type FC:ML
This SP sets image transfer bias for ML (Medium Low) speed during full-color
copying in areas where each color is used to develop the image.
Ptype FC:MM
Paper Type FC:MM
This SP sets image transfer bias for MM (Medium) speed during full-color copying in
areas where each color is used to develop the image.
2391
2392
2393
Full Spd:ITB:K
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Full Spd:ITB:M
Full Spd:ITB:C
Full Spd:ITB:Y
Half Spd:ITB:K
Half Spd:ITB:K
Half Spd:ITB:C
Half Spd:ITB:Y

5-49

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2394

2395

012
013
014
015
022
023
024
025

2401

001
007
008
009
012
013
014
2406

001
002
003
004
013
014
015
021
022
023

April, 2007

Ptype FC:MH
Paper Type FC:MH
This SP sets image transfer bias for MH (Medium High) speed during full-color
copying in areas where each color is used to develop the image.
Ptype FC:HH
Paper Type FC:HH
This SP sets image transfer bias for HH (Highest) speed during full-color copying in
areas where each color is used to develop the image.
2394
2395
Full Spd:ITB:K
Full Spd:ITB:M
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Full Spd:ITB:C
Full Spd:ITB:Y
Half Spd:ITB:K
Half Spd:ITB:K
Half Spd:ITB:C
Half Spd:ITB:Y
Norm K Bias
Set Bias for Plain Paper: K (Black)
Sets the standard value of bias voltages at image transfer, and paper separation in
areas where black is used on plain paper during black-and-white printing.
ITB
[0~500/0.1 µA]
Side1:PTR
[-100~0/0.1 µA]
Side1:SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µA]
Side1:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 kV]
Side2:PTR
[-100~0/1 µA]
Side2:SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µA]
Side2:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 kV]
Norm FC Bias
Set Bias for Plain Paper: FC (Full Color)
Sets the standard value of bias voltages at image transfer, and paper separation in
areas the four colors are used on plain paper during full color printing.
ITB:K
[0~500/0.1 µA]
ITB:M
[0~500/0.1 µA]
ITB:C
[0~500/0.1 µA]
ITM:Y
[0~500/0.1 µA]
Side1:PTR
[-100~0/1 µA]
Side1:SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µA]
Side1:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 µA]
Side1:PTR
[-100~0/1 µA]
Side1:SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µA]
Side1:SepAC
[80~120/1 µA]

5-50

April, 2007

2411

007
012

2412

007
012

2413

007
012

2414

007
012

2415

007
012

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Size Coeff:Norm
Size Correction Coefficient for Plain Paper: Size 1
These settings apply to paper sizes wider than the paper size of SP2308 001
(Threshold 1) and are applied only to 1) areas where image is created, 2) plain
paper at full speed only, 3) both black-and-white or full color mode
Applies to Side 1 of duplex page.
Side1:Size
:PTR
[100~600/1%]
Applies to Side 2 of duplex page.
Side2:Size
:PTR
[100~600/1%]
Size Coeff:Norm
Size Correction Coefficient for Plain Paper: Size 2
These settings apply to paper sizes wider than the paper size of SP2308 002
(Threshold 2) and are applied only to 1) areas where image is created, 2) plain
paper at full speed only, 3) both black-and-white or full color mode
Side1:Size2:PTR
Applies to Side 1 of duplex page.
[100~600/1%]
Side2:Size2:PTR
Applies to Side 2 of duplex page.
[100~600/1%]
Size Coeff:Norm
Size Correction Coefficient for Plain Paper: Size 3
These settings apply to paper sizes wider than the paper size of SP2308 003
(Threshold 3) and are applied only to 1) areas where image is created, 2) plain
paper at full speed only, 3) both black-and-white or full color mode
Side1:Size3:PTR
Applies to Side 1 of duplex page.
[100~600/1%]
Side2:Size3:PTR
Applies to Side 2 of duplex page.
[100~600/1%]
Size Coeff:Norm
Size Correction Coefficient for Plain Paper: Size 4
These settings apply to paper sizes wider than the paper size of SP2308 004
(Threshold 4) and are applied only to 1) areas where image is created, 2) plain
paper at full speed only, 3) both black-and-white or full color mode
Side1:Size4:PTR
Applies to Side 1 of duplex page.
[100~600/1%]
Side2:Size4:PTR
Applies to Side 2 of duplex page.
[100~600/1%]
Size Coeff:Norm
Size Correction Coefficient for Plain Paper: Size 5
These settings apply to paper sizes wider than the paper size of SP2308 004
(Threshold 4), or narrower than the paper size of SP2308 003 (Threshold 3), and are
applied only to 1) areas where image is created, 2) plain paper at full speed only, 3)
both black-and-white or full color mode.
Side1:Size5:PTR
Applies to Side 1 of duplex page.
[100~600/1%]
Side2:Size5:PTR
Applies to Side 2 of duplex page.
[100~600/1%]

5-51

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2421

001
007
008
009
012
013
014
2422

001
002
003
004
2423

007
012
2424

April, 2007

LEdge Cor:Norm K
Leading Edge Correction for Plain Paper: K
This SP sets the coefficient used to 1) correct bias at the leading edge for black
image transfer (ITB) 2) bias at image to paper transfer, and 3) correct the dc and ac
voltages applied at paper separation.
Notes: These settings apply:
• To the distance from the leading edge set with SP2422
• Only to black printing on plain paper at full speed (even when full-color is
selected).
ITB
[0~400/1%]
Side1:PTR
Note: ITB applies to both sides.
Side1:SepDC
Side1:SepAC
Side2:PTR
Side2:SepDC
Side2:SepAC
LEdge SWT:Norm K
Leading Edge Switch Timing for Plain Paper: K
Sets the switch OFF timing SP2421. The value selected is the number of mm from
the leading edge of the paper. These settings 1) apply only to black printing on plain
paper at full speed (even when full-color is selected), and 2) apply to to both sides of
a duplex page.
ITB
[0~30/1 mm]
PTR
[0~30/1 mm]
SepDC
[0~30/1 mm]
SepAC
TEdgeCor:Norm K
Trailing Edge Correction for Plain Paper: K
This SP sets the coefficient used to correct bias at image to paper transfer for each
side of the paper. These settings are applied to the trailing edge for black printing on
plain paper at full speed and apply to black, even when printing in full color mode.
Side1:PTR
[0~400/1%]
Side2:PTR
TEdgeSWT:Norm K PTR
Trailing Edge Switch Timing for Plain Paper: K
This setting sets the start timing for application of SP2423 at the trailing edge of
each sheet (Side 1, Side 2). This setting is applied to the trailing edge for black
printing on plain paper at full speed and apply to black, even when printing in full
color mode.
[-100~0/1 mm]
The “mm” distance is measured away from the trailing edge of the image.

5-52

April, 2007

2426

001
007
008
009
012
013
014
2427

001
002
003
004
2428

007
012
2429
002

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

LEdgeCor:Norm FC
Leading Edge Correction for Plain Paper: FC
This SP sets the coefficient used to 1) correct bias at the leading edge for full-color
image transfer (ITB) bias at image to paper transfer when using plain paper, and 3)
correct the dc and ac voltages applied at paper separation.
Notes: These settings apply:
• Only the distance from the leading edge set with SP2427.
• Only to full color printing on plain paper at full speed.
[0~400/1%]
ITB
[0~400/1%]
Side1:PTR
[0~400/1%]
Side1:SepDC
[0~400/1%]
Side1:SepAC
[0~400/1%]
Side2:PTR
[0~400/1%]
Side2:SepDC
[0~400/1%]
Side2:SepAC
LEdgeSWT:Norm FC
Leading Edge Switch Timing for Plain Paper: FC
This SP sets switch timing that sets the distance from the leading edge where the
settings of SP2426 001 are to apply. The value selected is the number of mm from
the leading edge of the paper. These settings 1) apply only full-color printing on
plain paper at full speed, and 2) apply to to both sides of a duplex page.
ITB
[0~30/1 mm]
PTR
[0~30/1 mm]
SepDC
[0~30/1 mm]
SepAC
[0~30/1 mm]
TEdgeCor:Norm FC
Trailing Edge Correction for Plain Paper: FC
This SP sets the coefficient used to correct bias at image to paper transfer for each
side of the paper. These settings are applied to the trailing edge for full-color
printing on plain paper at full speed as far as where SP2429 002 takes effect.
Side1:PTR
[0~400/1%]
Side2:PTR
TEdgeSWT:Norm FC – PTR Switch Timing for Plain Paper: FC
This setting sets the start timing for application of SP2428 007, 2428 012 at the
trailing edge of each sheet (Side 1, Side 2). These settings are applied to the
trailing edge for black printing on plain paper at full speed and apply to black, even
when printing in full color mode.
[-100~0/1 mm]
The “mm” distance is measured away from the trailing edge of the image.

5-53

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2431
2432
2433

007
008
009
012
013
014
2434
2435

007
008
009
012
013
014

April, 2007

Norm:K:LL
Plain Paper: K Low
Norm:K:ML
Plain Paper: K Medium Low
Norm:K:MM
Plain Paper: K Medium
These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer
bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from
the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
SP2431 – Up to SP2304 001: Threshold 1
SP2432 – More than SP2304 001 Threshold 1, up to SP2304 002 Threshold 2.
SP2433 – More than SP2304 002 Threshold 2, up to SP2304 003 Threshold 3
These settings apply 1) only where the image is created in black (in either blackand-white or full-color mode) on plain paper at full speed.
2431
2432
2433
Side1:PTR
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side1:SepDC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side1:SepAC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:PTR
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:SepDC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:SepAC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Norm:K:MH
Plain Paper: K Medium High
Norm:K:HH
Plain Paper: K High
These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer
bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from
the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
SP2434 – More than SP2304 003 Threshold 3, up to SP2304 004 Threshold 4
SP2435 – More than SP2304 004 Threshold 4
These settings apply 1) only where the image is created in black (in either blackand-white or full-color mode) on plain paper.
SP2432
SP2432
Side1:PTR
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side1:SepDC
[10~250/1%]
Side1:SepAC
[10~250/1%]
Side2:PTR
[10~250/1%]
Side2:SepDC
[10~250/1%]
Side2:SepAC
[10~250/1%]

5-54

April, 2007

2441
2442
2443

017
018
019
027
028
029
2444
2445

017
018
019
027
028
029
2501

001
007
008
009
012
013
014

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Norm:FC:LL
Plain Paper: FC Low
Norm:FC:ML
Plain Paper: FC Medium Low
Norm:FC:MM
Plain Paper: FC Medium Medium
These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer
bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from
the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
SP2441 – Up to SP2304 001: Threshold 1
SP2442 – More than SP2304 001 Threshold 1, up to SP2304 002 Threshold 2.
SP2443 – More than SP2304 002 Threshold 2, up to SP2304 003 Threshold 3
These settings apply 1) only where the image is created in full-color on plain paper
at full speed.
SP2441
SP2442
SP2443
Side1:PTR
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side1:SepDC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side1:SepAC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:PTR
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:SepDC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:SepAC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Norm:FC:MH
Plain Paper: FC Medium High
Norm:FC:HH
Plain Paper: FC High
These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer
bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from
the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
SP2444 – More than SP2304 003 Threshold 3, up to SP2304 004 Threshold 4
SP2445 – More than SP2304 004 Threshold 4
These settings apply 1) only where the image is created in black (in either blackand-white or full-color mode) on plain paper.
SP2444
SP2445
Side1:PTR
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side1:SepDC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side1:SepAC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:PTR
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:SepDC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:SepAC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Set Bias:Thk:K
Set Bias for Thick Paper: K
This SP sets the image transfer bias for the drum to ITB image transfer at the black
PCU when using thick paper and printing in black-and-white mode.
ITB
[-100~0/1 µA]
Side1:PTR
[0~100/0.1 µA]
Side1:SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µA]
Side1:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 µA]
Side2:PTR
[-100~0/1 µA]
Side2:SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µA]
Side2:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 µA]

5-55

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2506

001
002
003
004
013
014
015
021
022
023
2511

007
012
2512

007
012
2513

007
012
2514

007
012

April, 2007

Set Bias:Thk:FC
Set Bias for Thick Paper: FC
This SP sets the following items with printing full-color on thick paper: 1) the image
transfer bias for the drum to ITB image transfer for each color, 2) the ITB image to
paper transfer, 3) DC/AC paper separation voltages for both sides duplex sheets.
ITB:K
[0~500/0.1 µA]
ITB:M
[0~500/0.1 µA]
ITB:C
[0~500/0.1 µA]
ITB:Y
[0~500/0.1 µA]
Side1:PTR
[-100~0/1 µA]
Side1:SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µA]
Side1:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 kV
Side2:PTR
[-100~0/1 µA]
Side2:SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µA]
Side2:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 kV
Size Coeff:Thk
Size Correction Coefficient: Thick Paper
These settings 1) apply to thick paper sizes wider than the paper size of 2308 001
Threshold 1, 2) apply to image areas only, 3) apply to thick paper mode (1/2 speed:
128 to 256 g/m²).
[100~600/1%]
Side1:Size
:PTR
Side2:Size
:PTR
Size Coeff:Thk
Size Correction Coefficient: Thick Paper
These settings 1) apply to above 2308 002 Threshold 2, and below SP2308 003
Threshold 3, 2) apply to image areas only, 3) apply to thick paper mode (1/2 speed:
128 to 256 g/m²).
Side1:Size2:PTR
[100~600/1%]
Side2:Size2:PTR
[100~600/1%]
Size Coeff:Thk
Size Correction Coefficient: Thick Paper
These settings 1) apply to above 2308 003 Threshold 3, and less than SP2308 002
Threshold 2, 2) apply to image areas only, 3) apply to thick paper mode (1/2 speed:
128 to 256 g/m²).
Side1:Size3:PTR
[100~600/1%]
Side2:Size3:PTR
[100~600/1%]
Size Coeff:Thk
Size Correction Coefficient: Thick Paper
These settings 1) apply to above 2308 004 Threshold 4, and less than SP2308 003
Threshold 3, 2) apply to image areas only, 3) apply to thick paper mode (1/2 speed:
128 to 256 g/m²).
Side1:Size4:PTR
[100~600/1%]
Side2:Size4:PTR
[100~600/1%]

5-56

April, 2007

2515

007
012
2521

001
007
008
009
012
013
014
2522

001
002
003
004
2523

007
012
2524

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Size Coeff:Thk
Size Correction Coefficient: Thick Paper
These settings 1) apply to paper widths up to SP2308 004 Threshold 4, 2) apply to
image areas only, 3) apply to thick paper mode (1/2 speed: 128 to 256 g/m²).
Side1:Size5:PTR
[100~600/1%]
Side2:Size5:PTR
[100~400/1%]
LEdge Cor:Thk:K
Leading Edge Correction: Thick Paper: K
This SP sets the coefficient used to 1) correct bias at the leading edge for black
image transfer (ITB), 2) bias at image to paper transfer on thick paper, and 3) correct
the dc and ac voltages applied at paper separation.
Notes: These settings apply:
• To the distance from the leading edge set with SP2522 001
• Only to black printing on plain paper at half-speed (128~256 g/m²), regardless
of whether black-and-white or full-color is selected.
ITB
[0~400/1%]
Side1:PTR
[0~400/1%]
Side1:SepDC
[0~400/1%]
Side1:SepAC
[0~400/1%]
Side2:PTR
[0~400/1%]
Side2:SepDC
[0~400/1%]
Side2:SepAC
[0~400/1%]
LEdge SWT:Thk:K
Leading Edge Switch Timing for Thick Paper: K
This SP sets switch timing that switches OFF the application of SP2521 for thick
paper. The value selected is the number of mm from the leading edge of the paper.
These settings 1) apply only to black printing on thick paper at half-speed (128~256
g/m2). and 2) apply to to both sides of a duplex page.
ITB
[0~30/1 mm]
PTR
[0~30/1 mm]
SepDC
[0~30/1 mm]
SepAC
TEdge Cor:Thk K
Trailing Edge Correction for Thick Paper: K
This SP sets the coefficient used to correct bias at image to paper transfer for each
side of the paper. These settings are applied to the trailing edge for black printing on
thick paper (128~256 g/m2) at half-speed and apply to black, even when printing in
full color mode.
Side1:PTR
[0~400/1%]
Side2:PTR
TEdge Cor:Thk:K – PTR
Trailing Edge Correction for Thick Paper: K
This setting sets the start timing for application of SP2523 012 at the trailing edge of
each sheet (Side 1, Side 2). This setting is applied to the trailing edge for black
printing on thick paper (128~256 g/m2) at half-speed and applies to black, even
when printing in full color mode.
[-100~0/1 mm]

5-57

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2526

001
007
008
009
012
013
014
2527

001
002
003
004
2528

007
012
2529
002

April, 2007

LEdge Cor:Thk:FC
Leading Edge Correction for Thick Paper: K
This SP sets the coefficient used to 1) correct bias at the leading edge for full-color
image transfer (ITB) bias at image to paper transfer when using thick paper
(128~256 g/m2), and 3) correct the dc and ac voltages applied at paper separation.
Notes: These settings apply:
• Only the distance from the leading edge set with SP2527.
• Only to full color printing on thick paper at half speed.
ITB
[0~400/1%]
Side1:PTR
[0~400/1%]
Side1:SepDC
[0~400/1%]
Side1:SepAC
Side2:PTR
[0~400/1%]
Side2:SepDC
[0~400/1%]
Side2:SepAC
LEdge SWT:Thk:FC
Leading Edge Switch Timing for Thick Paper: FC
This SP sets switch timing that sets the distance from the leading edge where the
settings of SP2526 001 are to apply. The value selected is the number of mm from
the leading edge of the paper. These settings 1) apply only full-color printing on thick
paper (128~256 g/m2) at half speed, and 2) apply to to both sides of a duplex page.
ITB
[0~30/1 mm]
PTR
[0~30/1 mm]
SepDC
[0~30/1 mm]
SepAC
TEdge Cor:Thk FC
Trailing Edge Correction for Thick Paper: FC
This SP sets the coefficient used to correct bias at image to paper transfer for each
side of the paper. These settings are applied to the trailing edge for full-color printing
on thick paper (128~256 g/m2) at half speed as far as where SP2529 002 takes
effect.
Side1:PTR
[0~400/1%]
Side2:PTR
TEdge Cor:Thk:FC – PTR
Trailing Edge Correction for Thick Paper: FC
This setting sets the start timing for application of SP2528 007, 2528 012 at the
trailing edge of each sheet (Side 1, Side 2). These settings are applied to the trailing
edge for black printing on plain paper at full speed and apply to black, even when
printing in full color mode.
[-100~0/1 mm]
The mm distance is measured away from the trailing edge of the image.

5-58

April, 2007

2531
2532
2533

007
008
009
012
013
014
2534
2535

007
008
009
012
013
014

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Thk:K:LL
Thick Paper: K Low
Thk:K:ML
Thick Paper: K Medium Low
Thk:K:MM
Thick Paper: K Medium
These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer
bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from
the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304 001
SP2431 – Up to SP2304 001: Threshold 1
SP2432 – More than SP2304 001 Threshold 1, up to SP2304 002 Threshold 2.
SP2433 – More than SP2304 002 Threshold 2, up to SP2304 003 Threshold 3
These settings apply only to the image area printed on thick paper in black-andwhite mode at half-speed (128~256 g/m2).
SP2531
SP2532
SP2533
Side1:PTR
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side1:SepDC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side1:SepAC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:PTR
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:SepDC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:SepAC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Thk:K:MH
Thick Paper: K Medium High
Thk:K:HH
Thick Paper: K High
These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer
bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from
the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
SP2534 – More than SP2304 003 Threshold 3, up to SP2304 004 Threshold 4
SP2535 – More than SP2304 004 Threshold 4
These settings apply 1) only where the image is created in black (in either black-andwhite or full-color mode) on plain paper.
SP2534
SP2535
Side1:PTR
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side1:SepDC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side1:SepAC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:PTR
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:SepDC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:SepAC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]

5-59

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2541
2542
2543

017
018
019
027
028
029
2544
2545

017
018
019
027
028
029
2601

001
002
003
004

April, 2007

Thk:FC:LL
Thick Paper: FC Low
Thk:FC:ML
Thick Paper: FC Medium Low
Thk:FC:MM
Thick Paper: FC Medium
These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer
bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from
the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
SP2541 – Up to SP2304 001: Threshold 1
SP2542 – More than SP2304 001 Threshold 1, up to SP2304 002 Threshold 2.
SP2543 – More than SP2304 002 Threshold 2, up to SP2304 003 Threshold 3
These settings apply 1) only where the image is created in full-color on thick paper
(128~256 g/m2) at full speed.
2541
2542
2543
Side1:PTR
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side1:SepDC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side1:SepAC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:PTR
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:SepDC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:SepAC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Thk:FC:MH
Thick Paper: FC Medium High
Thk:FC:HH
Thick Paper: FC High
These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer
bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from
the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
SP2544 – More than SP2304 003 Threshold 3, up to SP2304 004 Threshold 4
SP2545 – More than SP2304 004 Threshold 4
These settings apply 1) only where the image is created in full-color on thick paper
(128~256 g/m2) at full speed.
SP2544
SP2545
Side1:PTR
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side1:SepDC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side1:SepAC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:PTR
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:SepDC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
Side2:SepAC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
OHP K Bias
Set Bias for Transparency: K
This SP sets the following standard bias voltages applied for the image area on OHP
in the black-and-white mode at 1) image transfer from drum to ITB, 2) image transfer
from ITB to paper, and 3) at paper separation from the ITB.
ITB
[0~500/0.1 µA]
PTR
[-100~0/0.1 µA]
SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µA]
SepAC
[80~120/0.1 µA]

5-60

April, 2007

2606

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
2611

002

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

OHP FC Bias
Set Bias for Transparency: K
This SP sets the following standard bias voltages applied for the image area on OHP
in the full-color mode at 1) image transfer from drum to ITB for each color, 2) image
transfer from ITB to paper, and 3) at paper separation from the ITB.
ITB: K
[0~500/0.1 µA]
ITB: M
[0~500/0.1 µA]
ITB: C
[0~500/0.1 µA]
ITB: Y
[-100~0/0.1 µA]
PTR
[0~100/0.1 µA]
SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µA]
SepAC
[80~120/0.1 µA]
Size Coeff:OHP
Size Correction Coefficient for Transparency
This SP setting applies to 1) OHP widths above Threshold 1 (SP2308 001), 2) the
image area only, 3) OHP only, 4) either black-and-white or full-color mode.
[100~600/1%]
Size
:PTR

2613

Size Coeff:OHP
Size Correction Coefficient for Transparency
This SP setting applies to 1) OHP widths larger Threshold 3 (SP2308 002) and
smaller than Threshold , 2) the image area only, 3) OHP only, 4) either black-andwhite or full-color mode.
[100~600/1%]

2621

LEdge Cor:OHP K
Leading Edge Correction for Transparency: K
These SPs do the following settings when printing on OHP in the black-and-white
mode at half-speed (128~256 g/m2):
1) ITB: Sets strength/timing of the correction coefficient for the application of bias
when the image is transferred from the drum to the ITB.
2) PTR: Sets the strength/timing correction coefficient for the application of bias
when the image is transferred from ITB.
3) SepDC, SepAC: Set the strength/timing of the dc and ac charges applied to
neutralize the charges on the belt and paper so they will separate more easily.
Note: SP2621 selects the strength of the bias coefficient, and SP2622 sets the start
timing of the bias application.
LEdge SWT:OHP K
Leading Edge Switch Timing for Transparency: K
Sets the switch OFF timing of SP2626. The selected value is the number of mm from
the leading edge. Applies only to printing in black-and-white mode on OHP in halfspeed mode (128~256 g/m2).
2621
2622
ITB
[0~400/1%]
[0~30/1 mm]
PTR
[0~400/1%]
[0~30/1 mm]
SepDC
[0~400/1%]
[0~30/1 mm]
SepAC
[0~400/1%]
[0~30/1 mm]

2622

001
002
003
004

5-61

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2623

2624

2626

2627

001
002
003
004

2628
002
2629
002

April, 2007

TEdge Cor:OHP K – PTR
Trailing Edge Correction for Transparency: K
Sets the strength of the bias coefficient for the bias applied at the trailing edge when
the image is transferred from ITB to paper. Applied when printing in black-and-white
mode on OHP at half-speed (128~256 g/m2).
TEdge SWT:OHP K – PTR
Trailing Edge Switch Timing for Transparency: K
Sets the switch timing that determines the distance from the leading edge where the
SP2623 002 setting is applied during image transfer from ITB to paper. Applied only
when printing in black-and-white mode on OHP at half speed (128~256 g/m2).
2623
2624
[0~400/1%]
[-100~0/1%]
LEdge Cor:OHP FC
Leading Edge Correction for Transparency: FC
These SPs do the following settings when printing on OHP in the full-color mode at
half-speed (128~256 g/m2):
1) ITB: Sets the correction coefficient for the application of bias when the image is
transferred from the drum to the ITB. The selected value is the distance in mm from
the leading edge.
2) PTR: Sets the correction coefficient for the application of bias when the image is
transferred from ITB.
3) SepDC, SepAC: Set the dc/ac charges applied to neutralize the charges on the
belt and paper so they will separate more easily.
Note: SP2626 selects the strength of the bias coefficient, and SP2627 sets the start
timing of the bias application.
LEdge SWT:OHP FC
Leading Edge Switch Timing for Transparency: FC
Sets the switch OFF timing of SP2626. The selected value is the number of mm from
the leading edge. Applies only to printing in full-color mode on OHP in half-speed
mode (128~256 g/m2).
2626
2627
ITB
[0~400/1%]
[0~30/1 mm]
PTR
[0~400/1%]
[0~30/1 mm]
SepDC
[0~400/1%]
[0~30/1 mm]
SepAC
[0~400/1%]
[0~30/1 mm]

TEdge Cor:OHP FC – PTR Trailing Edge Correction for Transparency: FC
Sets the start timing for SP2629 002 at the trailing edge. Applied to the trailing edge
for full-color printing on OHP at half-speed (128~256 g/m2).
TEdge SWT:Thk FC – PTR Switch Timing for Transparency: FC
Sets the switch timing that determines the distance from the leading edge where the
settings of SP2628 002 are applied during image transfer from ITB to OHP during
full-color printing at half-speed (128~256 g/m2).
2628
2629
[0~400/1%]
[-100~0/1%]

5-62

April, 2007

2631
2632
2633
2634
2635

002
003
004
002
003
004

2641
2642
2643
2644
2645

007
008
009
007
008
009

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

OHP:K:LL
Transparency: K Low
OHP:K:ML
Transparency: K Medium Low
OHP:K:MM
Transparency: K Medium
OHP:K:MH
Transparency: K Medium High
OHP:K:HH
Transparency: K High
These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer
bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from
the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304 001.
SP2631 – Up to SP2304 001: Threshold 1
SP2632 – More than SP2304 001 Threshold 1, up to SP2304 002 Threshold 2.
SP2633 – More than SP2304 002 Threshold 2, up to SP2304 003 Threshold 3.
SP2634 – More than SP2304 003 Threshold 3, up to SP2304 004 Threshold 4.
SP2635 – More than SP2304 004 Threshold 4
These settings apply only to the image area printed on OHP in black-and-white
mode at half-speed (128~256 g/m2).
2631
2632
2633
PTR
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
SepDC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
SepAC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
2634
2635
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
PTR
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
SepDC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
SepAC

OHP:FC:LL
Transparency: FC Low
OHP:FC:ML
Transparency: FC Medium Low
OHP:FC:MM
Transparency: FC Medium
OHP:FC:MH
Transparency: FC Medium High
OHP:FC:HH
Transparency: FC High
These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer
bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from
the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304 001.
SP2631 – Up to SP2304 001: Threshold 1
SP2632 – More than SP2304 001 Threshold 1, up to SP2304 002 Threshold 2.
SP2633 – More than SP2304 002 Threshold 2, up to SP2304 003 Threshold 3.
SP2634 – More than SP2304 003 Threshold 3, up to SP2304 004 Threshold 4.
SP2635 – More than SP2304 004 Threshold 4
These settings apply only to the image area printed on OHP in full-color mode at
half-speed (128~256 g/m2).
2641
2642
2643
PTR
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
SepDC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
SepAC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
2644
2645
PTR
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
SepDC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]
SepAC
[10~250/1%]
[10~250/1%]

5-63

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES
2751

001
007
008
009
012
013
014
2756

001
002
003
004
013
014
015
021
022
023

April, 2007

Sp1 K Bias
Set Bias for Special Paper 1: K
These SPs set the standard values of the electrical charges that are applied to 1)
create bias for image transfer from drum to ITB, 2) create bias for image transfer
from ITB to paper (PTR), and 3) neutralize the charges on the both sides of the
paper to separate the paper from the ITB (SepDC, SepAC). These settings are used
when printing on Special Paper 1 in the black-and-white mode and are applied only
to the image area.
ITB
[0~500/0.1 µa]
Side1:PTR
[-100~0/1 µa]
Side1:SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µa]
Side1:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 kV]
Side2:PTR
[-100~0/0.1 µa]
Side2:SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µa]
Side2:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 kV]
Sp1 K Bias
Set Bias for Special Paper 1: K
These SPs set the standard values of the electrical charges that are applied to 1)
create bias for image transfer from drum of each color (Y, M, C, K) to the ITB, 2)
create bias for image transfer from ITB to paper (PTR), and 3) neutralize the charges
on the both sides of the paper to separate the paper from the ITB (SepDC, SepAC).
These settings are used only for Y, M, C, K when printing on Special Paper 1 in the
full-color mode and are applied only to the image area.
ITB:K
[0~500/0.1 µa]
ITB:M
[0~500/0.1 µa]
ITB:C
[0~500/0.1 µa]
ITB:Y
[0~500/0.1 µa]
Side1:PTR
[-100~0/1 µa]
Side1:SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µa]
Side1:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 kV]
Side2:PTR
[-100~0/1 µa]
Side2:SepDC
[200~1000/0.1 µa]
Side1:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 kV]

5-64

April, 2007

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

These SPs (SP2761~SP2765) set the paper size correction coefficients for Special
Paper 1 relative to the settings done with SP2308 (Set Psize Thresh). All of hese
settings:
• Apply to printing on Special Paper 1 in the black-and-white mode
• Apply only to the image area
The title of each SP tells you the side and size where the setting is applied at ITBto-paper transfer, for example: "Side1:Size1:PTR" means the setting applies to
only the first side of Size 1 when the image is transferred from belt to paper.
2761
007
012
2762
007
012
2763
007
012
2764
007
012
2765
007
012

Size Coeff:Sp1
Side1:Size1:PTR
Side2:Size1:PTR
Size Coeff:Sp1
Side1:Size2:PTR
Side2:Size2:PTR
Size Coeff:Sp1
Side1:Size3:PTR
Side2:Size3:PTR
Size Coeff:Sp1
Side1:Size4:PTR
Side2:Size4:PTR
Size Coeff:Sp1
Side1:Size5:PTR
Side2:Size5:PTR

2771

LEdge Cor:Sp1:K
Leading Edge Correction for Special Paper 1: K
Sets the leading edge correction coefficient when bias is applied as far as allowed
by the seting of SP2772 for drum to image transfer of the image during black and
white copying on Special Paper 1.
ITB
[0~400/5%]
Side1:PTR
Side1:SepDC
Side1:SepAC
Side2:PTR
Side2:SepDC
Side2:SepAC
LEdge SWT:Sp1:K
Leading Edge Switch Timing for Special Paper 1: K
Sets the switch OFF timing of SP2771 . The selected value is the number of mm
from the leading edge. Applies only to printing in black-and-white mode on Special
Paper 1.
ITB
[0~30/1 mm]
PTR
SepDC
SepAC

001
007
008
009
012
013
014
2772

001
002
003
004

Size Correction Coefficient for Special Paper 1
SP2308 001 Threshold 1
[100~600/5%]
Size Correction Coefficient for Special Paper 1
SP2308 002 Threshold 2, < SP2308 001 Threshold 1
[100~600/5%]
Size Correction Coefficient for Special Paper 1
SP2308 003 Threshold 3, < SP2308 002 Threshold 2
[100~600/5%]
Size Correction Coefficient for Special Paper 1
SP2308 004 Threshold 4, < SP2308 003 Threshold 3
[100~600/5%]
Size Correction Coefficient for Special Paper 1
Up to SP2308 004 Threshold 4
[100~600/5%]

5-65

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2773

007
012
2774

002
2776

001
007
008
009
012
013
014
2777

001
002
003
004

April, 2007

TEdge Cor:Sp1 K
Trailing Edge Correction for Special Paper 1: K
Sets the bias applied at the trailing edge when the image is transferred from ITB to
paper by setting the start timing for SP2774 002 at the trailing edge. Applied to the
trailing edge for black-and-white mode on Special Paper 1 only.
Side1:PTR
[0~400/5%]
Side2:PTR
TEdge SWT:Sp1 K
Trailing Edge Switch Timing for Special Paper 1: K
Sets the switch timing that determines the distance from the leading edge where
the settings of SP2773 is applied during image transfer from ITB to paper. Applied
only when in black-and-white mode on Special Paper 1.
PTR
[-100~0/1 mm]
LEdge Cor:Sp1 FC
Leading Edge Correction for Special Paper 1: FC
These SPs do the following settings when printing on Special Paper 1 in the fullcolor mode:
1) ITB: Sets strength/timing of the correction coefficient for the application of bias
when the image is transferred from the drum to the ITB.
2) PTR: Sets the strength/timing of thecorrection coefficient for the application of
bias when the image is transferred from ITB.
3) SepDC, SepAC: Set the strength/timing of the dc and ac charges applied to
neutralize the charges on the belt and paper so they will separate more easily.
Note: SP2776 selects the strength of the bias coefficient, and SP2777 sets the start
timing of the bias application.
ITB
[0~400/5%]
Side1:PTR
Side1:SepDC
Side1:SepAC
Side2:PTR
Side2:SepDC
Side2:SepAC
LEdge SWT:Sp1 FC
Leading Edge Switch Timing for Special Paper 1: FC
Sets the switch OFF timing of SP2776. The selected value is the number of mm
from the leading edge. Applies only to printing in full-color mode on Special Paper
1.
ITB
[0~30/1 mm]
PTR
SepDC
SepAC

5-66

April, 2007

2778

007
012
2779

2781
2782
2783

007
008
009
012
013
014
2784
2785
007
008
009
012
013
014

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

TEdge Cor:Sp1 FC – PTR
Trailing Edge Correction for Special Paper 1: FC
Sets the strength of the bias coefficient for the bias applied at the trailing edge when
the image is transferred from ITB to paper. Applied when printing in full-color mode
on Special Paper 1.
Side1:PTR
[0~400/5%]
Side2:PTR
TEdge SWT:Sp1 FC –
Switch Timing for Special Paper 1: FC
PTR
Sets the switch timing that determines the distance from the leading edge where the
SP2778 settings are applied during image transfer from ITB to paper. Applied only
when printing in full-color mode on Special Paper 1.
[-100~0/1 mm]
Sp1:K:LL
Special Paper 1: K Low
Sp1:K:ML
Special Paper 1: K Medium Low
Sp1:K:MM
Special Paper 1: K Medium
These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer
bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from
the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
SP2781 – Up to SP2304 001: Threshold 1
SP2782 – More than SP2304 001 Threshold 1, up to SP2304 002 Threshold 2.
SP2783 – More than SP2304 002 Threshold 2, up to SP2304 003 Threshold 3.
SP2784 – More than SP2304 003 Threshold 3, up to SP2304 004 Threshold 4.
SP2785 – More than SP2304 004 Threshold 4
These settings apply only to the image area printed on Special Paper 1 in black-andwhite mode.
2781
2782
2783
Side1:PTR
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side1:SepDC
Side1:SepAC
Side2:PTR
[10~250/5%]
Side2:SepDC
[10~250/5%]
Side2:SepAC
Sp1:K:MH
Special Paper 1: K Medium High
Sp1:K:HH
Special Paper 1: K High
2784
2785
Side1:PTR
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side1:SepDC
[10~250/5%]
Side1:SepAC
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side2:PTR
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side2:SepDC
Side2:SepAC

5-67

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2791
2792
2973

007
008
009
012
013
014
2794
2795
017
018
019
027
028
029
2801

001
007
008
009
012
013
014

April, 2007

Sp1:FC:LL
Special Paper 1: FC Low
Sp1:FC:ML
Special Paper 1: FC Medium Low
Sp1:FC:MM
Special Paper 1: FC Medium
These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer
bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from
the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
SP2791 – Up to SP2304 001: Threshold 1
SP2792 – More than SP2304 001 Threshold 1, up to SP2304 002 Threshold 2.
SP2793 – More than SP2304 002 Threshold 2, up to SP2304 003 Threshold 3.
SP2794 – More than SP2304 003 Threshold 3, up to SP2304 004 Threshold 4.
SP2795 – More than SP2304 004 Threshold 4
These settings apply only to the image area printed on Special Paper 1 in full-color
mode.
2791
2792
2973
Side1:PTR
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side1:SepDC
Side1:SepAC
Side2:PTR
Side2:SepDC
Side2:SepAC
Sp1:FC:MH
Special Paper 1: FC Medium High
Sp1:FC:HH
Special Paper 1: FC High
2794
2795
Side1:PTR
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side1:SepDC
[10~250/5%]
Side1:SepAC
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side2:PTR
Side2:SepDC
Side2:SepAC
Sp2 K Bias
Set Bias for Special Paper 2: K
These SPs set the standard values of the electrical charges that are applied to 1)
create bias for image transfer from drum to ITB, 2) create bias for image transfer
from ITB to paper (PTR), and 3) neutralize the charges on the both sides of the
paper to separate the paper from the ITB (SepDC, SepAC). These settings are used
when printing on Special Paper 2 in the black-and-white mode and are applied only
to the image area.
ITB
[0~500/0.1 µa]
Side1:PTR
[-100~0/1 µa]
Side1:SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µa]
Side1:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 kV]
Side2:PTR
[-100~0/1 µa]
Side2:SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µa]
Side2:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 kV]

5-68

April, 2007

2806

001
002
003
004
013
014
015
021
022
023

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Sp2 FC Bias
Set Bias for Special Paper 2: FC
These SPs set the standard values of the electrical charges that are applied to 1)
create bias for image transfer from drum of each color (Y, M, C, K) to the ITB, 2)
create bias for image transfer from ITB to paper (PTR), and 3) neutralize the
charges on the both sides of the paper to separate the paper from the ITB (SepDC,
SepAC). These settings are used only for Y, M, C, K when printing on Special
Paper 1 in the full-color mode and are applied only to the image area.
ITB: K
[0~500/0.1 µA]
ITB: M
[0~500/0.1 µA]
ITB: C
[0~500/0.1 µA]
ITB: Y
[0~500/0.1 µA]
Side1:PTR
[-100~0/1 µA]
Side1:SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µA]
Side1:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 kV]
Side2:PTR
[-100~0/1 µA]
Side2:SepDC
[0~1000/0.1 µA]
Side2:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 kV]

These SPs (SP2811~SP2815) set the paper size correction coefficients for Special
Paper 2 relative to the settings done with SP2308 (Set Psize Thresh). All of hese
settings:
• Apply to printing on Special Paper 2 in the black-and-white mode
• Apply only to the image area
The title of each SP tells you the side and size where the setting is applied at ITBto-paper transfer, for example: "Side1:Size1:PTR" means the setting applies to
only Side 1 of Size 1 when the image is transferred from belt to paper at the PTR.
2811
007
012
2812
007
012
2813
007
012
2814
007
012
2815
007
012

Size Coeff:Sp2
Side1:Size
:PTR
Side2:Size
:PTR
Size Coeff:Sp2
Side1:Size2:PTR
Side2:Size2:PTR
Size Coeff:Sp2
Side1:Size3:PTR
Side2:Size3:PTR
Size Coeff:Sp2
Side1:Size4:PTR
Side2:Size4:PTR
Size Coeff:Sp2
Side1:Size5:PTR
Side2:Size5:PTR

Size Correction Coefficient for Special Paper 2
SP2308 001 Threshold 1
[100~600/5%]
Size Correction Coefficient for Special Paper 2
SP2308 002 Threshold 2, < SP2308 001 Threshold 1
[100~600/5%]
Size Correction Coefficient for Special Paper 2
SP2308 003 Threshold 3, < SP2308 002 Threshold 2
[100~600/5%]
Size Correction Coefficient for Special Paper 2
SP2308 004 Threshold 4, < SP2308 003 Threshold 3
[100~600/5%]
Size Correction Coefficient for Special Paper 2
Up to SP2308 004 Threshold 4
[100~600/5%]

5-69

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2821

001
007
008
009
012
013
014
2822

001
002
003
004
2823

007
012
2824
002

April, 2007

LEdge Cor:Sp2:K
Leading Edge Correction for Special Paper 2: K
Sets the leading edge correction coefficient when bias is applied as far as allowed
by the seting of SP2822 for drum to image transfer of the image during black and
white copying on Special Paper 2.
ITB
[0~400/5%]
Side1:PTR
Side1:SepDC
Side1:SepAC
Side2:PTR
Side2:SepDC
Side2:SepAC
LEdge SWT:Sp2:K
Leading Edge Switch Timing for Special Paper 2: K
Sets the switch OFF timing of SP2821. The selected value is the number of mm
from the leading edge. Applies only to printing in black-and-white mode on Special
Paper 2.
ITB
[0~30/1 mm]
PTR
SepDC
SepAC
TEdge Cor:Sp2 K – PTR
Trailing Edge Correction for Special Paper 2: K
Sets the bias applied at the trailing edge when the image is transferred from ITB to
paper by setting the start timing for SP2824 002 at the trailing edge. Applied to the
trailing edge for black-and-white mode on Special Paper 2 only.
Side1:PTR
[0~400/5%]
Side2:PTR
TEdge SWT:Sp2 K – PTR
Trailing Edge Switch Timing for Special Paper 2: K
Sets the switch timing that determines the distance from the leading edge where
the settings of SP2823 is applied during image transfer from ITB to paper. Applied
only when in black-and-white mode on Special Paper 2.
[-100~0/5%]

5-70

April, 2007

2826

001
007
008
009
012
013
014
2827

001
002
003
004
2828

007
012
2829

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

LEdge Cor:Sp2 FC
Leading Edge Correction for Special Paper 2: FC
These SPs do the following settings when printing on Special Paper 2 in the fullcolor mode:
1) ITB: Sets strength/timing of the correction coefficient for the application of bias
when the image is transferred from the drum to the ITB.
2) PTR: Sets the strength/timing of thecorrection coefficient for the application of
bias when the image is transferred from ITB.
3) SepDC, SepAC: Set the strength/timing of the dc and ac charges applied to
neutralize the charges on the belt and paper so they will separate more easily.
Note: SP2826 selects the strength of the bias coefficient, and SP2827 sets the start
timing of the bias application.
ITB
[0~400/5%]
Side1:PTR
Side1:SepDC
Side1:SepAC
Side2:PTR
Side2:SepDC
Side2:SepAC
LEdge SWT:Sp2 FC
Leading Edge Switch Timing for Special Paper 2: FC
Sets the switch OFF timing of SP2826. The selected value is the number of mm
from the leading edge. Applies only to printing in full-color mode on Special Paper 2.
ITB
[0~30/1 mm]
PTR
SepDC
SepAC
TEdge Cor:Sp2 FC – PTR
Trailing Edge Correction for Special Paper 2: FC
Sets the strength of the bias coefficient for the bias applied at the trailing edge when
the image is transferred from ITB to paper. Applied when printing in full-color mode
on Special Paper 2.
Side1:PTR
[0~400/5%]
Side2:PTR
TEdge SWT:Sp2 FC – PTR
Switch Timing for Special Paper 2: FC
Sets the switch timing that determines the distance from the leading edge where the
SP2828 settings are applied during image transfer from ITB to paper. Applied only
when printing in full-color mode on Special Paper 2.
[-100~0/1 mm]

5-71

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2831
2832
2833

007
008
009
012
013
014
2834
2835
007
008
009
012
013
014

April, 2007

Sp2:K:LL
Special Paper 2: K Low
Sp2:K:ML
Special Paper 2: K Medium Low
Sp2:K:MM
Special Paper 2: K Medium
These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer
bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from
the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304 001.
SP2831 – Up to SP2304 001: Threshold 1
SP2832 – More than SP2304 001 Threshold 1, up to SP2304 002 Threshold 2.
SP2833 – More than SP2304 002 Threshold 2, up to SP2304 003 Threshold 3.
SP2834 – More than SP2304 003 Threshold 3, up to SP2304 004 Threshold 4.
SP2835 – More than SP2304 004 Threshold 4
These settings apply only to the image area printed on Special Paper 2 in black-andwhite mode.
2831
2832
2833
Side1:PTR
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side1:SepDC
Side1:SepAC
Side2:PTR
Side2:SepDC
Side2:SepAC
Sp2:K:MH
Special Paper 2: K Medium High
Sp2:K:HH
Special Paper 2: K High
2834
2835
Side1:PTR
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side1:SepDC
Side1:SepAC
Side2:PTR
Side2:SepDC
Side2:SepAC

5-72

April, 2007

2841
2842
2843

017
018
019
027
028
029
2844
2845
017
018
019
027
028
029
2851

001
007
008
009
012
013
014

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Sp2:FC:LL
Special Paper 2: FC Low
Sp2:FC:ML
Special Paper 2: FC Medium Low
Sp2:FC:MM
Special Paper 2: FC Medium
These SPs set the standard values of the electrical charges that are applied to 1)
create bias for image transfer from drum to ITB, 2) create bias for image transfer
from ITB to paper (PTR), and 3) neutralize the charges on the both sides of the
paper to separate the paper from the ITB (SepDC, SepAC). These settings are
used when printing on Special Paper 2 in the full-color mode and are applied only to
the image area.
2841
2842
2843
Side1:PTR
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side1:SepDC
Side1:SepAC
Side2:PTR
Side2:SepDC
Side2:SepAC
Sp2:FC:MH
Special Paper 2: FC Medium High
Sp2:FC:HH
Special Paper 2: FC High
2844
2845
Side1:PTR
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side1:SepDC
[10~250/5%]
Side1:SepAC
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side2:PTR
[10~250/5%]
Side2:SepDC
Side2:SepAC
Sp3 K Bias
Set Bias for Special Paper 3: K
These SPs set the standard values of the electrical charges that are applied to 1)
create bias for image transfer from drum to ITB, 2) create bias for image transfer
from ITB to paper (PTR), and 3) neutralize the charges on the both sides of the
paper to separate the paper from the ITB (SepDC, SepAC). These settings are
used when printing on Special Paper 3 in the black-and-white mode and are applied
only to the image area.
ITB
[0~500/0.1 µa]
Side1:PTR
[-100~0/1 µa]
Side1:SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µa]
Side1:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 kV]
Side2:PTR
[-100~0/1 µa]
Side2:SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µa]
Side2:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 kV]

5-73

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2856

001
002
003
004
013
014
015
021
022
023

April, 2007

Sp3 FC Bias
Set Bias for Special Paper 3: K
These SPs set the standard values of the electrical charges that are applied to 1)
create bias for image transfer from drum of each color (Y, M, C, K) to the ITB, 2)
create bias for image transfer from ITB to paper (PTR), and 3) neutralize the
charges on the both sides of the paper to separate the paper from the ITB (SepDC,
SepAC). These settings are used only for Y, M, C, K when printing on Special
Paper 3 in the full-color mode and are applied only to the image area.
ITB:K
[0~500/0.1 µa]
ITB:M
[0~500/0.1 µa]
ITB:C
[0~500/0.1 µa]
ITB:Y
[0~500/0.1 µa]
Side1:PTR
[-100~0/1 µa]
Side1:SepDC
[0~100/0.1 µa]
Side1:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 kV]
Side2:PTR
[-100~0/1 µa]
Side2:SepDC
[0~1000/0.1 µa]
Side2:SepAC
[80~120/0.1 kV]

These SPs (SP2861~SP2865) set the paper size correction coefficients for Special
Paper 3 relative to the settings done with SP2308 (Set Psize Thresh). All of hese
settings:
• Apply to printing on Special Paper 3 in the black-and-white mode
• Apply only to the image area
The title of each SP tells you the side and size where the setting is applied at ITBto-paper transfer, for example: "Side1:Size1:PTR" means the setting applies to
only Side 1 of Size 1 when the image is transferred from belt to paper at the PTR.
2861
007
012
2862
007
012
2863
007
012
2864
007
012
2865
007
012

Size Coeff:Sp3
Side1:Size
:PTR
Side2:Size
:PTR
Size Coeff:Sp3
Side1:Size2:PTR
Side2:Size2:PTR
Size Coeff:Sp3
Side1:Size3:PTR
Side2:Size3:PTR
Size Coeff:Sp3
Side1:Size4:PTR
Side2:Size4:PTR
Size Coeff:Sp3
Side1:Size5:PTR
Side2:Size5:PTR

Size Correction Coefficient for Special Paper 3
SP2308 001 Threshold 1
[100~600/5%]
Size Correction Coefficient for Special Paper 3
SP2308 002 Threshold 2, < SP2308 001 Threshold 1
[100~600/5%]
Size Correction Coefficient for Special Paper 3
SP2308 003 Threshold 3, < SP2308 002 Threshold 2
[100~600/5%]
Size Correction Coefficient for Special Paper 3
SP2308 004 Threshold 4, < SP2308 003 Threshold 3
[100~600/5%]
Size Correction Coefficient for Special Paper 3
Up to SP2308 004 Threshold 4
[100~600/5%]

5-74

April, 2007

2871

001
007
008
009
012
013
014
2872

001
002
003
004
2873

007
012
2874
002

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

LEdge Cor:Sp3:K
Leading Edge Correction for Special Paper 3: K
Sets the leading edge correction coefficient when bias is applied as far as allowed
by the seting of SP2872 for drum to image transfer of the image during black and
white copying on Special Paper 3.
ITB
[0~400/5%]
Side1:PTR
Side1:SepDC
Side1:SepAC
Side2:PTR
Side2:SepDC
Side2:SepAC
LEdge SWT:Sp3:K
Leading Edge Switch Timing for Special Paper 3: K
Sets the switch OFF timing of SP2871 . The selected value is the number of mm
from the leading edge. Applies only to printing in black-and-white mode on Special
Paper 3.
ITB
[0~30/1 mm]
PTR
SepDC
SepAC
TEdge Cor:Sp3 K – PTR Trailing Edge Correction for Special Paper 3: K
Sets the bias applied at the trailing edge when the image is transferred from ITB to
paper by setting the start timing for SP2874 002 at the trailing edge. Applied to the
trailing edge for black-and-white mode on Special Paper 3 only.
Side1:PTR
[0~400/5%]
Side2:PTR
TEdge SWT:Sp3 K –
Trailing Edge Switch Timing for Special Paper 3: K
PTR
Sets the switch timing that determines the distance from the leading edge where
the settings of SP2873 are applied during image transfer from ITB to paper. Applied
only when in black-and-white mode on Special Paper 3.
[-100~0/1 mm]

5-75

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2876

001
007
008
009
012
013
014
2877

001
002
003
004
2878

007
012
2879

April, 2007

LEdge Cor:Sp3 FC
Leading Edge Correction for Special Paper 3: FC
These SPs do the following settings when printing on Special Paper 3 in the fullcolor mode:
1) ITB: Sets strength/timing of the correction coefficient for the application of bias
when the image is transferred from the drum to the ITB.
2) PTR: Sets the strength/timing of thecorrection coefficient for the application of
bias when the image is transferred from ITB.
3) SepDC, SepAC: Set the strength/timing of the dc and ac charges applied to
neutralize the charges on the belt and paper so they will separate more easily.
Note: SP2876 selects the strength of the bias coefficient, and SP2877 sets the start
timing of the bias application.
ITB
[0~400/5%]
Side1:PTR
Side1:SepDC
Side1:SepAC
Side2:PTR
Side2:SepDC
Side2:SepAC
LEdge SWT:Sp3 FC
Leading Edge Switch Timing for Special Paper 3: FC
Sets the switch OFF timing of SP2876. The selected value is the number of mm
from the leading edge. Applies only to printing in full-color mode on Special Paper
3.
ITB
[0~30/1 mm]
PTR
SepDC
SepAC
TEdge Cor:Sp3 FC – PTR
Trailing Edge Correction for Special Paper 3: FC
Sets the strength of the bias coefficient for the bias applied at the trailing edge
when the image is transferred from ITB to paper. Applied when printing in full-color
mode on Special Paper 3.
[0~400/5%]
Side1:PTR
Side2:PTR
TEdge SWT:Sp3 FC –
Switch Timing for Special Paper 3: FC
PTR
Sets the switch timing that determines the distance from the leading edge where
the SP2878 settings are applied during image transfer from ITB to paper. Applied
only when printing in full-color mode on Special Paper 3.
[-100~0/1 mm]

5-76

April, 2007
2881
2882
2883

007
008
009
012
013
014
2884
2885
007
008
009
012
013
014

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Sp3:K:LL
Special Paper 3: K Low
Sp3:K:ML
Special Paper 3: K Medium Low
Sp3:K:MM
Special Paper 3: K Medium
These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer
bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from
the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
SP2881 – Up to SP2304 001: Threshold 1
SP2882 – More than SP2304 001 Threshold 1, up to SP2304 002 Threshold 2.
SP2883 – More than SP2304 002 Threshold 2, up to SP2304 003 Threshold 3.
SP2884 – More than SP2304 003 Threshold 3, up to SP2304 004 Threshold 4.
SP2885 – More than SP2304 004 Threshold 4
These settings apply only to the image area printed on Special Paper 3 in blackand-white mode.
2881
2882
2883
Side1:PTR
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side1:SepDC
[10~250/5%]
Side1:SepAC
Side2:PTR
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side2:SepDC
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side2:SepAC
Sp3:K:MH
Special Paper 3: K Medium High
Sp3:K:HH
Special Paper 3: K High
2884
2885
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side1:PTR
Side1:SepDC
Side1:SepAC
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side2:PTR
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side2:SepDC
Side2:SepAC

5-77

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

2891
2892
2893

017
018
019
027
028
029
2894
2895
017
018
019
027
028
029
2901

001
002
003
004
2902

April, 2007

Sp3:FC:LL
Special Paper 3: FC Low
Sp3:FC:ML
Special Paper 3: FC Medium Low
Sp3:FC:MM
Special Paper 3: FC Medium
These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer
bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from
the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
SP2891 – Up to SP2304 001: Threshold 1
SP2892 – More than SP2304 001 Threshold 1, up to SP2304 002 Threshold 2.
SP2893 – More than SP2304 002 Threshold 2, up to SP2304 003 Threshold 3.
SP2894 – More than SP2304 003 Threshold 3, up to SP2304 004 Threshold 4.
SP2895 – More than SP2304 004 Threshold 4
These settings apply only to the image area printed on Special Paper 3 in full-color
mode.
2891
2892
2893
Side1:PTR
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side1:SepDC
[10~250/5%]
Side1:SepAC
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side2:PTR
[10~250/5%]
Side2:SepDC
[10~250/5%]
Side2:SepAC
Sp3:FC:MH
Special Paper 3: FC Medium High
Sp3:FC:HH
Special Paper 3: FC High
2894
2895
Side1:PTR
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side1:SepDC
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side1:SepAC
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side2:PTR
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
Side2:SepDC
Side2:SepAC
Disp T/H Sn:K_PCU
Temperature/Humidity Sensor: PCU
This SPs display the the temperature (oC) and humidity (both relative and absolute)
readings of the temperature and humidity sensor located at the black PCU on the
right side of the machine. These readings are updated every 60 sec.
• 001~004 display the current readings.
• 005~008 display the previous readings.
Temp Disp
005 Temp:Prev
Range: 0~100/1 deg.
Rel Humidity Disp
006 Rel Humid:Prev
Range: 0~100/1% RH.
Abs Humidity Disp
007 Abs Humid:Prev
Range: 0~1000 g/m3
Env Disp:Current
008 Env Disp:Prev
Set Temp: K_PCU
Set Temperature: PCU: Forced Setting
Use these settings to turn OFF the temperature/humidity sensor, or set its level of
detection.
[0~5/1]
0:
Sensor Detect
3: MM
1:
LL
4: MH
2:
ML
5: HH

5-78

April, 2007
2903
001
002
003
004
2904

001
002
003

2905

001
002

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Env Thresh:K_PCU
Room Temperature Correction Threshold: PCU
This SP sets the threshold value of LL and ML for the current room temperature.
Abs Humid:Thresh1
[0~10,000 / 0.01 g/m3]
Abs Humid:Thresh2
[0~10,000 / 0.01 g/m3]
Abs Humid:Thresh3
[0~10,000 / 0.01 g/m3]
Abs Humid:Thresh4
[0~10,000 / 0.01 g/m3]
Blade Bend Ctrl
Blade Bend Prevention Pattern Control
A blade-bend prevention pattern is created with K toner on the ITB between every
copy image to lubricate the ITB cleaning blade so it will not bend or scour the
surface of the ITB. These SPs set 1) pattern creation interval, 2) density of the
pattern, 3) whether the pattern is displayed.
Note: This function is OFF. Changing this setting is normally not required for this
machine.
Pattern Interval
Sets the number of pages between patterns.
[0~200/1 pg.]
Pattern Light
Sets the density of the pattern.
[0~63/1]
Page Cnt Disp
Displays the count for the number of blade prevention
patterns.
[0~200/1 pg.]
Used Toner Mtr 2

Used Toner Motor 2 (Waste toner distribution motor)
Control
The waste toner bottle is provided with a near-full sensor and an auger that evenly
distributes the used toner inside the bottle. To extend the life of the waste toner
distribution motor that rotates this auger, the motor and auger do not operate
continuously. The motor is turned ON only after a prescribed amout of toner has
been consumed.
Toner Consumed
Sets the amount of toner to be used before the toner
[1~10/1 g]
Waste Tnr M Time
Sets the amount of time the motor remains ON.
[1~10/1 sec.]

5-79

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

April, 2007

Group 3000
3001

001
002
003
004
3002

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008

TD Sn:Vt Display
TD Sensor: Vt Display
Displays the current value of Vt (output voltage of the TD sensor). This is the value
that the machine uses to calculate the density of the toner in each development unit.
The toner density is checked after every page prints. The TD sensor output voltage
is inversely proportional to the toner density:
•
If toner density is high, the voltage is low.
•
If toner density is low, the voltage is high.
Note: These readings are used to control toner supply. When the machine uses PID
logic to control the machine (the default method selected with SP3301 001). The
difference between Vt and Vtref is calculated and this result is used to control the on
time of the subhopper clutches that control the supply of toner to the PCUs. For
more see "Toner Supply Control" in Section "6.11.4 Details" of the Service Manual.
Current Val:K
[0.00~5.00/00.00/0.1 V]
Current Val:M
Current Val:C
Current Val:Y
Vtcnt:Disp/Set
Display Vtcnt (TD Sensor Control Voltage)
Use SP 3002-001 to 004 to display and confirm the present Vtcnt setting. Vtcnt is the
TD sensor control voltage. If there is a large difference between this value and the
value of SP3002-005 to 008 (Initial Vtcnt), this means that over time Vtcnt will
require large adjustments due to environmental conditions. The initial value of Vtcnt
is determined when the developer is initialized. This value is used as a reference to
adjust Vt during the auto process control self check and when the TD sensor checks
the toner density between pages.
Current Val:K
[0~1200/0 V]
Current Val:M
Current Val:C
Current Val:Y
Initial Val:K
[0~1200/0 V]
Initial Val:M
Initial Val:C
Initial Val:Y

5-80

April, 2007

3003

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
3021

001
002
003
004

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Vtref:Disp/Set
Set/Display Vtref
This SP displays the TD sensor target voltage. This target voltage is inversely
proportional to the density of the toner:
• If the target is high, toner density is lowered.
• If the target is low, toner density is raised.
The machine uses readings of the ID sensor patterns between pages to determine
the amount of toner coverage and compared with the threhold values for the upper
and lower limit of coverate. The result of this calculation is used to calculate Vtref.
Note: Vtref is the TD sensor reference voltage. It is frequently updated to stabilize
the toner concentration in the development unit.
Current Val:K
[0~5.00/0 V]
Current Val:M
Current Val:C
Current Val:Y
Initial Val:K
[0~5.00/0 V]
Initial Val:M
Initial Val:C
Initial Val:Y
Set Vt Shift
Set Vt Shift Amount
Use this SP to correct Vt (TD sensor output voltage) in the low speed mode
(128~256 g/m2). The machine then uses this value to calculate Vt for low speed
mode.
Shift (Low Spd):K
[0~500/0 V]
Shift (Low Spd):M
Shift (Low Spd):C
Shift (Low Spd):Y

5-81

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

3042

001

002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
3101

001
002
003
004

April, 2007

Set Vtref Cor
Set Vtref Correction
Vtref is frequently updated in the toner supply cycle to stabiize the concentration of
toner in the developer. Vtref is corrected between every printed page in the paper
path using the correction amounts listed below for each color. This is the default
setting (0) for SP3042 001. However, you can use this SP to switch this function
OFF.
Vtref (TD sensor reference voltage). It is frequently updated to stabilize the toner
concentration in the development unit.
Vtref Corr Mode
[0~1/1] 0:On, 1:Off
Setting this SP to 1 switches of Vtref correction between
pages.
Corr Amt(+):k
[0~100/0 V]
Corr Amt(+):M
Corr Amt(+):C
Corr Amt(+):Y
Corr Amt(-):k
[0~100/0 V]
Corr Amt(-):M
Corr Amt
-:C
Corr Amt(-):Y
Vtref Corr Target:K
[-100~0/cm2]
Vtref Corr Target:M
Vtref Corr Target:C
Vtref Corr Target:Y
Corr Thresh:M
[-100~0/cm2]
Corr Thresh:C
Corr Thresh:Y
Corr Thresh:K
ID Pattern:Disp ID Sensor Pattern Coverage Display
Displays the amount toner to be used (coverage) to create the ID sensor patterns
between pages. The ID sensors cannot accurately detect the patterns if there is too
much reflectivity from the black toner. This SP changes the solid ID sensor pattern to
a hatched pattern.
Note: SP3171 001 sets detection and update timing for the creation of the ID sensor
patterns.
Applied:K
[0~2000/cm2]
Applied:M
Applied:C
Applied:Y

5-82

April, 2007

3111

001
002
003
3121

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
3131

001
002
003
004
3141

001
002

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

ID Sn:Voffset
Voffset Value Detected by ID Sensor DFU
Displays the output voltage of the directly reflected light when the LED of the ID
sensor is switched OFF.
Voffset_Reg:Col:F
[0~500/0 V]
Voffset_Dif:Col:F
Voffset_Reg:K:R
Adjusted Vsg
Vsg Reading After Vsg Adjustment
This SP displays the 1) results of the most recent Vsg adjustment, 2) averaged value
of recent Vsg adjustments. This can be done for both ID sensors. The rear sensor is
the black ID sensor (K) and the front sensor is the color ID sensor (Y,M,C).
[0~500/0 V]
Vsg_Reg:Col:Last
Vsg_Dif:Col:Last
Vsg_Reg:K:Last
Vsg_Dif:K:Last
Vsg_Reg:Col:Ave
Vsg_Dif:Col:Ave
Vsg_Reg:K:Ave
lsfg After Vsg
lfsg After Reading Adjusted Vsg
Displays as a PWM value (pulse width modulation) the level of the ID sensor LED
after Vsg has been adjusted. Normal Vsg readings of the ITB bare surface reflectivity
should be in the range 4.0±0.2V.
[0~4096/1]
lfsg:Col:Ctr
lfsg:K:Last
lfsg:Col:Ave
Not used
lfsg:K:Ave
Not used
ID Sn:Vmin
Vmin Value Read by ID Sensor
Displays the minimum values read from the 10-grade patterns read by the ID
sensors during process control. The "Front" is the color ID sensor (Y,M,C), and the
"Rear" is the black ID sensor.
[0~500/0 V]
Vmin:Col(Front)
Vmin:K(Rear)

3161

Set ID Pattern
Set ID Sensor Pattern
Sets the toner coverage of black ID sensor pattern between sheets. During toner
control the ID sensor pattern is created between the prescribed number of sheets
(SP3171 001).
[0~2/0.001 mg]

3171

ID Pattern:Int
ID Sensor Pattern: Black Interval
Sets the number of pages between which the ID sensor patterns are created on the
ITB. Normally, the ID sensor patterns are created and read every 10 pages.
Create Int:K
[0~100/1]
Create Int:M
Create Int:C
Create Int:Y

001
002
003
004

5-83

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

3194

001
002
005
006
3251

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008

April, 2007

ID Coeff Display
ID Sensor Sensitivity Coefficient Display
Displays the most recent and averaged readings of the sensitivity correction coeffients
(K2 and K5).
K2:Col:Last
[0~10000/0]
K5:Col:Last
K2:Col:Ave
K5:Col:Ave
Tnr Supply Time
Toner Calibration Time: Display
Displays for confirmation the length of time the toner supply clutch remained on to
send toner to the sub hopper after a new toner cartridge was installed.
K
[0~10000/1 sec.]
M
C
Y
Toner Pump CL:K
Use these SPs to display the accumulated drive time for
each powder pump clutch before installing a new one.
Toner Pump CL:M
These SPs are reset to zero after the clutches are replaced.
Toner Pump CL:C
Toner Pump CL:Y

3301
001
002
003
004

Tnr Supply
Select Toner Supply Method
K
[0~1/1]
0: Fixed toner supply
M
1: PID Toner Supply
C
Y

3302

Tnr Supply
Select Toner Supply Rate
Sets the toner supply rate for fixed toner supply mode. The rate is set by adjusting the
on time of the toner supply clutch. This setting is used only if SP3301 is set to "0".
Supply Rate:K
[0~100 / 1 %]
Supply Rate:M
Supply Rate:C
Supply Rate:Y

001
002
003
004

5-84

April, 2007

3303

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
3304

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Tnr Supply Rate
Toner Supply Rate: Display
Displays for confirmation the toner supply rate of toner supply control using the PID
method. The toner supply rate is calculated as:
Toner Supply Rate = Toner Supply Time/Time Allowed for Toner Supply x 100
where:
• Time is measured in msec.
• "Time Allowed for Toner Supply (ms)" = Length of the paper (mm) + Width of the
gap between sheets (mm)/Drum speed (mm/s) x 1000.
Note: The toner supply control method is selected with SP3301.
Last Val:K
[0~100/1%]
Last Val:M
Last Val:C
Last Val:Y
Last 10 Ave:K
Last 10 Ave:M
Last 10 Ave:C
Last 10 Ave:Y
Tnr SupplyLimits
Set Upper/Lower Limits for Toner Supply
Sets the upper and lower limits for toner supply supply rate with the fuzzy logic (PID)
used as the toner supply control method. This SP takes effect only if 1 or 2 is selected
for SP3301 to enable fuzzy logic as the toner supply method.
The machine reads 1) the maximum and minimum settings of this SP and 2) the toner
consumption of the output image surface (pixel count data). Then it calculates the
maximum and minimum amount of toner for that image. After this is done, toner supply
amount will not change during the job, even if Vt or any other measurement
determines that more toner is necessary.
Max Supply Rate:K
[0~100/1%]
Max Supply Rate:M
Max Supply Rate:C
Max Supply Rate:Y
Min Supply Time:K
[0~1000/1 ms]
Min Supply Time:M
Min Supply Time:C
Min Supply Time:Y

3306

001 – 004
021 – 024
025 – 028
029 – 032
033 – 036
037 – 040

Tnr Supply Coeff
Set Toner Supply Coefficient
These SPs set the toner supply coefficients for the fuzzy logic method of toner
supply control.
Note: These SP codes operate only when 1 or 2 is selected for SP3301.
Ratio Coeff1:K, M, C, Y
[0~4300/1]
P_Vt_Coeff:K, M, C, Y
[0~100/1%]
I_Vt_Coeff:K, M, C, Y
[0~1000/1]
Si:K, M, C, Y
[-500~500/0]
P_Px1_Coeff1:K, M, C, Y
[0~100/1%]
P_Px1_Coeff3:K, M, C, Y
[0~255/1]

5-85

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

3401

3411

001
002
003
004

005
006

007
008

April, 2007

TE Detect Set
Detect/No Setting DFU
These SP codes modify the operation of the toner end sensor. Switches toner end
OFF and ON.
[0~1/1] 0:Detect, 1: No Detect
TE Pgs Min:K
Use this SP to set the number of pages to print after the toner near-end alert has been
issued. Once the specified number of pages have printed, the machine issues the
toner-end alert, and the machine will not operate until the toner supply has been
replenished.
Note:
• There are two counters for toner end, page count (003~004) and pixel count
(005~006).
• The toner end alert is issued by whichever limit is exceed first, page count
(003~004) or coverage (005~006).
TE Sheets Min:K
Sets the minimum number of pages to print (black or color)
after the toner near-end alert until toner end.
TE Sheets Min:Col
[0~50/1]
Sets the maximum number of pages to print (black-and-white,
TE Sheets Max:K
or full-color) after the toner near-end alert until toner end,
TE Sheets Max:Col
based on page count (regardless of coverage).
[0~1000/1]
TE:Pixels:K
Sets the number of images to print (black-and-white or fullcolor) after the toner near-end alert until toner end based on
TE:Pixels:Col
coverage (30 A4/LT pages at 100% coverage).
[0~100/1]
Sets the number of times that the toner supply clutch is
TNE:Sheets:K
activated when toner is low, to detect the toner end condition.
TNE:Sheets:Col
[0~30/1]

5-86

April, 2007

3501

001

002

003

004

005

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Select ProCon
Select Process Control Method
The settings of these SP codes modify the operation of the automatic process control
self-check. Automatic process control is done at these times:
• When the machine is turned ON
• At the end of the job, if the number of pages since the previous process contro,
exceeds the value of SP 3551
• Before ACC adjustment
• When the developer is initialized with SP3811.
For more about process control, see "Process Control" in Section "6.11" of the service
manual.
Potential Control
[0~1/1] 0:Auto, 1:Fixed
When the machine starts (with the front door closed), the process control self-check
begins using as referernce bias voltages set with the Group 3 SP codes. The
referenced voltages are different, depending on whether "Auto" or "Fixed" is set:
Referenced SPs with "Auto" Selected
SP3575 000~008
Dev DC Control
SP3576 000~008
Chrg DC Control
SP3577 000~008
Chrg AC Control
SP3581 000~008
LD Power Control
SP3551 001, 002
Procon Int
SP3554 001
Init ProCon Set
SP3801 001
DevSetup Execute
SP3811 001~006
DevSetup Execute
Reference SPs with "Fixed" Selected
SP2201 001~009
Set DC Charge
SP2202 001~009
Set AC Charge
SP2211 001~009
Set LD Power
SP2212 001~009
Set Dev DC
Potential Ctrl
Switches process control gamma correction OFF (0) and
ON (1).
[0~1/1]
Density Adj Mode
Sets the execution timing of toner density adjustment with
the automatic process control self-check.
[0~2/1]
0: Do not execute, 1: 1st Power On, 2:1st Power On & Job
End
ACC Before ProCon
Determines whether process control is executed before a
gradation test pattern is printed using the operation panel
with:
[User Tools]> Maintenance> Auto Color Calibration
[0~2/2]
0:Do not execute
1:Execute Potential Control
2:Execute Potential Control and Toner Density Adjustment
Dnstiy Adj Times
Sets the upper limit of the loop wherein density is adjusted
during process control. Default: 10

5-87

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES
006

DevGamma(EnvCorrct)

007

DevGamma(TimeCorrct)

3511

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008

009
010
011
012

April, 2007
Switches correction of the development gamma adjustment
with the readings of the temperature/humidity sensor OFF
and ON. Press either the "OFF" or "ON" button to toggle
the setting.
Switches the timing of the development gamma adjustment
during process control OFF and ON. Press either the
"OFF" or "ON" button to toggle the setting.

Poten Tbl:Disp
Display Potential Table
Displays the numbers in the Potential Table selected for process control.
The Potential Table is the lookup table that contains the potential target values (Vd,
Vb, Vl) for adjustment of the development potential.
•
Vd: Initial charge applied to the drum by the charge roller.
•
Vb: Development bias
•
Vl: Value used to correct the strength of the lasers.
A 10-grade pattern is first created on the drum and then transferred to the ITB:
•
On the drum, the potential sensor uses their readings of this pattern to determine
development potential.
•
On the ITB, the ID sensors use their readings of this pattern to determine the
amount of toner coverage necessary.
For more about process control, see "Process Control" in Section "6.11” of the Service
Manual
K Value
Displays the current numbers in the Potential Table for each color.
[1~99/1]
M Value
C Value
Y Value
Target: K
Displays the target values for Vd, Vb, Vl after measurements of
ambient conditions and compensating for residual charge on the drum
Target: M
(Vr).
Target: C
If the actual development gamma is less than the target development
Target: Y
gamma, this SP shows a smaller value than the selected pointer table
value.
If the actual development gamma is greater than the target
development gamma, this SP shows a larger value than the selected
pointer table value.
[1~99/1]
Initial: K
Not used at this time (March 2005).
Initial: M
Initial: C
Initial: Y

5-88

April, 2007
3531

001
002
003
004
3551

001
002

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

ProCon Target
Set Target Amount for Process Control
This SP sets the value for the maximum coverage to be achieved by the process
control self-check. Process control then analyzes the readings of the 10-grade
pattern, calculates the potentials required for develoment gamma and Vk (starting
voltage), and then determines the drum charge levels, development biases, and LD
power levels necessary to achieve the target coverage.
Note
• This SP can be used to darken printed images.
• After this SP is changed, process control must be executed manually with
SP3820.
Max Tnr Amt:K
[0~1000/cm2]
Max Tnr Amt:M
Max Tnr Amt:C
Max Tnr Amt:Y
ProCon Int
Set Interval Between Process Control Executions
This SP sets timing of the process control self-check for job end. Normally, process
control executes automatically after 250 jobs. The process control self-check never
interrupts a job to execute, even if it is time for the next self-check.
B/W Mode
[0~2000/1]
Color Mode
[0~2000/1]

3554
001

Init ProCon Set
Set Process Control for 1st Power On
Sets fusing temperature threshold for execution of the process control self-check
execution after a cold start. If the machine is switched OFF and then switched ON
again, the automatic process control self-check will not execute if the fusing
temperature remains above 100 oC (default).
Note: Use SP3554 001 to display the results of the process control self-check.
[0~150/1 deg C]

3561

Dev 
:Disp/Set
Set/Display Gamma Value for Development
Displays the value of development gamma, an indicator of development capacity. In
order for the machine to determine the development potential to obtain the target
coverage. During processing control the 10-grade patterns are created first on the
drums and then on the ITB. The potential sensors read the development potential,
and the ID sensors read the amount of coverage on the ITB.
Plotting the development potential on the X axis against coverage on the Y-axis
results in the development gamma curve. For more, see "Process Control" in Section
"6.11 Details".
The normal range for development gamma is greater than 0.3 and less than 6.0.
Actual Val:K
[0.00~6.00/0.1]
Actual Val:M
Actual Val:C
Actual Val:Y
Target Val:K
Target Val:M
Target Val:C
Target Val:Y
Initial Val: K
Initial Val: M
Initial Val: C
Initial Val: Y

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012

5-89

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

3562

3563

001
002
003
004
3571

001
002
003
004
3572

001
002
003
004

April, 2007

Display Vk
Display Vk (Development Start Voltage)
Displays Vk, the development start voltage. This development start voltage is used
to indicate whether the developer has deteriorated. However, this is only a rough
measurement due to other factors:
•
A low threshold setting for the target development gamma.
•
Operational variations between machines
•
Precision of the ID sensor measurements
Normal range for Vk: -150V to +150V
Display Vr
Display Vr (Residual Potential)
Vr is the potential that remains on the surface of the drum after full exposure to the
laser. The existence of this residual voltage is used as an indicator to determine the
level of deterioration of the drum. Vr becomes larger as the drum deteriorates.
Normal range for Vr: -200V to 0V
K
[-300 to +300/1 V]
M
C
Y
Display V0
Display Vd (Value for Control of Charge Potential)
Displays the value for V0, the measure of drum potential on dark areas of the drum
before laser exposure.
Normal range: -700 V to –500 V
K
[-999~0/1 V]
M
C
Y
Display Vdhome
Display Vl (Value for Control of Halftone Drum Potential)
Displays the value for Vdhome, the electrical potential of the drum after a fixed dc
bias (dc –700V) is applied by the drum charge roller.
Normal range: -700V to –500V
Vl Ctrl:Half:K
[-999~0/1 V]
Vl Ctrl:Half:M
Vl Ctrl:Half:C
Vl Ctrl:Half:Y

5-90

April, 2007

3573

3574

001
002
003
004
3575

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
3576
001
002
003
004
006
007
008
009

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Target Poten:Vd
Display Target Potential (VdDisplay)
Vd (read by the potential sensor) is the potential of dark areas of a drum before full
laser exposure. This SP displays the value of Vd used by processing control to
determine the target potential (Vd). The machine performs a calculation using
development gamma, Vk and the maximum coverage, and then uses the result to
lookup and retrieve the correct voltage from the Potential Table. This retrieved value
is used to raise the charge of the charge roller that charges the drums.
Target Poten:Vl
Display Target Potential (VlDisplay)
Vl (read by the potential sensor) is the potential of the exposed areas after full laser
exposure. This SP displays the value of Vl used by processing control to determine
the target potential (Vl). The machine performs a calculation using development
gamma, Vk and the maximum coverage, and then uses the result to lookup and
retrieve the correct voltage from the Potential Table. This retrieved value is used to
raise the input current of the laser diode.
K
[-999~0/1 V]
M
C
Y
Dev DC Control Display Value for Control of Development DC
Displays the deveopment bias that was referenced duing processing control and
used in the the previous jobs (Process control is set for Auto with SP3501 001.)
Std Spd:K
[-800~0/1 V]
Std Spd (normal speed): 52 to 128 g/m2
Std Spd:M
Std Spd:C
Std Spd:Y
Low Spd:K
[-800~0/1 V]
Low Spd (half-speed): Paper weight 128 o 256 g/m2
Low Spd:M
Low Spd:C
Low Spd:Y
Chrg DC Control
Std Spd:K
Std Spd:M
Std Spd:C
Std Spd:Y
Low Spd:K
Low Spd:M
Low Spd:C
Low Spd:Y

Display Value for Control of Charge Roller Bias DC
[-999 to –200/1 V]
Std Spd (normal speed): 52 to 128 g/m2

[-999 to –200/1 V]
Low Spd (half-speed): Paper weight 128 o 256 g/m2

5-91

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

3577

001
002
003
004
006
007
008
009
3581

001
002
003
004
006
007
008
009

April, 2007

Chrg AC Control
Display Value for Control of Development AC
Displays the ac bias that was referenced during processing control and used in the
previous jobs. (Process control is set for Auto with SP3501 001.)
Std Spd:K
[0~300/0 kV]
Std Spd (normal speed): 52 to 128 g/m2
Std Spd:M
Std Spd:C
Std Spd:Y
Low Spd:K
[0~300/0 kV]
Low Spd (half-speed): Paper weight 128 o 256 g/m2
Low Spd:M
Low Spd:C
Low Spd:Y
LD Power Control Display Value for Control of LD Power
Displays the LD power that was referenced during processing control and used in
the previous jobs. (Process control is set for Auto with SP3501 001.)
Std Spd:K
[-117~127/1]
Std Spd (normal speed): 52 to 128 g/m2
Std Spd:M
Std Spd:C
Std Spd:Y
Low Spd:K
[-117~127/1]
Low Spd (half-speed): Paper weight 128 o 256 g/m2
Low Spd:M
Low Spd:C
Low Spd:Y

3605

Factory Files

Set Up Developer DFU

3701

Small Img Mode
Set Small Image Mode
This feature is not presently not used in process control (March 2005)
[0~1/1]

5-92

April, 2007

3801

001
002
003
004
005
006

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Init TD Sensor
Execute TD Sensor Initialization
Do this SP after replacing the developer in one or more of the PCUs when servicing
the machine. This SP:
• Checks for the presence of developer in the development unit. (This ensures that
the film seal has been removed from the developer pack.)
• Initializes TD sensor. (Calibrates Vtcnt).
• Calibrates development gamma and calibrates toner density. Also does the
MUSIC check and correction.
Note: Never do TD sensor initializations SP3801 – 001 to 006 after SP3811 – 001
(Developer Set Up). See also the relating pages/chapters 1-32, ch.3.1.6 and
ch.3.5.7.
All Colors (Y, M, C, K)
[0~1/1]
Col (Y, M, C)
K
M
C
Y

3802

TD Sn Init OK?
Display Result of TD Sensor Initialization
This SP displays the results of the TD sensor initialization with SP3801 001~006.
The machine returns the status of the previous initialization with numbers, 1 digit for
each PCU. The numbers are read in order as "K, M, C, Y".
Four numbers are used to indicate the status of the execution.
1: OK (success)
2: Cancelled (door opened, etc.)
4: Not executed (not selected for execution; this is not an error)
9: Vtcnt abnormal. Vtcnt (TD sensor control voltage) could not be adjusted to within
2.5±0.2V. The machine issued a TD sensor error for the PCU where there is a
problem (SC372~SC375).

3810

ClngInitSetExe
Initial Cleaning After Replacement
These SPs should be executed after replacement of the drum cleaning roller or
cleaning blade.
All Colors
Col
Excludes K (Black)
K
Allows adjusment of colors separately.
M
C
Y

001
002
003
004
005
006

5-93

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

3811

001
002
003
004
005
006

April, 2007

DevSetup Execute
Execute Developer Setup
Do this SP during the installation procedure after the developer and toner cartridges
have been installed in the machine, or after the drum and cleaning blade have been
replaced. This SP:
• Confirms that all the seals have been removed from each developer cartridge and
developer is present in each PCU.
• Switches ON toner supply and sends toner to the sub hopper of each PCU.
• Sends toner to the PCU to coat the drum with toner. This prevents the cleaning
blades from bending and scouring the drums.
• Initializes the TD sensor.
• Starts the process control self-check to set the target for development gamma and
adjusts toner density.
• Starts the MUSIC sequence to check and correct color image offset.
Note:
• After doing SP3811 always to SP3812 to confirm that SP3811 executed correctly.
• SP3811 001 is done only at machine installation, or after a drum and cleaning
blade has been replaced in the PCU.
• SP3801 001 to 006 is done after developer replacement for one or more PCUs.
• Never do TD sensor initializations SP3801 – 001 to 006 after SP3811 – 001
(Developer Set Up). See also the relating pages/chapters 1-32, ch.3.1.6 and
ch.3.5.7.
Devr Setup:All
Devr Setup:Col
Devr Setup:K
Devr Setup:M
Devr Setup:C
Devr Setup:Y

[0~1/1]

3812

DevSetup Execute
Display Result of Developer Setup Execution
Do this SP to confirm that SP3811 executed correctly. After execution the machine
displays a "1" to confirm that SP3811 executed correctly for each PCU. The "1111"
display indicates the return value for each PCU: K, M, C, Y

3813

Used Tnr Mode Exe
Used Toner Mode Execute
When the machine is printing in full-color mode, the waste toner in the PCUs are
transported to the waste toner bottle for the amount of time specified with SP3813
003 below
[0~1/1] 0:Off, 1: On
All Colors
K Only
Set Op. Time
[10~240/1 sec.]

001
002
003

5-94

April, 2007

3820

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Manual ProCon
Execute Process Control Manually
Use this SP to execute process control manually.
3820 001 does potential control only.
3820 002 does potential control and toner density adjustment.
Note:
• You must do SP3820 to enable any values you change with SP3531 (Procon
Target).

• Use SP3561 to display the resuls of SP3820 execution.
001
002
3821

001
002
003
004
005

Normal ProCon
Exe Density Adj

[0~0/1]

ProCon OK?
Display Result of Process Control Execution
Use this SP to display the history of process control executions. These SP codes are
used to troubleshoot processing control. For more, see "4.2.4 Process Control
Troubleshooting" in Section "4. Troubleshooting".
[0~99999999/1]
History:Last
006 History:Last 6
History:Last 2
007 History:Last 7
History:Last 3
008 History:Last 8
History:Last 4
009 History:Last 9
History:Last 5
010 History:Last 10

3891

Set ProCon Send
Set Up Sending Process Control Data to NRS Center
This feature is not presently used. (March 2005)
[0~1/1]

3900

RsetProConSP
Reset All Process Control SP Codes
Do this SP to reset all process control related SP codes to their default values.

5-95

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

April, 2007

Group 4000
4008

Sub Scan Mag
Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment
Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed.
[-10~+10/0.1%]

4010

Sub Scan Reg
Sub Scan Registration Adjustment
Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the subscan direction.
[-30~+30/0.1 mm]

4011

Main Scan Reg
Main Scan Registration Adjustment
Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the scanning start timing in the main
scan direction.
Note: This adjustment is done for the ADF with SP6006 (ADF Reg. Adj.).
[-25~+25/0.1 mm]

4012

Set Scale Mask
Set Mask for Scale Edge
Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by the gap
between the original and the scale. This can be done for both scanning on the
exposure glass (book mode) and the ADF (ADF) for the leading and trailing edges.
[0~30/0.1 mm]
Book:Sub LEdge
Book:Sub TEdge
Book:Main:LEdge
Book:Main:TEdge
ADF:Sub:LEdge
ADF:Main:LEdge
ADF:Main:TEdge

001
002
003
004
005
007
008
4013

001
002
4014
001
002

Scan Free Run
Free Run: Scanner
Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp ON or OFF for full-color, full
size (A3 or DLT).
[0~1/1] 0:Off, 1:On
Lamp:OFF
Lamp:ON
Scan
Execute Scan DFU
These SPs enable/disable detection of the scanner at its home position.
Enable
Enables detection of the scanner at its home position.
Disable
Disables detection of the scanner at its home position.

5-96

April, 2007

4020

001

002

003

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Dust Check
Set for Dust Check on ADF Exposure Glass
These SP codes adjust the dust check operation at the ADF scanning glass and the
white scanning belt.
Note: Dust that triggers a warning could be removed from the glass by the originals in
the feed path. If the dust is removed by passing originals, this is not detected and the
warning remains on.
Dust Detect:On/Off
Switches the dust warning ON and OFF. When this SP is ON,
a warning is issued if the check detects dust on the ADF scan
glass or the white plate above the scanning glass. Always
clean the ADF scanning glass and white plate before turning
this SP ON.
[0~1/1] 0:Off, 1:On
Dust Detect:Lvl
Adjusts the sensitivity of the check. If you see black streaks in
copies when no warning has been issued, raise the setting to
increase the level of sensitivity. If warnings are issued when
you see no black streaks in copies, lower the setting.
[0~8/1]
Dust Reject:Lvl
Sets the level for vertical line correction caused by dust. A
high setting can eliminate unwanted vertical lines caused by
dust but it can also thin vertical lines of the original.
[0~4/1]

4205

B/W ADS Lvl
Black-and-White ADS Level
This SP sets the background level for black-and-white ADS. ADS mode detects the
background level of the original, also known as the peak white level, and removes
this from the image to make a white background. This setting initializes the SBU at
power ON.
[-128~+127/1]

4301

APS Confirm
Confirm Correct Operation of APS
This SP confirms and displays the threshold for operation of the APS mode.
[0~255/1]

4303

APS Min Size
Set Minimum Size for APS Operation
Sets the minimum size that the will be detected by APS
[0~2/1] 0:No, 1:A5-S / ST-S, 2:A5-L / ST-L

4305

8K/16K Detect
8K/16K Detection
This SP enables the machine to recognize 8K/16K size paper automatically.
[0~1/1] 0: Off, 1: On

5-97

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

4400
001
002
003
004
005
007
008

April, 2007

Org Edge Mask
Set the Mask for Original
This SP sets the area to be masked during platen (book) mode scanning.
[0~30/0.1 mm]
Book:Sub:LEdge
Book:Sub:TEdge
Book:Main:LEdge
Book:Main:Tedge
ADF:Sub:LEdge
ADF:Main:TEdge
ADF:Main:TEdge

4417

IPU Test Pattern
Set IPU Test Pattern
Use this SP to select the IPU test pattern to print.
Test Pattern
[0~24/1]
0
Scanned Image
13
Grid Pattern CMYK
1
Gradation Main Scan A
14
Color Patch CMYK
2
Gradation Main Scan B
15
Gray Pattern (1)
3
Gradation Main Scan C
16
Gray Pattern (2)
4
Gradation Main Scan D
17
Gray Pattern (3)
5
Gradation Sub Scan 1
18
Shading Pattern
6
Grid Pattern
19
Thin Line Pattern
7
Slant Grid Pattern
20
Scanned + Grid Pattern
8
Gradation RGBCMYK
21
Scanned + Grayscale
9
UCR Pattern
22
Scanned + Color Patch
10 Color Patch 16 (1)
23
Scanned + Slant Grid C
11 Color Patch 16 (2)
24
Scanned + Slant Grid D
12 Color Patch 16 64

4440

Saturation Adj
Adjust Color Saturation
This SP adjusts the saturation level for copying.
[0~5/1]
0: High
1: Lowest
2: Lower
3: Default
4: Higher
5: Highest

5-98

April, 2007

4501

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

ACC Target Den
ACC Target Notch Density
This SP sets the target density for the ACC adjustment for machines connected with
the Copy Connector (B328). For more see "4.2.5 Color Adjustment for Connected
Copiers".
Copy:K:Text
[0~50/1]
Copy:C:Text
Copy:M:Text
Copy:Y:Text
Copy:K:Photo
Copy:C:Photo
Copy:M:Photo
Copy:Y:Photo

4505

4506
001 – 004
005 – 008
4540

001 – 004
005 – 008
009 – 012
013 – 016
017 – 020
021 – 024
025 – 028
029 – 032
033 – 036
037 – 040
041 – 044
045 – 048
049 – 052
053 – 056

ACC Cor:Bright
ACC Correction: Bright Areas
Sets correction for bright areas for ACC correction. For more see "4.2.5 Color
Adjustment for Connected Copiers".
ACC Cor:Dark
ACC Correction: Dark Areas
Sets correction for dark areas for ACC correction.
[-128~+128/1]
Master:K, M, C, Y
Slave:K, M, C, Y
Print Coverage
Print Coverage Correction
This SP corrects printer coverage of 12 hues (RY, YR, YG, etc. x 4 Colors (K,
C, M, Y) for a total of 48 parameters.
RY:K, C, M, Y
[-128~+128/1]
YR:K, C, M, Y
YG:K, C, M, Y
GY:K, C, M, Y
GC:K, C, M, Y
CG:K, C, M, Y
CB:K, C, M, Y
BC:K, C, M, Y
BM:K, C, M, Y
MB:K, C, M, Y
MR:K, C, M, Y
RM:K, C, M, Y
W:K, C, M, Y
K:K, C, M, Y

5-99

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

April, 2007

These SPs (SP4550~SP4562) allow adjustments for the MTF(Modulation Transfer
Function) level, smoothing, brightness and contrast of the scanning applications
used on the document server (scan-to-email, scan-to-folder).
4550
4551
4552
4553
4554
4555
4558
4559
4560
4561
4562
005

SApli:TxtPrt
SApli:TxtOCR1
SApli:TxtOCR2
SApli:T/P
SApli:Photo
SApli:Gray
SApli:Col:T/P
SApli:Col:PPr
SApli:sRGB:T/P
SApli:sRGB:PPr
SApli:Auto Col
MTF Lvl:0-15

006

Smooth:0-7

007

Brightness:1-255

008

Contrast:1-255

4600

001
002
4603
001
002
4604

Scanner Application: Text (Print)
Scanner Application: Text (OCR)
Scanner Application: Text (OCR: Dropout Color)
Scanner Application: Text/Photo
Scanner Application: Photo
Scanner Application: Grayscale
Scanner Application: Color Text/Photo
Scanner Application: Color Photo Paper
Scanner Application: sRGB Text/Photo
Scanner Application: sRGB Color Photo Paper
Scanner Application: Auto Color
Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function)
designed to improve image contrast. Set higher for
stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
[0~15/1]
Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for
smoother.
[0~7/1]
Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.
[1~255/1]
Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less
contrast.
[1~255/1]

Display SBU ID
Display the ID of the SBU DFU
Use this SP to read the SBU ID (includes VSBCNT_ID). If the ID is abnormal, this
will generate SC144.
Board&VSBCNT
DAGL
Do AGC
Execute AGC DFU
This SP executes automatic gain control (AGC) for HP detection.
[0~1/1] 0:Off, 1:On
HP Detect:Enable
HP Detect:Disable
Open/Close FGATE
Open/Close FGATE DFU
This SP opens and closes scanner FGATE. (FGATE is the laser write signal.)
[0~1/1] 0:Off, 1:On

5-100

April, 2007

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

4609
4610
4611

White Plate:R
Standard White Plate Adjustment: Red DFU
White Plate:G
Standard White Plate Adjustment: Green DFU
White Plate:B
Standard White Plate Adjustmetn: Blue DFU
This SP codes display the reference voltages stored in NVRAM at the factory for
Red, Green, and Blue before the machine was shipped. The SBU acquires these
settings every time the machine is switched ON.
[-256~+255/1]

4628
4629
4630

Gain Adj Range:R
Gain Adjustment Range: R DFU
Gain Adj Range:G
Gain Adjustment Range: G DFU
Gain Adj Range:B
Gain Adjustment Range: B DFU
When switched ON, these SP display the current range for the gain of RED,
GREEN, and BLUE in the ASCI on the SBU after white level adjustment every time
the machine is switched ON.
[0~1/1]
Color
B/W

001
002
4631

001
002
4632

001
002
005
006
4633

001
002
4641

001
002

Gain Adj Range:R
Gain Adjustment Range: R DFU
When switched ON, this SP displays the current range for the E (EVEN) or O (ODD)
gain of RED in the ASCI on the SBU after white level adjustment every time the
machine is switched ON.
[0~1/1]
RE
RO
Gain Adj Range:G
Gain Adjustment Range: G DFU
When switched ON, this SP displays the current range for E (EVEN) or O (ODD)
gain of GREEN or B/W in the ASCI on the SBU after white level adjustment every
time the machine is switched ON.
Color:GE
[0~1023/1]
Color:GO
B/W:GE
B/W:GO
Gain Adj Range:B
Gain Adjustment Range: B DFU
When switched ON, this SP displays the current range for E (EVEN) or O (ODD)
gain of BLUE in the ASCI on the SBU after white level adjustment every time the
machine is switched ON.
BE
[0~1023/1]
BO
White Lvl Loop
White Level Loops DFU
Displays the number of loops done color correction for AGC (Automatic Gain
Correction) during white level adjustment.
[0~1023/1]
Color
B/W

5-101

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

4646

001
002

April, 2007

Scan Auto Error
Error Flag for Automatic Adjustment: Scanning DFU
This SP sets the error flag to display as the SBU is updated automatically when the
machine is switched ON.
[0x00~0xFFFF]
Gain
K Level
b7
GAIN_ERR_BO
b6
GAIN_ERR_BE
b5
GAIN_ERR_BK_GO
b4
GAIN_ERR_BK_GE
b3
GAIN_ERR_GO
b2
GAIN_ERR_GE
b1
GAIN_ERR_RO
b0
GAIN_ERR_RE

4647

HW Error Flag
Hardware Error Flag Adjustment: Scanning DFU
This SP sets the error flag to confirm machine ON processing when the machine is
switched ON.
[0x00~0x3F]

4680

Fact Gain Adj:R
Factory Gain Adjustment at Factory: Red DFU
When switched ON, this SP displays the setting done at the factory for RED O
(ODD) and E (EVEN) gain in the ASCI on the SBU after white level adjustment every
time the machine is switched ON.
[0~1023/1]
RE
RO

001
002
4681

001
002
005
006
4682

001
002
4690

001
002

Fact Gain Adj:G
Factory Gain Adjustment at Factory: Green DFU
When switched ON, this SP displays the setting done at the factory for GREEN and
black-and-white O (ODD) and E (EVEN) gain in the ASCI on the SBU after white
level adjustment every time the machine is switched ON.
Color:GE
[0~1023/1]
Color:GO
B/W:GE
B/W:GO
Fact Gain Adj:B
Factory Gain Adjustment at Factory: Blue DFU
When switched ON, this SP displays the setting done at the factory for BLUE O
(ODD) and E (EVEN) gain in the ASCI on the SBU after white level adjustment every
time the machine is switched ON.
[0~1023/1]
BE
BO
White Lvl Peak:R
White Level Peak: Red Scan Data DFU
When switched ON, these SP codes display E (EVEN) or O (ODD) for the white
level peak RED data after white level detection (AGC) after the machine is switched
ON.
[0~255/1]
RE
RO

5-102

April, 2007
4691

001
002
005
006
4692

001
002
4693

001
002
003
004
4694

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
4695

001
002
003
004

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

White Lvl Peak:G
White Level Peak: Green Scan Data DFU
When switched ON, these SP codes display E (EVEN) or O (ODD) for the white
level peak GREEN or black-and-white data after white level detection (AGC) after
the machine is switched ON.
Color:GE
[0~255/1]
Color:GO
B/W:GE
B/W:GO
White Lvl Peak:B
White Level Peak: Blue Scan Data DFU
When switched ON, these SP codes display E (EVEN) or O (ODD) for the white
level peak BLUE data after white level detection (AGC) after the machine is switched
ON.
[0~255/1]
BE
BO
Black Lvl Scan:R
Black Level Scan Value: Red DFU
When switched ON, these SP codes display E (EVEN) or O (ODD) for the black
level check done in the SBU for RED after the machine is switched ON.
REE
[0~255/1]
ROE
REO
ROO
Black Lvl Scan:G
Black Level Scan Value: Green DFU
When switched ON, these SP codes display E (EVEN) or O (ODD) for the black
level check done in the SBU for GREEN after the machine is switched ON.
Color:GEE
[0~255/1]
Color:GOE
Color:GEO
Color:GOO
B/W:GEE
B/W:GOE
B/W:GEO
B/W:GOO
Black Lvl Scan:B
Black Level Scan Value: Blue DFU
When switched ON, these SP codes display E (EVEN) or O (ODD) for the black
level check done in the SBU for BLUE after the machine is switched ON.
BEE
[0~255/1]
BOE
BEO
BOO

5-103

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

4800

001
002
003
4902

001
002
003
004
005
006

April, 2007

DF Density Adj
ADF Density Adjustment
This SP adjusts the white shading parameter for scanning an image with the ADF.
Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs from the DF and Platen mode are
different.
:R
[1~200/1]
:G
[1~200/1]
:B
[1~200/1]
Disp ACC Data
Display ACC Data
This SP outputs the final data read at the end of ACC execution. A zero is returned if
there was an error reading the data.
[0~255/1]
R_DATA1 Photo C Patch Level 1 (8-bit)
G_DATA1 Photo M Patch Level 1 (8-bit)
B_DATA1 Photo Y Patch Level 1 (8-bit)
R_DATA2 Photo C Patch Level 17 (8-bit)
G_DATA2 Photo M Patch Level 17 (8-bit)
B_DATA2 Photo Y Patch Level 17 (8-bit)

4904

Test Scan IPU
Test Scanner IPU Board
This SP tests the components of the BICU:
• Test 1 performs write and read tests the CPU by conducting a compare check that
reads and writes to each register of the ASIC.
• Test 2 performs a check of the image paths and connections and displays the
location of a defect of an error is detected.
[0~65535/1]
001 Test 1
002 Test 2

4905

Select Dithering
Select Dithering Type
This SP changes the threshold parameters of error diffusion.
[0~255/1]

4907

SBU Pattern
Set SBU Test Pattern
This SP selects the pattern generated by the SBU.
Test Pattern
[0~4/1]
Select Fixed Patt
[0~0x3FF/0x3FF]

001
002
4918

Man Gamma Adj
Manual Printer Gamma Adjustment:
Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for black, cyan, magenta, and yellow in
Photo mode. For more, see the last section of Section "3.19.6 PRINTER GAMMA
CORRECTION".

4929

Man Scan Gamma Adj
Manual Scan Gamma Adjustment
Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for black, cyan, magenta, and yellow in
manual scanning mode.

5-104

April, 2007

4932
001
002
003
004

4954

001

002
004
4991
001

4992

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

MainScan Dot Adj
Main Scan Dot Position Adjustment
Corrects the left or right side alignment of the red or blue filter on the CCD.
R:Left
[0~9/1]
R:Right
B:Left
B:Right

Read/Restore Std
Chart Standard: Read/Restore
Use this SP to calibrate the scanner gamma on each machine connected with the
Copy Connector (B328).
Read New Chart
Reads the "Connection Kit Color Test Chart
(VSST9501)" to calibrate the scanner gamma curve
for two machines connected with the Copy Connector
(B328). Do this SP with the test chart on each
connected machine.
Recall Prev Chart
Restores the scanner gamma to the previous value
(not the factory setting).
Set Std Chart
DFU
Image Path SW
Image Path Switch
Use this SP to use the 10-key pad to enter the number to determine the image path.
IPU [0~14/1]
0
DFID input RGB images (upper 8 bits)
1
Synchronous RGB images in DFID
2
Data with shading correction on
3
Data with shading correction OFF
4
Data before black offset correction
5
Data after black offset correction
6
Shading data
7
Test pattern data (grayscale)
8
RGB image after line interval correction
9
RGB image after dot correction and pre-gamma
10 RGB image after vertiial line correction
11 RGB image after scanner gamma correction
12 RTB image after filtering with MTF
13 RTB image after ADS
14 RGB image after color processing
ProCon 
 Unit
Select Process Control Unit
This SP selects either the printer or IPU to reflect process control gamma.
Note: This machine is fixed at 0 (Printer) and the setting cannot be changed.
[0~2/1]

5-105

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

August, 2006

Group 5000
5024

mm/inch Display Selection
Selects the unit of measurement.
After selection, turn the main power switch off and on.
[0~1/1]
0: mm
1: inch

5045

Accounting Counter
Counter Method
Selects the counting method.
Note: You can change the setting only one time.
[0 to 1/ 1]
0: Development counter. Shows the total counts for color (Y,M,C) and black (K).
1: Paper counter. Shows the total page counts for: Color Total, Black Total, Color
Copies, Black Copies, Color Prints, Black Prints.

5047

Reverse Paper Display
Determines whether the tray loaded with paper printed on one side is displayed.
[0~1/1]
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed

5051

Toner Refill Detection Display Japan Only

5112

Non-Std. Paper Sel.
Determines whether a non-standard paper size can be input for the universal
cassette trays (Tray 2, Tray 3)
[0~1/1]
0: No
1: Yes. If “1” is selected, the customer will be able to input a non-standard paper
size using the UP mode.

5-106

August, 2006

5113
001

002

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Optional Counter Type (Not Used)
Default Optional Counter Type
Selects the type of counter:
0: None
1: Key card (RK3, 4) Japan only
2: Key card down
3: Pre-paid card
4: Coin Lock
5: MF key card
11: Exp Key Card (Add)
12: Exp Key Card (Deduct)
External Optional Counter Type
Enables the SDK application. This lets you select a number for the external
device for user access control.
Note: “SDK” refers to software on an SD card.
[0~3/1]
0: None
1: Expansion Device 1
2: Expansion Device 2
3: Expansion Device 3

5118

Disable Copying
Temporarily denies access to the machine. Japan Only
[0~1/1]
0: Release for normal operation
1: Prohibit access to machine

5120

Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal
Do not change. Japan Only
[0~2/1]
0: Yes. Normal reset
1: Standby. Resets before job start/after completion
2: No. Normally no reset

5121

Counter Up Timing
Determines whether the optional key counter counts up at paper feed-in or at
paper exit. Japan Only
[0~1/1]
0: Feed count
1: No feed count

5126

F Org Size
Set F Original Size Selection
Sets the original size that the machine detects for F sizes.
[0~2/1]
0: 8½ x 13
1: 8¼ x 13
2: 8 x 13

5-107

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

August, 2006

5127

APS Mode
This SP can be used to switch APS (Auto Paper Select) off when a coin lock or
pre-paid key card device is connected to the machine.
[0~1/1]
0: On
1: Off

5128

Code Mode With Key/Card Option

Japan Only

5131

Set Paper Size
Set Paper Size Handling
Selects the paper size type (for originals and copy paper). (Only needs to be
adjusted if the optional printer controller is installed)
[0~2/1]
0: JP (Japan)
1: NA (North America)
2: EU (Europe)
After changing the value, turn the main power switch off and on.

5150

Bypass Length Setting
Sets up the bypass tray for long paper.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On. Sets the tray for feeding paper up to 600 mm long.
With this SP selected on, paper jams are not detected in the paper path.

5154
001

Exit Tray Set
Limitless
Allows ‘limitless’ paper output.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On. Once the initial paper exit is full, another will be selected automatically.
Switch this SP on only in the job queuing mode, i.e. when printing jobs in the order
of selection with the print priority function. Print priority is set in the User Tools
mode (System Settings> General Features> Print Priority> Job Order.)
Override
Allows overriding of the setting for SP5154-001.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
This SP can be set only when on is selected for SP5154-001. Changing this
setting has no effect on the machine when SP5154-001 is off.

002

5-108

August, 2006

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

5162

App. Switch Method
Controls if the application screen is changed with a hardware switch or a software
switch.
[0~1/1]
0: Soft Key Set
1: Hard Key Set

5169

CE Login
If you will change the printer bit switches, you must ‘log in’ to service mode with this SP
before you go into the printer SP mode.
[0~1/1]
0: Off. Printer bit switches cannot be adjusted.
1: On. Printer bit switches can be adjusted.

5212
003

Page Numbering
Duplex Printout Left/Right Position

004

Duplex Printout High/Low Position

5302

Set Time DFU
Sets the time clock for the local time. This setting is done at the factory before
delivery. The setting is GMT expressed in minutes.
[–1440~1440/1 min.]
JA: +540 (Tokyo)
NA: -300 (NY)
EU: +6- (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)

Horizontally positions the page numbers
printed on both sides during duplexing.
[–10~+10/1 mm]
0 is center, minus is left, + is right.
Vertically positions the page numbers
printed on both sides during duplexing.
[–10~+10/1 mm]
0 is center, minus is down, + is up.

5-109

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

5307

001

002
003

5401
200
201
210
211
220
221

5404

August, 2006

Summer Time
Lets you set the machine to adjust its date and time automatically with the change to
Daylight Savings time in the spring and back to normal time in the fall. This SP lets you
set these items:
- Day and time to go forward automatically in April.
- Day and time to go back automatically in October.
- Set the length of time to go forward and back automatically.
The settings for 002 and 003 are done with 8-digit numbers:
Digits
Meaning
Month. 4: April, 10: October (for months 1 to 9, the first digit of 0 cannot be
1st, 2nd
input, so the eight-digit setting for 002 or 003 becomes a seven-digit
setting)
3rd
Day of the week. 0: Sunday, 1: Monday
4th
The number of the week for the day selected at the 3rd digit. If “0” is
selected for “Sunday”, for example, and the selected Sunday is the start of
the 2nd week, then input a “2” for this digit.
5th, 6th
The time when the change occurs (24-hour as hex code).
Example: 00:00 (Midnight) = 00, 01:00 (1 a.m.) = 01, and so on.
7th
The number of hours to change the time. 1 hour: 1
If the time change is not a whole number (1.5 hours for example), digit 8
8th
should be 3 (30 minutes).
Setting
Enables/disables the settings for 002 and 003.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Rule Set
The start of summer time.
(Start)
Rule Set
The end of summer time.
(End)

Access Control
This SP stores the settings that limit uses access to SDK application data.
SDK1 Unique ID
This data can be converted from SAS (VAS) when installed
or uninstalled.
SDK1 Recognition
SDK2 Unique ID
SDK2 Recognition
SDK3 Unique ID
SDK3 Recognition

User Code Count Clear
001
User Code Counter Clear

Clears all user code counters.
Press [#] to execute.

5-110

August, 2006

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

5501

PM Alarm
Sets the count level for the PM alarm.
[0~9999/1]
0: Alarm disabled
The PM alarm goes off when the print count reaches this value multiplied by 1,000.

5504
5505
5507

Jam Alarm
Error Alarm
Supply Alarm

5508
001
002
003

CC Call Japan Only
Jam Remains
Continuous Jams
Continuous Door Open

004

Low Call Mode

011

Jam Detection: Time
Length

012

Jam Detection
Continuous Count

013

Door Open: Time Length

021

Jam Operation: Time
Length

022

Jam Operation:
Continuous Count

Japan Only

Enables/disables initiating a call.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enables/disables the new call specifications designed
to reduce the number of calls.
[0~1/1]
0: Normal mode
1: Reduced mode
Sets the length of time to determine the length of an
unattended paper jam.
[03~30/1]
This setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is
enabled (set to 1).
Sets the number of continuous paper jams required to
initiate a call.
[02~10/1]
This setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is
enabled (set to 1).
Sets the length of time the remains opens to determine
when to initiate a call.
[03~30/1]
This setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is
enabled (set to 1).
Determines what happens when a paper jam is left
unattended.
[0~1/1]
0: Automatic Call
1: Audible Warning at Machine
Determines what happens when continuous paper
jams occur.
[0~1/1]
0: Automatic Call
1: Audible Warning at Machine

5-111

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

August, 2006

023

Door Operation: Time
Length

5513

Parts Alarm Level Count Japan Only
001
Normal
Sets the parts replacement alarm counter to
sound for the number of copies.
[1~999/1 K]
002
DF
Sets the parts replacement alarm counter to
sound for the number of scanned originals.
[1~999/1 K]

5514
001
002

Parts Alarm Level Japan Only
Normal
DF

5610
004
005
005

ACC Factory Setting
Recall
Overwrite
Previoius Setting

5611

001
002
003
004
005
006

Determines what happens when the front door remains
open.
[0~1/1]
0: Automatic Call
1: Audible Warning at Machine

DFU

2-Col Tnr Ratio
Adjust Toner Ratio Between 2 Colors DFU
Adjusts the toner ratio between color pairs: Black, Cyan, Magenta, Green, and
Yellow.
B-C
B-M
G-C
G-Y
R-M
R-Y

5-112

August, 2006

5801

001
002
003

004
005

006
007
008

009
010

011

014
015
016
017

5802

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Memory Clear
Memory Clear
Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing this SP, print an
SMC Report.
All Clear
Initializes items 2 ~ 15 below.
Engine Clear
Initializes all registration settings for the engine
and copy process settings.
SCS
Initializes default system settings, SCS
(System Control Service) settings, operation
display coordinates, and ROM update
information.
IMH Memory Clear
Initializes the image file system.
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
MCS
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for
stored documents.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
Copier application
Initializes all copier application settings.
Not used.
Fax application
Printer application
Initializes the printer defaults, programs
registered, the printer SP bit switches, and the
printer CSS counter. (Not used)
Scanner application
Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all
the scanner SP modes.
Web Service/ Network application
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files
and thumbnails, and initializes the Job login ID.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document
server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder
software
NCS
Initializes the system defaults and interface
settings (IP addresses also), the
SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings,
WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET
settings.
(NCS: Network Control Service)
Clear DCS Setting
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service)
settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control
Clear UCS Setting
Service) settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information
MIRS Setting
Report Service) settings.
CCS
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Chargecontrol Service) settings.
Engine Free Run
Copier Engine Free Run
Makes a base engine free run
[0~1/1]
0: Disable: Release free run mode
1: Enable: Enable free run mode
Return this setting to off (0) after testing is completed.

5-113

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

August, 2006

5803

Input Chk

Input Check (Mainframe) (
5.6.1)

5804

Output Chk

Output Check (
5.6.2)

5810

Cancel Fusing SC
Cancel Fusing SC Code
When the machine issues one of the "Level A" SC codes shown below, this
indicates a serious problem in the fusing unit. The machine is disabled and the
operator cannot reset the SC. The machine requires servicing immediately. Use this
SP code to release the machine for servicing.
• SC542 – SC545 Heating roller thermistor 1
• SC547 – Zero Cross
• SC548 – SC550 Heating roller thermistor 2
• SC551 – Pressure roller thermistor
• SC553 – SC555 Pressure roller thermistor
• SC662 – SC565 Hot roller thermistor

5811

Machine No. Setting

5812
001

Service Tel. No. Setting
Service
Inputs the telephone number of the CE (displayed when a
service call condition occurs.)
Facsimile
Use this to input the fax number of the CE printed on the
Counter Report (UP mode). Not Used
Supply
Displayed on the initial SP screen.
Operation
Allows the service center contact telephone number to be
displayed on the initial screen.

002
003
004

Displays the machine serial number.

5-114

August, 2006

5816
001

002

003

006

007

008

009

010

011

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Remote Service (Not Used)
I/F Setting
Turns the remote diagnostics off and on.
[0~2/1]
0: Remote diagnostics off.
1: Serial (CSS or NRS) remote diagnostics on.
2: Network remote diagnostics.
CE Call
Lets the service engineer start or end the remote machine
check with CSS or NRS; to do this, press the center report
key.
Function Flag
Enables and disables remote diagnosis over the NRS
network.
[0~1/1]
0: Disables remote diagnosis over the network.
1: Enables remote diagnosis over the network.
Device
Controls if the item for initial setting of the screen for the NRS
Information Call
device-information notification-call is shown.
Display
[0~1/1]
0: Enabled. Item initial setting not shown.
1: Disable. Item for initial setting shown.
SSL Disable
Controls if RCG (Remote Communication Gate) confirmation
is done by SSL during an RCG send for the NRS over a
network interface.
[0~1/1]
0: Yes. SSL not used.
1: No. SSL used.
RCG Connect
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when the
Timeout
RCG (Remote Communication Gate) connects during a call
via the NRS network.
[1~90/1 sec.]
RCG Write to
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when sent
Timeout
data is written to the RCG during a call over the NRS
network.
[0~100/1 sec.]
RCG Read
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the timeout when sent
Timeout
data is written from the RCG during a call over the NRS
network.
[0~100/1 sec.]
Port 80 Enable
Controls if permission is given to get access to the SOAP
method over Port 80 on the NRS network.
[0~1/1]
0: No. Access denied
1: Yes. Access granted.

5-115

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

5821
001
002

August, 2006

Remote Service Address (Japan Only)
CSS PI Device Code
Sets the PI device code. After you change this
setting, you must turn the machine off and on.
RCG IP Address
Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote
Communication Gate) destination for call
processing at the remote service center.
[00000000h~FFFFFFFFh/1]

5824

NVRAM Data Upload
Uploads the NVRAM data to an SD card (B6455010). Press Execute.
Note: When uploading in this SP mode data, the front door must be open.

5825

NVRAM Data Download
Downloads data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine. After
downloading is completed, remove the card and turn the machine power off and
on.

5828
050

Network Setting
1284 Compatibility
(Centro)

052

ECP (Centro)

065

Job Spool Setting

066

Job Spool Clear

069

Job Spool Protocol

077
078

IPv4 DNS Server 2
IPv4 DNS Server 3

079
084

Domain Name (Ethernet)
Setting List Print

Enables and disables bi-directional communication
on the parallel connection between the machine and
a computer.
[0~1/1]
0:Off
1: On
Disables and enables the ECP feature (1284 Mode)
for data transfer.
[0~1/1]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Switches job spooling spooling on and off.
0: No spooling 1: Spooling enabled
This SP determines whether the job interrupted at
power off is resumed at the next power on. This SP
operates only when SP5828 065 is set to 1.
1: Resumes printing spooled jog.
0: Clears spooled job.
This SP detemines whether job spooling is enabled
or dispabled for each protocol. This is a 8-bit setting.
0 LPR
4 BMLinks (Japan Only)
1 FTP (Not Used)
5 DIPRINT
2 IPP
6 Reserved (Not Used)
3 SMB
7 Reserved (Not Used)
Sets the IPv4 address for a DNS server. This address
can be used among devices that have IPv4 devices
(Ethernet, IPv4 Over 1394, IEEE 802.11b, etc.)
Prints a list of the NCS parameter settings.

5-116

August, 2006
090

TELNET Operation
Settings

091

Web Operation

096

Rendezvous Operation

5832

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011

5833

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES
Disables or enables Telnet operation. If this SP is
disabled, the Telnet port is closed.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Disables or enables the Web operation.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
This SP disables/enables Rendezvous operation.
This is a set of protocols that allows a device on an IP
network to automatically recognize and connect with
other devices (such as a printer) on a network. Once
a new device is connected to the network, it can be
used immediately by every computer on the network.
No special setup procedures or configuration settings
are required
1: Enable 0: Disable

HDD Formatting
Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When the
execution ends, cycle the machine off and on.
HDD Formatting (All)
HDD Formatting (IMH)
HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
HDD Formatting (Job Log)
HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
HDD Formatting (User Info.)
Mail RX Data
Mail TX Log
HDD Formatting (Log)
HDD Formatting Log
HDD Formatting (DiskTopBinder)

e-Cabinet Enable
Enables the e-Cabinet function. Then, the user names in the cabinet are enabled
for use with the POP server.
[0~1/1]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

5-117

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

5836
001

002

003

071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
081

082

083

August, 2006

Capture
Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)
With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be
initialized, displayed, or selected.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Panel Setting
Determines whether each capture related setting can be selected or updated from
the initial system screen.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
The setting for SP5836-001 has priority.
Print Backup Function (0:Off 1:On)
Turns the print backup feature on and off. Default: 0 (Off)
When this feature is on, the print backup features are shown in the initial system
settings. Enabled only when optional File Format Converter (MLB:Media Link
Board) is installed.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Reduction for Copy Color [0~3/1]
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 DFU
Reduction for Copy B&W [0~6/1]
Text
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
Reduction for Copy B&W [0~6/1]
Other
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
Reduction for Printer
[0~3/1]
Color
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 DFU
Reduction for Printer
[0~6/1]
B&W
0 1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
Reduction for Printer
[1~5/1]
B&W HQ
1:1/2 3:1/4 4:1/6 5:1/8
Reduction for Printer Col
[1~5/1]
1200 dpi
1:1/2 3:1/4 4:1/6 5:1/8
Reduction for Printer
[1~5/1]
B&W 1200 dpi
1:1/2 3:1/4 4:1/6 5:1/8
Format for Copy Color
[0~3/1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR DFU
Format for Copy B&W
[0~3/1]
Text
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
Format Copy B&W Other [0~3/1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR

5-118

August, 2006
084

085

086

091

092

093

094

095

097

098

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Format for Printer Color

[0~3/1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR DFU
Format for Printer B&W
[0~3/1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
Format for Printer B&W
[0~3/1]
HQ
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
Default for JPEG
[5~95/1]
Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management
server with the MLB, with JPEG selected as the format. Enabled only when
optional File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) is installed.
Sets the quality level of JPEG images for high quality
High Quality for JPEG
sent to the Document Server with the MLB (Media Link
Board).
[5~95/1]
Sets the quality level of JPEG images for low quality
Low Quality for JPEG
sent to the Document Server with the MLB (Media Link
Board).
[5~95/1]
Sets the format of the backup files.
Default Format for
[0~2/1]
Backup Files
0: TIFF
1: JPEG
2: For printing
This feature can be selected only if SP5836-3 is set to
“1”.
Sets the resolution conversion ratio for the backup files.
Default Resolution for
[0~3/1]
Backup Files
0: 1x
1: 1/2x
2: 1/3 x
3: 1/4x
Sets the rate of compression for the backup files.
Default Compression for
[0~2/1]
Backup Files
0: Standard
1: Low
2: High
Back Projection Removal Removes the ghost images that are copied from the
back sides of two-sided originals.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable

5-119

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

5839
004
007

008

009

010

011

012

August, 2006

IEEE 1394 (Not Used)
This SP is displayed only when an IEEE 1394 (firewire) card is installed.
Host Name
Enter the name of the device used on the network. Example: RNP0000000000
Cycle Master
Enables or disables the cycle master function for the 1394 bus standard.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable (Off)
1: Enable (On)
BCR Mode
Determines how BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) operates on the 1394
standard bus when the independent node is in any mode other than IRM.
(NVRAM: 2-bits)
[Always Effective]
IRM 1394a Check
Conducts a 1394a check of IRM when the independent node is in any mode
other than IRM.
[0~1/1]
0: Checks whether IRM conforms to 1394a
1: After IRM is checked, if IRM does not conform then independent node
switches to IRM.
Unique ID
Lists the ID (Node_Unique_ID) assigned to the device by the system
administrator.
Bit0: Off
Bit1: On
OFF: Does not list the Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator.
Instead, the Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is used.
ON: The Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator is used, and
the Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is ignored. Also, when the
serial bus is reset, extra bus transactions are opened for the enumeration.
Logout
Handles the login request of the login initiator for SBP-2. (1-bit)
Bit0: Off
Bit1: On
OFF: Disable (refuse login). Initiator retry during login. Login refusal on arrival of
login request (standard operation)
ON: Enable (force logout). Initiator retry during login. Login refusal on arrival of
login request, and the initiator forces the login.
Login
Enables or disables the exclusive login feature (SBP-2 related).
Bit0: Off
Bit1: On
OFF: Disables. The exclusive login (LOGIN ORB exclusive it) is ignored.
ON: Enables. Exclusive login is in effect.

5-120

August, 2006
013

5840
006

007

011

5841

001
002
002
004
011
012
013
021
022
023
5842

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Login MAX
Sets the maximum number of logins from the initiator (6-bits)
[0~63/1]
0: Reserved
63: Reserved

IEEE 802.11b (Not Used)
Channel MAX
Sets the maximum range of the bandwidth for the wireless LAN. This bandwidth
setting varies for different countries.
[1~14/1]
Channel MIN
Sets the minimum range of the bandwidth for operation of the wireless LAN. This
bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
[1~14/1]
WEP Key Select
Determines how the initiator (SBP-2) handles subsequent login requests.
[0~1/1]
0: If the initiator receives another login request while logging in, the request is
refused.
1: If the initiator receives another login request while logging in, the request is
refused and the initiator logs out.
Note: Displayed only when the wireless LAN card is installed.

Supply Name Setting
Press the User Tools key. These names appear when the user presses the
Inquiry button on the User Tools screen.
Toner Name Setting: Black
Toner Name Setting: Cyan
Toner Name Setting: Yellow
Toner Name Setting: Magenta
StapleStd1
StapleStd2
Standard Staples for B706
StapleStd3
Standard Staples for B700/B701
StapleBind1
StapleBind2
Booklet Staples for B700
StapleBind3
Net File Analysis Mode Setting
This is a debugging tool. It sets
the debugging output mode of
each Net File process.
Bit SW 0011 1111

DFU
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6

5-121

Groups
System & other groups (LSB)
Capture related
Authentication related
Address book related
Machine management related
Output related (printing, delivery)
Repository related

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

5844
001

002

003

004

August, 2006

USB
Transfer Rate
Sets the speed for USB data transmission.
[Full Speed]
[Auto Change]
Vendor ID
Sets the vendor ID:
Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company
[0x0000~0xFFFF/1] DFU
Product ID
Sets the product ID.
[0x0000~0xFFFF/1] DFU
Device Release No.
Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.
[0000~9999/1] DFU
Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number
recognized as the BCD.

5845
Delivery Server
These are delivery server settings.
001
FTP Port No.
[0~65535/1]
002
IP Address
Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the
transfer tab can be used with the initial system setting.
[0~FFFFFFFF/1]
006
Delivery Error Display Time
Use this setting to set the length of time that the message is shown when a test
error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external
device.
[0~999/1]
008
IP Address (Secondary)
Sets the IP address that is given to the computer that is the secondary delivery
server for Scan Router. This SP lets you set only the IP address, and does not refer
to the DNS setting.
009
Delivery Server Model
Lets you change the model of the delivery server that is registered by the I/O
device.
[0~4/1]
0: Unknown
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package

5-122

August, 2006
010

011

5846
001

002

003

006

007

008

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Delivery Svr. Capability
Changes the functions that the registered I/O device can do.
[0~255/1]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to “0”)
Delivery Svr.Capability (Ext)
These settings are for future use. They will let you increase the number of
registered devices (in addition to those registered for SP5845 010).
There are eight bits (Bit 0 to Bit 7). All are unused at this time.
UCS Setting
Machine ID (Delivery Server)
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is
only displayed and cannot be changed.
This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI.
The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
6-byte
%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X
8-byte
%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X
Machine ID Clear (Delivery Server)
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory.
Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable.
After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the
machine off and on.
Maximum Entries
Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
[2000~50000/1]
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared,
and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Delivery Server Retry Timer
Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
[0~255/1 s]
0: No retries
Delivery Server Retry Times
Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
[0~255/1]
Delivery Server Maximum Entries
Lets you set the maximum number of account entries and information about the users
of the delivery server controlled by UCS.
[20000~50000/1]

5-123

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES
010

047

048

049

050

051
052
053

090

091

094

August, 2006

LDAP Search Timeout
Sets the length of the time-out for the search of the LDAP server.
[1~255/1]
Initialize Local Address Book
Clears all of the address information from the local address book of a machine
managed with UCS.
Initialize Delivery Info.
Press [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the delivery
address book that is controlled by UCS.
Initialize LDAP Info.
Press [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the LDAP
address book that is controlled by UCS.
Initialize Local Info.
Clears everything (including users codes) in the directory information managed by
UCS. However, the accounts and passwords of the system administrators are not
deleted.
Upload All Directory Info.
Uploads all directory information to the IC card.
Download All Directory Info.
Downloads all directory information from the IC card.
Update Info Clear
Deletes the address book uploaded from the SD card in the slot. Deletes only the
files uploaded for that machine. This feature does not work if the card is writeprotected.
Note: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, turn the power off. Do not
remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing.
Plain Data Forbidden
Lets you to prevent the address from transmission as plain data. This is a security
function that prevents unauthorized access to address book data.
[0~1/1]
0: No check. Address book data not protected.
1: Check. Enables operation of UCS without data from HDD or SC card and
without creating address book information with plain data.
FTP Auth. Port Settings
Sets the FTP port to get the delivery server address book that is used in the
individual authorization mode.
[0~65535/1]
Encryption Status
Shows the status of the encryption function of the address book on the LDAP
server.
[0~255/1] No default

5-124

August, 2006
5847

001
002
003
004
005
006

021

5848

001

002
003
004
005
009
011
021
022
041
100

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Net File Resolution Reduction
5847 1 through 5847 6 changes the default settings of image data sent externally
by the Net File page reference function. [0~2/1]
5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files controlled by
NetFile.
“NetFile” refers to jobs to be printed from the document server with a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software.
0: 1x
Rate After Copy Col
[0~5/1]
1: 1/2x
Rate for Copy B&W Text
[0~6/1]
2: 1/3x
Rate for Copy B&W Other
[0~6/1]
3: 1/4x
Rate for Printer Color
[0~5/1]
4: 1/6x
Rate for Printer B&W
[0~6/1]
5: 1/8x
Rate for Printer B&W HQ
[0~6/1]
6: 2/3x1
1
: “6: 2/3x” applies to 003, 005, 006
only.
Network Quality Default for JPEG
Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This
function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.
[5~95/1]
Web Service
5847 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of
0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5847 100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded. The default is
equal to 1 gigabyte.
Access Control. : NetFile (Lower 4 Bits Only)
Bit switch settings.
0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. Access and deliveries from Scan Router
have no effect on capture.
Access Control. : Repository (Lower 4 0000: No access control
Bits)
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
Access Control. : Doc. Svr. Print
Switches access control on and off.
(Lower 4 Bits)
0000: OFF
Access Control. : User Directory
(Lower 4 Bits)
Access Control. : Delivery Input
(Lower 4 Bits)
Access Control. : Job Control (Lower 4
Bits)
Access Control: Device Management
(Lower 4 Bits)
Access Control: Delivery (Lower 4
Bits)
Access Control: User Administration
(Lower 4 Bits)
Access Control: Security Setting
(Lower 4 Bits)
Repository: Download Image Max.
[1~1024/1 K]
Size

5-125

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

5849
001
002

August, 2006

Installation Date
Displays or prints the installation date of the machine.
Display
The “Counter Clear Day” has been changed to “Installation
Date” or “Inst. Date”.
Switch to Print
Determines whether the installation date is printed on the
printout for the total counter.
[0~1/1]
0: No Print
1: Print

5853

Stamp Data Download
Press [Execute] to download the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM onto
the hard disk. Then these stamps can be used by the system. If this is not done,
the user will not have access to the fixed stamps (“Confidential”, “Secret”, etc.).
You must always execute this SP after replacing the HDD or after formatting the
HDD. Always switch the machine off and on after executing this SP.

5856

Remote ROM Update
When set to “1” allows reception of firmware data via the local port (IEEE 1284)
during a remote ROM update. This setting is reset to zero after the machine is
cycled off and on. Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel
cable
[0~1/1]
0: Not allowed
1: Allowed

5857
001

002

005
006
009

Save Debug Log
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
Switches on the debug log feature. The debug log cannot be captured until this feature
is switched on.
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
Target (2: HDD 3: SD Card)
Selects the destination where the debugging information generated by the event
selected by SP5858 will be stored if an error is generated
[2~3 /1]
2: HDD
3: SD Card
Save to HDD
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the hard disk.
Save to SD Card
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the SD Card.
Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written to the hard disk and copies them to the
SD Card.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD
Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by
one to each SD Card.

5-126

August, 2006
010

011
012

013
014

015

016
017

5858

001

002

003
004

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key)
Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies it to the SD
Card.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD
Card. Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by
one to each SD Card. This SP does not execute if there is no log on the HDD with no
key specified.
Erase HDD Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the HDD
Erase SD Card Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the SD Card. If the card contains only debugging files
generated by an event specified by SP5858, the files are erased when SP5857 010 or
011 is executed.
To enable this SP, the machine must be cycled off and on.
Free Space on SD Card
Displays the amount of space available on the SD card.
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB)
Copies the last 4MB of the log (written directly to the card from shared memory) onto
an SD card.
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB Any Key)
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written
directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. (
5.10)
Make HDD Debug
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD.
Make SD Debug
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card.

Debug Save When
These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the
destination selected by SP5857 002.
SP5858 3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC
error codes.
Engine SC Error
Stores SC codes generated by copier engine errors.
(0:OFF 1:ON)
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
Controller SC Error
Stores SC codes generated by GW controller errors.
(0:OFF 1:ON)
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
Any SC Error
[0~65535/1]
Jam (0:OFF 1:ON)
Stores jam errors.
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON

5-127

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

5859
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010

5860
020

021

022

025

August, 2006

Debug Log Save Function
Key 1
These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for functions that
use common memory on the controller board. (
5.10)
Key 2
[-9999999~9999999/1]
Key 3
Key 4
Key 5
Key 6
Key 7
Key 8
Key 9
Key 10

SMTP/POP3/IMAP4
Partial Mail Receive Timeout
[1~168/1]
Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during
reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not
received during this prescribed time.
MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.
[0~1/1]
0: No
1: Yes
SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the
validated account after the SMTP server is validated.
[0~1/1]
0: No. “From” item not switched.
1: Yes. “From” item switched.
SMTP Auth Direct Sending
No information is available at this time.

5866
001
005

E-Mail Alert
Notice of E-mail
Add Date Field

5870

Common Key Info Writing
Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the device for NRS
specifications.
Writing
Note: These SPs are for future use and currently are not used.
Initialize

001
003

Not used with this machine.

5-128

August, 2006

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

5871

HDD Function Disable
Disables the HDD functions by suppressing all functions that write data to the
HDD. After this SP is executed, the machine must be switched off and on to
enable the setting.
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
Note: This SP is intended for use during installation of the Data Overwrite
Security Unit Type C (B735). For more, see section “1. Installation”.

5873

SD Card Apli.
Allows you to move applications from one SD card another. For more, see
"1.15.5 Mergining Applications on One SD Card".
Executes the move from one SD card to another.
Move Exec
This is an undo function. It cancels the previous execution.
Undo Exec

001
002

5875

SC Auto Reboot
Determines whether the machine reboots automatically when an SC error occurs.
[0~1/1]
0: The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an SC error and
logs the SC error code. If the same SC occurs again, the machine does not
reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs.
The reboot does not occur for Type A SC codes.

5878

Option Setup
Data Overwrite Security Unit (B735) Setup
Press [Execute] to initialize the Data Overwrite Security option for the copier.
For more, see "1.15 MFP Controller Options" in Section "1. Installation".

5880

ACS High Performance Mode
This SP enables and disables ACS. In the ACS mode the machine raises/lowers
the ITB to print color/black-and-white. If a job contains both full-color and blackand-white pages, the ITB raises for the color pages and lowers for the black-andwhite pages. ACS reduces wear on the color drums but reduces printing speed
slightly.
0: ACS enabled. The ITB raises/lowers for full-color/black-and-white printing.
1: ACS disabled. The ITB remains in contact with all four drums regardless of
whether the job is for full-color or black-and-white. This setting allows the
machine to print faster than the ACS mode because no time is required for the
raising/lowering of the ITB.

5-129

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

August, 2006

5907

Plug & Play Maker/Model Name
Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This
information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names
should be registered again.
After selecting, press the “Original Type” key and “#” key at the same time. When
the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.

5913
002

Switchover Permission Time
Print Application Timer
Sets the length of time to elapse before allowing another application to take control
of the display when the application currently controlling the display is not operating
because a key has not been pressed.
[3~30/1 s]

102

Print Application Set
No information is available at this time.
[0~1/1/1]

5959

Set Size
Set Size
Tray 1 (tandem tray) and the LCT do not have automatic paper size detection. Use
these SP codes to set the paper size for Tray 1 and the optional LCT.
Tray 1:Tandem
The following paper sizes can be set. If the A3/DLT kit is not installed, you can only
use settings 0 and 1
0
A4
6
8.5” x 14” SEF
1
8.5” x 11”
7
8.5” x 11” SEF
2
A3 SEF
8
B5
3
B4 SEF
9
B5 SEF
4
A4 SEF
10 Custom
5
11” x 17”
LCT
The LCT accepts three paper sizes. Enter the correct number of the size of the
paper loaded in the LCT:
0
A4
4
8.5” x 11” SEF
1
8.5” x 11”
5
B4 SEF
2
B5
6
8.5” x 14” SEF
3
A4 SEF
7
Custom Size

001

005

5-130

August, 2006

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

5967

Copy Server: Set Function
Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that
prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After
changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the
new setting.[0~1/1]
0: ON
1: OFF

5974

Cherry Server
Selects which version of the Scan Router application program, “Light” or “Full
(Professional)”, is installed.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Light version (supplied with this machine)
1: Full version (optional)

5990

SP Print Mode
SMC Print
In the SP mode, press Copy Window to move to the copy screen, select the
paper size, then press Start. Select A4/LT (Sideways) or larger to ensure that all
the information prints. Press SP Window to return to the SP mode, select the
desired print, and press Execute.
All (Data List)
SP (Mode Data List)
User Program Data
Logging Data
Diagnostic Report
Non-Default (Prints only SPs set to values other than defaults.)
NIB Summary
Capture Log
Copier User Program
Scanner SP
Scanner User Program

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
021
022
023

5-131

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

August, 2006

Group 6000
6006
001

ADF Reg Adj
ADF Main Reg Adj

003

ADF Sub Reg Adj

005

ADF Buck Adj:Front

006

ADF Buck Adj:Back

007

ADF TEdge EMargin

ADF Registration Adjustment
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the front/back in ADF
mode.
[–3~+3/0.1 mm]
Adjusts the vertical registration for the front/back in ADF
mode.
[–30 ~+30/0.17 mm]
-30 = -5.1 mm
+30 = +5.1 mm
Adjusts the roller timing at the skew correction
sensor/entrance roller. A higher setting causes more
buckling.
[–12.0~+12/0.25 mm]
-12 = -3.0 mm
+12 = +3.0 mm
Adjusts the roller timing at the interval sensor/scanning roller.
A higher setting causes more buckling.
[–8.0~+8/0.25 mm]
[–8.0~+8/0.25 mm]
-8 = -2 mm
+8 = +2 mm
These settings adjust the erase margin for the trailing edges
for the front/back.
[–20~+20/0.5 mm]
-20 = -10 mm
+20 = +10 mm

6007

ADF Input Chk
ADF Input Check
Displays signals received from sensors and switches in the ADF. (
5.7.1)

6008

ADF Output Chk
ADF Output Check
Turns on the ADF electrical components individually for testing. (
5.7.2)

6009

ADF Free Run
ADF Free Run
This SP does an ADF free run in duplex original mode.
Simplex
Duplex

001
002
6016

ADF OrgSizePrior
ADF Original Size Detection Priority
Allows selection of alternate settings for automatic original size detection. (
6.4.3)

6017
001

ADF Mag Adj
ADF Sub Mag Adj

ADF Magnification Adjustment
This changes the magnification by adjusting the speed of
scanning.
[–50(–5%)~+50(+5%)/0.1%]

5-132

August, 2006

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

6020

ADF Skew Adj
ARDF Skew Adjustment at the Scanning Entrance Roller
This SP switches on stopping the scanning entrance roller for all paper sizes.
Normally, the scanning entrance roller stops briefly to correct skew of small paper
sizes in the ADF paper path and for the 2nd side scanning of originals during
duplexing. Setting this SP to "1" sets the ADF to stop the scanning entrance roller for
all paper sizes to correct for skew a second time.
[0~1/1]

6050

Adj Staple Pos
Staple Position Adjustment
Adjusts the position of the staples during corner stapling.

6090

LCT Output Chk
LCT Output Check
Performs the output check for the optional LCT.
LCT Feed Motor
LCT Pick-up SOL

001
002
6101

001
002
003
004
005

Adj Punch Pos 1
Punch Position Adjustment
Adjusts the punch hole positions in the direction of paper feed.
NA: North America
DOM: Japan
EU: Europe
SCAN: Scandinavia
[-75~+75/0.5 mm]
2-Hole:DOM
+ Value: Shifts punch unit in the direction of feed.
3-Hole:NA
- Value: Shift punch unit against direction of feed.
4-Hole:EU
4-Hole:SCAN
2-Hole:NA

Paper Feed

B132S921.WMF

5-133

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

6102

001
002
003
004
005

August, 2006

Adj Punch Pos 2 Punch Position Adjustment
Adjusts the punch position perpendicular to the direction of feed.
[-20~+20/0.4 mm]
+ Value: Shifts punch unit toward back of the finisher.
- Value: Shift punch unit toward front of the finisher.
2-Hole:DOM
3-Hole:NA
4-Hole:EU
4-Hole:SCAN
2-Hole:NA

Paper Feed

B132S922.WMF

6103

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012

Punch Hole Reg 1
Punch Hole Registration Adjustment
This SP corrects punch hole alignment by correcting the skew of each by adjusting
the amount of time the finisher entrance roller remains off while the exit roller of the
machine remains on. This buckles the leading edge of the sheet slightly against the
finisher entrance roller while it remains off.
A3 SEF
[-500~+500/0.3 mm]
B4 SEF
+ Value:Increases time finisher entrance roller remains off.
A4 SEF
- Value: Descreases time finisher entrance roller remains off.
A4 LEF
B5 SEF
B5 LEF
DLT SEF
LG SEF
LT SEF
LT LEF
12" x 18"
Custom Size

5-134

August, 2006

6104

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
6105

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
6106

001
002
003
004
005
006
007

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Punch Hole Reg 2
Punch Hole Control
This SP determines whether the finisher entrance roller stops to correct skew when
paper enters the finisher.
A3 SEF
[0~2/1]
0: No adjustment. Quickly restores the default setting of you
B4 SEF
forget what the other settings do.
A4 SEF
0: Paper stops for skew correction
A4 LEF
1: Paper does not stop
B5 SEF
2: Paper stops (same as default)
B5 LEF
DLT SEF
LG SEF
LT SEF
LT LEF
12" x 18"
Custom Size
Fine Adj Staple
Fine Adjust Staple Jogger Fence Postion
This SP corrects the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack
on the finisher stapling tray.
A3 SEF
[-15~+15/0.5 mm]
+ Value: Increases distance between jogger fences and the
B4 SEF
sides of the stack.
A4 SEF
Value:
Decreases
the distance between the jogger fences
A4 LEF
and
the
sides
of the stack.
B5 SEF
B5 LEF
DLT SEF
LG SEF
LT SEF
LT LEF
12"x18"
Custom Size
Fine Adj Out Jog
Fine Adjust Output Jogger Unit Fences
This SP corrects the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack
when the output jogger unit attached to the side of the machine jogs sheets as they
exit the finisher.
+ Value: Increases distance between jogger fences and the sides of the stack.
- Value: Decreases the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the
stack.
A3 SEF
[-15~+15/0.5 mm]
B4 SEF
A4 LEF
B5 LEF
DLT SEF
[-15~+15/0.5 mm]
LT LEF
[-15~+15/0.5 mm]
Custom
[-15~+15/0.5 mm]

5-135

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

6107

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008

August, 2006

Interposer Size
Paper Size Priority: Cover Interposer
Controls the paper size for the cover interposer tray. Select a paper size and press
[Execute]
A3SEF/12x18
[0~1/1]
0: A3 SEF, 1: 12” x 18”
EU China
[0~2/1]
0: 8½” x 13”, 1: 8” x 13”, 2: 8¼ “ x 13”
NA 1
[0~1/1]
0: 8½“ x 14”, 1: 8½“ x 13”
NA 2
[0~1/1]
0: LT LEF, 1: 10½“ x 7¼“
NA 3
[0~1/1]
0: LT SEF, 1: 8” x 10”
EU Taiwan
[0~1/1]
0: 8-Kai, 1: DLT
EU Taiwan
[0~1/1]
0: 16-Kai SEF, 1: LT
EU Taiwan
[0~1/1]
0: 16-Kai SEF, 1: LT SEF

6108
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009

Adj Fold: 1 Sheet
A3 SEF
B4 SEF
A4 SEf
B5 SEF
DLT SEF
LG SEF
LT SEF
12"x18"
Custom Size

Adjust Fold Position: 1 Sheet Japan Only
[-75~+75/0.5 mm]

6109

Adj Corner Staple
Adjust Staple Position of Corner Stapler
This SP corrects the stapling position of the corner stapler.
[-3.5~+3.5/0.5 mm]
- Value: Shifts the stapling position toward the rear of the machine.
+ Value: Shifts the stapling position toward the front of the machine.
3.5mm 3.5mm
1.0mm

1.0mm

Paper feed
direction

5-136

August, 2006

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

6111

Adj Z-Fold 2
Adjust Fold Position: Z-Fold Unit: Fold 2 Japan Only
Adjusts the position of the second fold for the Z-folding unit.

6112

Book Staple Adj
Adjust Booklet Stapling Position Japan Only
This SP corrects the stapling postion of the booklet stapler when paper is stapled
and folded.
A3 SEF
[-75~+75/0.5 mm]
+ Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.
B4 SEF
- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
A4 SEF
B5 SEF
Feed Out
DLT SEF
LG SEF
LT SEF
12” x 18”
Custom

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009

B132S923.WMF

6113
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009

Book Fold Adj
Adjust Booklet Fold Position
This SP corrects the folding postion when paper is stapled and folded.
A3 SEF
[-3~+3/0.2 mm]
+ Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.
B4 SEF
- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
A4 SEf
B5 SEF
Feed Out
DLT SEF
LG SEF
LT SEF
12"x18"
Custom Size

B132S924.WMF

6114

Book Fold Repeat
Set Number of Folds
This SP sets the number of times the folding rollers are driven forward and reverse
to sharpen the crease of a folded booket before it exits the folding unit. When set at
the default (0):
• The folding blade presses the center of the stack into the nip of the folding roller.
• The folding rollers rotated ccw to crease the booklet, reverse cw, then rotate ccw
again crease the booklet fold twice before feeding to the folding unit exit rollers.
0:2Reps-6:30Reps
[0~6/1 reverse/forward feed.]
0: 2
4: 20
1: 5
5: 25
2: 10
6: 30
3: 15

5-137

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

August, 2006

6115

Max Prestack
Number of Pre-Stack Sheets
This SP sets the number of sheets sent to the pre-stack tray. With this SP set to the
default (3):
• 3 sheets are sent to the pre-stack tray.
• When the 4th sheet feeds, the 4th sheet and 3 sheets from the pre-stack tray are
sent to the stapling tray together
Note: You may need to adjust this setting or switch it off when feeding thick or slick
paper.
0:None-3:3Shts
[0~3/1 sheet]
0: None
1: 1 sheet
2: 2 sheets
3: 3 sheets

6116

Thk Sht Count
Thick Sheet Count
This SP sets the number of sheets of normal thickness to count for one thick sheet.
The default (3) counts three sheets of normal thickness for one thick sheet.
[1~3/1]

6117

Allow Tnk Punch
Allow Punching of OHP Sheets
This SP allows you to switch on punching of OHP sheets. Normally, OHP sheets
cannot be punched. If this SP is switched on (1), the performance of the finisher
cannot be guaranteed (the sheets may jam).
[0~1/1]

6118

Output Jog On
Output Jogger Operation Off/On
This SP switches the jogging operation of the output jogger attached to the side of the
finisher off and on.
[0~1/1] 0: Off, 1: On
Note: After installation of the Output Jogger Unit Type 3260 (B703), this SP must be
set to "1" for the jogging motor to operate the jogging fences.

6119

No Z-Fold/Punch
Prohibit Z-Folding and Punching Japan Only
Switch Z-folding off and on. Default: 0 (Off)
0:No 1:Yes

6120

Free Run
Free Run 1: Post Processing
These SPs set the peripherals list below in the free run mode for testing.
Free Run 1
System Free Run
Finishers B701/B700, B706
Free Run 1
Free Run (Endurance Testing) Finisher B706
Free Run 3
Free Run
(Not Used)
Free Run 4
Shift, Free Run
Finisher B706

001
002
003
004

5-138

August, 2006

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

6121

Input Chk:Fin1
Input Check: Finisher 1 (B700/B701) (
5.8.1)
These are the input checks for the 2000-Sheet/3000-Sheet Finishers B700/B701.

6122

Input Chk:Fin2
Input Check: Finisher 2 (B706) (
5.9.1)
These are the input checks for the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706.

6123

Output Chk:Fin1
Output Check: Finisher 1 (B700/B701) (
5.8.2)
These are the output checks for the 2000-Sheet/3000-Sheet Finishers B700/B701.

6124

Output Chk:Fin3
Output Check: Finisher 3 Japan Only
These are output checks for the 3000-Sheet Finishers.
Proof JG SOL:
Stp JG SOL:
End Roll SOL
Main M 1
Main M 2
Exit M
Stapler M
Punch M
Tray Lift M
Jogger M
Stp Shift M
Feed Out M
Shift M
Stp Rot M

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
6125

Output Chk:Fin2
Output Check: Finisher 2 (B706) (
5.9.2)
These are the input checks for the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706.

5-139

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

6126

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
6900

August, 2006

Book Fold Adj
Adjusts the booklet folding position
These SPs adjust the position for booklet stapling with the 2000/3000-Sheet Finisher
B700. The initial setting is at "0" and can be adjusted in increments of 0.2 mm
A3 SEF:Sub Scan
[-3 to +3/0.2 mm]
B4 SEF:Sub Scan
A4 SEF:Sub Scan
B5 SEF:Sub Scan
DLT SEF:Sub Scan
LG SEF:Sub Scan
LT SEF:Sub Scan
12"x18":Sub Scan
Custom:Sub Scan
ADF Bottom Lift
ADF Bottom Lift Plate
This SP setting determines whether the bottom plate lift motor of the of the ARDF
switches on when the original is set in the ARDF original tray, or when the [Start] key
is pressed. The ARDF bottom plate lift motor raises the bottom plate that pushes up
the original tray and raises it to the optimum feed position.
[0~1/1]
0: Bottom plate lifts immediately after originals are set (Default)
1: Bottom plate does not lift until [Start] key is pressed.

5-140

August, 2006

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Group 7000
7001

Op Time Disp
Main Motor Operation Time
Displays the total drum rotation time.

7401

Total SC Counter
Total SC Counter
Displays the total number of SCs logged.

7403 SC History
001 Latest
002 Latest 1st
003 Latest 2nd
004 Latest 3rd
005 Latest 4th
006 Latest 5th
007 Latest 6th
008 Latest 7th
009 Latest 8th
010 Latest 9th

Displays the latest 10 SC codes.

7502

Total Paper Jam Counter
Displays the total number of copy jams.

7503

Total Original Jam Counter
Displays the total number of copy jams.

5-141

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

7504

008
009
010
011
012
013
014
016
019
020
021
022
023
024
034
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
066
069
071
072
074
078
084
098
099

August, 2006

Paper Jam Loc
Paper Jam Locations - Copier
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the
appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by
the failure of a sensor to activate.
On Operation Panel
Actual Component Name
Trans 1 Sn:Late
1st Vertical Transport Sensor
Trans 2 Sn:Late
2nd Vertical Transport Sensor
Trans 3 Sn:Late
3rd Vertical Transport Sensor
Trans 4 Sn:Late
4th Vertical Transport Sensor
Relay Sn: Late
Relay Senosor
Reg Sn:Late
Registration Sensor
Fusing Ex Sn:Late
Fusing Exit Sensor
Main Ex Sn:Late
Paper Exit Sensor
Dup Ent Sn:Late
Duplex Entrance Sensor
Dup Trans Sn1:Late
Duplex Transport Sensor 1
Dup Trans Sn2:Late
Duplex Transport Sensor 2
Dup Trans Sn3:Late
Duplex Transport Sensor 3
Dup Ent Sn:Late
Duplex Entrance Sensor
LCT Relay
LCT Relay Sensor:Late
Bypass PE Sn:Off
Bypass Paper End Sensor
1st Feed Sn:Lag
1st Paper Feed Sensor:Lag
2nd Feed Sn:Lag
2nd Paper Feed Sensor:Lag
3rd Feed Sn:Lag
3rd Paper Feed Sensor:Lag
4th Feed Sn:Lag
4th Paper Feed Sensor:Lag
LCT Feed Sn:Lag
LCT Paper Feed Sensor
Trans 1 Sn:Lag
1st Vertical Transport Sensor:Lag
Trans 2 Sn:Lag
2nd Vertical Transport Sensor:Lag
Trans 3 Sn:Lag
3rd Vertical Transport Sensor:Lag
Trans 4 Sn:Lag
4th Vertical Transport Sensor:Lag
Relay Sn:Lag
Relay Sensor:Lag
Reg Sn:Lag
Registration Sensor
Fusing Ex Sn:Lag
Fusing Exit Sensor:Lag
Main Ex Sn:Lag
Main Exit Sensor
Dup Ent Sn:Lag
Duplex Entrance Sensor
Dup Trans Sn2:Lag
Duplex Transport Sensor 1
Dup Trans Sn3:Lag
Duplex Transport Sensor 2
LCT Relay Sn:Lag
LCT Relay Sensor:Lag
Dummy TBelt Sn
Dummy Transfer Belt Sensor
Bypass Feed Sn
Bypass Paper Feed Sensor
Paper Type
Paper Type
Bypass Paper Feed Sn
Bypass Paper Feed Sensor

5-142

August, 2006

7504

121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
7504

141
142
143
144
145
148
149
150
151
153
155
156
157

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Paper Jam Loc
Paper Jam Locations - 3000-Sheet Finisher (Japan Only)
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the
appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by
the failure of a sensor to activate.
On Operation Panel
Actual Component Name
Entrance Jam
Entrance Sensor
Proof Tray Exit
Proof Tray Exit Sensor
Shift Tray Exit
Shift Tray Exit Sensor
Stapler Exit
Stapler Exit Sensor
Exit After Jogging
Exit Sensor After Jogging
Corner Stapling
Corner Stapling: Stapler Unit 1
Saddle Stapling
Saddle-Stitch Stapler Unit
Paper Folding
Paper Folding
Shift Tray Motor
Shift Tray Motor
Jog Fence Motor
Jogger Fence Motor
Shift Roller Motor
Shift Roller Motor
Stapler Shift M
Stapler Shift Motor
Stapler M
Stapler Motor: Unit 2
Folder Plate M
Folder Plate Motor
Feed Out Belt M
Feed Out Belt Motor
Paper Punch Motor
Paper Punch Motor
Z-Folding
Z-Fold Jam
Paper Jam Loc
Paper Jam Locations - 3000-Sheet Finisher B706
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the
appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by
the failure of a sensor to activate.
On Operation Panel
Actual Component Name
Entrance Sn
Entrance Sensor
Proof Tray Exit Sn
Proof Tray Exit Sn
Shift Exit Sn
Shift Exit Sn
Stapler Exit
Stapler Exit Sensor
Feed Out
Feed Out
Upper Trans M
Upper Transport Motor
Shift Tray Motor
Shift Tray Motor
Jogger Fence Motor
Jogger Fence Motor
Shift Roller Motor
Shift Roller Motor
Stapling Motor
Stapling Motor
Feed Out Belt Motor
Feed Out Belt Motor
Paper Punch Motor
Paper Punch Motor
Bad PC Command
Command from PC Incorrect

5-143

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

7504

161
162
163
164
165
7504

166
167
168
7504

171
172
173
174
175
176
179
180
181
182
183
185
186

August, 2006

Paper Jam Loc
Paper Jam Locations - Mail Box B762
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the
appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by
the failure of a sensor to activate.
On Operation Panel Actual Component Name
Vert Trans Sn 1
Vertical Transport Sensor 1
Vert Trans Sn 2
Vertical Transport Sensor 2
Vert Trans Sn 3
Vertical Transport Sensor 3
Vert Trans Sn 4
Vertical Transport Sensor 4
Vert Trans Sn 5
Vertical Transport Sensor 5
Paper Jam Loc
Paper Jam Locations - B704 Cover Interposer Tray
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the
appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by
the failure of a sensor to activate.
On Operation Panel
Actual Component Name
Paper Feed Sn
Paper Feed Sensor
Vert Transport Path
Vertical Transport Path
BotPlt Pos Sn
Bottom Plate Position Sensor
Paper Jam Loc
Paper Jam Locations - 3000-Sheet Finisher B701
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the
appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by
the failure of a sensor to activate.
On Operation Panel
Actual Component Name
Entrance Trans
Entrance Sensor
Proof Tray Exit Sn
Proof Tray Exit Sn
Shift Exit Sn
Shift Exit Sensor
Stapler Exit Sn
Stapler Exit Sensor
Belt Feed Out
Belt Feed Out
Corner Staple
Corner Stapling
Shift Tray Motor
Shift Tray Motor
Jogger Fence Motor
Jogger Fence Motor
Shift Roller Motor
Shift Roller Motor
Stapler Shift M
Stapler Shift Motor
Stapling Motor
Stapling Motor
Feed Out Belt Motor
Feed Out Belt Motor
Paper Punch Motor
Paper Punch Motor

5-144

August, 2006

7504

191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
7504

211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
223
224
225
226
227

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Paper Jam Loc
Paper Jam Locations – 2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher B700
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the
appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by
the failure of a sensor to activate.
On Operation Panel
Actual Component Name
Entrance Sn
Entrance Sensor
Stapler Exit
Stapler Exit Sensor
Shift Exit Sn
Shift Exit Sensor
Stapler Exit
Stapler Exit Sensor
Belt Feed Out
Belt Feed Out
Corner Staple
Corner Stapling
Saddle Stapling
Saddle Stapling
Paper Folding
Paper Folding
Shift Tray Motor
Shift Tray Motor
Jogger Fence Motor
Jogger Fence Motor
Shift Roller Motor
Shift Roller Motor
Stapler Shift M
Stapler Shift Motor
Stapling Motor
Stapling Motor
Paper Folding
Paper Folding
Feed Out Belt Motor
Feed Out Belt Motor
Paper Punch Motor
Paper Punch Motor
Paper Jam Loc
Paper Jam Locations – Z-Folding Unit B660 (Japan Only)
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the
appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by
the failure of a sensor to activate.
On Operation Panel
Actual Component Name
Paper Feed:Late
Paper Feed Sensor: Late
Paper Feed:Lag
Paper Feed Sensor: Lag
Fold Timing Sn:Late
Fold Timing Sensor: Late
Fold Timing Sn:Lag
Fold Timing Sensor: Lag
Lead Edge Sn:Late
Leading Edge Sensoor:Late
Lead Edge Sn:Lag
Leading Edge Sensor:Lag
Up Stopper Sn:Late
Upper Stopper Path Sensor:Late
Up Stopper Sn:Lag
Upper Stopper Path Sensor:Lag
Lower Ex Sn:Late
Lower Exit Sensor:Late
Lower Ex Sn1:Lag
Lower Exit Sensor:Lag
Up Ex Sn:Late
Upper Exit Sensor:Late
Up Ex Sn:Lag
Upper Exit Sensor:Lag
Paper Fold M
Paper Fold Motor
Lower Stopper M
Lower Stopper Motor Lock
Upper Stopper M
Upper Stopper Motor Lock

5-145

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

7504

230
7505

001
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
053
054
055
056
057
058
059

August, 2006

Paper Jam Loc
Paper Jam Location – All Finishers
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the
appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by
the failure of a sensor to activate.
On Operation Panel
Actual Component Name
Fin:No Ex Response
Finisher:No Exit Response
Original Jam Det
Original Jam Detection – ARDF
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the
appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by
the failure of a sensor to activate.
On Operation Panel
Actual Component Name
At Power On
At Power On
Separation Sn:Late
Separation Sensor:Late
Skew Cor Sn:Late
Skew Correction Sensor:Late
Interval Sn:Late
Interval Sensor:Late
Reg Sn:Late
Registration Sensor:Late
Exit Sn:Late
Exit Sensor:Late
Inv Switch Sn:Late
Inverter Switchback Sensor:Late
Low Inv Sn:Late
Lower Inverter Sensor:Late
Separation Sn:Lag
SeparationsSensor:Lag
Skew Cor Sn:Lag
Skew Correction Sensor:Lag
Interval Sn:Lag
Interval Sensor:Lag
Reg Sn:Lag
Registration Sensor:Lag
Exit Sn:Lag
Exit Sensor:Lag
Inv Switch Sn:Lag
Inverter Switchback Sensor:Lag
Low Inv Sn:Lag
Lower Inverter Sensor:Lag

5-146

August, 2006

7506

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

005
006
014
038
044
132
133
134
141
142
160
164
166
172
255

Jam Count by Paper Size
Displays the total number of jams by paper size.
A4 LEF
Displays the total number of jams by paper size.
A5 LEF
B5 LEF
LT LEF
HLT LEF
A3
A4 SEF
A5 SEF
B4 SEF
B5 SEF
DLT SEF
LG SEF
LT SEF
HLT SEF
Others

7507
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010

Plotter Jam History
Latest
Displays the following items for the last 10 copy paper jams: 1)
Jam code, 2) Paper size, 3) Total count when jam occurred, 4)
Latest 1
Date of jam.
Latest 2
The “jam codes” are listed in the SMC report under SP7504.
Latest 3
Latest 4
Latest 5
Latest 6
Latest 7
Latest 8
Latest 9

7508
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010

Original Jam History
Original Latest
Displays the following items for the Latest 10 original jams: 1)
Jam code, 2) Paper size, 3) Total count when jam occurred,
Latest 1
4) Date of jam.
Latest 2
The “jam codes” are listed in the SMC report under SP7504.
Latest 3
Latest 4
Latest 5
Latest 6
Latest 7
Latest 8
Latest 9

5-147

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

August, 2006

7617
001
002

Parts PM Counter Display
Normal
Japan Only
DF
Japan Only

7618
001

PM Parts Counter Reset Japan Only
Normal
Press [Execute] to clear the parts replacement alarm counter for the
main machine.
DF
Press [Execute] to clear the parts replacement alarm counter for the
ADF.

002

7801

ROM Ver
ROM Version Numbers
Displays the ROM version numbers of the main machine and connected
peripheral devices.

7803

PM Counter Display

Displays the PM count since the last PM.

7804

PM Counter Reset

Resets the PM count.

7807

SC/Jam Counter Reset

Press [Start] to reset the SC and jam counters.

7826
001
002

MF Error Counter Japan Only
Displays the number of counts requested of the card/key counter.
Error Total
A request for the count total failed at power on. This error
will occur if the device is installed but disconnected.
Error Staple
The request for a staple count failed at power on. This error
will occur if the device is installed but disconnected.

7827

MF Error Counter Clear
Press Execute to reset to 0 the values of SP7826. Japan Only

7832

Self-Diagnostic Report Details
Press [#] to display a list of error codes. Nothing is displayed if no errors have
occurred.

7834

Coverage Clear
No information is available at this time.
001
Total Average
002
Toner
003
Sheets & Toner
004
Dot:0%-100%
255
All Counts

5-148

August, 2006

7835
001
002
7836
7852

001
002
7901
001
002
003
7931
7932
7933
7934
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
020
021
022
023
050
051

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

ACC Counter
No information is available at this time.
Copy ACC
Printer ACC
Total Memory Size
Displays the contents of the memory on the controller board.
ADF Scan Glass
ADF Scan Glass
Displays the count for the number of times the machine has detected dust on the
ARDF scanning glass at the beginning of copy jobs. This SP operates only after
SP4020 001 has been turned on.
Dust Counter
Clear Counter
Assert Info. . DFU
Used for debugging.
Filename
Line No.
Value
Toner Info:K
Toner Information: Black
Toner Info:M
Toner Information: Magenta
Toner Info:C
Toner Information: Cyan
Toner Info:Y
Toner Information: Yellow
Displays detailed information about the toner used in the machine.
Model ID
Cartridge Ver
Brand ID
Area ID
Production ID
Color ID
Maintenance ID
New
Recycle Count
Product Date
Serial No
EDP Code
Toner Remaining
Toner End
Toner Refill
Total Count Start
Color Count:Start
Total Count End
Color Count:End
Set Date
End Date

5-149

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

7935

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011

7936

7937

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011

7999

August, 2006

MotdrvtimeDisp
Motor Drive Time Display
These SPs display the total drive times for each of motor listed below. The 8-digit
display shows the total in minutes.
OPCMot:K
Drum Motors
OPCMot:M
OPCMot:C
OPCMot:Y
DrvMot:K
PCU motor (drives all components of PCU other than the drum)
DrvMot:M
DrvMot:C
DrvMot:Y
Image Trans Mot Image Transfer Motor
Paper Trans Mot Paper Feed Motor
Fusing Exit Mot
Fusing Exit Motor

TtldrvtimeDisp
Total Drive Time Display
This SP displays the total drive time of the K drum motor before the last reset.

MotdrvtimeRst
Motor Drive Time Reset
These SPs allow you to reset (to zero) the total drive time for each motor listed
below.
OPCMot:K
Drum Motors
OPCMot:M
OPCMot:C
OPCMot:Y
DrvMot:K
PCU motor (drives all components of PCU other than the drum)
DrvMot:M
DrvMot:C
DrvMot:Y
Image Trans Mot Image Transfer Motor
Paper Trans Mot Paper Feed Motor
Fusing Exit Mot
Fusing Exit Motor

Engine Debug Log Switch
Used for design and testing.

DFU

5-150

August, 2006

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Group 8000
Current Status of the SP8xxx Counters
Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available,
such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes
that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers
SP8 211~SP8 216
SP8 401~SP8 406
SP8 691~SP8 696

What They Do
The number of pages scanned to the document server.
The number of pages printed from the document server
The number of pages sent from the document server

Specifically, the following questions can be answered:
• How is the document server actually being used?
• What application is using the document server most frequently?
• What data in the document server is being reused?

5-151

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

August, 2006

Group 8 Service Table Keys
Many of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of
operation (the mode of operation is referred to as an ‘application’). Before reading
the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes
mean.
PREFIXES
T:

Total: (Grand Total).

C:
P:
S:
L:

Copy application.
Print application.
Scan application.
Local storage
(document server)

O:

Other applications
(external network
applications, for
example)

WHAT IT MEANS
Grand total of the items counted for all
applications (C, F, P, etc.)..
Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each
application when the job was not stored on the
document server.
Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document
server. The L: counters work differently case by
case. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored
on the document server; this can be in
document server mode (from the document
server window), or from another mode, such as
from a printer driver or by pressing the Store
File button in the Copy mode window.
Sometimes, they include occasions when the
user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by
case.
Refers to network applications such as Web
Image Monitor.

5-152

August, 2006

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of
displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs.
Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name
of an SP that you do not understand.
ABBREVIATION
/
>
AddBook
Apl
B/W
Bk
C
ColCr
ColMode
Comb
Comp
Deliv
DesApl

Dev Counter
Dup, Duplex
Emul
FC
FIN
Full Bleed
GenCopy
GPC

IFax
ImgEdt
K
LS
LSize
Mag
MC
NRS

Org
OrgJam
Palm 2

PC
PGS

PJob

WHAT IT MEANS
“By”, e.g. “T:Jobs/Apl” = Total Jobs “by” Application
More (2> “2 or more”, 4> “4 or more”
Address Book
Application
Black & White
Black
Cyan
Color Create
Color Mode
Combine
Compression
Delivery
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,
Print) used to store the job on the document server, for
example.
Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Duplex, printing on both sides
Emulation
Full Color
Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
No Margins
Generation Copy Mode
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter
does not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this
counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10
(e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI,
e.g. border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
Black (YMCK)
Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
Large (paper) Size
Magnification
One color (monochrome)
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to
monitor machines remotely. “NRS” is used overseas, “CSS”
is used in Japan.
Original for scanning
Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor (Not used): A pair of
utilities that allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among
the printers on the network, and allows files to moved
around, combined, and converted to different formats.
Personal Computer
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.
Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as
two pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
Print Jobs

5-153

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES
ABBREVIATION
Ppr
PrtJam
PrtPGS
R

Rez
SC
Scn
Sim, Simplex
S-to-Email
SMC
Svr
TonEnd
TonSave
TXJob
YMC
YMCK

August, 2006

WHAT IT MEANS
Paper
Printer (plotter) Jam
Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model
A2 only. This machine is under development and currently
not available. (Not Used)
Resolution
Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scan
Simplex, printing on 1 side.
Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8
counters are recorded in the SMC report.
Server
Toner End
Toner Save
Send, Transmission
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, BlacK

NOTE: All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5801 1 Memory All Clear, or the
Counter Reset SP7808.

5-154

August, 2006

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

SP8-xxx: Data Log2
8 001
8 002
8 004
8 005
8 006

T:Total Jobs
C:Total Jobs
P:Total Jobs
S:Total Jobs
L:Total Jobs

These SPs count the number of times each
application is used to do a job.
[0~9999999/ 1]
Note: The L: counter is the total number of
times the other applications are used to send a
job to the document server, plus the number of
times a file already on the document server is
used.

• These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of
pages processed.
• When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
• Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the service
engineer using the SP modes are not counted.
• When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job),
the job is counted at the time when either “Delete Data” or “Specify Output” is
specified.
• When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments,
and when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also
increments.
• When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and
L: counters both increment.
• When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter
increments.
• When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
• When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
• When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter
increments.

5-155

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

8 011
8 012
8 014
8 015
8 016
8 017

T:Jobs/LS
C:Jobs/LS
P:Jobs/LS
S:Jobs/LS
L:Jobs/LS
O:Jobs/LS

August, 2006

These SPs count the number of jobs stored to
the document server by each application, to
reveal how local storage is being used for input.
[0~9999999/ 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel.

• When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments.
When you enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter
increments.
• When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
• When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter
increments.
• When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter
increments.
8 021
8 022
8 024
8 025
8 026
8 027

T:Pjob/LS
C:Pjob/LS
P:Pjob/LS
S:Pjob/LS
L:Pjob/LS
O:Pjob/LS

These SPs reveal how files printed from the
document server were stored on the document
server originally.
[0~9999999/ 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel.

• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the C: counter increments.
• When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on
the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the
C: and P: counters both increment.
• When a job already on the document server is printed with another application,
the L: counter increments.
• When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within
document server mode, then the L: counter increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application (including
Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network
application (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.

5-156

August, 2006

8 031
8 032
8 034
8 035
8 036
8 037

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

T:Pjob/DesApl
C:Pjob/DesApl
P:Pjob/DesApl
S:Pjob/DesApl
L:Pjob/DesApl
O:Pjob/DesApl

These SPs reveal what applications were used
to output documents from the document server.
[0~9999999/ 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
printed from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel.

• When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count
for the application that started the print job is incremented.
• When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web
Image Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.
8 041
8 042
8 044
8 045
8 046
8 047

T:TX Jobs/LS
C:TX Jobs/LS
P:TX Jobs/LS
S:TX Jobs/LS
L:TX Jobs/LS
O:TX Jobs/LS

These SPs count the applications that
stored files on the document server that
were later accessed for transmission over
the telephone line or over a network
(attached to an e-mail).
[0~9999999/ 1]
Note: Jobs merged for sending are
counted separately.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
scanned from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel.

• When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter
increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2
are sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
8 051
8 052
8 054
8 055
8 056
8 057

T:TX Jobs/DesApl
C:TX Jobs/DesApl
P:TX Jobs/DesApl
S:TX Jobs/DesApl
L:TX Jobs/DesApl
O:TX Jobs/DesApl

These SPs count the applications used to
send files from the document server over
the telephone line or over a network
(attached to an e-mail.
[0~9999999/ 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
sent from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel.

• If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example,
then the O: counter increments.

5-157

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

August, 2006

8 061

T:FIN Jobs
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is
specified by the application.

8 062

C:FIN Jobs
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing
method is specified by the application.

8 064

P:FIN Jobs
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing
method is specified by the application.

8 065

S:FIN Jobs
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing
method is specified by the application.
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
L:FIN Jobs
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing
method is specified from the print window within document server
mode.
O:FIN Jobs
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external
application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by
the application.

8 066

8 067

8 06x 1

Sort

8 06x 2
8 06x 3
8 06x 4

Stack
Staple
Booklet

8 06x 5

Z-Fold

8 06x 6

Punch

8 06x 7

Other

Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored
copy job is set for Sort and then stored on the document
server, the L: counter increments. (See SP8 066 1)
Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine
is in staple mode, the Staple counter also increments.
Number of jobs started In any mode other than the
Booklet mode and set for folding (Z-fold).
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is
set for a print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8
064 6.)
Reserved. Not used.

5-158

August, 2006

8 071

8 072

8 074

8 075

8 076

8 077

8 07x 1
8 07x 2
8 07x 3
8 07x 4
8 07x 5
8 07x 6
8 07x 7

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

T:Jobs/PGS
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of
pages in the job, regardless of which application was used.
C:Jobs/PGS
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size
based on the number of pages in the job.
P:Jobs/PGS
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size
based on the number of pages in the job.
S:Jobs/PGS
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size
based on the number of pages in the job.
L:Jobs/PGS
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel, by
the number of pages in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of “Other” application
jobs (Web Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
1 Page
8 07x 8
21~50 Pages
2 Pages
8 07x 9
51~100 Pages
3 Pages
8 07x 10
101~300 Pages
4 Pages
8 07x 11
301~500 Pages
5 Pages
8 07x 12
501~700 Pages
6~10 Pages
8 07x 13
701~1000 Pages
11~20 Pages
8 07x 14
1001~ Pages

• For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in
document server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
• Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
• If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is
counted at the time the error occurs.
• For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by
multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One
duplex page counts as 2.)
• The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the
number of pages of the copy job (SP 8072).
• When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the
page is counted.

5-159

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

8 131

8 131 1
8 131 2
8 131 3
8 135

8 135 1
8 135 2
8 131 3

August, 2006

T:S-to-Email Jobs
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and attached to
an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was used or
not.
B/W
Count for the number of jobs with black-and-white.
Color
Count for the number of jobs with color.
ACS
Count for the number of jobs using ACS mode.
S:S-to-Email Jobs
These SPs count the number of jobs scanned and attached to an email, without storing the original on the document server.
B/W
Count for the number of jobs with black-and-white.
Color
Count for the number of jobs with color.
ACS
Count for the number of jobs using ACS mode.

• These counters count jobs, not pages.
• If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined
to be color or black-and-white then counted.
• If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
• If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending
on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
• If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or
Scan-to-PC, or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is
counted separately. For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email
as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once
for Scan-to-PC).

5-160

August, 2006

8 141

8 141 1
8 141 2
8 141 3
8 143 3
8 145

8 145 1
8 145 2
8 145 3

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

T:Deliv Jobs/Svr
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a
Scan Router server.
B/W
Count for the number of jobs with black-and-white.
Color
Count for the number of jobs with color.
ACS
Count for the number of jobs using ACS mode.
ACS
Count for the number of jobs using ACS mode.
S:Deliv Jobs/Svr
These SPs count the number of jobs scanned in scanner mode and
sent to a Scan Router server.
B/W
Count for the number of jobs with black-and-white.
Color
Count for the number of jobs with color.
ACS
Count for the number of jobs using ACS mode.

• These counters count jobs, not pages.
• The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the
Scan Router server cannot be confirmed.
• If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is
counted as a “Color” job.
• If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.
• If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending
on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
• Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.
8 151

8 151 1
8 151 2
8 151 3
8 155

8 155 1
8 155 2
8 155 3

T:Deliv Jobs/PC
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a
folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical
counts.
B/W
Count for the number of jobs with black-and-white.
Color
Count for the number of jobs with color.
ACS
Count for the number of jobs using ACS mode.
S:Deliv Jobs/PC
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent with
Scan-to-PC.
B/W
Count for the number of jobs with black-and-white.
Color
Count for the number of jobs with color.
ACS
Count for the number of jobs using ACS mode.

•
•
•
•

These counters count jobs, not pages.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending
on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
• Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.

5-161

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

8 191
8 192
8 195
8 196

T:Total Scan PGS
C:Total Scan PGS
S:Total Scan PGS
L:Total Scan PGS

August, 2006

These SPs count the pages scanned by
each application that uses the scanner to
scan images.
[0~9999999/ 1]

• SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number
of physical pages.
• These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to
adjust color.
• Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
• A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
• Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples
• If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not
stored, the S: count is 4.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using
the Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L:
count is 6.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.

5-162

August, 2006

8 201

8 205

8 20x 1
8 20x 2

8 211
8 212
8 215
8 216

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

T:LSize Scan PGS
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the
scanner for scan and copy jobs.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the
User Tools display.
S:LSize Scan PGS
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the
scanner for scan jobs only
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the
User Tools display..
A3/DLT, Larger
Counts A3/DLT and larger pages.
A2, Larger
Counts A2 and larger pages.

T:Scan PGS/LS
C:Scan PGS/LS
S:Scan PGS/LS
L:Scan PGS/LS

These SPs count the number of pages
scanned into the document server .
[0~9999999/ 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages
stored from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel, and
with the Store File button from within the
Copy mode screen

• Reading user stamp data is not counted.
• If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
• If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S:
count is 4.
• If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not
change.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C:
count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.

5-163

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

8 221

8 221 1

8 221 2

August, 2006

ADF Org Feeds
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for
front and back side scanning.
Front
Number of front sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously,
the Front side count is the same as the number of pages
fed for either simplex or duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously,
the Front side count is the same as the number of pages
fed for duplex front side scanning. (The front side is
determined by which side the user loads face up.)
Back
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously,
the Back count is the same as the number of pages fed
for duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously,
the Back count is the same as the number of pages fed
for duplex rear-side scanning.

• When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count
is 1.
• If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double
counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet
is output.

8 231

8 231 1
8 231 2
8 231 3
8 231 4
8 231 5

Scan PGS/Mode
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode
to determine the work load on the ADF.
Large Volume
Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be
loaded in the ADF at one time.
SADF
Selectable. Feeding pages one by one
through the ADF.
Mixed Size
Selectable. Select “Mixed Sizes” on the
operation panel.
Custom Size
Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
Platen
Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the
original directly on the platen.

• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
• If the user selects “Mixed Sizes” for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size
count is enabled.
• In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2
pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.

5-164

August, 2006

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

T:Scan PGS/Org
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type
for all jobs, regardless of which application was used.
8 242
C:Scan PGS/Org
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for
Copy jobs.
8 245
S:Scan PGS/Org
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for
Scan jobs.
8 246
L:Scan PGS/Org
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from
within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and
with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen
8 241
8 242
8 245
8 246
8 24x 1: Text
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8 24x 2: Text/Photo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8 24x 3: Photo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8 24x 4: GenCopy, Pale
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8 24x 5: Map
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8 24x 6: Normal/Detail
Yes
No
No
No
8 24x 7: Fine/Super Fine
Yes
No
No
No
8 24x 8: Binary
Yes
No
Yes
No
8 24x 9: Grayscale
Yes
No
Yes
No
8 24x 10: Color
Yes
No
Yes
No
8 241

• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.

5-165

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

8 251
8 252
8 254
8 256
8 257

T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt

August, 2006

These SPs show how many times Image
Edit features have been selected at the
operation panel for each application. Some
examples of these editing features are:
• Erase> Border
• Erase> Center
• Image Repeat
• Centering
• Positive/Negative
[0~9999999/ 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times
the edit features have been used. A
detailed breakdown of exactly which
features have been used is not given.

The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8 261

8 261 1
8 261 2
8 261 3
8 261 4
8 262

8 262 1
8 262 2
8 262 3
8 262 4

T:Scn PGS/ColCr
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by the color
processing mode used.
Color Conversion
Color Erase
Background
Other
C:Scn PGS/ColCr
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the number of pages by the color processing
mode used for Copy jobs only.
Color Conversion
Color Erase
Background
Other

• These counters are enabled only for MFP machines that support color. The wide
format machines do not support the “Background” or “Other” counters.

8 281
8 285

T:Scan PGS/TWAIN
S:Scan PGS/TWAIN

These SPs count the number of pages
scanned using a TWAIN driver. These
counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is
used for delivery functions.
[0~9999999/ 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.

5-166

August, 2006

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

8 291

T:Scan PGS/Stamp

8 295
8 296

S:Scan PGS/Stamp
L:Scan PGS/Stamp

8 301

T:Scan PGS/Size
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all
applications. Use these totals to compare original page size
(scanning) and output (printing) page size [SP 8-441].
C:Scan PGS/Size
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the
Copy application. Use these totals to compare original page size
(scanning) and output (printing) page size [SP 8-442].
S:Scan PGS/Size
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the
Scan application. Use these totals to compare original page size
(scanning) and output page size [SP 8-445].
L:Scan PGS/Size
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and
stored from within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy
mode screen. Use these totals to compare original page size
(scanning) and output page size [SP 8-446].
A3
A4
A5
B4
B5
DLT
LG
LT
HLT
Full Bleed
A2
Not supported for this printer.
B3
Not supported for this printer.
Other (Standard)
Other (Custom)

8 302

8 305

8 306

8 30x 1
8 30x 2
8 30x 3
8 30x 4
8 30x 5
8 30x 6
8 30x 7
8 30x 8
8 30x 9
8 30x 10
8 30x 100
8 30x 101
8 30x 254
8 30x 255

These SPs count the number of pages
stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit.
[0~9999999/ 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages
stored from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel, and
with the Store File button from within the
Copy mode screen

5-167

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

8 311

8 315

8 31x 1
8 31x 2
8 31x 3
8 31x 4
8 31x 5

August, 2006

T:Scan PGS/Rez
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages
scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings.
S:Scan PGS/Rez
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages
scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings.
Note: At the present time, 8 311 and 8 315 perform identical counts.
1200dpi ~
600dpi~1199dpi
400dpi~599dpi
200dpi~399dpi
~199dpi

• Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.
• The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count
is done for the Fax application.
8 381
8 382
8 384
8 385
8 386
8 387

T:Total PrtPGS
C:Total PrtPGS
P:Total PrtPGS
S:Total PrtPGS
L:Total PrtPGS
O:Total PrtPGS

These SPs count the number of pages
printed by the customer. The counter for
the application used for storing the pages
increments.
[0~9999999/ 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages
stored from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel. Pages
stored with the Store File button from
within the Copy mode screen go to the C:
counter.

• When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT
page is counted as 2.
• When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored
are counted for the application that stored them.
• These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine,
so the following pages are not counted as printed pages:
• Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
• Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip
sheets.
• Reports printed to confirm counts.
• All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine
maintenance reports, etc.)
• Test prints for machine image adjustment.
• Error notification reports.
• Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.

5-168

August, 2006
8 391

8 391 1
8 391 2
8 401
8 402
8 404
8 405
8 406

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES
LSize PrtPGS
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these
counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy
machine.
A3/DLT, Larger
A2, Larger
Not supported with this printer.
T:PrtPGS/LS
C:PrtPGS/LS
P:PrtPGS/LS
S:PrtPGS/LS
L:PrtPGS/LS

These SPs count the number of pages
printed from the document server. The
counter for the application used to print the
pages is incremented.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
stored from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel.
[0~9999999/ 1]

• Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the
L: count.
8 411

Prints/Duplex

This SP counts the amount of paper
(front/back counted as 1 page) used for
duplex printing. Last pages printed only on
one side are not counted.
[0~9999999/ 1]

5-169

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

August, 2006

T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number
of pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number
of pages processed for printing by the copier application.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number
of pages processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number
of pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number
of pages processed for printing from within the document server mode
window at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number
of pages processed for printing by Other applications
Simplex> Duplex
Duplex> Duplex
Book> Duplex
Simplex Combine
Duplex Combine
2>
2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
4>
4 pages on 1 side (4-Up)
6>
6 pages on 1 side (6-Up)
8>
8 pages on 1 side (8-Up)
9>
9 pages on 1 side (9-Up)
16>
16 pages on 1 side (16-Up)
Booklet
Magazine

8 421

8 422

8 424

8 425

8 426

8 427

8 42x 1
8 42x 2
8 42x 3
8 42x 4
8 42x 5
8 42x 6
8 42x 7
8 42x 8
8 42x 9
8 42x 10
8 42x 11
8 42x 12
8 42x 13

• These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who
need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper
consumption.
• Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1
page.
• Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Booklet
Original
Pages
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Count
1
2
2
2
3
4
4
4

Magazine
Original
Pages
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Count
1
2
2
2
4
4
4
4

5-170

August, 2006

8 431

8 432

8 434

8 436

8 437

8 43x 1

8 43x 2

8 43x 3

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three
features below, regardless of which application was used.
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three
features below with the copy application.
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three
features below with the print application.
L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the
document server mode window t the operation panel with the three
features below.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three
features below with Other applications.
Cover/Slip Sheet
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted.
The count for a cover printed on both sides
counts 2.
Series/Book
The number of pages printed in series (one
side) or printed as a book with booklet right/left
pagination.
User Stamp
The number of pages printed where stamps
were applied, including page numbering and
date stamping.

5-171

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

8 441

8 442

8 444

8 445

8 446

8 447

8 44x 1
8 44x 2
8 44x 3
8 44x 4
8 44x 5
8 44x 6
8 44x 7
8 44x 8
8 44x 9
8 44x 10
8 44x 100
8 44x 101
8 44x 254
8 44x 255

August, 2006

T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed
by all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed
by the copy application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed
by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed
by the scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed
from within the document server mode window at the operation
panel.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed
by Other applications.
A3
A4
A5
B4
B5
DLT
LG
LT
HLT
Full Bleed
A2
Not supported with this printer.
B3
Not supported with this printer.
Other (Standard)
Other (Custom)

• These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.

5-172

August, 2006

8 451

8 451 1
8 451 2
8 451 3
8 451 4
8 451 5
8 451 6
8 451 7
8 451 8
8 451 9
8 451 10

8 461

8 462

8 464

8 466

8 46x 1
8 46x 2
8 46x 3
8 46x 4
8 46x 5
8 46x 6
8 46x 7
8 46x 8

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

PrtPGS/Ppr Tray
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed
station.
Bypass
Bypass Tray
Tray 1
Copier
Tray 2
Copier
Tray 3
Paper Tray Unit (Option)
Tray 4
Paper Tray Unit (Option)
Tray 5
LCT (Option)
Tray 6
Currently not used.
Tray 7
Currently not used.
Tray 8
Currently not used.
Tray 9
Currently not used.

T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all
applications.
• These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM
counter is based on feed timing to accurately measure the
service life of the feed rollers. However, these counts are based
on output timing.
• Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also
counted.
• During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1,
and a page printed on one side counts as 1.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the
copy application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the
printer application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
Normal
Recycled
Special
Thick
Normal (Back)
Thick (Back)
OHP
Other

5-173

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

8 471
8 471 1
8 471 2
8 471 3
8 471 4
8 471 5

August, 2006

PrtPGS/Mag
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
~49%
50%~99%
100%
101%~200%
201% ~

• Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation
panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of
performing magnification adjustment as well.
• Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as
Excel are also counted.
• Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on
the document server are not counted.
• Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge
copying are counted.
• The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically
assigned a rate of 100%.
8 481 1
8 484 1

T:PrtPGS/TonSave
P:PrtPGS/TonSave

These SPs count the number of pages
printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results
as this SP is limited to the Print application.
[0~9999999/ 1]

5-174

August, 2006

8 491

8 492

8 496

8 496 1
8 496 2
8 496 3
8 496 4

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

T:PrtPGS/Col Mode
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages output
by the Copy, document server, and Fax applications.
C:PrtPGS/Col Mode
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total output by the Copy
application only
L:PrtPGS/Col Mode
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total output from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
B/W
Single Color
Color MFP/2-color MFP machines only.
Two Color
Color MFP/2-color MFP machines only.
Full Color
Color MFP machines only

Notes for SP8 491 to SP8 496
• These SPs apply to the Copy, document server, and Fax applications only. They
do not apply to the Print application.
• When the ACS feature is used to select the color settings automatically, the
results of the ACS execute is used to increment the appropriate counter.
• If a color stamp is selected for printing on a monochrome document, the count is
for B/W.
• If the output is black and white even if color print mode was selected, the pages
count as Full Color.
• The color mode selected for a document stored on the document server is
counted. (The color selection cannot be changed once the document is stored on
the document server.)

8 501
8 501 1
8 501 2
8 501 3
8 504

8 504 1
8 504 2
8 504 3

T:PrtPGS/Col Mode
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages printed.
B/W
Single Color
Color MFP and 2-Color MFP machines only.
Full Color
Color MFP and Color LP machines only.
P:PrtPGS/Col Mode
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages printed with
the Print application.
B/W
Single Color
Color MFP and 2-Color MFP machines only.
Full Color
Color MFP and Color LP machines only.

NOTE: At the present time, 8 501 and 8 504 perform identical counts, because
they are both limited to the Print application.

5-175

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

August, 2006

8 511

T:PrtPGS/Emul

8 514

These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of
pages printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of
pages printed.

8 514 1
8 514 2
8 514 3
8 514 4
8 514 5
8 514 6
8 514 7
8 514 8
8 514 9
8 514 10
8 514 11
8 514 12
8 514 13
8 514 14

RPCS
RPDL
PS3
R98
R16
GL/GL2
R55
RTIFF
PDF
PCL5e/5c
PCL XL
IPDL-C
BM-Links
Other

[0~9999999/ 1]

Japan Only

• SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the
Print application.
• Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.

5-176

August, 2006

8 521

8 522

8 524

8 525

8 526

8 52x 1
8 52x 2
8 52x 3
8 52x 4
8 52x 5
8 52x 6
8 52x 7

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

T:PrtPGS/FIN
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages
printed by all applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages
printed by the Copy application.
P:PrtPGS/FIN
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages
printed by the Print application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages
printed by the Scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/FIN
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages
printed from within the document server mode window at the
operation panel.
Sort
Stack
Staple
Booklet
Z-Fold
Punch
Other

Note:
• If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the
unstapled pages are still counted.
• The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam
recoveries are counted.

8 531 1

Staples

This SP counts the amount of staples used
by the machine.
[0~9999999/ 1]

5-177

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

8 581

8 581 1
8 581 2
8 581 3
8 581 4
8 581 5
8 581 6
8 581 7
8 581 8
8 581 9
8 581 10
8 581 11

8 582

8 582 1
8 582 2
8 582 003
8 582 4
8 584

8 584 1
8 584 2
8 584 3

August, 2006

T:Counter
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output,
regardless of the application used. In addition to being displayed in
the SMC Report, these counters are also displayed in the User
Tools display on the copy machine.
Note: These SPs are supported by color MFP and LP (Laser
Printer: Not use) machines only.
MFP Color
LP Color
Replaced:
Total
Yes
Yes
SP7003 001
Total: Full Color
Yes
Yes
SP7003 020
B&W/Single Color
Yes
Yes
SP7003 021
Development: CMY
Yes
Yes
SP7003 010
Development: K
Yes
Yes
SP7003 011
Copy: Color
Yes
No
SP7003 026
Copy: B/W
Yes
No
SP7003 027
Print: Color
Yes
Yes
SP7003 028
Print: B/W
Yes
Yes
SP7003 029
Total: Color
Yes
Yes
SP7003 030
Total: B/W
Yes
Yes
SP7003 023

C:Counter
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output for
the Copy application only.
Note: These SPs are supported by color copy MFP machines only.
These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User
Tools display on the copy machine.
MFP Color
Replaced:
B/W
Yes
SP7003 2
Single Color
Yes
SP7003 12
Two Color
Yes
SP7003 13
Full Color
Yes
SP7003 4
P:Counter
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output for
the Print application only. These counters are displayed in the SMC
Report, and in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
Note: These SPs are supported by color MFP and LP (Laser
Printer: Not use) machines only.
MFP Color
LP Color
Replaced:
B/W
Yes
Yes
SP7003 7
Single Color
Yes
Yes
--Full Color
Yes
Yes
SP7003 8

5-178

August, 2006

8 586

8 586 1
8 586 2
8 586 3
8 586 4

8 591

8 591 1
8 591 2
8 591 3
8 651

8 651 1
8 651 2
8 655

8 655 1
8 655 2

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

L:Counter
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color for output
from within the document server mode window at the operation
panel.These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the
User Tools display on the copy machine.
Note: These SPs are supported only by color copy MFP machines
only with the fax application installed.
MFP Color
Replaced:
B/W
Yes
--Single Color
Yes
--Two Color
Yes
--Single Color
Yes
---

O:Counter
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of
duplex pages printed, and the number of staples used. These totals
are for Other (O:) applications only.
A3/DLT
Duplex
Staple
T:S-to-Email PGS
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached
to an e-mail for both the Scan and document server applications.
B/W
Color
Supported by Color MFP machines only.
S:S-to-Email PGS
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached
to an e-mail for the Scan application only.
B/W
Color
Supported by Color MFP machines only.

Notes
• The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the
HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.
• If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count
is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
• If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50
(the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).
• Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page
document to a large number of destinations, the count may be divided and
counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document is sent to 200
addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10
for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).

5-179

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

8 661

8 661 1
8 661 2
8 665

8 665 1
8 665 2
8 666

8 666 1
8 666 2

August, 2006

T:Deliv PGS/Svr
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a
Scan Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
B/W
Color
Supported by Color MFP machines only.
S:Deliv PGS/Svr
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a
Scan Router server by the Scan application.
B/W
Color
Supported by Color MFP machines only.
L:Deliv PGS/Svr
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a
Scan Router server by LS applications.
B/W
Color
Supported by Color MFP machines only.

Notes
• The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of
the Scan Router server.
• If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the
counts are not done.
• The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan
Router server.
8 671

8 671 1
8 671 2
8 675

8 675 1
8 675 2

T:Deliv PGS/PC
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a
folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
B/W
Color
Supported by Color MFP machines only.
S:Deliv PGS/PC
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with
Scan-to-PC with the Scan application.
B/W
Color
Supported by Color MFP machines only.

5-180

August, 2006

8 691
8 692
8 694
8 695
8 696

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

T:TX PGS/LS
C:TX PGS/LS
P:TX PGS/LS
S:TX PGS/LS
L:TX PGS/LS

These SPs count the number of pages sent
from the document server. The counter for
the application that was used to store the
pages is incremented.
[0~9999999/ 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages
stored from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel. Pages
stored with the Store File button from within
the Copy mode screen go to the C: counter.

Notes
• Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the
count.
• If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are
counted for the application that stored them.
8 701

8 701 1
8 701 2
8 701 3
8 701 4
8 701 5
8 711

8 711 1
8 711 2
8 711 3
8 711 4
8 715

8 715 1
8 715 2
8 715 3
8 715 4

TX PGS/Port
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used
to send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4
destinations via ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
PSTN-1
PSTN-2
PSTN-3
ISDN (G3,G4)
Network
T:Scan PGS/Comp
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned into the
document server, counted by the formats slisted below.
JPEG/JPEG2000
TIFF (Multi/Single)
PDF
Other
S:Scan PGS/Comp
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned by the
scan application, counted by the formats slisted below.
JPEG/JPEG2000
TIFF (Multi/Single)
PDF
Other

5-181

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

8 741

8 741 1
8 741 2
8 741 3
8 741 4
8 741 5
8 771

8 771 1
8 771 2
8 771 3
8 771 4
8 771 5
8 771 6
8 781

8 781 1
8 781 2
8 781 3
8 781 4
8 791 1

8 801

8 801 1
8 801 2
8 801 3
8 801 4
8 801 5

August, 2006

RX PGS/Port
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port
used to receive them.
PSTN-1
PSTN-2
PSTN-3
ISDN (G3,G4)
Network
Dev Counter
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the
development rollers) for black and other color toners.
Note
For machines that do not support color, the Black toner count is the
same as the Total count.
Total
All toners (YMCK)
K
Black toner
Y
Yellow toner
M
Magenta toner
C
Cyan toner
R
Red toner (Not Used)
Toner Use Count: Color
[0~65 535]
These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the
development rollers) for black and other color toners.
K
Black toner
M
Magenta toner
C
Cyan toner
Y
Yellow toner
LS Memory Remain

This SP displays the percent of space
available on the document server for
storing documents.
[0~100/ 1]

Toner Remain
[0~100/ 1]
This SP displays the percent of toner remaining for each color. This
SP allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.
Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply
(1% steps) is better than other machines in the market that can only
measure in increments of 10 (10% steps).
K
Black.
Supported by B/W and Color machine.
Y
Yellow
Color machines only.
M
Magenta
C
Cyan
R
Red
(Not Used)

5-182

August, 2006

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

8831
001
002
003
004

Pixel Cover Ave.
Accum. Ave. K
Accum. Ave. M
Accum. Ave. C
Accum. Ave. Y

Average Pixel Coverage

8841
001
002
003
004

Pixel Cover Last
Last Page K
Last Page M
Last Page C
Last Page Y

Average Pixel Coverage

8 851

8 851 1
8 851 2
8 851 3
8 851 4

8 861

8 861 1
8 861 2
8 861 3
8 861 4

8 871

8 871 1
8 871 2
8 871 3
8 871 4

8 881

8 881 1
8 881 2
8 881 3
8 881 4

Toner Coverage 0-10%
[0~65 535]
These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other
color toners.
K
Black toner
M
Magenta toner
C
Cyan toner
Y
Yellow toner

Toner Coverage 11-20%
[0~65 535]
These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other
color toners.
K
Black toner
M
Magenta toner
C
Cyan toner
Y
Yellow toner

Toner Coverage 21-30%
[0~65 535]
These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other
color toners.
K
Black toner
M
Magenta toner
C
Cyan toner
Y
Yellow toner

Toner Coverage 31 -%
[0~65 535]
These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other
color toners.
K
Black toner
M
Magenta toner
C
Cyan toner
Y
Yellow toner

5-183

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

8 891
8 891 1
8 891 2
8 891 3
8 891 4

8 941

8 941 1

8 941 2

8 941 3
8 941 4

8 941 5

8 941 6
8 941 7
8 941 8
8 941 9

August, 2006

Pages: Current Toner
[0~65 535]
These SPs count the number of pages for the current set toner.
K
Black toner
M
Magenta toner
C
Cyan toner
Y
Yellow toner

Machine Status
[0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each
operation mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to
investigate machine operation for improvement in their compliance
with ISO Standards.
Operation Time
Engine operation time. Does not include
time while controller is saving data to HDD
(while engine is not operating).
Standby Time
Engine not operating. Includes time while
controller saves data to HDD. Does not
include time spent in Energy Save, Low
Power, or Off modes.
Energy Save Time
Includes time while the machine is
performing background printing.
Low Power Time
Includes time in Energy Save mode with
Engine on. Includes time while machine is
performing background printing.
Off Mode Time
Includes time while machine is performing
background printing. Does not include time
machine remains powered off with the power
switches.
Down Time/SC
Total down time due to SC errors.
Down Time/PrtJam
Total down time due to paper jams during
printing.
Down Time/OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during
scanning.
Down Time/TonEnd Total down time due to toner end.

5-184

August, 2006

8 951

8 951 1
8 951 2
8 951 3
8 951 4
8 951 5
8 951 6
8 951 7

8 951 8

8 951 9

8 951 10

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

AddBook Register
These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
[0~9999999/ 1]
User Code
User code registrations.
Mail Address
Mail address registrations.
Fax Destination
Fax destination registrations.
Group
Group destination
registrations.
Transfer Request Fax relay destination
registrations for relay TX.
F-Code
F-Code box registrations.
Copy Program
Copy application registrations [0~255 / 255]
with the Program (job
settings) feature.
Fax Program
Fax application registrations
with the Program (job
settings) feature.
Printer Program
Printer application
registrations with the
Program (job settings)
feature.
Scanner
Scanner application
Program
registrations with the
Program (job settings)
feature.

5-185

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

August, 2006

Group 9000
9405
001

System Stop Ctrl
Setting
System Stop Control
ON/OFF

Setting of the System Stop Control Function.
Switches the System Stop Control Function ON
or OFF.
When this switch is ON:
The machine stops the job when the output of the
temperature/humidity sensor on the K-PCU is
41°C (105.8F) or higher.
Note: This keeps the temperature of the toner in
the development unit below 50°C (122F), which
prevents toner clumping and other machine
failures.

002

System Stop History

[0 - 1/ 1] 0: OFF , 1: ON (default)
Displays whether or not System Stop Control has
ever stopped the machine in the middle of the
job.
0 (default): System Stop Control has never
stopped the machine.
1: System Stop Control has stopped the machine
one or more times.

5-186

August, 2006
9407
001

Environ Cntrl
Environ Cntrl

004
005
006
007

Op Humidity
Stop Humidity
Op On Time
Op Off Time

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

Enable/disables the Peltier unit.
[0 to 1 / 1]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Factory Use Only. Do Not Touch in the field.
Factory Use Only. Do Not Touch in the field.
Factory Use Only. Do Not Touch in the field.
Factory Use Only. Do Not Touch in the field.

IMPOTANT:
• As a general rule, keep this SP mode disabled.
Enable this SP mode ONLY WHEN:
1. The temperature in the room is low, and
2. There is condensation on the drum or charge roller, and
3. The images on the printouts are blurry
• To enable the Peltier unit:
1. Set this SP mode to a value of 1, and
2. Turn OFF the AOF function in User Program Mode.
NOTE: There are some environmental conditions that the Peltier unit needs to
operate (ex: humidity of 60% or higher). If the Peltier unit does not
operate after you do the above steps, it is because these conditions are
not satisfied.
• When the AOF function is turned OFF, the machine is not in compliance with the
Energy Star requirements.

5-187

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

August, 2006

5.5.3 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE
Group 1 (Printer)
1001
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008

Bit Switch
Bit Switch 1 Settings
Bit Switch 2 Settings
Bit Switch 3 Settings
Bit Switch 4 Settings
Bit Switch 5 Settings
Bit Switch 6 Settings
Bit Switch 7 Settings
Bit Switch 8 Settings

Adjusts the bit switch settings. DFU

1003 Clear Setting
001 Initialize Printer System
Initializes settings in the “System” menu of the user mode.
003 Delete Program

1004

Print Summary
Print Summary
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).

1005

Display Version
Disp. Version
Displays the version of the controller firmware.

1006

Sample/Locked Print
Enables and disables the document server. When you select “0,” the document server is
enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service Mode SP5-967. When you select
“1,” the document server is enabled regardless of Copy Service Mode SP5-967.
0: Link With Doc. Svr. 1: Enable

1101

Data Recall
Recalls a set of gamma settings.
Factory
This can be either a) the factory setting, b) the previous setting,
or c) the current setting.
Previous
Current
ACC

001
002
003
004

1102

Resolution Setting
Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment.
Press a key on the display:
[2400 x 600 Photo]
[1800 x 600 Photo]
[600 x 600 Photo]
[2400 x 600 Photo]
[1800 x 600 Text]
[600 x 600]

5-188

August, 2006

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

1103

Test Page
Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma adjustment.
001 Color Gray Scale
002 Color Pattern

1104
001
002
003
004
021
022
023
024
041
042
043
044
061
062
063
064

1105

1106

Gamma Adjustment
Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the “Mode Selection” menu.
[ 0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
Black: Highlight
Black: Shadow
Black: Middle
Black: ID max
Cyan: Highlight
Cyan: Shadow
Cyan: Middle
Cyan: ID max
Magenta: Highlight
Magenta: Shadow
Magenta: Middle
Magenta: ID max
Yellow: Highlight
Yellow: Shadow
Yellow: Middle
Yellow: ID max

Save Tone Control Value
Stores the print gamma adjusted with the “Gamma Adj.” menu item as the current
setting. Before the machine stores the new “current setting", it moves the data
currently stored as the “current setting” to the “previous setting” memory storage
location.

Toner Limit
Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.
001 Toner Limit: Photo
[ 100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step ]
002 Toner Limit: Text
[ 100 to 400 / 190 / 1 %/step ]

5-189

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

August, 2006

5.5.4 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE
Group 1 (Scanner)
1004

Compression Type
Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.
[ 1 to 3 /1/step ]
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR

1005

Erase margin
Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image. If the machine has
scanned the edge of the original, create a margin.
[0 to 5/ 1 mm/step]

1007

Store Priority
This program specifies how scanned data is processed as default.
[1: Send / 2: Store Only / 3: Send & Store]

1009

Remote Scan Disable
This SP enables and disables remote scanning.
0:Enable 1:Diable

Group 2 (Scanner)
2021
001
002
003
004
005

Compression Ratio of Gray Scale
This SP sets the compression ratio of grayscale images.
Normal Image
High Comp Image
Low Comp Image
High Lvl2 Comp Image
Low Lvl2 Comp Image

5-190

August, 2006

COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK

5.6 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
5.6.1 COPIER INPUT CHECK: SP5803
This procedure allows you to test sensors and other components of the machine.
After you select one of the categories below by number, you will see a small 8-bit
table with the number of the bit and its current setting (0 or 1). The bits are
numbered 0 to 7, reading right to left.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP5803.
2. Enter the number (1 to 13) for the item that you want to check. A small box will
be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0’s and 1’s.
The meaning of the display is as follows.
Bit

76543210

Setting

11001010

3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in
the table below.
001 Tray 1
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

Input
Rear Side Fence Closed Sensor – Tray 1
Rear Side Fence Open Sensor – Tray 1
Front Side Fence Closed Sensor – Tray 1
Front Side Fence Open Sensor – Tray 1
Paper Near End Sensor – Tray 1
Paper Height Sensor 1 – Tray 1
Paper Height Sensor 2 – Tray 1
Paper Height Sensor 3 – Tray 1

0
1
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
See
following
table.

Tandem Tray Paper Height Sensors: 001
Near End
Paper Height 1
Paper Height 2
Paper Height 3

100%
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 1

50%
0 0
0 0
1 1
1 0

30%
0 0
1 1
1 0
0 0

10%
1 1
1 0
0 0
0 0

002 Paper Feed 1
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

Input

0
1
See
following
table.

Paper Size – Tray 2
Paper Size – Tray 2
Paper Size – Tray 2
Paper Size – Tray 2
Paper Size – Tray 2

5-191

COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK

August, 2006

003 Paper Feed 3
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

Input

0
1
See following
table.

Paper Size – Tray 3
Paper Size – Tray 3
Paper Size – Tray 3
Paper Size – Tray 3
Paper Size – Tray 3

Paper Size Table: 002, 003
Size
12"x18"
A3
B4
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
B5 SEF
B5 LEF
A5 SEF
A5 LEF
DLT (11"x17")
LG (8½x14")
LT SEF (8½x11")
LT LEF
HLT SEF
HLT LEF
F4 (8 ½" x 13")
Folio (8¼ x 13")
F (8" x 13")
Executive SEF (7¼"x10½")
Executive LEF
8K SEF
16 SEF
16 LEF

Bit 7
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1

Bit 6
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0

Bit 5
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1

Bit 4
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1

Bit 3
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1

0

1

004 Paper Feed 4
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

Input

Paper Height Sensor – Tray 2
Paper Height Sensor – Tray 3

See following
table.

Paper Near End Sensor – Tray 2
Paper Near End Sensor – Tray 3

See following
table.

Paper Height, Near End: 004
Paper Height
Near End

100%
0
0

50%
1
0

30%
1
1

10%
0
1

5-192

August, 2006

COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK

005: Paper Feed 5
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

Input

Right Tray Paper Sensor – Tray 1
Number of Trays Detected

0

1

No Paper
3-Trays

Paper
4-Trays

006: Paper Feed 6
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

Input
Tray 1 Set Sensor
Rear Fence HP Sensor – Right
Right Tray Down Sensor
Rear Fence HP Sensor – Tray 1
Rear Fence Open Senor – Right
Rear Fence Return Sensor – Tray 1
Paper End Sensor – Right Tray
Right Tray Set Sensor – Tray 1

0
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off

1
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

0
On

1
Off

On
On
On

Off
Off
Off

On
On

Off
Off

0
On

1
Off

On
On
On

Off
Off
Off

On
On

Off
Off

007: Paper Feed 7
Bit
Input
Bit 7
Paper Feed Sensor – Tray 1
Bit 6
Bit 5
Paper Feed Sensor – Tray 2
Bit 4
Paper Feed Sensor – Tray 3
Bit 3
Vertical Transport Sensor – Tray 1
Bit 2
Bit 1
Vertical Transport Sensor – Tray 2
Bit 0
Vertical Transport Sensor – Tray 3
On = Paper present
Off = No paper

008: Paper Feed 8
Bit
Input
Bit 7
Lift Sensor – Tray 1
Bit 6
Bit 5
Lift Sensor – Tray 2
Bit 4
Lift Sensor – Tray 3
Bit 3
Paper End Sensor – Tray 1
Bit 2
Bit 1
Paper End Sensor – Tray 2
Bit 0
Paper End Sensor – Tray 3
On: Tray up, No paper
Off: Tray down, paper present

5-193

COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK

August, 2006

009: Used Toner Trans
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

Input

0

1

Off
Off
Off
Off

On
On
On
On

0
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off

1
On
On
On
On
On

Input
LCT Relay Sensor
Paper Exit Relay Sensor
Registration Sensor
Guide Plate Position Sensor

0
Off
Off
Off
Off

1
On
On
On
On

Paper Exit Sensor
Paper Exit Relay Sensor

Off
Off
Off

On
On
On

0
Off
Off
Off
Off

1
On
On
On
On

WasteToner Lock Sensor
Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor
Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor
Waste Toner Bottle Near Full Sensor

010: Paper Trans 1
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

Input
Duplex Transport Sensor 1
Duplex Transport Sensor 2
Duplex Transport Sensor 3
Duplex Inverter Sensor
Duplex Entrance Sensor

011: Paper Trans 2
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

012: Paper Trans 3
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

Input
Copy Tray Full Sensor
Double-Feed Detection Sensor
Accordion Jam Sensor
Fusing Exit Sensor

5-194

August, 2006

COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK

013: Paper Trans 4
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

Input
Paper Size Switch 1
Paper Size Switch 2
Paper Size Switch 3
Paper Size Switch 4
Bypass Paper Size Switch

0
1
See
following
table.
Off

On

Bypass paper end sensor: Off: Paper present, On: No paper

Paper Size Table: 013 (Trays 1 to 3, Bit 7 to 4)
NA

EU/Asia

Postcard (100 x 148 mm)
5 ½ x 8 ½ SEF
5 ½ x 8 ½ SEF
8 ½ x 14 SEF
8 ½ x 14 SEF
8 ½ x 14 SEF
11 x 17 SEF
A3 SEF

Postcard (100 x 148 mm)
A5 SEF
A5 SEF
8 x 13 SEF
A4 SEF
A3 SEF
A3 SEF
A3 SEF

1
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L

Tray Sensor SW
2
3
4
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
L
H
L
L
H
L
L
L
L
H
L
H
H

5
H
L
L
H
H
H
H
H

1
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L

Tray Sensor SW
2
3
4
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
L
H
L
L
H
L
L
L
L
H
L
H
H

5
H
L
L
H
H
H
H
H

Paper Size Table: 013 (Bypass Tray Bit 3)
NA

EU/Asia

Postcard (100 x 148 mm)
5 ½ x 8 ½ SEF
5 ½ x 8 ½ SEF
8 ½ x 14 SEF
8 ½ x 14 SEF
8 ½ x 14 SEF
11 x 8 ½ SEF
A4 LEF

Postcard (100 x 148 mm)
A5 SEF
A5 SEF
8 x 13 SEF
A5 LEF
A4 LEF
A4 LEF
A4 LEF

014: Drum Mtr Lock
Bit
Input
Bit 7
Drum Motor Lock – Y
Bit 6
Drum Motor Lock – M
Bit 5
Drum Motor Lock – C
Bit 4
Drum Motor Lock – K
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Off: No Lock
On: Locked

0
Off
Off
Off
Off

5-195

1
On
On
On
On

COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK

August, 2006

015: PCU Motor Lock
Bit
Input
Bit 7
PCU Motor Lock – Y
Bit 6
PCU Motor Lock – M
Bit 5
PCU Motor Lock – C
Bit 4
PCU Motor Lock – K
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Off: No Lock
On: Locked

0
Off
Off
Off
Off

1
On
On
On
On

0
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off

1
On
On
On
On
On

0
Off
Off
Off

1
On
On
On

0
Off
Off
Off
Off

1
On
On
On
On

016: Other Motor Lock
Bit
Input
Bit 7
ITB Drive Motor Lock
Bit 6
PTR Motor Lock
Bit 5
Fusing/Exit Motor Lock
Bit 4
Waste Toner Transport Motor Lock
Bit 3
Waste Toner Distribution Motor Lock
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Off: No Lock
On: Locked

017: Fan System 1
Bit
Input
Bit 7
Paper Exit Fan Motor Lock
Bit 6
Duplex Fan Motor – Front Lock
Bit 5
Duplex Fan Motor – Rear Lock
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Off: No Lock
On: Locked

018: Fan System 2
Bit
Input
Bit 7
Fusing Cooling Fan Motor Lock
Bit 6
Fusing Exhaust Fan Motor Lock
Bit 5
Fusing Fan Motor Lock
Bit 4
Peltier Cooling Fan Motor Lock
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Off: No Lock
On: Locked

5-196

August, 2006

COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK

019: Fan System 3
Bit
Input
Bit 7
Controlling Box Cooling Fan Motor 2 Lock
Bit 6
Controlling Box Cooling Fan Motor 1 Lock
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Off: No Lock
On: Locked

0
Off
Off

1
On
On

020: Hi Volt SC1 (Drum Charge Power Pack)
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

Input
High Voltage Output: Y
High Voltage Output: M
High Voltage Output: C
High Voltage Output: K

0
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal

1
Abnormal
Abnormal
Abnormal
Abnormal

021: Hi Volt SC2 (Development Bias Power Pack)
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

Input
High Voltage Output: Y
High Voltage Output: M
High Voltage Output: C
High Voltage Output: K

0
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal

1
Abnormal
Abnormal
Abnormal
Abnormal

022: Hi Volt SC3 (Transfer Power Pack, Separation Power Pack)
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

Input
High Voltage Output: Y
High Voltage Output: M
High Voltage Output: C
High Voltage Output: K
High Voltage Output: Y
Paper Separation

Transfer PP

Separation PP

5-197

0
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal

1
Abnormal
Abnormal
Abnormal
Abnormal
Abnormal
Abnormal

COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK

August, 2006

023: Paper Transfer
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

Input
ITB Lift Sensor

ITB Position Sensor 1
ITB Position Sensor 2

0
Separated

1
Contact

See folloeing table.

Bit Table: 023
Bit 1/Bit 0
00
01
10
11

Function
Belt Scale Control
Encoder Control
Belt or Sensor Defective
Belt or Sensor Defective

024: Toner Supply
Bit
Input
Bit 7
Toner End Sensor: Y
Bit 6
Toner End Sensor: M
Bit 5
Toner End Sensor: C
Bit 4
Toner End Sensor: K
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Off: Toner
On: Toner End

0
Off
Off
Off
Off

1
On
On
On
On

025: Fusing Temp Detect
Bit
Input
Bit 7
Pressure Roller Thermostat – High Temp
Bit 6
Hot Roller Thermistor – High Temp
Bit 5
Heating Roller Temperataure Sensor – High Temp
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Off: Temperature within normal range
On: Temperature high, exceeded normal range

5-198

0
Off
Off
Off

1
On
On
On

August, 2006

COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK

026: Set Detection
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

Input
Key Card Set
Key Count Set
Mechanical Counter B Set
Mechanical Counter FC Set
Fusing Unit Set
Duplex Unit Set
Drawer Set

0
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off

1
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

Input

0
Off

1
On

Input
Peltier Unit Abnormal
Peltier Unit Fan Motor

0
Off
Off

1
On
On

0
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off

1
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

027: Door
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

Front Door Switches

028: Peltier Unit
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

201: DIP Switches
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

Input
DIP-SW7
DIP-SW6
DIP-SW5
DIP-SW4
DIP-SW3
DIP-SW2
DIP-SW1
DIP-SW0

5-199

COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK

August, 2006

5.6.2 COPIER OUTPUT CHECK: SP5804
1. Open SP mode 5804.
2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check.
(Refer to the table on the next page.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item.
NOTE: You cannot exit and close this display until you press off to switch off
the output check currently executing. Do not keep an electrical
component switched on for a long time.
5804
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
014
015
016
017
018
019
021
023
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044

NOTE:

Output Chk
Fuse Fan: Front NS
Fuse Fan: Front HS
Fuse Fan: Back NS
Fuse Fan: Back HS
Opt. Fan: Front NS
Opt. Fan: Front HS
Opt. Fan: Back NS
Opt. Fan: Back HS
Exit Pipe Fan
Sub Fuse Fan: NS
Sub Fuse Fan: HS
PT Fan: NS
Dupx Fan: NS
Dupx Fan:Front:NS
Dupx Fan:Front:HS
Dupx Fan:Back:NS
Dupx Fan:Back:HS
Exit Fan:NS
PCB Box Fan1:NS
PCB Box Fan2:NS
PSU Fan 1:NS
PSU Fan 1:HS
PSU Fan 2:NS
PSU Fan 2:HS
PT Fan 1:NS
PT Fan 2:NS
Pelt. Cool Fan:NS
Pelt. Cool Fan:HS
Potential Sn Fan
Ozone Fan
PCU Fan:Y
PCU Fan:C
PCU Fan:M
PCU Fan:K
Pelt. Cooling Fan
Pelt. Cir. Fan
Sub Hopper CL:Y
Sub Hopper CL:M
Sub Hopper CL:C
Sub Hopper CL:K
--- means "not used"

M14
M14
M15
M15
M35
M35
M34
M34
M25
M13
M13
M24
M20
M29
M29
M30
M30
M28
M41
M42
--------M27
M26
M32
M32
M31
M12
M52
M53
M54
M55
M32
M33
MC7
MC3
MC9
MC5

Output Check
045 Hopper Mtr Fwd
046 P.Pump Drv CL:Y
047 P.Pump Drv CL:M
048 P.Pump Drv CL:C
049 P.Pump Drv CL:K
050 Used Toner Mtr 1
051 Used Toner Mtr 1
052 Chage dc:Y
053 Chage dc:M
054 Chage dc:C
055 Chage dc:K
056 Chage ac:Y
057 Chage ac:M
058 Chage ac:C
059 Chage ac:K
060 Dev dc:Y
061 Dev dc:M
062 Dev dc:C
063 Dev dc:K
064 Dev ac:Y
065 Dev ac:M
066 Dev ac:C
067 Dev ac:K
068 Paper Transfer
069 Paper Separate dc
070 Paper Separate ac
099 ID Sensor:3c
100 ID Sensor: K
101 QL:Y
102 QL:M
103 QL:C
104 QL:K
105 LD:Y
106 LD:M
107 LD:C
108 LD:K
109 Polygon Mtr
110 Feed Mtr 1:Fwd/Nor
111 Feed Mtr 1:Fwd/Hi
112 Feed Mtr 1:Fwd/Haf

5-200

M51
MC6
MC2
MC8
MC4
M23
M23
PCB7
PCB7
PCB7
PCB7
PCB7
PCB7
PCB7
PCB7
PCB6
PCB6
PCB6
PCB6
PCB6
PCB6
PCB6
PCB6
PCB8
PCB9
PCB9
S2
S1
QL4
QL3
QL2
QL1
PCB23
PCB25
PCB24
PCB26
M48
M3
M3
M3

August, 2006

5804
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154

NOTE:

Output Chk
Feed Mtr 1:Rev/Nor
Feed Mtr 1:Rev/Haf
Feed Mtr 2:Fwd/Nor
Feed Mtr 2:Fwd/Hi
Feed Mtr 2:Fwd/Haf
Feed Mtr 2:Rev/Nor
Feed Mtr 2:Rev/Haf
Feed Mtr 3:Fwd/Nor
Feed Mtr 3:Fwd/Hi
Feed Mtr 3:Fwd/Haf
Feed Mtr 3:Rev/Nor
Feed Mtr 3:Rev/Haf
Feed Mtr 4:Fwd/Nor
Feed Mtr 4:Fwd/Hi
Feed Mtr 4:Fwd/Haf
Feed Mtr 4:Rev/Nor
Feed Mtr 4:Rev/Haf
Bypass Feed CL
Pick-up SOL:Tray 1
Pick-up SOL:Tray 2
Pick-up SOL:Tray 3
Pick-up SOL:Tray 4
Bypass Pick-up SOL
Rev SOL:Tray 1
Rev SOL:Tray 2
Rev SOL:Tray 3
Rev SOL:Tray 4
Tan Conn Rel SOL
Tan Lock SOL
TanShift M:Fwd/Rev
Relay Mtr:Fwd/Nor
Relay M:Fwd/Dup
Relay M:Fwd/Haf
Relay M:Rev/Nor
Relay M:Rev/Haf
Reg Mtr:Rev/Haf
Reg Mrt:Half Spd
Guide Rel SOL
Exit JG SOL
Dup Inv M:Fwd/Nor
--- means "not used"

COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK

M3
M3
M2
M2
M2
M2
M2
M5
M5
M5
M5
M5
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
MC1
SOL5
--SOL1
SOL3
SOL15
SOL6
--SOL2
SOL4
SOL9
SOL10
M10
M18
M18
M18
M18
M18
M23
M23
SOL13
SOL14
M22

Output Check
155 Dup Inv M:Fwd/Hi
156 Dup Inv M:Fwd/Haf
157 DupInvM:Fwd/TS
158 DupTrans M:Fwd/Nor
159 DupTrans M:Fwd/Hi
160 DupTrans M:Fwd/Haf
161 Dup JG SOL
162 Inv Pos SOL
163 Dup Trans CL
164 Dup Jog M:HP Sn
169 Drum Mtr:K
170 Drum Mtr:K:Haf
171 Drum Mtr:M
172 Drum Mtr:M:Haf
173 Drum Mtr:C
174 Drum Mtr:C:Haf
175 Drum Mtr:Y
176 Drum Mtr:Y:Haf
177 PCU Mtr:K
178 PCU Mtr:K:Haf
179 PCU Mtr:M
180 PCU Mtr:M:Haf
181 PCU Mtr:C
182 PCU Mtr:C:Haf
183 PCU Mtr:Y
184 PCU Mtr:Y:Haf
185 Image Transfer Motor
186 Image Transfer Motor:Haf
187 PRT Motor
188 PRT Motor:Haf
189 Fusing/Exit M
190 Fusing/Exit M:Haf
191 Fusing/Exit M:1/3
192 ITB Lift M:Fwd
193 ITB Lift M:Rev
194 Jam LED:Fusing
195 Jam LED:Exit
200 Scanner Fan
202 Scanner Lamp
203 Scanner Motor

5-201

M22
M22
M22
M21
M21
M21
SOL11
SOL12
--S45
M45
M45
M44
M44
M43
M43
M42
M42
M37
M37
M36
M36
M39
M39
M38
M38
M46
M46
M17
M17
M16
M16
M16
M11
M11
LED2
LED3
M56
L1
M1

ARDF INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK

August, 2006

5.7 ARDF INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
5.7.1 ADF INPUT CHECK: SP6007
1. Open SP mode SP6007.
2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check.
(Refer to the table below.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item. You cannot exit and close
this display until you click Off to switch off the output check currently executing.
Bit

76543210

Data

11001010

Group 1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Part/Component
Registration Sensor
Interval Sensor
Skew Correction Sensor
Separation Sensor
Original Set Sensor
B5 Detection Sensor
A4 Detection Sensor
LG Detection Sensor

Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off

Status
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:

On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

0:
0:
0:
0:
0:
0:
0:
0:

Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off

Status
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:

On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

0:
0:
0:
0:
0:
0:
0:
0:

Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off

Status
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:

On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

0:
0:
0:
0:
0:
0:
0:
0:

Group 2
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Part/Component
APS Start Sensor
ARDF Position Sensor
Exit Sensor
Original Width Sensor 5
Original Width Sensor 4
Original Width Sensor 3
Original Width Sensor 2
Original Width Sensor 1

Group 3
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Part/Component

Lower Inverter Sensor
Upper Inverter Sensor
Bottom Plate Position Sensor
Bottom Plate HP Sensor
Pick-Up Roller HP Sensor
Feed Cover Sensor

5-202

August, 2006

ARDF INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK

5.7.2 ADF OUTPUT CHECK: SP6008
1. Open SP mode SP6008.
2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check.
(Refer to the table below.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item. You cannot exit and close
this display until you click Off to switch off the output check currently executing.
6008

001
002
003
004
005
006

ADF Output Chk
ADF Output Check
Turns on the ADF electrical components individually for testing. Select the
component to test, then press the "ON" button. Besure to press the "OFF" button
as soon as you hear the component turn on.
ADF Feed M:Fwd
007 ADF Bot Inv M:Fwd
ADF Feed M:Rev
008 ADF Bot Inv M:Rev
ADF Trans M:Fwd
009 ADF Pick-up M:Fwd
ADF Ext M:Fwd
010 ADF BotPlt M:Rev
ADF Top Inv M:Fwd
011 ADF Top Inv SOL
ADF Top Inv M:Rev
012 ADF Bot Inv SOL

5-203

FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK

August, 2006

5.8 FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
5.8.1 INPUT CHECK: FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) SP6121
6121
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025

Input Chk:Fin1
Input Check: Finisher 1 (B700/B701)
These are the input checks for the 2000-Sheet/3000-Sheet Finishers B700/B701.
Entrance Sn
026 Punch Full Sn
Proof Exit Sn
027 Punch HP Sn
Proof Full Sn
028 Punch DIP SW1
Up Tray Exit Sn
029 Punch DIP SW2
Staple Exit Sn
030 Stack Junc HP Sn
Shift Roll HP Sn
031 Stack Present Sn
Exit Sn
032 Clamp Roll HP Sn
Exit Guide HP Sn
033 Fold Entrance Sn
Low Tray Hgt Sn
034 Bot Fence HP Sn
Up Tray Hgt Sn
035 Fol Cam HP Sn
Up Tray Full Sn
036 Fold Plate HP Sn
Stack Roll HP Sn
037 Fold Exit Sn
Joggr HP Sn
038 Book Full Sn 1
Feed Out HP Sn
039 Book Full Sn 2
Stp Tray Ppr Sn
040 BStapler 1 Op
Stp Tray HP Sn
041 BStapler 1 In
Stp Rotate HP Sn
042 BStaples 1 In
Up Tray Limit SW
043 BStapler 2 Op
Door Switch
044 BStapler 2 In
Corner Stp Op
045 BStaples 2 In
Corner Stp 1
046 Up TrayFull:3000
Corner Staples
047 Out Jog HP Sn 1
Punch HP Sn
048 Out Jog HP Sn 2
Punch Unit HP Sn
049 OutJog RetractSn
Punch Ppr HP Sn

5-204

August, 2006

FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK

5.8.2 OUTPUT CHECK FINISHER 1: (B700/B701) SP6123
6123
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016

Output Chk:Fin1
Output Check: Finisher 1 (B700/B701)
These are the output checks for the 2000-Sheet/3000-Sheet Finishers B700/B701.
Entrance M
017 Pos Roll SOL
Up Trans M
018 Stp Edge Plate SOL
Low Trans M
019 Book Press SOL
Exit M
020 Stack JG M
Pos Roll M
021 Fold Bot Fence M
Shift M
022 Book Stp M:Front
Exit Guide M
023 Book Stp M:Back
Tray Lift M
024 Fold Plate M
Stack Roller M
025 Fold Roll M
Jogger M
026 Clamp Roll M
Feed Out M
027 Punch M
Stp Shift M
028 Punch Move M
Stp Rot M
029 Reg M
Corner Stp M
030 Output Jog M: Front
Up JG SOL
031 Output Jog M: Rear
Dn JG SOL
032 Output Jog Retract M

5-205

FINISHER 2 (B706) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK

5.9 FINISHER 2 (B706) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
5.9.1 INPUT CHECK FINISHER 2: (B706) SP6122
6122
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020

Input Chk:Fin2
Input Check: Finisher 2 (B706)
These are the input checks for the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706.
Entrance Sn
021 Proof Full Sn
Proof Exit Sn
022 Staple Rotate HP Sn
Shift Exit Sn
023 S Hopper Full Sn
Stp Exit Sn
024 PreStack Sn
Tray Bot Plt Sn
025 Stack Plate HP
Tray Near Bot Sn
026 Exit Guide HP Sn
Release HP Sn
027 Stapler Return Sn
Jogger HP Sn
028 Stapler Ready Sn
Shift HP Sn
029 Stack Plate HP Sn 1
Stapler Side HP Sn
030 Stack Plate HP Sn 2
Stapler HP Sn
031 Stp Hammer HP Sn
Staple Sn
032 Retrun Drv HP Sn
Staple Tray Sn
033 Paper Hgt Sn
Door Open Sn
034 Tray Limit SW
Punch Sn
035 Punch HP Sn 2
Punch HP Sn 1
036 Shift Jog Sn
Puncout Full Sn
037 Shift Jog HP Sn
Paper Hgt Sn:Stp
038 Out Jog Retract Sn
Paper Hgt Sn:Shift
039 Emergency Stop SW
Cart Detect Sn

5-206

August, 2006

August, 2006

FINISHER 2 (B706) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK

5.9.2 OUTPUT CHECK FINISHER 2 (B706) SP6125
6125
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013

Output Chk:Fin2
Output Check: Finisher 2 (B706)
These are the input checks for the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706.
Off:Stop
014 Stp Lift M:1 Op
Main M:Cont
015 Stp Exit M:Cont
Shift Exit M:Cont
016 Open Exit M:Cont
Proof SW SOL:Cont
017 Fold Plate M:1 Op
Tray Lift M:1 Op
018 PrestackJG SOL:1Op
Jogger M:1 Op
019 Guide JG SOL:1 Op
Stp M:1 Op Horiz
020 Stp Return:1 Op
Stp M:1 Op
021 Fold M:Front:1 Op
Punch M:1 Op
022 Fold M:Back:1 Op
Stp JG SOL:Cont
023 Return Drv M:1 Op
Stp Hammer M:1 Op
024 Return TransM:1Op
Feed Out M:1 Op
025 Shift Jog M:1 Op
Shift M:1 Op
026 ShiftJogShuntM:1Op

5-207

USING THE DEBUG LOG

August, 2006

5.10 USING THE DEBUG LOG
This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Service Engineer
to save and retrieve error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory but
this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
The Save Debug Log feature provides two main features:
• Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD
for later retrieval.
• Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
When a user is experiencing problems with the machine, follow the procedure
below to set up the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the
HDD.

5.10.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG
The debug information cannot be saved the until the “Save Debug Log” function
has been switched on and a target has been selected.
1. Enter the SP mode and switch the Save Debug Log feature on.
• Press 
 then use the 10-key pad to enter .
• Press and hold down  for more than 3 seconds.
• Press “Copy SP”.
• On the LCD panel, open SP5857.
2. Under “5857 Save Debug Log”, press “1 On/Off”.
COPY : SP-5-857-001
Save Debug Log
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
_1_
Initial 0

3. On the operation panel keypad, press “1” then press . This switches the
Save Debug Log feature on.
NOTE: The default setting is “0” (OFF). This feature must be switched on in
order for the debug information to be saved.

5-208

August, 2006

USING THE DEBUG LOG

4. Next, select the target destination where the debug information will be saved.
Under “5857 Save Debug Log”, press “2 Target”, enter “2” with the operation
panel key to select the hard disk as the target destination, then press .
COPY : SP-5-857-002
Save Debug Log
Target (2:HDD 3:SD Card)
_2_
Initial 2

NOTE: Select “3 SD Card” to save the debug information directly to the SD
card if it is inserted in the service slot.
5. Now press “5858” and specify the events that you want to record in the debug
log. SP5858 (Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
1

Engine SC Error

2

Controller SC Error

3

Any SC Error

4

Jam

Saves data when an engine-related
SC code is generated.
Saves debug data when a controllerrelated SC Code is generated.
Saves data only for the SC code that
you specify by entering code number.
Saves data for jams.

NOTE: More than one event can be selected.
Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
Press the appropriate items(s). Press “ON” for each selection. This example
shows “Engine SC Error” selected.
COPY : SP-5-858-001
Debug Save When
Engine SC Error
__OFF__

__ON__

Example 2: To Specify an SC Code
Press “3 Any SC Error”, enter the 3-digit SC code number with the operation
panel number keys, then press . This example shows an entry for SC670.
COPY : SP-5-858-001
Debug Save When
Any SC Error
__670

NOTE: For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in
Section “4. Troubleshooting”.

5-209

USING THE DEBUG LOG

August, 2006

6. Next, select the one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug
information. Press “5859”.
Under “5859” press the appropriate key item for the module that you want to
record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number, then press .
NOTE: Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each
key.
The example below shows “Key 1” with “2222” entered.
COPY : SP-5-859-001
Debug Save Key No.
Key 1
___2222

The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in
parentheses indicate the names of the modules.)
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10
KEY NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

COPY

4848 (COPY)
2224 (BICU)

PRINTER
2222 (SCS)
2223 (SRM)
256 (IMH)
1000 (ECS)
1025 (MCS)
4400 (GPS)
4500 (PDL)
4600 (GPS-PM)
2000 (NCS)
2224 (BICU)

SCANNER

WEB

5375 (Scan)
5682 (NFA)
3000 (NCS)
2000 (NCS)

5682 (NFA)
6600 (WebDB)
3300 (PTS)
6666 (WebSys)
2000 (NCS)

NOTE: The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero (“0”).
Key to Acronyms
Acronym
ECS
GPS
GSP-PM
IMH
MCS

Meaning
Engine Control Service
GW Print Service
GW Print Service – Print Module
Image Memory Handler
Memory Control Service

Acronym
NFA
PDL
PTS
SCS
SRM

NCS

Network Control Service

WebDB

Meaning
Net File Application
Printer Design Language
Print Server
System Control Service
System Resource
Management
Web Document Box
(Document Server)

The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on
the HDD (the target selected with SP5857-002) for the events that you selected
SP5858 and the memory modules selected with SP5859.

5-210

August, 2006

USING THE DEBUG LOG

Please keep the following important points in mind when you are doing this setting:
• Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer,
Scanner, and Web memory modules.
• The initial settings are all zero.
• These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the
settings, especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting,
enter a zero for that key.
• You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the
corresponding 4-digit numbers from the table.
• You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006 to 010.
For example, if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the
settings from the 9 available selections for the “PRINTER” column only.
• One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is
limited to 4 MB.

5.10.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD
Retrieve the debug log by copying it from the hard disk to an SD card.
1. Insert the SD card into the service slot of the copier.
2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857-009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4
MB)) to write the debugging data to the SD card.
3. After you return to the service center, use a card reader to copy the file and
send it for analysis to Ricoh by email, or just send the SD card by mail.

5-211

USING THE DEBUG LOG

August, 2006

5.10.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY
Since only SC errors and jams are recorded to the debug log automatically, for any
other errors that occur while the service engineer is not on site, please instruct
customers to perform the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug
data. Such problems would include a controller or panel freeze.
NOTE: In order to use this feature, the service engineer must have previously
switched on the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) and selected the hard
disk as the save destination (SP5857-002).
1. When the error occurs, on the operation panel, press

(Clear Modes).

2. On the operationl panel, enter “01” then hold down  for at least 3 sec.
until the machine beeps then release. This saves the debug log to the hard disk
for later retrieval with an SD card by the service representatives.
3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.
The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk so the service
representatives can retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to
an SD card.

5-212

August, 2006

USING THE DEBUG LOG

5.10.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES
SP5857-015

Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key

This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written
directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation
is executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (This
function does not copy from one slot to another.) Each SD card can hold up to 4
MB of file data. Unique file names are created for the data during the copy
operation to prevent overwriting files of the same name. This means that log data
from more than one machine can be copied onto the same SC card. This
command does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of the
specified key.

SP5857-016

Create a File on HDD to Store a Log

This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not a
completely empty file. The created file will hold the number “2225” as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the HDD when the first log is stored on the HDD, but this operation
takes time. This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched off and
on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this SP to create the
log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required to acquire
the log information and save onto the HDD. With the file already created on the
HDD for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new log file does not
require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-011 to delete the debug
log data from the HDD and then execute this SP (SP5857-016).

SP5857-017

Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log

This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. However, this is not a
completely empty file. The created file will hold the number “2225” as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the SD card when the first log is stored on the SD card, but this
operation takes time. This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched
off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this SP to
create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required
to acquire the log information and save onto the SD card. With the file already
created on the SD card for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new
log file does not require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-012 to
delete the debug log data from the SD card and then execute this SP (SP5857017).

5-213

USER TOOLS

August, 2006

5.11 USER TOOLS
5.11.1 OVERVIEW
This section is a summary of the user tools. Refer to the operator’s manual for
more details.
1. On the operation panel, press the User Tools button.
2. Press the appropriate key, then access the following items:
• System Settings
• Maintenance
• Copier/Document Server Features
• Printer Features
• Scanner Features
• Inquiry
• Counter
You can use these tools while the machine is operating, during a jam, or even
when a warning is displayed. However, you cannot move to the user screen while
in the SP mode, but you can easily switch between the SP mode screen and the
operation screen by pressing Copy Window.
During machine operation, in the jam mode, or while a warning message is
displayed, the display language can be changed and the counters can be
displayed. However, the counters cannot be printed.

5-214

August, 2006

USER TOOLS

5.11.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS
Key press: [User Tools]> "System Settings"
System Settings Map
General Features
Panel Tone
Warm Up Notice
Copy Count Display
Function Priority
Print Priority
Function Reset Timer
Interleave Print
Output Copier
Output: Document Server
Output: Printer
ADF Original Table Elevation
Job List Display Time
Tray Paper Settings
Paper Tray Priority: Copier
Paper Tray Priority: Printer
Tray Paper Size: Tray 2
Tray Paper Size: Tray 3
Paper Type: Bypass Tray
Paper Type: Tray 1
Paper Type: Tray 2
Paper Type: Tray 3
Paper Type: LCT
Front Cover Select Tray
Back Cover Select Tray
Slip Sheet Tray
Designation Sheet Tray 1
Designation Sheet Tray 2
Printer Bypass Paper Size
Paper Type Detect
Double Feed Detect

5-215

USER TOOLS

August, 2006

System Settings Map (Continued)
Timer Settings
Auto Off Timer
Energy Saver Timer
Panel Off Timer
System Reset Timer
Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer
Printer Auto Reset Timer
Scanner Auto Reset Timer
Set Date
Set Time
Weekly Timer Code
Auto Logout Timer
Weekly Timer: Monday
Weekly Timer: Tuesday
Weekly Timer: Wednesday
Weekly Timer: Thursday
Weekly Timer: Friday
Weekly Timer: Saturday
Weekly Timer: Sunday
Interface Settings
Network
IP Address
Gateway Address
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol
NW Frame Type
SMB Computer Name
SMB Work Group
Ethernet Speed
Ping Command
Permit SNMP V3 Communication
Permit SSL/TLS Communication
Host Name
Machine Name
File Transfer
Delivery Option
SMTP Server
SMTP Authentication
POP Before SMTP
POP3 Setting
Administrator's E-mail Address
E-mail Communication Report
Default User Name/Password (Send)
Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message
Program/Change/Delete Subject
Scanner Recall Interval Time
Number of Scanner Recalls
Auto Specify Sender Name

5-216

August, 2006

USER TOOLS

System Settings Map (Continued)
Administrator Tools
User Authentication Management
Administrator Authentication Management
Program/Change Administrator
Key Counter Management
External Charge Unit Management
Extended Security
Extend Change Unit Management
Enhanced Extend Change Unit Management
Display Print Counter
Display/Clear/Print Counter Per User
Address Book Management
Address Book: Program/Change/Delete/Delete Group
Address Book: Edit Title
Address Book: Change Order
Print Address Book: Destination List
Address Book: Select Title
Auto Delete File
Delete All Files
Program/Change/Delete LDAP Server
Use LDAP Server
AOF (Always ON)
Service Test Call

5.11.3 MAINTENANCE
Key press: [User Tools]> "Maintenance"
Maintenance Map
Auto Color Calibration
Color Registration

5-217

USER TOOLS

August, 2006

5.11.4 COPIER/DOCUMENT SERVER FEATURES
Key press: [User Tools]> "Copier/Document Server Features"
Copier/Document Server Features Map
General Features
Auto Paper Select Priority
Paper Display
Original Type Display
Original Type Priority
Original Photo Type Priority
Auto Tray Switching
Duplex Mode Priority
Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode
Original Orientation in Duplex Mode
Max. Copy Quantity
Change Initial Mode
Tone: Original Remains
Job End Call
Copy Function Key: F1
Copy Function Key: F2
Copy Function Key: F3
Copy Function Key: F4
Copy Function Key: F5
Document Server Storage Key: F1
Document Server Storage Key: F2
Document Server Storage Key: F3
Document Server Storage Key: F4
Document Server Storage Key: F5
Document Server Print Key 1: F1
Document Server Print Key 1: F2
Document Server Print Key 1: F3
Document Server Print Key 1: F4
Document Server Print Key 1: F5
Reproduction Ratio
Shortcut R/E 1
Shortcut R/E 2
Shortcut R/E 3
Enlarge 1
Enlarge 2
Enlarge 3
Enlarge 4
Enlarge 5
Priority Setting: Enlarge
Reduce 1
Reduce 2
Reduce 3
Reduce 4
Reduce 5
Reduce 6
Priority Setting: Reduce
Ratio for Create Margin
R/E Priority

5-218

August, 2006

USER TOOLS

Copier/Document Server Features Map (Continued)
Edit
Front Margin: Left/Right
Back Margin: Left/Right
Front Margin: Top/Bottom
Back Margin: Top/Bottom
1-Sided Æ 2-Sided Auto Margin: T to T
1-Sided Æ 2-Sided Auto Margin: T to B
Erase Border Width
Erase Original Shadow in Combine
Erase Center Width
Copy Back Cover
Front Cover Copy in Combine
Orientation: Booklet, Magazine
Copy Order in Combine
Image Repeat Separation Line
Double Copies Separation Line
Separation Line in Combine
Stamp
Background Numbering
Size
Density
Stamp Color
Preset Stamp
Stamp Priority
Stamp Language
Stamp Position: COPY
Stamp Position: URGENT
Stamp Position: PRIORITY
Stamp Position: For Your Info.
Stamp Position: PRELIMINARY
Stamp Position: For Internal Use Only
Stamp Position: CONFIDENTIAL
Stamp Position: DRAFT
Stamp Format: COPY
Stamp Format: URGENT
Stamp Format: PRIORITY
Stamp Format: For Your Info.
Stamp Format: PRELIMINARY
Stamp Format: For Internal Use Only
Stamp Format: CONFIDENTIAL
Stamp Format: DRAFT

5-219

USER TOOLS

August, 2006

Copier/Document Server Features Map (Continued)
User Stamp
Program/Delete Stamp
Stamp Position: 1
Stamp Position: 2
Stamp Position: 3
Stamp Position: 4
Stamp Format: 1
Stamp Format: 2
Stamp Format: 3
Stamp Format: 4
Stamp Color: 1
Stamp Color: 2
Stamp Color: 3
Stamp Color: 4
Date Stamp
Format
Font
Stamp Position
Stamp Setting
Size
Superimpose
Stamp Color
Page Numbering
Stamp Format
Font
Size
Duplex Back Page Stamping Position
Page Numbering in Combine
Stamp on Designating Slip Sheet
Stamp Position P1, P2
Stamp Position: 1/5 …
Stamp Position: -1-, -2- …
Stamp Position: P.1, P.2 …
Stamp Position: 1, 2, …
Stamp Position: 1-1, 1-2 …
Superimpose
Input/Output
Switch to Batch
SADF Auto Reset
Rotate Sort: Auto Paper Continue
Auto Sort
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart
Select Stapling Position (Top Left)
Select Stapling Position (Bottom Left)
Select Stapling Position (Top Right)
Select Stapling Position (Bottom Right)
Select Stack Position
Select Punch Type
Letterhead Setting
Eject Copy Face Up/Down in Glass Mode
Eject Copy Face Up/Down in Bypass Mode

5-220

August, 2006

USER TOOLS

5.11.5 PRINTER FEATURES
Key press: [User Tools]> "Printer Features"
Printer Features Map
List/Test Print
Multiple Lists
Config. Page
Error Log
Menu List
PCL Config./Font Page
PS Config./Font Page
PDF Config./Font Page
Hex Dump
Maintenance
4 Color Graphic Mode
System
Print Error Report
Auto Continue
Memory Overflow
Job Separation
Memory Usage
Duplex
Copies
Blank Page Print
B&W Page Detect
Spool Image
Reserved Job Waiting
Printer Language
Sub Paper Size
Page Size
Letterhead Setting
Bypass Tray Setting Priority
Edge to Edge Printing
Default Printer Language
Host Intervace
I/O Buffer
I/O Timeout

5-221

USER TOOLS

August, 2006

Printer Features Map (Continued)
PCL Menu
Orientation
Form Lines
Font Source
Font Number
Point Size
Font Pitch
Symbol Set
Courier Font
Extend A4 Width
Append CR to LF
Resolution
PS Menu
Data Format
Resolution
Color Setting
Color Profile

5-222

August, 2006

USER TOOLS

5.11.6 SCANNER FEATURES
Key press: [User Tools]> "Scanner Features"
Scanner Features Map
Scan Settings
Default Scan Settings
Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass
Wait Time for Next Orignals: SADF
Original Setting
Switch to Batch
Mixed Original Sizes Priority
Change Initial Mode
Background Density of ADS (Full Color)
Destination List Settings
Destination List Display Priority 2
Select Title
Send Settings
TWAIN Standby Time
File Type Priority
Compression (Black & White)
Compression (Gray Scale/Full Color)
Print & Delete Scanner Journal
Print Scanner Journal
Max. E-Mail Size
Divide & Send E-Mail
E-Mail Information Language
Store File Priority
Administrator Tools

5-223

USER TOOLS

August, 2006

5.11.7 INQUIRY
Key press: [User Tools]> "Inquiry"
Consumables

Machine Maintenance/Repair

Toner 

Telephone No.

Toner 

Serial No. of Machine

Toner 
Toner 

Sales Representative
Telephone No.
Print Inquiry List

To print the Inquiry List, press "Print Inquiry List", read the displayed message then
press [Start] on the operation panel.

5.11.8 COUNTER
Total Counter
Print Counter List

5-224

August, 2006

GENERAL OVERVIEW

6. DETAILS
6.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW
6.1.1 MAIN MACHINE
2

3

4

5

6

7

1

8
9

33

10
11

32
Y

31

C

M

K

12
13

30

14

29

15
28
16
27
26

18
19

25

20
21

24
23
B132V102.WMF

22

6-1

Detailed
Descriptions

17

GENERAL OVERVIEW

August, 2006

1. Transport Belt (ARDF)

18. Feed Sensor (Paper Tray)

2. Entrance Roller (ARDF)

19. Feed Roller (Paper Tray)

3. Feed Belt (ARDF)

20. Separation Roller (Paper Tray)

4. Separation Roller (ARDF)

21. Pick-up Roller (Paper Tray)

5. Pick-up Roller (ARDF)

22. Paper Size Switch (Tray 3)

6. Upper Inverter Roller (ARDF)

23. Universal Tray (Tray 3)

7. Lower Inverter Roller (ARDF)

24. Universal Tray (Tray 2)

8. Development Roller

25. Paper Size Switch (Tray 2)

9. Charge Roller

26. Tandem Tray (Tray 1)

10. PCU

27. Inverter Exit Roller

11. OPC Drum

28. Inverter Entrance Roller

12. Image Transfer Roller

29. Pressure Roller

13. ITB Unit

30. Hot Roller

14. Transfer Belt

31. Exit Roller

15. Registration Roller

32. Heating Roller

16. PTR Roller

33. ARDF Exposure Glass

17. Grip Roller

6-2

August, 2006

GENERAL OVERVIEW

6.1.2 PAPER PATH: COVER INTERPOSER TRAY

3

2
1

4
9
5
8

B132V104.WMF

7

6

2. Cover Sheet Path
3. Original Path
4. Bypass Tray
5. LCT Feed
6. Vertical Transport Path
7. Duplex Transport Path
8. Finisher Lower Tray (Booklet)
9. Finisher Upper Tray 1 (Shift)

6-3

Detailed
Descriptions

1. Proof Tray

GENERAL OVERVIEW

August, 2006

6.1.3 PAPER PATH: 9-BIN MAILBOX
7

1

8
9

6

5

2

3

4
B132V105.WMF

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
7.
8.
9.

Original Paper Path
Bypass Feed
LCT Feed
Vertical Transport Path
Junction Gate
(Paper goes up to the mailbox or out to the
finisher’s proof tray)
Selected Trays
Turn Gates
Mailbox Paper Path
Junction Gates
(Two junction gates control the paper path inside
the finisher)

6-4

August, 2006

GENERAL OVERVIEW

6.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

21
20
19
18

11
12

17

13
16

14
B132V106.WMF

12. Fusing Exit Motor
13. Duplex Transport Motor
14. Paper Feed Motor 3
15. Paper Feed Motor 2
16. Lower Relay Motor
17. Paper Feed Motor 1
18. Bypass Feed Motor
19. Registration Motor
20. PTR Motor
21. ITB Drive Motor

1. Scanner Motor
2. PCU Motor – K
3. Drum Motor – K
4. PCU Motor – M
5. Drum Motor – M
6. PCU Motor – C
7. Drum Motor – C
8. PCU Motor – Y
9. Drum Motor – Y
10. ITB Lift Motor
11. Duplex Inverter Motor

6-5

Detailed
Descriptions

15

BOARDS

August, 2006

6.2 BOARDS
6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM

B132D981.WMF

6-6

August, 2006

BOARDS

6.2.2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
BICU (Base Engine and Image Control Unit)
The BICU is the main control board and controls these functions:
• Engine sequence control (all sensors, motors, fusing temperature control circuits)
• Image processing control (on the IPU)
• Scanning control
• GW controller interface
• Peripheral timing control
GW Controller and Mother Board
The controller board controls all the options. It contains the GW architecture ASICs,
and connects to the BICU and PCI interface. During copying, the mother board
stores compressed data, and controls these items:
• Operation panel interface
• Storage of SC information in NVRAM.
The controller board also has SD card sockets. These are used for these functions:
• Download firmware for updates
• Copy optional firmware onto one SD card. (Copied from Slot 3 to Slot 2.)
• Hold the firmware for the printer or printer/scanner option. (The firmware is
stored on the SD card in Slot 2.)
• Hold the machine system firmware (this is on the SD card in Slot 1, which must
never be removed.

The I/O control board controls these items:
• Input and output ports for all sensors, motors, solenoids
• All drivers
• High voltage power supply
• Analog input signals. Converts analog data to 10-bit digital data. The CPU on the
BICU reads this data.

6-7

Detailed
Descriptions

IOB (I/O Control Board)

BOARDS

August, 2006

SBU (Sensor Board Unit)
The SBU does the following:
• Takes the analog signals from the CCD and converts them to digital.
• Sends serial data to the BICU.
• Sends signals from the main CPU to the SIOB, to control the scanner
components.
SIOB (Scanner I/O Board)
This board controls all the sensors in the scanner unit and the scanner motor. The
CPU controls this board through the interfaces on the SBU and the BICU.
LDB (Laser Diode Drive Board)
This board contains the driver for the laser diodes.
DRB (Drive Board)
This board contains the circuits for the stepper motors that drive the printer engine,
and distributes electrical power to all the other PCBs.
HDD (Hard Disk Drives)
This board stores all the temporary files for job processing and all permanent files
for the document server.
PSU (Power Supply Unit)
Supplies DC to the machine, and contains the AC supply that controls the power to
the fusing lamps.

6-8

August, 2006

BOARDS

6.2.3 CONTROLLER BOX VENTILATION

[B]

[C]

[A]

[A]: HDD cooling fan
[B]: Controller box exhaust fan 1
[C]: Controller box exhaust fan 2
Three fans cool the PCBs in the controller box.
The HDD cooling fan [A] pulls cool air into the bottom of the PCB box.
The controller box exhaust fans [B] and [C] pull the hot air out of the top of the
controller box.

6-9

Detailed
Descriptions

B132D968.WMF

COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW

August, 2006

6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW

Y

M

C

K

B132D001.WMF

This machine has four PCUs in a straight line: Y, M, C, K.
• The ITB lift motor raises and lowers the ITB unit.
• The ITB lift motor raises ITB for full-color copying. The drum of every PCU
contacts the ITB below.
• The ITB lift motor lowers the ITB for black-and-white copying. Only the black
PCU (on the far right) contacts the ITB below.
• During black-and-white copying, the drums of the other PCUs (Y, M, C) are
separated from the ITB and do not rotate. This reduces wear on the moving parts
of these PCUs during black-and-white copying.
• If a job contains black-and-white pages and full-color pages, the action of the ITB
is controlled by SP5880 001. See section 6.12.3

6-10

August, 2006

COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW

4

2

1

3

8
5

K
7

6

9

10
B132D984.WMF

1. DRUM CHARGE
In the dark, the charge roller gives a negative charge to the drum. The charge
stays on the surface of the drum because the OPC layer has a high electrical
resistance in the dark.
2. EXPOSURE
A xenon lamp exposes the original. Light reflected from the original passes to
the CCD, where it is converted into an analog data signal. This data is
converted to a digital signal, processed, and stored in the memory. At the time
of printing, the data is taken from the memory and sent to the laser diode. For
multi-copy runs, the original is scanned once and stored in a temporary file on
the hard disk.
3. LASER EXPOSURE
The processed image data from the scanned original is taken from the hard
disk and two laser beams send it to the drum. The lasers write an electrostatic
latent image on the drum surface. The amount of charge remaining as a latent
image on the drum depends on the laser beam pulse duration and the laser
power (controlled by the BICU).

6-11

Detailed
Descriptions

Here is a general description of the copy process in the black PCU. These
mechanisms are identical in each PCU (Y, C, M, K).

COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW

August, 2006

4. DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR
The drum potential sensor in each PCU detects the drum potential. Changes in
conditions near the drum (heat, humidity, drum condition) change the drum
potential. The machine uses the output from this sensor to adjust the voltages
that are used during auto process control.
5. DEVELOPMENT
The magnetic developer brush of the development roller contacts the latent
image on the drum surface. Toner particles are electrostatically attracted to the
areas of the drum surface where the laser reduced the negative charge on the
drum.
6. IMAGE TRANSFER
The developed toner images are transferred from the drums to the ITB. Rollers
inside the ITB apply a high positive charge to the reverse side of the ITB. This
positive charge pulls the toner particles from the drum to the ITB.
7. QUENCHING
The light from the quenching lamp electrically neutralizes the charge on the
drum surface. After cleaning and quenching, the drum surface is ready for the
next cycle.
8. DRUM CLEANING
First, a soft cleaning brush roller removes toner from the drum. Next, a
lubrication roller, with a lubricant bar behind it, cleans the drum. Finally, an
opposing cleaning blade removes remaining toner.
9. ID SENSORS, MUSIC SENSORS
Two ID sensors and three MUSIC sensors are in a straight line across the ITB.
At fixed intervals, the laser in each PCU writes an ID sensor pattern on each
drum surface (Y, M, C, K). These patterns are transferred to the ITB. The two
ID sensors above the ITB (one for black and one for Y, M, C) measure the light
reflected from each of the four patterns and output this data (Vsp) to the CPU.
This Vsp is used for toner supply control. The MUSIC sensors read a different
set of patterns to make adjustments to the laser main scan start timing, angle of
the 3rd mirror, and the drum drive speeds. The MUSIC sensors ensure that the
alignment of the images on the ITB is correct.
10. PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION
A strong negative charge applied to the PTR idle roller repulses the image from
the ITB onto the paper. A paper discharge plate neutralizes the charge on the
paper and ITB. Then the curvature of the feed path allows the paper to
separate from the ITB.

6-12

August, 2006

ARDF

6.4 ARDF
6.4.1 OVERVIEW
2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

10 11

12

13

27
26

14

24
23

22

21
20

19 18

17 16

B132D119.WMF

15

15. Lower Inverter Sensor
16. Upper Junction Gate
17. Exit Roller
18. Lower Inverter Roller
19. Exit Sensor
20. Lower Junction Gate
21. Scanning Exit Roller
22. ARDF Transport Belt
23. ARDF Exposure Glass
24. Registration Sensor
25. Scanning Entrance Roller
26. Interval Sensor
27. 1st Transport Roller

1. Original Width Sensors (x 5)
2. Entrance Roller
3. Skew Correction Sensor
4. Separation Sensor
5. Separation Roller
6. Feed Belt
7. Pick-up Roller
8. Upper inverter sensor
9. Original Length Sensor 1
10. Original Length Sensor 2
11. Original Length Sensor 3
12. Original Tray
13. Exit Tray
14. Upper Inverter Roller

Original Separation and Feed. The standard FRR system for paper separation
and feed. (
 Handling Paper> Handling Originals> Document Feed> FRR with
Feed Belt
Original Size Detection. The combinations of 3 original length sensors on the
original tray and 5 original width sensors in the paper feed path are used to detect
the size of originals. (
 Handling Paper> Handling Originals> Original Size
Detection> Dynamic Original Size Detection)
Duplex Scanning. Two junction gates (16, 20) control the direction of the original
in the paper path for duplex scanning. (
6.4.10)

6-13

Detailed
Descriptions

25

ARDF

August, 2006

6.4.2 ARDF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Components View 1: Sensors
3

4

2

5

6

1

7









8



B5
A4
LG

14

13
10

12
11

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

9
B132D106.WMF

Original Width Sensors ( to )
Original Width Sensor 1 (for B6 SEF)
Interval Sensor
Skew Correction Sensor
Separation Sensor
Feed Cover Open Sensor
Bottom Plate Position Sensor

6-14

8. Original Length Sensors (x3)
9. Original Set Sensor
10. Upper Inverter Sensor
11. Lower Inverter Sensor
12. Exit Sensor
13. Bottom Plate HP Sensor
14. Registration Sensor

August, 2006

ARDF

Components View 2: Motors, Sensors, Other
2
1

4

3

5
6
7

8
9
10
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

B132D107.WMF

7. ARDF Position Sensor
8. APS Start Sensor
9. Upper Inverter Motor
10. ARDF Transport Motor
11. Lower Inverter Motor

Pick-up Motor
Pick-up Roller HP Sensor
Exit Motor
Feed Motor
Bottom Plate Lift Motor
ARDF Main Board

6-15

Detailed
Descriptions

11

ARDF

August, 2006

ARDF Components View 3: Drive Motors
2

3

1

4

5

7

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

6

Pick-up Motor
Exit Motor
Bottom Plate Lift Motor
Upper Inverter Motor
ARDF Transport Motor
Lower Inverter Motor
Feed Motor

6-16

B132D108.WMF

August, 2006

ARDF

6.4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

[A]
[C]
[D]

[F]

[B]

[G]
[H]

[E]

B132D110.WMF

The original size is detected by 5 width sensors and 3 length sensors.
B5 A4 LGL

R

318 mm (12.5")
291 mm (11.5")

Detailed
Descriptions

When the leading edge of the
paper passes the skew
correction sensor, the CPU
reads the outputs from the
original width sensors.
[A]: Original width sensor 1
[B]: Original width sensor 2
[C]: Original width sensor 3
[D]: Original width sensor 4
[E]: Original width sensor 5
[F]: B5 length sensor
[G]: A4 length sensor
[H]: LG length sensor

240 mm (9.5")

1

138 mm (5.4")

2

191.5 mm (7.5")

3

230 mm (9.1")

4

263.5 mm (10.4")

5

288 mm (11.3")

B132D971.WMF

6-17

ARDF

August, 2006

Original Size Detection Table
Size (W x L)
A3 SEF (297 x 420 mm)
B4 SEF (257 x 364 mm)
A4 SEF (210 x 297 mm)
A4 LEF (297 x 210 mm)
B5 SEF (182 x 257 mm)
B5 LEF (257 x 182 mm)
A5 SEF (148 x 210 mm) *1
A5 LEF (210 x 148 mm)
B6 SEF (128 x 182 mm) *1
B6 LEF (182 x 128 mm) *1
11" x 17" SEF (DLT)
11" x 15" SEF
10" x 14" SEF
81/2" x 14" SEF (LG)
81/2" x 13" SEF (F4)
81/4" x 13" SEF
8" x 13" SEF (F)
81/2" x 11" SEF (LT)
11" x 81/2" LEF (LT)
71/4" x 101/2" SEF
101/2" x 71/4" LEF
8" x 10" SEF (F)
51/2" x 81/2" SEF (HLT)
81/2" x 51/2" LEF (HLT)
8 K SEF (267 x 390 mm)
16 K SEF (195 x 267 mm)
16 K LEF (267 x 195 mm)
1:
0:
:
x:






	

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1

Original Width
Sensors
2
3
4
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1

5
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
–
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Original Length
Sensors
B5
A4
LG
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0

Region
NA

x


x
x
x
x
x
x







()
()







–

x
x
x

EU












x

x

x


	
x
x
x
–
x



	

Actuated (ON)
Not actuated (OFF)
Yes. Size detected.
No. Size not detected.
NA: Detected paper size is set with Bit 0 of SP 6016
NA: Detected paper size is set with Bit 1 of SP 6016
NA: Detected paper size is set with Bit 2 of SP 6016
NA: Detected paper size is set with Bit 3 of SP 6016. (): This size can be selected with
SP 5126 (the default for this SP is F4).
EU: Detected paper size is set with Bit 0 of SP 6016
EU: Detected paper size is set with Bit 1 of SP 6016
EU: Detected paper size is set with Bit 2 of SP 6016

6-18

August, 2006

ARDF

Changing the Default Selection with SP6016 and SP5126
Some original sizes are almost the same. The machine cannot detect a difference
between these sizes. Because of this, you can force the machine to detect one size
or the other size with SP6016.
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Select SP6016.
On the screen you will see an 8-digit binary setting bar: 00000000
The default settings are all "0".
In North America, the size recognition is changed with Bits 3 to 0 (other bits
are ignored):
Bit7

Bit6

Bit5

Bit4

Bit3

Bit2

Bit1

Bit0

---

---

---

---

0 = LG SEF

0 = LT SEF

0 = LT LEF

0 = DLT SEF

---

---

---

---

1 = SP 5126
(default =
F4 SEF)

1 = 8" x 10" SEF

1 = EXE LEF

1 = 11" x 15" SEF

In Europe, the size recognition is changed with Bits 2 to 0 (other bits are
ignored):
Bit6

Bit5

Bit4

Bit3

Bit2

Bit1

Bit0

---

---

---

---

---

0 = LT LEF

0 = LT SEF

0 = DLT SEF

---

---

---

---

---

1 = 16 Kai LEF

1 = 16 Kai SEF

1 = 8 Kai SEF

Detailed
Descriptions

Bit7

6-19

ARDF

August, 2006

6.4.4 PICK-UP ROLLER
[B]

[A]

[C]

[D]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:

B132D109.WMF

Pick-up roller lift motor
Cam
Pick-up roller release lever
Pick-up roller
Bottom plate position sensor

When there are no originals, the pick-up roller [D] stays up at the home position.
When an original is put on the tray:
• Original set sensor Æ On Æ Pick-up motor [A] Æ On.
• Cam [B] releases lever [C] then pick-up roller [D] drops onto the paper.
• Pick-up roller [D] feeds an original Æ feed belt and separation roller.
The pick-up roller lowers when:
• An original is put on the tray.
• The trailing edge of the original passes the skew correction sensor, if there are
originals in the ARDF entrance for scanning.
The pick-up roller rises when:
• The leading edge of the original passes the skew correction sensor
• Power is turned on
• The feed cover is opened
• An original jam occurs

6-20

August, 2006

ARDF

6.4.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT

[B]

[A]

[C]

B132D111.WMF

When an original is placed on the original tray:
• Original set sensor Æ On Æ pick-up roller drops
• Bottom plate position sensor ([E] on the previous page) Æ Off.
• Motor [A] lifts lever [B] and raises the bottom plate.
When the bottom plate reaches the correct feed height for feeding:
• Bottom plate position sensor ([E] on the previous page) Æ On Æ Stops bottom
plate lift.
• Motor [A] stops
During original feeding:
• Pick-up roller descends as the top of the stack lowers
• The descended pick-up roller Æ bottom plate position sensor ([E] on the previous
page) Æ Off
• Bottom plate lift motor [A] Æ On Æ motor [A] raises the stack to the correct
height for feeding
• Bottom plate position sensor ([E] on the previous page) Æ On
• Bottom plate lift motor [A] stops

6-21

Detailed
Descriptions

[A]: Bottom plate lift motor
[B]: Lift lever
[C]: Bottom plate HP sensor

ARDF

August, 2006

6.4.6 ORIGINAL FEED AND SEPARATION
[D]

[B]

[C]

[A]

B132D120.WMF

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:

Pick-up roller
Feed belt
Separation roller
Separation sensor

Because of this mechanism, the machine does not feed more than one sheet at a
time.
(
 Handling Paper> Handling Originals> Document Feed> FRR with Feed Belt)

6-22

August, 2006

ARDF

6.4.7 ORIGINAL FEED AND SKEW CORRECTION
[A]
[B]

[C]
[D]

[E]
B132D120.WMF

Skew correction sensor
Entrance roller
Feed roller (Transport Roller 1)
Interval sensor
Scanning entrance roller

After pick-up and separation:
• Skew correction sensor [A] detects the leading edge of the original
• The detection signal stops the entrance roller [B] for a set number of pulses to
buckle the original and correct skew.
If the originals are small (B6, A5, or HLT) (because small sizes skew easily), and
during duplex scanning for all original sizes:
• Interval sensor [D] detects the leading edge of the original
• Scanning entrance roller [E] is stopped for the set number of pulses to buckle the
original and correct skew.
Important
• The roller [E] stops when B6, A5, or HLT paper is fed.
• However, you can use SP6020 to make the roller stop for other paper sizes to
correct skew at this position.

6-23

Detailed
Descriptions

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:

ARDF

August, 2006

6.4.8 SLIP DETECTION
[A]

[B]

B132D120.WMF

[A]: Separation sensor
[B]: Skew correction sensor
These two sensors are used to measure the amount of slippage and to correct for
this.
The machine measures the time it takes for the original to get to the separation
sensor [A] after the [Start] key is pressed.
• If the original arrives at the correct time, it feeds normally.
• If the original arrives late, the machine enters the slip mode.
In the slip mode, the machine measures the time for the leading edge of the
original to move from the separation sensor to the skew correction sensor [B].
The machine uses this time to adjust the length of time that the entrance roller
stays off to correct skew. This stops feed for enough time for the original to be in
the correct position for feeding.

6-24

August, 2006

ARDF

6.4.9 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT (ONE-SIDED)

[E]

[C]

[D]

[B]

[A]

[F]
[G]
[K]
[H]
B132D120.WMF

[I]

[J]

The pick-up roller [A] feeds the original to the feed belt [B] and separation roller [C].

The feed motor increases the speed of 1st transport roller [F] to feed the paper
faster and reduce the interval between the original that was just fed and the original
ahead that is now being scanned.
When the interval sensor [G] detects the leading edge of the original approaching
the scanning entrance roller [H], it slows the rotation of the scanning entrance roller
[H]. To this point the rate of feed is high. The interval sensor slows the paper so it
does not collide with the trailing edge of the paper ahead of it in the paper path.
Next, the transport belt [I] pulls the original across the ARDF scanning glass.
The 2nd transport roller [J] feeds the paper to the exit rollers [K]. The exit rollers
feed to paper out onto the original exit table.

6-25

Detailed
Descriptions

When the skew correction sensor [D] detects the leading edge of the original, it
stops the feed motor for a set number of pulses to stop the entrance roller [E]. This
buckles the leading edge of the original against the entrance roller to correct skew.

ARDF

August, 2006

6.4.10 DUPLEX SCANNING
3


1



[A]

B132D112.WMF

1. Side 1 of original  is scanned, original 
 waits. Upper junction gate [A] opens
and sends  to the upper inverter rollers.
3



1

[C]


[B]

B132D113.WMF

2. Original  feeds past the upper inverter rollers [B] and stops. Upper inverter
junction gate [C] closes. The upper inverter rollers reverse and feed the original
 into the feed path.
3






1

[D]
B132D114.WMF

3. Original  feeds to rollers [D], where skew is corrected. (
6.4.7) Skew is
corrected only for small paper sizes (B6, A5, HLT). Other sizes can be selected
for this function with SP6020.

6-26

August, 2006

ARDF



3

1
2

[A]



[B]

B132D115.WMF

4. Side 2 of original  is scanned, lower inverter junction gate [A] opens and
directs  to lower inverter table [B]. Original  feeds.
[D]



[C]

[F]

[E]

B132D117.WMF



Detailed
Descriptions

5. Steps 1, 2, 3 repeat for original . Lower inverter junction gate [C] and upper
inverter junction gate [D] remain closed. Lower inverter rollers [E] feed original
 to exit rollers [F]


B132D118.WMF

6. The exit rollers feed original  to the original exit tray. Original  is corrected
for skew and is scanned. Skew is corrected only for small paper sizes (B6, A5,
HLT). Other sizes can be selected for this function with SP6020.

6-27

ARDF

August, 2006

6.4.11 ARDF JAM DETECTION
Jam Detection Sensor Layout
[C]
[B]

[A]

[D]

[F]

[E]

[G]

B132D119.WMF

P1

P2

P3
B132D972.WMF

Seven sensors detect jams in the original path at P1, P2, and P3 (These notations
appear on the operation panel display when a jam occurs):
[A]: Upper Inverter Sensor
[B]: Separation Sensor
[C]: Skew Correction Sensor
[D]: Interval Sensor
[E]: Registration Sensor
[F]: Exit Sensor
[G]: Lower Inverter Sensor

6-28

August, 2006

ARDF

Jam Detection Table
The following notations are used in the table below:
• Orig. late: Leading edge not detected. The original fails to arrive at the sensor
site at the correct time.
• Orig. lag: Trailing edge not detected. The original fails to leave the sensor site at
the correct time.
Area
P1

P2

P3

Sensor
Separation sensor
Skew correction sensor
Interval sensor
Upper inverter sensor
Registration sensor
Skew correction sensor
Interval sensor
Upper inverter sensor
Exit sensor
Lower inverter sensor
Registration sensor
Exit sensor
Lower inverter sensor

Jam Type
Orig. late
Orig. late
Orig. late
Orig. late
Orig. late
Orig. lag
Orig. lag
Orig. lag
Orig. late
Orig. late
Orig. lag
Orig. lag
Orig. lag

Detailed
Descriptions

If a problem occurs in the ARDF, either SC701 or SC705 will be issued. For details
on SCs, please refer to Section 4 of this manual.

6-29

SCANNER UNIT

August, 2006

6.5 SCANNER UNIT
6.5.1 OVERVIEW
2

1

5

4

3

6

7

8

9
10

16

15

14

13

12

11
B132D101A.WMF

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

9. Scanner Motor
10. Scanner Fan Motor - Right
11. Lens Block
12. Polygon Motor
13. 1st Scanner
14. APS1 (Org. Width Sensors 1, 2)
15. 2nd Scanner
16. Scanner Fan Motor - Left

Scanner HP Sensor
ARDF Exposure Glass
White Plate
Exposure Lamp (Xenon)
Exposure Glass
APS2 (Org. Length Sensors 1, 2)
APS3 (Org. Length Sensor 3)
SBU (CCD: 600 dpi)

The light reflected from the original is sent to the CCD:
1st Mirror> 2nd Mirror> 3rd Mirror> Lens Block> CCD
The lens block consists of the scanner lens and SBU (CCD).
The CCD converts the light that was reflected from the original and converts it to
three color analog signals (R, G, B).
The SBU converts the analog signals to digital signals, then sends the digital
signals to the BICU.
NOTE: The lens block is replaced as a unit and requires no adjustment in the field.

6-30

August, 2006

SCANNER UNIT

6.5.2 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

[D]
[A]

[E]

[B]
[C]

The machine uses five sensors on three APS boards to detect the size of the
original on the exposure glass.
[A]: APS1. (W1 and W2) detects original width
[B]: APS2. (L1 and L2) detects original length
[C]: APS3. (L3) detects original length
[D]: ARDF position sensor. Detects whether the ARDF is open or closed.
[E]: APS start sensor. Triggers automatic paper size detection.

6-31

Detailed
Descriptions

B132D102.WMF

SCANNER UNIT

August, 2006

L1 L2

L3

W1
W2

B132D973.WMF

The table shows the sensor output for each paper size.
If an original is on the exposure glass, you can check the sensor output with
SP4301 (APS Confirm).
A4/A3

LT/DLT

L3

L2

L1

W1

W2

A3
B4
A4 SEF
—
A4 LEF
B5 SEF
B5 LEF
A5 SEF
A5 LEF

11" x 17"
—
81/2" x 11"
8½ x 14"
11" x 81/2"
—
—
51/2" x 81/2"
81/2" x 51/2"

1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0

1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0

1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0

SP4301
Display
000 11111
000 11110
000 01100
000 11100
000 00011
000 00100
000 00010
000 00000
000 00000

1: On (Paper Detected), 0: Off (Paper Not Detected)

NOTE: If the original is small (such as A5-LEF), all sensors are off and the
machine shows that the original size cannot be detected. However, you
can force the machine to detect A5/HLT in this situation if you adjust
SP4303 (there are settings for A5/HLT SEF and A5/HLT LEF).

6-32

August, 2006

SCANNER UNIT

Detection Timing
When the power is on, the APS sensors are always active, but the CPU checks
their signals only after the platen is lowered.
Book Mode
In the Book mode (when the ARDF is open), the CPU checks the APS sensors and
determines the original size after [Start] is pressed.
ARDF Mode
The CPU checks the APS sensors after the platen is lowered.
Bypass Mode

Detailed
Descriptions

The APS sensors are ignored when copy paper is fed from the bypass tray, but the
bypass tray can handle a variety of sizes and orientations. To accomplish this:
• The machine always assumes short-edge feed for paper on the bypass tray.
• Width is measured by a sensor inside the bypass tray.
• The bypass tray cannot measure length, so the registration sensor determines
the length of the paper using clock pulses.

6-33

SCANNER UNIT

August, 2006

6.5.3 SCANNER DRIVE
[D]
[C]

[B]

[A]
B132D103.WMF

[A]: Scanner motor (a dc stepper motor) drives the 1st and 2nd scanner with wires
and pulleys.
[B]: 1st scanner
[C]: 2nd scanner
[D]: Scanner HP sensor. Stops and reverses the scanner motor when the scanner
reaches the home position. The machine measures distance from home
position by counting scanner motor pulses.

6-34

August, 2006

SCANNER UNIT

6.5.4 SCANNER UNIT FANS AND ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
[A]

[B]

[C]

[A]: Scanner cooling fan (front)
[B]: Scanner cooling fan (rear)
[C]: Scanner exhaust fan
Condensation on the mirrors can cause:
• Running, smearing and image borders
• Printing completely black or gray pages
Fans
• The scanner cooling fans (front, rear) pull cool air into the scanner unit.
• The scanner exhaust fan expels hot air from the scanner unit

6-35

Detailed
Descriptions

B132D104.WMF

SCANNER UNIT

August, 2006

6.5.5 DUST DETECTION
Overview
When an original is put on the original feed table of the ARDF, the ARDF exposure
glass is checked for dust.
The dust check is done before the first original is scanned. This is done only once
at the beginning of a job. The check is not done for originals added during a long
scanning job.
The ARDF transport belt turns with no paper fed across the ARDF scanning glass.
The surface (white) of the ARDF transport belt is scanned. The IPU checks if dust
is present.
• If dust is detected, the scanner carriage position for ARDF scanning is moved by
0.7 mm.
• The next time that dust is detected, the scanning position is moved again by 0.7
mm.
• The third time that dust is detected, the scanning position is not moved. An alert
message is displayed but the job does not stop.
• Then, at the start of the next job, the procedure starts again, but the scanner
does not go back to home position.
Start

Do dust detection?

NO
SP4020 001 OFF

YES
SP4020 001 ON

Dust Check Processing

Dust detected?

NO

YES
YES
3 turnovers?
NO
Alert
display

Scan Position Movement
Processing

No alert
display

Copying
B132D974.WMF

6-36

August, 2006

SCANNER UNIT

What Happens if Dust is Detected?
If dust is detected, the position where the scanner stops below the ARDF exposure
glass to scan the original is moved by 0.7 mm.
The scanning position can be shifted two times in 0.7 mm increments, towards the
scanning reference point at the upper left corner of the exposure glass.
Scale

Exposure Glass

0.7 mm

a

0.7 mm

b

c
34 mm
B132D975.WMF

Home Position

a

From Book Read Position:

34 mm

Shift Direction:

aÆbÆc

Then, at the start of the next job, the scanner stays at position (c). But if dust is
detected at (c), the scanner goes back to home position (a) and the dust detection
process starts again.

6-37

Detailed
Descriptions

If dust is detected after the scanner has been moved two times, an alert is
displayed, but the job does not stop.

SCANNER UNIT

August, 2006

How is the Dust Detected?
To detect dust on the ARDF exposure glass, the ARDF transport belt turns and the
CCD scans this belt.
The ARDF transport belt has four grooves cut across it in the main scan direction.
These grooves are recessed. Because of this, they are not easily contaminated
with dust, and they are used as reference points during dust detection. Another
part of the belt could have dust on it, and give an incorrect reference.
NOTE: The illustration shows the belt if it were a perfect circle.
4 mm

34 mm

Belt Circumference: 136 mm

B132D976.WMF

To detect dust, the belt turns one time. The IPU (through the CCD) checks for dust.
If a dark spot is detected for 96% of this rotation, the IPU determines that dust is
present on the ARDF exposure glass.

6-38

August, 2006

SCANNER UNIT

The Effects of SP Mode Settings on Dust Detection
The settings of some SP codes control how dust detection is done.
• SP4020 001. Switches the dust warning on and off (default: off). When this SP is
on, a warning is issued if the check detects dust on the ARDF exposure glass or
the white plate above the exposure glass. Always clean the ARDF exposure
glass and white plate before turning this SP on.
• SP4020 002. Adjusts the sensitivity of the check. If you see black streaks in
copies when no warning has been issued, raise the setting to increase the level
of sensitivity. If warnings are issued when you see no black streaks in copies,
lower the setting.
• SP4020 003. Sets the level for vertical line correction caused by dust. A high
setting can eliminate unwanted vertical lines caused by dust but it can also thin
vertical lines of the original.
• SP7852. Displays the count for the number of times the machine has detected
dust on the ARDF exposure glass at the beginning of copy jobs. This SP
operates only after SP4020 001 has been turned on.

Detailed
Descriptions

NOTE: Dust that triggers a warning could be removed from the glass by the
originals in the feed path. If the dust is removed by passing originals, this is
not detected and the warning remains on.

6-39

IMAGE PROCESSING

August, 2006

6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING
6.6.1 OVERVIEW
: ASIC Chips

SBU
CCD

Lamp, M otor, Sensor

VSBCNT

Analog

Scanner Control

AD Conversion
LVDS drv.

ARDF

Operation
Panel

IPU (BICU)
XDF_FGATE

LVDS rsv.

UART
LIBRA

CPU Bus

Line Correction

UBIC

PC Card

Around CPU

ORION
DSP

CPU

ASIC:
GATEX

Flash

ASIC:
SGATEX

SRAM

Image Separation
Original Selection
ACS
ACC

ARIES

RGB Image Processing :
DFID
- Shading Compensation
- Scan Line Correction
- Dot Correction
- Pre-RGB γ Correction
- Picture Element Correction
-

RGB Scanner γ Correction
Filtering
ADS
UCR
Saturation/Hue Correction
GW
Controller

AD Micon
YCM K Image Processing
GASTM

IOB

Sync.
Serial

Controller
Options

PCI I/F

I2 C

Color Correction
Main Scan M ag.
Sub Scan Interval Correction
Digitization
Mask
Compression

Decompression
Printer Gamma Correction
Gradation Processing
Exposure I/F

64-bit
PCI Bus

Fusing
ID Sensors
Temp/Humidity

ID Chip

VGAVD1

VGAVD2

B132D982.WMF

6-40

August, 2006

IMAGE PROCESSING

6.6.2 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT)
SBU
The VPU (Video Processor Unit) does the following functions:
• Black level correction
• White level correction
• Gradation calibration
• ADS control (Background Density) (*ADS: Auto image Density Selection)
• Creating the SBU test pattern

Operation Summary
The signals from the 3-line CCD, one line for each color (R, G, B) and 2 analog
signals per line (ODD, EVEN), are sampled by the ASIC and converted to digital
signals in the 10-bit A/D converter. This is the first phase of processing the data
scanned from the original.

Storing Operation Settings
The controller stores the SBU settings. These values must be restored after the
lens block is replaced:
Sub Scan Mag
Sub Scan Reg
Main Scan Reg

Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment
Sub Scan Registration Adjustment
Main Scan Registration Adjustment

Also, before lens block replacement, enter the SP mode and note the settings of
SP4800 001 to 003 (ARDF density adjustments for R, G, B). After lens block
replacement, do some copy samples with the ARDF, then check the copies. If the
copies have background, change SP4800 001 to 003 to their previous settings, or
adjust until the background is acceptable. These SP codes are also used to adjust
the ARDF scanning density, if the scanning densities of the ARDF and the platen
mode are not the same.

SBU Test Mode
There are two SP codes to create a test pattern which can be used as a diagnostic
tool to troubleshoot problems in the SBU:
• SP4907 001 SBU Pattern - Test Pattern
• SP4907 002 SBU Pattern - Select Fixed Pattern
To print the pattern:
• Select the pattern to print.
• Touch "Copy Window" then press the Start key twice.

6-41

Detailed
Descriptions

SP4008 001
SP4010 001
SP4011 001

IMAGE PROCESSING

August, 2006

6.6.3 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT)
The IPU does the following:
• Controls the scanner
• Processes the image signals from the SBU and sends them over the PCI bus to
the controller memory
• Receives the image processing signals sent over the PCI bus from the controller
memory, processes them, then outputs them to the VGAVD.
• Outputs the control signals for the ARDF
• Controls the relay of power and signals
Image processing, ADS (Auto image Density Selection) correction, and line width
correction are done on the BICU board for all the digital data sent from the SBU.
Finally, the processed data is sent to the printer as digital signals (2 bits/pixel).

6-42

August, 2006

LASER UNIT

6.7 LASER UNIT
6.7.1 OVERVIEW
4

5

C
Y

3

7

6

8
Y

9

K

10

11

M
M

C

K

12

2
13
1
14

15
Y

18

C

Y

M

C

K

M

K
16

17

B132D002.WMF

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

10. LSDB (M Rear)
11. LSDB (K Rear)
12. Dual-Layer fθ Lens (M, K)
13. WTL Lens (M)
14. WTL Lens (K)
15. LSDB (K Front)
16. LSDB (M Front)
17. LSDB (C Rear)
18. LSDB (Y Rear)

WTL Lens (C)
WTL Lens (Y)
Dual-Layer fθ Lens (C, Y)
LSDB (Y Front)
LSDB (C Front)
LD Unit (C)
LD Unit (Y)
LD Unit (K)
LD Unit (M)

LD Units

4, One two-beam LD unit for each color (C, M,
Y, K)

Line Scan Mechanism

Main scanning with polygon mirror

Image Position Correction

MUSIC sensor patterns read from ITB with
MUSIC sensors

6-43

Detailed
Descriptions

NOTE: LSDB = Laser Synchronization Detection Board

LASER UNIT

August, 2006

6.7.2 LD UNIT
There is an LD unit for each color, and each LD unit uses a two-beam system. A
photo diode (PD) in each LD unit detects the light emitted from the LD unit. The
output of the PD is fed back to the LD control board. The LD control board uses
this information to control the amount of light to make sure that it remains at the
correct level.

Dual Beam Writing
In each LD unit, two beams move across the drum in the main scan direction.
The use of two beams does the following:
• Lets the machine print quickly
• Reduces the number of turns of the polygon mirror for a page, which gives the
motor a longer life.
• Reduces the amount of noise from the motor.
The beam pitch is fixed at 600 dpi and is not adjustable.

LD Safety Switches
To ensure the safety of customers and service engineers, two switches inside the
cover prevent the laser beams from switching on accidentally. When the front door
is open, the 5V line connecting each LD driver on the LD control board is
disconnected.
C

+5 V

N

3

2

5

-

A

1

C

N

2

-

1

4

(

Y

)

C

N

2

-

1

5

(

Y

)

LD Driver IC (Y)

BICU

PSU

C

C

C

N

1

2

3

-

3

C

N

1

2

3

-

4

N

3

0

0

-

N

3

2

5

-

A

2

3

L

D

1

(

Y

)

L

D

2

(

Y

)

LDB (Y)
C

N

3

0

0

-

4

C

N

3

2

5

-

B

1
C

N

2

-

1

4

(

C

)

C

N

2

-

1

5

(

C

)

LD Driver IC (C)

Front Door Switch Unit
(Upper Left)
SW 3 SW 2

C

C

N

3

0

1

-

1

C

N

3

0

1

-

2

N

3

2

5

-

B

2

L

D

1

(

C

)

L

D

2

(

C

)

LDB (C)

C

N

C

3

N

2

3

4

2

-

4

A

-

1

A

C

N

2

-

1

4

(

M

)

C

N

2

-

1

5

(

M

)

LD Driver IC (M)

2

L

D

1

(

M

)

L

D

2

(

M

)

LDB (M)

C

N

3

2

4

-

B

1

C

N

2

-

1

4

(

K

)

LD Driver IC (K)

PSU: Power Supply Unit
BICU: Base-engine Image-processing Control Unit
LDB: LD Drive Board (included in the LD Unit)

C

C

N

3

2

4

-

B

N

2

-

1

5

(

K

)

2

L

D

1

(

K

)

L

D

2

(

K

)

LDB (K)
B132D900.WMF

6-44

August, 2006

LASER UNIT

6.7.3 OPTICAL PATHS
2

1

3

4

5

7

6






M

C

Y

K
8

11

10

9

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

WTL Lens (Y)
WTL Lens (C)
Dual-layer fθ Lens (C, Y)
Polygon Motor
Dual-layer fθ Lens (M, K)
WTL Lens (M)

7. WTL Lens (K)
8. Dust-shield Glass
9. Dust-shield Glass
10. Dust-shield Glass
11. Dust-shield Glass

6-45

Detailed
Descriptions

B132D001.WMF

LASER UNIT

August, 2006

Optical Path
All four latent images (C, M, Y, K) are written at approximately the same time. The
laser diode turn-on times for each color are timed with drum rotation and paper
feed. Refer to the illustration on the previous page. The optical path for each color
is as follows:
Cylindrical lens (laser beam correction in each LD unit)
↓
Polygon mirror (main scanning line)
↓
Fθ lens (dot position correction)
↓
1st Mirror
↓
WTL lens (surface distortion correction)
↓
2nd Mirror
↓
3rd Mirror
↓
Dust-shield Glass
↓
Drum

(Not shown)
4
3

2


10

Each fθ lens has two layers. Because of this, it can correct both beams from the LD
units. Each WTL lens corrects for image distortion.
The polygon mirror turns at high speed. The laser beams are reflected from the
polygon mirror to a pair of mirrors (upper and lower), then to one more mirror and
out to the drum through the dust-shield glass. The polygon mirror has six faces.
The polygon motor rotates at 33,307 rpm for full-color and for black-and-white
copying.
Important: Because of its high rotation speed, the mirror continues to turn for
about 3 minutes after the machine is turned off. Allow enough time for the mirror to
stop before you start to remove the polygon motor.

6-46

August, 2006

LASER UNIT

6.7.4 IMAGE POSITION CORRECTION (MUSIC)
What does MUSIC do?
MUSIC is the Mirror Unit for Skew and Interval Correction. Three MUSIC sensors
above the ITB read three MUSIC sensor patterns made by the machine on the ITB.
The machine uses the results to adjust:
• The machine adjusts the start timing for the laser at the start of the main scan.
This adjusts the main scan. If skew is detected in the main scan direction, the
machine adjusts the angles of the 3rd mirrors (C, M, and Y only).
• The speed of the drum motors to correct the intervals between the patterns. This
adjusts the sub scan.
If the vertical alignment of the patterns is not correct, or if the intervals are not
correct, this causes color registration errors.
The MUSIC adjustment is done for each color (Y, M, C and K).
Normally, MUSIC executes automatically:
• Immediately after the machine is turned on or returns from an energy save mode.
• At the start of a job, if the temperature in the laser exposure unit changed since
the end of the job by the amount set with SP2153 012 (Default: 1.5 ºC)
• If the cover is open for longer than the time set with SP2153 015 (Default: 8 min.)
• After process control (enable/disable with SP2153 002).
• Every 100 pages during a long color job (you can change the interval with
SP2153 010) if the temperature in the laser exposure unit has changed since the
end of the most recent MUSIC adjustment by the amount set with SP2153 012
(Default: 1.5oC)
• Forced MUSIC (manually by the user or a technician)
• User Tools – Maintenance – Color Registration
• SP 2111 001
Important
• Immediately after the machine is turned on, MUSIC requires time to complete
processing. But you can do a black-and-white job immediately.
• If a job is started before the MUSIC process has completed, a message ("Now
Self Checking") will appear on the operation panel display.
• The job will not be done until the MUSIC process is finished. Wait for MUSIC to
complete.
NOTE: MUSIC: Mirror Unit Skew Interval Correction

6-47

Detailed
Descriptions

When is MUSIC done?

LASER UNIT

August, 2006

Location of the MUSIC Sensors
[B]

[A]

B132D301.WMF

The sensors [A] are below the ITB.
A roller [B] opposite the sensors pushes the transfer belt against the sensors. This
makes sure that the sensors read the patterns accurately.

6-48

August, 2006

LASER UNIT

How is MUSIC Done?

[A]

[A]: Rear MUSIC sensor
[B]: Center MUSIC sensor
[C]: Front MUSIC sensor
[D]: Main scan MUSIC patterns
[E]: Sub scan MUSIC patterns
The MUSIC sensors [A], [B], and [C] read the
MUSIC patterns from the ITB.

[B]

[C]

M

[D]

C

Y

The main scan MUSIC sensor pattern [D]
consists of patches for each color (M, C, Y)
beside the black (K) color patch.
The sub scan MUSIC sensor pattern [E] consists
of patches for each color (M, C, Y) above a black
(K) patch.

[E]
Y

K

M

K

C

K

B132D969.WMF

This diagram shows a close-up view of the mainscan test pattern.
Vertical Position
in Test Pattern

The CMY patterns are vertical (shown in grey in
the diagram), but the K pattern overlaps the CMY
patterns as shown.
The MUSIC sensor response is measured. The
output is the lowest when the K pattern fully
overlaps the color pattern (the dotted lines in the
diagram cross at this point). This is the “Actual”
position as shown in the diagram. But there is a
“Target” value in the machine’s software (an
example is shown on the diagram; this is not the
real target, it is just an example to explain the
process). The machine compares the “Actual” and
“Target” values, and adjusts the laser timing in
response to the results of this comparison.
Skew is also measured in the main scan direction
using the patterns at the left and right of the ITB. If
skew is detected, the machine adjusts the angle of
the 3rd mirrors.

6-49

Target
Actual

Sensor Output
B132D969A.WMF

Detailed
Descriptions

K is the reference, and the positions of CMY are
adjusted with reference to the K pattern.

LASER UNIT

August, 2006

Vertical Position in
the Test Pattern

Target
Actual

Sensor Output
B132D970A.WMF

This diagram shows a close-up view of the sub-scan test pattern.
K is the reference, and the positions of CMY are adjusted with reference to the K
pattern.
The CMY patterns are at constant intervals, but the K pattern overlaps the CMY
patterns as shown.
The MUSIC sensor response is measured. The output is the lowest when the K
pattern fully overlaps the color pattern (the dotted lines in the diagram cross at this
point). This is the “Actual” position as shown in the diagram. But there is a “Target”
value in the machine’s software (an example is shown on the diagram; this is not
the real target, it is just an example to explain the process). The machine compares
the “Actual” and “Target” values, and adjusts the main motor speed in response to
the results of this comparison.

6-50

August, 2006

LASER UNIT

3rd Mirror Position Adjustment
[2]

[5]
[3]

[1]







[4]

B132D003.WMF

Each color Yellow [1], Cyan [2], Magenta [3] has a mirror. The machine uses the
mirror motors () to adjust the position of each mirror to correct color
registration errors on the ITB in the main scan direction. Color registration errors
occur if all four color-toner images do not cover each other exactly on the ITB.
The 3rd mirror for black (K) does not have an adjustment motor. (The position of
black toner on the ITB is used as a reference point to adjust the positions of the
other colors.)

Exposure Unit Temperature Sensors
There are temperature sensors [5] near the fθ lenses to monitor the temperature
inside the exposure unit.
The fθ lenses are made of plastic. The magnification ratio of plastic lenses may
vary slightly with temperature. The CPU uses the feedback from these temperature
sensors to adjust the mirror positions during MUSIC calibration. This corrects color
registration errors on the ITB.

6-51

Detailed
Descriptions

[1]: 3rd Mirror (Y)
[2]: 3rd Mirror (C)
[3]: 3rd Mirror (M)
[4]: Mirror Adjustment Motors ()
[5]: Temperature Sensors

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU)

August, 2006

6.8 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU)
6.8.1 OVERVIEW OF TANDEM PCU
4

5

6

7

1

9

8

3
2



Y





M

C



K

10

B132D001.WMF

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Laser Unit
Development Unit (Y)
Drum (Y)
Development Unit (C)
Drum (C)

6. Development Unit (M)
7. Drum (M)
8. Development Unit (K)
9. Drum (K)
10. ITB

Four PCUs     (Y, C, M, K) are arranged in tandem. There is one PCU for
each color. The image that is developed on the drum transfers to the ITB (10). All
four colors transfer during the same rotation of the ITB. Then the color images
transfer to the paper. The color images are transferred from the PCUs to the ITB in
the order Y, C, M, K.
Each PCU contains identical components. The only difference is that the K PCU
has a temperature sensor that is used to correct process control parameters
(charge roller voltage, for example).

6-52

August, 2006

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU)

6.8.2 AROUND THE DRUM

4

3

2

5
6

7

1

8

9

10
14

11

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

12

Developer Cartridge
Development Roller
Potential Sensor
Charge Roller Cleaning Roller
Charge Roller
Cleaning Blade
Lubricant Bar

B132D977.WMF

8. Lubricant Brush Roller
9. Cleaning Brush Roller
10. Waste Toner Collection Coil
11. Quenching Lamp (QL)
12. Drum
13. TD Sensor
14. Developer Augers

Drum dimensions:

φ60 mm

Drum drive:

Drum motor. An independent drum motor for each PCU
drives the drum for each color.

Drum charge:

Charge roller method with charge cleaning roller

Drum cleaning:

Cleaning brush roller and cleaning blade mounted
opposite to direction of drum rotation

Waste toner:

Transported away from the drum by a waste toner
collection coil.

NOTE: The drum unit does not contain an ID sensor.

6-53

Detailed
Descriptions

13

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU)

August, 2006

Drum Drive

[A]

[B]

[C]

B132D204.WMF

[A]: Drum motor
[B]: Drum motor coupling
[C]: Drum shaft
Each PCU (Y, C, M, K) has an independent drum motor.
The drum motor [A] rotates the drum motor coupling [B] and drum motor shaft [C].
• During black-and-white copying and printing, only the black drum (K) rotates. The
other color drums (Y, M, C) do not rotate.
• The drum shaft must be locked with a special tool attached to the front end of the
shaft in order to remove the drum motor. The special tool is attached to the
bottom of the PCU stand. For more, please refer to Section "3. Removal and
Replacement".

6-54

August, 2006

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU)

Drum Charge
[C]

[B]
[A]

B132D204.WMF

The charge roller cleaning roller [C] touches the charge roller and cleans it.
• A gear on the rear of the drum shaft turns the charge roller in the opposite
direction of the drum.
• The gap between drum and charge roller is 0.05 mm.
• The charge roller is the same length as the drum to ensure an even charge along
the entire length of the drum.
• The charge roller receives its charge from the charge roller power pack. The
power pack is connected at a receptacle attached to the rear end of the charge
roller shaft.

6-55

Detailed
Descriptions

[A]: Drum
[B]: Charge roller
[C]: Charge roller cleaning roller
The charger roller [B] above the drum [A] charges the drum.

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU)

August, 2006

Drum Cleaning

[C]

[E]

[D]
[F]

[A]

[B]
B132D203.WMF

Each drum unit has a cleaning brush roller [A] and a cleaning blade [F] to remove
toner from the drum after image transfer.
[A]: Cleaning brush roller
Turns counter-clockwise, brushes unused toner from the drum surface, and
pushes the toner into a well where it is caught by the waste toner collection
coil
[B]: Waste toner collection coil
The rotation of this spiral coil moves the waste toner away from the drum
toward the waste toner port
[C]: Waste toner port
The toner is moved away from this port to the waste toner bottle. (
6.10)
[D]: Lubricant brush roller
To improve the efficiency of cleaning, the rotating lubricant brush roller
lubricates the surface of the drum.
[E]: Lubricant bar
Provides the lubricant transferred to the drum surface by the lubricant brush
roller.
[F]: Cleaning blade
A counter blade in direct contact with the drum surface, gently scrapes away
remaining toner from the surface of the drum after the lubricant brush roller
cleaning and lubrication.

6-56

August, 2006

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU)

Drum Ventilation

[F]
[C]



[E]






[A]
[D]

[B]
[G]

B132D214.WMF

A Peltier unit [A] on the right side of the copier dries air before it is sent through a
common duct [B] to the PCUs. This prevents condensation around the drums.

The Peltier cooling fan [E] pulls air into the machine. The air passes through the
cold side where the moisture condenses and drains into a small reservoir [F]. The
four PCU fan motors , , ,  (Y, M, C, K). pull the dried air from the common
duct into the PCUs to keep dry the air around the drums.
The moisture is absorbed by an absorbent pad (not shown) below the Peltier unit.
The hot laminated plates on the right side of the Peltier unit evaporate the moisture.
The Peltier circulation fan [G] sends the hot air out of the machine.

6-57

Detailed
Descriptions

The polarity of this Peltier is set so the left side [C] is the cold side and the right [D]
is the hot side.

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU)

August, 2006

The temperature/humidity sensor at the black PCU detects the relative humidity
inside the machine.
When the relative humidity stays at 60% for 10 minutes:
1) The Peltier unit turns ON.
2) The Peltier circulation fan and PCU fans turn on together and run at halfspeed.
3) The Peltier cooling fan turns on and runs at full speed.
The operation changes when the relative humidity goes below 50% for 5 minutes:
1) The Peltier unit turns OFF.
2) The Peltier circulation fan turns OFF.
When the humidity stays below 50% for another 5 minutes:
1) The Peltier cooling fan turns OFF.
2) The PCU fans turn OFF.

6-58

August, 2006

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU)

Ozone Ventilation

[B]
[A]
B132D962.WMF

Detailed
Descriptions

The ozone fan [A] pulls air from around the drums through the ozone filter [B] and
then expels the filtered air from the machine.

6-59

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU)

August, 2006

6.8.3 DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Overview

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:

B132D211.WMF

Developer Cartridge
Developer Augers
Development Roller
TD Sensor

Development method:

Dual-component development

Agitation:

Two augers

Development unit drive:

PCU motor, 1 motor for each PCU (Y, C, M, K)

Development bias:

Development bias power pack

6-60

August, 2006

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU)

Development Unit Operation
[D]
[A]
[C]

[E]

[B]

[A]: Developer Cartridge
[B]: Developer Augers
[C]: Development Roller
[D]: Doctor Blade
[E]: Development Bias Terminal
Each PCU is supplied by a separate developer cartridge [A] (Y, C, M, K). When a
new developer cartridge is installed and the tape is removed, all the developer falls
into the development unit, across the full width of the development unit. Toner is
supplied through a small square port at the front of the development unit (see
section 6.9).
Two development augers [B] cross-mix the toner from the toner cartridge with the
developer and then send the mixture to the development roller.
The magnetic development roller [C] pulls the developer-toner mixture onto its
surface as it rotates.
Near the top of the development unit, the doctor blade [D] cuts and smoothes the
developer-toner mixture to the correct thickness.
The bias from the development bias power pack is applied to the development bias
terminal [E] that is attached to the shaft of the development roller

6-61

Detailed
Descriptions

B132D212.WMF

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU)

August, 2006

Development, PCU Drive
[A]
[B]
[E]
[F]

[C]
[D]
B132D213.WMF

[A]: PCU Motor
A motor and timing belt behind each PCU drives all the rollers in the PCU.
(The drum is driven by the drum motor.)
[B]: Timing Belt
[C]: Developer Augers
[D]: Development Roller
[E]: Cleaning Brush Roller
[F]: Lubricant Brush Roller

6-62

August, 2006

TONER SUPPLY

6.9 TONER SUPPLY
6.9.1 OVERVIEW
Each PCU has a toner supply unit.
4

3

1
2

5
6

7
B132D906.BMP

5. Sub Hopper
6. Toner Supply Clutch
7. Toner End Sensor

Soft Toner Cartridge (STC)
Flexible Tubing
Toner Pump
Toner Pump Clutch

Toner supply:

Sub hopper, toner supply clutch

Toner transport:

Toner pump, toner pump clutch

Toner container

Soft Toner Cartridge (STC), sides collapse
automatically as toner is pumped from each cartridge

Toner level detection:

Toner end sensor

Toner cartridge ID:

Built-in chip identifies color and type of cartridge, to
prevent installation at incorrect location.

6-63

Detailed
Descriptions

1.
2.
3.
4.

TONER SUPPLY

August, 2006

1. Soft Toner Cartridge (STC)
Four toner cartridges are set in the toner hopper. They are inserted left to right
in this order Y, C, M and K.
2. Flexible Tubing
A flexible tube connects the toner cartridge to the toner pump.
3. Toner Pump
Consists of a rotor mounted on a drive shaft that creates a vacuum between
itself and the toner cartridge. The rotor is idle until it is engaged by the toner
pump clutch.
4. Toner Pump Clutch
The toner pump clutch is driven by the toner hopper motor. This clutch engages
the drive shaft and rotor of the toner pump when more toner is needed.
5. Sub Hopper
Receives the toner from the toner pump. The sub hopper functions as a
reserve tank for the development unit.
6. Toner Supply Clutch
The toner supply clutch is driven by the toner hopper motor. Engages the toner
supply auger in the sub hopper to send the toner from the sub hopper into the
development unit below.
7. Toner End Sensor
This sensor is on the sub hopper, and detects toner end. The number of pages
that can be printed is based on page count or pixel count, whichever limit is
exceeded first.
8. Toner Hopper Motor
The toner hopper motor is on the right side of the toner hopper. This motor
drives all the toner pump clutches and toner supply clutches in each toner
hopper (Y, M, C, K).

6-64

August, 2006

TONER SUPPLY

6.9.2 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM
[C]

[E]
[A]
[J]

[F]

[B]
[D]
[I]
B132D216.WMF

[G]
[K]

[H]

B132D217.WMF

The toner pump [A] pulls toner into the sub hopper [B] from the toner cartridge [C],
through the flexible tube [D]. The toner hopper motor controls the mechanism,
through the toner pump clutch [E].
The toner pump supplies toner to the sub hopper. If the toner end sensor [K] output
detects "No Toner", the toner pump switches on for 2 seconds, and pumps toner
from the toner cartridge to the sub hopper.
Sub hopper Æ development unit
Based on the toner coverage of the previous print (detected by the TD sensor) the
machine determines how much toner was consumed, compares it with the amount
remaining, and then switches on the toner supply clutch for the correct time to
increase the amount of toner in the development unit.
The toner supply augers [F] move toner from the hopper [G] into the development
unit [H]. The toner hopper motor [I] controls the mechanism through the toner
supply clutch [J].

6-65

Detailed
Descriptions

Toner cartridge Æ sub hopper

TONER SUPPLY

August, 2006

6.9.3 TONER CARTRIDGE

[C]

[D]

[B]

[A]
B132D219.WMF

Collapsible Sides

[A]: Shutter pin
[B]: Toner supply port plug
[C]: Toner supply port
[D]: ID chip
Each toner cartridge is installed in a bin of the toner hopper.

B132D218.WMF

When the bin door is closed, a shutter pin [A] forces open a plug [B]. This opens
the toner supply port [C] and toner can flow from the cartridge.
When the cartridge is removed from the machine, the plug [B] moves to its original
position and covers the toner supply port of the toner cartridge. This prevents toner
leakage from the bottom of the toner cartridge (STC) when the toner cartridge
(STC) is removed.
The sides of a toner cartridge gradually collapse as toner is pulled out of the
cartridge by the toner pump.
The built-in ID chip [D] near the toner supply port holds information about the color
and type of toner, the location of the factory where it was produced, and other
information.

6-66

August, 2006

TONER SUPPLY

[A]

B132I108A.WMF

A toner cartridge (STC) must be set with its color ID label [A] facing out.

Important
• At elevations 1,000 meters (3,280 ft.) above sea level, the toner cartridge packs
may expand due to the difference in air pressure, preventing them from being
installed in their bins.
• After approximately 24 hours, the cartridges should shrink to normal size.
• If the customer cannot wait for the toner cartridges (STCs) to collapse naturally,
the STC Air Release Kit is available as a service part. For more, contact your
technical supervisor.

6-67

Detailed
Descriptions

If a toner cartridge (STC) is inserted with its label facing into the machine, this will
cause a "Toner Cartridge Setting Error".

TONER SUPPLY

August, 2006

6.9.4 TONER END SENSORS

[D]

[C]
[B]
[A]

B132D217A.WMF

The toner end sensors are below the sub hoppers for each color
[A]: K (Black)
[B]: M (Magenta)
[C]: C (Cyan)
[D]: Y (Yellow)
The toner end sensor monitors the amount of toner in the sub hopper and issues
the near-end alert when toner runs low in the sub hopper.

Toner near-end
When a toner end sensor detects no toner in a sub hopper, the toner supply clutch
in that sub hopper engages and operates the toner pump for 2 seconds to supply
more toner from the toner cartridge (STC) to the sub hopper.
If the toner end sensor cannot detect toner in a sub hopper after 10 consecutive
readings, this triggers the toner near-end alert (this number of readings can be
adjusted with SP3411 007-008).

6-68

August, 2006

TONER SUPPLY

Toner end
After a toner near-end alert is output, the number of pages that can be printed until
toner end is determined by the amount of toner that remains in the sub hopper.
After the toner near-end alert has been issued, the toner end alert is issued by one
of two counters, whichever goes over the limit first:
• Page count. After the near-end alert, the number of pages that can be printed is
based on page count regardless of coverage. The default is 600 (this can be
adjusted with SP3411 003 to 004). Up to 10 A4/DLT pages at 5% coverage can
be printed (SP 3411 001-002).
• Pixel count (coverage). The number of pages that can be printed is determined
by a calculation of the coverage (30 A4/DLT pages at 100% coverage). The
default setting can be adjusted with SP3411 005 to 006.
Important
• The number of pages that actually print after the toner near-end alert is issued
varies, of course, with paper size and amount of coverage on each page.

Toner End Recovery

Detailed
Descriptions

After a new cartridge is installed, the machine supplies toner from the new
cartridge to the sub hopper. If the toner end sensor detects that toner was supplied,
the machine goes out of the toner end condition.

6-69

WASTE TONER COLLECTION

August, 2006

6.10 WASTE TONER COLLECTION
6.10.1 WASTE TONER PATH
[B]


[A]



[C]







[D]

[E]

[F]
B132D215.WMF

[A]: Waste Toner Collection Coils
 PCU (Y)
 PCU (C)
 PCU (M)
 PCU (K)
 ITB Unit
 PTR Unit
[B]: Horizontal Waste Toner Transport Coil
[C]: Vertical Waste Toner Transport Coil
[D]: Diagonal Waste Toner Transport Coil
[E]: Waste Toner Bottle Transport Coil
[F]: Waste Toner Bottle Distribution Coil

6-70

WASTE TONER COLLECTION

[A]: Waste Toner Collection Coils
Six waste toner collection coils (1 for each PCU and 1 each for the ITB and
transfer roller) transport waste toner away from these components after
cleaning. The PCU motors drive coils  to . The PTR motor drives coils 
and .
 PCU (Y)
 PCU (C)
 PCU (M)
 PCU (K)
 ITB Unit
 PTR Unit
[B]: Horizontal Waste Toner Transport Coil
Driven by the PTR motor, this transports waste toner from the PCU waste
toner collection coils to the vertical waste toner transport coil.
[C]: Vertical Waste Toner Transport Coil
Driven by a parallel vertical shaft connected to the waste toner bottle transport
motor, this transports waste toner from the horizontal waste toner collection
coil to the central collection point above the waste toner bottle.
[D]: Diagonal Waste Toner Transport Coil
Driven by the PTR motor, this transports waste toner from the ITB unit and
PTR unit waste toner collection coils to the central collection point above the
waste toner bottle.
[E]: Waste Toner Bottle Transport Coil
Driven by the waste toner bottle transport motor, this transports waste toner
from the central collection point to entrance of the waste toner bottle.
[F]: Waste Toner Bottle Distribution Coil
This coil at the top of the waste toner bottle is driven by the waste toner
distribution motor. The coil distributes the waste toner evenly across the
length of the waste toner bottle.

6-71

Detailed
Descriptions

August, 2006

WASTE TONER COLLECTION

August, 2006

6.10.2 WASTE TONER UNIT MOTORS
[D]
[A]
[C]

[B]

[E]

B132D220.WMF

[A]: Waste Toner Transport Motor
Drives the waste toner bottle transport coil [C] and the vertical waste toner
transport coil [D].
[B]: Waste Toner Distribution Motor
Drives the waste toner bottle distribution coil [E]. This motor does not
constantly turn.

6-72

August, 2006

WASTE TONER COLLECTION

6.10.3 WASTE TONER COLLECTION UNIT SENSORS

[A]
[C]

[B]

Three sensors in the waste toner monitor the operation of waste toner collection
and trigger an alert on the operation panel or issue an SC code.
[A]: Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor
[B]: Waste Toner Bottle Near-Full Sensor
[C]: Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor

Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor
This sensor [A] detects the position of the waste toner bottle, and checks if it is set
correctly. When the waste toner bottle is set in the machine, the bottle pushes the
feeler of this sensor away from the sensor and turns the sensor on.
The machine issues SC487 if the waste toner bottle is not installed or if it is not
installed correctly.

6-73

Detailed
Descriptions

B132D221.WMF

WASTE TONER COLLECTION

August, 2006

Waste Toner Bottle Near-Full Sensor
When the level of the waste toner rises high enough:
• The pressure of the top of the stack of waste toner pushes a piece of silicone
rubber, then the film pushes a feeler into the gap of the sensor [B].
• The blocked sensor signals the machine that the waste toner bottle is nearly full.
• The machine issues a near-full alert and switches off the waste toner distribution
motor.

Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor
Monitors the level of the waste toner in the waste toner bottle. Signals an alert
when the pressure of the waste toner releases the bottle full sensor [C].
After the alert is issued, the machine can print up to 100 additional copies. After
100 copies, the machine issues SC484.

Waste Toner Lock Sensor
This sensor is located on the PTR motor bracket. It detects when the waste toner
bottle transport coil locks and stops rotating because of clogged toner in the waste
toner transport path. The machine issues SC488 if there is no change 3 seconds
after the lock occurs.

Waste Toner Transport Motor
If the waste toner transport motor does not turn for 600 ms, the motor control board
sends a motor lock signal to the CPU and the machine issues SC485.

6-74

August 2006

PROCESS CONTROL

6.11 PROCESS CONTROL
6.11.1 OVERVIEW
In this machine, there are two processes.
• Potential control. Adjusts the image creation process (charge, development
bias, and LD power) to achieve the target toner coverage. During potential
control several series of patterns are created at prescribed times. The potential
sensor and ID sensor read these patterns. The readings of these sensors are
used to determine the development capacity (development gamma), and then
adjust the conditions around the drum to reproduce the best possible images.
Potential control also puts the machine in the best possible condition to begin
toner supply control.
• Toner supply control. Detects the amount of toner applied to ID sensor patterns
between pages and adjusts the amount of toner supplied to the development unit
to maintain consistency in the amount of toner.

Detailed
Descriptions

NOTE: MUSIC (Mirror Unit Skew Interval Correction) done to correct the horizontal
and vertical skewing of the print images on the ITB is not part of process
control.

6-75

PROCESS CONTROL

August 2006

6.11.2 COMPONENTS USED DURING PROCESS CONTROL
Potential Sensor

Copier

PCU
Potential
Sensor Probe

Charge Roller

Drawer
Connector

Potential Sensor PP
Max. Output: -1000V

Drum Surface Potential
-900V (Max.)

Development Roller
Range: -350 to -800 V DC
def. = -500V
Transfer Roller
1.5 kV (Normal Use)
5 kV (Transfer)

B132D901.WMF

There is a potential sensor in each PCU above the surface of the drum.
Each potential sensor consists of a probe and small power pack. A drawer
connector connects the probe and the power pack as shown above.
The potential sensor measures the potential of the drum immediately after it is
charged by the charge roller. It also measures a series of patterns (undeveloped
latent images) exposed on the drum by the laser diodes:
• A detector in the center of a very small window measures the strength of the
electrostatic charge on the drum surface. The strengths of the charges vary,
depending on the surface potential of the drum.
• A feedback circuit applies voltage to the probe until the strength of this charge
equals (offsets) the strength of the charge on the drum.

6-76

August 2006

PROCESS CONTROL

ID Sensors
Rear

ITB (Image Transfer Belt)
K




40 mm



40 mm

Y

C

M
Front

150 mm

B132D902.WMF

B132D903.BMP

B132D904.BMP

Black ID Sensor

Color ID Sensor

The black ID sensor is a direct reflection sensor.
The color ID sensor is a combination of a direct reflection sensor and a diffused
reflection sensor. This combination of a direct reflection sensor pair and an
additional diffused reflection sensor achieves more accurate readings for Y, M, C
colors.

6-77

Detailed
Descriptions

There are two ID sensors above the surface of the ITB:
• The black ID sensor 
 (rear) detects the black ID sensor pattern (K).
• The color ID sensor  (front) detects the three color ID sensor patterns (Y, C, M).

PROCESS CONTROL

August 2006

During process control, the creation of the patterns is timed so the Magenta, Cyan
and Yellow patterns are transferred to the ITB at approximately the same time. The
color ID sensor  then reads the color ID sensor patterns in the order M, C, Y.
Note that the K pattern is read by the black ID sensor 
 at approximately the same
time the Cyan pattern is being read.
These ID sensors read the following patterns from the ITB:
• 10-grade patterns (x4) during process control
• 16-grade patterns (x4) during process control gamma correction
• ID sensor patterns (x4) at 10 page (and other intervals) for toner supply control

6-78

August 2006

PROCESS CONTROL

TD Sensor

[A]
B132D905.BMP

There is a TD sensor [A] below the development unit of each PCU.
The TD sensor directly measures the amount of toner in the developer/toner
mixture. Unlike previous machines, this TD sensor is not in direct contact with the
developer/toner mixture.
Vt is the output voltage of the TD sensor. When Vt goes high, toner is added to the
developer to bring Vt back to the Vtref value.

Temperature/Humidity Sensors

Temperature/humidity sensor – PCU K
This sensor is in the black PCU (the last PCU on the right).
The output of this sensor is used to:
• Set the level of the ac charge applied to the charge roller of each PCU
• Set the length of time the agitator in the development unit rotates to mix the
developer and toner.
• Controls the Peltier unit
Bottom temperature/humidity sensor
This sensor is below the waste toner bottle.
The output of this sensor is used to control the amount of current applied to the ITB
and paper transfer roller. It is also used to correct the fusing idling temperature.

6-79

Detailed
Descriptions

Two temperature/humidity sensors are used for process control. One is above the
black PCU, and one is below the waste toner bottle.

PROCESS CONTROL

August 2006

List of Process Control Acronyms
The potential control phase of process control involves many adjustments. Here is
list of acronyms used in the descriptions of process control adjustments.
Acronym
Cdc
Vb
Vb
1
Vd
Vd
1
Vdhome
Vdp
Vk
Vl
Vpl
Vpl
1
Vpp
Vr
Vsg_dif
Vsg
Vsg_reg
Vsp
Vt
Vtcnt

Vtref
1

Description
Charge DC bias
Development charge bias
Development charge bias after Vr (residual potential) adjustment
Drum potential after the drum is charged by the charge roller.
Drum potential after Vr (residual potential) adjustment
The electrical potential of the drum after a fixed dc bias (DC –700V) is applied
by the drum charge roller.
Development potential (Vb – Vpl). This is the ability to attract toner to the drum.
Development start voltage (checks the developer at the beginning of process
control to determine whether it has deteriorated)
Light potential. Development potential of areas on the drum exposed by the
laser diodes. Maximum laser power has been applied to the diodes.
Electrical potential after laser exposure, with 24/63 of maximum laser power
(power is controlled with PWM).
Electrical potential (Vpl) after Vr (residual potential) adjustment
Charge AC bias.
Residual potential
Vsg after checking the bare surface of the ITB by the diffused reflection sensor.
ID sensor output after reading bare surface of the ITB
Vsg after checking the bare surface of the ITB by the direct reflection ID sensor.
ID sensor output from the most recent ID sensor pattern.
TD sensor output at the present time.
Gain value calculated during TD sensor initialization. This is used to adjust the
Vt (TD sensor output). A large gain increases Vt, and a small gain decreases it.
The result of this calculation is also used to calibrate Vt during TD sensor
initialization.
Target output of the TD sensor. The machine always tries to adjust the toner
WT% in the developer to bring Vt closer to Vtref.

Adjustment done for each color Y, M, C, K

6-80

August 2006

PROCESS CONTROL

Important SP Codes Related to Process Control
This table lists the SP codes that are associated with the most important elements
of process control. For more, please refer to Section "5. Service Tables".
SP3501 001
Potential Control
Type Selection
0: Auto
1: Fixed

Exposure
PM (LD power)
Development
Development bias

Range

Target Effect in
Process Control

Cdc
Vpp

SP3576
SP3577

SP2201
SP2202

–700 V
2.2 kV

–450 to –950 V
1.8 to 2.4 kV,
2.2 kHz

Potential control
Prevention of
abnormal images

Ldp

SP3581

SP2211

0

–117 to +127

Potential control

Vb

SP3575

SP2212

–500 V

–300 to –800 V

Potential control

Detailed
Descriptions

Charge
Charge dc bias
Charge ac bias

Initial

6-81

PROCESS CONTROL

August 2006

6.11.3 POTENTIAL CONTROL
When is Potential Control Done?
1. Initial process control self-check. The process control self-check is done
automatically after the machine is turned on, if the pressure roller thermistor
detects that the fusing temperature is below 100°C (adjust this temp with
SP3554 001).
NOTE: The initial process control self-check is not done when the machine is
turned on with the front door open.
2. At the end of every job, if the number of pages since the previous
process control is more than the value of SP3551.
There are separate counters for black-and-white and color pages.
• Black-and-white: After 250 pages (adjust with SP3551 001)
• Color: After 200 pages (adjust with SP3551 002)
Either SP code can be set to "0", which disables this feature.
3. Before ACC (Automatic Color Calibration) The process control self-check is
done after pressing [Execute] on the operation panel to start ACC and just
before the ACC pattern prints. However, this operation can be changed with
SP3501 004:
0
1
2

Process control self-check is not done before the ACC pattern prints.
A partial self-check (only potential control) is done before the ACC pattern prints.
This takes about 24 seconds.
The full process control self-check (potential control and toner density control) is
done before the ACC pattern prints (default). This takes between 24 seconds and
180 seconds.

4. Immediately after initialization of the TD sensor. The process control selfcheck is done automatically every time a TD sensor is initialized.
• Done after SP3801 001-006 is executed (after replacing the developer).
• Done after SP3811 is executed (at machine installation, or after replacing
developer). See section 3.5.7 for details on the SPs to do after you replace a
part.
5. Potential control process control self-check. This is done with SP3820 001.
6. Potential control and toner density adjustment process control self-check.
This is done with SP3820 002. This SP must be done manually when the drum
is replaced without replacing the developer at the same time.

6-82

August 2006

PROCESS CONTROL

What is Done During Potential Control?
Potential Control Process Flow

Detect VdHome

Adjust AC Charge
(Charge Roller)

Pre-Processing
Sensor Check

Relating SC Codes

1

SC436 to 439: Potential Sensor Error :vd

2

SC316 to 319: AC Bias Charge Adjustment Error
SC497: Temperature and Humidity Sensor Error
Agitate Developer

3

SC497: Temperature and Humidity Sensor Error
SC400: ID Sensor Error 1: Calibration
SC418: LED Error during Vsg Adjustment

AdjustVsg
Vsg
Adjust

Create 10-Gradation Pattern Potential Sensor Pattern

SensorReads
ReadsDeveloped
Developed
ID ID
Sensor
Patternon
onthe
theITB
ITB
Pattern

Potential Sensor Reads
Unexposed Pattern on Drum

Calculate Potential

4

Calculate Toner Amount

SC410 to 413: ID Sensor Error 2 to 5: Development Gamma
SC414 to 417: ID Sensor Error 6 to 9: Development Start Voltage

Calculate Development Gamma

Update Toner Supply Control
Parameters (During Copy Interval
Process Control Self-Check)

Calculate Development Potential to Acquire
Targeted Maximum Amount of Toner

Determine Target Toner Amount Based
Using Development Gamma

Refer to Pointer Table
Potential Control
(Toner Application
Control)

Get Target Vd
for Charge Roller

5

Get Target Vb
for Dev. Bias

Lower
Development
Gamma

Get Target Vpl
for Laser Power

Raises the
target setting
of the copy
interval
pattern, and
increases toner
concentration

Adjust for Residual Potential, Calibrate Vr

Vd*

Vb*

Vpl*

*Adjusted for each color (Y, M, C, K)

6

Adjust Vd
Vd
Adjust

7

8

Lowers the
target setting
of the copy
interval
pattern, and
decreaes toner
concentration

SC420 to 423: Potential Sensor Error 1 to 4: Vd Adjustment

Development
Bias DC

SC424 to 427: Potential Sensor Error 5 to 8: Vl Adjustment

Detailed
Descriptions

TD Sensor Output
Calibration

Raise
Development
Gamma

SC432 to 435: Potential Sensor Error 1 to 4: Vr

Adjust
Vpl
Adjust
Vpl

Determine Settings to Create
Image
Drum Charge
DC

-or-

LD Power
(PM)

Vtcnt/Vtref Calibration

Create 16-Gradation Pattern

SensorReads
ReadsPattern
Pattern
ID ID
Sensor

9
Process Control
Gamma Correction

LD Exposure Value Curve
Plotted

SC410 to 413: ID Sensor Error 2 to 5: Development Gamma
SC414 to 417: ID Sensor Error 6 to 9: Development Start Voltage

Change Amount of Toner

Calculate LD Gamma Curve

Update Process Control Gamma Table

ID Sensor Detects

Potential Sensor Detects

TD Sensor Detects

Temperature/Humidity
Sensor Detects

B132D988.WMF

6-83

PROCESS CONTROL

August 2006

First, a check confirms that all the PCU are set correctly.
NOTE: Please keep in mind that all the readings and calculations described below
are done in each of the four PCUs. For simplicity, however, the discussions
are limited to what occurs in a single PCU.




Detect Vdhome

A charge of –700V is applied to the drum. The potential sensor detects the
potential of the drum and checks if the potential sensor, drum, and charge roller are
functioning normally.
If the charge is within the range –700V to –500V, the drum is functioning normally.
Potential Sensor Calibration Errors
SC Codes
SC436~SC439



SP3821 Procon OK?
15~17

For More Details:
See "Process Control Troubleshooting" in
Section "4. Troubleshooting".

Adjust AC Charge

The machine finds the current that is necessary for the optimum AC charge (Vpp).
The optimum charge depends on the ambient temperature and humidity. The
optimum charge for each temperature and humidity range is set with SP2204 (ACC
Charge Correction).
Insufficient charge causes white spotting and too much charge causes toner to film
on the surface of the drum.
This check ensures that the average value of Vpp after 20 samplings is Vpp > 2.8
kV.
AC Charge Errors
SC Codes
SC316~SC319



SP3821 Procon OK?
31~32

For More Details:
See "Process Control Troubleshooting" in
Section "4. Troubleshooting".

Adjust Vsg

Before the gradated patterns are read, the strength of the ID sensor output (LED
PWM) is adjusted to bring the value of Vsg_reg to the specified value.
An abnormal condition is detected when:
• Before Vsg adjustment begins, Vsg_reg < 0.5V
• After Vsg adjustment, Vsg_reg cannot be adjusted to 4.0±0.2V
ID Sensor Errors
SC Codes
SC400, SC418

SP3821 Procon OK?
21~23

For More Details:
See "Process Control Troubleshooting" in
Section "4. Troubleshooting".

6-84

August 2006

PROCESS CONTROL

 Calculate Development Gamma
The laser diodes write a 10-grade potential sensor pattern on each drum. To make
the different densities, the machine changes the PWM duty of the laser diodes.

B132D925.WMF

At this step, the development gamma (development capacity) is measured. The
necessary potentials are calculated. Next, the target values (necessary potentials)
for Vd (charge potential), Vb (development bias), and Vpl (drum potential after
exposure) are retrieved from the Potential Reference Table.
At this time:
• Development gamma must be in the range 0.3 to 6.0 V
• Development start voltage (Vk) must be in the range –150 to 150 V. This
development start voltage is used to indicate whether the developer has
deteriorated. However, this is only a rough measurement that can be affected by
ambient conditions and the condition of other electrical components.
ID Sensor Pattern Detection Errors
SC Codes
SC410~SC413

SP3821 Procon OK?
55~56, 59

SC414~SC417

57~58

Adjust for Residual Potential

The laser unit fires at full power (PM = +127, PWM = 63) to compensate for a
possible high residual potential on the drum. Next, the amount of residual potential
is detected, and the charge is adjusted to achieve the target potential.
The detected Vr must be less than –200V.
Vr (Residual Potential) Errors
SC Codes
SC432~SC435



SP3821 Procon OK?
62

For More Details:
See "Process Control Troubleshooting" in
Section "4. Troubleshooting".

Adjust Vd

This step adjusts Cdc, the charge applied to adjust dc bias target Vd. Vd is the
targeted bias after Vr (residual potential correction).
The targeted potential of Vd
 must be within ±5V.
Vd (Development Bias) Errors
SC Codes
SC420~SC423

SP3821 Procon OK?
63

For More Details:
See "Process Control Troubleshooting" in
Section "4. Troubleshooting".

6-85

Detailed
Descriptions



For More Details:
See "Process Control Troubleshooting" in
Section "4. Troubleshooting".

PROCESS CONTROL



August 2006

Adjust Vpl

The LD power is adjusted in order to get to the target Vpl
 (the Vpl value after
correction for Vr)
After correction for Vr, the value of Vpl
 must be within ±5V.
Vpl (LD Power) Adjust Errors
SC Codes
SC424~SC427



SP3821 Procon OK?
64

For More Details:
See "Process Control Troubleshooting" in
Section "4. Troubleshooting".

Vtref/Vtcnt Calibration

Vtref calibration:

Calibrates Vtref to the value of Vt

Vtcnt calibration:

If Vt is not within the range of 2 to 3 V, Vtcnt is changed to
bring it within this range.

This lets the machine use the results of the process control calculations to get the
correct toner amount.
There is no check for abnormal conditions at this step.

	

Process Control Gamma Correction

The following adjustments are done, based on the development gamma correction,
to achieve the target values (Vd
, Vl
, Vb
)
• To adjust Vd
 (drum bias), the voltage of the charge roller is raised.
• To adjust Vl
 (laser power), the input current of the laser diodes is raised.
• To adjust Vb
 (development bias), the charge on the development roller is
increased.
At this time:
• Development gamma must be in the range 0.3 to 6.0.
• Development start voltage must be in the range –150 to 150 V.
Potential Control Errors
SC Codes
SC410~SC417

For More Details:
See "Process Control Troubleshooting" in Section "4. Troubleshooting".

6-86

August 2006

PROCESS CONTROL

6.11.4 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL
Overview
The toner supply method can be selected with SP3301 001-004.
• 0: Fixed supply mode (used for testing only; do not use this mode except
during some troubleshooting procedures as described in section 4)
• 1: PID (Proportional Integral Differentiation) control mode (default)
This section describes only PID control because only PID control is used in the
field.
PID control uses inputs from pixel count, and from the TD and ID sensors. If the TD
or ID sensor is broken, the machine uses PID control with inputs from pixel count
only.
The following three functions comprise toner supply control for this machine.
1. At the end of every job (at the same time as potential control)
This is done if the number of pages since the previous toner supply control is more
than the number that is set with SP 3551.
After 250 pages (adjustable with SP3551 001)
After 200 pages (adjustable with SP3551 002)

Using the development gamma that was calculated during potential control, the
machine determines the target amount of toner (M/A: Mass per Area):
• Low development gamma: Raises the target image density of the sensor
pattern and increases the toner concentration.
• High development gamma: Lowers the target image density of the sensor
pattern and decreases the toner concentration.

6-87

Detailed
Descriptions

Black-and-white
Full color

PROCESS CONTROL

August 2006

2. Page interval process control (Vsp detection between pages)
This function operates only when SP3042 001 (Vtref correction) is set to "ON"
(default). The Vsp ID sensor pattern is created between the page images on the
ITB (Default: Every 10 pages). This interval can be adjusted with SP3171.
Rear

K

Y

Image Area

Image Area

Image Area

[A]
[B]

M

C

Front

Belt Rotation

B132D919.WMF

[A]: ID Sensor – K
[B]: ID Sensor – Y, C, M
See Section 6.12.9 for the actual locations of the ID sensors.
The toner M/A (Mass per Area) is calculated from this sensor pattern after every
10th page:
Target M/A

K Toner
Y, M, C Toner

Uses the setting of SP3161 001.
Uses the settings of SP3531 002 to 004

Toner supply is based on Vt - Vtref
• If the pattern is too dark (too much toner):
Æ Vtref is increased Æ Toner supply amount decreases
• If the pattern is too light (not enough toner):
Æ Vtref is reduced Æ Toner supply amount increases
Also, the TD sensor detection is done for every page:
• If Vt < Vtref, the toner supply amount is lowered.
• If Vt > Vtref, the toner supply amount is raised.

6-88

August 2006

PROCESS CONTROL

Toner Supply Operation Flow
Page Interval Process Control
(SP3042 001 Vtref Calibration Mode ON)
Create ID Sensor Patterns
Read ID Sensor Patterns
Determine Amount of Toner
Compare Reading with Threshold Range for
Toner Adjustment Between Pages

Toner Supply Control Method:
PID Control

Light

Correct

Dark

Lower Vtref

No Action

Raise Vtref

Start Print Job
GAVD

Get Pixel Count

TD Sensor Reads

dpi

Calculate Image
Coverage

Get Vtref

Calculate Amount of
Toner
Supply Amount
(Pixel Ratio)

Supply Amount
(Vt Ratio)

Result of Toner Amount Calculation

Toner Supply
(Sub Hopper ClutchON)

B132D921.WMF

6-89

Detailed
Descriptions

Toner Supply Time Conversion
(Sub Hopper Clutch ON Time)

IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER

August 2006

6.12 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER
6.12.1 OVERVIEW
2

3

4

1









5

15

6
14

13

12

11

B132D301.WMF

10
1. Image Transfer Rollers
(
 Y, C, M, K)
2. ITB
3. Transfer Power Pack
4. ITB Drive Roller
5. ID/MUSIC Sensor Roller
6. Belt Pressure Roller
7. Lubricant Bar

9

8

7

8. PTR Cleaning Blade
9. PTR Waste Toner Collection Coil
10. PTR Cleaning Brush roller
11. PTR (Paper Transfer Roller)
12. ITB Bias Roller
13. ITB Waste Toner Collection Coil
14. ITB Cleaning Brush Roller
15. ITB Cleaning Blade

6-90

IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER

1. Image Transfer Rollers (
 Y, C, M, K)
The positive charge applied by the transfer power pack to these sponge rollers
(one for each PCU) pulls the developed images from the drums down onto the
ITB.
2. ITB (Image Transfer Belt)
Receives the toner images from the four drums and holds them until they are
transferred to paper. During a full-color job, all the drums (Y, C, M, K) are in
contact with the ITB. During a black-and-white job, the ITB is lowered and the Y,
C, M drums separate from the ITB and only the black (K) drum contacts the ITB.
3. Transfer Power Pack
Applies the positive bias to the image transfer rollers to pull the developed
toner images off the drums and onto the ITB. Also applies a negative bias to
the ITB bias roller to push the images off the ITB and onto the paper.
4. ITB Drive Roller
The ITB drive motor turns this roller, which drives the ITB belt.
5. ID/MUSIC Sensor Roller
This idle roller is directly opposite the two ID sensors and three MUSIC sensors.
It ensures that the belt is positioned correctly close to the sensors for accurate
readings of the ID sensor patterns and MUSIC patterns on the ITB.
6. Belt Pressure Roller
Presses down on the ITB and paper to hold them in place as they enter the nip
between the PTR and PTR idle roller (this is where the images are transferred
from the ITB to paper).
7. Lubricant Bar
Lubricates the PTR to facilitate cleaning.
8. PTR Cleaning Blade
Removes residual toner on the PTR after the PTR cleaning brush roller cleans
the PTR.
9. PTR Waste Toner Collection Coil
Toner removed from the PTR by the PTR cleaning brush roller and PTR
cleaning blade falls into the rotating coils. It is then moved to the transverse
waste toner collection coil and finally to the waste toner bottle.
10. PTR Cleaning Brush roller
Removes residual toner from the PTR after the image is transferred from the
ITB to paper.

6-91

Detailed
Descriptions

August 2006

IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER

August 2006

11. PTR (Paper Transfer Roller)
Provides pressure when the ITB and paper pass between this roller and the
PTR below during image transfer from ITB to paper.
12. ITB Bias Roller
The transfer power pack applies a negative charge to this roller to push the
negatively-charged toner image from the ITB to the paper.
13. ITB Waste Toner Collection Coil
Toner removed from the ITB by the ITB cleaning brush roller and ITB cleaning
blade falls into the rotating coils. It is then moved to the transverse waste toner
collection coil and finally to the waste toner bottle.
14. ITB Cleaning Brush Roller
Removes residual toner from the ITB after the image is transferred from the ITB
to paper.
15. ITB Cleaning Blade
Removes residual toner from the belt after the ITB cleaning brush roller cleans
the belt.

6-92

August 2006

IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER

6.12.2 ITB DRIVE

[A]

[C]

[B]

B132D307.WMF

[A]: ITB drive motor
[B]: ITB drive roller
[C]: ITB

Detailed
Descriptions

The ITB drive motor [A] drives the ITB drive roller [B]. All the other rollers inside the
ITB are idle rollers.

6-93

IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER

August 2006

6.12.3 ITB LIFT

[A]

[C]
[B]

[D]
[F]

B132D310.WMF

[E]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:

ITB lift motor
ITB lift cam
ITB lift sensor
ITB
Black print position
Full-color print position

The ITB lift motor [A] (a stepper motor) turns the ITB lift cam [B]. This cam lifts and
lowers the ITB [D]. The operation of the ITB lift motor is controlled by the ITB lift
sensor [C].
When the machine is turned ON, the ITB stays at position [E]. The Y, C, M drums
are separated from the ITB.
When Full Color Mode is Selected:
• The motor turns the cam until the actuator goes into the ITB lift sensor.
• The motor stops.
• The raised cam holds the ITB at position [F]. All drums (Y, C, M, K) contact the
ITB.
• The machine automatically adjusts the paper feed timing for full color copying
with all the drums.
• While the Y, M, C drums are separated from the ITB, they do not turn. This
reduces wear on these drums while they are not being used.

6-94

August 2006

IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER

When Black-and-White Mode is Selected:
• The motor turns the cam until the actuator goes out of the ITB lift sensor.
• The motor stops.
• With the left side of the ITB down, only the black (K) drum contacts the ITB.
• The machine automatically adjusts paper feed timing for black-and-white copying
with only one drum.
• The ITB stays down until the next full-color job starts
When ACS Mode is Selected:

Detailed
Descriptions

If the job has color pages and black-and-white pages, the ITB operation is
controlled by SP 5880 001.
• The default is 0 (low productivity). In this mode, the ITB changes position each
time the page type changes. This makes printing slower, but decreases wear on
the color PCUs.
• If you set the SP to 1, then the machine will not move away from the color PCUs
if a black-and-white page is next. This makes printing faster, but increases wear
on the color PCUs.

6-95

IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER

August 2006

6.12.4 TRANSFER POWER PACK



[E]


[B]






	





[A]

[C]
[D]
[F]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:

B132D309.WMF

Transfer power pack
Image transfer roller terminals 
, , , 
Image transfer rollers , , , 	
ITB
ITB bias roller terminal
ITB bias roller

To transfer the images from drum to ITB:
• The transfer power pack [A] supplies a positive charge (1 kV 24 to 30 µA) to the
image transfer roller terminals [B] 
, , , .
• The four terminals charge the image transfer rollers [C] , , , 	 which
transfer the charge to the back of the ITB [D].
• The positively charged ITB pulls the negatively charged toner off the drums and
onto the ITB.
To transfer the images from ITB to paper:
• The transfer power pack [A] supplies a negative charge to the ITB bias roller
terminal [E].
• The terminal applies the negative charge to the ITB bias roller [F].
• The high negative charge of the ITB bias roller is applied to the back of the ITB.
This repulses the low negative charge of the toner, forcing the images onto the
paper.
NOTE
• The transfer power pack supplies the positive charge for image transfer to the
ITB and the negative charge for image transfer from the ITB to paper.
• A temperature/humidity sensor under the waste toner bottle motor controls the
amount of the charge applied to the image transfer and ITB bias rollers.

6-96

August 2006

IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER

6.12.5 PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION
[A]
P.P

[B]

[D]
[C]

B132D304.WMF

This machine employs a repulsive force bias system to transfer the image on the
ITB to paper.
The negative bias from the back side of the ITB applies a repulsive force to the
toner on the ITB surface. This repulsive force pushes the toner from the ITB
surface onto the paper.
This system has two advantages:
• The repulsive bias from the front side of the paper has no effect on the moisture
in the paper.
• Because the bias is applied from the front side of the paper, the bias can be
applied more effectively, regardless of the level of humidity around the paper.
After the image has been transferred to the paper:
• The paper discharge plate [C] (connected to the separation power pack) applies
an ac charge to neutralize the charges on the paper and the ITB.
• Next, curvature separation at [D] separates the paper from the ITB when the ITB
makes its abrupt turn toward the top of the machine for the next copy cycle.

6-97

Detailed
Descriptions

The transfer power pack [A] applies a negative bias to the ITB bias roller [B].

IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER

August 2006

6.12.6 PTR CLEANING
[B]

[C]

[A]

[D]
[F]

[E]

B132D303.WMF

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:

PTR cleaning brush roller
PTR (Paper Transfer Roller)
PTR cleaning blade
PTR lubricant bar
PTR waste toner collection coil
PTR motor

The PTR cleaning brush roller [A], driven by the PTR motor [F], removes toner from
the PTR [B] because these rollers rotate in opposite directions.
The PTR cleaning blade [C] removes toner that remains after brush cleaning.
The PTR lubricant bar [D] lubricates the surface of the PTR to facilitate cleaning.
The removed toner falls into the PTR waste toner collection coil [E]. The coils move
the toner to the transverse waste toner collection coil at the back of the machine,
and this coil sends the waste toner to the waste toner bottle.

6-98

August 2006

IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER

6.12.7 ITB CLEANING
[C]

[A]

[B]

[D]
[E]

B132D306.WMF

ITB cleaning brush roller
ITB (Image Transfer Belt)
ITB cleaning blade
Brush roller cleaning roller
Waste toner collection coil

Detailed
Descriptions

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:

The PTR motor (
6.12.6) rotates the ITB cleaning brush roller [A] against the
bottom of the ITB [B] while it passes above.
The ITB cleaning blade [C] removes toner that remains on the belt after the ITB
cleaning brush roller cleaning.
The brush roller cleaning roller [D] removes toner from the rotating cleaning brush
roller.
Toner removed from the ITB falls into the rotating waste toner collection coil [E].
The coil moves the toner to the transverse waste toner collection coil at the back of
the machine. This coil sends the waste toner to the waste toner bottle.
There is no lubricant bar.

6-99

IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER

6.12.8 ITB SPEED CONTROL
[D]

August 2006

[A]

[C]





[B]






B132D308.WMF

[A]: MUSIC sensors 
, , 
ID Sensor – K , ID Sensor Y, M, C  (
6.7.4, 
6.11.3)
[B]: ITB position sensor 1
[C]: ITB position sensor 2
[D]: ITB encoder strip scale
For full color and black-and-white printing on plain paper, and for thin paper, the
ITB speed is 282 mm/s.
For OHPs, and Thick Paper 1 and 2, the speed is 141 mm/s (1/2 speed).
NOTE: For OHPs, the fusing unit line speed is 100 mm/s (1/3 speed). (
6.14.1)
The machine uses three MUSIC sensors [A] to control the speed of the drum motor
to prevent color registration errors during full color printing. (See section 6.7.4.)
There are two ITB position sensors 1 [B] and 2 [C] above the encoder strip scale
[D] on the rear edge of the ITB.
• ITB position sensor 1 monitors the belt speed. The CPU uses this information to
adjust the speed of the belt to account for eccentricity of the image transfer roller,
differences in the thickness of the belt, belt slippage, and the load placed on the
ITB by friction between the rollers at paper transfer.
• ITB position sensor 2, located 20 mm from sensor 1, ensures that the number of
gradations on the edge of the ITB in this 20 mm gap remain constant. This
detects stretching or shrinking of the belt, and the ITB drive motor speed is
adjusted to compensate.

6-100

August 2006

IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER

6.12.9 ITB VENTILATION

[A]

B132D967.WMF

Detailed
Descriptions

The image transfer fan [A] draws in cool air and blows it across the top of the
drawer unit to cool the ITB.

6-101

PAPER FEED

August 2006

6.13 PAPER FEED

9

10

8

6.13.1 OVERVIEW

11

7
12
13
1

14

2

15
16

3

4
17
18
5

19

6

B132D600A.WMF

1. Tandem Tray (Tray 1)

11. Double Feed Detection LED

2. Left Tray Paper Sensor

12. Bypass Tray

3. Paper Size Switch (Tray 2)

13. Relay Sensor

4. Universal Tray (Tray 2)

14. Lower Relay Roller

5. Paper Size Switch (Tray 3)

15. Pick Up Roller

6. Universal Tray (Tray 3)

16. Feed Roller

7. Upper Relay Roller

17. Grip Roller

8. Registration Roller

18. Paper Feed Sensor

9. Double-Feed detection Sensor

19. Separation Roller

10. Registration Sensor
NOTE: Items 15 to 19 use the standard FRR feed system, which is used for Trays
1, 2, and 3. This machine uses motor ON/OFF time (not clutches) to
control paper feed.

6-102

PAPER FEED

Tray Capacities
The machine has four paper trays:
• Tandem Tray (Tray 1). 1550 + 1550 sheets
• Universal Tray (Tray 2) 550 sheets
• Universal Tray (Tray 3) 550 sheets
• Bypass tray. 100 sheets.
Built-in Feed Stations
• Paper feed and separation. Standard FRR system with a torque limiter for
paper separation and feed. Each tray has an independent stepper motor to drive
its paper feed mechanisms. 
 Handling Paper> Paper Feed Methods>
Forward and Separation Roller (FRR)
• Tray lift motors. Provided for each tray, easily disengage when a tray is
removed and engage once again when the tray is re-installed. In trays 2 and 3,
the lift of the motors on the bottom plates is also used for paper near-end
detection.
• Tandem tray paper end. A sensor near the top of the right rail detects paper
near end and another sensor under the bottom tray detects paper end after the
last sheet is fed. Three paper height sensors, on the left rail, are actuated as the
actuator rises with the bottom plate. The combinations of actuating and deactuating these sensors as the plate rises are used to detect the paper supply
display on the operation panel.
• Paper size detection. For the tandem tray (Tray 1), an SP setting is required
(SP 5959 001). For the universal trays (Tray 2, 3), there is size detection switch
on each tray.
• Vertical Transport. A grip roller at each feed station feeds the paper into the
vertical paper path.
• Heaters. There are two anti-condensation heaters for the built-in paper feed
stations.
Bypass Feed
• Capacity: 100 sheets.
• Paper feed and separation: Standard FRR system with a torque limiter for
paper separation and feed. Bypass tray motor and clutch.
• Paper end detection: Photointerrupter and feeler.
• Size detection: Side fence is used for width detection, registration sensor pulse
count is used for length detection.
• Thick paper feed: The bypass feed clutch switches on twice.
Paper Registration
• Paper is guided to the registration roller from five sources: the 3 built-in paper
trays, 1 bypass tray, and 1 duplex tray.
• There is a mylar strip over the entire length of the registration roller.
Jam Removal
Pulling out a paper tray releases the pressure on the rollers, making it easy to
remove paper jams.

6-103

Detailed
Descriptions

August 2006

PAPER FEED

August 2006

6.13.2 DRIVE
[A]

[G]
[F]
[E]

[C]
[B]
[D]

[H]
B132D923.WMF

An independent paper feed motor [A] drives the rollers in each tray. The motor also
drives grip rollers [B], which pull the paper out of the tray. This mechanism is
identical for each tray.
A vertical transport sensor [C] at each feed station detects paper jams.
The paper feed motors of each tray drive the vertical transport rollers, opposite to
each feed station (not shown).
The lower relay motor [D] drives the lower relay roller [E], halfway between trays 1
and 2. The lower relay roller is added here because the paper path is very long.
The upper relay roller [F] feeds each sheet to the registration roller. The bypass
feed motor (not shown) drives the upper relay roller [F].
The relay sensor [G], at the top of the vertical transport path, triggers the start of
image exposure on the OPC drum, and detects jams in the paper path.
The transport guide plate [H] swings against the side of the machine and locks in
place.

6-104

August 2006

PAPER FEED

6.13.3 TRAY AND PAPER LIFT MECHANISM – TRAY 2,3
Bottom Plate Lift
[A]

[B]

[C]
[D]
[E]
B132D610.WMF

Tray lift operates in this order:
[A]: Tray lift motor switches on
[B]: Coupling rotates
[C]: Pin locks coupling at shaft
[D]: Shaft rotates
[E]: Lift arm raised by the rotation of the shaft
[F]: Bottom plate pushed up by lift arm
NOTE: The universal trays (Tray 2, Tray 3) each have a paper near end sensor
inside the lift motor assembly. The sensor measures the angle of the lift
shaft. There are four possible readings from this sensor, to indicate four
levels of remaining paper.

6-105

Detailed
Descriptions

[F]

PAPER FEED

August 2006

Lift Sensor
[A]

[C]

[E]

[D]
[B]

B132D934.WMF

[I]

[F]
[H]

[G]

B132D935.WMF

Tray lift motor Æ on, pick-up solenoid [A] Æ on, pick-up roller [B] lowers.
When the top sheet of paper reaches the proper paper feed level, actuator [C] on
the pick-up roller support [D] activates the tray lift sensor [E], and the lift motor
stops.
After several paper feeds, the paper level gradually lowers and the lift sensor deactivates. Next, the lift motor turns on again until the lift sensor once again
activates.
When the tray is pulled out of the feed unit, coupling [F] disengages pin [G] on
shaft [H], and the tray bottom plate [I] drops by its own weight.

6-106

August 2006

PAPER FEED

6.13.4 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM
Feed and Separation at Standby: No Paper Present

[B]

[A]

[D]
[C]

While waiting for the first sheet to feed and between sheets, the feed roller [A] must
not rotate. However, the grip roller [B] must turn, so that any paper coming up the
vertical transport path can continue to feed. To do this, the paper feed motor [C]
rotates in reverse. The feed roller cannot turn because of a one-way clutch. The
separation roller [D] is free to rotate in the direction shown by the arrow, because
the separation roller solenoid is OFF.
When the feed motor reverses:
Feed roller [A]

Æ

No rotation

Separation roller [D]

Æ

Free to rotate

Grip roller [B]

Æ

Rotates

The feed motor cannot be replaced easily. Because of this, an assembly is
available as a spare part.

6-107

Detailed
Descriptions

B132D936.WMF

PAPER FEED

August 2006

Paper Feed and Separation
[I]

[C]

[G]
[H]
[A]
[D]

[E]
[F]
[B]
B132D937.WMFF

If a paper feed station is not selected, its separation roller solenoid [A] stays off and
the separation roller [B] can turn freely.
When the paper feed station is selected and the start key is pressed, the following
mechanisms activate:
• Separation roller solenoid [A] 
 separation roller [B] contacts feed roller [E]
• Pick-up solenoid [C] 
 pick-up roller [F] lowers to contact the paper
• Paper feed motor [D] 
 turns feed roller [E] 
 turns pick-up roller [F] via gear
[G]
When the paper feed sensor [H] detects the leading edge of the paper:
• Pick-up solenoid [C] switches off, and pick-up roller [F] lifts.
• The feed roller [E] then feeds the sheet to the registration roller.
Note the three one-way clutches [I]: One for the grip roller, one for the feed roller,
and one for the gear [G], which drives the pickup roller.
When the feed motor rotates forward:
Feed roller

Æ

Rotates

Separation
roller

Æ

Rotates in accordance with the FRR principle

 Handling Paper> Paper Feed Methods> Forward and
Reverse Roller (FRR)

Grip roller

Æ

Rotates

6-108

August 2006

PAPER FEED

Separation Roller Release Mechanism

[B]

[D]

[A]

[C]
B132D938.WMF

B132D939.WMF

This mechanism has advantages:
• When the paper feed motor turns on, the separation roller rotates. If the
separation roller is away from the feed roller, it reduces the load on the paper
feed motor and drive mechanism, and it also reduces wear to the rubber surface
of the separation roller caused by friction between the separation roller and the
feed roller.
• After a job, paper sometimes remains between the feed and separation rollers. If
the paper tray is pulled out of the machine, this paper might be torn if the two
rollers do not separate.
• The operator can easily pull out jammed paper between the feed and separation
rollers if the separation roller is away from the feed roller.
Normally, the feed and separation roller separate when the separation roller
solenoid switches off.
However, if the rollers stick together after paper passes between them, the
separation roller could rotate the feed roller in reverse before the motor and
solenoid switch off. To prevent this, if the feed roller starts to reverse, a small brake
arm [D] on the feed roller shaft rotates down, strikes a stopper, and drives the feed
roller forward slightly to separate it from the separation roller below.
The rollers are composed of rubber and may stick occasionally. This mechanism
prevents excessive wear on the rollers.
6-109

Detailed
Descriptions

Normally, the separation roller [A] and feed roller [B] are not in contact. However,
when the feed station is selected, the separation roller solenoid [C] pushes the
separation roller against the feed roller.

PAPER FEED

August 2006

6.13.5 PAPER NEAR-END AND PAPER END – TRAYS 2 AND 3

[A]

[B]

B132D940.WMF

The paper near end sensor [A] is in the lift motor assembly. It can detect four levels
of remaining paper.
The paper end sensor [A] receives light reflected from the paper below [B] until the
last sheet has been fed. Then, paper end is detected.

6-110

August 2006

PAPER FEED

6.13.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
Tandem Tray (Tray 1)
The tandem tray does not have paper size switches. Every time the paper size is
changed by moving the front and back fences, you must enter the selected paper
size with SP5959-001.

Universal Trays (Tray 2, 3)

[B]
[A]

[C]

B132D616.WMF

The paper size switch [A] detects the paper size with 5 microswitches. The actuator
plate [B], attached to the rear of the paper tray, actuates the paper size switch, and
the side fence [C] changes position.

6-111

Detailed
Descriptions

The output from the switch depends on the position of the dial (see the table on the
following page)

PAPER FEED

August 2006

Paper Size Switch Output
Paper
12" x 18" SEF
A3 SEF
B4 SEF
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
B5 SEF
B5 LEF
A5 SEF
A5 LEF
DLT
LG SEF
LT SEF
LT LEF
HLT SEF
HLT LEF
F4
Folio
F
Executive LEF
Executive SEF
8-Kai
16-Kai LEF
16-Kai SEF

Size
12" x 18"
297 x 420 mm
257 x 394 mm
210 x 297 mm
210 x 297 mm
182 x 257 mm
182 x 257 mm
148 x 210 mm
148 x 210 mm
11" x 17"
8½" x 14"
8½" x 11"
8½" x 11"
5½" x 8½ "
5½" x 8½ "
8½" x 13"
8¼" x 13"
8" x 13"
7¼" x 10 ½"
7¼" x 10 ½"
267 x 390 mm
267 x 195 mm
195 x 267 mm

Switch
11111
11001
10011
01001
11000
10101
00011
11101
01101
11100
10110
11010
01100
01110
11110
11011
01011
01111
10100
00111
00110
10010
10111

0: OFF (Sensor Output HIGH)
1: ON (Sensor Output LOW)

If the user does not put the fences at the correct position, a jam can occur.
To use a paper size that is not in this table, select the size with this user tool:
System Settings> Tray Paper Size. If the paper size is not the same as the setting,
a jam can occur. Note that SP 5112 must be set to ‘enabled’ or non-standard sizes
cannot be selected for trays 2 and 3.

6-112

August 2006

PAPER FEED

6.13.7 PAPER TRAY HEATERS

[A]

[B]

B132D608A.WMF

This tray heater turns on automatically:
• When the main power switch is turned off
• When the machine enters auto off mode
NOTE: These tray heaters are not connected before the machine is shipped from
the factory. The heaters are installed in the machine but their connection is optional.
If the trays are needed, you must connect them at machine installation or at any
time after installation. For more see Section "1. Installation".

6-113

Detailed
Descriptions

Two heaters, one below the tandem tray [A] and one below the bottom tray [B],
prevent condensation around the feed rollers and keep paper dry.

PAPER FEED

August 2006

6.13.8 TANDEM TRAY – TRAY 1
Overview

[B]

[A]

B132D942.WMF

The left tray [A] and right tray [B] each hold 1,550 sheets. Paper feeds from the
right tray. When the paper in the right tray runs out, paper in the left tray is
automatically pushed into the right tray and paper feed resumes.
Normally, both the right and the left trays are joined together. However, if there is
no paper in the left tray during copying, the left tray can be pulled out to load paper
without interrupting the copy job in progress. The right tray remains in the machine
and paper feed continues.

6-114

August 2006

PAPER FEED

Connecting the Left and Right Sides of the Tray

[A]

[B]

[C]
B132D944.WMF

B132D943.WMF

[A]

[D]

When there is paper in the left tray, lock lever [A] in the left tray catches the pin [B]
in the right tray.
During copying if there is no paper in the left tray:
• Right tray lock solenoid [C] turns on, which releases lock lever [A].
• The left tray can be pulled out to load paper, even while paper is feeding from the
right tray.
When the tandem tray is drawn out fully while the machine is not copying,
projection [D] pushes up lock lever [A] so both trays separate. This makes paper
loading easier.

6-115

Detailed
Descriptions

B132D945.WMF

PAPER FEED

August 2006

Paper Lift/Remaining Paper Detection
The machine detects when the tray 1 has been placed in the machine by
monitoring the tray set signal through the connector.
6
6

2
3
7
4
9
1
5
8

B132D946.WMF

When the machine detects that the tray is in the machine, the right tray paper
sensor [1] (under the tray) checks immediately whether there is paper in the right
tandem tray.
NOTE: This immediate detection saves time. If sensor [1] was not present and the
tray was empty, the bottom plate would have to lift until the 1st tray lift paper end
sensor (at the top of the tray) detected that there was no paper.
The lift operation begins as soon as paper is detected:
Tray 1 Lift motor [2] Æ Coupling gear [3] Æ Pin [4] on the lift shaft [5] Æ Wires [6]
Æ Slots at the ends of the tray support rods [7], [8] Æ Tray bottom plate [9].
The tray goes up until both of the following occur:
• The paper pushes up the pick-up roller and the lift sensor is activated
• The paper end sensor at the top of the tray is deactivated.

6-116

August 2006

PAPER FEED

1

3
5






7
8

10
4
2

9

6

Paper remaining: The amount of paper remaining in the tray is detected by which
combination of the three paper height sensors [1] 
, ,  are actuated by the
actuator on the left rail as the bottom plate rises.
• With the actuator below paper height sensor 
 (the bottom sensor), no sensor is
actuated and the display indicates the tray is full.
• When the actuator passes paper height sensor 
, the display indicates 50% of
the paper supply remaining.
• When the actuator passes paper height sensor  (the middle sensor), the
display indicates 30% of the paper supply remaining.
• When the actuator passes paper height sensor  (the top sensor), the display
does not change. This prevents the signal from returning to the off state, which
would indicate 100% of the paper remaining (the same state as when the
actuator is below the paper height sensor 
).
Paper near-end: Detected when the actuator [2] on the right rail activates the
paper near end sensor [3]. When the actuator passes this sensor, the display
indicates 10% of the paper supply remaining.
Paper end: After the last sheet feeds, the right tray paper sensor [4] below the
bottom of the tray actuates and signals paper end. When paper runs out in the right
tray, the stack must be moved across from the left tray. To do that, the tray must
first be lowered. The tray lift motor [5] reverses until actuator [2] activates the right
tray down sensor [6].
When removing the tray manually, if paper is still present, the tray lowers under its
own weight as follows:
• Coupling [7] separates from pin [8] Î Tray bottom plate [9] moves down.
• Damper [10] lets the tray bottom plate drop slowly.

6-117

Detailed
Descriptions

B132D947.WMF

PAPER FEED

August 2006

Fence Drive
[D]
[A]
[C]

[A]
[C]
[D]

[B]

[B]

B132D948.WMF

The side fences [A] of the right tray open only when paper in the left tray goes to
the right tray.
The side fence solenoids [B] turn on and open the side fences. The side fences
move out until the open sensors [C] activate.
After the stack has been moved into the right tray: The side fence solenoids turn off
and the side fences close. The side fences move in until the close sensors [D]
activate. Next, the LCD prompts the operator to set paper in the left side of the
tandem tray.

6-118

August 2006

PAPER FEED

Rear Fence Drive
[E]
[C]

[D]
[A]
[B]



B132D950.WMF




Left tray paper sensor [A] detects paper, right tray paper sensor does not detect
paper:
• Rear fence motor [B] (a DC motor in the left tray) turns on and rotates counterclockwise
• Rear fence motor drives rear fence against the paper stack, paper stack moves
toward right tray
• As soon as rear fence starts to move, left ray lock solenoid  turns on and locks
lever 
 to hold the left tray in place
• Rear fence [C] pushes the paper stack completely into the right tray.
• Rear fence return sensor [D] detects the actuator on the rear fence
• Motor [B] stops, reverses, and turns clockwise
• Rear fence moves back to the left tray until rear fence HP sensor [E] detects the
actuator.
• HP sensor turns the rear fence motor off.
• As soon as rear fence stops moving, left tray lock solenoid  turns off and
releases lever 
 to unlock the left tray.

6-119

Detailed
Descriptions

B132D949.WMF

PAPER FEED

August 2006

Tray Side-to-side Positioning

[A]

[B]

B132D952.WMF

B132D951.WMF

When the feed tray is set in the feed unit, the side-to-side positioning plate [A]
presses the feed tray against the stopper [B].
By moving the positioning plate, the tray position can be changed to adjust the
side-to-side registration.

6-120

August 2006

PAPER FEED

6.13.9 TRAY POSITIONING MECHANISM – TRAYS 1 TO 3

[B]
[A]

B132D953.WMF

Detailed
Descriptions

When the tray is placed in the feed unit, the lock lever [A] drops behind the lock
plate [B] on the support bracket to lock the tray in the proper position.

6-121

PAPER FEED

August 2006

6.13.10 BYPASS TRAY
Bypass Feed and Separation

[B]
[A]
[E]

[D]
[C]

[F]

B132D954.WMF

B132D603.WMF

The bypass tray [A] opens from the right side of the machine.
Bypass Tray Operation Sequence:
Bypass feed motor [B]Æ Bypass feed clutch [C]Æ Pick-up roller [D] Æ Pick-up
solenoid (see the next page)Æ Feed roller [E] and separation roller [F]
The bypass tray uses the standard FRR feed system. (
 Handling Paper> Paper
Feed Methods> Forward and Reverse Roller (FRR) or Bypass Feed Tray)
NOTE: The direction of feed in the bypass tray is opposite from that of the other
paper trays, so their parts (with the exception of the separation roller) are
not interchangeable.

6-122

August 2006

PAPER FEED

Bypass Tray Paper End Detection

[B]
[A]

[C]

B132D604.WMF

When the paper runs out, the paper end feeler [A] drops through the cutout in the
bypass paper end sensor [B].

Detailed
Descriptions

[C]: Pickup solenoid

6-123

PAPER FEED

August 2006

Bypass Paper Size Detection

[B]

[C]

[D]
[A]
B132D602.WMF

Paper Width
When the front fence [A] and rear fence [B] are moved to the sides of the paper in
the bypass tray:
• The metal actuator [C] moves to a position on the sensor strip [D].
• The machine reads the position of the actuator on the strip to determine the
paper size.
Paper Length
Paper length is determined with pulse counts read from the registration sensor.
NOTE: Use SP1007 to check the size of the paper detected in the bypass tray if
paper is skewing during feeding.

6-124

August 2006

PAPER FEED

The operator can specify non-standard paper sizes for feeding from the bypass
tray. The size must be within the range shown in the illustration.
148~457 mm (5.8" ~ 17.9")

100 ~ 305 mm (3.9" ~ 12")

B132D955.WMF

Detailed
Descriptions

NOTE:
• Use SP1905 to adjust the bypass feed clutch operation if thick paper often jams
at the registration roller. For more, see “5. Service Tables”.
• Use SP5150 to enable paper length up to 600 mm (23.6").

6-125

PAPER FEED

August 2006

6.13.11 PAPER REGISTRATION
Overview
[A]

[B]

[G]

[E]

[D]

[C]
[F]
B132D941.WMF

The registration rollers [A] and registration sensor [B] handle paper fed from six
sources:
[C]: Tandem tray and two universal trays
[D]: Duplex unit
[E]: Bypass tray
The bypass tray feeds paper directly to the registration rollers.
The grip rollers [F] feed paper from the trays into the vertical transport path to the
registration rollers.
The upper relay roller [G] feeds all paper exiting the vertical transport path. It also
feeds paper from the duplex unit and LCT.

6-126

August 2006

PAPER FEED

Paper Registration Drive
[B]

[A]

[C]

B132D607.WMF

The registration motor [A] stops when the registration sensor [B] detects the paper
at the registration rollers [C].
Because the paper is still feeding, the paper buckles against the registration rollers
and corrects skew.
NOTE: Use SP1003 to adjust the registration motor timing for each paper feed
station or the duplex tray. For details see “5. Service Tables”.
Detailed
Descriptions

Two mylars  and  at the registration rollers
collect dust from the paper and other rollers to
reduce the amount of paper dust in the paper feed
path after the registration rollers.

B132D940.BMP

6-127

PAPER FEED

August 2006

Jam Removal at Paper Registration

[F]

[C]

[E]

[D]
[G]

[G]

[F]

[B]
[A]
B132D617.WMF

If a paper misfeed occurs between the vertical transport rollers and the registration
rollers, the next sheet is already on its way up from the paper tray. The paper in the
feed path must be stopped to avoid paper jams.
When a jam occurs, a guide plate falls open to divert paper into the duplex tray.
When the registration sensor signals that a jam has occurred at the registration
rollers:
• Guide plate solenoid [A] turns on and raises lever [B].
• Lock lever [C] on the guide plate releases pin [D] on the rear side frame
• The guide plate [E] falls open. The open plate diverts paper from the feed path
below into the duplex tray.
• As soon as the guide plate opens, actuator [F] on the guide plate activates the
guide plate position sensor [G]
The operator must remove the paper jammed in the feed path, remove the diverted
paper in the duplex tray, and close the guide plate.
To prevent the guide plate from being left open, copying is disabled and a caution
is displayed on the LCD panel as long as the guide plate remains open with the
guide plate sensor activated.

6-128

August 2006

PAPER FEED

6.13.12 PAPER TYPE AND DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION

[A]

[C]

[B]

B132D941.WMF

After skew correction at the registration rollers, a sensor pair checks the
translucence of each sheet. This function makes sure that each sheet of paper fed
is of the same type and also detects double-feeds. If a sheet of a different type or a
double-feed is detected, the machine stops the job and a copy jam error message
is shown.
After buckle adjustment, double-feed detection LED [B] (an LED) emits light that
passes through the sheet above. The light is received by double-feed detection
sensor [C].

6-129

Detailed
Descriptions

[A]: Registration Rollers
[B]: Double-Feed Detection LED (LED)
[C]: Double-Feed Detection Sensor (Receptor)

PAPER FEED

August 2006

The amount of light received by the double-feed detection sensor is referred to a
lookup table that stores the values of the translucence of paper types.
• Paper type check. If the amount of light measured is within the range of
translucence for the paper selected for the copy job, no action is taken. If the
value is out of range, the machine stops the job.
• Double-feed check. The translucence of the paper at the registration roller is
compared to the reading of the previous sheet. If the translucence of the sheet at
the registration rollers is less than that of the previous sheet (greater opacity), the
CPU determines that a double-feed has occurred and stops the job.
• In either case, after the job halts, the sheets must be cleared, just as if a jam
occurred at the registration rollers.
• SP1110 001-012 enables/disables double-feed and paper type detection for the
paper feed sources (trays 1 to 3, the LCT, and bypass tray). For more, see
Section “5. Service Tables”.
• You can also switch these features on and with User Tool settings:
[User Tools/Counter]> System Settings> Tray Paper Setting> Next (3 times)>
Double Feed Detect/Paper Type Detect> Off (or On)> for Bypass Tray; Tray 1, 2,
3; or LCT.

6-130

August 2006

PAPER FEED

Paper Types

Paper Type
(UP Mode)

Paper Weight Range

Translucence

OHP

---

HIGH

Tracing Paper

---

↓

Thin Paper

14 to 19 lb Bond
2
52 to 71 g/m

↓

Normal

19 to 33 lb Bond
2
72 to 126 g/m

↓

Thick Paper 1

33 to 41 lb Bond
2
127 to 156 g/m

↓

Thick Paper 2

41 to 68 lb Bond
2
157 to 256 g/m

LOW

The paper type selection is reset:
• When the machine is switched off and on, the paper type setting for the bypass
tray is reset. The paper type settings for other trays are not reset.
• When the tray is set, or LCT cover is set
• When using bypass feed (paper set in the bypass tray)
• After a double-feed error and the paper has been removed
• When the paper type setting is changed.
UP Mode Settings
The operator can select either "Paper Type Detection" or "Double-Feed Detection"
in the Operator Tools (UP) mode for each paper feed station (default: ON).
Neither paper type recognition nor double-feed detection operates when feeding
paper shorter than 160 mm from the from the bypass tray.
Paper type detection operates only for paper types that are available for this
feature ("None", "Recycled", "Tracing Paper", or "OHP") is selected. For example,
this function cannot operate for these paper type selections: Reused, Color Paper,
Adhesive Labels, Tab Paper.
For slip sheet mode, the tray that contains the slip sheets must be set to ‘OFF’ with
the user tools for “Paper Type Detection" or "Double-Feed Detection".

6-131

Detailed
Descriptions

The machine can distinguish between the following paper types using the output
from the double-feed detection sensor / double-feed detection LED.

FUSING, PAPER EXIT

August 2006

6.14 FUSING, PAPER EXIT
6.14.1 OVERVIEW
3

2

1

5

4

6

7
8

20
9

19
18
 




17
16



15
12

10

14

11

13
1. Cleaning Roller – Fusing Belt
Lubrication Roller
2. Fusing Lamp (x1 –Hot Roller)
3. Thermistor (Hot Roller)
4. Thermostat (Hot Roller)
5. Fusing Belt
6. Heating Roller (φ28.5)
7. Fusing Lamps (x2 – Heating Roller)
8. Thermostat (Heating Roller)
9. Heating Roller Temperature Sensor
10. Thermostat (Pressure Roller)
11. Thermistor (Pressure Roller)
Fusing Lamps
Hot Roller
Heating Roller
Pressure Roller

B132D401.WMF

12. Cleaning Felt Roller
13. Fusing Lamp (x1 Pressure Roller)
14. Pressure Roller (φ50)
15. Accordion Jam Sensor
16. Fusing Exit Sensor
17. Pressure Roller Strippers
18. Fusing Belt Strippers
19. Hot Roller (φ52)
20. Fusing Belt Lubrication Roller


 350W
  590W
 350W

6-132

August 2006

FUSING, PAPER EXIT

Paper Type Selection
(User Tools)

Paper Weight Range

Line Speed

Thin

14 to 19 lb Bond
2
52 to 71 g/m

282 mm/s

Normal

19 to 33 lb Bond
2
72 to 126 g/m

282 mm/s

Thick 1

33 to 41 lb Bond
2
127 to 156 g/m

141 mm/s

Thick 2

41 to 68 lb Bond
2
157 to 256 g/m

141 mm/s

OHP

---

100 mm/s

6-133

Detailed
Descriptions

The fusing belt system applies heat to the belt at three points: the hot roller, the
heating roller, and the pressure roller. This allows the use of smaller rollers and
conserves space. As less pressure is necessary during fusing, less torque is
required.
• The fusing belt, composed of silicone and Teflon layers, applies heat directly to
fuse the toner to the paper.
• The heating roller is an aluminum roller with two fusing lamps (590W + 590W). It
applies heat to the fusing belt after it passes the hot roller, and maintains the
heat of the fusing belt while the machine is in standby mode.
• The pressure roller has a metal core to provide rigidity, and is covered with
Teflon to prevent toner from adhering to its surface. It applies heat with one
fusing lamp (350W) to maintain the temperature of the fusing belt while the
machine is in standby mode.
• The accordion jam sensor detects accordion jams where the paper exits at the
nip between the hot roller and pressure roller.
• The fusing exit sensor detects jams at the fusing exit by confirming that paper
arrives the fusing exit at the correct time.
• The hot roller is a solid rubber roller with one fusing lamp (350W) that heats and
drives the fusing belt. Maintains the temperature of the fusing belt while the
machine is in the standby mode.
The fusing/exit motor speed depends on the paper type, as shown in the table
below.

THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS

August 2006

6.15 THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS
2
1

3

4
5
6

7
1.
2.
3.
4.

Hot Roller Thermistor
Hot Roller Thermostats
Heating Roller Thermostats
Pressure Roller Thermistor

B132D402.WMF

5. Heating Roller Temperature Sensor
6. Pressure Roller Thermostats
7. Heating Roller Thermistor

Each roller in the fusing unit has one thermistor and two thermostats.

6-134

August 2006

THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS

6.15.1 FUSING UNIT DRIVE
[B]
[D]

[A]

[C]

[E]
[F]
Fusing/exit motor
Idle roller
Hot roller
Fusing belt
Heating roller
Pressure roller

The fusing/exit motor [A] drives the fusing unit.
Fusing exit motor [A]> Idle Roller [B]> Hot Roller [C]> Fusing Belt [D], Heating
Roller [E], Pressure Roller [F].

6-135

Detailed
Descriptions

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:

B132D404.WMF

THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS

August 2006

6.15.2 LUBRICATION AND CLEANING
[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

B132D401.WMF

[F]
[A]: Fusing belt lubrication roller
[B]: Fusing belt
[C]: Hot roller
[D]: Cleaning roller – fusing belt lubrication roller
[E]: Cleaning felt roller
[F]: Pressure roller
The fusing unit uses two lubrication rollers saturated with silicone oil to prevent
toner and paper dust from clinging to the fusing belt.
The fusing belt lubrication roller [A], contacts the fusing belt [B] above the hot roller
[C]. This lubrication roller applies a very thin coat of silicone oil to the fusing belt
where the belt contacts the roller.
A cleaning roller [D] cleans the surface of the fusing belt lubrication roller.
The cleaning felt roller [E] cleans the surface of the pressure roller [F].

6-136

August 2006

THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS

Stripper Retraction
[C]

[D]

[A]

B132D980.WMF

[E]

[B]
The pawls of the fusing belt strippers [A] and pressure roller strippers [B] touch the
surfaces of the fusing belt and pressure roller during normal operation.

The strippers retract immediately under the slightest pressure [D] if an accordion
jam occurs. This prevents the points of the strippers from damaging the surfaces of
the fusing belt or the pressure roller if a jam occurs where the paper emerges from
the nip of the hot roller and pressure roller.
The accordion jam sensor [E] checks for jams around the fusing unit strippers
when:
• The machine is turned on
• The front door is opened and closed

6-137

Detailed
Descriptions

These strippers are held in place with small springs. If paper does not separate
from the fusing belt at [C], for example, the point of the stripper separates the
paper from the fusing belt.

THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS

August 2006

6.15.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Basic Temperature Control
The fusing unit has four fusing lamps: one in the hot roller (350W), two in the
heating roller (590W x2), and one in the pressure roller (350W).
• The heating roller is the main source of heat to the fusing belt for fusing.
• The hot roller provides additional heat for fusing.
• The pressure roller maintains the temperature of the fusing belt while the
machine is in standby mode.
The feedback from these thermistors controls the fusing temperature.
Heating roller:

A temperature sensor located at the center and a thermistor at
the front end of the heating roller.

Hot roller:

A thermistor located at the front end of the hot roller.

Pressure roller:

A thermistor located at the center of the pressure roller.

6-138

August 2006

THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS

Temperature Control Graph

CPM Down

Standby

Power ON

Idling Start

Machine Ready

Job Start

Standby

Job End
B132D131.WMF

Heating Roller Temperature
Hot Roller Temperature
Pressure Roller Temperature

Mode
Plain Paper
Thick Paper 1
Thick Paper 2
OHP
Thin Paper

B&W
FC
B&W
FC
B&W
FC
B&W
FC
B&W
FC

Idling Start
Ready (machine ready;
lamps on, rollers turning)
Standby (between jobs)
Energy Low Power Mode
Save
Off Mode

Heating Roller
F
°C
175 (175) 347 (347)
175 (175) 347 (347)
175 (175) 347 (347)
175 (175) 347 (347)
180
356
180
356
170
338
170
338
160 (160) 320 (320)
160 (160) 320 (320)
160
320
180
356
177
-185

351
-333
Off

Hot Roller
F
°C

145
-50

269.6
-90
Off

Pressure Roller
F
°C
160 (120) 320 (248)
160 (120) 320 (248)
160 (120) 320 (248)
160 (120) 320 (248)
160 (120) 320 (248)
160 (120) 320 (248)
100
212
100
212
150 (120) 302 (248)
150 (120) 302 (248)
165

329

152
-60

306
-108
Off

Notes:
The parentheses indicate the temperatures for duplexing. Example: 150 (120)
120°C during duplexing.
If a part of the table is blank, it means that the lamp is not used. For example, the
hot roller lamp is only used during standby (between jobs).

6-139

Detailed
Descriptions

This table shows how temperature control is done in the different operation modes.

THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS

August 2006

Correction for Machine Internal Temperature
If the temperature inside the machine is less than 20 ºC, all target fusing
temperatures are increased by 5 ºC.
If the temperature inside the machine is more than 20 ºC, the standby temperature
is decreased by 5 ºC.
The temperature inside the machine is measured with the temperature sensor that
is near the waste toner bottle.

Copy Speed Reduction (CPM Down Mode)
During copying, the target temperature is 175 ºC (plain paper).
If the room temperature is low (less than 10 ºC), the fusing unit temperature can
become too low.
To compensate for this, copy speed is reduced, as explained below.
After 20 copies, if the fusing unit temperature is 165 ºC or less, the copier goes into
1st CPM Down Mode. At this time, the copy speed decreases to 55 cpm (blackand-white) and 30 cpm (color).
After 10 more copies, if the fusing unit temperature is less than 165 ºC, the copier
goes into 2nd CPM Down Mode. At this time, the copy speed decreases to 45
cpm (black-and-white) and 25 cpm (color).
If the fusing temperature increases to 175 ºC, the copier speed goes back up one
level (to 1st CPM Down Mode, or to full copying speed).

6-140

August 2006

THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS

6.15.4 FUSING UNIT VENTILATION

[D]

[C]

[B]
B132D964.WMF

[A]: Fusing unit
[B]: Heat sink
[C]: Fusing cooling fan
[D]: Fusing exhaust fan
Heat rising from the fusing unit [A] collects around a heat sink [B]. The heat sink
contains pipes with water that help to cool the hot air.
The fusing cooling fan [C] pulls cool air into the machine and blows it over the heat
sink. The fusing exhaust fan [D] pulls the heated air away from the heat sink and
expels it through a vent.

6-141

Detailed
Descriptions

[A]

DUPLEX UNIT

August 2006

6.16 DUPLEX UNIT
6.16.1 OVERVIEW
3
2
1
4

5

13
12
11

10

9

8

B132D501.WMF

7

6

1. Relay Sensor

8. Duplex Transport Sensor 2

2. Inverter Entrance Roller

9. Duplex Transport Roller 1

3. Reverse Trigger Roller

10. Duplex Transport Sensor 1

4. Jogger Fences

11. Duplex Inverter Sensor

5. Duplex Transport Sensor 3

12. Inverter Exit Roller

6. Duplex Transport Rollers 3, 4

13. Duplex Junction Gate

7. Duplex Transport Roller 2
For one-sided printing, pages are fed out face-down (default). For face-down
output, the exit junction gate sends the page to the inverter, and the inverter inverts
the page.
If the operator selected duplex mode, the inverter inverts the page, then the duplex
junction gate directs the page into the duplex unit. The duplex unit feeds the page
back to the machine to print on the second side.

6-142

August 2006

DUPLEX UNIT

[1]

6.16.2 DUPLEX DRIVE

[7]

[2]

[3]

[9]
[4]
[10]

[6]

[5]

B132D505.WMF

[11]

[5]

[9]
B132D956.WMF

Fusing/exit motor [1] Æ Timing belt [2] Æ Inverter entrance roller [3]
Duplex inverter motor [4] Æ Timing belt Æ Transport rollers 1, 2 [5] + duplex
positioning roller [6]
Duplex inverter motor [4] Æ Inverter exit roller [7]
Duplex transport motor [8] Æ Timing belt Æ transport rollers 3, 4 [9]
Duplex transport clutch [10]:
• Stops transport rollers 1, 2 [5] during interleaving 
Allows the sheet in front to
be fed out of the duplex unit by motor [8] and rollers [9].
• Controlled by the duplex inverter sensor [11]

6-143

Detailed
Descriptions

[8]

DUPLEX UNIT

August 2006

6.16.3 INVERTER OPERATION
[B]

[C]
B132D506.WMF

[A]

B132D507.WMF

[D]
[E]

Inverter Feed-in and Jogging
Just after the main switch is turned on:
• Duplex jogger motor [A] (a stepper motor) moves the jogger fences [B] to home
position (determined by the duplex jogger HP sensor [C]).
When the Start key is pressed:
• Motor [A] positions fences [B] 12 mm away from the selected paper size to wait
for the paper.
• Inverter entrance roller [D] feeds paper to the jogger section 
 The paper
pushes down the junction gate [E].
After the paper passes through the gate:
• Motor [A] moves the jogger fences [B] in to square the paper. This happens
every page.
• Next, the jogger fences move back to the previous position (12 mm away from
the paper)

6-144

August 2006

DUPLEX UNIT

Inverter Feed-out

[A]

[B]

B132D957.WMF

[C]

[F]

[D]
B132D508.WMF

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:

[F]
Detailed
Descriptions

[E]
Reverse trigger roller solenoid
Reverse trigger roller
Reverse roller
Paper
Inverter exit roller
Relay sensor

After jogging, each page is fed back as follows:
• Solenoid [A] pushes down roller [B].
• Roller [B] contacts roller [C], catching the paper between the two rollers.
• Roller [C] always turns counter-clockwise, and feeds the paper [D] backwards to
roller [E].
When the leading edge of the paper, now caught by roller [E], passes sensor [F],
solenoid [A] switches off and roller [B] returns to its home position.

6-145

DUPLEX UNIT

August 2006

6.16.4 DUPLEX TRAY FEED

[A]
[B]
[C]

[D]
B132D958.WMF

[A]: Junction gate solenoid
[B]: Duplex junction gate
[C]: Transport rollers 1, 2, 3, 4
[D]: Duplex transport sensors 1, 2, 3
After inversion:
• If duplex mode is not selected, the duplex junction gate solenoid [A] does not
switch on to open the duplex junction gate [B]. The paper goes to the output tray
or finisher face down.
• If duplex mode is selected, after the paper leaves the inverter, the solenoid [A]
switches on and opens the junction gate [B]. The paper goes down to the duplex
tray.

6-146

August 2006

DUPLEX UNIT

6.16.5 DUPLEX INTERLEAVE FEED
The number of sheets that can be processed at a time depends on the size of the
paper. The table below shows the order of page processing for a 14-page job. Odd
numbers are the front sides of the pages, even numbers are the back sides.
Scanning Order
A4/LT LEF or
smaller *1
Longer than
A4/LT(LEF) *2

Order of Page Processing 
5
6
7
8
9
10 11

1

2

3

4

1

3

5

2

7

4

9

6

11

8

1

3

2

5

4

7

6

9

8

11

12

13

14

13

10

12

14

10

13

12

14

*1

: 3 pages can be interleave processed at once.
: Only 2 pages can be interleave processed at once.

*2

The following diagrams show where the 7 sheets are located at every step during a
14-page duplex print job with A4/LT LEF paper (three pages can be in the feed
path at once).

B132D959.WMF

2. 1st, 2nd, 3rd sheet fed to duplex tray
and inverter table.
3. 4th sheet feeds.

B132D960.WMF

6-147

Detailed
Descriptions

1. First 3 sheets  fed.
1) 1st sheet, front page printed (pg. 1)
2) 2nd sheet, front page printed (pg. 3)
3) 3rd sheet, front page printed (pg. 5)

DUPLEX UNIT

August 2006

4. 1st sheet, back page printed (pg. 2)

B132D961.WMF

5. 4th sheet feeds, front page printed
(pg.7)
6. 1st sheet exits (pg. 1 and 2)
7. 4th sheet feeds to duplex tray.
8. 2nd sheet, back page printed (pg. 4)
9. 5th sheet feeds.

B132D963.WMF

10. 2nd sheet exits.
11. 5th sheet, back page printed (pg. 9),
feeds to duplex tray.
12. 3rd sheet, back page printed (pg. 6)
13. 6th sheet, front page printed (pg.
11)
14. 4th sheet, back page, (pg. 8), 7th
sheet front page (pg. 13) copied in
order, the process above repeats.

B132D978.WMF

6-148

August 2006

DUPLEX UNIT

6.16.6 DUPLEX UNIT VENTILATION

[C]
[A]

[B]

[A]: Duplex Fan
[B]: Rear Duplex Fan
[C]: Front Duplex Fan
The duplex fan [A] draws cool air into the duplex unit.
The rear duplex fan [B] and front duplex fan [C] expel the heated air through vents
on the left side of the machine.

6-149

Detailed
Descriptions

B132D965.WMF

PAPER EXIT

August 2006

6.17 PAPER EXIT
6.17.1 FACE UP EXIT MECHANISM

[C]
[B]









[A]
B132D504.WMF

[A]: Inverter Junction Gate Solenoid
[B]: Inverter Junction Gate
[C]: Exit Sensor
When the inverter is used (duplex mode, or face-down output):
• Inverter junction gate solenoid [A] Æ Off
• Inverter junction gate [B] Æ Open 

• Paper goes down to the inverter 
When the inverter is not used (face-up output, or when paper was fed from the
bypass tray):
• Inverter junction gate solenoid [A] Æ On
• Inverter junction gate  Æ Closed
• Paper goes up to the output tray 
The exit sensor [C] detects the leading and trailing edge of each sheet as it feeds
out and triggers a jam if the paper is late or stops.

6-150

August 2006

PAPER EXIT

6.17.2 DE-CURL MECHANISM

[A]
[D]

[C]
[A]

[B]
[A]: Heat Pipe Roller
[B]: Exit Rollers
[C]: Heat Pipe Roller Fins
[D]: Cooling Pipe Fan
Immediately after paper leaves the fusing unit, it passes between the heat pipe
roller [A] and the exit rollers [B].
The heat pipe roller absorbs heat from the paper.
Fins [C] attached to the front end of the heat pipe roller conduct heat away from the
heat pipe roller.
The cooling pipe fan [D] draws in cool air and blows it through the fins to dissipate
the heat conducted away from the heat pipe roller.

6-151

Detailed
Descriptions

B132D503.WMF

PAPER EXIT

August 2006

6.17.3 PAPER EXIT COOLING

[A]

B132D966.WMF

The paper exit fan [A] draws hot air from the paper exit area and expels it through a
vent on the left side of the machine.

6-152

August 2006

PAPER EXIT

6.17.4 ENERGY SAVER MODES

Operation Sw. Off
-orAuto Off Timer
(1 min. to 240 min. / Default: 90 min.)

Stand-by Mode

Energy Saver Key ON
-orPanel Off Timer (10 s to 999 s / Default: 60 s)
Key Operation

Operation Sw. Off
-orAuto Off Timer
(1 min. to 240 min. / Default: 90 min.)

Operation Sw. Off
-orAuto Off Timer
(1 min. to 240 min. / Default: 90 min.)

Panel-Off Mode
Return Time Less Than 10s
Energy Saver Timer
(1min. to 240 min. / Default: 15 min.)
Operation Panel Key Pushed
Platen Cover Open / Closed
Original Set in ADF, Paper Set in Bypass

Low Power Mode

Return Time Less Than 4 minutes

Auto Off Mode
(Sleep Mode, if printer/scanner
installed)

Operation Switch Pushed
Platen Cover Open / Closed
Original Set in ADF
Return Time Less Than 8 minutes

Off Mode

Printer Data in

After Printing

Off Stand-by Mode

B132D933.WMF

This machine has three types of energy saver mode as follows.
1) Panel off mode (operation panel off, fusing lamps on)
2) Low power mode (fusing lamps go to a lower temperature)
3) Auto off mode (fusing lamps turn off)

6-153

Detailed
Descriptions

When the machine is not being used, the energy saver function reduces power
consumption by decreasing the fusing temperature.

PAPER EXIT

August 2006

These modes are controlled by the following user tools.
• Panel off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Settings – Panel Off
Timer (default 60 seconds). Maximum recovery time: 10 seconds
• Low power mode timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Settings –
Energy Saver Timer (default 15 minutes). Maximum recovery time: 4
minutes
• Auto off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Settings – Auto Off
Timer (default 90 minutes). Maximum recovery time: 8 minutes
• If the printer and scanner are installed, the machine uses ‘Sleep Mode’
instead of Auto Off mode. This is the same as Auto Off Mode, but if a print
job comes in, the printer wakes up to print the data. But if you wish to make
copies, first press the operation switch.

6-154

A3/11”x17” PAPER SIZE TRAY
(Machine Code: B331)

06/09

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTRALLATION ................................................................. B331-1
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B331-2
2.1 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT................................... B331-2

3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS................................................. B331-4
3.1 SECTIONAL DESCRIPTION .............................................................. B331-4

i

06/09

September 2006

BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT

1. INSTALLATION

Peripherals

For details about installing the A3/DLT Kit B331, please refer to the instructions you
received with the instructions or the “1. Installation” in the main machine service
manual.

B331-1

06/09

BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT

September 2006

2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
2.1 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Before replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire, remove the front bottom
plate lift wire. The procedure for the two wires is the same.

[F]
[C]
[E]

[D]
[B]
[A]

[C]
[A]
[B]

B331R102.WMF

1. Remove the tray.
2. Remove the inner cover (2 screws).
3. Slightly lift the front bottom plate and unhook the wire stoppers [A] (2 stoppers
[B]).
4. Remove the wire cover [C] (1 E-ring each).
5. Remove the bracket [D] (1 screw, 1 E-ring, and 1 bushing).
6. Remove the gear [E].
7. Replace the bottom plate lift wire [F].

B331-2

06/09

September 2006

BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT

[E]

[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
B331R061.WMF

Peripherals

NOTE: When re-installing the bottom plate lift wire:
1) Set the positioning pin [A] in the hole [B] and set the projection [C] in the
hole [D].
2) Position the wire as shown [E].
3) Do not cross the wires.

B331-3

06/09

SECTIONAL DESCRIPTION

September 2006

3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
3.1 SECTIONAL DESCRIPTION
[C]
[B]

[D]

[A]

B331D201.WMF

This tray mechanism is basically same as the tandem LCT. This tray bottom plate
[A] is lifted through the tray wires [B] by the lift motor [C] rotation. There is no
remaining paper capacity detection.
The paper remaining sensors [D] trigger messages on the LCD to let the user know
how much paper remains in the tray.
The operation panel LCD displays “full” whether there is paper in the tray. Except
for the above matter, refer to the main copier tandem LCT section for details.

B331-4

06/09

LCT (LARGE CAPACITY TRAY)
(Machine Code: B473)

06/09

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B473-1
1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS.......................................................................... B473-1
1.2 PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS ......................................... B473-2
1.3 PICK-UP SOLENOID.......................................................................... B473-3
1.4 PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER COVER SWITCHES ....................... B473-4
1.5 TRAY MOTOR.................................................................................... B473-5
1.6 PAPER STACK SENSOR................................................................... B473-5
1.7 PAPER SIZE ADJUSTMENT.............................................................. B473-6

2. DETAILS............................................................................... B473-7
2.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................ B473-7
2.1.1 LCT MAIN COMPONENTS ....................................................... B473-7
2.1.2 LCT DRIVE LAYOUT................................................................. B473-9
2.2 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION .................................................. B473-10
2.2.1 STARTING PAPER FEED ....................................................... B473-10
2.2.2 FEED AND SEPARATION....................................................... B473-11
2.3 PAPER LIFT ..................................................................................... B473-12
2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION ......................................................... B473-14
2.5 PAPER END DETECTION ............................................................... B473-15

i

06/09

September 2006

EXTERNAL COVERS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS
[C]

[B]

[D]

[A]

[F]

[E]

B473R001.WMF

Transport cover
Transport cover hinge (
 x1)
Rear cover (
 x4)
Top cover (
 x1)
Right cover (
 x2)
Front cover (
 x3)

Peripherals

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:

B473-1

06/09

PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS

September 2006

1.2 PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS
[B]

[A]
[D]

B473R002.WMF

[E]

[C]
B473R003.WMF

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:

Open the transport cover
Bracket cover (
 x2)
Pick-up roller ( x1)
Feed roller ( x1)
Separation roller ( x1)

B473-2

06/09

September 2006

PICK-UP SOLENOID

1.3 PICK-UP SOLENOID

[A]

B473R004.WMF

Rear cover (
 x4)
Open the transport cover (
 1.2)

Peripherals

Bracket cover (
 2.2)
[A]: Pick-up solenoid (
 x2,  x1)

B473-3

06/09

PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER COVER SWITCHES

September 2006

1.4 PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER COVER SWITCHES

[A]
B473R005.WMF

[B]

B473R006.WMF

Open the top cover.
Right cover (
 1.1)
[A]: Paper end sensor (
 x1)
[B]: Upper cover switches 1, 2 ( x2)

B473-4

06/09

September 2006

TRAY MOTOR

1.5 TRAY MOTOR

[A]
B473R007.WMF

Rear cover (
 1.1)
[A]: Tray motor (
 x2,  x1)

Peripherals

1.6 PAPER STACK SENSOR

[A]
[B]
B473R008.WMF

Disconnect the LCT from the machine
[A]: Sensor cover (
 x1)
[B]: Paper stack sensor ( x1)
B473-5

06/09

PAPER SIZE ADJUSTMENT

September 2006

1.7 PAPER SIZE ADJUSTMENT

[B]

[A]

[C]
B473R109.WMF

The side fences [A] can be adjusted for A4 Sideways, B5 Sideways, or LT
sideways at the top [B] and bottom brackets [C].
After changing the side fences to accept another paper size, you must execute
SP5959 005 (Paper Type – Tray 4) and select the paper size of the side fence
positions. For details, see SP5959 in section “5. Service Tables” of the eSTUDIO4500c/5500c service manual.

B473-6

06/09

September 2006

OVERVIEW

2. DETAILS
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 LCT MAIN COMPONENTS
5

6

7

4
3
8

2
1
17

9

16
10
15
11
14
12

B473D001.WMF

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

10. Paper Height Sensor 2
11. Paper Tray
12. Paper Height Sensor 3
13. Paper Tray Motor
14. Low Limit Sensor
15. Tray Drive Belt
16. Feed Motor
17. Stack Sensor

Separation Roller
Transport Roller
Feed Sensor
Feed Roller
Lift Sensor
Pick-up Roller
Paper End Sensor
Paper Near End Sensor
Paper Height Sensor 1
B473-7

06/09

Peripherals

13

OVERVIEW

September 2006

Pick-up, Separation, Feed. Non-contact, maintenance free FRR sysem. (
Handling Paper> Paper Feed Methods> Forward and Reverse Roller (FRR))
Tray Lift. Tray lift motor and timing belt raise and lower the paper tray.
Paper Size Detection. The side fences cannot be adjusted by customers. The
paper size must be entered with SP5959 005. For details, see SP5959 in section “5.
Service Tables.”
Paper Height Detection. A feeler and four photointerrupters are used.
Paper End Detection. A reflective sensor on the upper stay detects paper end.

B473-8

06/09

September 2006

OVERVIEW

2.1.2 LCT DRIVE LAYOUT

5

4
3

2
1
6

8

7
B473D003.WMF

2. Separation Roller
3. Transport Rollers
4. Feed Roller
5. Feed Motor
6. Tray Motor
7. Tray Lift Shaft
8. Tray Drive Belt

B473-9

06/09

Peripherals

1. Pick-up Roller

PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION

September 2006

2.2 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION
A standard FRR system is used. It consists of the pick-up, feed, and separation
rollers.

2.2.1 STARTING PAPER FEED

[B]

[A]
[C]
B473D004.WMF

The feed motor [A] drives the transport rollers [B].
The separation roller [C], which is free to rotate in the direction indicated by the
arrow, remains at rest.

B473-10

06/09

September 2006

PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION

2.2.2 FEED AND SEPARATION

[C]

[B]

[A]
[E]

[D]

B473D005.WMF

The feed motor [A] switches on, then the pick-up solenoid [B] switches on and
transfers drive to the paper feed roller [C] and pick-up roller [D].
The rotating pick-up roller lowers and feeds the first sheet when it contacts the top
of the stack.
The separation roller [E], in contact with the feed roller, only allows one sheet out of
the tray.

Peripherals

As soon as the paper feed sensor (not shown) detects the leading edge of the
paper, it switches off the pick-up solenoid which raises the pick-up roller. The feed
roller feeds the sheet to the registration roller.
This process is repeated for each sheet.

B473-11

06/09

PAPER LIFT

September 2006

2.3 PAPER LIFT

[E]
[A]
[D]

[F]

[B]
[C]

[H]

B473D006.WMF

[G]

B473D158.WMF

Tray motor [A] Î Gear [B] Î Shaft [C] Î Tray belts [D] raise and lower the paper
tray [E].
After paper is set in the LCT and the upper cover is closed, if the paper height
sensor [F] is not activated, the tray motor lowers the tray and stops. When the
paper height sensor activates, the tray motor lifts the tray.
After several sheets have been fed, the paper level lowers, the actuator [G]
activates the lift sensor [H], and switches on the motor again. The motor raises
stack until the actuator de-activates the lift sensor.
This cycle repeats to maintain the correct height of the stack until the end of the job.

B473-12

06/09

September 2006

PAPER LIFT

[C]
[D]

[A]

[B]

[E]
B473D108.WMF

The tray lowers until the stack sensor [D] detects the top of the stack and stops the
tray motor.
• This mechanism lowers the tray by 5 cm, which gives the user enough space to
add 500 sheets of paper.
• If the down switch is then pressed again, the bottom plate moves down once
again by 5 cm. This allows the customer to replenish paper in convenient
amounts and at the same position.
A lower limit sensor [E] (triggered by an actuator on the bottom of the tray) is also
provided to stop the tray motor if the stack sensor should fail.
Summary
The tray raises when:
• The main power switch is turned on
• When the lift sensor switches on during copying
• The top cover is closed and the lift sensor switches on
The tray lowers when:
• The tray down button is pressed.
• The paper end sensor signals that there is no paper in the tray.

B473-13

06/09

Peripherals

Pressing the tray down button [A] reverses the rotation of the tray motor [B] and
lowers the tray [C].

PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION

September 2006

2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION
[A]
[F]

[B]

[E]
[D]
[C]
B473D006.WMF

As paper is consumed from the top of the stack [A], the paper tray rises and the
actuator [B] attached to the tray passes through paper height sensor 3 [C], paper
height sensor 2 [D], and paper height sensor 1 [E] until the actuator reaches the
paper near end sensor [F].
The operation panel displays a message for each paper height until the actuator
reaches the near-end sensor, then a message warns the user that the tray is nearly
empty.
The table summarizes the relation between sensor detection and the number of
sheets remaining in the stack.
Sheet Remaining
75
1500
2500
3500

Bars *1
1
2
3
4

Near-end






Sensors
P.Height 1
P.Height 2
—
—

—





*1



: The number of vertical bars in the paper height display on the operation panel.

: Actuator blocking the sensor gap.
: Sensor gap is open

B473-14

06/09

P.Height 3
—
—
—


September 2006

PAPER END DETECTION

2.5 PAPER END DETECTION

[A]

[B]

B473D111.WMF

The paper end sensor [A] monitors the light reflected by each sheet on top of the
stack.

Peripherals

When the last sheet feeds, the cutout [B] is exposed, and the paper end sensor
receives no reflected light from below because there is no paper and this signals
paper end.

B473-15

06/09

PAPER END DETECTION

September 2006

B473-16

06/09

2000/3000-SHEET FINISHER

Peripherals

(Machine Code: B700/B701)

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B700-1

Peripherals

1.1 BASIC PROCEDURES....................................................................... B700-1
1.1.1 COVERS.................................................................................... B700-1
1.1.2 UPPER TRAY, END FENCE ..................................................... B700-2
1.2 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, LIMIT SWITCH ................................ B700-4
1.3 POSITIONING ROLLER..................................................................... B700-5
1.4 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR ........................................................... B700-6
1.5 UPPER TRAY HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2 ............................................. B700-7
1.6 EXIT GUIDE PLATE, UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR ......................... B700-8
1.7 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR........................................................... B700-9
1.8 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR .................................................... B700-10
1.9 PRE-STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR.................................................. B700-11
1.10 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR............................................................ B700-12
1.11 FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY) ............................................ B700-13
1.11.1 FOLDING HORIZONTAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT .................. B700-13
1.11.2 FOLD VERTICAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT .............................. B700-16
1.12 CORNER STAPLER....................................................................... B700-17
1.13 FOLD UNIT..................................................................................... B700-18
1.14 FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR ................................................ B700-20
1.15 STACK PRESENT SENSOR.......................................................... B700-21
1.16 BOOKLET STAPLER, BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR ................... B700-22
1.16.1 BOOKLET STAPLER............................................................. B700-22
1.16.2 BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR .............................................. B700-23

i

2. DETAILS............................................................................. B700-24
2.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ......................................................................... B700-24
2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ......................................................... B700-26
2.2.1 UPPER AREA B700/B701 ....................................................... B700-26
2.2.2 LOWER AREA B700/B701 ...................................................... B700-27
2.2.3 PUNCH UNIT B702 ................................................................. B700-28
2.2.4 STACKER/STAPLER - B700/B701.......................................... B700-29
2.2.5 B700 FOLD UNIT..................................................................... B700-30
2.2.6 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ....................... B700-31
2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................... B700-36
2.4 JUNCTION GATES .......................................................................... B700-37
Proof Mode .................................................................................. B700-37
Shift Mode.................................................................................... B700-37
Staple Mode................................................................................. B700-37
2.5 PRE-STACKING............................................................................... B700-38
2.6 UPPER TRAY................................................................................... B700-40
2.7 LOWER TRAY (B700 ONLY)............................................................ B700-42
2.8 CORNER STAPLING ....................................................................... B700-44
2.8.1 STACKING AND JOGGING .................................................... B700-44
2.8.2 STAPLER MOVEMENT........................................................... B700-46
2.8.3 CORNER STAPLING............................................................... B700-48
2.9 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY)................................................ B700-49
2.9.1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM .................................... B700-49
2.9.2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING.................................... B700-50
Overview ...................................................................................... B700-50
Booklet Stapling and Folding Mechanisms .................................. B700-56
2.10 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT ................................................................. B700-59
2.10.1 FEED OUT............................................................................. B700-59
2.10.2 FEED OUT STACKING ......................................................... B700-61
2.11 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701)........................................... B700-62
2.11.1 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION................................................ B700-62
2.11.2 PUNCH MECHANISMS......................................................... B700-65
Paper Position Detection.............................................................. B700-65
Punch Unit Movement.................................................................. B700-66
Punch Selection and Firing .......................................................... B700-67
2.11.3 PUNCH HOPPER MECHANISM ........................................... B700-68
2.12 FINISHER JAM DETECTION .......................................................... B700-69

ii

What This Manual Contains
This manual describes two finishers, the 2000-Sheet Finisher Booklet (B700) and
3000-Sheet Finisher (B701):
• Replacement and Adjustment
• Details
For details about installation, preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, and
specifications please refer to the Service Manual for e-STUDIO4500c/5500c.
2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher B700
This finisher is equipped with three trays: a proof tray on top of the finisher, an
upper (shift) tray, and a lower tray for booklets.
3000-Sheet Finisher B701
This finisher is equipped with two trays: a proof tray on top of the finisher and the
upper (shift) tray. This finisher does corner stapling only. It does not have the lower
tray of the B700 for stapled and folded booklets.
NOTE: The descriptions in this manual apply to both finishers. Where differences
between these to finisher exist, you will see the notations "B700 only" or
"B701 only".

August 2006

BASIC PROCEDURES

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: Be careful not to touch the sharp edge on the guide [A] indicated in
the figure.
[A]

1.1 BASIC PROCEDURES
1.1.1 COVERS

B700I209.MWF

[H]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]

[G]

[E]

B700R101.WMF

[A]: Small Upper Cover (
 x1). Open the front door, remove the screw, then
remove the cover.
[B]: Upper Cover (
 x2)
[C]: Front Door Bracket (
 x1)
[D]: Front Door
[E]: Front Left Side Cover (
 x2)
[F]: Cover
[G]: Paper Exit Cover (
 x2)
[H]: Rear Cover (
 x2)
B700-1

Peripherals

[F]

BASIC PROCEDURES

August 2006

1.1.2 UPPER TRAY, END FENCE

[A]

[B]
B700R114.WMF

1. Remove the rear cover. (
1.1.1)
2. To lower the upper tray:
• Support the tray [A] with your right hand.
• Pull gear [B] toward you  to release.
• Slowly lower the tray  until it stops.

B700-2

August 2006

BASIC PROCEDURES

[A]
[D]

[B]



[E]

[C]
B700R115.WMF

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:

Front Side Cover (
 x1)
Rear Side Cover (
 x1)
Upper Tray (
 x1)
Tray Bracket (
 x4, 
 x1 shoulder
screw )
[E]: End Fence (
 x3)

B700R116.WMF

Peripherals

[E]

B700-3

UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, UPPER TRAY LIMIT SWITCH

August 2006

1.2 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, UPPER TRAY LIMIT
SWITCH

[A]

B700R117.WMF

[C]

[B]
B700R118.WMF

Remove:
• Front door, front left side cover, rear cover, upper cover (
1.1.1)
• End fence (
1.1.2)
[A]: Upper tray exit mechanism (
 x4,  x3)
[B]: Upper tray limit sensor (
 x1,  x1)
[C]: Upper tray limit switch ( x2)

B700-4

August 2006

POSITIONING ROLLER

1.3 POSITIONING ROLLER
[A]

[C]

[B]
B700R103.WMF

Peripherals

[A]: Open the front door.
[B]: Pull out the stapler unit.
[C]: Positioning roller ( x1, timing belt x1)

B700-5

PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR

August 2006

1.4 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR
[A]
[B]

B700R107.WMF

• Remove small upper cover (
1.1.1)
[A]: Proof Tray Exit Sensor Bracket (
 x1)
[B]: Proof Tray Exit Sensor (S10) ( x1)

B700-6

August 2006

UPPER TRAY PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2

1.5 UPPER TRAY PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2
[A]

[B]

[C]

B700R108.WMF

Peripherals

• Remove small upper cover, upper cover (
1.1.1)
[A]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor Bracket (
 x1)
[B]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 1 – Staple Mode (S08) ( x1)
[C]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 2 – Non-Staple Mode (S09) ( x1)

B700-7

EXIT GUIDE PLATE, UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR

August 2006

1.6 EXIT GUIDE PLATE, UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR
Remove:
• Rear cover (
1.1.1)
• Upper covers (
1.1.1)
• Front door (
1.1.1)
• Cover (
1.1.1)
• Paper exit cover (
1.1.1)

[A]

[A]: Inner cover (
 x2)

B700R109.WMF

[C]
[B]: Exit guide plate
•   x1
•  Link and spring
•   x1
•   x1
[C]: Upper tray exit sensor (S6)
( x1)






[B]


B700R110.WMF

B700-8

August 2006

PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR

1.7 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR
[C]

[B]



[A]

B700R111.WMF

Peripherals

• Remove the exit guide plate. (
1.6)
[A]: Guide plate. Disconnect at , 
[B]: Sensor bracket (
 x1)
[C]: Proof tray full sensor (S11) ( x1)

B700-9

FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR

August 2006

1.8 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR

[B]
[A]

B700R133.WMF

• Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier.
• Disconnect the cover interposer if it is installed.
[A]: Sensor bracket (
 x1)
[B]: Finisher entrance sensor (S1) ( x1)

B700-10

August 2006

PRE-STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR

1.9 PRE-STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR
[A]

[B]

B700R102.WMF

Peripherals

• Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier.
[A]: Sensor bracket
[B]: Pre-stack tray exit sensor (S2)

B700-11

FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR

August 2006

1.10 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR
• Open the front door.
• Pull out the stapler tray.
[A]: Fold unit vertical guide plate
[A]

B700R121.WMF

[B]: Fold unit inner cover
(
 x2, Spring pin x1)

[B]
B700R125.WMF

[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:

Fold unit upper cover (
 x1)
Paper clamp mechanism (
 x4)
Fold unit exit sensor bracket (
 x1)
Fold unit exit sensor (S31) ( x1)

[C]

[D]

[E]
[F]

B700-12

B700R126.WMF

August 2006

FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY)

1.11 FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY)
1.11.1 FOLDING HORIZONTAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT

[D]

[A]
[C]
[B]

[E]

B700R802.WMF

Important
• The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped
from the factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not
even.
1. Switch the copier on and enter the SP mode.
2. Europe, Asia: Use SP 6113 001 (this is for A3 paper).
North America: Use SP 6113 005 (this is for DLT paper).
NOTE: If the original setting of SP6113 001 or 005 is not 0, then you must do
the vertical skew adjustment (
1.11.2) after you finish this horizontal
skew procedure.

4. Press [#] then exit the SP mode.
5. Open the front door and pull the stapler unit [A] out of the finisher.
6. Open the guide plate [B].
7. Loosen the adjustment screw [C] and then tighten until it stops. (Do not over
tighten.)
8. Remove the lock screw [D].
9. Raise the tip [E] of the adjustment screw very slightly and allow it to descend
under its own weight.

B700-13

Peripherals

3. Use the 10-key pad to input "-2" (mm) for the SP value.
NOTE: (Press [
/] to enter the minus sign.)

FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY)

August 2006

[A]

[B]

B700R901.WMF

10. Push the stapler unit into the finisher and close the front door.
11. Do a folding test.
• Switch the copier on.
• Put one page of A3 or DLT paper in the ARDF.
• On the copier operation panel, select booklet stapling.
• Press [Start]. One sheet is folded.
12. Remove the sheet from the lower tray.
13. Hold the folded sheet with the creased side pointing down and face-up (the
same way that it came out of the finisher).
14. Referring to the diagram, determine if the skew is + [A] or – [B].

B700-14

August 2006

FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY)

[E]
[A]

[D]

[C]
[B]

B700R130A.WMF

15. Open the front door of the finisher and pull the stapler unit [A] out.
16. Open the guide plate [B].
17. Turn the adjustment screw [C] to correct the amount of skew you measured
from the test sheet.
• For + skew ([A] on the previous page), turn the adjustment screw
(clockwise).
• For – skew ([B] on the previous page), turn the adjustment screw to the
left (counter-clockwise).
• Every click in the +/– direction adjusts the fold position by 0.1 mm by moving
the bottom fence [D]
18. Raise the tip of the adjustment screw [C] and allow it to lower under its own
weight.
19. Attach and tighten the lock screw [E].

21. Europe, Asia: Do SP 6113 001 (this is for A3 paper).
North America: Do SP 6113 005 (this is for DLT paper).
22. Reset it to "0".
23. Do the test again.
24. If the result is satisfactory, this completes the adjustment.
-orIf some skew remains, repeat this adjustment.
NOTE: After doing this adjustment, adjust for vertical skew, if necessary.
(
1.11.2).

B700-15

Peripherals

20. Push the stapler unit into the machine, close the front door, then turn the copier
on.

FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY)

August 2006

1.11.2 FOLD VERTICAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT
Important
• The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped
from the factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not
even.
1. Switch the copier on.
2. Do a folding test.
• Switch the copier on.
• Put one page of A3 or DLT paper in the ARDF.
• On the copier operation panel, select booklet stapling.
• Press [Start]. One sheet is folded.
3. Hold the folded sheet with the creased
side pointing down, and face-up (the
same way that it came out of the
finisher).

[A]

[B]

4. Referring to the diagram, determine if
the skew is positive [A] or negative [B].

B700R902.WMF

5. Measure the amount of skew.
6. Enter the SP mode
• Europe, Asia: Use SP 6113 001 (this is for A3 paper).
• North America: Use SP 6113 005 (this is for DLT paper).
7. Enter one-half the measured amount of skew.
Example: If the measure amount of skew is -1.2 mm, enter -0.6 mm
NOTE: The range for measurement is –3.0 mm to +3.0 mm in 0.2 mm steps for
every notch adjustment.
8. Exit the SP mode and do the test again (steps 2 to 5).
9. Repeat this procedure until the skew is corrected.
The illustration below shows the effects of +/- adjustment with SP6113. (The
vertical arrows show the direction of paper feed.)

B700R135.WMF

B700-16

August 2006

CORNER STAPLER

1.12 CORNER STAPLER

[C]

[B]

[A]
B700R112.WMF

B700R113.WMF

Peripherals

• Open the front door.
• Pull out the stapler unit
[A]: Inner cover (
 x3)
[B]: Stapler unit holder (
 x1)
[C]: Corner stapler (M20) (
 x1)

B700-17

FOLD UNIT

August 2006

1.13 FOLD UNIT

[C]

B700R119.WMF

[A]

[B]

B700R801.WMF

• Remove the back cover (
1.1.1)
• Open the front door.
CAUTION: The stapler unit is heavy.
[A]: Ground screw (
 x1)
[B]: Harness ( x6,  x6)
[C]: Stapler unit (
 x4)

B700-18

August 2006

FOLD UNIT

[A]

[B]

B700R124.WMF

[C]

B700R134.WMF

Important: Support the fold unit with your hand to prevent it from falling.
CAUTION: The fold unit is heavy.

1. Read the DIP SW settings on the decal [B] attached to the back of the new fold
unit.
2. Check the DIP SW settings on the main board [C] of the finisher.
3. If these settings are different, change these settings to match settings printed
on the seal attached to the fold unit.
NOTE: Set DIP switches 1 to 4 (the switch set on the right). Do not touch the
other DIP switches.

B700-19

Peripherals

[A]: Fold unit (
 x4,  x2,  x6)
If you have replaced the fold unit:

FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR

August 2006

1.14 FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR

[A]
[B]
B700R132.WMF

• Pull out the stapler unit.
[A]: Fold unit entrance sensor bracket (
 x2)
[B]: Fold unit entrance sensor (S26) (
 x1,  x1)

B700-20

August 2006

STACK PRESENT SENSOR

1.15 STACK PRESENT SENSOR

[E]

[D]

[A]

B700R121.WMF

[C]

[B]

Important: If you intend to correct the horizontal and vertical skew for the fold unit
at the same time, do those adjustments first, then replace the sensor. (
1.11.1,
1.11.2)
• Remove the stapler unit (
1.13)
[A]: Guide plate.
[B]: Stay (
 x4)
[C]: Left plate (
 x4)
[D]: Sensor bracket (
 x1)
[E]: Stack present sensor (S32) ( x1)

B700-21

Peripherals

B700R122.WMF

BOOKLET STAPLER, BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR

August 2006

1.16 BOOKLET STAPLER, BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR
1.16.1 BOOKLET STAPLER

[B]

[C]

[A]
B700R903.WMF

• Open the front door.
• Pull out the stapler unit.
[A]: Harness cover (
 x2)
[B]: Booklet stapler support stay (
 x4,  x2,  x4)
[C]: Stapler (
 x4)

B700-22

August 2006

BOOKLET STAPLER, BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR

1.16.2 BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR
• Open the front door.
• Remove the stapler unit. (
1.13)
1. Remove:
[A]: Stay (
 x4).
[B]: Left plate (
 x4).

[B]

[A]
B700R122A.WMF

[F]
2. Remove:
[C]: Harness cover (
 x2)
[D]: Booklet stapler support stay
(
 x4,  x2,  x4)
[E]: Booklet stapler (
 x4)
[F]: Booklet stapler motor (
 x2,  x1)

[D]

To Reattach the Booklet Stapler Motor
3. Reattach the booklet stapler motor.
Important: Do not tighten the screws.

[C]

[E]

B700R123.WMF

[H]

Peripherals

4. Attach the special tool [G] and reattach
the booklet stapler stay.
NOTE: This tool is included with the
stapler spare part.
5. Turn the gear [H] with your finger until it
stops.
6. Tighten the screws to attach to the
booklet stapler motor.
7. Remove the stay again and remove the
special tool.
B700R131.WMF

8. Reattach the booklet stapler stay.
9. Push the stapler unit into the machine.

B700-23

[G]

GENERAL LAYOUT

August 2006

2. DETAILS
2.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
1
12
2
11
10

3

9
4
8

5

6
7
B700D101.WMF

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
*1

Proof Tray Junction Gate
Punch Unit
Stapler Junction Gate
Pre-Stack Junction Gate
Pre-Stack Tray
Corner Stapler (M20)

7. Lower Tray (Booklet)*1
8. Folder Rollers*1
9. Folder Plate*1
10. Booklet Stapler*1
11. Upper Tray (Shift)
12. Proof Tray

B700 Only

B700-24

August 2006

GENERAL LAYOUT

Paper direction
The operation of the proof tray and stapler junction gates direct the flow of the
paper once it enters the finisher:
Proof Junction Gate
Closed
Open
Closed

Stapler Junction Gate
Closed
Closed
Open

Paper Feeds
Paper feeds straight through
Paper feeds to the proof tray
Paper feds to the staple tray

Proof tray
Copies are sent to the proof tray (12) when neither sorting nor stapling are selected
for the job.
Upper tray
The upper tray (11) receives copies that are sorted and shifted and also receives
copies that have been corner stapled. Corner stapling is provided on both the B700
and the B701.
Pre-stack tray
The pre-stack tray (5) has a switchback mechanism to increase the productivity of
stapling. (
2.5) Pre-stacking is done for corner stapling in the B700/B701 and for
booklet stapling in the B700.
Lower tray

Peripherals

The lower tray (7) receives copies that have been center folded and stapled
(booklet stapling). Booklet stapling is not provided on the B701.

B700-25

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

August 2006

2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
2.2.1 UPPER AREA B700/B701
1

3

2

4

5

6

18

7

17
16
15

8

14

9

13

10

12
11

B700D201.WMF

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Upper/Proof Exit Motor (M4)
Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL2)
Upper Transport Motor (M2)
Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor (S7)
Proof Tray Exit Sensor (S10)
Proof Tray Full Sensor (S11)
Finisher Entrance Sensor (S1)
Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor (S9) (NonStaple Mode)
Upper Tray Limit Sensor (S12)

10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.

B700-26

Upper Tray Limit Switch (SW2)
Stacking Roller HP Sensor (S13)
Stacking Sponge Roller Motor (M10)
Upper Tray Exit Sensor (S6)
Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor (S8)
(Staple Mode)
Shift Roller HP Sensor (S5)
Shift Roller Motor (M18)
Exit Guide Plate Motor (M19)
Proof Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL1)

August 2006

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

2.2.2 LOWER AREA B700/B701
1

3

2

4

15

5
14
13
6
12
7

11

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Upper Tray Lift Motor (M21)
Lower Transport Motor (M3)
Entrance Motor (M1)
Front Door Safety Switch (SW1)
Pre-Stack Tray Exit Sensor (S2)
Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid
(SOL4)
Positioning Roller Solenoid (SOL3)

9

B700D202.WMF

8

8.

Positioning Roller Motor (M14)

9.

Lower Tray Full Sensor – Front (S34)*

10. Lower Tray Full Sensor – Rear (S33)*
11. Main Board (PCB1)
12. Upper Tray Full Sensor – (S20) *
13. Upper Tray Full Sensor – (S19)
14. Booklet Stapler Board (PCB2)*

1

1

2

1

15. Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid – (SOL5)

*1

B700 Only

*2

B701 Only

B700-27

*1

Peripherals

10

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

August 2006

2.2.3 PUNCH UNIT B702

2

4

3

5

6
7

1

8
10

9

B700D203A.WMF

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Punch Encoder Sensor (S24)
Punch Drive Motor (M24)
Punch HP Sensor (S24)
Punch Unit Board (PCB3)
Paper position sensor slide motor (M7)

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

B700-28

Paper Position Slide HP Sensor (S22)
Paper Position Sensor (S3)
Punch Hopper Full Sensor (S4)
Punch Movement HP Sensor (S21)
Punch Movement Motor (M9)

August 2006

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

2.2.4 STACKER/STAPLER - B700/B701
2

1

3
4

5
15

6
7
8

9
10

14

11

1.

Stack Present Sensor (S32)*

12
1

2.
3.
4.

Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor (S27)*
Stack Feed Out Belt HP Sensor (S16)
Feed Out Belt Motor (M5)

5.

Booklet Stapler – Rear (M23)*

6.
7.
8.

Booklet Stapler – Front (M22)*
Jogger Fence Motor (M15)
Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S15)

*1

B700 Only

1
1

1

9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

B700D204.WMF

Corner Stapler Movement Motor (M6)
Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (S14)
Corner Stapler (M20)
Corner Stapler Rotation Motor (M13)
Corner Stapler HP Sensor (S17)
Stapler Rotation HP Sensor (S18)

15. Stack Junction Gate Motor (M17) *

B700-29

1

Peripherals

13

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

August 2006

2.2.5 B700 FOLD UNIT
2
1

3

B700 only

4

10

9
8

5

7
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Clamp Roller HP Sensor (S25)
Fold Roller Motor (M12)
Fold Plate Motor (M11)
Fold Plate HP Sensor (S29)
Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor (M16)

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

B700-30

B700D205.WMF

Fold Cam HP Sensor (S30)
Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor (S28)
Fold Unit Entrance Sensor (S26)
Clamp Roller Retraction Motor (M8)
Fold Unit Exit Sensor (S31)

August 2006

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

2.2.6 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Here is a general summary of all the electrical components of the B700/B701
finishers.
NOTE: In the table below a number that appears in bold text (M8, etc.) denotes a
component that is on the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher B700 only.
No.
Component
Boards (PCB)
PCB1
PCB2
PCB3

Function

Main Board
Booklet Stapler Board
Punch Unit Board

The main board that controls the finisher
A separate board that controls booklet finishing.
The board that controls the punch unit.

M1

Finisher Entrance Motor

M2

Upper Transport Motor

M3

Lower Transport Motor

M4

Upper/Proof Tray Exit
Motor

Drives 1) the finisher entrance rollers, 2) and the punch
waste transport belt of the punch unit.
Drives the paper feed rollers that feed paper 1) to the proof
tray, 2) straight-through to the upper tray, 3) the pre-stack
tray entrance roller.
Drives paper feed rollers forward and reverse in the pre-stack
tray for the switchback, and drives the other rollers in the
lower transport area.
Drives 1) proof tray exit rollers, 2) extension and retraction of
the stacking sponge roller, 3) upper tray exit rollers.

M5

Feed Out Belt Motor

Drives the feed out belt that moves the stapled stacks out of
the stapling tray after stapling.

M6

Corner Stapler
Movement Motor

M7

Paper Position Sensor
Slide Motor

M8

Clamp Roller Retraction
Motor

M9

Punch Movement Motor

M10

Stacking Sponge Roller
Motor

M11

Fold Plate Motor

M12

Fold Roller Motor

Moves the corner stapler horizontally on a steel rod to
position the stapler at the stapling position at 1) the front, 2)
the rear (straight stapling), 3) the rear (diagonal stapling), or
4) the front and rear for double stapling.
Drives the movement of the paper position slide that holds
the paper position sensor (S3) that detects the position of the
paper.
Drives a large cam that alternately clamps and unclamps the
clamp retraction roller, the idle roller of the clamp roller pair.
When these rollers are clamped, they are part of the paper
feed path and feed the stack toward the bottom fence of the
fold unit. When the idle roller is retracted, the stacks falls a
very short distance (3 mm) onto the fold unit bottom fence
below. These rollers remain unclamped while the bottom
fence positions the stack for folding and while the stack is
folded by the fold rollers.
Drives the front/back movement of the punch unit to position
it correctly for stapling the paper below.
Rotates the stacking roller that drags each sheet back
against the end fence to jog the bottom of each sheet after
feed out to the upper tray.
Drives the fold plate that pushes the center of the stack into
the nip of the fold rollers to start the fold.
Rotates forward and drives the fold rollers that fold the stack
and feed it out of the fold unit, reverses to feed the fold once
more into the fold unit, and then rotates forward again to feed
the fold out of the fold unit.

B700-31

Peripherals

Motors

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

August 2006

No.

Component

Function

M13

Corner Stapler Rotation
Motor

M14
M15

Positioning Roller Motor
Jogger Fence Motor

M16

Fold Unit Bottom Fence
Lift Motor

M17

Stack Junction Gate
Motor

M18

Shift Roller Motor

M19

Exit Guide Plate Motor

M20

Corner Stapler

M21

Upper Tray Lift Motor

M22

Booklet Stapler: Front

M23

Booklet Stapler: Rear

M24

Punch Drive Motor

Swivels the corner stapler and positions it so the staple fires
at an oblique angle at the rear corner of the paper stack.
Drives the positioning roller in the stapling tray.
Drives the jogger fences in the stapling tray to jog both sides
of the stack before stapling.
Raises the bottom fence and stops when the center of the
vertical stack is opposite the edge of the horizontal fold
blade. The distance for raising the blade is prescribed as
one-half the size of the paper selected for the job. For large
paper, (A3, B4) the bottom fence first lowers the stack 10 mm
below the fold position, and then raises it to the fold position.
Drives the large cam that operates the stack junction gate at
the top of the stapling tray. When this gate is open, it directs
the ascending stack to the upper tray if it has been corner
stapled, or if it is closed the gate turns the booklet stapled
stack down so it falls onto the bottom fence of the fold unit.
Drives the shift roller that operates in shift mode to stagger
document sets as they feed out to the upper tray (making
them easier to separate).
Drives the mechanism that raises and lowers the exit guide
plate.
This is the roving corner stapler, mounted on a steel rail that
staples 1) at the front, 2) at the rear (straight staple), 3) at the
rear (diagonal staple), and 4) font and rear (two staples).
Raises and lowers the upper tray during feed out to keep the
tray at the optimum height until it is full.
Booklet stapler. Staples paper stacks in the center before
they are folded.
Booklet stapler. Staples paper stacks in the center before
they are folded.
Fires the punches that punch the holes in the paper.

Sensors
S1

Finisher Entrance
Sensor

S2

Pre-stack Tray Exit
Sensor

S3

Paper Position Sensor

S4

Punch Hopper Full
Sensor

S5

Shift Roller HP Sensor

S6

Upper Tray Exit Sensor

Provides two functions: (1) Detects paper entering the
finisher from the copier, and (2) Signals a jam if it detects
paper at the entrance when the copier is switched on.
Detects 1) paper fed from the pre-stack tray to the stapling
tray, and detects 2) paper in the pre-stack when the copier is
switched on. (This sensor performs no timing function. The
entire flow of paper through the pre-stacking mechanism is
controlled by motor pulse counts.)
The photosensor that detects the edge of the paper and
sends this information to the punch unit board where it is
used to position the punch for punching the holes in the
paper.
1) A photosensor that detects and signals that the punch
hopper is filled with punch waste and needs emptying, and 2)
confirms the presence of the punch hopper and signals an
error if it is missing or not installed completely.
Located near the shift roller motor, controls the front-to-back
movement of the shift roller as shifts paper during straightthrough feed.
A flat, photo sensor located inside the guide plate, detects
the leading edge and trailing edge of the paper as it feeds out
to the upper tray during straight-through jobs (with and
without stapling). When paper is fed to the upper tray, at the

B700-32

August 2006

Component

S7

Exit Guide Plate HP
Sensor

S8

Upper Tray Paper
Height Sensor (Staple
Mode)

S9

Upper Tray Paper
Height Sensor (NonStaple Mode)

S10

Proof Tray Exit Sensor

S11

Proof Tray Full Sensor

S12

Upper Tray Limit Sensor

S13

Stacking Roller HP
Sensor

S14

Stapling Tray Paper
Sensor

S15

Jogger Fence HP
Sensor

S16

Stack Feed-Out Belt HP
Sensor

S17

Corner Stapler HP
Sensor

Function
paper output slot this sensor signals an error when it detects
(1) paper has failed to leave the paper exit (lag error), (2)
detects paper has failed to arrive at the paper exit (late error),
(3) detects paper is in the exit slot when the machine is
turned on.
Controls the vertical movement of the control exit guide . The
guide plate is in the home position when the guide plate is
down and the actuator interrupts the sensor gap.
This is the upper sensor of the upper/lower paper height
sensor pair that controls the lift of the upper tray. This sensor
detects the paper height of the stack in the upper tray when
the copier is operating in the staple mode.
This is the lower sensor of the upper/lower paper height
sensor pair that controls the lift of the upper tray. When the
machine is switched on, the upper tray rises until the actuator
on the tray triggers this sensor to switch off the upper tray lift
motor.
This sensor detects and times the feeding of paper to the
proof tray. It also detects whether paper is present at the
proof tray exit when the copier is switched on.
The top of the stack in the proof tray increases until it nudges
the feeler of this sensor. The sensor then signals that the
proof tray is full and the job halts until some paper is removed
from the proof tray.
This sensor controls the position of the upper tray 1) during
straight-through feed out, 2) during shift feed out, 3) when the
machine is turned on. The machine obeys the signal of
whichever sensor is actuated first.
An actuator attached to an arm triggers this sensor. The tip of
the same arm depresses the upper tray limit switch If the
sensor fails, the tip of the arm will activate the upper tray limit
microswitch (SW2) and stop the lift of the upper tray.
Note: When the machine is turned on, the upper tray position
is controlled by either this sensor or the upper tray paper
height sensor (S9).
Controls the forward and back motion of the stacking roller (a
sponge roller) located at the output slot of the upper tray. The
sponge roller drags each ejected sheet back against the end
fence of the upper tray to keep the bottom of the stack
aligned.
A photo sensor that detects whether paper is in the stapling
tray. When this sensor detects paper, the bottom fence motor
raises or lowers the bottom fence to position the selected
paper size for booklet stapling.
Detects the home position of the jogger fences. When the
actuator on the jogger fence interrupts this sensor, the jogger
fence is in its home position and the jogger fence motor
(M15) stops.
Controls the position of the stack feed-out pawl on the stack
feed-out belt. Once the actuator on the feed belt nudges the
feeler of this sensor near the top of the stapler unit, the feed
out belt motor (M5) remains on for the time prescribed to
position the pawl at the home position to catch the next stack.
Located at the front the stapling tray and mounted above the
steel rod where the corner stapler travels, this sensor detects

B700-33

Peripherals

No.

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

No.

S18
S19

August 2006

Component

Stapler Rotation HP
Sensor
Upper Tray Full Sensor
(B700/B701)

S20

Upper Tray Full Sensor
(B701 only)

S21

Punch Unit HP Sensor

S22

Paper Position Side HP
Sensor

S23

Punch HP Sensor

S24

Punch Encoder Sensor

S25

Clamp Roller HP Sensor

S26

Fold Unit Entrance
Sensor

S27

Stack Junction Gate HP
Sensor

S28

Fold Bottom Fence HP
Sensor

S29

Fold Plate HP Sensor

S30

Fold Plate Cam HP
Sensor

S31

Fold Unit Exit Sensor

Function
the home position of the corner stapler. The corner stapler is
in its home position when the actuator on the corner stapler
unit interrupts this sensor.
Controls the angle of the position of the corner stapler during
oblique stapling.
B700: When the actuator on the side of the upper fence
enters the gap of this sensor, the sensor signals that the
upper tray is at its lowest position (full) and stops the job.
B701: One of two upper tray full sensors. This is the higher
tray full sensor for A3 and other heavy paper. The other
upper tray full sensor (20) is for lighter paper.
B700: This sensor is not used on the booklet finisher. There
is only one upper tray full sensor (S18).
B701: One of two upper tray full sensors. This is the lower
tray full sensor for A4 and smaller paper. The other upper
tray full sensor (19) is for larger paper.
Switches off the punch movement motor when the punch unit
returns to its home position. Pulse counts determine where
the punch unit pauses for punching and reversing.
Controls the movement of the paper position detection unit.
Switches on when the horizontal detection unit is at the home
position (HP is the reference point).
Detects the home position of the punch unit and controls the
vertical movement of the punches when they fire.
When the punch mode is selected for the job (2-hole, 3-hole,
etc.), the machine controls the operation of the punch drive
(M24) motor which drives a small encoder shaped like a
notched wheel. This wheel is rotated forward and reverse
precisely to select which punches are moved up and down
during the punch stroke.
Controls the movement of the clamp retraction roller (the idle
roller of the clamp roller pair).
Detects 1) the leading edge of the stack during booklet
stapling, and 2) also used to signal an alarm if a paper is
detected at the entrance of the fold unit when the copier is
turned on.
Controls the opening and closing of the stack junction gate.
Switches on when the stack junction gate is open and at the
home position.
Controls the movement of the bottom fence in the fold unit
using pulse counts based on the size of the paper selected
for the job to position the stack correctly for feeding.
Along with the fold plate cam HP sensor (S30) this sensor
controls the movement of the fold plate. The fold plate has
arrived at the home position when the edge of the plate
enters the gap of this sensor.
Along with the fold plate HP sensor (S29), this sensor
controls the movement of the fold plate. The actuator
mounted on the end of the roller that drives the folder plate
forward and back makes three full rotations, i.e. the actuator
passes the sensor gap twice and stops on the 3rd rotation
and reverses. This accounts for the left and right movement
of fold plate.
1) Detects the folded edge of the stack as it feeds out from
the nip of the fold rollers, stops the rollers, and reverses them
so the fold feeds back into the nip, 2) when the folded booklet

B700-34

August 2006

No.

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Component

S32

Stack Present Sensor

S33

Lower Tray Full Sensor Rear

S34

Lower Tray Full Sensor Front

Function
finally emerges from the nip of the fold rollers, detects the
leading and trailing edge of the booklet to make sure that it
feeds out correctly.
This sensor determines whether a there is paper at the turn
junction gate when the machine is turned on. If a stack is
present, this triggers a jam alert. (This sensor performs no
dynamic function such as pulse counting, etc. It only detects
whether paper is at the top of the fold unit when power its
turned on.)
This rear sensor is the lower sensor of the lower tray full
sensor pair. Two actuators are attached to the actuator arm
that touches the top of stapled and folded booklets as they
feed out. The on/off combinations of the two sensors are
used to detect when the tray is full and stop the job. (The
lower tray is stationary. At tray full, the job halts until booklets
are removed from the lower tray.)
This front sensor is the higher sensor of the lower tray full
sensor pair. Two actuators are attached to the actuator arm
that touches the top of stapled and folded booklets as they
feed out. The on/off combinations of the two sensors are
used to detect when the tray is full and stop the job. (The
lower tray is stationary. At tray full, the job halts until booklets
are removed from the lower tray.)

SOL1

Proof Junction Gate
Solenoid

SOL2

Stapling Tray Junction
Gate Solenoid

SOL3

Positioning Roller
Solenoid

SOL4

Stapling Edge Pressure
Plate Solenoid

SOL5

Booklet Pressure Roller
Solenoid

Opens and closes the proof tray junction gate. When the
solenoid switches on, it opens the gate and paper is diverted
to the proof tray. When this gate is closed, the paper goes
straight to the upper tray. I
Directs paper to the stapling tray. When this solenoid is on,
paper feeds straight through. When this solenoid is off, paper
feeds to the stapler tray below.
Engages the stapler transport motor and the positioning roller
of the stapling tray. The positioning roller pushes each sheet
down against the bottom fence to align the bottom the stack
for stapling. (The jogger fences align the sides.)
Operates the pressure plate of the stapler unit. The pressure
plate presses down the edge of stack in the stapling tray so it
is tight for stapling.
When the paper stack in the stapling tray feeds to the fold
unit, this solenoid turns on and operates the roller that
pushes on the surface of the stack to flatten it.

Switches
SW1
SW2

Front Door Safety
Switch
Upper Tray Limit SW

The safety switch that cuts the dc power when the front door
is opened.
A micro-switch that cuts the power to the upper tray lift motor
when the upper tray reaches its upper limit. This switch
duplicates the function of the upper tray limit sensor (S12)
and stops the upper tray if S12 fails.

B700-35

Peripherals

Solenoids

DRIVE LAYOUT

August 2006

2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
1

2

3

9

4
8
5

7
6

B700D206.WMF

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Upper Transport Motor (M2)
Upper/Proof Exit Motor (M4)
Upper Tray Lift Motor (M21)
Feed-Out Belt Motor (M5)
1
Fold Roller Motor* (M12)

*1

B700 Only

6.
7.
8.
9.

B700-36

*1

Folder Plate Motor (M11)
Positioning Roller Motor (M14)
Lower Transport Motor (M3)
Entrance Motor (M1)

August 2006

JUNCTION GATES

2.4 JUNCTION GATES
The positions of the proof tray and staple tray junction gates determine the
direction of paper feed after paper enters the finisher.
[B]

Proof Mode
[A]: Proof tray junction gate opens.
[B]: Staple tray junction gate remains
closed.
The proof tray junction gate directs paper
to the proof tray above.

[A]

B700D301.WMF

Shift Mode
[A]: Proof tray junction gate remains
closed.
[B]: Staple tray junction gate remains
closed.
With both junction gates closed, the paper
goes to the upper tray.

[A]

[B]

B700D302.WMF

[B]

[A]

Peripherals

Staple Mode
[A]: Proof tray junction gate remains
closed.
[B]: Staple tray junction gate opens
The staple tray junction gate directs the
paper to the staple tray below for jogging
and stapling.

B700D303.WMF

B700-37

PRE-STACKING

August 2006

2.5 PRE-STACKING
[3]

[7]

[5]

[8]

[4]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]
B700D992.WMF

This example describes what happens to Set 2 during the feed and stapling cycle
of sets that contain three pages.
[A]: While the Set 1 is being stapled in the staple tray [1], the 1st sheet of Set 2 [2]
feeds to the pre-stack tray, and the 2nd sheet of Set 2 [3] enters the finisher.
[B]: The pre-stack junction gate opens and the 1st sheet of Set 2 [4] switches back
to the top of the pre-stack tray as the 2nd sheet of Set 2 [5] starts to descend.
[C]: As the 2nd sheet of Set 2 continues to descend, the 1st sheet of Set 2 is fed
from the pre-stack tray. At this time the leading edges [6] of both sheets are
even.
[D]: The trailing edges of the 1st and 2nd sheets of Set 2 pass the junction gate [7]
as the 3rd sheet of Set 2 [8] enters the finisher.

B700-38

August 2006

PRE-STACKING

[9]
[11]

[10]
[E]

[F]

[12]
[G]

[H]
B700D993.WMF

[E]: The 1st and 2nd sheets of Set 2 [9] switch back together into the top of the
pre-stack and wait for the 3rd of Set 2 sheet to arrive.
[F]: The stapling of Set 1 in the staple tray [10] is completed.
[G]: Set 1 [11] exits the staple tray.
[H]: The three sheets of Set 2 [12] feed together into the stapler tray for stapling.
Pre-stacking is only done for A4, B5, and LT paper.
In one-staple mode, one sheet goes to the pre-stacking tray. Then two sheets go to
the stapler tray at the same time.

Peripherals

In two-staple mode and booklet mode, three sheets go to the pre-stacking tray.
Then four sheets go to the stapler tray at the same time.

B700-39

UPPER TRAY

August 2006

2.6 UPPER TRAY
[B]

[C]

[D]

[A]

[E]
[F]

[G]

[H]

B700D108.WMF

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:

Upper Tray Lift Motor
Upper Feeler
Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 1 (Staple Mode)
Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 2 (Non-Staple Mode)
Lower Feeler
Upper Tray Limit Sensor
Upper Tray Limit Switch
Upper Tray Full Sensors

Important
• The B700 (shown above) has only one upper tray full sensor (the higher sensor
at [H])
• The B701 has two upper tray full sensors (the upper and lower sensor at [H]). On
the B701 the upper sensor detects tray full for heavier paper (A3, DLT, B4, LG,
12 x 18”), and the lower sensor detects tray full for lighter paper (A4, LT, etc.).
• The tray full capacity is 2,000 sheets (B700) for A4, LT and 3,000 sheets (B701)
for A4, LT.

B700-40

August 2006

UPPER TRAY

Five sensors and one switch control the operation of the upper tray lift motor [A].
Upper Tray Raising and Lowering
Operation Mode

Standby
(Non-Staple Mode)

Sensors, Switch
[C]

[D]

OFF

OFF

[F]

ON

Shift

ON

ON

[G]
Stops the lift motor is at the standby position
when the actuator of the upper feeler
deactivates sensor [C] (when it is between
sensors [C] and [D]).
Note: Sensor [F] and switch [G] are used as
backup if sensor [C] fails or if the upper tray is
not attached.

Straight Through

Standby
(Staple Mode)

Action

Non-staple mode operation: During
operation, tray lift is controlled only by sensor
[F]. When the actuator leaves sensor [F], the
tray lowers until the actuator reactivates sensor
[F].
Standby: The upper tray stops and waits for
the paper output when the actuator activates
sensor [C]. [D] is not used for staple mode
Staple Mode Operation:
• The upper tray lowers the prescribed
distance immediately after the stack exits.
• The upper tray rises until the actuator
activates sensor [C] and stops the tray lift
motor (and the tray) to wait for the next set.
• Sensor [F] and switch [G] are used as
backup if sensor [C] fails.

Tray Full

B701 The operation of the upper tray full sensor is the same as the B700. Capacity:
1,500 sheets for A3, B4 or other large paper.
An additional upper tray full sensor (below sensor [H]) allows more sheets to stack
on the upper tray. Capacity: 3,000 sheets (A4, LT)

B700-41

Peripherals

B700 When the actuator on the tray activates the upper tray full sensor [H] the tray lift
motor [A] switches off. Operation resumes after some copies are removed from
the tray. Upper Tray Capacity: 2,000 sheets (A4, LT)

LOWER TRAY (B700 ONLY)

August 2006

2.7 LOWER TRAY (B700 ONLY)
 Ready


 Full 1

 Full 2
 Full 3

[D]
[A]

[C]
[B]

B700D358.WMF

The lower tray sensor actuator arm [A] rests on the top of the stack of stapled
booklets as they are output to the lower tray. A flap depressor [B] keeps the open
ends of the booklets down.
The front lower tray full sensor (S34) [C] and rear lower tray full sensor (S33) [D]
detect when the lower tray is full of booklets.
Important
• The front lower tray full sensor is mounted higher than the rear lower tray full
sensor.
• The lower tray is stationary. When it becomes full, the stapling and folding job
stops until booklets are removed from the tray.
• If the lower tray is not installed (this is detected if the front and rear sensors
remain OFF), the machine will not operate in the booklet staple and fold mode.
When booklet mode is selected, the tray full message appears on the operation
panel.
The combinations of the two actuators and two sensors as the actuator arm rises
determines the number of booklets that the lower tray can hold before the job stops.

B700-42

August 2006

LOWER TRAY (B700 ONLY)

The tray full detection depends on the size of the paper and the number of sheets
in one stapled and folded booklet.
In the table below, the conditions ( Ready  Full 1, 	 Full 2 
 Full 3: See the
illustration on the previous page) refer to the states of the sensors described on the
previous page.
Condition
Ready
Full 1
Full 2
Full 3 (or lower tray not installed)

Front Sensor
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

Rear Sensor
OFF
ON
ON
OFF

In the tables below:
• "Sht" denotes "sheets in a stack".
• "Cnt" denotes "Count" (see below for an explanation).
After a booklet is feed out, the fold roller motor stops the exit roller. The machine
then monitors the tray full sensors every 100 ms. The machine checks for a certain
condition, based on the size of the paper and the number of sheets in the booklet.
An example is shown below. Tell the operators that the number of sheets that the
lower tray can hold will vary greatly.
Lower Tray Full Condition Table
A3 (DLT)
Full 1

1 Sht

2 Sht

3 Sht

4 Sht

5 Sht

6 Sht

7 Sth

8 Sht

9 Sht

…

3 Cnt

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

…

15 Cnt

—

—

—

—

—

—

…

Full 2

—

Full 3

—

—

—

7 Cnt

13 Cnt

4 Cnt

2 Cnt

2 Cnt

2 Cnt

…

1 Sht

2 Sht

3 Sht

4 Sht

5 Sht

6 Sht

7 Sth

8 Sht

9 Sht

…

Full1

16 Cnt

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

…

Full 2

—

10 Cnt

10 Cnt

15 Cnt

20 Cnt

15 Cnt

10 Cnt

8 Cnt

8 Cnt

…

Full 3

—

—

—

5 Cnt

…

Examples
After the copier makes a booklet with 1 sheet of A3/DLT paper, the machine
checks every 100 ms for the ‘Full 1’ condition. If the Full 1 condition occurs 3 times
(shaded block in the table above), the machine detects that the tray is full.
After the copier makes a booklet with 5 sheets of A4/LT paper, the machine checks
every 100 ms for the ‘Full 2’ condition. If the Full 2 condition occurs 20 times
(shaded block in the table above), the machine detects that the tray is full.

B700-43

Peripherals

A4 (LT)

CORNER STAPLING

August 2006

2.8 CORNER STAPLING
2.8.1 STACKING AND JOGGING
[B]
[A]

[D]

[C]

[E]

[F]

B700D102.WMF

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:

Jogger Fence Motor (M15)
Jogger Fences
Positioning Roller
Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S15)
Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid (SOL4)
Pressure Plate

B700-44

August 2006

CORNER STAPLING

At the beginning of the job, the jogger fence motor (M15) [A] switches on and
moves the jogger fences [B] to the standby position (7.5 mm from the sides of the
selected paper size).

Peripherals

When each sheet passes the pre-stack tray exit sensor (S2) and enters the
stapling tray:
• The jogger fence motor switches on and moves the jogger fences to within 5.5
mm of the sides of the selected paper size.
• The positioning roller solenoid (SOL3) switches on for the time prescribed for the
paper size. This pushes the positioning roller [C] onto the sheet and pushes it
down onto bottom fence. This aligns the edge of the stack.
Next, the jogger fence motor:
• Switches on again and moves the jogger fences to within 2.6 mm of the sides of
the stack to align the sides of the stack.
• Reverses and moves the fences to the standby position (7.5 mm away for the
sides) and waits for the next sheet.
• The jogger fence HP sensor [D] switches off the jogger motor at the end of the
job.
After the last sheet feeds:
• The stapling edge pressure plate solenoid [E] (SOL4) switches on and pushes
the pressure plate [F] onto the stack to press down the edge for stapling.
• The corner stapler staples the stack.

B700-45

CORNER STAPLING

August 2006

2.8.2 STAPLER MOVEMENT
[B]

[A]

[C]

B700D103.WMF

[A]: Stapler Movement Motor
[B]: Stapler
[C]: Stapler Rotation Motor

B700-46

August 2006

CORNER STAPLING

The stapler performs horizontal and rotational movement in each of the four staple
modes:
• Front 1 staple
• Rear 1 staple
• Rear diagonal staple
• Rear/Front 2 staples.
The stapler movement motor [A] drives a timing belt that moves stapler [B] left and
right on its stainless steel rail.
The stapler rotation motor [C] rotates the stapler into position for diagonal stapling
at the rear.
• The stapler movement motor switches on and moves the stapler the standby
stapling position. (This is the stapling position for the paper size selected for the
job.)
• The stapler movement motor switches off and the stapler waits for the signal to
fire (or swivel and for diagonal stapling).
If the stack is to be stapled at two positions:
• The stapler movement motor moves the stapler to the front position and staples
the front.
• The stapler movement motor moves the stapler to the rear and the stapler
staples the rear.
If the stack will be stapled at the rear with a diagonal staple, the staple moves to
the rear. When it is time for stapling, the rotation motor rotates the stapler to the
correct angle and holds the stapler in that position while the stapler fires.

Peripherals

The stapling positions can be fine adjusted with SP6109.

B700-47

CORNER STAPLING

August 2006

2.8.3 CORNER STAPLING
[B]

[A]
[C]

B468D015.WMF

[E]

[D]

B700D304.WMF

Staple firing is driven by the stapler motor [A] inside the stapler unit. The stapler
hammer [B] fires the stapler [C].
The cartridge set sensor [D] detects the cartridge at the correct position.
The staple end sensor [E] detects the staple end condition.

B700-48

August 2006

BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY)

2.9 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY)
2.9.1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM

[A]

[B]

[C]

B700D305.WMF

As soon as the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and the jogger fences,
the stack feed out belt moves.
In booklet mode, immediately after the edges are aligned by the positioning roller
and jogger fences, the booklet pressure solenoid switches on and the booklet
pressure roller presses down on the stack until booklet stapling is finished. This
prevents the stack from shifting during stapling.

B700-49

Peripherals

[A]: Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid (SOL5)
[B]: Booklet Pressure Roller Arm
[C]: Booklet Pressure Roller

BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY)

August 2006

2.9.2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING
Overview
1
2

24

3
4

23

5

22

6

21

7
8
9

20

10
11
19
12
18

13
17
16

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

15

Leading Edge Pressure Roller
Stack Present Sensor (S32)
Feed Out Belt Pawl 1
Booklet Staplers x2 (M22, M23)
Stack Feed Out Belt HP Sensor (S16)
Feed Out Belt Pawl 2
Positioning Roller
Booklet Pressure Roller (Rear)
Jogger Fences x2
Pre-Stack Exit Roller
Pressure Plate
Stapling Tray Bottom Fence

14
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.

B700-50

B700D910.BMP

Corner Stapler (M20)
Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (S14)
Feed Out Belt
Fold Unit Bottom Fence
Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor (S28)
Fold Unit Entrance Sensor (S26)
Fold Unit Exit Rollers x2
Fold Unit Exit Sensor (S31)
Fold Rollers x2
Clamp Rollers x2
Stack Junction Gate
Stack Transport Roller

August 2006

BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY)

1

3

2
[1]

[8]

[2]

[4]
[3]
[6]
[5]

[7]
B700D912.BMP

1
The last sheet of the stack [1] enters the stapling tray. The jogger fences [2] jog the
last sheet into position (based on the width of the selected paper size) and then
retract and stop 1 mm away from the sides of the stack.

2
The pressure plate [3] and booklet pressure roller [4] press down on the sheet. The
stack feed out belt switches on and the pawl [5] on the feed out belt catches the
bottom of the stack and raises it. The stapling tray sensor [6] detects the trailing
edge of the paper stack.

The feed out belt [7] raises the stack to the prescribed stapling position and stops.
The jogger fences move to the sides of the stack and the booklet staplers [8] staple
the stack.

B700-51

Peripherals

3

BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY)

[
2

4

August 2006

5

6
[7]

[3]
[8]

[4]

[9]

[12]

[14]

[1]

[5]

[6]
[10]

[11]
[13]
B700D913.BMP

4
The jogger fences remain 1 mm away from the sides of the stack. The feed out belt
[1] raises the stack until the top of the stack is 10 mm past the leading edge
pressure roller [2] and stops. The leading edge pressure roller descends and
applies pressure to the top of the stack. The stack junction gate [3] (normally open)
closes. The pressure roller [4] and pressure plate [5] retract.

5
The feed out belt [6], transport rollers [7], [8], and clamp rollers [9] rotate and feed
the stack past the closed stack junction, over the top and down toward the bottom
fence [10]. At the same time, the fold unit bottom fence descends from its home
position and stops 10 mm below the fold position.

6
The rollers feed the leading edge of the stack to within 3 mm of the stack stopper of
the bottom fence [13]. The fold unit entrance sensor [11] detects the stack and
opens the clamp rollers [12]. The stack drops 3 mm onto the fold unit bottom fence
[13]. At this time, the first sheet [14] of the next stack feeds to the stapling tray.

B700-52

August 2006

BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY)

7

8

9

[4]
[5]
[2]

[3]

[1]

B700D914.BMP

7
The bottom fence [1] raises the stack to the prescribed fold position [2].

8
The fold plate [3] moves to the left and advances 1/3 its maximum horizontal stroke
and exerts 20 kg (44 lb.) of pressure at the fold rollers [4].

With the fold plate pushing the stack into nip of the fold rollers [5], the fold rollers
begin to rotate and fold the stack as it feeds out.

B700-53

Peripherals

9

BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY)

10

August 2006

11

12

[1]

[6]

[4]

[2]

[5]

[7]

[3]

B700D915.BMP

10
When the fold rollers [1] feed the stack 10 mm past the nip, the fold plate retracts
until it no longer touches the stack. The fold unit exit sensor [2] detects the folded
edge of the stack and stops the fold rollers.

11
The rotation of the fold rollers [4] reverses and feeds the folded edge back until
only 3 mm of the fold [5] remains at the nip.

12
The fold rollers [6] rotate forward once again feed out. The fold unit exit sensor [7]
once again detects the edge of the fold.
NOTE: You can do SP6114 to increase the sharpness of the fold. The number of
forward and reverse feeds can be set in the range of 2 to 30. The machine
repeats Steps 11 and 12. For more, please refer to Section "5 Service
Tables.

B700-54

August 2006

BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY)

13

14

15

5
3

4

2

1
7

6

B700D916.BMP

13
With the feed of the stack halted, the fold plate [1] retracts. The fold plate HP
sensor (not shown) detects the fold plate and stops it at its home position.

14
The fold rollers [2] and fold unit exit rollers [3] begin to rotate together and feed out
the folded booklet to the lower tray.

Once the trailing edge of the stack passes the fold unit exit sensor [4], the clamp
rollers [5] close to be ready to feed the next stack. The fold unit bottom fence [6]
descends. The bottom fence HP sensor [7] stops the bottom fence when it detects
the actuator on the bottom fence.

B700-55

Peripherals

15

BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY)

August 2006

Booklet Stapling and Folding Mechanisms
[G]
[F]

[E]
[B]

[D]
[A]
[C]

B700D104.WMF

Booklet Stapler
[A]: Feed Out Belt Pawl. Raises the stack to stapling position.
[B]: Booklet Stapler – Rear
[C]: Booklet Stapler – Front
Stack Junction Gate
[D]: Stack Junction Gate Motor. Drives a timing belt and stack junction gate cam.
[E]: Stack Junction Gate Cam. Opens and closes the stack junction gate.
[F]: Stack Junction Gate. The stack junction gate motor and stack junction gate
cam close the stack junction gate. The feed out belt pawl raises the stapled
stack and sends it over the top and down to the fold unit.
[G]: Leading Edge Pressure Roller. Presses down on the leading edge of the stack
after booklet stapling.

B700-56

August 2006

BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY)

[B]

[A]



[D]



[E]
[H]
[G]

[C]

B700D105.WMF

Clamp Roller
[A]: Fold Roller Motor. Drives the stationary clamp drive roller  as well as the fold
rollers (see next page).
[B]: Clamp Rollers.
 Clamp Roller – Drive. Rotated by the fold roller motor, this stationary roller
feeds the stack down with the retracting roller closed.
 Clamp Roller – Retracting. Opened and closed by the retraction motor [C].
[C]: Clamp Roller Retraction Motor. Operates the clamp roller cam that retracts the
retracting clamp roller. The clamp rollers feed the stack to within 3 mm of the
bottom fence when closed and then open to drop the stack onto the bottom
fence.
[D]: Clamp Roller HP Sensor. Controls the rotation of the clamp roller retraction
motor and cam that open and close the retracting clamp roller.
[E]: Clamp Roller Cam. Forces open the spring loaded retracting clamp roller.
Bottom Fence
[F]: Bottom Fence. Raises the booklet stapled stack to the fold position.
[G]: Bottom Fence HP Sensor. Detects the actuator on the bottom fence and stops
it at the home position after folding.
[H]: Bottom Fence Lift Motor. Raises the bottom fence and stapled stack to the
fold position prescribed for the paper size.

B700-57

Peripherals

[F]

BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY)

August 2006

[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[B]
[G]

[A]

B700D106.WMF

Fold Plate
B700D107.WMF
[A]: Bottom Fence Stack Stoppers. Catches the stack after it is released by the
clamp rollers.
[B]: Fold Plate Motor. Drives the timing belt and gears that move the fold plate.
[C]: Fold Plate Cam. Controls the movement of the fold plate to the left (into the
nip of the fold rollers) and right (toward the fold plate home position).
[D]: Fold Plate HP Sensor. Controls operation of the fold plate motor.
[E]: Fold Plate. Moves left and pushes the stack into the nip of the fold rollers and
then moves right to retract.
Fold Rollers
[F]: Fold Roller Motor. Drives forward to feed out the stack at the fold and then
reverses to feed the fold in to sharpen the crease, and then drives forward
again to feed out the folded stack. This reverse/forward cycle is done once.
NOTE: This cycle can be repeated by changing the setting of SP6114.
[G]: Fold Rollers. Driven by the fold roller motor, this roller pair feeds out the stack
at its fold, reverses to feed in the stack to, and then feeds forward again
(assisted by the fold unit exit rollers – not shown) to feed out the stack to the
lower tray.

B700-58

August 2006

UPPER TRAY OUTPUT

2.10 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT
2.10.1 FEED OUT
[D]

[E]
[G]

[A]
[F]
[C]
[B]

B700D109.WMF

[H]

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:

Feed Out Belt Motor
Stack Feed-Out Belt
Pawl
Exit Rollers
Exit Guide Plate Motor
Exit Guide Plate
Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor
Upper Tray

B700-59

Peripherals

B700D110.WMF

UPPER TRAY OUTPUT

August 2006

After the stack is stapled, the feed out belt motor [A] switches on and drives the
feed out belt [B].
The a pawl [C] attached to the feed out belt catches on the stack and lifts the stack
toward the feed out slot.
The exit guide plate [F] remains open as the stack emerges at a prescribed
distance away from the exit roller.
Next, the exit guide plate closes and the exit roller feeds the stack out.
The opening and closing of the exit guide plate is controlled by the rising and falling
of a link driven by a rotating cam attached to the shaft of the exit guide plate motor
[E].
The feed out belt motor stops 300 ms to prevent the stapled stack from rising too
high.
Next, the feed out belt motor switches on again, then the pawl actuates its home
position sensor and switches off the motor.
There are two output pawls on the feed out belt to improve the productivity of the
feed out operation.

B700-60

August 2006

UPPER TRAY OUTPUT

2.10.2 FEED OUT STACKING

[E]
[F]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

B700D359.WMF

Upper/proof exit motor [A] drives feed roller [B] and stacking sponge roller [C].
Stacking sponge roller motor [D] moves the sponge roller forward and back with
link [E].

Peripherals

The position of the stacking sponge roller [C] is controlled by the stacking sponge
roller motor which is switched on and off by the stacking roller HP sensor [F].

B700-61

PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701)

August 2006

2.11 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701)
2.11.1 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION

[A]

[B]

[C]

B700D351.WMF

Skew Correction Before Punching
This punch unit corrects for paper skew and then positions the punch unit to punch
holes at the correct position. Each sheet is punched one at a time.
Paper feeds out of the copier. The finisher entrance sensor [A] detects the leading
edge of the sheet.
The finisher entrance roller [B] stops rotating briefly while the copier exit rollers
continue to rotate. This buckles the paper against the finisher entrance roller to
correct skew. The finisher entrance roller [C] starts to rotate again and feeds the
sheet into the finisher.
These SP codes adjust the skew operation in the punch unit:
• SP6103. This SP corrects the punch hole alignment. To do this, it corrects the
skew of each sheet by adjusting the amount of time the finisher entrance roller
remains off while the exit roller of the machine remains on. For more, see
Section "5. Service Tables".
• SP6104. This SP determines whether the finisher entrance roller stops to correct
skew when paper enters the finisher. You can use this SP to disable the skew
correction. For more, see Section "5. Service Tables".

B700-62

August 2006

PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701)

[E]

[B]

[F]

[D]
[C]

[G]
[A]





	

B700D352.WMF

Punch Unit Position Correction
These operations (skew correction before punching, and punch unit position
correction) increase the accuracy of the punch alignment.



The trailing edge of the sheet passes the finisher entrance sensor [A].
The paper position slide unit [B] moves the paper position sensor [C] forward to
the edge of the paper.
The paper position sensor detects the position of the paper edge and sends
this information to the punch unit board. The machine uses the detected
position of the paper edge to calculate the correct position for punching.
The upper transport motor switches on and rotates the feed rollers [D] the
prescribed distance to position the paper under the punch unit.
Using the result of the position calculation, the punch unit control board moves
the punch unit [E] to the adjusted punch position.
The paper position slide unit and its paper sensor, move back to the paper
position slide home position sensor [F], and the punch unit fires the punches to
make the holes.

	

The feed rollers [G] feed the punched paper out of the punch unit and into the
paper path.

B700-63

Peripherals



PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701)

August 2006

SP6102

SP6101

B700D360.WMF

These SP codes adjust the punch hole alignment:
• SP6101 Adjusts the punch positions in the direction of paper feed.
• SP6102 Adjusts the punch position perpendicular to the direction of feed.
For more, see Section "5. Service Tables".

B700-64

August 2006

PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701)

2.11.2 PUNCH MECHANISMS
Paper Position Detection
[F]

[D]

[E]

[A]

[C]

[B]
B700D353.WMF

Finisher Entrance Motor (M1)
Finisher Entrance Roller
Finisher Entrance Sensor (S1)
Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor (M7)
Paper Position Sensor (S27)
Paper Position Sensor Slide HP Sensor (S22)

The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the finisher entrance rollers [B] that
feed paper from the copier into the finisher. The finisher entrance sensor (S1) [C]
detects paper when it enters the finisher, and detects paper jams.
The paper position slide sensor motor (M7) [D] extends and retracts the paper
position slide that holds the paper position sensor (S27) [E]. The paper position
sensor detects the position of the paper edge. The detected position of the paper is
used to calculate and position the punch unit for punching.
The paper position slide HP sensor (S22) [F] detects the paper position slide when
it retracts and stops the paper position slide motor so the slide stops at its home
position.

B700-65

Peripherals

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:

PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701)

August 2006

Punch Unit Movement
[C]

[B]
[A]

B700D354.WMF

[A]: Punch Movement Motor (M9)
[B]: Punch Movement HP Sensor (S21)
[C]: Punch Drive Motor (M24)
The punch movement motor (M9) [A] extends and retracts the punch unit to
position it at the correct position for punching.
The punch movement HP sensor (S21) [B] detects the position when it retracts,
switches off the punch position movement motor, and stops the punch unit at its
home position.
The punch drive motor (M24) [C] fires the punches that punch holes in the paper
below.

B700-66

August 2006

PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701)

[C]

Punch Selection and Firing

[A]

[B]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:

Punch Drive Motor (M24)
Punch Encoder Wheel
Punch Encoder Sensor (S24)
Punch HP Sensor (S23)

[D]
1

The punch drive motor (M24) [A] turns
the small, notched encoder wheel [B]
through the gap in the punch encoder
sensor [C] (S24). The sensor output is
used to control the punch timing.

2

[E]
B700D355.WMF

The timing for 2-hole punching [E] is
different from 3-hole punching [F].
When the punch unit is at the punching
position, the punch motor turns until the
encoder detects the starting position for
2-hole or 3-hole punching.
1

2

For two-hole punching, it only turns 180
degrees not 360
[F]
B700D356.WMF

Then, the punch drive motor turns clockwise to the ‘1’ position, to be ready for the
next sheet of paper.

B700-67

Peripherals

• This is the ‘1’ position in the diagrams
(the top diagram is for 2-hole punching,
and the bottom diagram is for 3-hole
punching).
Then, the punch drive motor turns
counter-clockwise to the ‘2’ position. This
movement punches the holes in the
paper.

PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701)

August 2006

2.11.3 PUNCH HOPPER MECHANISM

[A]

[B]
[D]

[C]
B700D357.WMF

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:

Finisher Entrance Motor (M1)
Punch Waste Belt
Punch Waste Hopper
Punch Hopper Full Sensor (S4)

The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the timing belt and gears that rotate the
punch waste belt [B].
The punchouts fall from the punch unit onto the belt. The belt moves the punchouts
to the front and dumps them in the punch waste hopper [C].
The punch hopper full sensor [D]:
• Signals that the hopper is full when it detects the top of the stack of punchouts
that have collected in the hopper.
• It also detects when the punch hopper is set properly.

B700-68

August 2006

FINISHER JAM DETECTION

2.12 FINISHER JAM DETECTION

R1 to R4

R8 to R12

R5 to R7

Display

Mode

R1 to R3

Proof
Shift
Staple

R3

Proof

Jam
Finisher
entrance
sensor late
Finisher
entrance
sensor lag
Proof exit
sensor late
Proof exit
sensor lag
Upper tray exit
sensor late

R4

Shift

Upper tray exit
sensor lag

What It Means
After main machine exit sensor goes OFF,
finisher entrance sensor does not go ON even
after enough time to feed 450 mm.
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, it does
not go OFF after enough time to feed a sheet 1.5
times its length has elapsed.
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, proof
exit sensor does not go ON even after enough
time to feed 450 mm.
After finisher entrance sensor goes OFF, proof
exit sensor does not go OFF even after enough
time to feed 450 mm.
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, upper
tray exit sensor does not go ON even after
enough time to feed 485 mm.
After finisher entrance sensor goes OFF, upper
tray exit sensor does not go OFF even after
enough time to feed 650 mm.

B700-69

Peripherals

B700D996.WMF

FINISHER JAM DETECTION
Display

Mode

R5 to R7

Staple

R8 to
R12

Booklet
Staple
(B700
Only)

Jam
Pre-stack tray
exit sensor lag
Pre-stack tray
exit sensor late
Fold unit
entrance
sensor late
(S26)
Fold unit exit
sensor late
(S31)
Fold unit exit
sensor lag
(S31)

August 2006
What It Means
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, prestack tray exit sensor does not go ON even after
enough time to feed 650 mm.
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, prestack tray exit sensor does not go OFF even after
enough time to feed 1650 mm.
The fold unit entrance sensor goes not go ON
after enough time has elapsed to feed 1.5 times
the length of the stack after the leading edge of
the stack reaches the stack present sensor
(S32).
The fold unit exit sensor does not go ON after
enough time has elapsed for the stack to feed 1.5
times its length from the fold position.
After the fold unit exit sensor goes ON, it does
not go OFF after enough time has elapsed to
feed 442.9 mm.

B700-70

COVER INTERPOSER TRAY
(Machine Code: B704)

06/09

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B704-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6

EXTERNAL COVERS......................................................................... B704-1
FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER ................................................. B704-2
FEED BELT ........................................................................................ B704-3
GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT ........................................................... B704-4
MAIN BOARD ..................................................................................... B704-5
MOTOR REPLACEMENT................................................................... B704-6
1.16.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR .......................................... B704-6
1.16.2 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR............................................... B704-6
1.16.3 FEED MOTOR, TRANSPORT MOTOR................................... B704-7

2. DETAILS............................................................................... B704-8
2.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................ B704-8
2.1.1 MAIN LAYOUT........................................................................... B704-8
2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT......................................................................... B704-9
2.1.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION ...................................................... B704-10
2.1.4 PAPER PATH .......................................................................... B704-13
2.2 PAPER FEED ................................................................................... B704-14
Power On ..................................................................................... B704-14
Paper Separation and Feed ......................................................... B704-14
Bottom Tray Lift............................................................................ B704-14
Paper Near-end............................................................................ B704-14
Paper End .................................................................................... B704-14

i

06/09

September 2006

EXTERNAL COVERS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS

[E]

[A]
[D]

[C]

[F]
[B]

B470R001.WMF

Peripherals

[A]: Open the feed cover.
[B]: Upper front cover (
 x 2)
NOTE: To remove the upper front cover, screw [C] must be removed.
[D]: Rear upper cover (
 x 2)
[E]: Slip sheet tray (
 x 2,  x 1)
[F]: Rear middle cover (
 x 2)

B704-1

06/09

FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER

September 2006

1.2 FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER

[A]

[B]

B470R002.WMF

B470R003.WMF

Open the feed cover.
[A]: Feed unit
• The unit is spring loaded. Push it to the right to release it, then lift it out.
[B]: Pick-up roller ( x 2, bushings x 2)

B704-2

06/09

September 2006

FEED BELT

1.3 FEED BELT
[E]

[A]

[D]
[B]
[C]
B470R004.WMF

[F]

Feed unit (
 1.2)
[A]: Pick-up roller unit.
• Pull the unit away from the bushings in the direction of the arrow.
[B]: Feed belt holder
• Hold the feed belt holder by the sides, then lift up to separate from the
holder.
• Pull slowly to avoid losing the springs.
[C]: Feed belt.
Re-assembly
1. Position the pick-up roller unit [A] and feed belt holder [B] as shown above.
2. On the rear side, slide out the bushing, and rotate [D] until its flat side is parallel
with [E], then snap it on.
3. On the front side, rotate [F] until its flat side is parallel with [D], then snap it on.
Viewed from the bottom, the plates must be aligned.

B704-3

06/09

Peripherals

B470R005.WMF

GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT

September 2006

1.4 GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT

[A]
[B]

[C]

B470R151.WMF

Adjust the guide plate if the holes punched in the covers or slip sheets are not
correctly aligned with holes punched in the other sheets.
1. Open the feed cover.
2. Loosen the screw [A].
3. Push the table [B] left or right to change its position, then tighten the screw.
NOTE: If you want to see the scale [C], you must remove the rear cover and
the support tray.

B704-4

06/09

September 2006

MAIN BOARD

1.5 MAIN BOARD

[A]

B470R101.WMF

Open the top cover.
Rear cover (
 x 1)
[A]: Main board ( x 9, 
 x 4)

Peripherals

NOTE: All DIP switch settings on the main board of the cover sheet unit should be
set to OFF.

B704-5

06/09

MOTOR REPLACEMENT

September 2006

1.6 MOTOR REPLACEMENT
1.6.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR

[A]

[B]
B470R102.WMF

Open the top cover.
Rear middle cover (
 x 1) (
 1.1)
[A]: Motor bracket ( x 1, harness x 1, 
 x 2, timing belt x 1)
[B]: Motor (
 x 2)

1.6.2 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR

[A]

B470R104.WMF

Rear upper cover (
 1.1)
[A]: Bottom plate lift motor (harness x 2,  x 1, 
 x 2)

B704-6

06/09

September 2006

MOTOR REPLACEMENT

1.6.3 FEED MOTOR, TRANSPORT MOTOR

[A]

[C]
[D]

[B]
B470R105.WMF

[E]

B470R103.WMF

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:

Feed gear ( x 1, pin x 1, timing belt x 1, bushing x 1)
Transport gear ( x 1, pin x 1, timing belt x 1, bushing x 1)
Motor bracket (harness x 5, 
 x 4)
Feed motor ( x 1, 
 x 2)
Transport motor ( x 1, 
 x 2)

B704-7

06/09

Peripherals

Rear upper cover (
 1.1)
NOTE: When removing the feed gear and transport gear, hold one hand under the
gear to catch the pin as it falls from the hole in the shaft.

OVERVIEW

September 2006

2. DETAILS
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MAIN LAYOUT
1

2

3

5

4

6

B470D001.WMF

1. Support tray
2. Slip sheet tray
3. Pick-up roller
4. Feed belt
5. Separation roller
6. Grip roller

B704-8

06/09

September 2006

OVERVIEW

2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
2

3

1

4

5
6
7

B470D003.WMF

1. Pick-up Roller
2. Feed Belt
3. Bottom Plate Lift Motor
5. Transport Motor
6. Timing Belt
7. Vertical Transport Motor

B704-9

06/09

Peripherals

4. Feed Motor

OVERVIEW

September 2006

2.1.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
The width sensors [A] (S1, S2, S3) and length sensors [B] (S4, S5, S6) detect the
width and length of the original on the interposer feed tray.

DLT SEF
A3 SEF
8 K SEF
B4 SEF
LG
F4

S6

A4 SEF

S5

S4

10"x14"

LT SEF
US EXE SEF
16 K SEF
B5 SEF
8"x10"
HLT SEF
A5 SEF

LT LEF
16 K LEF
B5 LEF

US EXE LEF

A5 LEF
HLT LEF

P5 P4 P3 P2

S3

P1

S2 S1
B470D901.WMF

B704-10

06/09

September 2006

OVERVIEW

The table below lists the sensor output for each paper size.
A3
B4
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
B5 SEF
B5 LEF
A5 SEF
A5 LEF
11" x 17"
10" x 14" SEF
81/2" x 14"
81/2" x 13"
81/2" x 11"
11" x 81/2"
8" x 10"
51/2" x 81/2"
81/2" x 51/2"
71/2" x 101/2"
(US Exec.)
101/2" x 71/2"
(US Exec.)
8K
16 K SEF
16 K LEF

S1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1

S2
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0

S3
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0

S4
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0

S5
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0

S6
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

1
1
1

1
0
1

1
0
1

1
1
0

1
0
0

1
0
0

The cover interposer tray detects all the paper sizes listed above. However, there
are some limitations on the display of the correct paper size.
257 x 364 mm
182 x 257
148 x 210
210 x 148
11" x 17"
81/2" x 14"
81/2" x 11"
11" x 81/2"

Europe/Asia

Displays “8K LEF” *2
Displays “F4 SEF” *2
Displays “16 K SEF” *2
Displays “16 K LEF” *2

*1

: Cannot be corrected.

*2

: B064 series: Can be corrected with SP5959 006 (Paper Size – Cover Sheet).
B140 series: Can be corrected with SP5158

B704-11

06/09

Peripherals

B4 SEF
B5 SEF
A5 SEF
A5 LEF
DLT SEF
LG SEF
LT SEF
LT LEF

North America
Displays 10”x14*1
Displays “US Exec.” *1
Displays “HLT SEF” *1
Displays “HLT LEF” *1

OVERVIEW

September 2006

B064 series: Paper Size Detection
North America
Execute SP5959 006 and enter the correct number for the size of the paper loaded
for feeding from the cover interposer tray.
Loaded

Display (Default)

81/2" x 13"
101/2" x 71/2"
8" x 10"

81/2" x 14"
81/2" x 11"
81/2" x 11"

To Select for
Display
81/2" x 13"
101/2" x 71/2"
8" x 10"

Enter
165
173
171

Europe/Asia
Execute SP5959 006 and enter the correct number for the size of the paper loaded
for feeding from the cover interposer tray.
Loaded

Display (Default)

11" x 17"
81/2" x 11"
11" x 81/2"
81/4" x 13"

8K
16 K SEF
16 K LEF
81/2" x 13" SEF

To Select for
Display
11" x 17"
81/2" x 11"
11" x 81/2"
81/4" x 13"

Enter
160
166
38
168

B070/B071, B140 series: Paper Size Detection
Some paper sizes are almost the same and cannot be detected as different sizes
by the sensors. To select the sizes that are detected, use SP 5158.
B132 series: Use SP 6107.

B704-12

06/09

September 2006

OVERVIEW

2.1.4 PAPER PATH
1

2

3

4
5
6

B470D006.WMF

1. Pick-up Roller
2. Feed Belt
3. Separation Roller
4. Grip Roller
6. Transport Roller 2
The paper feeds from the tray, to the feed belt, then to the grip roller and down into
the paper path to the finisher below.

B704-13

06/09

Peripherals

5. Transport Roller 1

PAPER FEED

September 2006

2.2 PAPER FEED
[B]

[C]

[H]
[G]
[A]
[E]
[D]

[F]
B470D005.WMF

Power On
When paper is placed on the tray, the paper set sensor [A] in the tray actuates and
switches on the bottom plate lift motor [B]. The top of the stack raises the pick-up
roller unit until the actuator on this unit actuates the pick-up roller position sensor
[C] and switches the motor off.

Paper Separation and Feed
The pick-up roller [D] picks up the original, and the feed belt [E] feeds the sheet to
the grip roller. The separation roller [F] reverses if more than one sheet is fed

Bottom Tray Lift
As sheets feed from the top of the stack:
• The pick-up roller unit descends until the actuator on the pick-up roller unit drops
out of the pick-up roller position sensor [C].
• The bottom plate lift motor switches on to raise the stack until the actuator enters
the pick-up roller unit position sensor again and switches the motor off.
• This repeats until the end of the job or until paper runs out.

Paper Near-end
Near-end is detected when the actuator [G] on the bottom plate enters the nearend sensor [H].

Paper End
After the last sheet feeds the paper set sensor [A] goes off and signals paper out.

B704-14

06/09

3000-SHEET FINISHER
(Machine Code: B706)

06/09

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B706-1
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ............................................ B706-2
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B706-3
3.1 DOOR AND COVER REPLACEMENT............................................... B706-3
Front Door...................................................................................... B706-3
Left Inner Cover ............................................................................. B706-3
Inner Cover .................................................................................... B706-3
Side Table and Upper Tray ............................................................ B706-4
Left Covers..................................................................................... B706-5
Rear Cover and Top Cover ............................................................ B706-5
Shift Tray........................................................................................ B706-5
3.2 ROLLERS ........................................................................................... B706-6
3.2.1 SHIFT POSITIONING ROLLER................................................. B706-6
3.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER ............................................................ B706-7
3.2.3 ALIGNMENT BRUSH ROLLER .................................................. B706-8
3.3 STACK FEED-OUT BELT................................................................... B706-9
3.4 JOGGER FENCE ............................................................................. B706-10
3.5 SENSORS ........................................................................................ B706-11
3.5.1 STACK HEIGHT 1, 2 AND EXIT GUIDE OPEN SENSOR ...... B706-11
Stack Height Sensors 1 and 2...................................................... B706-11
Exit Guide Open Sensor .............................................................. B706-11
3.5.2 UPPER TRAY PAPER LIMIT AND EXIT SENSOR ................. B706-12
Upper Tray Paper Limit Sensor.................................................... B706-12
Upper Tray Exit Sensor................................................................ B706-12
3.5.3 SHIFT TRAY EXIT SENSOR.................................................... B706-13
3.5.4 ENTRANCE AND STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSORS... B706-14
Entrance Sensor .......................................................................... B706-14
Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor...................................................... B706-14
3.5.5 PRE-STACK PAPER SENSOR ................................................ B706-15
3.5.6 STAPLE WASTE HOPPER SENSOR ...................................... B706-16
3.5.7 STAPLER ROTATION HP AND STAPLER RETURN SENSORS
.................................................................................................. B706-17
3.6 STAPLER ......................................................................................... B706-18
3.7 SHIFT TRAY MOTOR ...................................................................... B706-19
3.7.1 STACKING ROLLER / ROLLER DRAG MOTORS,
RETURN HP SENSOR...................................................................... B706-20
3.8 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT .................................................................. B706-23
3.8.1 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT COVER............................................. B706-23
3.8.2 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT .......................................................... B706-24
3.8.3 JOGGER TOP FENCE MOTOR.............................................. B706-25
i

06/09

3.8.4 JOGGER BOTTOM FENCE MOTOR ...................................... B706-26
3.9 PUNCH UNIT (B531)........................................................................ B706-27
3.9.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT ......................................... B706-27
Front to Rear Adjustment ............................................................. B706-27
Right to Left Adjustment............................................................... B706-27
3.10 JOGGER UNIT (B513) ................................................................... B706-28
3.10.1 JOGGER UNIT ...................................................................... B706-28
3.10.2 JOGGER UNIT PCB .............................................................. B706-29
3.10.3 JOGGER UNIT MOTOR ........................................................ B706-30

4. TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................ B706-31
5. SERVICE TABLES ............................................................. B706-32
5.1 DIP SWITCHES................................................................................ B706-32
5.2 TEST POINTS .................................................................................. B706-32
5.3 FUSES.............................................................................................. B706-32

6. DETAILS............................................................................. B706-33
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4

TRAY AND STAPLER JUNCTION GATE......................................... B706-33
PAPER PRE-STACKING.................................................................. B706-34
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING............................................ B706-35
STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT .......................................................... B706-36
Side-to-Side ................................................................................. B706-36
Rotation (1) .................................................................................. B706-37
Rotation (2) .................................................................................. B706-37
6.5 STAPLER ......................................................................................... B706-38
6.6 FEED-OUT ....................................................................................... B706-40
6.7 PAPER EXIT STACKING ................................................................. B706-41
6.8 SHIFT TRAY..................................................................................... B706-42
6.8.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................. B706-42
Stand-by Mode............................................................................. B706-42
6.8.2 SHIFT TRAY UP/DOWN MOVEMENT ..................................... B706-43
Sort/Stack Mode (Shift Mode) ...................................................... B706-43
Staple Mode................................................................................. B706-43
6.8.3 SHIFT TRAY LOWER LIMIT DETECTION ............................... B706-44
6.9 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT ...................................... B706-45
6.10 STAPLING Z-FOLDED PAPER ...................................................... B706-46
6.11 JAM CONDITIONS ......................................................................... B706-47
6.12 PUNCH UNIT (B531)...................................................................... B706-48
6.12.1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE............................................................. B706-48
6.12.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION............................................. B706-49
6.13 JOGGER UNIT(B513) .................................................................... B706-50
6.13.1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT................................ B706-50
6.13.2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE .......................................................... B706-51

7. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION................................ B706-52
7.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................... B706-52
7.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION .................................. B706-53
7.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................... B706-56
ii

06/09

September 2006

Installation

1. INSTALLATION

Peripherals

For details about installing the 3000 Sheet Finisher B706, please refer to the
instructions you received with the instructions or the “1. Installation” in the main
machine service manual.

B706-1

06/09

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

September 2006

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
For details about the 3000 Sheet Finisher B706 PM table, please refer to Section
“2. Preventive Maintenance” in the main Service Manual.

B706-2

06/09

September 2006

Replacement and Adjustment

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3.1 DOOR AND COVER REPLACEMENT

[A]

[D]

[B]

[C]

B478R502.WMF

B478R505.WMF

1. Remove the front door screw [A] (
 x 1).
2. Remove the front door [B].

Left Inner Cover
1. Remove the front door.
2. Remove the left inner cover [C] (
 x 1).

Inner Cover
1. Remove the inner cover [D] (
 x 3).

B706-3

06/09

Peripherals

Front Door

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

September 2006

Side Table and Upper Tray
[C]

[B]
[A]

B478R503.WMF

1. Remove the side table [A] (
 x 2). Slide to the right to remove it.
2. Click the release lever [B] and remove the upper tray [C].

B706-4

06/09

September 2006

[D]

Replacement and Adjustment

[E]
[B]
[A]
[J]
[G]
[H]
[I]

[F]
[C]
B478R504.WMF

B478R501.WMF

Left Covers
1. Remove the left upper panel [A].
2. Remove the left upper cover [B] (
 x 2,  x 2).
3. Remove the door and left inner cover. (See “Front Door and Left Inner Cover
Replacement”.)
4. Remove the rear cover [F] (
 x 2).

Rear Cover and Top Cover
1. Remove the upper tray. (See “Side Table and Upper Tray”.)
2. Remove the step screws [D] (
 x 2).
3. Remove the top cover [E] (
 x 2). Slide to the right to remove.
4. Remove the rear cover [F] (
 x 2).

Shift Tray
1. If you need to lower the shift tray, support the bottom of the tray with your hand,
then pull the gear toward you [G] to release the tray and lower it.
2. Remove the shift tray [H] (
 x 4).
3. Remove the shift tray rear cover [I] and front cover [J] (
 x 1 each).
B706-5

06/09

Peripherals

5. Remove the left lower cover [C] (
 x 4).

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

September 2006

3.2 ROLLERS
3.2.1 SHIFT POSITIONING ROLLER

[A]

[B]

[C]
B478R522.WMF

1. Above the shift tray, pull the roller mount [A] out.
2. Remove the rollers [B] and [C] ( x 1 each)

B706-6

06/09

September 2006

Replacement and Adjustment

3.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER

[C]
[A]

[B]
B478R506.WMF

1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the snap ring [A].
3. Release the rubber belt [B].
Peripherals

4. Replace the positioning roller [C].

B706-7

06/09

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

September 2006

3.2.3 ALIGNMENT BRUSH ROLLER

[C]

[B]

[A]

[D]
[E]
B478R507.WMF

[H]
[G]
[I]
[F]

B478R508.WMF

1. Open the front door and pull out the staple unit.
2. Remove the rear cover.
3. Remove the main board and all connectors (
 x 8).
4. Remove the screw [A] and tension spring [B] for the tension bracket [C], and
release the tension of the timing belt.
5. Remove the pulley [D] and bushing [E] ( x 2).
6. Remove the inner cover [F] (
 x 1).
7. Open the guide [G], then remove the alignment brush roller assembly [H] ( x
1).
8. Remove the alignment brush roller [I] ( x 1, bushing x 1 front/back).

B706-8

06/09

September 2006

Replacement and Adjustment

3.3 STACK FEED-OUT BELT

B478R523.WMF

[B] [C]
[A]

[E]

[F]
[D]
B478R524.WMF

2. Pull out the jogger and stapler unit.
3. Remove the inner cover [A] (
 x 2).
4. Remove the sensor bracket [B] (
 x 1,  x 1, clamp x 1).
5. Remove the front guide [C] (
 x 1, spring x 1).
NOTE: When re-installing, make sure that the flat end of the shaft is against
the plate.
6. Remove the front panel [D] from the stays (
 x 6).
7. Remove the old belt [E] from the bottom, center, then the top.
NOTE: 1) Make sure the ribbed side of the new belt and pawl [F] are facing down.
2) Make sure the new belt is engaged at all three rollers.

B706-9

06/09

Peripherals

1. Open the front door.

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

September 2006

3.4 JOGGER FENCE
[B]

[A]

B478R525.WMF

1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the jogger and stapler unit.
3. Push both fences to the center.
4. Remove the left jogger fence [A] (
 x 1)
5. Remove the right jogger fence [B] (
 x 1).
NOTE: If the screws are difficult to remove or re-attach, remove the jogger
fence belt and spring plate.

B706-10

06/09

September 2006

Replacement and Adjustment

3.5 SENSORS
3.5.1 STACK HEIGHT 1, 2 AND EXIT GUIDE OPEN SENSOR

[C]

[E]
[F]

[D]

[G]

[B]
[A]

B478R509.WMF

Stack Height Sensors 1 and 2
1. Remove the top cover. (
 3.71)
3. Remove the protector plate [A] (
 x 1).
4. Remove the sensor feeler [B] (
 x 1).
5. Remove the sensor bracket [C] (
 x 1).
6. Replace the stack height sensor 1 [D] ( x 1) or 2 [E] ( x 1).

Exit Guide Open Sensor
1. Remove the sensor bracket [F] (
 x 1).
2. Replace the exit guide open sensor [G] ( x 1).

B706-11

06/09

Peripherals

2. Remove the left upper panel and left upper cover (
 x 2,  x 2).

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

September 2006

3.5.2 UPPER TRAY PAPER LIMIT AND EXIT SENSOR

[D]
[C]

[B]

[E]

[A]

B478R510.WMF

Upper Tray Paper Limit Sensor
1. Remove the top cover.
2. Remove the sensor cover [A] (
 x 2).
3. Remove the sensor bracket [B] (
 x 1).
4. Replace the upper tray paper limit sensor [C] ( x 1).

Upper Tray Exit Sensor
5. Remove the sensor bracket [D] (
 x 1).
6. Replace the upper tray exit sensor [E] ( x 1).

B706-12

06/09

September 2006

Replacement and Adjustment

3.5.3 SHIFT TRAY EXIT SENSOR

[B]

[C]

[A]
[D]

[A]
B478R511.WMF

[E]

Peripherals

B478R512.WMF

1. Remove the top cover.
2. Open the front door.
3. Remove the inner cover.
4. Release the upper exit guide springs [A] (x 2).
5. Disconnect the link [B] from the cam (
 x 1).
6. Remove the upper exit guide [C] ( x 1,  x 1).
7. Remove the guide stay [D] (
 x 2).
8. Replace the shift tray exit sensor [E] (
 x 1) ( x 1).

B706-13

06/09

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

September 2006

3.5.4 ENTRANCE AND STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSORS

[B]
[A]
B478R513.WMF

[D]

[C]

B478R514.WMF

Entrance Sensor
1. Disconnect the finisher from the copier.
2. Remove the sensor bracket [A] (
 x 1).
3. Replace the entrance sensor [B] (
 x 1) ( x 1).

Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor
1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the sensor bracket [C] (
 x 1).
3. Replace the stapler tray entrance sensor [D] (
 x 1)( x 1).

B706-14

06/09

September 2006

Replacement and Adjustment

3.5.5 PRE-STACK PAPER SENSOR

[A]

[B]

B478R521.WMF

[C]
B478R515.WMF

[E]

B478R516.WMF

1. Remove the rear cover.
2. Remove the main board [A] (
 x 8,  x all).
3. Release the guide [B] ( x 2).
4. Open the front door.
5. Remove the left vertical transport guide [C].
6. Remove the middle vertical transport guide [D] ( x 1).
7. Replace the pre-stack paper sensor [E] ( x 1).

B706-15

06/09

Peripherals

[D]

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

September 2006

3.5.6 STAPLE WASTE HOPPER SENSOR
[A]

[B]

[C]

B478R517.WMF

1. Open the front door, pull out the stapler unit, then remove the rear cover.
2. Remove the rear cover (
 x 2).
3. Remove the staple waste hopper [A] ( x 1).
4. Remove the hopper holder [B] ( x 2).
5. Replace the staple waste hopper sensor [C] ( x 1).

B706-16

06/09

September 2006

Replacement and Adjustment

3.5.7 STAPLER ROTATION HP AND STAPLER RETURN SENSORS
[C]

[A]

[B]
B478R519.WMF

1. Remove the stapler unit. (See next page.)
2. Remove the stapler mount bracket [A] (
 x 4) (Springs x 2).
3. Replace the stapler rotation HP sensor [B] ( x 1).

Peripherals

4. Replace the stapler return sensor [C] ( x 1).

B706-17

06/09

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

September 2006

3.6 STAPLER

[C]

[B]

[A]
B478R518.WMF

1. Open the front door and pull out the staple tray.
2. Remove the stapler unit harness cover [A].
3. Remove the stapler cover [B] (
 x 1,  x 2).
4. Lift the stapler off of the pegs. [C]

B706-18

06/09

September 2006

3.7

Replacement and Adjustment

SHIFT TRAY MOTOR

[A]

B478R531.WMF

1. Remove the front door and rear cover (
 3.1).

Peripherals

2. Shift motor [A] ( x 2, 
 x 3)

B706-19

06/09

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

September 2006

3.7.1 STACKING ROLLE / ROLLER DRAG MOTORS, RETURN HP
SENSOR
[B]

[A]

[C]

B478R526.WMF

1. Do the procedures to remove the front door and all covers, with the exception
of the left lower cover and top cover (labeled [C]: and [E]).
NOTE: Be sure to lower the shift tray by pulling the gear toward you. The shift
tray must be down.
2. Remove the tray shift motor. (
 3.7)
3. Remove the left stay [A] (
x 3)
4. Unhook the stay at top [B].
5. Remove the shift tray mounting plate [C] (
 x 2).

B706-20

06/09

September 2006

Replacement and Adjustment

[E]
[F]

[A]

[D]

[C]

[B]

B478R527.WMF

[G]

[H]

6. Remove the end fence [A] and plate [B] (
 x 2).
7. Disengage the end fence races [C] from the rollers [D] behind the fence.
8. Remove the upper stay [E] (
 x 4).
9. Remove the lower stay [F] (
 x 4).
10. Remove the cover [G] (
 x 4).
11. Remove the stacking roller/drag motor stay [H] ( x 3, 
 x4).
NOTE: Make sure the motor and sensor connectors are disconnected before
removing.

B706-21

06/09

Peripherals

B478R528.WMF

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

September 2006

[A]
[B]

B478R530.WMF

[D]

[C]
[E]

B478R529.WMF

12. Remove the stacking motor bracket [A] (bushing x 1, 
 x 1).
13. Remove the stacking motor [B] (
 x 2).
14. Remove the roller drag motor bracket [C] (
 x 2).
15. Remove return HP sensor [D].
16. Remove the roller drag motor [E] (
 x 1).

B706-22

06/09

September 2006

Replacement and Adjustment

3.8 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT
3.8.1 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT COVER

[B]

[A]

B706R101.WMF
B706R101.WMF

1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the stapler tray unit [A].

Peripherals

3. Remove the Z-fold jogger unit cover [B] (
 x 2).

B706-23

06/09

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

September 2006

3.8.2 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT

[A]
B706R103.WMF
B706R103.WMF

1. Open the front door and pull out the stapler tray unit.
2. Remove the Z-fold jogger unit cover (
 x 2).
3. Remove the Z-fold jogger unit [A] (
 x 4,  x 4,  x 2).

B706-24

06/09

September 2006

Replacement and Adjustment

3.8.3 JOGGER TOP FENCE MOTOR

[A]

[B]

B706R102.WMF
B706R102.WMF

1. Open the front door and pull out the stapler tray unit.
2. Remove the Z-fold jogger unit cover (
 x 2).
3. Remove the motor bracket [A] (
 x 2, timing belt x 1).

Peripherals

4. Remove the jogger top fence motor [B] (
 x 2,  x 1,  x 1).

B706-25

06/09

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

September 2006

3.8.4 JOGGER BOTTOM FENCE MOTOR

[A]
B706R104.WMF
B706R104.WMF

1. Open the front door and pull out the stapler tray unit.
2. Remove the jogger bottom fence motor [A] (
 x 2, timing belt x 1,  x 1,  x
1).

B706-26

06/09

September 2006

Replacement and Adjustment

3.9 PUNCH UNIT (B531)
3.9.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT

[A]

B531R101.WMF

The position of the punched holes can be adjusted in two ways.

Front to Rear Adjustment
Three spacers [A] are provided with the punch unit for manual adjustment of the
hole position in the main scan direction:
• 2 mm (x 1)
• 1 mm (x 2)

Right to Left Adjustment
The position of the punched holes can be adjusted right to left in the sub scan
direction with SP6-113 Punch Hole Position Adjustment. The position can be
adjusted in the range ±7.5 mm in 0.5 mm steps. The default setting is 0.
Press the  key to toggle the ± selection. A +VE value shifts the punch holes left
toward the edge of the paper, and a -VE value shifts the holes right away from the
edge.

B706-27

06/09

Peripherals

NOTE: One spacer was installed at installation and the remaining spacers were
fastened with a screw to the rear frame of the finisher under the rear cover
and slightly above the lock bar.

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

September 2006

3.10 JOGGER UNIT (B513)
3.10.1 JOGGER UNIT

[A]

B513I002.WMF

[B]
B513R003.WMF

4. Remove the jogger unit cover [A] (
 x 2).
5. Remove the jogger unit [B] (
 x 2,  x 1).

B706-28

06/09

September 2006

Replacement and Adjustment

3.10.2 JOGGER UNIT PCB

[A]

B513R001.WMF

1. Remove the jogger unit from the finisher. (
 3.10.1)

Peripherals

2. Remove the jogger unit control PCB [A] (
 x 2,  x 3)

B706-29

06/09

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

September 2006

3.10.3 JOGGER UNIT MOTOR
[A]

[B]

B513R002.WMF

1. Remove the jogger unit from the finisher. (
 3.10.1)
2. Remove the shift jogger motor [A] (
 x 2,  x 1).
3. Remove the shift jogger lift motor [B] (
 x 2,  x 1).

B706-30

06/09

September 2006

Troubleshooting

4. TROUBLESHOOTING

Peripherals

If the machine logs an SC code in the display of the operation panel, see “Section
4 Troubleshooting” of the Service Manual. Section 4 contains a complete list of all
service codes and how to troubleshoot the problem.

B706-31

06/09

SERVICE TABLES

September 2006

5. SERVICE TABLES
For details about 3000-Sheet Finisher B706 SP codes, please refer to “5. Service
Tables” in the main machine service manual.

5.1 DIP SWITCHES
1
0
0
0

DPS100
2
3
0
0
0
1
0
0

4
0
0
1

Description
Default
Free run: A4 LEF, staple mode
Free run: staple and tray shift

NOTE: Do not use any other settings.

5.2 TEST POINTS
No.
TP100
TP101
TP102
TP103

Label
(5V)
(GND)
(RXD)
(TXD)

Monitored Signal
+5 V
Ground
RXD
TXD

5.3 FUSES
No.
FU100

Function
Protects 24 V.

B706-32

06/09

September 2006

Details

6. DETAILS
6.1 TRAY AND STAPLER JUNCTION GATE
Upper Tray Mode
[A]
[D]

[C]

[B]

B478D506.WMF

Sort/Stack Mode

Staple Mode
[A]

[A]
[D]

[C]

[C]

[B]

B478D505.WMF

[B]

B478D507.WMF

Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or
down by the combinations of open and closed junction gates.
Solenoid/Gate
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]

Stapler junction gate solenoid
Stapler junction gate
Tray junction gate solenoid
Tray junction gate

Selected Operation Mode
Upper Tray
Sort/Stack
Staple
Off
Off
ON
Closed
Closed
OPEN
ON
Off
Off
OPEN
Closed
Closed

B706-33

06/09

Peripherals

[D]

DETAILS

September 2006

6.2 PAPER PRE-STACKING

[A]

[B]
[E]
[F]
[C]

[D]

B478D000.WMF

This mechanism improves productivity in staple mode. It is only used when copying
on A4, LT, or B5 (all LEF).
During stapling, the copier has to wait. This mechanism reduces the wait by
holding the first two sheets of a job while the previous job is still being stapled. It
only works during the second and subsequent sets of a multi-set copy job.
The pre-stack junction gate solenoid [A] turns on 120 mm after the 1st sheet of
paper turns on the entrance sensor, and this directs the sheet to the pre-stack tray
[B]. (This sheet cannot be fed to the stapler yet, because the first set is still being
stapled.) The pre-stack paper stopper solenoid [C] turns on 350 mm after the 1st
sheet turns on the entrance sensor. The pre-stack paper stopper [D] then stops the
paper.
The pre-stack junction gate solenoid turns off 230 mm after the trailing edge of the
1st sheet passes through the entrance sensor, and the 2nd sheet is sent to the
paper guide [E]. The pre-stack paper stopper is released about 40 mm after the
2nd sheet turns on the pre-stack stopper sensor [F], and the two sheets of copy
paper are sent to the stapler tray. All sheets after the 2nd sheet go to the stapler
tray via the paper guide [E].

B706-34

06/09

September 2006

Details

6.3 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING
[C]

[G]

[A]
[F]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[L]

[M]
[I]
[K]
[J]

B478D508.WMF

In the staple mode, as every sheet of paper arrives in the jogger unit, it is vertically
and horizontally aligned, then the staple edge is pressed flat to ensure the edge of
the stack is aligned correctly for stapling.

Horizontal Paper Alignment: When the print key is pressed, the jogger motor [F]
turns on and the jogger fences [G] move to the wait position about 7.2 mm wider
than the selected paper size on both sides. When the trailing edge of the paper
passes the staple unit entrance sensor, the jogger motor moves the jogger fences
3.7 mm towards the paper. Next, the jogger motor turns on again for 3.5 mm for the
horizontal paper alignment then goes back to the wait position.
Paper Stack Correction: After the paper is aligned in the stapler tray, the left [J],
center [K], and right [L] stack plate motors switch on briefly and drive the front stack,
center stack, and rear stack plates against the edge of the stack to flatten the edge
completely against the staple tray for stapling. When the next copy paper turns on
the stapler entrance sensor, the stack plate motor turns on and returns to its home
position. The home position is detected by stack plate HP sensor [M].

B706-35

06/09

Peripherals

Vertical Paper Alignment: About 60 ms after the trailing edge of the copy passes
the staple tray entrance sensor [A], the positioning roller motor [B] is energized to
push the positioning roller [C] into contact with the paper. The positioning roller and
alignment brush roller [D] rotate to push the paper back and align the trailing edge
of the paper against the stack stopper [E].

DETAILS

September 2006

6.4 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT

[A]

[B]

[C]

B478D513.WMF

Side-to-Side
The stapler motor [A] moves the stapler [B] from side to side. After the start key is
pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
If two-staple-position mode is selected, for the first stack the stapler moves to the
rear stapling position first, staples, moves to the front position, staples and waits at
the front. For the second stack, the stapler staples the front corner first, then moves
to the rear corner and staples.
NOTE: For continuous stapling jobs, the corners are stapled rear then front for the
odd number stacks and stapled front then rear for even number stacks.
After the job is completed, the stapler returns to its home position. This is detected
by the stapler HP sensor [C].

B706-36

06/09

September 2006

Details

[A]

[B]

[F]

[D]
B478D514.WMF

[E]

B478D523.WMF

B478D515.WMF

[C]

In the oblique staple position mode, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the
stapler units [B] 45° to counterclockwise after it moves to the stapling position.

Rotation (2)
When the staple end condition arises, the stapler motor moves the stapler to the
front and the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler unit to clockwise to remove
the staple cartridge [C]. This allows the user to add new staples.
Once the staples have been installed, and the front door closed, the stapler unit
returns to its home position. As the stapler unit is returning to the home position,
the stapler return sensor [D] is activated, the return solenoid [E] turns on and it
assists the guide roller [F] to return to its guide (this guide directs the stapler during
rotation).

B706-37

06/09

Peripherals

Rotation (1)

DETAILS

September 2006

6.5 STAPLER

[C]
[E]
[B]

[D]
[A]
B478D521.WMF

B478D516.WMF

[E]

[F]

B478D522.WMF

[G]

When the aligned copies are brought to the stapling position by the positioning
roller and jogger fences, the staple hammer motor [A] starts stapling.
During stapling, the stapler trims off the excess length [B] of the staples by lowering
the cutter [C]. This excess length depends on the number of copies in the set; there
will be very little for a stack containing 100 sheets. The staple waste drops into the
tray [D] in the stapler. When the stapler unit returns to its home position, the tray
hits the shaft [E] and the tray opens. The staple waste drops into the staple waste
hopper [F]. When the staple waste hopper is full, the actuator on its base activates
the staple waste hopper sensor [G]. An SC737 (Full Finisher Staple Waste Hopper)
is displayed.
B706-38

06/09

September 2006

Details

[C]

[D]

[A]
[B]

[E]
B478D518.WMF

[F]

B478D517.WMF

When a staple end or no cartridge condition is detected, a message is displayed
advising the operator to install a staple cartridge. If this condition is detected during
a copy job, the indication will appear, and the copy job will stop.
The staple cartridge has a clinch area [D] where jammed staples collect. The
operator can remove the jammed staples from the clinch area by pressing in the
releases [E] on both sides, then lowering the bracket lever [F].

B706-39

06/09

Peripherals

The stapler has a staple end sensor [A], cartridge set sensor [B] and staple
hammer HP sensor [C].

DETAILS

September 2006

6.6 FEED-OUT
[G]

[D]

[A]
[B]

[C]
B478D519.WMF

[I]

[H]
[E]

[F]

B478D512.WMF

After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts. The pawl
[B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up and feeds
it to the shift tray exit roller [D]. When stapling starts, the exit guide motor [E] opens
the upper exit guide [F], which includes the upper shift tray exit roller [G], in order to
feed out the leading edge of the copy set smoothly. The exit guide motor turns on
again a certain time after stapling is complete, and the upper exit guide plate is
lowered. Then the shift tray exit roller takes over the stack feed-out.
The on-off timing of the exit guide motor is detected by the exit guide open sensor
[H].
The stack-feed-out motor turns off when the pawl actuates the stack feed-out belt
home position sensor [I].

B706-40

06/09

September 2006

Details

6.7 PAPER EXIT STACKING
[A]
[B]
[E]

[C]

[F]
[D]

[H]

[G]

[I]

B478D524.WMF

The stacking roller assembly [A] is fastened to a plate [B] on a shaft by a spring [C].
The cam [D], in contact with the bottom of the plate, is connected to the stacking
roller drag motor [E] via a timing belt.
The stacking roller drag motor and timing belt rotate the cam against the bottom of
the plate to move the rollers forward and back with each sheet ejected onto the
shift tray.

The actuator [H] is mounted on the cam and rotating with both rotating clockwise)
and detects the roller assembly home position when the actuator leaves the gap of
the return drive HP sensor [I] and signals the machine that the rollers are at the
home position. The machine uses this information to control paper feed timing and
confirm that the mechanism is operating correctly. The cam and actuator make one
complete rotation for every sheet fed out of the machine onto the shift tray.

B706-41

06/09

Peripherals

The stacking roller motor [F] drives the shaft [G] that rotates the stacking rollers
counter-clockwise as the rollers move back. The simultaneous rotation and
backward movement of the roller assembly pulls each sheet back toward the copier
to align the edges of the stack on the shift tray.

DETAILS

September 2006

6.8 SHIFT TRAY
6.8.1 OVERVIEW

[E]

[D]
[F]
[G]

[A]

[B]

[C]
B478D010.WMF

The shift tray lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of the shift tray [B] through
gears and timing belts [C].

Stand-by Mode
After the main switch is turned on, or when the stack is removed from the tray, the
end of the feeler on the tray falls and its actuator [D] rotates up into staple mode
HP sensor 2 [E] (S7) and switches it on. This switches on the lift motor, which
raises the tray until the tray pushes the actuator out of the sensor [E]. Then, the lift
motor stops the shift tray; this is the home position (the actuator [D] is between the
two sensors [E] and [F].
The shift tray upper limit switch (SW1) prevents the drive gear from being damaged
if staple mode HP sensor 2 [E] fails. In case of a failure, when the shift tray pushes
up the actuator [G] and positioning rollers, the switch will cut the power to the shift
tray lift motor.

B706-42

06/09

September 2006

Details

6.8.2 SHIFT TRAY UP/DOWN MOVEMENT
[D]

[B]

[C]
[H]
[A]

[G]
[F]
[E]

B478D010.WMF

Sort/Stack Mode (Shift Mode)

In sort/stack mode, if S12 fails when the tray is being lifted, the shift tray upper limit
switch (SW1) prevents the drive gear from being damaged.

Staple Mode
The shift tray moves to home position, which is when the actuator [B] is between
the staple mode home position sensors [C] and [D]. During feed-out, the shift tray
is lowered automatically at prescribed intervals. When the stack is removed from
the tray, the tray returns to the home position for stand-by mode. (
6.8.1)

B706-43

06/09

Peripherals

The shift tray moves to home position, which is when the actuator [F] has just
exited the shift mode home position sensor [G] (S12). During feed-out, the tray is
lowered automatically at prescribed intervals; sensor [D] (S7) is ignored. When the
stack is removed from the tray, the end of the feeler [E] between the arms of the
stacking roller falls, and its actuator [F] enters sensor [G] (S12) and switches it on.
This switches on the lift motor [H], which raises the tray until the actuator leaves
the sensor. Then, the lift motor stops the tray; this is the home position.

DETAILS

September 2006

6.8.3 SHIFT TRAY LOWER LIMIT DETECTION

[A]

[D]
[B]

[C]

B478D010.WMF

This machine has two shift tray lower limit sensors: shift lower limit sensor [A] (S9)
for large paper (B4 and larger) and shift lower limit sensor [B] (S11) for small paper
(smaller than B4).
NOTE: Sensor [C] (S10) is not used.
When the actuator [D] enters sensor [A] while using large paper (about 1500
sheets are on the tray), a message will be displayed and copying will stop.
When the actuator [D] enters sensor [B] while using small paper (about 3,000
sheets are on the tray), a message will be displayed and copying will stop.

B706-44

06/09

September 2006

Details

6.9 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT

[D]
[A]

[F]

[C]
[E]
B478D520.WMF

In sort/stack mode, the shift tray [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of
copies.

When the shift gear disk has rotated 180 degrees (when the shift tray is fully shifted
across), the cut-out in the shift gear disk turns on the shift tray half-turn sensor [F]
and the shift motor stops. The next set of copies is then delivered. The motor turns
on, repeating the same process and moving the tray back to the previous position.

B706-45

06/09

Peripherals

The horizontal position of the shift tray is controlled by the shift motor [B] and shift
gear disk [C]. After one set of copies is made and delivered to the shift tray, the
shift motor turns on, driving the shift gear disk and the shaft [D]. The end fence [E]
is positioned by the shaft, creating the side-to-side movement.

DETAILS

September 2006

6.10 STAPLING Z-FOLDED PAPER

B706D004.WMF
B706D004.WMF
B706D005.WMF

Here is the operation sequence for jogging and stapling Z-folded sheets:
1. The lower jogger fence lifts to receive the Z-folded sheets.
2. The top fence moves down, to the horizontal position.
3. A sheet of paper goes into the stapler tray.
4. The positioning roller turns when each sheet is fed to the stapler tray.
5. Each sheet is fed down against the lower jogger fence to align the bottom edge.
6. After the set number of sheets come in, the jogger top-fence motor switches on
and lowers the top fence against the top of the stack. This aligns the stack for
stapling.
7. The bottom fence motor lowers the aligned stack to the stapling position.
8. The stapler staples the stack.

B706-46

06/09

September 2006

Details

6.11 JAM CONDITIONS
1. The entrance sensor does not turn on when the copier has fed paper 426 mm
after the copier exit sensor turned off.
2. The entrance sensor does not turn off when the upper transport motor has fed
paper 1.5 times the paper’s length after it turned on.
3. The upper tray exit sensor does not turn on when the upper transport motor
has fed paper 574 mm after the entrance sensor turned on.
4. The upper tray exit sensor does not turn off when the upper transport motor
has fed paper 1.5 times the paper’s length after it turned on.
5. In sort/stack mode, the shift tray exit sensor does not turn on when the upper
transport motor has fed paper 733 mm after the entrance sensor turned on.
6. In sort/stack mode, the shift tray exit sensor does not turn off when the upper
transport motor has fed paper 1.5 times the paper’s length after it turned on.
7. In staple mode, the stapler tray entrance sensor does not turn on when the
upper and lower transport motor have fed paper 835 mm after the entrance
sensor turned on.
8. In staple mode, the stapler tray entrance sensor does not turn off when the
upper transport motor has fed paper 1.5 times the paper’s length after it turned
on.
9. In staple mode, the stapler tray paper sensor does not turn off within 250
pulses of the stack feed-out motor after it started.

Peripherals

10. In staple mode, the shift tray exit sensor does not turn off within 1,260 ms after
the stack feed-out motor started.

B706-47

06/09

DETAILS

September 2006

6.12 PUNCH UNIT (B531)
6.12.1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE
[C]

[A]

[B]

[D]

[E]

B531D102.WMF

The punch unit makes 2 or 3 holes at the trailing edge of the paper. The number of
holes depends on a selection made on the operation panel.
The cam [A] has 2 punches on one side and 3 punches on the other, and is turned
by the punch motor [B]. The punch motor turns on immediately after the trailing
edge of the paper passes the entrance sensor. The punches on the cam rotate
downward and punch holes in the paper.
After punching a sheet of paper, the cam returns to home position and stops.
Home position depends on whether 2 holes or 3 holes are being made, so there
are two punch HP sensors. Punch HP sensor 1 [C] is used when 2-hole punching
is selected, and punch HP sensor 2 [D] is used when 3-hole punching is selected.
When the cut-out [E] enters the slot of the punch HP in use (sensor 1 or 2-hole
punching or sensor 2 for 3/4-hole punching) the motor stops.
The knob (not shown) on the front end of the punch unit can be turned in either
direction to clear paper jammed in the punch unit.

B706-48

06/09

September 2006

Details

6.12.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION

[A]

[B]
[C]

B531D103.WMF

Punch waste is collected in the punch waste hopper [A] positioned under the punch
unit.
When the level of the punch waste in the hopper rises as far as the hole [B] in the
hopper, the punch waste sensor [C] turns on, stops the job, and triggers a
message on the operation to indicate that the hopper is full and must be removed
and emptied.

The punch waste hopper sensor also functions as the hopper set sensor. When the
hopper is not in the finisher, or if it is not inserted completely, the spring loaded
sensor arm rotates up and to the right with the punch waste sensor away from the
hole in the hopper holder and a message is displayed. The message in this case is
the same as the hopper full message.

B706-49

06/09

Peripherals

The job resumes automatically after the hopper is emptied and returned to the
finisher.

DETAILS

September 2006

6.13 JOGGER UNIT (B513)
6.13.1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT
2

1

3
4
7
6

5
B513D003.WMF

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Shift Jogger Fence Lift Motor
Shift Jogger Motor Timing Belt
Shift Jogger Motor
Shift Jogger Fence Timing Belt
Shift Jogger Fences
Shift Jogger HP Sensor
Shift Jogger Lift HP Sensor

B706-50

06/09

September 2006

Details

6.13.2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE

[C]

[F]

[B]

[A]
[D]

[G]
[H]
[J]
[I]

[E]

B513D002.WMF

At prescribed intervals, the jogger motor [A] switches on and drives the jogger
timing belt [B], gear [C] and jogger fence timing belt [D] which drives the shift
jogger fences [E] against the sides of the stack to align its edges.
At the end of the job, the jogger fence lift motor [F] switches on and raises the
fences until the actuator [G] leaves the slot of the shift jogger fence lift HP sensor
[H] and shuts off the shift jogger fence lift motor.

The jogger fences remain up in the standby position until the next job starts.

B706-51

06/09

Peripherals

At the same time, the jogger motor reverses and drives the fences away from the
sides of the stack until the actuator [I] deactivates the shift jogger fence HP sensor
[J] and switches off the jogger motor.

OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

September 2006

7. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
7.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1

2

3

4

5
6

21
7

20

8
22

9

19
18

10

17

11

16
12

15

23
13
14

6V900.WMF

B478V500.WMF

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.

Upper Tray
Middle Transport Rollers
Upper Tray Exit Roller
Upper Transport Rollers
Tray Junction Gate
Stapler Junction Gate
Entrance Rollers
Punch Unit
Pre-stack Junction Gate
Punch Waste Hopper
Pre-stack Tray

B706-52

06/09

Stack Plate
Staple Waste Hopper
Stapler
Alignment Brush Roller
Positioning Roller
Stack Feed-out Belt
Shift Tray Drive Belt
Lower Transport Rollers
Shift Tray
Shift Tray Exit Roller
Jogger Top Fence
Jogger Bottom Fence

September 2006

OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

7.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Name
Shift Tray Exit
Shift Tray Lift
Exit Guide

M04

Lower Transport

M05

Shift

M06

Positioning Roller

M07
M08
M09
M10
M11
M12

Stacking Roller Drag
Stacking Roller
Jogger
Stack Feed-Out Belt
Stack Plate - Center
Stapler

M13

Stack Plate – Front

M14

Stack Plate – Rear

M15
M16

Stapler Rotation
Staple Hammer

M17

Punch

M18

Upper Transport

M19

Shift Jogger

M20

Shift Jogger Lift

M21
M22
BOARDS
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
SENSORS
S01
S02

Jogger Top Fence
Jogger Bottom Fence
Main
Stapler
Punch
Jogger
Entrance
Upper Tray Exit

Function
Drives the exit roller for the shift tray.
Moves the shift tray up or down.
Opens and closes the upper exit guide.
Drives the lower transport rollers, the positioning
roller and the alignment brush roller
Moves the shift tray from side to side.
Moves the positioning roller into contact with the
paper.
Moves the stacking roller in and out.
Rotates the stacking roller.
Moves the jogger fences.
Drives the stack feed-out belt.
Presses down the center of the edge for stapling.
Moves the staple unit from side to side.
Presses down the front corner of the edge for
stapling.
Presses down the rear corner of the edge for
stapling.
Rotates the stapler 45 degrees for oblique stapling.
Drives the staple hammer.
Drives the punch shaft and roller. Punch Unit
(B531).
Drives the entrance rollers, the middle and upper
transport rollers, and upper tray exit roller.
Drives the shift jogger fences against the sides of
the sheets to align the stack, then reverses to return
them to the home position. Jogger Unit (B513).
Raises the shift jogger fences after aligning the
stack, then reverses and lowers them when
returning to the home position. Jogger Unit (B513).
Moves the top jogger fence.
Moves the bottom jogger fence.
Controls the finisher and communicates with the
copier.
Controls the stapler unit.
Passes signals between the punch unit and the
finisher main board. Punch Unit (B531).
Controls the shift/jogger unit (B513).
Detects the copy paper entering the finisher and
checks for misfeeds.
Checks for misfeeds at the upper tray.

B706-53

06/09

Peripherals

Symbol
Motors
M01
M02
M03

OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
Symbol

Name

S03

Upper Tray Limit

S04
S05

Shift Tray Exit
Exit Guide Open

S06

Staple Mode HP 1

S07

Staple Mode HP 2

S10
S11

Shift Lower Limit – Large
Paper
Shift Tray Lower Limit 2
Shift Tray Lower Limit 3

S12

Shift Mode HP

S13

Stacking Roller HP

S14

Shift Tray Half-Turn

S15

Pre-Stack Tray Paper

S16
S17
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S23

Stapler Tray Exit
Positioning Roller HP
Stack Feed-Out Belt HP
Stapler Tray Paper
Jogger HP
Stack Plate - Center HP
Stack Plate – Front
Stack Plate – Rear

S24

Stapler HP

S25

Stapler Rotation HP

S26
S27

Stapler Return
Staple Waste Hopper

S28

Punch Waste Hopper

S29

Punch HP 1

S30

Punch HP 2

S31

Shift Jogger HP

S32

Shift Jogger Lift HP

S09

S33

Top Fence HP

September 2006
Function
Detects when the paper stack height in the upper
tray is at its upper limit.
Checks for misfeeds at the shift tray exit.
Detects whether the guide plate is opened or not.
Detects the shift tray home position for standby
mode and for staple mode.
Detects the shift tray home position for standby
mode and for staple mode.
Detects the lower limit for the shift tray when large
paper sizes are being used
Not used.
Detects when the shift tray is at its lower limit.
Detects the shift tray home position in sort/stack
mode.
Detects when the stacking roller is at home position.
Detects whether the shift tray is at either the front or
home HP.
Determines when to turn off the pre-stack paper
stopper solenoid.
Detects jams at the staple tray exit.
Detects the home position of the positioning roller.
Detects the home position of the stack feed-out belt.
Detects the copy paper in the stapler tray.
Detects the home position of the shift jogger fences.
Detects the home position of the center stack plate.
Detects the home position of the front stack plate.
Detects the home position of the rear stack plate.
Detects the home position of the staple unit for sideto-side movement.
Detects the home position of the stapler unit for 45degree rotation.
Detects the on timing of the stapler return solenoid.
Detects when the staple waste hopper is full.
Detects when the punch waste hopper is full and
detects when the punch tray is set. Punch Unit
(B531).
Detects the cam home position for the 2-hole
punch. Punch Unit (B531).
Detects the cam home position for 3/4 punch.
Punch Unit (B531).
Detects the home position of the jogger unit arms
during paper alignment. Jogger Unit (B513).
Detects the when both shift jogger fences are at the
lowered position and ready to move against the
sides of the stack. Jogger Unit (B513).
Detects the top fence home position for Z-fold paper
staple mode.

B706-54

06/09

September 2006
Symbol
S34

OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
Name

Bottom Fence HP

Symbol
Name
SOLENOIDS
(Upper) Tray Junction
SOL1
Gate
SOL2
Stapler Junction Gate
SOL3
Pre-Stack Junction Gate
SOL4
Pre-stack Paper Stopper
SOL5

Stapler Return

Function
Detects the bottom fence home position for Z-fold
paper staple mode.
Function
Drives the tray junction gate.
Drives the stapler junction gate.
Drives the pre-stack junction gate.
Drives the stopper pawl of the pre-stacking tray.
Positions the stapler correctly on its return from the
staple supply point.

SWITCHES
Shift Tray Upper Limit

SW2

Front Door Safety

SW3

Emergency Stop

Cuts the power to the shift tray lift motor when the
shift tray position is at its upper limit.
Cuts the dc power when the front door is opened.
Switches the current job off and on to allow time for
the operator to remove paper from the shift tray.

Peripherals

SW1

B706-55

06/09

OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

September 2006

7.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
1

2

3

4

5

19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12

6

7
20
21

11

22
23

10
B478V503.WMF

9

8
26

24
25
B478V504.WMF

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.

Upper Transport Roller 2
Upper Tray Exit Roller
Lower Transport Roller 2
Shift Tray Lift Motor
Shift Tray Exit Motor
Shift Tray Exit Roller
Shift Tray
Shift Motor
Staple Tray Exit Roller
Positioning Roller
Lower Transport Roller 3
Lower Transport Motor
Lower Transport Rollers 2

B706-56

06/09

Lower Transport Roller 1
Transport Roller 1
Entrance Roller 2
Entrance Roller
Upper Transport Roller 1
Upper Transport Motor
Stack Feed-out Motor
Jogger Motor
Jogger Fence
Stack Plate Motor
Stapler Motor
Stack Feed-out Belt
Stapler Rotation Motor

9-BIN MAILBOX
(Machine Code: B762)

06/09

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ................................. B762-1
1.1 COVERS AND TRAYS ....................................................................... B762-1
1.2 SENSORS .......................................................................................... B762-2
1.3 MAIN MOTOR AND CONTROL BOARD............................................ B762-3

2. DETAILS............................................................................... B762-4
2.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................ B762-4
2.1.1 MAIN COMPONENT LAYOUT .................................................. B762-4
2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT......................................................................... B762-5
2.1.3 PAPER PATH ............................................................................. B762-6
2.2 BASIC OPERATION........................................................................... B762-7
2.2.1 PAPER PATH ............................................................................ B762-7
2.3 OVERFLOW DETECTION.................................................................. B762-8
2.3.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................... B762-8
2.3.2 DETECTION TIMING................................................................. B762-9
2.4 PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING.......................................... B762-10
2.4.1 A4 SIDEWAYS (LEF) 
 1ST BIN TRAY .................................. B762-10
2.4.2 A4 SIDEWAYS (LEF) 
 2ND ~ 9TH BIN TRAY...................... B762-10

i

06/09

September 2006

COVERS AND TRAYS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

CAUTION
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting and
procedure in this section.

1.1 COVERS AND TRAYS

[D]

[C]
[A]

[B]

[A]: Trays
• Grip each tray by the front and lift out.
[B]: Front cover (
 x2)
[C]: Rear cover (
 x3)
[D]: Top cover

B762-1

06/09

Peripherals

B471R001.WMF

SENSORS

September 2006

1.2 SENSORS

[A]

[D]
B471R003.WMF

[B]
[C]
B471R104.WMF

Remove the tray (
 1.1)
[A]: Bin cover
[B]: Tray sensor ( x1)
[C]: Tray overflow sensor ( x1)
[D]: Vertical transport sensor ( x1)
• Raise the pawl, then grip the bottom of the sensor to remove.

B762-2

06/09

September 2006

MAIN MOTOR AND CONTROL BOARD

1.3 MAIN MOTOR AND CONTROL BOARD

[C]
[B]
[D]

[A]

Rear cover (
 1.1)
[A]: Control board (
 x3,  x17)
[B]: Main motor bracket (main motor  x1, 
 x2)
[C]: Timing belt
[D]: Main motor (
 x1)

B762-3

06/09

Peripherals

B471R002.WMF

OVERVIEW

September 2006

2. DETAILS
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MAIN COMPONENT LAYOUT

2
1
3

4

B471D003.WMF

1. Bins (x9)
2. Vertical Transport Rollers (x5)
3. Turn Gates (x8)
4. Exit Rollers (x9)
The trays are 1 to 9 (bottom to top). The numbers are clearly marked on the side of
the unit. The top tray does not require a turn gate. When the top tray is selected for
output, all turn gates remain closed, leaving only the top bin open.

B762-4

06/09

September 2006

OVERVIEW

2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT

2

1
3

B471D002.WMF

1. Main Motor
2. Main Timing Belt

Peripherals

3. Timing Belt

B762-5

06/09

OVERVIEW

September 2006

2.1.3 PAPER PATH

5
4
6
7

1

2
3

B471D970.WMF

1. Original Paper Path
2. Vertical Transport Path
3. LCT Feed
4. Selected Trays
5. Turn Gates
6. Mailbox Paper Path
7. Junction Gate (paper goes either
up to the mailbox or out to the
finisher’s proof tray)
The solenoid for the junction gate (7) is part of the mailbox.

B762-6

06/09

September 2006

BASIC OPERATION

2.2 BASIC OPERATION
2.2.1 PAPER PATH

[C]

[B]

[A]

[D]

B471D004.WMF

[E]

The unit is mounted on top the finisher and connected to the finisher by a 14-pin
connector. When the leading edge of the paper passes and activates the entrance
sensor of the finisher, the mailbox main motor switches on and the mailbox vertical
transport rollers [A] begin to turn. The exit roller [B] feeds the paper out to the
selected tray [C].
A solenoid [D] opens and closes the junction gate [E]. When a solenoid switches
on, the gate opens and directs to the paper to the tray.
NOTE: When the top tray (bin 9) is selected, all solenoids are off and closed,
allowing the paper to pass to the top tray (bin 9 does not require a
solenoid).
When the last sheet is fed out, it switches off the vertical transport sensor, and both
the mailbox main motor and the junction gate solenoid of the selected bin switch off.
The mailbox normally feeds paper at 372 mm/s, about the same speed as the
finisher. (The finisher speed is 370 mm/s.)

B762-7

06/09

Peripherals

B471D105.WMF

OVERFLOW DETECTION

September 2006

2.3 OVERFLOW DETECTION
2.3.1 OVERVIEW
[A]
[B]

B471D005.WMF

An overflow sensor [A] and actuator [B] are above the exit of each paper tray. The
actuator, mounted on a swivel arm, remains in contact with the top of the stack.
The actuator rises as the stack becomes higher until it activates the sensor. Then,
a tray full message appears on the operation panel and the job halts. If the paper is
removed before the tray is full, the job continues.

B762-8

06/09

September 2006

OVERFLOW DETECTION

2.3.2 DETECTION TIMING

Between Sheets

Full (High)
Not Full (Low)

Paper
Length

Paper
Length

Full

Paper
Length

B471D010.WMF

When the mailbox exit sensor goes high for the prescribed time (T), the machine
determines that the tray is full. The value of T is calculated, regardless of paper
size, as follows:
T (s) = (60/s x max. size ppm) x 3 s
After the tray full sensor switches on, if it remains on for the feeding of eight
additional sheets, then this notifies the machine that the tray is full.

Peripherals

“T” is calculated as shown below. For example, for a minimum ppm of 12 prints
(regardless of paper size), the value T is 15 s. Then, if the sensor detects paper for
15 s or more, the machine stops the copy job.

B762-9

06/09

PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING

September 2006

2.4 PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING
2.4.1 A4 SIDEWAYS (LEF) Î 1ST BIN TRAY

Main Motor
(Main Unit)

J1
Exit Sensor

*1

Main Motor
(Mailbox)
Turn Gate
(SOL 1)
*1: Time required for A4 LEF
B471D011.WMF

2.4.2 A4 SIDEWAYS (LEF) Î 2ND ~ 9TH BIN TRAY

Main Motor
(Main Unit)

J1
Exit Sensor

*1

Main Motor
(Mailbox)
Turn Gate
(SOL 2)

J2

Vertical Transport
Sensor

J3

*1

*1: Time required for A4 Sideways (LEF)
*2: Feed to 9th Tray: All SOLs OFF.
B471D012.WMF

B762-10

06/09

September 2006

PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING

J1 Timing: After the leading edge of the sheet activates the mailbox exit sensor,
a misfeed is detected if the sensor does not switch off within:
X+0.5 s
Where X = The amount of time prescribed for the paper size to pass
the sensor. (X = 1.74 s for A4 Sideways for example)
J2 Timing: After the mailbox paper exit sensor is activated, the machine
determines that the paper has not yet fed and detects a misfeed if the
vertical transport sensor does not activate within the time prescribed
for the paper size (1.94 s for A4 paper, for example)
J3 Timing: After the vertical transport sensor is activated, a misfeed is detected if
the vertical transport sensor does not turn off within:
X+0.52 s

Peripherals

Where X = The amount of time prescribed for the paper size to pass
the sensor. (X = 2.26 s for A4 Sideways for example)

B762-11

06/09

PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING

September 2006

B762-12

06/09

August, 2006

MainFrame

SPECIFICATIONS
1. MAINFRAME
1.1 COPYING
Configuration
Dimensions (w x d x h) (no ARDF)
Weight (with ARDF)
Original Scanning
Copy Process
Development
Fusing
Engine speed
Duplex Copy Speed (single-sided
to double-sided)
Duplex Copy Speed (double-sided
to double-sided)
Warm-up time
First copy
Original types
Max. original size
Resolution

Max. image size
Magnification

Zoom
Paper capacity (80 g/m2 or 20 lb.)

Original size detection (book
mode)

Original size detection (ARDF)

Console
750 x 850 x 1050 mm (29.5 x 33.5 x 41.3 in.)
Less than 298 kg (655.6 lb.)
Flatbed with moving 3-line CCD array, image scanning
4-drum dry electrostatic transfer system with internal transfer
belt
Dry dual-component magnetic brush development
Oil-less belt fusing system
e-STUDIO4500c Full color 45 cpm / Monochrome 60 cpm
e-STUDIO5500c Full color 55 cpm / Monochrome 60 cpm
e-STUDIO4500c Full color 45 cpm / Monochrome 60 cpm
e-STUDIO5500c Full color 55 cpm (45 cpm with ARDF 1-to1) / Monochrome 60 cpm
e-STUDIO4500c Full color 28 cpm or higher / Monochrome
e-STUDIO5500c 42 cpm or higher
300 sec.
Full color
7.5 sec.
Monochrome
6.5 sec.
Sheet, book, object
A3/11” x 17”
Scanning
600 dpi 10-bit
Copying
600 dpi 6-bit
Printing
600 dpi 4-bit
297 x 600 mm (11.7” x 23.6”)
7 Reduction, 5 Enlargement
NA
93%, 85%, 78%, 73%, 65%, 50%,
25%, 121%, 129%, 155%, 200%, 400%
93%, 82%, 75%, 71%, 65%, 50%,
EU, Asia
25%, 115%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%
25% to 400%
Tray 1 (Tandem tray)
3,100
1,550 x 2
Tray 2 (Universal cassette)
550
Tray 3 (Universal cassette)
550
Bypass tray
100
Max. Capacity (Copier only)
4,300
Max. Capacity (with LCT)
8,300
LCT: 4,000
11" x 17", 8½" x 14" SEF,
NA
8½" x 11" LEF/SEF
A3/A4 SEF, B4 SEF, A4/B5 LEF/SEF,
EU, Asia
8½ " x 13" SEF (8K, 16K available with SP
mode)
11" x 17", 10" x 14", 8 ½ x 14" SEF
NA
8½" x 11", 5½" x 8½" SEF/LEF
7¼" x 10½", A3 SEF
A4 SEF/LEF

Spec-1

MainFrame

August, 2006
EU, Asia

Paper Sizes
Paper weight

Output capacity
Power
Max. power consumption
Counter
Counterfeit prevention

A3, B4 SEF
A4, B5, A5, B6 SEF/LEF
8½" x 13", 8K SEF
16K SEF

For more, see "Paper Sizes"
52.3 – 127.9 g/m2
Tray 1 (Tandem tray)
14 – 34 lb. bond
52.3 – 127.9 g/m2
Tray 2 (Universal tray)
14 – 34 lb. bond
52.3 – 127.9 g/m2
Tray 3 (Universal tyar)
14 – 34 lb. bond
(up to 163 g/m2, 44 lb.
index/ 60 lb.)
52.3 – 256 g/m2
Bypass
14 – 68.5 lb. bond
Duplex mode
64 – 127.9 g/m2
17 – 34 lb. bond
500 sheet (A4, 8½" x 11")
With Copy Tray B756
NA
120V 20A 60 Hz
EU, Asia
220-240V 10A 50-60 Hz
NA
Less than 1920 W
EU, Asia
Less than 1920 W
NA
Electric counter, mechanical counter x2
EU, Asia
Electric counter, mechanical counter x1
Bill recognition, invisible marking function

Spec-2

August, 2006

MainFrame

Paper Sizes

OP_T

EU
Asia
OP_T

2nd & 3rd Tray
550 sheet
each
NA
EU
Asia
A_AD A_AA

OP_T

OP_T

A_AD

A_AA

OP_L

OP_L

#_S

#_S

A

A

A_AD

A_AD

A

A

#_S

#_S

OP_T

OP_T

A_AD

A_AD

OP_L

OP_L

#_S

A_WD

X

X

A_AD

A_AD

A

A

#_S

#_S

X

X

A_AD

A_AD

X

X

#_S

#_S

X

X

UP

UP

X

X

#_S

#_S

X

X

UP

A_AD

X

X

#_S

A_WD

X

X

X

X

X

X

#_S

#_S

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

#_S

#_S

X

OP_T

OP_T

A_AD

A_AD

X

X

A_WD

#_S

8½" x 14”

OP_T

OP_T

A_AD

A_AD

OP_L

OP_L

A_WD

#_S

11” x 8½"

A

A

A_AD

A_AD

A

A

#_S

#_S

8½" x 11”

OP_T

OP_T

A_AD

A_AD

OP_L

OP_L

#_S

#_S

LEF

8½" x 5½"

X

X

A_AD

A_AD

X

X

X

X

SEF

5½" x 8½"

X

X

A_AD

A_AD

X

X

A_WD

#_S

Foolscap

SEF

X

X

A_AD

A_AD

X

X

#_S

#_S

Folio
F
Executive

SEF
SEF
LEF

8½" x 13”
8¼" x 13”
8” x 13”
10½" x 7¼"

X
X
X

X
X
X

A_AD
A_AD
A_AD

A_AD
A_AD
A_AD

X
X
X

X
X
X

#_S
#_S
#_S

#_S
#_S
#_S

7¼"” x 10½"
267 x 390
mm
267 x 195
mm
195 x 267
mm
12” x 18”

X

X

A_AD

A_AD

X

X

#_S

#_S

X

X

A_AD

A_AD

X

X

#_M

#_M

X

X

A_AD

A_AD

X

X

#_M

#_M

X

X

A_AD

A_AD

X

X

#_M

#_M

X

X

A_AD

A_AD

X

X

#_S

#_S

Paper
Size
A3

Direction

Measurement

NA

SEF

B4

SEF

A4

LEF

A4

SEF

B5

LEF

B5

SEF

A5

LEF

A5

SEF

B6

SEF

A6

SEF

DTL

SEF

297 x 420
mm
257 x 364
mm
297 x 210
mm
210 x 297
mm
257 x 182
mm
182 x 257
mm
210 x 148
mm
148 x 210
mm
128 x 182
mm
105 x 148
mm
8½" x 11”

LG

SEF

LT

LEF

LT

SEF

HLT
HLT

Executive

SEF

8K

SEF

16K

LEF

16K

SEF

A3 Wide

SEF

LCT
1000 sheet

Bypass
100 sheet

NA

NA

X

EU
Asia
X

A_WD

EU
Asia
A_WD

Duplex

Tandem Tray
1100 sheet x2

Table Key
SEF:
LEF:
A
A_AD
A_WD
OP_T
OP_L
#_S
#_M
X

Short Edge Feed
Long Edge Feed
Paper size to be set in copier
Paper size detected automatically
Paper size detected by width
Paper size set in Tray 1 with A3 / 11”x17” B331 installed.
Paper size set in LCT B473 with 8 1/2”x14” Paper Size Tray B474 installed.
Paper size setting is required. Press [#] key then select paper size from the list on touch
panel
Paper size setting is required. To press [#] then enter actual paper size of paper
manually.
NG

Spec-3

MainFrame

August, 2006

1.2 PRINTING
CPU
RAM
HDD
PDL
Print Resolution (max.)
Fonts
Connectivity
Host interface
Network Protocol

Intel Celeron LV 733 MHz
1384 MB (shared with copying, scanning)
320 GB (80 GB x 4)
RPCS, PCL5c, PCL6
600 x 600 dpi (4-bit)
Standard
48 PCL fonts
Option
With PS3, 136 Adobe PostScript Type 1 fonts
Standard

Ethernet RJ-45, 10-BaseT, 100BaseTX, USB 2.0
1
TCP IP, IPX/SPX, SMB (NetBEUI* , NetBIOS over
TCP/IP), AppleTalk (auto switching)
MIB support
Private MIB
Supported by Ricoh
MIB-II (RFC1213), HostResource (RFC1514),
Standard MIB
PrinterMib (RFC1759)
Windows 95, 98SE, NT 4.0, 2000, Me, XP, Server
Network, operating systems
2003
NetWare 3.12, 3.2, 4.1, 4.11, 5.0, 5.1, 6
Unix, Sun Solaris, HP-UX, SCO Open Server, Red
Hat Linux, IBM AIX, Mac OS 8.6 to 9.2x, OS X 10.1
or later
1
* Smart Device Monitor for Client is necessary for NetBEUI.

Spec-4

August, 2006

MainFrame

1.3 SCANNER
Optical resolution
Scanning speed
Max. scan area
Auto scan size detection
Original size

Compression Method
Interface support
Scan mod

Image Density
Image Rotation
SADF/Batch mode
Mixed size originals
1

*

100, 150, 200 (default), 300, 400, 600 dpi
Full color: 45 cpm / Black: 60 cpm (e-STUDIO4500c/5500c)
297 x 432 mm (11.7" x 17")
Exposure glass
Supported (conforms with copier specifications)
ARDF
Supported (conforms with copier specifications)
A3, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B4, B5 SEF,
Standard
B5 LEF, 11" x 17" SEF, 8½" x 14" SEF, 8½" x 13"
SEF, 8½" x 11" SEF/LEF, 5½ " x 8½" SEF/LEF
Customized
Min.
10 x 10 mm (0.04" x 0.04")
Max.
297 x 432 mm (11.7" x 17")
BW Binary: TIFF MH, MR, MMR
Grayscale/Full Color: JPEG
10/100BaseTX
Default
BW Text
BW OCR, BW Text-Photo, BW Photo, Grayscale,
Supported
FC Photo, FC Text Photo
1
Options*
Auto Color Selection, sRGB Photo, sRGB Text
Photo
Auto Density Selection, Manual Setting (7 levels)
Supported
Supported
Supported

File Format Converter (MLB) is necessary.

Spec-5

ARDF

August, 2006

2. ARDF
Dimensions (w x d x h)
Weight
Power consumption
Noise
Stack capacity
Original size

Original weight

Auto Original Size
Detection

Original set position
Special original setting
Feeding speed
Power source

680 x 560 x 180 mm (26.8 x 22 x 7.1 in.)
Less than 19.5 kg (42.9 lb.)
Less than 59 W
Less than 71 db
100 sheets
A3, A4, A5, B5, B6
Simplex
5½" x 8½", 8½" x 11", 8½" x 14", 11" x 17"
A3, A4, A5, B4, B5
Duplex
5½" x 8½", 8½" x 11", 8½" x 14", 11" x 17"
2
40 – 128 g/m
Simplex
11 – 34 lb. bond
2
52 – 128 g/m
Duplex
14 – 34 lb. bond
11" x 17", 10" x 14", 8 ½ x 14" SEF
NA
8½" x 11", 5½" x 8½" SEF/LEF
7¼" x 10½", A3 SEF
A4 SEF/LEF
A3, B4 SEF
EU, Asia
A4, B5, A5, B6 SEF/LEF
8½" x 13", 8K SEF
16K SEF
Face-up, left-rear corner
Batch, mixed sizes
Full color
45 cpm
Black
60 cpm
From copier

Spec-6

August, 2006

Optional Peripherals

3. OPTIONAL PERIPHERALS
3.1 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B473
Installation of the LCT Adapter B699 is necessary for the LCT.
Dimension (w x d x h)

Stand-alone

314 x 458 x 659 mm (12.4 x 18 x 25.9 in.)

Weight

With LG/B4 Option
Standalone
With LG/B4 Option

462 x 458 x 659 mm (18.2 x 18 x 25.9 in.)
Less than 20 kg (44 lb.)
Less than 27 kg (59.4 lb.)
Less than 50 W
Less than 74dB
A4, B5, 11”x 8½” LEF
52 - 128g/m²
14 lb – 34 lb. Bond
4,000 sheets**
2,500 sheets*
50 - 128g/m²
14 lb – 34 lb. Bond

Power Consumption
Noise
Paper Size
Paper Weight
2

Paper Capacity (80 g/m or 20 lb. bond)
Paper Weight

Note1: *with B4/LG Option
Note2: **80g/m2 / 20lb. Bond paper

3.2 8½ X 14" / B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY B474
This is the option for the LCT B473 that allows it to accept LG (8½ x 14") / B4 size
paper.
Paper Size
Paper Weight

8 1/2”x14”, 8 1/2”x11”, A4, B4 SEF
52 - 128g/m² 14 lb – 34 lb. Bond

Spec-7

Optional Peripherals

August, 2006

3.3 9-BIN MAILBOX B762
The mailbox can be installed on top of the 2000-Sheet Finisher B700, the 3000Sheet Finisher B701, or the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706.
Dimension (w x d x h)
Weight
Power Consumption
Noise
Number of Bins
Stack Capacity of each Bin
Paper Size
Paper Weight

540 x 600 x 660 mm (21.3 x 23.6 x 26 in.)
Less than 15 kg (33 lb.)
Less than 48 W
Less than 74 dB
9 bins
100 sheets*
A5. A4, A3
5½" x 8½", 8½" x11”, 8½" x14", 11"x17"
52 - 128g/m²
14 lb. – 34 lb. Bond

Note: *The capacity to be calculated with 80g/m2 or 20lb. Bond paper.

3.4 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704
The cover interposer tray can be used with the 2000-Sheet Finisher B700, 3000Sheet Finisher B701, 3000-Sheet Finisher B706. The interposer tray is installed
between the copier and the finisher. The interposer tray and the Mailbox B762
cannot be installed together.
Dimension (w x d x h)
Weight
Power Consumption
Noise
Stack Capability*
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Original Set Position
Original Set
Normal Feed
Booklet Feed

500 x 600 x 600 mm (19.7 x 23.6 x 23.6 in.)
Less than 12 Kg (26.4 lb.)
Less than 43 W
Less than 65 db
200 Sheets
A5-A3, 5½" x 8½" - 11" x 17"
64 g/m²-216 g/m²
17 lb. Bond- 58 lb. Index, 80 lb. Cover
Center
Face-up
Face-down

Note: *The capacity to be calculated with 80g/m2 or 20lb. Bond paper.

Spec-8

August, 2006

Optional Peripherals

3.5 3000-SHEET FINISHER B706
This finisher is compatible with other copiers without special items. However, this
copier requires installation of the Finisher Adapter B698 on this finisher.
Finisher
Dimension (w x d x h)
Weight
Power Consumption
Noise
Configuration
Power Source
Proof Tray
Stack Capacity*
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Shift Tray

Stack Capacity*

Paper Size
Paper Weight
Staples
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Staple Position
Staple Replenishment
Stack Capacity with Stapler

800 x 730 x 980 mm (31.5 x 28.7 x 38.6 in.)
Less than 65 kg (143 lb.)
Less than 100W
Less than 75 dB
Console type attached base-unit with Finisher Adapter
From base-unit
500 sheets A4, 8½" x 11" or smaller
250 sheets B4, 8½" x 14" or larger
A6 SEF-A3 SEF
5½ " x8½ " - 11”x17”
52 g/m²-256 g/m²
14 lb. Bond- 68 lb. Bond / 140 lb. Index / 90 lb. Cover
3000 sheets
A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 8½”x11” LEF
1500 sheets
A3, A4, B4, B5 SEF
11”x17”, 8½”x14”, 8½” x 11”
SEF
500 sheets
A5 LEF, 5½”x8 1/2” LEF
100 sheets
A5 SEF, 5½”x8½” SEF
A5 - A3 SEF
5½”x8½”- 11”x17”
52 g/m²-256 g/m²
14 lb. Bond - 68 lb. Bond / 140 lb. Index / 90 lb. Cover

B5-A3, 8 1/2”x11”-11”x17”
64 g/m²-84 g/m², 17 lb. Bond-20 lb. Bond
Top, Bottom, 2 Staple, Top-slant
Cartridge exchange / 5000 pins per cartridge

Paper Size
A4, B5
8½"x11"
A3, B4, 11" x 17",
8½" x 14"

Pages/Set
10-100 pages
2-9 pages
10-50 pages
2-9 pages

Sets
200-30 sets
150 sets
150-30 sets
150 sets

Note: *The capacity to be calculated with 80g/m2 or 20lb. Bond paper.

Spec-9

Optional Peripherals

August, 2006

3.6 PUNCH UNIT B531
This punch unit is for the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706. The Punch Units B531 and
Output Jogger Unit B513 are also available for this B706.
Punch Unit Types

Punch Waste Hopper Capacity

Paper Weight
Paper Size

NA 2-holes
NA 3-holes
EU 2-holes
EU 4-holes
Scandinavia 4-holes

NA
2/3 holes
EU
2/4 holes
Scandinavia
4 holes
NA 2 hole
10,000 sheets
NA 3 hole
15,000 sheets
EU 2 hole
40,000 sheets
EU 4 hole
15,000 sheets
Scandinavia 4 hole 15,000 sheets
52 g/m²-127.9 g/m²
14 lb. Bond –34 lb. Bond
SEF A6 - A3, 5½" x 8½" - 8½"x11”
LEF
A5 - A4, 5½" x 8½", 8½"x11”
SEF A3, B4, 11”x17”
LEF
A4, B5, 8½"x 11”
SEF A6 - A3, 5½"x8½" - 11”x17”
LEF
A5 - A4, 5½" x 8½", 8½"” x 11”
SEF A3, B4, 11” x 17”
LEF
A4, B5, 8½" x 11”
SEF B6 - A3, 5½" x 8½" - 11” x 17”
LEF
A5 - A4, 5½" x 8½", 8½" x 11”

Spec-10

August, 2006

Optional Peripherals

3.7 3000-SHEET FINISHER B701
This finisher provides corner stapling only.
Finisher
Dimension (w x d x h)
Weight
Power Consumption
Noise
Configuration
Power Source
Stack Capacity*
Proof Tray

Paper Size
Paper Weight

657 x 613 x 960 mm
Less than 54 kg
Less than 56 kg with Punch Unit
Less than 96 W
Less than 75 dB
Console type attached base-unit
From base-unit
250 sheets A4, 8 1/2”x11” or smaller
50 sheets B4, 8 1/2”x14” or larger
A5 - A3 SEF, A6 SEF, A6 SEF
5 1/2”x8” 1/2”-11”x17”SEF, 12”x18” SEF
52 g/m²-163 g/m²
14 lb. Bond - 43 lb. Bond / 90 lb. Index / 60 lb. Cover
3,000 sheets
A4 LEF, ½" x11” LEF "
1,500 sheets

Stack Capacity*
500 sheets
Shift Tray

A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, B5, 11”x17”
SEF, 8½” x14” SEF, 8½” x 11” SEF,
12”x18” SEF
A5 LEF**

100 sheets
Paper Size
Paper Weight

A5 SEF, B6 SEF, A6 SEF,
5½” x 8½”,SEF
A5 - A3 SEF, A6 SEF, B6 SEF, 5½” x 8½”- 11”x17” SEF,
12” x 18” SEF
52 g/m²-256 g/m²
14 lb. Bond- 68 lb. Bond / 140 lb. Index / 90 lb. Cover

Staples
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Staple Position
Same Paper Size
Stapling
Capacity

Mixed Paper Size

B5 - A3
8 1/2”x11”-11”x17”, 12”x18”
64 g/m²-90 g/m²
17 lb. Bond - 28 lb. Bond
Top, Bottom, 2 Staple, Top-slant
50 sheets
A4, ½" x11” or smaller
30 sheets
B4, ½" x14" or larger
30 sheets
A4 LEF + A3 SEF,
B5 LEF + B4 SEF,
8½" x11” LEF + 11” x17” SEF

Note: *The capacity to be calculated with 80g/m2 or 20lb. Bond paper.

Spec-11

Optional Peripherals

Staple Replenishment

Stapled Stack Capacity
(same size)

Stapled Stack Capacity
(mixed sizes)

August, 2006

Cartridge exchange / 5000 pins per cartridge
Paper Size
Pages/Set
20-50 pages
A4 LEF, 8 1/2”x11” LEF
2-19 pages
15-50 pages
A4 SEF, B5, 8 /12”x11” SEF
2-14 pages
15-30 pages
Others
2-14 pages
A4 LEF & A3 SEF, B5 LEF
& B4 SEF, 8 1/2”x11” LEF & 2-30 pages
11” x17” SEF

Spec-12

Sets
150-60 sets
150 sets
100-30 sets
100 sets
100-33 sets
100 sets
50 set

August, 2006

Optional Peripherals

3.8 2000-SHEET FINISHER B700
This finisher provides booklet as well as corner stapling. Equipped with two trays,
the upper tray holds stapled and shifted copies, and the lower tray holds booklet
stapled and folded copies.
Finisher
Dimension W x D x H
Weight
Power Consumption
Noise
Configuration
Power Source
Stack Capacity*
Proof Tray

Paper Size
Paper Weight

Stack Capacity*
Shift Tray

Paper Size
Paper Weight
Staple
Paper Size
Paper Weight
Staple Position
Staples Capacity*

Same Paper Size
Mixed Paper Size
Booklet Stapling

657 x 613 x 960 mm (25.9 x 24.1 x 37.8")
Less than 63 kg (138.6 lb.) (no punch unit)
Less than 65 kg (143 lb.) (with punch unit)
Less than 96 W
Less than 75 dB
Console type attached base-unit
From base-unit
250 sheets A4, 8 1/2”x11” or smaller
50 sheets B4, 8 1/2”x14 or larger
A5-A3 SEF, A6 SEF, A6 LEF
5½" x8½" to11” x 17” SEF, 12”x18” SEF
52 g/m²-163 g/m²
14 lb. Bond - 43 lb. Bond / 90 lb. Index / 60 lb.
Cover
2,000
A4 LEF, 8 1/2”x11” LEF
sheets
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, B5
1,000
11”x17” SEF, 8½" x14” SEF, 8½" x
sheets
11” SEF,
12”x18” SEF
500 sheets A5 LEF
A5 SEF, B6 SEF, A6 SEF, 5½" x8½"
100 sheets
SEF
A5 - A3 SEF, A6 SEF, B6 SEF
5½" x8½" to 11” x 17” SEF, 12” x 18” SEF
52 g/m²-256 g/m²
14 lb. Bond - 68 lb. Bond / 140 lb. Index / 90 lb.
Cover
B5-A3, 8 1/2”x11”-11”x17”, 12”x18”
64 g/m² - 90 g/m², 17 lb. Bond - 28 lb. Bond
Top, Bottom, 2 Staple, Top-slant
50 sheets
A4, 8½" x 11” or smaller
30 sheets
B4, 8½" x 14” or larger
A4 LEF & A3 SEF, B5 LEF & B4
30 sheets
SEF, 8½"x11” LEF & 11” x17” SEF
A4 SEF, A3 SEF, B5 SEF, B4 SEF,
15 sheets
8 1/2”x11” SEF, 8 1/2”x14” SEF,
11”x17” SEF, 12”x18” SEF

Note: *The capacity to be calculated with 80g/m2 or 20lb. Bond paper.

Spec-13

Optional Peripherals

August, 2006

Staple Replenishment

Corner staple
Booklet staple

Corner Staple
Capacity

Same Size

A4 LEF, 8 1/2”x11” LEF
A4 SEF, B5, 8 /12”x11” SEF
Others

Mixed Size

Booklet Staple
Capacity

A4 LEF + A3 SEF
B5 LEF + B4 SEF
8 1/2”x11” LEF + 11” x17” SEF
A4 SEF, A3 SEF, B5 SEF, B4 SEF
8 1/2”x11” SEF, 8 1/2”x14” SEF, 11”x17” SEF
12”x18” SEF

5,000 staples per
cartridge
2,000 staples per
cartridge
13-50 pages
2-12 pages
10-50 pages
2-9 pages
10-30 pages
2-9 pages
2-30 pages

2-5 pages
6-10 pages
11-15 pages

B700/B701 Paper Specifications
Paper Size
Copier
PPC
A3 SEF
B4 SEF
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
B5 SEF
B5 LEF
A5 SEF
A5 LEF
B6 SEF
B6 LEF
12" x 18" SEF
11" x 17" SEF
8½" x 14"
8½" x 11" SEF
8½" x 11" LEF
5½" x 8½"
5½" x 8½"







—






























Plain Paper
Used
Recycled
Paper
Paper
—





—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—




Paper Type
Colored
Translucent
Paper
Blueprint


























—
—
—
—


—
—
—
—


























—
—





Corner stapling, Shift, YES
Booklet stapling/folding, Shift, YES
Shift ONLY
Shift NO
Not available

Spec-14







—
—
—
—
—




—
—

August, 2006

Optional Peripherals

3.9 PUNCH UNIT B702
This punch unit is designed for use with the 2000-Sheet Stapler B700 (both corner
and booklet stapling) and 3000-Sheet Stapler B701 (corner stapling only).
Available Punch Units

Punch Waste Replenishment

Paper Weight
Paper Sizes

NA 2-hole
NA 3-hole
EU 2-hole
EU 4-hole
Scandinavia 4-hole

NA
2/3 hole switchable
EU
2/4 holes switchable
Scandinavia
4 holes
NA 2-hole
Up to 5,000 sheets
NA 3-hole
Up to 5,000 sheets
EU 2-hole
Up to 14,000 sheets
EU 4-hole
Up to 7,000 sheets
Scandinavia 4-hole
Up to 7,000 sheets
52 g/m²-163 g/m², 14 lb. Bond - 43 lb. Bond / 90 lb. Index /
60 lb. Cover
SEF
A5 to A3, 5½" x8½" to 11”x17”
LEF
A5 - A4, 5½" x 8½" , 8½" x 11”
SEF
A3, B4, 11”x17”
LEF
A4, B5, 8½" x 11”
SEF
A5 - A3, 5½" x 8½" to 11” x 17”
LEF
A5 to A4, 5½" x 8½", 8½" x 11”
SEF
A3, B4, 11”x17”
LEF
A4, B5, 8½" x 11”
SEF
A5 to A3, 5½" x 8½" to 11” x 17”
LEF
A5 - A4, 5½" x8½", 8½" x 11”

Spec-15

Optional Peripherals

August, 2006

3.10 A3/11" X 17" TRAY B331
This option is installed in Tray 1 (tandem tray) of the copier so Tray 1 can feed
larger paper. Tray 1 normally feeds LT or A4 only.
Dimension (w x d x h)
Weight
Paper Size
Paper Capacity

495 x 215 x 535 mm (19.5 x 8.5 x 21.1 in.)
11 kg (24.2 lb.)
A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4
11”x17” SEF, 8½" x 14” SEF, 8½" x 11”
1,000 Sheets

3.11 COPY TRAY B756
The copy tray is installed receive copies when the copier is used without a finisher.
Dimension (w x d x h)
Weight
Paper Capacity

400 x 335 x 70 mm (15.8 x 13.2 x 2.8 in.)
640 g (1.4 lb.)
500 Sheets
A4, 8½” x 11”
250 Sheets
A3, 11”x 17”

Spec-16

August, 2006

Machine Configuration

4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
11
10

15
2

9

13

8

5
7

14

12

6

4

1
17

3
16
B132I116.WMF

This is a list of the peripheral devices that can be installed with the copier.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
-

Model
B132
B200
B756
B473
B699
B474
B706
B698
B531
B513
B704
B762
B701
B702
B700
B703
B331
B499
B328
B735
B761
B737
G815

Name
e-STUDIO4500c
e-STUDIO5500c
Copy Tray Type 2075
LCT RT43
LCT Adapter Type B
81/2" x 14"/B4 Paper Size Tray Type 1075
3000-Sheet Finisher SR842
Finisher Adapter Type B
Punch Unit Type 1075
Output Jogger Unit Type 1075
Cover Interposer Tray Type 3260
Mailbox CS391
3000-Sheet Finisher SR970
Punch Unit Type 3260
2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher SR4000
Output Jogger Unit Type 3260
A3 /11"x17" Paper Size Tray Type 2105
Tab Sheet Holder Type 3260
Copy Connector Type 3260
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type C
PostScript3 Unit Type 3260
Printer/Scanner Unit GM-2100
EFI Printer Controller E-7000

Spec-17

Comments
Main machine (Copier)
Attached to main machine
Large capacity tray
Required for LCT
LCT Option
No saddle-stitching (100-sheet stapling)
Replacement motor for B706
For B706 only
For B706 only.
For B700, B701, B706
For B700, B701 only
No saddle-stitching, Tray x1, 50-sheet stapling
For B700, B701
Saddle-stitching, Trays x2, 50-sheet stapling
For B700, B701
For Tandem Tray (Tray 1)

Machine Configuration

August, 2006

4.1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
4.1.1 COPIER
No.
Component
CIRCUIT BREAKER
CB1
Circuit Breaker
COUNTERS
TC1
Total Counter - FC
TC2
Total Counter - K
HEATERS
H1
Lower Tray Heater
H2

H3
H4

Anti-condensation
Heater – Scanner
(Not provided)
Anti-condensation
Heater – Transfer
Upper Tray Heater

HARD DISKS
HDD1
HDD 1

HDD2
HDD3
HDD4
LAMPS
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5

HDD 2
HDD 3
HDD 4
Exposure Lamp
Heating Roller Fusing
Lamp 1
Heating Roller Fusing
Lamp 2
Hot Roller Fusing
Lamp
Pressure Roller Fusing
Lamp

Function
Breaks the main power supply to the machine if there is an
overload or short circuit.
The mechanical counter for full color printing.
The mechanical counter for black-and-white printing.
Keeps paper dry. Provided with machine, connection is
optional.
Prevents the formation of condensation in the scanner unit.

This options removes moisture from the air around the paper
transfer unit.
Keeps paper dry. Provided with machine, connection is
optional.
The HDDs hold temporary files spooled for processing and
also store permanent files for the document server
application.
2nd HDD in a set of 4.
3rd HDD in a set of 4.
4th HDD in a set of 4.
Projects high intensity light on the original for exposure.
590W fusing lamp in the heating roller.
590W fusing lamp in the heating roller.
350W fusing lamp inside the hot roller.
350W fusing lamp inside the pressure roller.

Spec-18

August, 2006

No.
Component
MOTORS
M1
Scanner Motor
M2
Lower Relay Motor
M3

Paper Feed Motor - Tray 1

M4

Paper Feed Motor - Tray 3

M5

Paper Feed Motor - Tray 2

M6
M7

Waste Toner Distribution
Motor
Lift Motor - Tray 2

M8

Lift Motor - Tray 3

M9

Lift Motor - Tray 1

M10

Rear Fence Motor - Tray 1

M11
M12

ITB Lift Motor
Ozone Fan Motor

M13
M14

Fusing Fan Motor
Fusing Cooling Fan Motor

M15

Fusing Exhaust Fan Motor

M16
M17
M18

Fusing/Exit Motor
PTR Motor
Bypass Feed Motor

M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24

Duplex Jogger Motor
Duplex Unit Fan Motor
Duplex Transport Motor
Duplex Inverter Motor
Registration Motor
Image Transfer Fan Motor

M25

Pipe Cooling Fan Motor

M26

Paper Transport Fan Motor Rear
Paper Transport Fan Motor Front
Paper Exit Fan Motor

M27
M28

Machine Configuration

Function
Drives the scanner unit
Drives the lower relay roller of the relay unit at the
vertical transport section.
Drives the paper feed roller and grip roller of tray 1
(tandem tray).
Drives the paper feed roller and grip roller of tray 3
(bottom tray).
Drives the paper feed roller and grip roller of tray 2
(middle tray).
Drives the coil that spans the top of the waste toner
bottle.
Switches on and drives a shaft and coupling that
raises a lift arm against the bottom plate under the
paper stack in tray 2
Drives a shaft and coupling that raises a lift arm
against the bottom plate under the paper stack in tray
3.
Drives pulleys and cables that lift the bottom plate of
tray 1 (tandem tray) until the top of the paper stack
reaches the correct height for feeding.
Switches on when the right paper tray sensor of the
tandem paper tray unit detects paper out and the left
paper tray sensor detects paper present.
Rotates the cam that raises and lowers the ITB belt.
Draws air from around the drums and through the
ozone filter.
Cools the fusing unit.
Draws cool air into the fusing unit through a vent and
past a heat sink mounted above the fusing unit.
Draws the hot air away from the heat sink mounted
above the fusing unit and expels the hot air through a
vent
Drives the fusing unit and paper exit.
Drives the paper transfer roller (PTR).
Drives the upper relay roller that feeds each sheet to
the registration roller.
Moves the jogger fences in the duplex unit.
Cools the duplex unit.
Drives transport rollers 3, 4 in the duplex unit.
Feeds paper to the jogger section.
Rotates the registration roller.
Cools the upper area of the transfer unit where the
PCUs contact the ITB.
Pulls in air draws it over the fins attached to the front
end of the heat pipe roller.
1 of 2 vacuum fans that produce suction to kepp
paper on the transport belt.
1 of 2 vacuum fans that produce suction to kepp
paper on the transport belt.
Draws hot air from around the paper exit area and
expels it from the left side of the machine.

Spec-19

Machine Configuration
No.
M29
M30
M31

Component
Front Duplex Fan Motor
Rear Duplex Fan Motor
ID Sensor Dust Fan Motor

M32

Peltier Cooling Fan Motor

M33
M34

M42
M43
M44
M45
M46
M47

Peltier Circulation Fan Motor
Laser Unit Cooling Fan Motor Front
Laser Unit Cooing Fan Motor Rear
PCU Motor - M
PCU Motor - K
PCU Motor - Y
PCU Motor - C
Controller Box Exhaust Fan
Motor 2
Controller Box Exhaust Fan
Motor 1
Drum Motor - Y
Drum Motor - C
Drum Motor - M
Drum Motor - K
ITB Drive Motor
3rd Mirror Motor - M

M48
M49

Polygon Motor
3rd Mirror Motor - Y

M50

3rd Mirror Motor - C

M51

Toner Hopper Motor

M52
M53
M54
M55
M56

PCU Fan Motor - Y
PCU Fan Motor - C
PCU Fan Motor - M
PCU Fan Motor - K
Scanner Unit Fan Motor - Rear
Left
Scanner Unit Fan Motor - Rear
Center
Scanner Unit Fan Motor Front Left
Scanner Unit Fan Motor Right
Waste Toner Distribution
Motor

M35
M36
M37
M38
M39
M40
M41

M57
M58
M59
M60

August, 2006
Function
Draws hot air out of the duplex unit.
Draws hot air out of the duplex unit.
Blows air around the ID sensors to prevent dust from
collecting.
Draws dehumidified air out of the Peltier unit and
sends it through a duct to the four PCU cooling fans.
Draws that passes below the Peltier unit to cool it.
Draws cool air into the machine.
Expels hot air from the machine on the left side.
Drives all the rollers in the Magenta PCU.
Drives all the rollers in the Black PCU.
Drives all the rollers in the Yellow PCU.
Drives all the rollers in the Cyan PCU.
1 of 2 fans that cool the printed circuit boards at the
back of the machine.
1 of 2 fans that cool the printed circuit boards at the
back of the machine.
Drives the drum in the Yellow PCU.
Drives the drum in the Cyan PCU.
Drives the drum in the Magenta PCU.
Drives the drum in the Black PCU.
Rotates the image transfer roller that drives the ITB.
Fine adjusts the position of the 3rd mirror of the
optics for M (magenta) during MUSIC adjustment.
Rotates the polygon mirror in the laser optics unit
Fine adjusts the position of the 3rd mirror of the
optics for Y (Yellow) during MUSIC adjustment.
Fine adjusts the position of the 3rd mirror of the
optics for C (Cyan) during MUSIC adjustment.
Drives the toner pump clutch and toner supply clutch
of each PCU.
Cools the Yellow PCU.
Cools the Cyan PCU.
Cools the Magenta PCU
Cools the Black PCU.
Cools the left, rear corner of the SIOB.
Cools the rear, center area of the SIOB.
Cools the front, left area of the SIOB.
Exhausts warm air from the SIOB area.
Drives the waste toner bottle transport coil that
moves the toner from the central collection point into
the waste toner bottle.

Spec-20

August, 2006

No.
Component
MECHANICAL CLUTCHES
MC1
Bypass Feed Clutch
MC2

Toner Pump Clutch - M

MC3

Toner Supply Clutch - M

MC4

Toner Pump Clutch - K

MC5

Toner Supply Clutch - K

MC6

Toner Pump Clutch - Y

MC7

Toner Supply Clutch - Y

MC8

Toner Pump Clutch - C

MC9

Toner Supply Clutch - C

Machine Configuration

Function
Engages and operates the pick-up roller at the bypass
tray.
Engages the and drives the Magenta toner pump to pull
toner from the Magenta STC.
Engages the toner supply coils in the sub hopper of the
Magenta PCU to send toner to the development unit
below.
Engages the and drives the Black toner pump to pull
toner from the Black STC.
Engages the toner supply coils in the sub hopper of the
Black PCU to send toner to the development unit below.
Engages the drive shaft and rotor of the Yellow toner
pump to pull toner from the Yellow STC when more
toner is needed.
Engages the toner supply coils in the sub hopper of the
Yellow PCU to send toner to the development unit
below.
Engages the and drives the Cyan toner pump to pull
toner from the Cyan STC.
Engages the toner supply coils in the sub hopper of the
Cyan PCU to send toner to the development unit below.

Spec-21

Machine Configuration

No.
PCBs
PCB1
PCB2

PFC (Paper Feed Control)
AC Drive Board

PCB3

PSU (Power Supply Unit)

PCB4

DRB (Drive Board)

PCB5

IOB (Input/Output Board)

PCB6
PCB7

Power Pack: Development
Bias
Power Pack: Charge

PCB8

Power Pack: Transfer

PCB9
PCB10
PCB11
PCB12

Power Pack - Separation
DMB (Drum Motor Board)
TMB (Transfer Motor Board)
Potential Sensor Board

PCB13
PCB14
PCB15

PPB (Peltier Board)
CNB (Connector Board)
IDCB - C1

PCB16

IDCB - M1

PCB17

IDCB - K1

PCB18

IDCB - Y1

PCB19

SBU (Sensor Board Unit)

PCB20

SIOB (Scanner Interface
Board)
Lamp Regulator

PCB21

August, 2006

Component

Function
Controls paper feed.
Controls the power supply to the fusing lamps,
heaters, and PSU.
Supplies DC current to the machine and contains
the AC drive that controls the fusing lamp power
supply.
Contains the circuits for the stepping motors that
drive the printer engine, and distributes electrical
power to all other PCBs.
The I/O control board controls 1) Input and output
ports for all sensors, motors, solenoids of the
engine, 2) drivers, 3) high voltage power supply
for PWM, and 4) analog input signals.
Supplies the voltage for the bias applied to the
developer in the PCUs by the development rollers.
Supplies the voltage for the charge applied to the
OPC drums by the charge roller.
Supplies charge to 1) the four image transfer
rollers that pull the toner images from the four
from the four drums (Y, M, C, K), and 2) to the
paper transfer roller that pulls the image off the
ITB onto paper.
Supplies the dc/ac charges for paper separation.
Controls the motors that drive the OPC drums.
Controls the motor that drives the ITB.
Processes data from the Y, M, C, K, potential
sensors.
Controls the operation of the Peltier unit.
Sorts and routes signals to electrical components.
One of two ID control boards at the base of the
Cyan STC. The CPU reads the board to confirm
that the correct STC is inserted into the correct
bin.
One of two ID control boards at the base of the
Magenta STC. The CPU reads the board to
confirm that the correct STC is inserted into the
correct bin.
One of two ID control boards at the base of the
Black STC. The CPU reads the board to confirm
that the correct STC is inserted into the correct
bin.
One of two ID control boards at the base of the
Yellow STC. The CPU reads the board to confirm
that the correct STC is inserted into the correct
bin.
Contains the CCD. Converts CCD analog signals
to digital signals.
Controls all the sensors in the scanner unit and
controls the carriage drive stepping motors.
Converts the ac power input to a stable, high
frequency ac output to the exposure lamp.

Spec-22

August, 2006
No.
PCB22

PCB23

Machine Configuration
Component

BICU

PCB27

LD 1 (2/2)
LD 1 (1/2)
LD 2 (2/2)
LD 2 (1/2)
LD 3 (2/2)
LD 3 (1/2)
LD 4 (2/2)
LD 4 (1/2)
LSDB - K Front

PCB28

LSDB - M Front

PCB29

LSDB - C Front

PCB30

LSDB - Y Front

PCB31

LSDB - Y Rear

PCB32

LSDB - C Rear

PCB33

LSDB - M Rear

PCB34

LSDB - K Rear

PCB35

Controller Board

PCB36
PCB37
PCB38
PCB39

Mother Board
RAPI EXT Board
OPU (Operation Panel Unit)
PI Board

PCB24
PCB25
PCB26

Function
Performs: 1) Engine sequence control (all
sensors, motors, fusing temperature monitoring
circuits), 2) Scanning control, 3) Exposure control,
3) Image processing control, 4) GW controller I/F,
5) Peripheral timing control
Laser Diode 1, 2nd of a pair, 1 of 8.
Laser Diode 1, 1st of a pair, 1 of 8.
Laser Diode 2, 2nd of a pair, 1 of 8.
Laser Diode 2, 1st of a pair, 1 of 8.
Laser Diode 3, 2nd of a pair, 1 of 8.
Laser Diode 3, 1st of a pair, 1 of 8.
Laser Diode 4, 2nd of a pair, 1 of 8.
Laser Diode 4, 1st of a pair, 1 of 8.
Front Laser Synchronization Detector Board for
Laser Diode 4.
Front Laser Synchronization Detector Board for
Laser Diode 3.
Front Laser Synchronization Detector Board for
Laser Diode 2.
Front Laser Synchronization Detector Board for
Laser Diode 1.
Rear Laser Synchronization Detector Board for
Laser Diode 1.
Rear Laser Synchronization Detector Board for
Laser Diode 2.
Rear Laser Synchronization Detector Board for
Laser Diode 3.
Rear Laser Synchronization Detector Board for
Laser Diode 4.
Incorporates the GW architecture, and connects
to the BICU and PCI I/F. All the options for the
printer are controlled by this board.
Interfaces the controller and the BICU.
Interface the copy connector and EFI controller.
Controls the operation panel.
Interfaces the IPU and RDS.

Spec-23

Machine Configuration

No.
Component
QUENCHING LAMPS
QL1
Quenching Lamp - K
QL2

Quenching Lamp - C

QL3

Quenching Lamp - M

QL4

Quenching Lamp - Y

August, 2006

Function
Eliminates electrical charge and neutralizes the surface of
the drum in the Black PCU.
Eliminates electrical charge and neutralizes the surface of
the drum in the Cyan PCU.
Eliminates electrical charge and neutralizes the surface of
the drum in the Magenta PCU.
Eliminates electrical charge and neutralizes the surface of
the drum in the Yellow PCU.

No.
Component
SENSORS
S1
ID Sensor - Black

S2

ID Sensor - Color

S3

ITB Lift Sensor

S4

MUSIC Sensor - Center

S5

MUSIC Sensor - Front

S6

MUSIC Sensor - Rear

S7

Paper Feed Sensor - Tray 2

S8

Vertical Transport Sensor Tray 2

S9

Paper End Sensor - Tray 2

S10

Lift Sensor - Tray 2

S11

Paper Feed Sensor - Tray 3

Function
Reads 1) light reflected from the bare surface of the
ITB, and 2) reads light reflected from the black ID
sensor patterns on the ITB.
Reads 1) light reflected from the bare surface of the
ITB, and 2) reads light reflected from the color ID
sensor patterns on the ITB. This sensor has one
additional receptor to collect diffuse light reflected
from color toner to improve calculation of the toner
density.
This sensor switches the ITB lift motor off when the
ITB comes into contact the drums of the four PCUs.
Reads the center MUSIC pattern. This feedback is
used to control the MUSIC process to correct color
registration errors.
Reads the front MUSIC pattern. This feedback is
used to control the MUSIC process to correct color
registration errors.
Reads the Rear MUSIC pattern. This feedback is
used to control the MUSIC process to correct color
registration errors.
Detects the leading edge of each sheet of paper
from the pick–up roller of tray (middle tray) and
switches off the pick–up roller solenoid so the pick–
up roller lifts.
Detects the leading edge and trailing edge of each
sheet fed from tray 2 and signals a jam if the edges
do not pass at the prescribed time.
Receives light reflected from the paper until the last
sheet is fed from tray 2 (middle tray), then signals
paper end.
Detects when the pick
 up roller (pushed up by the
top of the paper stack in the right side of the
tandem tray) has reached the correct height for
paper feed and then switches off the tray 2 (middle
tray) lift motor.
Detects the leading edge of each sheet of paper
from the pick–up roller of tray 3 (bottom tray) and
switches off the pick–up roller solenoid so the pick–
up roller lifts.

Spec-24

August, 2006
No.
S12

Component
Vertical Transport Sensor Tray 3

S13

Paper End Sensor - Tray 3

S14

Lift Sensor - Tray 3

S15

Bottom
Temperature/Humidity
Sensor

S16

Waste Toner Bottle Set
Sensor
Waste Toner Bottle Near-Full
Sensor

S17

S18
S19

Waste Toner Bottle Full
Sensor
Paper Feed Sensor - Tray 1

S20

Vertical Transport Sensor Tray 1

S21
S22

Paper End Sensor - Tray 1
Lift Sensor - Tray 1

S23

Paper Near End Sensor Tray 2
Paper Near End Sensor Tray 3
Front Side Fence Open
Sensor
Front Side Fence Closed
Sensor
Rear Side Fence Open
Sensor
Rear Side Fence Closed
Sensor
Right Tray Down Sensor

S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29

Machine Configuration
Function
Detects the leading edge and trailing edge of each
sheet fed from tray 3 and signals a jam if the edges
do not pass at the prescribed time.
Receives light reflected from the paper until the last
sheet is fed from tray 3 (bottom tray), then signals
paper end.
Detects when the pick
 up roller (pushed up by the
top of the paper stack in the right side of the
tandem tray) has reached the correct height for
paper feed and then switches off the tray 3 (bottom
tray) lift motor.
Near the waste toner bottle. Detects ambient
temperature and humidity and then this output is
used to control the amount of current applied to the
paper transfer roller and ITB when the image is
transferred to paper. Also used to correct the fusing
temperature, and to extend the fusing unit idle time
at low room temperatures.
Detects the position of the waste toner bottle and
confirms whether it is set correctly.
When the level of the waste toner rises high enough
to move the actuator of this sensor out of its normal
position, the sensor signals the machine that the
waste toner bottle is nearly full.
Signals an alert when the waste toner bottle is full.
Detects the leading edge of each sheet of paper
from the pick–up roller of tray 1 (tandem tray) and
switches off the pick–up roller solenoid so the pick–
up roller lifts.
Detects the leading edge and trailing edge of each
sheet fed from tray 1, 2, and 3 and signals a jam if
the edges do not pass at the prescribed time.
Detects when the last sheet is fed from tray 1.
Detects when the pick
 up roller (pushed up by the
top of the paper stack in the right side of the
tandem tray) has reached the correct height for
paper feed and then switches off the tray 1 (tandem
tray) lift motor.
Detects the near end condition for tray 2 (middle
tray, a universal cassette).
Detects the near end condition for tray 3 (middle
tray, a universal cassette).
Detects the actuator on the front side fence after it
has reached the open position in the tandem tray.
Detects the actuator on the front side fence after it
has reached the closed position in the tandem tray.
Detects the actuator on the rear side fence after it
has reached the open position in the tandem tray.
Detects the actuator on the rear side fence after it
has reached the closed position in the tandem tray.
Detects the bottom plate of the right tray and
switches off the tray 1 lift motor and stops the
bottom plate.

Spec-25

Machine Configuration
No.
S30

Component
Paper Near End Sensor Tray 1

S31

Paper Height Sensor

S32

Paper Height Sensor

S33

Paper Height Sensor

S34

Right Tray Paper Sensor

S35

Rear Fence HP Sensor

S36

Rear Fence Return Sensor

S37

Left Tray Paper Sensor

S38

Heating Roller Temperature
Sensor

S39

Waste Toner Lock Sensor

S40

Duplex Transport Sensor 1

S41

Duplex Inverter Sensor

S42

Duplex Entrance Sensor

S43

Duplex Transport Sensor 3

S44

Duplex Transport Sensor 2

S45

Duplex Jogger HP Sensor

August, 2006
Function
Signals 10% paper remaining when the actuator on
the right rail of the right tray in the tandem tray
passes.
Signals 100% paper remaining until activated.
Signals 50% paper remaining when the actuator on
the left rail of the right tray in the tandem tray
passes.
Signals 30% paper remaining when the actuator on
the left rail of the right tray in the tandem tray
passes.
When near end sensor 1 on right rail of the right
tray of the tandem tray is actuated, and paper
height sensor 3 has detected the passing of the
actuator on the left rail, then the near end sensor
signals 10% paper remaining.
Detects paper in the right side of the tandem paper
tray.
Detects the actuator on the rear fence in the
tandem tray and switches off the rear fence motor.
Detects the actuator on the rear fence in the
tandem tray and reverses the rear fence motor.
Detects the presence of paper in the left tray of the
tandem tray.
Monitors the surface temperature of the heating
roller and breaks the circuits to the fusing lamps if
the heating roller overheats.
Signals an alert if the waste toner collection coil
locks and stops rotating.
The feeler of this sensor detects the leading edge
and trailing edge of each sheet as it passes from
the jogger unit above and into the horizontal feed
path of the duplex unit below. Signals a jam if the
paper does not arrive at or reach the sensor
location at the prescribed time.
1) Detects the leading edge of the paper at the
inverter exit roller, signals to switch off the duplex
transport clutch and retracts the reverse trigger
roller, and 2) Controls the operation of the duplex
transport clutch.
Detects paper jams at the entrance of the duplex
unit.
Detects the leading edge and trailing edge of each
sheet as it passes from the jogger unit above
through the horizontal feed path of the duplex unit
below. Signals a jam if the paper does not arrive at
or reach the sensor location at the prescribed time.
Detects the leading edge and trailing edge of each
sheets as it passes from the jogger unit above and
into the horizontal feed path of the duplex unit
below. Signals a jam if the paper does not arrive at
or reach the sensor location at the prescribed time.
At power on, detects the actuators on the jogger
fences of the duplex unit, switches off the duplex
jogger motor and stops the fences at their home
positions.

Spec-26

August, 2006
No.

Machine Configuration
Component

S46

Double-Feed Sensor

S47
S48
S49

Guide Plate Position Sensor
Relay Sensor
Registration Sensor

S50

Paper Exit Sensor

S51
S52

Bypass Paper Sensor
Bypass Paper End Sensor

S53

Bypass Paper Size Sensor

S54

Paper Exit Relay Sensor

S55

Copy Tray Full Sensor
(Option)

S56

TD Sensor - M

S57

TD Sensor - K

S58

Temperature/Humidity
Sensor - PCU K

S59

TD Sensor - Y

S60

TD Sensor - C

S61

ITB Position Sensor 2

S62

ITB Position Sensor 1

S63

Potential Sensor - K

S64

Potential Sensor - M

S65

Potential Sensor - C

Function
Receives the light emitted from the double
 feed
detection LED and reflected from the surface of
each sheet in the paper path. Signals an error if the
thickness of the paper is not the same as the
previous sheet.
Detects jams at the top of the vertical paper path.
Detects the leading edge of the paper and switches
off the registration motor and stops the registration
roller briefly but long enough to correct buckle the
paper.
Detects the leading and trailing edge of each sheet
at the paper exit slot to check timing and detect
jams.
Detects the presence of paper in the bypass tray.
Signals paper out when the last sheet feeds from
the bypass tray.
Reads the positions of the side fences (manually
adjusted) to detect the width of the paper in the
bypass tray. (Paper length is read with pulse counts
from the registration sensor.)
Detects paper jams at the paper exit if the paper
does not arrive or leave the machine at the
prescribed time.
Detects when the Copy Paper Tray B75 is full and
temporarily pauses printing so the operator can
remove the stack from the tray and continue.
Monitors the amount of toner in the developer/toner
mixture in the development unit of the Magenta
PCU.
Monitors the amount of toner in the developer/toner
mixture in the development unit of the Black PCU.
The temperature and humidity readings of this
sensor are referenced to a lookup table stored in
the ROM to 1) Correct the charge roller voltage 2)
Adjust the operation of the Peltier unit, and 3) Set
the length of time the agitators in the development
unit rotate to mix the toner and developer.
Monitors the amount of toner in the developer/toner
mixture in the development unit of the Yellow PCU.
Monitors the amount of toner in the developer/toner
mixture in the development unit of the Cyan PCU.
Reads the encoder film strip on the front edge of
the ITB and sends the sub scan scale signal to the
CPU.
Reads the encoder film strip on the front edge of
the ITB and sends the main scan scale signal to the
CPU.
Reads the potential sensor pattern from the surface
of the drum in the black PCU.
Reads the potential sensor pattern from the surface
of the drum in the magenta PCU.
Reads the potential sensor pattern from the surface

Spec-27

Machine Configuration
No.

Component

S66

Potential Sensor - Y

S67

Temperature Sensor Optics 1

S68

Temperature Sensor Optics 2

S69
S70
S71
S72
S73
S74

Toner End Sensor - M
Toner End Sensor - K
Toner End Sensor - Y
Toner End Sensor - C
Scanner HP Sensor
Original Width Sensors

S75

Original Length Sensors - 1

S76

Original Length Sensor -2

S77

Accordion Jam Sensor

S78

Fusing Exit Sensor

S79

LCT Relay Sensor

No.
LEDs
LED1

Double-Feed Detection LED

LED2

Accordion Jam Sensor (LED)

LED3

Fusing Exit Sensor (LED)

August, 2006
Function
of the drum in the cyan PCU.
Reads the potential sensor pattern from the surface
of the drum in the yellow PCU.
1 of 2 sensors (located near the left f-theta lens)
that monitors the temperature in the optics unit. The
results are used in the MUSIC process.
1 of 2 sensors (located near the right f-theta lens)
that monitors the temperature in the optics unit.
The results are used in the MUSIC process.
Detects toner end for magenta toner.
Detects toner end for black toner.
Detects toner end for yellow toner.
Detects toner end for cyan toner.
Detects the home position of the scanner.
APS1 (a board) holds two original width sensors
under the exposure glass. The detection
combinations of these sensors determine the width
of the original on the exposure glass positioned for
LEF.
APS2 (a board) holds two original length sensors
under the exposure glass. The detection
combinations of these sensors determine the
length of the original on the exposure glass
positioned for SEF.
APS3 (a board) holds one original length sensor
under the exposure glass. The detection
combination of this sensor and other sensors
determine the length of the original on the exposure
glass positioned for SEF.
Detects jams at the fusing exit by confirming that
paper arrives at the prescribed time.
Detects jams at the fusing exit by confirming that
paper leaves at the prescribed time.
Confirms whether the LCT is set correctly.

Component

Function
Emits light which is reflected from the paper to the
double
 feed sensor to test the translucence of
each sheet for double-feed detection.
Flashes to show the user which lever to release to
remove a paper jam from the fusing rollers.
Flashes to show the user which lever to release to
remove a paper jam from the fusing unit.

Spec-28

August, 2006

No.
Component
SOLENOIDS
SOL1
Pick
 up Solenoid
- Tray 2
Separation Roller
SOL2
Solenoid - Tray 2

SOL3
SOL4

SOL5
SOL6

Pick
 up Solenoid
- Tray 3
Separation Roller
Solenoid - Tray 3

Pick
 up Solenoid Tray 1
Separation Roller
Solenoid - Tray 1

SOL7

Front Side Fence
Solenoid -Tray 1

SOL8

Rear Side Fence
Solenoid - Tray 1

SOL9

Right Tray Lock
Solenoid - Tray 1
Left Tray Lock
Solenoid - Tray 1

SOL10

SOL11
SOL12

Duplex Junction
Gate Solenoid
Positioning Roller
Solenoid

SOL13

Guide Plate
Solenoid

SOL14

Inverter Junction
Gate Solenoid

Machine Configuration

Function
Switches on when the tray 2 (middle tray) lift motor switches
on. This solenoid lowers the pick–up roller of tray 3.
When tray 2 (middle tray) is selected as the paper source,
this solenoid energizes and brings the separation roller in
contact with the feed roller until the leading edge of the sheet
feeds to the paper feed sensor.
Switches on when the tray 3 (bottom tray) lift motor switches
on. This solenoid lowers the pick–up roller of tray 3.
When tray 3 (bottom tray) is selected as the paper source,
this solenoid energizes and brings the separation roller in
contact with the feed roller until the leading edge of the sheet
feeds to the paper feed sensor.
Switches on when the tray 1 (tandem tray) lift motor switches
on. This solenoid lowers the pick–up roller of tray 1.
When tray 1 (tandem tray) is selected as the paper source,
this solenoid energizes and brings the separation roller in
contact with the feed roller until the leading edge of the sheet
feeds to the paper feed sensor.
When the right tray paper sensor in the tandem tray signals
paper out, and the left tray paper sensor signals paper
present, this energizes this solenoid which pulls open the
front side fence until the front side fence open sensor detects
the actuator of the front side fence and switches off the
solenoid, leaving it locked in the open position, to allow the
rear fence to push the paper stack from the left tray into the
right tray.
When the right tray paper sensor in the tandem tray signals
paper out, and the left tray paper sensor signals paper
present, this energizes this solenoid which pulls open the
rear side fence until the rear side fence open sensor detects
the actuator of the rear side fence and switches off the
solenoid, leaving it locked in the open position, to allow rear
fence to push the paper stack from the left tray into the right
tray.
Releases the lock lever when the left tray paper sensor in the
tandem tray signals that there is no paper in the left tray .
When the rear fence motor in the tandem tray switches on,
this energizes the left tray lock solenoid. This locks the left
tray so it does not move while the rear fence pushes the
stack from the left tray to the right tray.
Controls the opening and closing of the duplex junction gate
at the mouth of the inverter unit.
After a sheet has been aligned by the fences of the duplex
unit, this solenoid energizes and pushes down the positioning
roller (a sponge roller).
Energizes when a jam occurs between the vertical transport
rollers and registration roller to force the guide plate open
and divert paper fed from below into the duplex tray.
Operates the inverter junction gate. The inverter injunction
gate turns paper into the path to the inverter unit below where
it is 1) inverted for face
 down output or 2) inverted for 2nd
side printing.

Spec-29

Machine Configuration
No.
SOL15

Component
Bypass Pick
 up
Solenoid

No.
Component
SWITCHES
Lower Front Door
SW1
Switch
SW2
Main Power Switch
Upper Front Door
SW3
Switches (x5)
Paper Size Switch
SW4
- Tray 2
Paper Size Switch
SW5
- Tray 3
No.
Component
THERMISTORS
Heating Roller
TH1
Thermistor
Hot Roller
TH2
Thermistor
Pressure Roller
TH3
Thermistor
THERMOSTATS
Pressure Roller
TS1
Thermostat 1
Pressure Roller
TS2
Thermostat 2
TS3
Thermostat 1
TS4

Thermostat 2

TS5

Thermostat 3

TS6

Thermostat 4

August, 2006
Function
Switches on and lowers the pick
 up roller to the top of the
stack in the bypass tray
Function
Detects whether the front door is open or closed.
Switches the machine off and on.
Detect whether the front door is open or closed.
The switch detects the position of the dial (set manually), and
signals the paper size with a simple 5
 digit binary code.
The switch detects the position of the dial (set manually), and
signals the paper size with a simple 5
 digit binary code.
Function
Monitors the end of the heating roller and breaks the circuit to
the heating lamps if a lamp overheats.
Detects and monitors the temperature of the hot roller for
fusing temperature control.
Detects the temperature of the hot roller for fusing
temperature control.
Monitors the temperature of the pressure roller and cuts the
circuit if the pressure roller fusing lamp overheats.
Monitors the temperature of the pressure roller and cuts the
circuit if the pressure roller fusing lamp overheats.
Monitors the temperature of the fusing belt nd cuts the circuit
if the fusing unit overheats.
Monitors the temperature of the fusing belt nd cuts the circuit
if the fusing unit overheats.
Monitors the temperature of the fusing belt nd cuts the circuit
if the fusing unit overheats.
Monitors the temperature of the fusing belt nd cuts the circuit
if the fusing unit overheats.

Spec-30

August, 2006

Machine Configuration

4.1.2 ARDF
No.
MOTORS
M01

Component

Function

Feed Motor

Drives the feed belt, and the separation, pick-up, and transport as
far as the 1st transport roller.
Controls the original scanning speed.
Feeds paper out of the ARDF and onto the original exit table.
Controls the rotation of the upper inverter roller that feeds the
original in and out of the upper inverter path.
Controls the rotation of the lower inverter roller that feeds the
original in and out of the lower inverter path.
Raises and lowers the pick-up roller.
Raises and lowers the bottom under the original stack.

M02
M03
M04

Transport Motor
Exit Motor
Upper Inverter
Motor

M05

Lower Inverter
Motor

M06
M07

Pick-up Motor
Bottom Plate Lift
Motor

PCB
PCB01
ARDF Main Board
SENSORS
S01
Original Width
Sensor 2
S02

Original Width
Sensor 3

S03

Original Width
Sensor 4

S04

Original Width
Sensor 5

S05

Original Width
Sensor 1

S06

Original Set
Sensor
Bottom Plate HP
Sensor
Feed Cover
Sensor
Bottom Plate
Position Sensor
Upper Inverter
Sensor

S07
S08
S09
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14

LG Detection
Sensor
A4 Detection
Sensor
B5 Detection
Sensor
Interval Sensor

Controls the ARDF and communicates with the main copier boards.
Detects paper wider than 191.5 mm (7.5 in.) measured from the
reference point.
Detects paper wider than 230 mm (9.1 in.) measured from the
reference point.
Detects paper wider than 263.5 mm (10.4 in.) measured from the
reference point.
Detects paper wider than 288 mm (11.3 in.) measured from the
reference point.
Detects paper wider than 138 mm (5.4 in.) measured from the
reference point.
Detects whether an original is on the table.
Detects whether the bottom plate is in the down position or not.
Detects whether the feed cover is open or not.
Detects when the original is at the correct position for feeding.
Detects leading and trailing edge of the paper as it enters and
leaves the upper path of the inverter.
Detects paper longer than 318 mm (12.5 in.) on the original table.
Detects paper longer than 291 mm (11.5 in.) on the original table.
Detects paper longer than 240 mm (9.5 in.) on the original table.
Adjusts the timing of the original transport speed to the original
scanning speed after the original feeds. During duplex scanning, or
if original is small (B6, A5, or HLT) the interval sensor detects the
leading edge of the original and delays the pre-scanning motor for
the prescribed number of pulses to buckle the original and correct
skew.

Spec-31

Machine Configuration

No.
S15

Component
Skew Correction Sensor

S16
S17

Separation Sensor
Exit Sensor

S18

Registration Sensor

S19
S20

Pick-up Roller HP Sensor
Lower inverter sensor

S21

ARDF Position Sensor

S22

APS Start Sensor

SOLENOIDS
SOL01
Upper Inverter Solenoid

SOL02

Lower Inverter Solenoid

August, 2006

Function
After pick-up and separation, the skew correction sensor
detects the leading edge of the original. This signal slows
the rotation of the entrance roller for a prescribed number of
pulses to buckle the original and correct skew.
Detects the separation of the original.
Detects the leading and trailing edges of paper feed out to
the original table and detects misfeeds. Also signals when
to stop the scanning belt.
Detects the leading edge and trailing edges of the original to
detects jams and stops the original at the ADF exposure
glass to correct buckle.
Detects whether the pick-up roller is up or not.
Detects the original in the path of the lower inverter before it
feeds to the inverter rollers for 2nd side scanning, or feeds
to the exit rollers for exit.
Detects whether the ARDF unit is up or down for scanning
on the main exposure glass (book mode).
Signals the CPU when the DF is opened and closed (for
platen mode) so that the original size sensors in the copier
can check the original size.
Opens and closes the upper junction gate at the entrance of
the upper inverter path. During simplex scanning, closes the
upper inverter path so the original exits straight to the exit
tray. During duplex scanning, opens to allow the original to
enter the upper inverter path and closes to direct it once
again into the feed path for 2nd side scanning.
Opens and closes the lower junction gate. During duplex
scanning opens after the 2nd side is scanned to direct the
original into the lower inverter path while the next sheet is
fed to the upper inverter path above, then closes to direct
the original out onto the original exit tray.

Spec-32

August, 2006

APPENDIX
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

e-STUDIO4500c/5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (1/4)
e-STUDIO4500c/5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (2/4)
e-STUDIO4500c/5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (3/4)
e-STUDIO4500c/5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (4/4)
e-STUDIO4500c/5500c ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (1/3)
e-STUDIO4500c/5500c ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (2/3)
e-STUDIO4500c/5500c ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (3/3)
ADF POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHER (B700/701) POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (1/2)
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHER (B700/701) POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (2/2)
OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703) POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM
MAILBOX (B762) POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM
COVER INTERPOSER (B704) POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM
LCT (B473) POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706) POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM
ADF ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHER (B700/B701) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT
LAYOUT (1/2)
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHER (B700/B701) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT
LAYOUT (2/2)
OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT(B703) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
MAILBOX (B762) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
COVER INTERPOSER (B704) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
LCT (B473) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

e-STUDIO4500c/5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (1/4)

e-STUDIO4500c/5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (2/4)

e-STUDIO4500c/5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (3/4)

e-STUDIO4500c/5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (4/4)

e-STUDIO4500c/5500c ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (1/3)
18

19

20

21

17
4

3

5

22
23

16

40

41

37

6

2

39

38

42

43
44

24
15
7

1

45

25
26
53

8
27
28

46

52

9
47

29

14

36

11

13*

12

51

30

10

35

34

B132V303A.WMF

31

32

33

50
49

B132V304.WMF

48

54

55

56

57

B132V305.WMF

58
59
60
76

61
62

79
77 78

80 81
82
95
93

91

96

97

98

99

94

100
101

83

102

92
84

103
63

75

104
64

74

114
73

65
85
72

71

70

86

90
69

68

89
67

66

B132V306A.WMF

88

87
B132V310A.WMF

105
106

113
112
111

110

109

108

107

B132V311A.WMF

e-STUDIO4500c/5500c ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (2/3)

126

127

128 129

130
131

115

116

156 157

132

117
150
149
148

152
151

134

160

153

161
162
163

135

147

164

183

146
136
125

159

154

133
118

158

155

165
166

182

145
137

124

144

181

167

180
168

119

179

143

120

123
122

142

B132V311.WMF

121

178

138
141

140

139

177 176 175 174

B132V309.WMF

198

173

172

171

170

169

B132V308.WMF

207

206

197

208

196

219

185 186 187 188 189

209

195

184

218
210
211
199

212

205
213

200

194
193

201

204

192

202

191
190

B132V307.WMF

203

217
216

B132V301.WMF

215
214

B132V302.WMF

e-STUDIO4500c/5500c ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (3/3)
Symbol Name
Board
PCB1
PCB2
PCB3
PCB4
PCB5
PCB6
PCB7
PCB8
PCB9
PCB10
PCB11
PCB12
PCB13
PCB14
PCB15
PCB16
PCB17
PCB18
PCB19
PCB20
PCB21
PCB22
PCB23
PCB24
PCB25
PCB26
PCB27
PCB28
PCB29
PCB30
PCB31
PCB32
PCB33
PCB34
PCB35
PCB36
PCB37
PCB38
PCB39
Solenoid
SOL1
SOL2
SOL3
SOL4
SOL5
SOL6
SOL7
SOL8
SOL9
SOL10
SOL11
SOL12
SOL13
SOL14
SOL15
Switch
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5

Index
No.

P to P

Page

PFC (Paper Feed Control)
AC Drive Board
PSU (Power Supply Unit)
DRB (Drive Board)
IOB (Input Output Board)(2/2)
IOB (Input Output Board)(1/2)
Power Pack: Development Bias
Power Pack: Charge
Power Pack: Transfer
Power Pack: Separation
DMB (Drum Motor Board)
TMB (Transfer Motor Board)
Potential Sensor Board
PPB (Peltier Board)
CNB (Connector Board)
IDCB - C1
IDCB - M1
IDCB - K1
IDCB - Y1
SBU (Sensor Board Unit)
SIOB (Scanner Interface Board)
Lamp Regulator
BICU
LD 1 - Y (1/2)
LD 1 - Y (2/2)
LD 2 - C (1/2)
LD 2 - C (2/2)
LD 3 - M (1/2)
LD 3 - M (2/2)
LD 4 - K (1/2)
LD 4 - K (2/2)
LSDB - K (Front )
LSDB - M (Front )
LSDB - C (Front )
LSDB - Y (Front )
LSDB - Y (Rear)
LSDB - C (Rear)
LSDB - M (Rear)
LSDB - K (Rear)
Controller Board
Mother Board
OPU (Operation Panel Unit)
RAPI EXT Board
PI Board

196
204
203
198
218

27
26
21
19
36
35
34
33
211
212
199
210
209

B6
D4
F3
B3
A4
C4
G2
H2
E4
D4
G5
G5
F2
A6
C4
D5
D5
D5
D4
F4
G5
G6
F3
D1
G4
D1
H4
E1
G4
E1
G4
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
G1
G1
D3
E4
E4
F2
D4

1/4
1/4
1/4
3/4
2/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4

Pick–up Solenoid - Tray 2
Separation Roller Solenoid - Tray 2
Pick–up Solenoid - Tray 3
Separation Roller Solenoid - Tray 3
Pick–up Solenoid - Tray 1
Separation Roller Solenoid - Tray 1
Front Side Fence Solenoid -Tray 1
Rear Side Fence Solenoid - Tray 1
Right Tray Lock Solenoid - Tray 1
Left Tray Lock Solenoid - Tray 1
Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid
Positioning Roller Solenoid
Guide Plate Solenoid
Inverter Junction Gate Solenoid
Bypass Pick–up Solenoid

84
85
84
85
84
85
112
99
103
100
157
184
168
189
79

A6
A6
A6
A5
A4
A4
D2
D2
D1
D1
A2
A2
C6
E5
C5

1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4

Lower Front Door Switch
Main Power Switch
Upper Front Door Switches (x2)
Upper Front Door Switches (x3)
Paper Size Switch - Tray 2
Paper Size Switch - Tray 3

122
200
201

C4
H3
H1
A6
A3
A3

1/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
1/4
1/4

131
195
49
172
197
202
130
208
60
70
68
65
73
9
10
5
219
23
22
24
25

101
106

Symbol Name
Motor
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
M39
M40
M41
M42
M43
M44
M45
M46
M47
M48
M49
M50
M51
M52
M53
M54
M55
M56
M57
M58
M59
M60
M61
Clutch
MC1
MC2
MC3
MC4
MC5
MC6
MC7
MC8
MC9

Index
No.

P to P

Page

Scanner Motor
Lower Relay Motor
Paper Feed Motor - Tray 1
Paper Feed Motor - Tray 3
Paper Feed Motor - Tray 2
Waste Toner Distribution Motor
Lift Motor - Tray 2
Lift Motor - Tray 3
Lift Motor - Tray 1
Rear Fence Motor - Tray 1
ITB Lift Motor
Ozone Fan Motor
Fusing Fan Motor
Fusing Cooling Fan Motor
Fusing Exhaust Fan Motor
Fusing/Exit Motor
PTR Motor
Bypass Feed Motor
Duplex Jogger Motor
Duplex Unit Fan Motor
Duplex Transport Motor
Duplex Inverter Motor
Registration Motor
Image Transfer Fan Motor
Pipe Cooling Fan Motor
Paper Transport Fan Motor - Rear
Paper Transport Fan Motor - Front
Paper Exit Fan Motor
Front Duplex Fan Motor
Rear Duplex Fan Motor
ID Sensor Dust Fan Motor
Peltier Cooling Fan Motor
Peltier Circulation Fan Motor
Laser Unit Fan Motor - Front
Laser Unit Fan Motor - Rear
PCU Motor - M
PCU Motor - K
PCU Motor - Y
PCU Motor - C
Controller Box Exhaust Fan Motor 2
Controller Box Exhaust Fan Motor 1
Drum Motor - Y
Drum Motor - C
Drum Motor - M
Drum Motor - K
ITB Drive Motor
3rd Mirror Motor - M
Polygon Mirror Motor
3rd Mirror Motor - Y
3rd Mirror Motor - C
Toner Hopper Motor
PCU Fan Motor - Y
PCU Fan Motor - C
PCU Fan Motor - M
PCU Fan Motor - K
Scanner Fan Motor - Rear Left
Scanner Fan Motor - Rear Center
Scanner Fan Motor - Front Left
Scanner Fan Motor - Right
Waste Toner Collection Bottle Motor
HDD Cooling Fan Motor

12
90
89
89
89
120
104
105
102
114
149
145
126
15
20
140
147
80
193
142
192
194
165
178
182
163
173
146
144
143
141
137
139
32
28
132
134
128
129
206
207
127
150
133
135
136
31
29
16
17
63
74
71
67
64
3
6
2
11
117
214

G6
A5
A5
A5
A4
A1
A3
A3
A3
D1
A5
A5
A5
A5
A5
A4
A4
A4
A2
A2
A2
A1
B6
D5
E5
E5
E5
H4
H4
H4
C1
C1
C1
C1
C1
E2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F6
G6
G6
H6
H6
A1
A1
A1
B1
B6
D4
D4
D4
D4
F6
F6
F6
F6
A1
F1

2/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
1/4
4/4

Bypass Feed Clutch
Toner Pump Clutch - M
Toner Supply Clutch - M
Toner Pump Clutch - K
Toner Supply Clutch - K
Toner Pump Clutch - Y
Toner Supply Clutch - Y
Toner Pump Clutch - C
Toner Supply Clutch - C

81
58
59
61
62
54
55
56
57

C5
D6
D6
D6
D6
D6
D6
D6
D6

3/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4

Symbol Name
Sensor
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S23
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
S31
S32
S33
S34
S35
S36
S37
S38
S39
S40
S41
S42
S43
S44
S45
S46
S47
S48
S49
S50
S51
S52
S53
S54
S55
S56
S57
S58
S59
S60

ID Sensor - Black
ID Sensor - Color
ITB Lift Sensor
MUSIC Sensor - Center
MUSIC Sensor - Front
MUSIC Sensor - Rear
Paper Feed Sensor - Tray 2
Vertical Transport Sensor - Tray 2
Paper End Sensor - Tray 2
Lift Sensor - Tray 2
Paper Feed Sensor - Tray 3
Vertical Transport Sensor - Tray 3
Paper End Sensor - Tray 3
Lift Sensor - Tray 3
Bottom Temperature/Humidity Sensor
Waste Toner Bottle Near-Full Sensor
Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor
Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor
Paper Feed Sensor - Tray 1
Vertical Transport Sensor - Tray 1
Paper End Sensor - Tray 1
Lift Sensor - Tray 1
Paper Near End Sensor - Tray 2 (Inside Lift Motor)
Paper Near End Sensor - Tray 3 (Inside Lift Motor)
Front Side Fence Open Sensor
Front Side Fence Closed Sensor
Rear Side Fence Open Sensor
Rear Side Fence Closed Sensor
Right Tray Down Sensor
Paper Near End Sensor - Tray 1
Paper Height Sensor 1
Paper Height Sensor 2
Paper Height Sensor 3
Right Tray Paper Sensor
Rear Fence HP Sensor
Rear Fence Return Sensor
Left Tray Paper Sensor
Heating Roller Temperature Sensor
Waste Toner Lock Sensor
Duplex Transport Sensor 1
Duplex Inverter Sensor
Duplex Entrance Sensor
Duplex Transport Sensor 3
Duplex Transport Sensor 2
Duplex Jogger HP Sensor
Double–Feed Detection Sensor
Guide Plate position Sensor
Relay Sensor
Registration Sensor
Paper Exit Sensor
Bypass Paper Feed Sensor
Bypass Paper End Sensor
Bypass Paper Size Sensor
Paper Exit Relay Sensor
Copy Tray Full Sensor (Option)
TD Sensor - M
TD Sensor - K
Temperature/Humidity Sensor - PCU K
TD Sensor - Y
TD Sensor - C

Index
No.

P to P

Page

48
48
51
48
48
48
88
87
86
83
88
87
86
83
121
118
116
119
88
87
86
83
104
105
113
93
98
97
109
95
111
108
110
107
94
96
92
174
148
188
186
187
190
191
185
167
166
170
171
154
78
77
82
91
42
45
46
38
40

F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A5
A5
A1
A1
A1
A1
A4
A4
A4
A4
A3
A3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D1
D1
D1
H6
A4
A3
A3
A3
A2
A2
A2
C6
C6
C6
C6
E5
C5
C5
D5
H4
H4
D1
D1
D1
D1
E1

3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4

Symbol Name
Sensor
S61
ITB Position Sensor 2
S62
ITB Position Sensor 1
S63
Potential Sensor - K
S64
Potential Sensor - M
S65
Potential Sensor - C
S66
Potential Sensor - Y
S67
Temperature Sensor - Optics 1
S68
Temperature Sensor - Optics 2
S69
Toner End Sensor - M
S70
Toner End Sensor - K
S71
Toner End Sensor - Y
S72
Toner End Sensor - C
S73
Scanner HP Sensor
S74
Original Width Sensor
S75
Original Length Sensor 1
S76
Original Length Sensor 2
S77
Accordion Jam Sensor
S78
Fusing Exit Sensor
S79
LCT Relay Sensor
Counter
TC1
Total Counter - FC
TC2
Total Counter - K
Circuit Breaker
CB1
Circuit Breaker
Heater
H1
Lower Tray Heater
H2
Anti-condensation Heater - Scanner (*Not Used)
H3
Anti-condensation Heater -Transfer
H4
Upper Tray Heater
HDD
HDD1 HDD 1
HDD2 HDD 2
HDD3 HDD 3
HDD4 HDD 4
Lamp
L1
Exposure Lamp
L2
Heating Roller Fusing Lamp 1
L3
Heating Roller Fusing Lamp 2
L4
Hot Roller Fusing Lamp
L5
Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp
Quenching Lamp
QL1
Quenching Lamp - K
QL2
Quenching Lamp - C
QL3
Quenching Lamp - M
QL4
Quenching Lamp - Y
Thermistor
TH1
Heating Roller Thermistor
TH2
Hot Roller Thermistor
TH3
Pressure Roller Thermistor
Thermostat
TS1
Pressure Roller Thermostat 1
TS2
Pressure Roller Thermostat 2
TS3
Thermostat 1
TS4
Thermostat 2
TS5
Thermostat 3
TS6
Thermostat 4
LED
LED1 Double–Feed Detection LED
LED2 Fusing Jam Indicator
LED3 Exit Jam Indicator
Peltier Element
PEL1
Peltier Element

Index
No.

P to P

Page

50
50
44
41
39
37
18
30
69
66
75
72
4
14
7
8
152
153
76

I6
I6
F1
F1
F1
G1
A1
A1
B6
B6
B6
B6
F6
G6
G6
G6
H4
H4
A4

3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/4
1/4
1/4
3/4

125
124

H4
H4

3/4
3/4

205

D5

1/4

123
13*
164
115

D6
E6
D6
E6

1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4

217
216
215
213

G1
G1
H1
H1

4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4

1
160
161
181
179

G6
H5
H5
H5
H4

2/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4

47
52
43
53

D1
D1
E1
E1

3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4

177
151
162

H6
H6
H4

1/4
1/4
1/4

176
175
155
156
158
159

H4
H4
H5
H5
H5
H5

1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4

169
180
183

B6
D5
D5

3/4
3/4
3/4

138

A6

2/4

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

MAILBOX (B762) POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM

Paper Overflow
Sensor 8

S21

Transport
Sensor 5

S20

Paper Detect
Sensor 8

S19

Paper Overflow
Sensor 7

S18

Paper Detect
Sensor 7

4

4
5
6

CN220-3
-2
-1

B

[24]
[ 24]

[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

PCB 1
Main Board

CN116 -1
-2

2
1

[24]
24]

CN107 -1
-2

[

[24]
24]

-3
-4

[

[24]
24]

-5
-6

2
1

2
1

GND2 [0]
[ 5]
[5]

-4
-5
-6

3
2
1

CN215-3
-2
-1

4
5
6

6
5
4

-10
-11
-12

[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

GND2 [0]
[ 5]
[5]

-7
-8
-9

CN214-3
-2
-1

7
8
9

3
2
1

-13
-14
-15

[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

GND2 [0]
[ 5]
[5]

CN213-3
-2
-1

1
2
3

6
5
4

CN111-1
-2
-3

[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

CN212-3
-2
-1

4
5
6

3
2
1

-4
-5
-6

[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

CN211-3
-2
-1

1
2
3

9
8
7

CN110 -1
-2
-3

[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

CN210-3
-2
-1

4
5
6

6
5
4

-4
-5
-6

[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

CN209-3
-2
-1

7
8
9

3
2
1

-7
-8
-9

[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

C

D

Signal Direction
Active High
Active Low
[ ]

E

SOL9

Turn Gate
Solenoid 3

Turn Gate
Solenoid 1

CN207 -3
-2
-1

9
8
7

1
2
3

CN206 -3
-2
-1

S7

Paper Detect
Sensor 3

-10
-11
-12

6
5
4

4
5
6

CN205 -3
-2
-1

S6

Paper Overflow
Sensor 2

GND2 [0]
[ 5]
[5]

-13
-14
-15

3
2
1

7
8
9

CN204 -3
-2
-1

S5

Transport
Sensor 2

GND2 [0]
[ 5]
[5]

CN108 -1
-2
-3

6
5
4

1
2
3

CN203 -3
-2
-1

S4

Paper Detect
Sensor 2

GND2 [0]
[ 5]
[5]

-4
-5
-6

3
2
1

4
5
6

CN202 -3
-2
-1

S3

Paper Overflow
Sensor 1

GND2 [0]
[ 5]
[5]

-7
-8
-9

6
5
4

1
2
3

CN201 -3
-2
-1

S2

Transport
Sensor 1

GND2 [0]
[ 5]
[5]

-10
-11
-12

3
2
1

4
5
6

CN200 -3
-2
-1

S1

Paper Detect
Sensor 1

H

I

4

Junction Gate
Solenoid

4
5
6

G

3

Turn Gate
Solenoid 2

CN208 -3
-2
-1

Voltage

F

Turn Gate
Solenoid 4

SOL1
1
2

2

Turn Gate
Solenoid 5

1
2
3

DC Line
Pulse Signal

SOL2

1
2

[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

SYMBOL TABLE

1
2

Turn Gate
Solenoid 7

Turn Gate
Solenoid 6

SOL3

[
[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]
[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

SOL4

-7
-8
-9

S14

A

CN115 -1
-2

9
8
7

Paper Detect
Sensor 6

7

[24]
24]

1
2
3

S15

S10

[

Turn Gate
Solenoid 8

SOL5

6
5
4

Transport
Sensor 4

Transport
Sensor 3

CN106 -1
-2

CN109 -1
-2
-3

S16

S11

[24]
24]

GND2 [0]
[ 5]
[5]

Paper Overflow
Sensor 6

Paper Overflow
Sensor 4

[

SOL6

[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

CN216-3
-2
-1

S12

CN105 -1
-2

-4
-5
-6

S17

Paper Detect
Sensor 5

[24]
24]

3
2
1

4
5
6

S13

[

Main Motor

SOL7

[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

CN217-3
-2
-1

Paper Overflow
Sensor 5

CN104 -1
-2

CN112 -1
-2
-3

1
2
3

6

-7
-8
-9

[24]
24]

6
5
4

CN218-3
-2
-1

5

-4
-5
-6

6
5
4
3
2
1

7
8
9

CN219-3
-2
-1

CN113 -1
-2
-3

9
8
7

1
2
3

[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

[

SOL8

CN242

CN221-3
-2
-1

[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

[24]
24]

CN227

S22

-4
-5
-6

CN232

Paper Detect
Sensor 9

CN222-3
-2
-1

CN231

S23

CN114 -1
-2
-3

CN230

Paper Overflow
Sensor 9

CN223 -3
-2
-1

CN229

3

S24

CN228

Door Safety

[0] GND2
[0] GND2
[5]
[5]
RXD
ZESM (GND2)
TXD
[5] VE (N.C.)

CN103 -1
-2

[

CN226

2

CN100 -1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8

CN301-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1

M1

CN225

CN300

1

CN102 -1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7

CN244

[24]
[24]
N.C. (GND1 [0])
A [24 0/24]
A [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]
B [24 0/24]

N.C.
[24]
[24]
[24]
[24]
[0] GND1
[0] GND1
[0] GND1
[0] GND1

CN224

CN101 -1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9

CN302-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1

CN243

1

S9

Paper Detect
Sensor 4

S8

Paper Overflow
Sensor 3

5

6

7

J

B

A

1

E

D

C

F

G

I

H

J

COVER INTERPOSER (B 704) POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM

1

SYMB OL TAB L E
DC Line

[ ]

Voltage
CN100-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8

CN200-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1

[24]
[24]
GND1 [0]
0/24]
A [24
0/24]
A [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
B [24

N.C.
[0] GND2
[5]
[N.C.]
RXD
ZESM
TXD
[5] VE

3
A [24
A [24
B [24
B [24

J CN200

Near End
Sensor

S3

Feed Sensor

S4

Bottom Plate
H.P. Sensor

S5

6
Pull-out Sensor

Guide Plate
Set Sensor
Exit Sensor

S6

S7

S8

CN105-1
-2
-3

CN206-3
-2
-1

-4
-5
-6

CN207-3
-2
-1

1
2
3

CN208-3
-2
-1

1
2
3

CN209-3
-2
-1

4
5
6

CN210-3
-2
-1

1
2
3

CN211-3
-2
-1

4
5
6

CN212-3
-2
-1

1
2
3

CN306

5

S2

CN205-3
-2
-1

CN301

Bottom Plate
Position Sensor

S1

CN302

Cover Set
Sensor

CN303

4

CN201-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1

CN101-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9

N.C.
[24]
[24]
[24]
[24]
[0] GND1
[0] GND1
[0] GND1
[0] GND1

[24]
[24]
GND1 [0]
A [24
0/24]
0/24]
A [24
0/24]
B [24
B [24
0/24]

[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]
[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

3
2
1

-7
-8
-9

6
5
4

CN106-1
-2
-3

[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

3
2
1

-4
-5
-6

[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

6
5
4

-7
-8
-9

[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

3
2
1

-10
-11
-12

[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

3
2
1

-13
-14
-15

[24]
0/24]
0/24]
0/24]
0/24]
[24]

[ 5]
[0] GND2
[5]

[0] GND2
[ 5]
[5]

CN202

1
5
7
11

Feed Motor

M1

2

3
9

-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14

CN203

Active Low

2

3
9

CN103-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6

6
5
4
3
2
1

CN204

Active High

CN102-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7

1
5
7
11

Transport
Motor

M2

3

1
2
3
4
5
6

CN104-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7

GND2 [0]
[ 5]
[5]

CN107-1
-2
-3

13
12
11

1
2
3

CN213-3
-2
-1

GND2 [0]
[ 5]
[5]
N.C.
GND2 [0]
[ 5]
[5]

-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10

10
9
8
7
6
5
4

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

CN214-3
-2
-1

GND2 [0]
[ 5]
[5]

-11
-12
-13

3
2
1

[5]
[ 5]
GND2 [0]
EXGND [0]

CN108-1
-2
-3
-4

[5]
[ 5]
GND2 [0]
EXGND [0]
[5]
[ 5]
GND2 [0]
EXGND [0]

M3

Bottom Plate
Motor

M4

Relay Motor

S9

Paper Set
Sensor

S10

Paper W idth
Sensor 1

CN215-3
-2
-1

S11

Paper W idth
Sensor 2

11
12
13

CN216-3
-2
-1

S12

Paper W idth
Sensor 3

12
11
10
9

1
2
3
4

CN217-4
-3
-2
-1

S13

Paper Length
Sensor 1

-5
-6
-7
-8

8
7
6
5

5
6
7
8

CN218-4
-3
-2
-1

S14

Paper Length
Sensor 2

-9
-10
-11
-12

4
3
2
1

9
10
11
12

CN219-4
-3
-2
-1

S15

Paper Length
Sensor 3

CN304

PCB 1
Mai n B o ar d

Signal Direction

[24]
[24]
GND1 [0]
A [24
0/24]
0/24]
A [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
B [24

CN305

Pulse Signal

4

5

6

7

7

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

A

C

B

D

F

E

H

G

L CT (B 473) POINT TO POINT DIA GRAM
1

1

( ) [ 24]
(+) [24]
AGND [0]
Cover Open [ 5]
CGND [0]
VAAR [+24]
VAAS [+24]
Cover Open [ 24]
VCC [5]
[ 5]
CGND [0]

Paper Height
Sensor 1
Paper Height
Sensor 2

5

Paper Height
Sensor 3

S6

CN105-12
-11
-10

VCC [5]
[ 5]
CGND [0]

[5]V
[ 5]
[0] CGND

A

CN120

SW 1

Tray Cover
Switch

SW 4

Feed Unit
Cover Switch

3
2
1

-3
-2
-1

3
2
1

CN103-11
-10
-9

CN132-1
-2
-3

8
-7
-6

1
2
3

-5
-4
-3

1
2
3

-2
-1

CN131-1
-2

3
2
1

CN128-1
-2
-3

3
2
1

CN130-1
-2
-3

S8

CN137-1
-2
-3

-6
-5
-4

[5] VCC
[ 5]
[0] CGND

[ 24]
VAA [24]

S9

CN138-1
-2
-3

-3
-2
-1

[5] VCC
[ 5]
[0] CGND

VCC [5]
[ 5]
CGND [0]

CN104-10
-9
-8

CN129-1
-2
-3

CGND [0]
[ 5]
VCC [5]

-7
-6
-5

CGND [0]
Down SW [ 5]
VCC [5]
Indicator [ 5]

-4
-3
-2
-1

Voltage

B

2
1

S4

Paper Position
Sensor

S1

Paper Feed
Sensor

S3

SOL
1

C

D

2

3

4

Lift Sensor

Pick-up
Solenoid

S2

Paper End
Sensor

CN133-1
-2
-3

S5

Down Sensor

CN134-1
-2
-3
-4

SW 5

Down Switch

5

6

PCB 1
L CT In t er f ac e B r o ad

Active Low
[ ]

CN124-1
-2
-3

S7

Active High

6

-5
-4

VCC [5]
[ 5]
CGND [0]

Signal Direction

Lift Motor

Lift Switch

[5] VCC
[ 5]
[0] CGND

Pulse Signal

M2

SW 3

-9
-8
-7

DC Line

Paper Feed

CN122-1
-2
-3

CN136-1
-2
-3

SYMB OL TAB L E

M1

CN102-8
-7
-6

CN142

4

Near End
Sensor

CN135-1
-2
-3

CN106-1
-2

CN125

[24] N.C.
[24] VAA
[24] VAA
[24] VAA
[24] VAA
[0] AGND
[0] AGND
[0] AGND
[0] AGND

24]
24]

CN127

CN111-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9

Lift Motor ( ) [
Lift Switch (+) [

1
2
3
4
5
6

CN141

COPIER

N.C.
-16
-15
-14
-13
-12
-11
-10
-9

[0] CGND
[0] CGND
[5] VCC
[5] VCC
RXD
N.C.
TXD
N.C.

6
5
4
3
2
1

CN140

3

CN110-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8

CN101-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1

CN126

2

CN5-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1

VAAS [24]
0/24]
A [24
24/0]
A [24
VAAS [24]
0/24]
B [24
B [24
24/0]

E

F

G

H

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

4
5
6

6
5
4

-7
-8
-9

Shift Paper Height
Sensor
Stapling Paper
Height Sensor

S7

CN206-3
-2
-1

7
8
9

3
2
1

-10
-11
-12

[

24]

[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V

+24V SW [24]

[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V

+24V SW [24]

[

[

24]

COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24
0/24]
A [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]

S9

CN107-1
-2
-3

[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V

Shift Tray Lower
Limit 2 Sensor

S10

CN209-3
-2
-1

-4
-5
-6

[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V

+24V SW [24]

Shift Tray Lower
Limit 3 Sensor

S11

CN210-3
-2
-1

-7
-8
-9

[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V

COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24
0/24]
A [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
N.C.
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24
0/24]
A [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]

S12

CN211-3
-2
-1

1
2
3

10
9
8

CN108-1
-2
-3

Stacking Roller H.P.

S13

CN212-3
-2
-1

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10

CN312

3
2
1

CN109-1
-2
-3

CN313

3
2
1

-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10

Shift Tray Half-Turn
Sensor

S14

CN213-3
-2
-1

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Pre-Stack Tray
Paper Sensor

S15

CN214-3
-2
-1

1
2
3

S16

CN215-3
-2
-1

1
2
3

S17

CN216-3
-2
-1

Stack Feed-Out Belt
HP Sensor

S18

CN217-3
-2
-1

1
2
3

Stapler Tray Paper
Sensor

S19

CN218-3
-2
-1

4
5
6

Jogger HP Sensor

S20
S21

Stack Plate-Center
HP Sensor

6
5
4

CN110-1
-2
-3

3
2
1

CN219-3
-2
-1

-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10

CN220-3
-2
-1

CN111-1
-2
-3

CN314

Stapler Tray
Entrance Sensor

CN311

Shift Tray Paper
Height Sensor

Stack Plate-Front HP
Sensor

S22

CN221-3
-2
-1

-4
-5
-6

Stack Plate-Rear HP
Sensor

S23

CN222-3
-2
-1

-7
-8
-9

S24

CN223-3
-2
-1

CN112-1
-2
-3

Stapler Rotation HP
Sensor

S25

CN224-3
-2
-1

Stapler Return
Sensor

S26

CN225-3
-2
-1

-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10

S27

CN226-3
-2
-1

Shift Tray Exit
Motor

1
2
3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

M1

1

Shift Tray Lift
Motor

M2

2
1

Exit Guide Motor

A

M3

2

B

CN315

Stapler HP Sensor

3
2
1

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

-11
-12
-13

CN115-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9

2

2

-10
-11
-12

1

-13

1

C

[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V
[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V
N.C.
[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V
[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V
[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V
N.C.
[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V
[ 5]
[0] GND
[5] +5V
[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V
N.C.
[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V
[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V
[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V
[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V
[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V
[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V
N.C.
[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V

[

COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24
0/24]
A [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
N.C.
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24
0/24]
A [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24
0/24]
A [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
N.C.
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24
0/24]
A [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24
0/24]
A [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24
0/24]
A [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
N.C.

[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V

[24] COM
[24] COM
N.C.
[24
0/24] A
[24
0/24] A
[24
0/24] B
[24
0/24] B
N.C.
[ 24] +24V
[ 24] +24V
N.C.
[24] +24V SW
[

5]

SW1

T2
2

-2

1

-3

2

-4

1

1

1

2

2

-2
CN120-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
CN133-1

CN121-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15

15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

CN122-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

CN122-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

CN124-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

CN125-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

T5

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

T6

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Upper Tray Junction
Gate Solenoid

SOL
2

Stapler Junction
Gate Solenoid

SOL
3

Pre-Stack Junction
Gate Solenoid

M6

Positioning Roll er
Motor

-10

1

2

[

24]

+[

24]

CN127-1

CN318-1

–[

24]

-2

-2

CN128-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7

CN319-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1

1
2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Front Door
Safety Switch

GND [0]
S-RDY [ 5]
Cartridge Sensor [ 5]
Staple End [ 5]
GND [0]
Hammer HP [ 5]
+5V [5]

SOL
5

Stapler Return
Solenoid

M16

Stapler Hammer

Pre-Stack Paper
Stopper Solenoid

+24V SW [24]
GND [0]
+5V [5]
GND [0]
Clock [0/5]
Drection [0]
ON [ 5]
Type1
Type2
HP Scanner [ 5]
Installed [ 5]
Hopper Sensor [ 5]

GND [0]
[ 5]
+5V [5]

Stacking Rolloer
Motor

M8

M9

GND [0]
[ 5]
[ 5]
GND [0]

M10

Stack Feed-Out Belt
Motor

M11

Stack Plate-Center
Motor

Stapler Motor

Stack Plate-Front
Motor

M14

Stack Plate-Rear
Motor

SW2

+24V SW [24]
+24V SW [24]
GND [0]
GND [0]
Speed [0/5]
N.C.
N.C.
Clock [0/5]
Direction [5]
ON [ 5]
GND [0]
5V [5]

+24V SW [24]
GND [0]
+5V [5]
GND [0]
Stapler Jogger Motor Clock [0/5]
Jogger Motor Direction [ 5]
Jogger Motor ON [ 5]
Lift Motor Clock [0/5]
Lift Motor Dirction [ 5]
Lift Motor ON [ 5]
Jogger Motor HP [ 5]
Lift Motor HP [ 5]
[ 5]

M13

CN129-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12

T6

CN600-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1

Punch

Stapler

+5V [5]
[ 5]
GND [0]

CN620-1
-2
-3

CN245-3
-2
-1

S28

Punch Waste
Hopper Sensor

GND [0]
[ 5]
+5V [5]

-4
-5
-6

CN246-3
-2
-1

S29

Punch HP
Sensor 1

M17

Punch Motor

CN620-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7

COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24
0/24]
A [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]

CN130-1
2
-3

CN246-3
-2
-1

3

Punch HP
Sensor 2

S30

Punch Unit

Jogger Motor

M12

2

T5

Stacking Roller Drug
Motor

M7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Shift Tray Upper
Limit Switch

SOL
1

SOL
4

-2

24]

Shift Motor

Stapler Rotation
Motor

T1

CN119-1

24]

CN208-3
-2
-1

Staple Waste
Hopper Sensor

7

+24V SW [24]

CN118-1

2

M15

T3

CN104-1

T4

-2

CN113-1
-2
-3
-4

4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4

CN620-4
-3
-2
-1

CN114-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12

CN131-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13

SW3
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

CN700-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1

Emergency Stop Switch

4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Upper Transport
Motor

M18

Jogger
GND [0]
[ 5]
+5V [5]

CN720-1
-2
-3

CN249-3
-2
-1

S31

Shift Jogger HP
Sensor

-4
-5
-6

CN250-3
-2
-1

S32

Shift Jogger Lift
HP Sensor

GND [0]
[ 5]
+5V [5]
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24
0/24]
A [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
N.C.
COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24
0/24]
A [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]

CN710-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

CN251

S6

CN205-3
-2
-1

[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V

1
2
3

M5

1

1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

CN252

-4
-5
-6

3
2
1

1

CN243

9
8
7

-3
-4
-5

2

2

CN244

1
2
3

+24V [24]
N.C.
[ 24]

1

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

CN248

S5

CN204-3
-2
-1

[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V

1

Lower Transport
Motor

CN126-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9

CN320

CN106-1
-2
-3

2

-2

M4

COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24
0/24]
A [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
N.C.
+24V SW [24]

CN322

3
2
1

CN117-1

CN230

1
2
3

24]

CN231

CN203-3
-2
-1

[

CN232

S4

+24V SW [24]

CN235

Shift Tray Exit
Sensor

[5] +5V
[ 5]
[0] GND

CN236

-7
-8
-9

CN227

6

3
2
1

CN237

1
2
3

CN238

CN202-3
-2
-1

CN239

S3

[ 5]
[0] GND
[5] +5V

CN240

Upper Tray Limit
Sensor

Positioning Roll er
HP Sensor

5

-4
-5
-6

CN315

4

3
2
1

CN241

1
2
3

CN242

CN201-3
-2
-1

CN116-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
CN316

S2

COM [24]
COM [24]
N.C.
A [24
0/24]
A [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]
B [24
0/24]

CN317

Upper Tray Exit
Sensor

[0] GND
[ 5]
[5] +5V

CN318

1
2
3

Shift Lower LimitLarge Paper Sensor

3

CN306

CN200-3
-2
-1

CN315

2

CN105-1
-2
-3

CN307

S1

Exit Guide Open
Sensor

3
2
1

CN308

Entrance Sensor

CN310

1

CN309

3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706) POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

M19

Shift Jogger
Motor

M20

Shift Jogger Lift
Motor

5

6

Jogger Unit
Main Board

GND [0]
+5V [5]
+5V [5]
TXD [0/5]
N.C.
RXD [0/5]
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
+24V [24]
+24V [24]
+24V [24]
GND [0]
GND [0]
GND [0]
GND [0]
N.C.

D

CN103-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8

CN304-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1

CN102-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9

CN305-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1

E

[0] GND
[5] +5V
[5] +5V
[0/5] TXD
N.C.
[0/5] RXD
N.C.

CN303

SYMBOL TABLE
DC Line
Pulse Signal
Signal Direction

N.C.
[24] +24V
[24] +24V
[24] +24V
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND

Active High

7

Active Low
[ ]

F

G

H

Voltage

I

J

ADF ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
2
3

1

Symbol

6

Boards

7

PCB1

8

B132D107.W MF

11

20

19
17

21

22
23

18

24
25

14

8

E4

M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7

Feed Motor
Transport Motor
Upper Inverter Motor
Exit Motor
Lower Inverter Motor
Pick-up Motor
Bottom Plate Lift Motor

4
6
7
3
12
1
5

H6
H6
H5
H5
H4
H4
H3

Original W idth Sensor 1
Original W idth Sensor 2
Original W idth Sensor 3
Original W idth Sensor 4
Original W idth Sensor 5 (for B6 SEF)
Pick-up Roller HP Sensor
Original Set Sensor
Bottom Plate HP Sensor
Feed Cover Open Sensor
Bottom Plate Position Sensor
Upper Inverter Sensor
Lower Inverter Sensor
Original Length Sensor 1 (LG)
Original Length Sensor 2 (A4)
Original Length Sensor 3 (B5)
ARDF Position Sensor
APS Start Sensor
Interval Sensor
Skew Correction Sensor
Separation Sensor
Exit Sensor
Registration Sensor

17
16
15
14
18
2
28
32
23
24
22
29
25
26
27
9
10
19
20
21
30
31

B6
B6
B6
B6
B5
B5
B5
B5
B4
B4
B4
B4
B3
B3
B3
B2
B2
B2
B2
B1
B1
B1

Upper Junction Gate Solenoid
Lower Junction Gate Solenoid

11
13

H3
H2

Sensors

10
12

Main Board

Motors

9

15

Index P to P
No.

5

13

16

Name

4

26
27

32

S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22

Solenoids

31

SOL1
SOL2

28
30

B132D106.W MF

29

2000/3000 SHEET FINISHER (B700/B701) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (1/2)
2
1

20

3

19

4

21

34

5

35

36

6

18

37

17

7

48

16

22

15

38

33

14

8

39

9

23

10

13

32
24

11

12

40
41

31
30

47
29
28

26

27

B700D201.W MF

42

46

25

44
45

B700D202.W MF

B700D204.W MF

49
50
60
59

61

62
63
64
65

51

58

52

66

68

57
53
56

67
55
54

B700D205.W MF

43

B700D203A.W MF

2000/3000 SHEET FINISHER (B700/B701) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (2/2)
Symbol Name
Boards (PCB)
PCB1 Main Board
PCB2 Booklet Stapler Board
PCB3 Punch Unit Board
Motors
M1
Entrance Motor
M2
Upper Transport Motor
Lower Transport Motor
M3
Upper/Proof Tray Exit Motor
M4
Feed Out Belt Motor
M5
M6
Corner Stapler Movement Motor
M7
Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor
Clamp Roller Retraction Motor
M8
Punch Movement Motor
M9
Stacking Sponge Roller Motor
M10
M11
Fold Plate Motor
M12
Fold Roller Motor
Corner Stapler Rotation Motor
M13
M14
Positioning Roller Motor
Jogger Fence Motor
M15
M16
Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor
M17
Stack Junction Gate Motor
M18
Shift Roller Motor
M19
Exit Guide Plate Motor
M20
Corner Stapler EH530
M21
Upper Tray Lift Motor
M22
Booklet Stapler EH185R: Front
M23
Booklet Stapler EH185R: Rear
M24
Punch Drive Motor

Index
No.

P to P

Page

29
32
62

E1
E4
C1

1/2
2/2
1/2

21
3
20
1
37
42
63
57
68
12
51
50
45
26
40
53
48
16
17
44
19
39
38
60

I6
I5
I6
I4
I3
I2
B2
H3
B2
I1
H2
H1
I2
I5
I3
H2
H3
15
I4
I2
I2
B3
B2
B1

1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
2/2
1/2
1/2
2/2
2/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
2/2
2/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2

Symbol Name
Sensors
S1
Finisher Entrance Sensor
S2
Pre-stack Tray Exit Sensor
S3
Paper Position Sensor
S4
Punch Hopper Full Sensor
Shift Roller HP Sensor
S5
Upper Tray Exit Sensor
S6
Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor
S7
S8
Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor (Staple Mode)
Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor (Non-Staple Mode)
S9
S10
Proof Tray Exit Sensor
S11
Proof Tray Full Sensor
Upper Tray Limit Sensor
S12
Stacking Roller HP Sensor
S13
S14
Stapling Tray Paper Sensor
Jogger Fence HP Sensor
S15
S16
Stack Feed-Out Belt HP Sensor
S17
Corner Stapler HP Sensor
S18
Stapler Rotation HP Sensor
S19
Upper Tray Full Sensor (B700/B701)
S20
Upper Tray Full Sensor (B701 only)
S21
Punch Movement HP Sensor
S22
Paper Position Side HP Sensor
S23
Punch HP Sensor
S24
Punch Encoder Sensor
S25
Clamp Roller HP Sensor
S26
Fold Unit Entrance Sensor
S27
Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor
S28
Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor
S29
Fold Plate HP Sensor
S30
Fold Cam HP Sensor
S31
Fold Unit Exit Sensor
S32
Stack Present Sensor
S33
Lower Tray Full Sensor - Rear
S34
Lower Tray Full Sensor - Front
Solenoids
SOL1
Proof Junction Gate Solenoid
SOL2
Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
SOL3
Positioning Roller Solenoid
SOL4
Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid
Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid
SOL5
Switches
SW 1
Front Door Safety Switch
SW 2
Upper Tray Limit SW

Index
No.

P to P

Page

7
23
65
66
15
13
4
14
8
5
6
9
11
43
41
36
46
47
31
30
67
64
61
59
49
56
35
55
52
54
58
34
28
27

E5
E5
E5
E4
B6
B6
B6
B6
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B4
B4
B4
B4
B4
B3
B3
B2
B2
B1
B1
B6
B6
B5
B5
B5
B5
B4
B4
B1
B1

1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
2/2
2/2
2/2
2/2
2/2
2/2
2/2
2/2
2/2
2/2

18
2
25
24
33

I4
I4
I4
I4
H5

1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
2/2

22
10

E5
I1

1/2
1/2

OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1
2

Symbol Name
Board

3

PCB1

4
7

Index P to P
No.

Main Board

2

C3

M1

Front Jog ger Motor

4

F3

M2

Rear Jogger Motor

3

F3

M3

Jogger Lift Motor

1

F4

Motors

12
5

Sensors

6

B703D102.W MF

S1

Front Jog ger HP Sensor

5

F1

S2

Rear Jogger HP Sensor

7

F1

S3

Jogger Lift HP Sensor

6

F2

MAILBOX (B762) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
Symbol

1

2

3

4

5

6
7

35

8

9
10
11

34

12
33

13

32

14
15
16

31

17
18

30

19
20

29

21

28

Index No.

Description

Motors
M1

1

Main

Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S23
S24

26
24
25
23
20
22
21
19
18
16
17
15
14
13
11
12
10
8
7
6
5
4
3
4

Paper Detect 1
Transport 1
Paper Overflow 1
Paper Detect 2
Transport 2
Paper Overflow 2
Paper Detect 3
Paper Overflow 3
Paper Detect 4
Transport 3
Paper Overflow 4
Paper Detect 5
Paper Overflow 5
Paper Detect 6
Transport 4
Paper Overflow 6
Paper Detect 7
Paper Overflow 7
Paper Detect 8
Transport 5
Paper Overflow 8
Paper Detect 9
Paper Overflow 9
Door Safety

Solenoids
SOL1
SOL2
SOL3
SOL4
SOL5
SOL6
SOL7
SOL8
SOL9

28
29
30
31
32
33
34
2
27

Turn Gate 1
Turn Gate 2
Turn Gate 3
Turn Gate 4
Turn Gate 5
Turn Gate 6
Turn Gate 7
Turn Gate 8
Junction Gate

PCBs
PCB1

35

Main

P to P

H1

I7
I7
I6
I6
I6
I5-I6
I5
I5
I5
B7
B7
B6
B6
B6
B5-B6
B5
B5
B5
B4
B4
B4
B3
B3
B3

22

27
23

26
25

B471V001.WMF

24

I4
I4
I3
I3
I3
I2
I2
I2
I4

E1-E7

COVER INTERPOSER (B704) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

4
3
2

5

6

Symbol
M o to r
M1
M2
M3
M4

7
8
9

1

10

Description

Index No.

P to P
I2
I2-I3
I3
I4

9
10
7
15

Fe e d
Transport
Bottom Plate
Relay

Sensor
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15

8
20
11
18
12
17
13
16
19
3
2
1
6
5
4

Cover Set
Bottom Plate Position
Near End
Feed
Bottom Plate HP
Pull-out
Guide Plate Set
Exit
Paper Set
Paper Width 1
Paper Width 2
Paper Width 3
Paper Length 1
Paper Length 2
Paper Length 3

B5
B5
B5
B6
B6
B6
B6-B7
B7
I5
I5
I5
I6
I6
I6
I7

PCB
PCB1

14

Main

E2-E7

11
12
13
20
19
18

14
17
15

16

B470V002.W MF

LCT (B473) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

3

4
5

2

6
7

1

8

9
17
10

16

15

14
11
13

12
B473V002.W MF

Symbol
Motors
M1
M2

Description

Index No.

P to P

2
12

Paper Feed
Lift

Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9

1
6
3
17
13
7
8
9
10

Paper Feed
Paper End
L ift
Paper Position
Down
Near End
Paper Height 1
Paper Height 2
Paper Height 3

G4
G5
G4
G3-G4
G5
B4
B4
B5
B5

Switches
SW 1
SW 3
SW 4
SW 5

15
14
5
16

Tray Cover
Lift
Feed Unit Cover
Down

G3
G2
G3
G6

Solenoids
SOL1

4

Pick-up

G5

PCBs
PCB1

11

LCT Interface

G1
G2

D1-D6

3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706) ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
14
12

11

33

13

15

1

S9

32
31
2

30
29

3

16
17
18
19
20

4
28

10

5

27

6

22 21
23

26
25

24

7

9
8

53

54

41
42

40

52
51

34

43
39
38

44

37
36
35

Symbol
Sensor
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7

50
45
46
47
49

48

S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S23
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
S31
S32
Motor
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
Solenoid

Index No.
11
41
42
44
53
54
51
38
36
35
45
47
39
10
9
8
30
32
33
19
20
16
28
26
27
7
-

50
40
52
4
37
5
48
49
15
14
18
31
21
17
29
24
1
-

Description

P to P

Entrance Sensor
Upper Tray Exit Sensor
Upper Tray Limit Sensor
Shift Tray Exit Sensor
Exit Guide Open Sensor
Shift Paper Height Sensor
Stapling Paper Height Sensor
Shift Lower Limit - Large Paper
Sensor
Shift Lower Limit 2 Sensor
Shift Lower Limit 3 Sensor
Shift Tray Paper Height Sensor
Stacking Roller HP
Shift Tray Half-Turn Sensor
Pre-Stack Tray Paper Sensor
Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor
Positioning Roller HP Sensor
Stack Feed-Out Belt HP Sensor
Stapler Tray Paper Sensor
Jogger HP Sensor
Stack Plate-Center HP Sensor
Stack Plate-Front HP Sensor
Stack Plate-Rear HP Sensor
Stapler HP Sensor
Stapler Rotation HP Sensor
Stapler Return Sensor
Staple Waste Hopper Sensor
Punch Waste Hopper Sensor
Punch HP Sensor 1
Punch HP Sensor 2
Shift Jogger HP Sensor
Shift Jogger Lift HP Sensor

A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2

A3
A3
A3
A3
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A5
A5
A5
A5
A5
A6
A6
A6
A6
I3
I3
I3
J5
J5

Shift Tray Exit Motor
Shift Tray Lift Motor
Exit Guide Motor
Lower Transport Motor
Shift Motor
Positioning Roller Motor
Stacking Roller Drug Motor
Stacking Roller Motor
Jogger Motor
Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor
Stack Plate-Center Motor
Stapler Motor
Stack Plate-Front Motor
Stack Plate-Rear Motor
Stapler Rotation Motor
Stapler Hammer Motor
Punch Motor
Upper Transport Motor
Shift Jogger Motor
Shift Jogger Lift Motor

A7
A7
A7
F1
F1
F3
F3
F3
F4
F4
F5
F5
F5
F6
I1
I2
I3
I4
J6
J6

SOL4

6

SOL5
Switch
SW1
SW2
SW3
PCB
PCB

22

Upper Tray Junction Gate
Solenoid
Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid
Pre-Stack Junction Gate
Solenoid
Pre-Stack Paper Stopper
Solenoid
Stapler Return Solenoid

46
34
43

Shift Tray Upper Limit Switch
Front Door Safety Switch
Emergency Stop Switch

SOL1

13

SOL2

12

SOL3

2

3

Main Board

A3

F2
F2
F2
F3
I2
F2
E6
I4
-



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Count                      : 1120
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:d73ed974-8dbc-4b5b-96b4-914e61302069
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 6.0.1 (Windows)
Creator Tool                    : GSPS W2K 9.50
Modify Date                     : 2007:04:25 10:15:55+09:00
Create Date                     : 2006:08:28 20:19:35+09:00
Metadata Date                   : 2007:04:25 10:15:55+09:00
Document ID                     : uuid:f4ffcdf6-f6de-43e8-91c4-41dc4a10bc95
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 
Creator                         : GSPS W2K 9.50

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools